d-Copia4000MF-5000MF-6000MF - Service Manual

0XOWLIXFWLRQ'LJLWDO&RSLHU
d-Copia 4000MF,
5000MF, 6000MF
SERVICE MANUAL
Code: Y118230-9
PUBLICATION ISSUED BY:
Olivetti S.p.A.
Gruppo Telecom Italia
Via Jervis, 77 - 10015 Ivrea (TO)
Copyright © 2016 Olivetti

All rights reserved
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BAT-

TERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste
officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE

INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires
municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual
For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed.
Product name Print speed

d-Copia 6000MF 60 ppm
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
CONTENTS
1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
(1) Common function ................................................................................................................ 1-1
(2) Copy Functions.................................................................................................................... 1-3
(3) Printer Functions ................................................................................................................. 1-4
(4) Scanner Functions............................................................................................................... 1-5
(5) Option .................................................................................................................................. 1-6
(5-1) Document Processor.................................................................................................. 1-6
(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2) .................................................................................... 1-6
(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,750-sheet × 2) .................................................................. 1-7
(5-4) Side Feeder (3,500-sheet) ......................................................................................... 1-7
(5-5) Inner finisher............................................................................................................... 1-7
(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher) .................................................................................. 1-8
(5-7) 1,000-Sheet Finisher .................................................................................................. 1-8
(5-8) 4,000-Sheet Finisher .................................................................................................. 1-9
(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher) .................................................. 1-9
(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher).......................................................................... 1-10
(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher) ................................................................... 1-10
(5-12) Job Separator Tray................................................................................................... 1-11
(5-13) Banner Tray.............................................................................................................. 1-11
(5-14) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-12
1-2 Part Names............................................................................................................................. 1-14
(1) Machine ............................................................................................................................. 1-14
(1-1) Exterior appearance ................................................................................................. 1-14
(1-2) Connectors/ Interior.................................................................................................. 1-16
(1-3) With Optional Equipments Attached......................................................................... 1-17
(1-4) FAX System ............................................................................................................. 1-18
(1-5) Operation Panel Keys .............................................................................................. 1-19
1-3 Optional Equipment ................................................................................................................ 1-20
(1) Option ................................................................................................................................ 1-22
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reversing Scan)
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover" ............................................................. 1-22
(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox" ................................................................................................ 1-22
(1-3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-22
(1-4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher" .............................................................................. 1-22
(1-5) BF-730 "Folding Unit"............................................................................................... 1-22
(1-6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)" .................................................................. 1-22
(1-7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)" ................................................. 1-22
(1-8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)" ...................................................................... 1-22
(1-9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"............................................................................... 1-22
(1-10) DP-7100 "Inner finisher"........................................................................................... 1-22
(1-11) PH-71120 "Punch Unit"............................................................................................. 1-23
(1-12) PH-7C, "Punch Unit" ................................................................................................. 1-23
(1-13) JS-7100 "Job Separator".......................................................................................... 1-23
(1-14) NK-7100 "Option numerical keyboard" .................................................................... 1-23
(1-15) DT-730 (B) "Document Table".................................................................................. 1-23
(1-16) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder" ................................................................... 1-23
(1-17) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"......................................................................................... 1-23
(1-18) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit".................................................................................... 1-23
(1-19) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" ..................................................................... 1-23
(1-20) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit" ..................................................................... 1-23
(1-21) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit" ............................................... 1-24
(1-22) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit" ...................................................................... 1-24
(1-23) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit" ................................................................... 1-24
(1-24) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option" ......................................................................................... 1-24
(1-25) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit" ............................................................................... 1-24
(1-26) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit" .................................................... 1-24
1-4 Module map ............................................................................................................................ 1-25
2 Installation
2 - 1 Environment ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2 - 2 Installing the main unit .............................................................................................................. 2-2
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items .............................................................................. 2-3
(1-1) Main unit..................................................................................................................... 2-3
(2) Unpacking and checking bundled items (option units) ........................................................ 2-4
(2-1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100) ............................................................................................ 2-4
(2-2) Paper Feeder (PF-7110) ............................................................................................ 2-5
(2-3) Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120) .................................................................................... 2-6
(2-4) Document Processor (DP-7100) ................................................................................ 2-7
(2-5) Document Processor (DP-7110) ................................................................................ 2-8
(2-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) ............................................................................................ 2-9
(2-7) 1,000-sheets Finisher (DF-7120) ............................................................................. 2-10
(2-8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ............................................................................... 2-11
(2-9) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ................................................................................................ 2-12
(2-10) Folding Unit (BF-730) ............................................................................................... 2-13
(2-11) Punch Unit (PH-7B).................................................................................................. 2-14
(2-12) Punch Unit (PH-7110) .............................................................................................. 2-15
(3) Notes on main unit transportation...................................................................................... 2-16
(4) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame.................................................................... 2-17
(5) Release of lift plate stopper ............................................................................................... 2-18
(6) Attaching the sub tray........................................................................................................ 2-19
(7) Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only) .............................................. 2-19
(8) Optional unit installation .................................................................................................... 2-20
(9) Connecting the Interface Cable ......................................................................................... 2-21
(10) Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)............................................................. 2-23
(11) Loading Paper ................................................................................................................... 2-25
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper................................................................................... 2-25
(11-2) Set paper in the cassette.......................................................................................... 2-26
(11-3) Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes................................................... 2-30
(11-4) Set paper in the large capacity feeder...................................................................... 2-33
(11-5) Set paper in the large capacity feeder...................................................................... 2-35
(12) Connecting the Power Cord .............................................................................................. 2-37
(13) Setting up the Toner Container ......................................................................................... 2-38
(14) Default Setting ................................................................................................................... 2-41
(14-1) Setting Date and Time.............................................................................................. 2-41
(14-2) Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection).................................................................. 2-42
(14-3) Paper size and media type setting ........................................................................... 2-42
(15) Installing Software ............................................................................................................. 2-43
(16) Setup setting at high altitude place.................................................................................... 2-43
(17) Image adjustment .............................................................................................................. 2-43
(17-1) Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464) ............................... 2-43
(17-2) Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410) ............................. 2-44
(17-3) Output Maintenance report (Maintenance mode U000) ........................................... 2-44
(17-4) Clearing the counts (Maintenance mode U927)....................................................... 2-44
(17-5) Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278) ............................................... 2-44
(18) Exiting from the maintenance mode .................................................................................. 2-45
(19) Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off) .......................................... 2-45
(20) Turn the power on again.................................................................................................... 2-46
2 - 3 Installing the optional equipment ............................................................................................ 2-47
(1) SD/SDHC memory card .................................................................................................... 2-47
(2) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50)................................................................................ 2-48
(3) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51) .......................................................................................... 2-48
(4) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35) .......................................................................................... 2-49
(5) Document table (DT-730(B)) ............................................................................................. 2-53
(6) Numeric Keypad (NK-7100 / NK-7110) ............................................................................. 2-57
(7) ID card reader.................................................................................................................... 2-60
(8) USB keyboard ................................................................................................................... 2-65
(9) Cassette heater .................................................................................................................. 2-76
(9-1) In the case of main unit cassette .............................................................................. 2-76
(9-2) In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100)............................................................................ 2-78
(9-3) In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7110)............................................................................ 2-80
(9-4) In case of Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120) ................................................................... 2-82
(10) Banner Tray...................................................................................................................... 2-86
2-4 About Optional Applications .................................................................................................... 2-87
2 - 5 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system ............................................................ 2-89
3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration ......................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Cross-section view .............................................................................................................. 3-1
3-2 Extension device construction (option) ..................................................................................... 3-2
(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100) ........................................................................ 3-2
(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100) .......................................................... 3-4
(5) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110) .......................................................... 3-4
(6) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-7100) ...................................................................... 3-5
(7) Inner finisher cross-section view (DF-7100) ........................................................................ 3-5
(8) 4000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110) ............................................................. 3-6
(9) 1000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120) ............................................................ 3-7
(10) Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B)) ............................................................................. 3-8
(11) Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730) ............................................................................ 3-9
(12) Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100) ..................................................................... 3-10
3-3 Paper conveying and Paper detection.................................................................................... 3-11
(1) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7100+DF-7100+PH-7110 ........................................................... 3-11
(2) Main unit+DP-7110+PF-7110+PF-7120+AK-7100+DF-7110+MT-730(B)+
DF-7110+BF-730+PH-7 .................................................................................................... 3-12
(3) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7110+AK-7100+DF-7120+PH-7 ................................................. 3-13
3-4 Electric parts ........................................................................................................................... 3-14
(1) Wire connection................................................................................................................. 3-14
(1-1) (Machine rear side) .................................................................................................. 3-14
(1-2) Backside of the shield box........................................................................................ 3-15
(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs.................................................................................. 3-16
(2-1) Main PWB ................................................................................................................ 3-16
(2-2) Engine PWB ............................................................................................................. 3-16
(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB............................................................................................ 3-17
(2-4) Transfer high-voltage PWB ...................................................................................... 3-17
(2-5) Power source PWB .................................................................................................. 3-18
(2-6) IH PWB..................................................................................................................... 3-18
(2-7) Operation panel main PWB...................................................................................... 3-18
(3) Electric parts layout ........................................................................................................... 3-19
(3-1) PWBs ....................................................................................................................... 3-19
(3-2) Sensors and Switches.............................................................................................. 3-22
(3-3) Motors ...................................................................................................................... 3-27
(3-4) Others....................................................................................................................... 3-30
3-5 Electric parts (Optional unit) ................................................................................................... 3-33
(1) Electric parts layout ........................................................................................................... 3-33
(1-1) Document processor (DP-7100)............................................................................... 3-33
(1-2) Document processor (DP-7110)............................................................................... 3-34
(1-3) Paper feeder (PF-7100) ........................................................................................... 3-36
(1-4) Paper feeder (PF-7110) ........................................................................................... 3-38
(1-5) Paper feeder (PF-7120) ........................................................................................... 3-40
(1-6) Inner finisher (DF-7100) ........................................................................................... 3-41
(1-7) Attachment kit (AK-7100) ......................................................................................... 3-42
(1-8) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ................................................................................ 3-43
(1-9) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120) ................................................................................ 3-45
(1-10) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) ................................................................................................ 3-47
(1-11) Punch unit (PH-7)..................................................................................................... 3-48
(1-12) Folding unit (BF-730)................................................................................................ 3-49
(1-13) Job separator (JS-7100)........................................................................................... 3-50
3-6 Drive system ........................................................................................................................... 3-51
(1) Consisting of unit drive ...................................................................................................... 3-51
(2) Drive location..................................................................................................................... 3-56
(3) Drive unit ........................................................................................................................... 3-57
(3-1) Feed drive unit.......................................................................................................... 3-57
(3-2) Main drive unit .......................................................................................................... 3-57
(3-3) Toner supply drive unit ............................................................................................. 3-58
(3-4) Fuser drive unit......................................................................................................... 3-58
3-7 Mechanical construction ......................................................................................................... 3-59
(1) Paper feed and conveying section .................................................................................... 3-59
(1-1) Cassette paper feed section..................................................................................... 3-59
(1-2) MP tray paper feed section ...................................................................................... 3-62
(1-3) Paper conveying section .......................................................................................... 3-64
(2) Optical section ................................................................................................................... 3-66
(2-1) Image scanner section ............................................................................................. 3-66
(2-2) Laser scanner unit.................................................................................................... 3-69
(3) Developer section.............................................................................................................. 3-71
(3-1) Developer unit .......................................................................................................... 3-71
(4) Drum section ..................................................................................................................... 3-73
(4-1) Charger roller unit..................................................................................................... 3-73
(4-2) Cleaning ................................................................................................................... 3-73
(5) Transfer and separation section ........................................................................................ 3-75
(5-1) Primary transfer unit ................................................................................................. 3-75
(5-2) Secondary transfer roller unit ................................................................................... 3-77
(6) Fuser section ..................................................................................................................... 3-79
(6-1) Fuser unit ................................................................................................................. 3-79
(7) Eject and feedshift section................................................................................................. 3-81
(7-1) Eject unit................................................................................................................... 3-81
(7-2) Eject paper jam ........................................................................................................ 3-83
(8) Duplex conveying section.................................................................................................. 3-84
(8-1) Duplex conveying unit .............................................................................................. 3-84
3-8 Mechanical construction (option) ............................................................................................ 3-86
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)..................................................................................................... 3-86
(2) Paper feeder (PF-7110)..................................................................................................... 3-89
(2-1) Paper deck section................................................................................................... 3-89
(3) Paper feeder (PF-7120)..................................................................................................... 3-91
(4) Document processor (DP-7100)........................................................................................ 3-93
(4-1) Original paper feed section ...................................................................................... 3-93
(4-2) Original conveying section and Original switchback and eject section .................... 3-94
(4-3) Reversing duplex scanning ...................................................................................... 3-96
(5-1) Original paper feed section ...................................................................................... 3-97
(5-2) Original conveying section and eject section ........................................................... 3-98
(6) Inner finisher (DF-7100) .................................................................................................. 3-100
(6-1) Paper conveying section ........................................................................................ 3-100
(6-2) Bundle eject operation............................................................................................ 3-102
(7) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ....................................................................................... 3-104
(7-1) paper entry and feedshift and DF tray left eject section ......................................... 3-104
(7-2) Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section........................................ 3-106
(7-3) Finishing section..................................................................................................... 3-107
(7-4) Relief drum operation ............................................................................................. 3-109
(8) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120) ....................................................................................... 3-113
(8-1) Finishing section..................................................................................................... 3-113
(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))........................................................................................................ 3-117
(9-1) Ejecting to the mailbox tray .................................................................................... 3-119
(10) Punch unit (PH-7) ............................................................................................................ 3-120
(11) Folding unit (BF-730)....................................................................................................... 3-122
(11-1) Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding) .............................................. 3-124
(11-2) Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit.................................................. 3-127
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions.......................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ....................................................................................... 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container ............................................................................................. 4-1
4-2 Maintenance parts .................................................................................................................... 4-3
(1) Maintenance kits.................................................................................................................. 4-3
(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit ............................... 4-4
4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................ 4-6
(1) Cassette paper feed section................................................................................................ 4-6
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller ........................... 4-6
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley............................................................... 4-9
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner........................................................... 4-10
(2) MP paper feed section....................................................................................................... 4-13
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the MP paper feed roller................................................ 4-13
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the MP separation pulley............................................... 4-15
(3) Transfer section................................................................................................................. 4-16
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit ................................................ 4-16
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller unit................................... 4-19
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller.......................................... 4-20
(4) Drum section ..................................................................................................................... 4-21
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the drum unit ................................................................. 4-21
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit............................................. 4-25
(5) Developer section.............................................................................................................. 4-27
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the developer unit.......................................................... 4-27
(6) Fuser section ..................................................................................................................... 4-31
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit.................................................................. 4-31
(6-2) Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment) ................... 4-33
(7) Others................................................................................................................................ 4-35
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the filter.......................................................................... 4-35
4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option) ............................................................. 4-36
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)..................................................................................................... 4-36
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller ......................... 4-36
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley............................................................. 4-39
(2) Paper feeder (PF-7110)..................................................................................................... 4-40
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley............................................................. 4-43
(3) Sidefeeder (PF-7120) ........................................................................................................ 4-44
(4) Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley...................................................................... 4-46
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller ............. 4-47
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP separation pulley ............................................... 4-48
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller ............. 4-49
(6-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP separation pulley ............................................... 4-51
4-5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit................................................... 4-52
4-6 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures............................................................................. 4-53
(1) OUTER COVERS.............................................................................................................. 4-53
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the front cover ............................................................... 4-53
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance..................................... 4-55
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the inner cover............................................................... 4-56
(1-4) Rear top cover.......................................................................................................... 4-57
(1-5) Detaching and reattaching the rear bottom cover .................................................... 4-58
(1-6) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover .......................................................... 4-59
(1-7) Detaching and reattaching the LSU rear cover ........................................................ 4-59
(1-8) Detaching and reattaching the left top cover/ the rear left cover.............................. 4-60
(1-9) Detaching and reattaching the right top cover.......................................................... 4-62
(1-10) Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover, rear right bottom cover ............ 4-62
(1-11) Detaching and reattaching the right cover assembly ............................................... 4-63
(2) Optical section ................................................................................................................... 4-70
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the LSU ......................................................................... 4-70
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the lens unit ................................................................... 4-82
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit.................................................................. 4-86
(2-4) Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires .......................................................... 4-91
(3) Drive section...................................................................................................................... 4-99
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit.......................................................... 4-99
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit ....................................................... 4-102
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the container motor ..................................................... 4-106
(3-4) Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit ........................................... 4-112
(3-5) Detaching and reattaching the fuser drive unit....................................................... 4-123
(4) Others.............................................................................................................................. 4-130
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the SSD ....................................................................... 4-130
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the hard disk................................................................ 4-132
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the lift motor................................................................. 4-135
(4-4) Detaching and reattaching the fuser discharger unit.............................................. 4-138
(4-5) Detaching and reattaching the eject unit ................................................................ 4-140
(4-6) Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit .............................................. 4-141
(4-7) Fan motor attachment direction.............................................................................. 4-155
(5) PWBs............................................................................................................................... 4-156
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB .......................................................... 4-156
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the main PWB ............................................................. 4-159
(5-3) Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB ......................................... 4-164
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB..................................... 4-167
(5-5) Detaching and reattaching the lower voltage power PWB ..................................... 4-174
(5-6) Detaching and reattaching the IH PWB.................................................................. 4-180
(5-7) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB ............................................ 4-186
4-7 Disassembly & Reassembly (option) .................................................................................... 4-191
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)................................................................................................... 4-191
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit .......................................................... 4-191
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor ........................................................... 4-192
(1-3) Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB........................................................ 4-194
(2) Paper feeder (PF-7110)................................................................................................... 4-195
(3) Sidefeeder (PF-7120) ...................................................................................................... 4-202
(4) Document processor (DP-7100)...................................................................................... 4-207
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor.............................................. 4-207
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover ........................................................ 4-211
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the DP main PWB ....................................................... 4-212
(5) Document processor (DP-7110)...................................................................................... 4-215
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the document processor.............................................. 4-215
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover ........................................................ 4-219
(5-3) Detaching and reattaching the DP main PWB ....................................................... 4-220
(5-4) Detaching and reattaching the CIS ........................................................................ 4-222
(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100) .................................................................................... ............. 4-225
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the DF main PWB................................. .......... ............. 4-225
(7) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120) .......................................................................... ............. 4-228
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the staple unit................................................. .............. 4-228
(7-2) Detaching and reattaching the DF main PWB........................................... .............. 4-230
(8) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110) ........................................................................ ............... 4-232
(8-1) Detaching and reattaching the staple unit.............................................. ................. 4-232
(8-2) Detaching and reattaching the DF main PWB.......................................... ............... 4-234
4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures......................................................................................... 4-237
(1) Main body......................................................................................................................... 4-237
(2) Option............................................................................................................................... 4-239
(2-1) DP-7100 .................................................................................................................. 4-239
(2-2) DP-7110 ..................................................................................................... ............. 4-241
(2-3) PF-7100..................................................................................................... .............. 4-243
(2-4) PF-7110..................................................................................................... .............. 4-244
(2-5) PF-7120...................................................................................................... ............. 4-245
(2-6) AK-7100 ....................................................................................................... ........... 4-246
(2-7) DF-7100 ....................................................................................................... ........... 4-247
(2-8) DF-7110 ....................................................................................................... ........... 4-249
(2-9) DF-7120 ...................................................................................................... ............ 4-251
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update....................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing the maintenance mode ....................................................................................... 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ...................................................................................................... 6-2
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode ............................................................................. 6-9
7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems ........................................................................................................ 7-1
(1) Isolate the place of image failure......................................................................................... 7-1
(2) Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)......................................................................... 7-2
(2-1) Abnormal image ......................................................................................................... 7-4
(2-2) The background is colored. ........................................................................................ 7-5
(2-3) Black or color spots appear on the image. ................................................................. 7-8
(2-4) Blurred characters ...................................................................................................... 7-9
(2-5) Original center and copy image center are mismatched. ......................................... 7-10
(2-6) Horizontal black streak appears. .............................................................................. 7-11
(2-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands appear on the image. ............................ 7-12
(2-8) There is a regular difference between the image leading edges of
the original and copy. ............................................................................................... 7-15
(2-9) Vertical white streaks or band appear. ..................................................................... 7-16
(2-10) Moire ........................................................................................................................ 7-17
(2-11) Blank image (White)Entire black image ................................................................... 7-18
(2-12) A part of image is dark or light.................................................................................. 7-20
(2-13) Image is blurred........................................................................................................ 7-21
(2-14) Part of the image is not copied................................................................................. 7-22
(2-15) Color shift ................................................................................................................. 7-24
(2-16) Skewed image.......................................................................................................... 7-25
(2-17) The entire image is too light. .................................................................................... 7-26
(3) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass).................................................... 7-29
(3-1) Abnormal image ....................................................................................................... 7-31
(3-2) The background is colored. ...................................................................................... 7-32
(3-3) Black or color spots appear on the image. ............................................................... 7-33
(3-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift ................................................................................ 7-34
(3-6) Horizontal black streak appears. .............................................................................. 7-35
(3-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands appear on the image. ............................ 7-36
(3-8) There is a regular difference between the image leading edges of
the original and copy. ............................................................................................... 7-37
(3-10) Moire ........................................................................................................................ 7-39
(3-11) Blank image (White)Entire black image ................................................................... 7-39
(3-12) A part of image is dark or light.................................................................................. 7-40
(3-13) Image is blurred........................................................................................................ 7-42
(3-15) Skewed image.......................................................................................................... 7-44
(4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)...................... 7-47
(4-2) Black spots appear on the image. ............................................................................ 7-51
(4-3) The image is not partly printed. (blank or white spots) ............................................ 7-52
(4-4) Blank image.............................................................................................................. 7-53
(4-6) Paper creases .......................................................................................................... 7-54
(4-7) Dirty reverse side ..................................................................................................... 7-54
(4-9) Horizontal streaks or band with white or black appear............................................. 7-56
(4-10) The irregular misalignment occurs between the leading edges of
the original and copy image. (Variation of paper leading edge timing) .................... 7-57
(4-11) Blurred characters .................................................................................................... 7-57
(4-12) Offset occurs. ........................................................................................................... 7-58
(4-13) Fusing failure............................................................................................................ 7-59
(4-14) Paper skew at the trailing edge ................................................................................ 7-60
(4-15) Uneven transfer........................................................................................................ 7-61
(4-16) Image is blurred........................................................................................................ 7-62
(4-17) The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image when scanning
the first or second side through DP. ......................................................................... 7-62
(4-18) The vertical black streaks or bands appear on the image........................................ 7-63
(5) Engine Factors (Image forming cause) ............................................................................. 7-64
(5-2) Blank image.............................................................................................................. 7-69
(5-3) Black spots appear on the image. ............................................................................ 7-70
(5-4) Entire black image.................................................................................................... 7-71
(5-5) Horizontal white / black streaks or bands appear on the image............................... 7-72
(5-6) Irregular horizontal white spreads or spots appear on the image. ........................... 7-73
(5-7) Horizontal uneven density ........................................................................................ 7-74
(5-10) Offset occurs. ........................................................................................................... 7-78
(5-11) Color reproduction is poor. ....................................................................................... 7-78
(5-12) Image is blurred........................................................................................................ 7-78
(5-13) The slight vertical black streaks appear at the both paper ends where are out of
the image area when using the SRA3 paper (paper width is 320mm). .................... 7-79
(5-14) Vertical black streaks or bands appear on the image. ............................................. 7-80
(5-15) Vertical uneven density ............................................................................................ 7-81
7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures ................................................................................................... 7-83
(1) Prior standard check items ................................................................................................ 7-83
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection ............................................................. 7-84
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper .............. 7-84
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases,
fusing failure or the paper curl.................................................................................. 7-85
(1-4) Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or
the feedshift guide .................................................................................................... 7-85
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck... 7-86
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper.......................................................................... 7-86
(1-7) Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys ..................... 7-87
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor .................................................................................... 7-88
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure ........................................................ 7-88
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity....................................................................... 7-89
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment
(Papers inside the cassette are always damp.)........................................................ 7-89
(2) Paper misfeed detection.................................................................................................... 7-90
(2-1) Paper misfeed indication .......................................................................................... 7-90
(2-2) Paper misfeed detection condition ........................................................................... 7-91
(3) Jam Codes ........................................................................................................................ 7-94
(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures.................................................................................. 7-198
(4-1) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with
the punch unit for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of
the paper leading edge being caught by the PH cutter receiving holes ................. 7-198
(4-2) Paper creases ........................................................................................................ 7-199
7-3 Self diagnostic ...................................................................................................................... 7-201
(1) Self diagnostic codes....................................................................................................... 7-201
(2) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline .......................................................................................... 7-316
7-4 FAX Related Errors ............................................................................................................. 7-327
(1) FAX Related Errors ........................................................................................................ 7-327
(1-1) The login fails with other than the ID card. ............................................................. 7-327
(1-2) C0030: FAX PWB system error.............................................................................. 7-327
(1-3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error ..................................................... 7-328
(1-4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error.......................................................... 7-328
(1-5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error.......................................... 7-329
(1-6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error ..................................................... 7-329
(1-7) C0920: FAX file system error ................................................................................. 7-330
(1-8) C0950: FAX job stay error...................................................................................... 7-330
(1-9) F14D....................................................................................................................... 7-330
(1-10) FAX cannot be sent................................................................................................ 7-331
(1-11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished..................................... 7-331
(1-12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted,
all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data. .............................................................. 7-331
(2) Communication Errors..................................................................................................... 7-333
7-2 Communication Errors .......................................................................................................... 7-334
7-5 Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................. 7-360
(1) Send Related Errors ........................................................................................................ 7-360
(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing
the host name or the security software settings. .................................................... 7-360
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear. ................................................................ 7-360
(1-3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent. ........................... 7-360
(2) Error codes ...................................................................................................................... 7-362
(3) Sending Errors (Error Codes).......................................................................................... 7-363
(3-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes.................................................................................... 7-363
(3-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes ....................................................................................... 7-369
(3-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes ...................................................................................... 7-374
7-6 Print Errors ........................................................................................................................... 7-376
(1) The paper loading message appears. ............................................................................. 7-377
(2) The paper direction is incorrect. ...................................................................................... 7-378
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray.......................................................................................... 7-379
(4) Garbled characters .......................................................................................................... 7-379
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray.................................................................................... 7-380
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out. ........................................................................ 7-380
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is
indicated on the printer properties. .................................................................................. 7-380
(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is indicated... 7-381
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error.
Processing/Memory lamp is turned on. ........................................................................... 7-381
(10) Print stops after printing several pages and locks up.
Processing and Memory lamps on operation panel are lit............................................... 7-381
(11) Print output is unavailable due to the network factor....................................................... 7-382
(18) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting.................................................... 7-386
(25) The printed image is partly missing. ................................................................................ 7-388
(26) "Paper Mismatch Error" appears. .................................................................................... 7-389
7-7 Error Messages .................................................................................................................... 7-390
(1) "Check the document processor" appears. ..................................................................... 7-390
(2) F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU ......................................... 7-391
(3) F010: Program read error (SSD) ..................................................................................... 7-392
(4) F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error) ............ 7-392
(5) F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error) ........... 7-393
(6) F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
(Communication error between the controller and the print engine) ............................... 7-393
(7) F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine................ 7-394
(8) F050: Engine main program error ................................................................................... 7-395
(9) F051: Scanner engine program error .............................................................................. 7-395
(10) F052: Panel engine program error .................................................................................. 7-396
(11) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover...................................... 7-396
(12) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray. ................. 7-397
(13) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or
the maintenance front cover. ........................................................................................... 7-398
7-8 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................... 7-399
(1) Abnormal noise occurs. ................................................................................................... 7-400
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section....................................................... 7-400
(3) Abnormal noise from the developer section .................................................................... 7-400
(4) Abnormal noise from the document processor................................................................ 7-401
(5) Abnormal noise from the eject section ............................................................................ 7-401
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy. ........................................................................................ 7-401
(7) Abnormal noise from the primary paper feed section...................................................... 7-402
(8) Abnormal noise from the machine front side ................................................................... 7-402
(9) Abnormal noise from the lower side than the fuser eject section .................................... 7-403
(10) Abnormal noise from the upper side of the fuser eject section........................................ 7-403
(11) Abnormal noise from the fuser section ............................................................................ 7-403
(12) Abnormal noise from inside the machine ........................................................................ 7-404
(15) Abnormal noise from inside the machine (jumping sounds)............................................ 7-405
(16) The drive sounds are noisy during printing...................................................................... 7-405
7-9 Iris connector troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 7-406
8 PWBs
8-1 Description for PWB ................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1) BF main PWB ...................................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-1) Connector position ..................................................................................................... 8-1
(1-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-2
(1-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-3
(2) Engine PWB ....................................................................................................................... 8-11
(2-1) Connector position ...................................................................................................... 8-11
(2-2) PWB photograph ......................................................................................................... 8-11
(2-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................. 8-12
(3) Feed image PWB ............................................................................................................... 8-26
(3-2) PWB photograph ......................................................................................................... 8-26
(3-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................. 8-27
(4) Feed Drive PWB................................................................................................................. 8-38
(4-2) PWB photograph ......................................................................................................... 8-38
(4-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-39
(5) Drum developer relay PWB ................................................................................................ 8-45
(5-2) General view photograph ........................................................................................... 8-45
(5-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-46
(6) Main high voltage PWB ...................................................................................................... 8-48
(6-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-49
(6-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-50
(7) Transfer high voltage PWB................................................................................................. 8-51
(7-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-51
(7-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-52
(8) Power supply PWB (PSPWB) ............................................................................................ 8-53
(8-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-54
(8-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-55
(9) Operation panel main PWB ................................................................................................ 8-58
(9-2) General view photograph ........................................................................................... 8-58
(9-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-59
(10) IH PWB (High-end model).................................................................................................. 8-64
(10-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-64
(10-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................8-65
8-2 Description for PWB (OPTION) ............................................................................................... 8-66
(1) PF main PWB (PF-7100).................................................................................................... 8-66
(1-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-66
(1-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-67
(2) PF main PWB (PF-7110).................................................................................................... 8-71
(2-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-71
(2-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-72
(3) PF main PWB (PF-7120).................................................................................................... 8-76
(3-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-76
(3-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-77
(4) DP main PWB (DP-7100)................................................................................................... 8-80
(4-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-80
(4-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-81
(5) DP main PWB (DP-7110)................................................................................................... 8-85
(5-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-85
(5-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-86
(6) DP Interface PWB (for DP-7110)........................................................................................ 8-90
(6-2) PWB photograph ........................................................................................................ 8-90
(6-3) Connector lists............................................................................................................ 8-91
(7) DF main PWB (DF-7100) ................................................................................................... 8-93
(7-1) Connector position .................................................................................................... 8-93
(7-2) PWB photograph ....................................................................................................... 8-93
(7-3) Connector lists........................................................................................................... 8-94
(8) PH main PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130)....................................................................... 8-99
(8-1) Connector position .................................................................................................... 8-99
(8-2) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-100
(9) DF main PWB (DF-7110) ................................................................................................. 8-102
(9-1) Connector position ................................................................................................... 8-102
(9-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-102
(9-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-103
(10) MT main PWB ................................................................................................................. 8-111
(10-2) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-112
(11) BF main PWB.................................................................................................................... 8-114
(11-2) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-115
(12) PH main PWB (PH-7)........................................................................................................ 8-119
(12-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-119
(12-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-120
(13) DF main PWB (DF-7120) ................................................................................................. 8-122
(13-2) PWB photograph ...................................................................................................... 8-122
(13-3) Connector lists.......................................................................................................... 8-123
9 Appendixes
9-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
(1) Repetitive defects gauge ..................................................................................................... 9-1
(2) Firmware environment commands ...................................................................................... 9-2
(3) Chart of image adjustment procedures ........................................................................... 9-10
(4) Wiring diagram .................................................................................................................. 9-13
(4-1) Engine PWB / Feed Drive PWB ............................................................................... 9-13
(4-2) Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection ................... 9-14
(4-3) Feed image PWB (Front side).................................................................................. 9-15
(4-4) Feed image PWB (Rear side) .................................................................................. 9-16
(4-5) Feed Drive PWB....................................................................................................... 9-17
(4-6) Drum-developer relay PWB...................................................................................... 9-18
(4-7) Low voltage power supply PWB / High voltage PWB............................................... 9-19
(4-8) Fuser PWB ............................................................................................................... 9-20
(4-9) Operation panel main PWB / Main PWB.................................................................. 9-21
(5) Wiring diagram (Options connection) ................................................................................ 9-22
(5-1) Paper feeder connection .......................................................................................... 9-22
(5-2) Conveying unit / Document finisher connection ....................................................... 9-23
(5-3) Other Options connection......................................................................................... 9-24
(6) Wiring diagram (Options)................................................................................................... 9-25
(6-1) Document processor (DP-7100) wiring diagram ...................................................... 9-25
(6-2) Document processor (DP-7110) wiring diagram ...................................................... 9-26
(6-3) Paper feeder (PF-7100) wiring diagram ................................................................... 9-27
(6-6) Finisher (DF-7100) wiring diagram........................................................................... 9-30
(6-7) Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) wiring diagram: DF-7100 only.................... 9-31
(6-9) Mailbox (MT-730(B)) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only ................................................ 9-33
(6-10) Booklet folder (BF-730) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only ............................................ 9-34
(6-11) Punch unit (PH-7) wiring diagram: DF-7110/7120 only............................................ 9-35
10 Installation Guide
PF-7100 (500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
PF-7110 (1500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
PF-7120 (3000 sheets Side Paper Feeder)
DP-7100 (Document processor: RADF)
DP-7110 (Document processor: CIS)
DF-7100 (Inner Finisher)
DF-7110 (4000 sheets Finisher)
DF-7120 (1000 sheets Finisher)
AK-7100 (Bridge Unit)
MT-730(B) (Mail Box)
BF-730 (Center Folding Unit)
PH-7 A/B/C/D (Punch Unit)
PH-7100/7110/7120/7130(Punch Unit)
JS-7100 (Job separator)
FAX System 12 (FAX Kit)
1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications
(1) Common function
Items Description
Product name 40 ppm model / 50 ppm model / 60 ppm model
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 52 to 300 g/m2
Multi Pur- 52 to 300 g/m2
pose Tray
Media type Cassette Plain, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color
Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom
(Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Pur- Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Vellum, Labels, Recycled,Preprinted, Bond,
pose Tray Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Coated,
Index Tab Dividers, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette 1 A4, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K, ISO
B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 297 × 356 mm)
Cassette 2 A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
lope #9, Envelope #6, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2,
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Multi Pur- A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
pose Tray ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" ×
48")
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4 mm
Warm-up Time Power on 17 seconds or less
(23°C/73.4°F,
Low Power 15 seconds or less
60%)
Sleep 17 seconds or less
Paper Capacity Cassette 550 sheets (64 g/m2)*1
500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multi Pur- 165 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(64 g/m2)
pose Tray 150 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller)(80 g/m2)
55 sheets (lager than A4/Letter)(64 g/m2)
50 sheets (lager than A4/Letter)(80 g/m2)
1 sheet (Banner sheet (210 × 470.1 to 304.8 × 1,220 mm / 8.26" × 18.5" to 12" ×
48"))(136 to 163 g/m2)
Y118230-9 1-1 Service Manual

Items Description
Output Tray Inner tray 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Capacity
Job separa- 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
tor
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Light source LED array
Scanning method Flat surface scanning by the CCD image sensor
Photoconductor a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Charging system Contact charger roller method
Developer system Touch down developing system
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container
Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method
Secondary: Transfer roller method
Separation system Small diameter separation and separation needle (Impressing DC voltage)
Cleaning system Drum Counter blade + Rubbing roller cleaning
Primary Fur brush cleaning + Pre-brush system
transfer
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Sliding IH fuser system
Heat source: IH
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat
Memory 4.0 GB
Large capacity storage SSD 8 GB / Hard Disk 320 GB
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB) *3
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 302.3az supported)
Hi-Speed USB: 4 (USB Flash memory slot)
Option eKUIO: 2*2
Fax: 2*3
Wireless LAN: 1
Operating Envi- Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
ronment
Humidity 10 to 80 %
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 602 × 665 × 790 mm / 23.71" × 26.19" × 31.11"
Weight 82 kg (without toner container)
Space Required (W × D) 920 × 665 mm / 36.23" × 26.19" (Using multi purpose tray)
Power source 230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 7.2 A
*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

*2: When two optional interface are installed, a fax line can not be installed.
*3: When IB-50 or IB-51 is installed, only one fax line can be installed.
Service Manual 1-2 Y118230-9

(2) Copy Functions
Items Description
Copy Speed 40 ppm A4/Letter 40 sheets/min
model A4-R/Letter-R 28 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 20 sheets/min
B4 24 sheets/min
Legal 24 sheets/min
B5 40 sheets/min
B5-R 28 sheets/min
A5-R 20 sheets/min
A6-R 20 sheets/min
50 ppm A4/Letter 50 sheets/min
B4 30 sheets/min
Legal 30 sheets/min
B5 50 sheets/min
B5-R 35 sheets/min
A5-R 25 sheets/min
A6-R 25 sheets/min
60 ppm A4/Letter 60 sheets/min
B4 36 sheets/min
Legal 36 sheets/min
B5 60 sheets/min
B5-R 42 sheets/min
A5-R 30 sheets/min
A6-R 30 sheets/min
First Copy Time Black and 40 ppm model: 4.5 seconds or less
Time White 50 ppm model: 3.7 seconds or less
(A4, place on the 60 ppm model: 3.4 seconds or less
platen, feed from
Cassette)
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Fixed zoom rate: 400%, 200%, 141%, 122%, 115%, 100%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 50%,
25%
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects (maximum original size: A3/Ledger)
Original Feed System Fixed

(3) Printer Functions
Items Description
Printing Speed
40 ppm 12×18"/SRA3 20 sheets/min
model 12×18"/SRA3 25 sheets/min
50 ppm 12×18"/SRA3 30 sheets/min
model Other than the above size, specifications are the same as those of Copy Speed.
60 ppm
model
First Print Time Black and 40 ppm model: 5.1 seconds or less
(A4) White 50 ppm model: 4.3 seconds or less
60 ppm model: 3.8 seconds or less
Resolution 1200 × 1200 dpi (multi-bit)
Operating System Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2,
Mac OS X v10.5 or later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1
(1000 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/10 BASE-T (IPv6, IPv4, IPSec), 302.3az supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-35 mounting)
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL/PCL-5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, Open XPS

(4) Scanner Functions
Items Description
Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi, 400 dpi × 400 dpi, 200 dpi × 400 dpi, 300 dpi × 300 dpi, 200 dpi
× 200 dpi, 200 dpi × 100 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, Open XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression/High compressive
PDF/OCR Text Recognition PDF(Option))
Scanning Speed*1 40 ppm 1-sided: B/W 100 images/min, Color 100 Images/min
(A4, 300 dpi, Image model 2-sided: B/W 180 Images/min, Color 180 Images/min
quality: Text/Photo 50 ppm
original) model
60 ppm
model
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, TWAIN*2, WIA*3, WSD
*1 When using the document processor (Dual Scan DP) (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*2 Supported Operating Systems: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows Server 2003/Windows Server 2008/Windows
Server 2008 R2/
Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2
*3 Supported Operating Systems: Windows Vista/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows
8/Windows 8.1/
Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows 2012 R2

(5) Option
(5-1) Document Processor
Items Description
dual reverse scan dual scan
Type DP-7100 DP-7110
Document feed method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: A3/Ledger (297 × 432 mm) (Long-sized: 297 × 1,900 mm)
Minimum: A6-R/Statement-R (105 × 148 mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 35 to 160 g/m² 1-sided: 35 to 220 g/m²
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m² 2-sided: 50 to 220 g/m²
Loading Capacity 140 sheets maximum 270 sheets maximum
(50 to 80 g/m2)*1 (50 to 80 g/m2)*1
Dimensions (W × D × H) 593 × 531 × 138.5 mm / 23.35" × 20.91" 600 × 513 × 170 mm / 23.35" × 20.91" ×
× 5.46" 5.46"
Weight Approx. 9 kg / Approx. 19.9 lbs Approx. 14.5 kg / Approx. 19.9 lbs
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.
(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

Items Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 550(64 g/m²)×2 cassettes / 500(80g/m²)× 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, 216 × 340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter, Legal, State-
ment, Executive, 12 × 18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Enve-
Custom 1 to 4 (98 × 148 mm to 320 × 457 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 52 to 300 g/m²
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
Dimension (W × D × H) 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm / 23.27" × 20.36" × 39.58"

Weight Approx. 23 kg / Approx. 50.8 lbs

(5-3) Large Capacity Feeder (1,750-sheet × 2)
Items Specifications
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 1,750(64 g/m²)×2 cassettes / 1,500(80g/m²)× 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Dimension (W × D × H) 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm / 23.63" × 26.19" × 12.73"
Weight Approx. 30 kg / Approx. 66.2 lbs
(5-4) Side Feeder (3,500-sheet)

Items Specifications
Paper Supply Method Feed & reverse roller method
(No. Sheets: 3,500(64 g/m²) / 3.750(80g/m²)
Paper Size A4, B5, Letter
Dimension (W × D × H) 351 × 585 × 469 mm / 23.27" × 20.36" × 39.58"

Weight Approx. 26.5 kg / Approx. 66.2 lbs
(5-5) Inner finisher

Items Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size(80 g/m²) A3, B4, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K,
Finisher tray Envelope C4: 250 sheets
(no stapling) A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5-R, B5, B6, Letter-R, Letter, Statement, Executive, 16K-R,
16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4,Envelope Monarch, Enve-
lope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),Oufukuhagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,
Youkei 2: 500 sheets
Stapling Number of A3, B4, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
sheets to 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m²)
limit
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color, Coated, Thick,
High Quality, Custom
Dimensions 694.8 × 533.1 × 220.5 mm / 27.36" × 20.99" × 8.69" (When pulling the tray)
Dimension (W × D × H)
Weight Approx. 11.5 kg or less / Approx. 25.4 lbs. or less

(5-6) Punch Unit (For Inner Finisher)
Items Specification
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Paper Weight 52 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
(5-7) 1,000-Sheet Finisher

Items Description
Paper Tray A A3, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Statement-R,
Size(80 g/m²) (Non-Sta- Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R: 500 sheets
pling) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 1,000 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m² or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
sheets to 12×18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 to 300 g/m²)
limit A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 50 sheets (52 to 90 g/m²)
40 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m² to 300
g/m²)
Media type Plain, Recycled, Prepunched, Preprinted, Bond, Letterhead, Color,
Coated, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions 548 × 618.5 × 1,050 mm / 21.58" × 24.36" × 41.34"
Weight Approx. 30 kg or less / Approx. 66.2 lbs. or less
Space Required (W × D) 666 × 618.5 mm / 26.23" × 24.36" (with the tray pulled out)

(5-8) 4,000-Sheet Finisher
Items Description
Paper Size Tray A A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Legal, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio,
(80 g/m2) (Non-Sta- 8K, 16K-R: 1,500 sheetsA5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
pling) A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K: 4,000 sheets
A5-R, B6-R, Statement-R: 500 sheets
Tray B A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger, Letter-
R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO
B5, Cardstock, Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4,Youkei 2: 200 sheets
Paper Weight Stapling: 90 g/m² or less
Stapling Number of A3, B4, B5-R, 216×340 mm, Ledger, Legal, 30 sheets (52 to 105 g/m²)
sheets to 12×18", Oficio II, 16K-R, 8K 2 cover sheet only (106 g/m² to 300
limit g/m²)
A4-R, A4, B5, Letter-R, Letter, 16K 70 sheets (52 to 74 g/m²)
65 sheets (75 to 90 g/m²)
55 sheets (91 to 105 g/m²)
2 cover sheet only (106 g/m² to 300
g/m²)
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Prepunched, Thick,Coated,
High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions 607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm / 23.27" × 20.36" × 39.58"

Weight Approx. 40 kg or less / Approx. 26.5 lbs or less
Space Required (W × D) 725 × 668.5 mm / 26.23" × 24.36" (with the tray pulled out)
(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Items Description
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
12×18", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Paper Weight 45 to 300 g/m2
Media type Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled, Letterhead, Color, Thick, Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8

(5-10) Mailbox (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)
Items Specification
Paper Size(80 g/m²) A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, 8K: 50 sheets
A4-R, A4, A5-R, B5-R, B5, 216×340 mm, Letter-R, Letter, Statement-R,
Executive, Oficio II, Folio, 16K-R, 16K: 100 sheets
Dimensions 510 × 400 × 470 mm / 20.08" × 15.75" × 18.51"
Weight Approx. 10 kg / Approx. 22.1 lbs.
(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Items Specification
Fold possi- Bi-Fold A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
bility Saddle Stitch A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal, Letter-R, Oficio II, 8K
Size
Tri-Fold A4-R, Letter-R
Number of Bi-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
Sheets 3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m²)
1 sheets (121 to 256 g/m²)
Saddle Stitch 16 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
13 sheets (91 to 120 g/m²)
1 cover sheet only (106 g/m² or heavier)
Tri-Fold 5 sheets (60 to 90 g/m²)
3 sheets (91 to 120 g/m²)
Maximum Bi-Fold 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
Number for 6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
Storage 11 to 16 sheets per set: 10 sets or more
(80 g/m²) Saddle Stitch 5 sheets or less per set: 30 sets or more
6 to 10 sheets per set: 20 sets or more
Tri-Fold 1 sheet per set: 30 sets or more
Media types Bi-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Saddle Stitch Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick,
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Tri-Fold Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color,Prepunched, Letterhead, Coated,
High Quality,Custom 1 to 8

(5-12) Job Separator Tray
Items Description
Maximum Number for Storage 100 Sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Size A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, 216×340 mm, SRA3, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, 12×18", Oficio II, Folio, 8K, 16K-
R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6, EnvelopeMonarch,
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki
(Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 to 320 × 1,220 mm)
Dimensions 477 × 419.6 × 64 mm / 18.78" × 16.52" × 2.52"
Weight Approx. 0.7 kg / Weight Approx. 1.6 lbs.
(5-13) Banner Tray

Items Description
Max. number of sheets 10 sheets (Multi Purpose tray)
Paper width 210 to 304.8 mm (8.26" to 12")
Paper length Max. 1220.0 mm (48")
Media types: Heavy 2
Dimensions 400.6 × 397.8 × 193.6 mm / 15.78" × 15.67" × 7.63"
Weight Approx. 0.5 kg / Approx. 1.2 lbs.

(5-14) FAX System
FAX function
Items Description
Compatibility G3
Communication Line Subscriber telephone line
Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/
9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ECM
Original Size Max. width: 297 mm/11", Max. length: 1,600 mm
Number of originals to auto Max. 270 sheets (with optional document processor)
feed
Resolution Scan:
200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)
200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
600 × 600 dpi
Print: 1200 × 1200 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 1,000 keys
Multi-Station Transmission Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of 100 sta-
tions for i-Fax)
Substitute Memory Reception 7000 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Image Memory Capacity Standard memory (170MB) (for FAX transmission/reception)
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Option Multi port, internet FAX kit
Network FAX functions

Items Description
Hardware IBM PC-AT compatible computer
Interface 10 BASE-T, 100 BASE-TX, 1000 BASE-T
Operating system Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008/R2, Windows Server
2012/R2, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10
Windows Server 2012
Transmission Resolution Ultra fine (400 × 400dpi), Fine (200 × 200dpi), Normal (100 × 200dpi), 600 ×
600dpi
Dcument Size Letter, Legal, Ledger (11 x 17), Statement, A3, A4,A5, Folio, B4, B5(JIS)
Scheduled job Time setting by Network FAX driver (within 24 hours, 1 minute increments)
Transmit and Print Fax transmission and print out at the machine is available
Broadcast Transmission Max. 500 destinations (Maximum number of stations: 500, maximum of100 sta-
tions for i-Fax)

Items Description
Job Accounting Requires the input of a Login User Name and Password in the Network FAX Driver
when User Login, is turn ON in the fax machine.
Requires the input of an Account ID in the Network FAX Driver when Job Account-
ing, is turned ON in the fax machine.
Cover Page A format can be selected using the Network FAX Driver or a template can be cre-
ated.

1-2 Part Names
(1) Machine
(1-1) Exterior appearance

1. Document Processor 13. Original Width Guides

2. Operation Panel 14. Slit Glass
3. Power Switch 15. Job Separator Tray
4. Waste Toner Box Cover 16. Paper Stopper
5. Cassette 1 17. Inner Tray
6. Cassette 2 18. Handles
7. Main Power Switch 19. Front Cover
8. Multi Purpose Tray 20. Platen
9. USB Memory Slot 21. Original Size Indicator Plates
10. Original Eject Table
11. Original Stopper
12. Original Table

22. Paper Length Guide 26. Multi Purpose Tray

23. Paper Width Guides 27. Paper Width Guides
24. Paper Width Adjusting Tab 28. Right Cover 1 Lever
25. Support Tray Section of the Multi Purpose 29. Right Cover 1
Tray

(1-2) Connectors/ Interior

1. Option Interface Slot 5. Toner Container (Black)

2. Network Interface Connector 6. Toner Container Cover
3. USB port 7. Waste Toner Box
4. USB Interface Connector 8. Waste Toner Box Cover

(1-3) With Optional Equipments Attached

1. Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray) 7. Cassette 4

2. Tray A 8. Cassette 5
3. Tray B 9. Finisher tray
4. Job Separator Tray 10. Platen cover
5. Folding Tray 11. Control Section of the Finisher
6. Cassette 3

(1-4) FAX System
1. LINE Connector (L2)

If installing 2 FAX kits, 2 ports are available.
Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
2. LINE Connector (L1)

Connect the modular cords for telephone line.
This connector is port 1.
3. TEL Connector (T1)

When using an optional handset or available telephone, connect it here.

(1-5) Operation Panel Keys

1. [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

2. [Numeric Keypad] key: Displays numeric keys on the touch panel.
3. Function Key: These keys enable various functions and applications, including copy and scan, to be regis-
tered.
4. [Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.
5. [Accessibility Display] key: Switches the touch panel display on the Copy screen and the Send screen to a
magnified view.
6. [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
7. [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu screen.
8. [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
9. [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
10. [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
11. [Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
12. [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log
out).
13. [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode. Recovers from
Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
14. [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
15. [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory (general
purpose item).
16. [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.
17. Touch Panel: Displays icons for configuring machine settings.

1-3 Optional Equipment
The following options are available for this machine.
'3 '3
07 %
3/$7(1&29(5
7<3((
3+$3+& 3+3+
3+' 3+
')
') %DQQHU*XLGH
-6 3)
')
%) 3) 3)
*: *: If the following option is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed: PF-7100, PF-7110, PF-7120

3ULQWLQJ6\VWHP
.H\ERDUG+ROGHU
1.1. '7 % )$;6\VWHP &DUG

$XWKHQWLFDWLRQ.LW %
,%
,%
6RIWZDUHRSWLRQ
,QWHUQHW)$;.LW $
'DWD6HFXULW\.LW (
8* ,%
8*
+'
6FDQ([WHQVLRQ.LW $
86%.H\ERDUG

(1) Option
(1-1) DP-7110 "Document Processor (Dual Scan)"
DP-7100 "Document Processor (Dual Reversing Scan)
PLATEN COVER TYPE E "Original Cover"
Automatically scans originals. Also you can perform duplex copying and split copying.
When the document processor is not used, please use the PLATEN COVER TYPE E.
(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox"

1. This equipment separates the paper output tray destination to easily sort documents. Installing this option adds 7
output trays. When multiple computer users share the printer, each user can print to a specified tray. Installs on the
4,000-Sheet Finisher.
(1-3) DF-7110 "4,000-Sheet Finisher"

This equipment can stack high capacity paper and can offset each copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be stapled
or hole punched (optional).
(1-4) DF-7120 "1,000-Sheet Finisher"

This equipment can stack high capacity paper and can offset each copy to sort. Sorted output documents can be stapled
or hole punched (optional).
(1-5) BF-730 "Folding Unit"

Folds printed output at the center or in tri-fold to enable the creation of simple booklets. Installs on the 4,000-Sheet Fin-
isher.
(1-6) PF-7100 "Paper Feeder (500-sheet x2)"

Two additional cassettes identical to the machine’s cassette can be installed in the machine. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the method of setting the standard cassettes.
(1-7) PF-7110 "Large Capacity Feeder (1,500-sheet×2)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional large capacity feeder (1,500-sheet×2) capable of
holding up to 3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
(1-8) PF-7120 "Side Feeder (3,000-sheet)"

In addition to the machine’s cassettes, you can also install an optional side feeder (3,000-sheet) capable of holding up
to3,000 sheets of A4, B5 or Letter paper.
(1-9) Banner Guide 10 "Banner Tray"

This tray enables continuous feeding of banner paper. Up to 10 sheets of banner paper can be loaded.
(1-10) DP-7100 "Inner finisher"

This equipment can stack high capacity paper and can offset each copy to sort. It can also staple the offset printouts.

(1-11) PH-71120 "Punch Unit"
After attaching to the Inner Finisher, is possible to open punch holes.
(1-12) PH-7C "Punch Unit"

Attaches to the 1,000-sheet and 4,000-sheet document Finisher and is possible to open punch holes.
(1-13) JS-7100 "Job Separator"

Separate paper according to output tray for easier sorting. Specify as the output tray for copy or print jobs. Or, specify as
the default output tray for printing from the copy or Document Box screen, printing from the PC, and printing of the
received fax data.
(1-14) NK-7100 "Option numerical keyboard"

The numeric keypad is added to the operation panel. If the optional numeric keypad is installed, numeric keys do not
appear on the touch panel.
(1-15) DT-730 (B) "Document Table"

Place original or other documents when using the machine.
(1-16) Keyboard Holder 10 "Keyboard Holder"

A USB keyboard connected to the machine can be placed here.
(1-17) FAX System 12 "FAX Kit"

By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a com-
puter. When two FAX kits are installed, the units can be connected to two different telephone lines which will enable
quicker message transmission to a number of recipients. If one of the lines is dedicated to receiving, the busy line time-
can be reduced.
(1-18) IB-50 "Network Interface Kit"

The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. This kit supports tra-
ditional protocols such as AppleTalk, Netware and so on.It also supports only the least functions in the standard utilities.
(1-19) IB-51 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b.
With the utilities supplied, settings are possible for a variety of OS and network protocols.
(1-20) IB-35 "Wireless Network Interface Kit"

This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and
11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is supported.

(1-21) Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"
User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list.
(1-22) Internet FAX Kit(A) "Internet FAX Kit"

Activating the Internet FAX Kit sends and receives faxes via the Internet without using a phone line. It can only be added
when the FAX Kit is installed.
(1-23) Data Security Kit(E) "Data Security Kit"

The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.
The Data Security Kit encrypts data before storing it in the hard disk. It guarantees higher security because no datacan-
not be decoded by ordinary output or operations.
(1-24) UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(1-25) UG-34 "Emulation Upgrade Kit"

Enables emulation whereby the machine operates using commands for other printers. Installing this option enables IBM-
Proprinter, Line Printer, and EPSON LQ-850 emulation.
(1-26) Scan Extension Kit(A) "OCR Scan Activation Kit"

This option enables the use of the OCR Text Recognition function in the applications of the machine.

1-4 Module map
Unit configuration of each model is as follows.
Module 40 ppm model 50 ppm model 60 ppm model

Cassette 1
Legal paper supportive cassette as maxium size (common)
Cassette 2
SRA3 paper supportive cassette as maxium size (common)
Primary feed
Pickup/feed roller + retard roller system (common)
Conveying,
Duplex
Non-stack paper conveying path (common)
Primary transfer
Transfer belt + fur brush cleaning system (common)
Secondary
transfer
Transfer roller method (common)
Drum
a-Si drum (diameter 30 mm)
Developing
Hybrid developing
LSU
One polygon motor + 4 beam
Fuser
Sliding IH fuser pressures system (diameter 35 mm)
With enter core
Eject
Feed-shift and eject conveying path (common)Drum
Toner Container
Tube-type toner container BK


2 Installation
2 - 1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when the temperature is 90.5°F
(32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80%(But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
3. Power requirements:
AC220-240V50Hz 7.2A or more
4. Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows:
Humidity: 36 to 65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
Avoid locations with vibrations
Avoid locations with rapid temperature fluctuations
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
If the floor is delicate, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged by the casters.
During operation, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space
400 mm
(15-3/4")
300 mm 450 mm 1000 mm 100 mm

(11-13/16") (17-11/16") (39-3/8") (3-15/16")
Figure 2-1

2 - 2 Installing the main unit
Installation procedures
START
Unpacking and checking bundled items

Image adjustment
Maintenance mode workflow
Attaching the sub tray (Maintenance mode U952 )
Optional unit installation Setting the ID correction operation

(Maintenance mode U464)
Connecting the Interface Cable

Adjusting the halftone automatically
Connecting the FAX cable
(FAX installation only)
Output a Maintenance report
Loading Paper
Clearing the counts
Connecting the Power Cord (maintenance mode U927)
Setting the delivery date

Turn the power on (Maintenance mode U278)
Setting up the Toner Container Exiting from the maintenance mode
Default Setting Completion of installing the main unit
Installing Software
*: When setting up at high altitude

㸦Maintenance mode U952:
Excute/ HIGH ALTITUDE㸧
Developer bias adjustment

Primary transfer voltage adjustment

Setting the ID correction operation

*: Initial setting time: It takes approximately 2 minutes.

Also, do not execute the maintenance mode during the initial setting.

(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items
Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tape and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.
(1-1) Main unit
1
10
8
12
5 7
2 3
6
11
13
4 4
4
14 15
4 17 15 17
16
17 17
Figure 2-2
1. Outer case 7. Power cord 13. Bottom case

2. Front upper pad 8. Eject spacer 14. Left bottom pad
3. Rear upper pad 9. Right lower cover 15. Right bottom pad
4. Side stay 10. Inner Tray 16. Skid
5. Accessories box 11. Operation cover 17. Hinge
6. Size label 12. Main unit
Note: Make sure to install the main unit on a level surface.

(2) Unpacking and checking bundled items (option units)
(2-1) Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15
13
15
15
1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-3
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad

(2-2) Paper Feeder (PF-7110)
12
9 10
14
11
8
15 13
15
15 1
16
7
5 6
3 4
2
Figure 2-4
1. Main unit 7. Main unit cover 13. Front right upper pad
2. Outer case 8. Size label 14. Rear right upper pad
3. Left bottom pad 9. Screw 15. Support plate
4. Right bottom pad 10. Pins 16. Screw
5. Front of the inner frame 11. Front left upper pad
6. Rear of the inner frame 12. Rear left upper pad

(2-3) Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120)
15
14 17
23
13
12
11
18
22
16
20
19
27 10
9
21
7 9
28 26
25 5
3 24
2
Figure 2-5
1. Outer case 11. Accessories box 21. Cover plate

2. Inner frame 12. Inner pad 22. Spacer A
3. Bottom cushion 13. Spacer 23. Accessories A
4. Bottom pad 14. Size label 24. Right bottom pad
5. Main unit 15. Accessories B 25. Left bottom pad
6. Main unit cover 16. Guide film 26. Right upper pad
7. Front right stay 17. Lock support plate 27. Left upper pad
8. Front left stay 18. Switch lever 28. Installation Guide
9. Rear stay 19. Screws (M4x10B)
10. Upper pad 20. Screws (M4x8B S-tite)

(2-4) Document Processor (DP-7100)
16
17
18
7
12 13 14 15 9
11
8
6 10
5
4
Figure 2-6
1. Outer case 8. Rear left upper pad 15. Hinge cover right
2. Rear bottom pad 9. Rear right upper pad 16. Label
3. Front bottom pad 10. Front left upper pad 17. Screw
4. Document Processor 11. Front right upper pad 18. Screw
5. Poly sheet 12. DP cable cover front
6. Original mat holder 13. DP cable cover rear
7. Original mat 14. Hinge cover left

(2-5) Document Processor (DP-7110)
9
10 10
16
10 10 17
11
18
12
19 20 21 15 13
14
8 4 3
7
Figure 2-7
1. Outer case 8. Original mat 15. Cleaning cloth

2. Inner frame 9. DP relay PWB 16. Rear left upper pad
3. Rear bottom pad 10. Screw 17. Rear right upper pad
4. Front bottom pad 11. DP cable cover front 18. Front upper pad
5. Document Processor 12. DP cable cover rear 19. Angle control fitting
6. Poly sheet 13. Hinge cover left 20. Right fixing fitting
7. Original mat holder 14. Hinge cover right 21. Left fixing fitting
Figure 2-8

(2-6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
11
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 2-9
1. Outer case 5. Bottom spacer 9. Tray

2. Front bottom pad 6. Inner finisher 10. Cartridge
3. Rear bottom pad 7. Main unit cover 11. Screw
4. Right bottom pad 8. Top spacer

(2-7) 1,000-sheets Finisher (DF-7120)
10
4
6 19
20
16 17 18 15
14
5
21 11
21 21 13
1 12
3
21
21 2 21
Figure 2-10
1. Skid 8. Outer case 15. Cartridge

2. Front bottom pad 9. Front upper pad 16. Screw (M4x8)
3. Rear bottom pad 10. Rear upper pad 17. Screw (M4x8*)
4. 1000-sheet finisher 11. Right spacer 18. Screw (M4x8*)
5. Left spacer 12. Main tray 19. Connecting plate
6. Protect sheet 13. Inner pad 20. Installation guide
7. Main unit cover 14. Connector cover* 21. Hinge

(2-8) 4,000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)
8
4
22 23
15
17 18 19 20 21
12 13
16
14
24 9
24 24
11
10
1 3
24
24 2 24
Figure 2-11
1. Skid 9. Right spacer 17. Screw (M4x8*)

2. Front bottom pad 10. Main tray 18. Screw (M4x8*)
3. Rear bottom pad 11. Inner pad 19. Screw (M4x20*)
4. 4,000-sheet finisher 12. Earth connection plate* 20. Connector cover*
5. Main unit cover 13. Ground plate* 21. Tray label*
6. Outer case 14. Wire guide* 22. Connecting plate
7. Front upper pad 15. Cartridge 23. Installation guide
8. Rear upper pad 16. Eject guide* 24. Hinge
*: *: Not used in this model.

(2-9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))
16
17
11
13 14 15
10
12
8
9
7
4 5
5 4
Figure 2-12
1. Outer case 5. Mailbox 9. Eject tray

2. Right lower spacer 6. Poly sheet 10. Upper pad
3. Left lower spacer 7. Left upper spacer 11. Side cover
4. Lower cover 8. Right upper spacer

(2-10) Folding Unit (BF-730)
12
29
23 24 25 26 27 28
11
20
10
21
9 16
22 8 15
19 18 7
6
5
14
17 13
Figure 2-13
1. Outer case 11. Spacer E 21. Front side cover

2. Bottom spacer 12. Center-folding eject tray 22. Rear side cover
3. Spacer A 13. Spacer F 23. Pin
4. Spacer B 14. Front rail 24. Screw (M4x8)
5. Folding Unit 15. Rear rail 25. Screw (M4x10)
6. Poly sheet 16. Guide 26. Screw (M3x12)
7. Top spacer 17. Spacer G 27. Lock plate
8. Spacer C 18. Output stock tray 28. Binding band
9. Center-folding bridge Unit 19. Spacer H 29. Installation guide
10. Spacer D 20. Output stopper

(2-11) Punch Unit (PH-7B)
6 7
8
Figure 2-14
1. Outer case 4. Upper pad 7. Drive unit

2. Bottom pad 5. Punch PWB 8. Waste punch box
3. Punch unit 6. Waste punch box guide

(2-12) Punch Unit (PH-7110)
11
10
5 4
3 1
Figure 2-15
1. Outer case 5. Front bottom pad 9. Waste punch box

2. Right bottom pad 6. Punch unit 10. Screw
3. Left bottom pad 7. Rear upper pad 11. Front right cover
4. Bottom pad 8. Upper pad

(3) Notes on main unit transportation
*: When transporting the main unit, lift the left and right handle of the lower part of the main unit (as marked by red cir-
cles) with four people as shown in the figure.
Do not hold the operation unit because it will cause damage.
Figure 2-16
*: Carry the paper feeder (PF-7100/7110) with two people by holding the parts as shown in the figure.
Figure 2-17

(4) Release the lock of the scanner mirror frame
1. Raise the triangle mark side of the optical lock cover (b) with a flat-blade screwdriver (a) and slide it in the direction
of the arrow to remove it.
2. Place it reversely and put the optical lock cover (b) into the aperture of the hook (c) to fit in the direction of the
arrow.
*: Unless unlocking is performed, C3100 is caused.
1 a
2
2 b c
Figure 2-18

(5) Release of lift plate stopper
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Remove thelift plate stopper from each cassette andattach it to the storage location.
*: When moving the machine, attach the lift plate in original position.
Cassette 1
Figure 2-19
Cassette 2
Figure 2-20

(6) Attaching the sub tray
Attach the bundled sub tray to the inner tray.
*: The sub tray is not necessary when installing the DF-7100 (Inner finisher).
*: The sub tray is not necessary when installing the AK-7100 (Attachment kit for DF-7110 (4,000-sheets finisher or
DF-7120 (1,000-sheets finisher)).
Procedures
1. Slide the sub tray (a) and insert two protrusions (b) into two apertures (c) on the inner tray.
2. Insert the rib (d) into the aperture (e) of the inner tray and push it in until it locks.
*: Lift up the sub tray (a) to check it does not come off.
b c
a
d e
Figure 2-21
(7) Affixing the operation panel sheet (220-240V models only)

Affix the operation panel sheet (a) in the applicable language by aligning it to the positioning boss (c) on the operation
panel (b).
Figure 2-22

(8) Optional unit installation
Install necessary optional units in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.
Product name Target Installation

guide
PF-7100 (500x2 Paper Feeder) 10-1
○
PF PF-7110 (1500x2 Paper Feeder) 10-2
PF-7120 (3000 Side Paper Feeder) ○ 10-3
DP-7100 (Document Processor (Automatic 10-4
duplex))
DP ○
DP-7110 (Document Processor (Simultaneous 10-5
duplex scanning))
DF-7100 (Inner Finisher) 10-6
PH-7110 (Punch unit for DF-7100) 10-13
AK-7100 (Conveying Unit) 10-9
DF-7110 (4000-sheet Finisher) 10-7
DF Mailbox(B) (Mailbox) 10-10
BF-730(folding Unit) ○ 10-11
PH-7 (Punch unit for DF-7110/7120) 10-12
DF-7120 (1,000-sheet Finisher) 10-8
PH-7 (Punch unit for DF-7110/7120) 10-12
JOB JS-7100 (Job Separator Tray) 10-14
SEPA
FAX FAX System 12 ○ 10-15
*: When not installing the optional paper feeder, attach the bundled right lower cover as shown below.
Procedures
1. Insert two protrusions (b) of the right lower cover (a) into the holes at the machine front side.
2. Insert the hook (c) to fix it.
c
a
b
Figure 2-23

(9) Connecting the Interface Cable
Connection Environ- Function Necessary Cable

ment
Connect a LAN cable to Printer/Scanner/Network LAN Cable
the main unit FAX (10Base-T, 100Base-TX or1000Base-T)
Connect a USB cable Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/ USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant, Max.
to the main unit WIA) 5.0m long)
In the case of the LAN connection
1. Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
+8%
Figure 2-24
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

In the case of the USB connection
1. Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the rear side of the main unit.
+8%
Figure 2-25
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

(10)Connecting the FAX cable (FAX installation only)
General FAX connection example
In the case of the general telephone line
a. Modular jack
a
+8%
Figure 1-2-1
ADSL
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the PHONE port of the splitter.
a. Modular jack d
b. ADSL modem
c. Splitter (PHONE port)
d. PC b
a c +8%
Figure 1-2-2
ISDN
Connect a cord between the LINE connector of the main unit and the analog port of the terminal adapter.
a. Modular jack
c
b. Terminal adapter
(Analog port)
c. PC
a
b +8%
Figure 1-2-3

Modular cord connection
Connect a modular cord to the LINE connector of the main unit.
When using a commercially available telephone set, connect a modular cord to the TEL connector of the main unit.
a. Modular jack d
b. Modular jack (Phone)
c. Commercially available telephone
d. Modular jack (line2) *1
a
*1 when two FAX kits are installed
b
c
Figure 1-2-4

(11)Loading Paper
(11-1) Precaution for Loading Paper
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it in the procedures below.
Figure 2-3
Fan the paper and align the edges at the flat place.
In addition, note the following points.
If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Such paper may cause a jam.
If paper is left under high temperature and high humidity after taking it out of the package, it may cause trouble with
paper absorbing moisture. After setting paper in the cassette, seal the rest of the paper in the paper storage bag.
Also, seal the paper remaining on the MP tray in the paper storage bag.
If paper is left in the cassette for a long period, heat from the cassette heater may discolor it.
If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the cas-
settes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you reuse paper already used for printing, remove staples or clips. Do not use paper with a staple or clip. This may
cause poor image quality or malfunctions.

(11-2) Set paper in the cassette
The cassettes can hold plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, etc.
The cassette can hold 550 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 500 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
1. Pull the cassette completely out of the main unit.
Figure 2-4
NOTE
Do not pull out multiple cassettes simultaneously.
2. Adjust the position of the paper length guide.

1.Press the tab and slide the guides to the paper size to use.
Figure 2-5

NOTE
Lay down the paper length guide when using Legal in Cassette 1 and 12x18" in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-6
3. Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

Figure 2-7
NOTE
Adjust the paper size guide when using SRA3, A3 or Leger in Cassette 2.
Figure 2-8

4. Load paper.
1.Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface to align the edges.
2.Load the paper in the cassette after aligning its edges.
Figure 2-9
Note
Load the paper with the print side facing up.
Before loading paper in the cassette, fan the paper taken from a new package to separate it. (2-25See page )
Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Such paper may cause paper jams.
Make sure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator (see the illustration above).
If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guides to the paper size to use, the paper
may skew or become jammed.
5. Check the paper length guide and paper width guide are securely aligned to the paper.
Re-align the paper length guide or paper width guide if gaps are observed.
Figure 2-10

6. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-11
7. Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-12

(11-3) Loading Envelopes or Cardstock in the Cassettes
Approximately 100 post cards or 30 envelopes can be set.
Figure 2-13
2. Remove the envelope feed guide.
Figure 2-14
3. Expand the lever of the envelope feed guide.
Figure 2-15

4. Attach the envelope feed guide as shown in the illustration.
Figure 2-16
5. Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
Figure 2-17
6. Adjust the position of the paper width guides.

Figure 2-18

7. Load the envelope with the print side facing up.
*: Example: When printing the address.
Figure 2-19
8. Gently insert the cassette all the way into the main unit.
Figure 2-20

(11-4) Set paper in the large capacity feeder
The high capacity feeder can hold A4/Letter size plain paper, recycle paper or color paper.
The large capacity feeder can load 3,500 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
*: The following procedure is an example for the 3rd cassette.
Figure 2-21
2. Load paper.
Figure 2-22
Note

3. Gently insert the cassette all the way.
Figure 2-23
3.Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-24

(11-5) Set paper in the large capacity feeder
The side feeder can load 3,500 sheets of plain paper (64g/m2) or 3,000 sheets of plain paper (80g/m2).
Figure 2-25
2. Load paper.
Figure 2-26
Note

3.Gently insert the cassette all the way.
Figure 2-27
4.Insert the paper size sheet and media type sheet.
Figure 2-28

(12)Connecting the Power Cord
1. Connect one end of the supplied power cord to the main unit and the other end to a power outlet.
Power is supplied when connecting the power cord.
*: Check the main power switch is ON when the power is not turned on.
*: Only use the power cord that comes with the main unit..
Figure 2-29

(13)Setting up the Toner Container
Set up the toner container.

1. Open the front cover.
IMPORTANT
The container cover does not open when the power is turned off. make sure to turn the power on to release the con-
tainer cover lock and then open the front cover.
Figure 2-30
2. Take out the new toner container.
Figure 2-31
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the perforation by hand.
Figure 2-32

3. Slightly tap the toner container.
5~ 5~
Figure 2-33
4. Shake the toner container.
5~ 5~
5~
Figure 2-34
5. Install the toner container.
CLICK!
Figure 2-35
6. Close the toner container cover.
Figure 2-36

7. Close the front cover.
Figure 2-37

(14)Default Setting
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed. Avail-
able of setting the necessary items. Also, it can beset from System Menu as below.
[System Menu /Counter] key

Figure 2-38
(14-1)Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
1. Display the screen
[System Menu/Counter] key or [System Menu] key
> [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
2. Configure the settings
[Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for
summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you per-
form Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the
header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23),
Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in
Western notation.
Value:

(14-2) Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)
TCP/IP (IPv4) Settings
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The default settings are as follows.
• TCP/IP: On
• DHCP: On
• Auto-IP: On
• IP Address: 0.0.0.0
• Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0
• Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
Setting procedures
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key or [System
Menu/Network] key > [Network] > [Network Set-
tings] > [TCP/IP Setting].
2. Select [IPv4] for setting.
3. Restart the network from System Menu, or turn the power off and then on waiting 5 seconds or more.
When using DHCP server

[DHCP]: Set to [On].
When setting the static IP address

[DHCP]: Set to [Off].
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the address.
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
When setting Auto IP, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0.
*: The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Model Name 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm

model model model
Login User Name 4000 5000 6000
Login Password 4000 5000 6000
(14-3) Paper size and media type setting

1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [Cassette/MP tray Settings].
2. Select [Cassette Setting] > [Cassette 1 (- 5) ] or [MP Tray Setting].
3. Select [Paper Size] and [Media Type] to set them.

(15)Installing Software
Install appropriate software in your PC from the bundled DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC. (See the Operation
Guide supplied with the main unit)
(16)Setup setting at high altitude place

When setup is done at high altitude place, execute as follows (such as in Mexico City).
When the faint image from the developer bias factor appears in the high altitude environment at 1000 meter or more
above sea level, the print quality can be recovered with the setting below.
Select maintenance mode U952 > [Execute] > [HIGH ALTITUDE] to execute the procedures below
Procedures
1. maintenance mode U140 > [Altitude Adjustment]
Select the altitude range of [1001 to 2000m], [2001 to 3000m] or [3001 to 3500m].
[AC Calib] > [Calibration] > Type: 0 (default), K: on > [Execute]

Press the [Start] key.
2. maintenance mode U101 > [Force Excute] > [Execute]

3. maintenance mode U464 > [Calib] > [Execute]

*: If the developer leak appears after setting the above.

Select maintenance mode U140 > [AC Calib] > [Magnification] to lower the values of K.
(17)Image adjustment
Execute the image adjustment in maintenance mode U952 (Maintenance mode workflow)
1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter the maintenance mode.
2. Input "952" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select the [Execute] .
4. Select [Setup] to adjust the main unit and [EH Setup] to adjust the optional units.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the maintenance mode.
6. After transition, execute the following setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and terminate the workflow.
*: When not executing U952, enter the maintenance modes with the numeric keys in the following order to
execute each setting.
(17-1) Setting the ID correction operation (Maintenance mode U464)

1.Input "464" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
2.Select [Calib].
3.Press the [Start] key.
*: Calibration starts.
4.Press the [Stop] key.

(17-2) Adjusting the halftone automatically (Maintenance mode U410)
1.Input "410" using the numeric keys.
*: Execution information screen is displayed.
*: Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on A4 paper.
3.Set the Test Pattern 1 output as the original. Place the edge with
the arrows toward the back and the printed side facing down on the platen.
*: Set test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
Figure 2-39
*: The 1st auto adjustment is executed.
5.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
*: The 2nd auto adjustment is executed.
7.[Finish] appears after normal completion.
(17-3) Output Maintenance report (Maintenance mode U000)

2.Select [Maintenance] and press the [Start] key to output the maintenance report.
(17-4) Clearing the counts (Maintenance mode U927)

2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
(17-5) Setting the delivery date (Maintenance mode U278)

2.Select [Today].
3.Press the [Start] key to set the delivery date.

(18)Exiting from the maintenance mode
*: The maintenance mode is exited.
(19)Completion of installing the main unit (Turning the power off)

1. Make sure that each indicator is not flashing, and then turn the power switch off.
Figure 2-40
2. Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

*: It takes a few minutes for power off.

(20)Turn the power on again
1. Turn the power switch on.
*: Check the main power switch (a) is ON when the power is not turned on.
Figure 2-41
IMPORTANT
After turning off the power switch, do not turn on the power switch again immediately. Wait 5 seconds or more, and
then turn on the power switch.

2 - 3 Installing the optional equipment
(1) SD/SDHC memory card
Reading the SD/SDHC memory Card
The contents of the SD/SDHC memory card are read into the main unit after turning the power on.
SD/SDHC memory card installation

1. Turn off the main unit and disconnect the power cord and all interface cables.
*: Before inserting the memory card, make sure that the power switch is turned off.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8).
3. Release the hook (b) in the direction of the arrow and then remove the SD card cover (c).
b c
a
b
Figure 2-42
4. Install an SD/SDHC memory card (a) in the memory card slot (b).
SW
b
a
Figure 2-43
5. Reattach the covers.
Formatting an SD/SDHC Memory Card

To use an unused SD/SDHC card, you must first format it with the main unit.
*: Formatting will delete all existing data on the SD card.
If you have installed an application, do not format the SD card to avoid the removal of the application in the SD
card.
Format it with a PC or Prescribe command in advance.

(2) Gigabit Ethernet extension kit (IB-50)
(3) Wireless LAN interface (IB-51)
Procedures
2. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and then remove the option slot cover (b).
Figure 2-44
3. Insert the PWB unit (b) straight into the option slot (c).
4. Secure the PWB unit (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8) once removed.
a
a
b
Figure 2-45
*: Install it in the upper slot.

(4) Wireless LAN interface (IB-35)
Bundled parts of Wireless LAN interface (IB-35)(B3335 000)

PWB unit 1 pc
Screw (M3x6) 1 pc
Procedures
2. Remove a screw (b)(M3x10) and then remove the rear upper cover (c) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-46

3. Open it if the DP is installed.
4. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8).
5. Remove the DP rear cover (b) by sliding in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-47
6. Insert the FPC (b) of the PWB unit (a) into the aperture (c) of the shield box.
7. Connect the connector (d) to the connector (f) of the main PWB (e).
d
f
Figure 2-48

8. Attach a screw (a)(M3x6) to the PWB unit (b).
Figure 2-49
9. Reattach the DP rear cover (b) with two screws (a) (M3x8).
Figure 2-50

10. Latch seven hooks (b) and attach the upper rear cover (a) with the screw (c)(M3x10).
Figure 2-51

(5) Document table (DT-730(B))
Bundled parts of Document table DT-730(B) (B4571.000)

Tray stay 1 pc
Tray mounting plate 1 pc
Tray cover 1 pc
Tray lower cover 1 pc
Tray fixing plate 1 pc
Sheet 2 pc
Pin 2 pc
Nut M4 2 pc
Screw (M4x8 screw with the binding head) 7 pc
Screw (M4x14 screw with the binding head) 2 pc
Procedures
1. Turn the power switch off and disconnect the power plug.
2. Remove the right cover (a).
3. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Detach the right upper cover (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
Figure 2-52
5. Insert two nuts in the back side of the right upper cover (a).
6. Attach the tray stay (d) to the right upper cover (a) with two screws (c)(M4×14).
b b
a
b
c
a
Figure 2-53

7. Reattach the right upper cover to the original position in the main unit.
Figure 2-54
8. Insert the mounting plate (a) into the tray stay (B) and secure it with two screws (C) (M4×8).
c
a
c b
Figure 2-55

9. Attach the tray cover (b) to the tray stay (c) with four screws (a)(M4×8).
a
c
Figure 2-56
10. Attach the tray lower cover (a).

11. Secure the tray lower cover (a) by two pins (b).
B B
A
B B
b
b
Figure 2-57

12. Affix the two sheet (b) on the document table (a).
b
A
A
B
B A
B
B
Figure 2-58

(6) Numeric Keypad (NK-7100)
Numeric Keypad installation requires the following parts:

Numeric Keypad NK-7100 (B3334 000) 1 pc
Bundled parts of Numeric Keypad NK-7100

Numeric Keypad 1 pc
Numeric Keypad cover 1 pc
Screw (M3x8) 2 pc
Label * 1 pc
*:NK-7100 only
Procedures
2. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) from the operation unit (a).
3. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the operation unit lid (d) in the direction of the arrow.
a c d
Figure 2-59
4. Connect the connector (b) of the numeric keypad (a) to the connector (c) of the operation unit.
b
a
Figure 2-60

5. Latch two hooks (b) on the cut-out (c) of the operation unit, and then attach the numeric keypad (a) with two screws
(d) (M3x8).
a
c
a d
d
Figure 2-61
6. Slid the cover (a) in the direction of the arrow and latch two hooks (b), and secure the screw (c)(M3x8) once
removed in step 2.
b a c
Figure 2-62

7. Affix the label (b) on the numeric keypad (a).
a
Figure 2-63

(7) ID card reader
IC card reader holder installation requires the following parts

according to the shape of it:
Label (Bundled in the main unit) 1 pc
Procedures
2. Pull up the operation unit (a).
3. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover
(b) to pull it toward you and remove four lower hooks (d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to
remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-64

5. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
6. Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-65
7. Insert the card reader (a) into the holder (b) of the main unit.
*: The size varies depending on the card reader.
Type A
Thicker and in the same size as its holde.
Figure 2-66
Type B
Thicker but smaller than its holder.
b
Figure 2-67

Type C
Thinner and in the same size as its holder.
b
Figure 2-68
Notes when attaching

*: If the externals of the card reader (a) is smaller than the holder, align the receiver to the label affixing alignment
position (d) on the ISU front right cover (c). (Use double-side tape to affix it if necessary.)
*: If the card reader (a) is thin and there is a gap from the ISU front right cover (c), insert a spacer into the gap with the
holder (b) and adjust the level.
Gap ( Between the cover (c) and card reader (a)): 5 to 10 mm. (Between the holder and cover: approx. 30mm)
c approx. 30mm
a 5 to 10mm
d
c
b
Figure 2-69

8. Connect the USB connector (b) to the USB interface slot (c).
9. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (d) and hook it on the hook (f) of the main unit.
c
e b
d
a
Figure 2-70
10. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate the front right ISU cover (a) to latch hour lower hooks (e) to secure it in the
original position.
*: Align the upper eject cover (b) to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-71
11. Affix a label (c) on the ISU front right cover (b) aligning it with the positioning mark (a).
b
a
c
Figure 2-72

12. Attach the IC card reader cover. Latch six upper hooks (b) and then four latch lower hooks (e) by rotate it. Reattach
the ISU front right cover in the original position.
Figure 2-73
Activating Card Authentication

To install the optional function, you need the License Key. Please access the designated website of your dealer or
service representative, and register the "Machine No." indicated on your machine and the "Product ID" indicated on
the License Certificate supplied with the product to issue the License Key.
Refer to [2-4 Optional Application] when starting the trial. (See page2-101 )

(8) USB keyboard
USB keyboard installation requires the following parts:

Keyboard holder 10 (B3333 000) ....................... 1 pc
USB Keyboard 1 pc
Bundled parts of Keyboard holder 10

Upper keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
Lower keyboard mounting bracket 1 pc
Upper keyboard cover 1 pc
Lower keyboard cover 1 pc
Upper lid 1 pc
Lower lid 1 pc
Hook-and-loop fastener 2 pairs
Binding band 1 pc
Screws (M3x8 S-tite)*1 ............................................ 6 pc
Screws (M3x8 S-tite Black) ..................................... 2 pc
Screws (M3x8 P-tite) 2 pc
Screws (M4x8 S-tite) 4 pc
Screws (M4x14 S-tite)*2 .......................................... 2 pc
*1: 4 pc is used for this model.
*2: Not used in this model.
Procedures
2. Fix the upper keyboard mounting bracket onto the lower keyboard mounting bracket with the four screws
(a)(M3x8).
*: Align them with each other at the mark B.
a
a
a
a
c
Figure 2-74

4. Release two hooks (c), and then remove the rear left cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
c
Figure 2-75
5. Remove the screw (b)(M3x8) of the ISU rear cover (a).

6. Remove two screws (d)(M3x8) of the ISU left cover (c).
7. Lift up the left side of the ISU rear cover (a) and remove the ISU left cover (c).
d c
d
Figure 2-76

8. Pull up the operation unit (a).
9. Insert a finger into the aperture (c) of the ISU front right cover (b) , pull it toward you ,and remove four lower hooks
(d). Unlatch six upper hooks (e) in the direction of the arrow to remove it.
2
a
d
Figure 2-77

11. Release two ribs (d) with a flat-blade screwdriver (c).
12. Detach the eject upper cover (b) in the direction of the arrow.
c a
b
d
c
Figure 2-78

13. Remove the screw (a) (M3×8).
14. Release the hook (c) with a flat-blade screwdriver (b), and then remove the keyboard cover (d) by sliding it.
a
d
Figure 2-79
15. Pass the arm of attaching keyboard mounting bracket (a) through the machine aperture (b) and latch the hook (c)
to the aperture (d). Secure the keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (e)(M4×8).
e e
a
c
b d
Figure 2-80

16. Secure the lower keyboard mounting bracket (a) with two screws (b)(M4x8).
b
b
a
Figure 2-81
17. Latch the hook (b) of the lower lid (a) in the hole (c) of the lower keyboard mounting plate and secure it with the
screw (d) (M3x8, black).
*: Attach it while the hooks come to the punch mark B.
b c b
a
d
Figure 2-82

18. Insert two positioning pins (b) of lower keyboard cover (a) into the holes (d) of the upper keyboard mounting plate
(c) and slide it to the rear.
19. Insert the lower keyboard cover (a) into three hooks (e) on the keyboard mounting plate (a) and two cutouts (f).
f
e
a
c d
b
Figure 2-83
20. Fix the lower keyboard mounting bracket (b) onto the upper keyboard mounting bracket (c) with two screws
(a)(M3x8 P-tite).
c
b
Figure 2-84

21. Insert the upper keyboard cover (a) into the upper keyboard mounting plate (b) to attach it.
Figure 2-85
22. Fix the Upper lid (b) to the lower keyboard mounting bracket (C) with the screw (a)(M3x8 Black).
b a
c
Figure 2-86
23. Affix a pair of hook-and-loop fasteners (c) to the concave (b) of the upper keyboard cover (a).
Figure 2-87

24. Place the keyboard (a) on the hook-and-loop fastener(b) and press it to fix.
25. Connect the USB cable (c) with the USB connector (d) on the main unit.
d
c
a b
Figure 2-88
26. Bundle the surplus length of the cable (a) and hook it on the hook (b) of the main unit.
b
Figure 2-89

Note
In case the card reader (a) is already installed, remove the USB wire (b) of the IC card reader from the hook (c) of the
main unit. Bundle two excess USB wires and hook them on the hook (c) of the main unit again.
c
b
Figure 2-90
27. Push the USB cable (a) to between the ribs of main unit and secure it.
b a
b
Figure 2-91

28. Insert the upper eject cover (b) in the direction of the arrow and secure it in the original position with the screw
(a)(M3×8).
*: Align the cover to the machine front side and secure the screw.
b
2
Figure 2-92
29. Latch six upper hooks (b) and rotate it and four latch lower hooks (e), and reattach the ISU front right cover in the
original position.
Figure 2-93

30. Lift up the left side of ISU rear cover (a) and secure the left ISU cover (c) in original position with two screws
(d)(M3×8).
31. Reattach the screw (b)(M3×8) of the ISU rear cover (a).
d c
d
Figure 2-94
32. Latch two hooks (c) and reattach the left rear cover (b) in the original position with two screws (a) (M3x8).
b
c
Figure 2-95

(9)Cassette heater
(9-1) In the case of main unit cassette (240V models only)
Cassette heater installation requires the following parts:

Cassette heater 240 set (AVGR26315Q)
Bundled parts of cassette heater 240 set

Cassette heater 240
High temperature caution label 1 pc
Heater cover 1 pc
Screws (M3x8 screw with the binding head) 2 pc
Screws (M3x8 P-tite with the binding head) 5 pc
Procedures
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (c) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
c
a
Figure 2-96
4. Turn over the lower cassette (a).
5. Secure the heater cover (c) included in the cassette heater set package at the bottom of the cassette with five
screws (b)(M3×8 P tight).
b
b
b
b
b
c a
Figure 2-97

6. Insert the cassette heater (a) and put two protrusions (b) in two apertures (c) of the rear side plate.
7. Attach one screw (e) (M3×8) to the base (d).
b
e
b
d
Figure 2-98
8. Connect the heater connector (a) to the main unit side connector (b).
9. Put the cable (c) into the rib of the heater holder (d) and fix it.
b
ac
d
Figure 2-99
10. Reattach the parts in the original position.

11. Turn the power on and set maintenance mode U327 [Cassette heater On/Off] to [On].
IMPORTANT
When connecting the cassette heater, do not unplug the power cord. (Power is supplied when the power is switched off)
Also, if unplugged for a prolonged time, it may cause blurred images depending on the environment. In this case, exe-
cute [System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh] .

(9-2) In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7100)
Cassette heater 240 set (AVGR26701A)
Bundled parts of cassette heater 100/120/240 set

Cassette heater 240
Wire saddles 4 pc
Screws (M3x8 with the binding head) 2 pc
Procedures
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and
remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the paper feeder (b) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 2-100
4. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
5. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
*: Make sure the wire does not float.
c b
d b
Figure 2-101

6. Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
Figure 2-102

IMPORTANT

(9-3) In case of Paper Feeder (PF-7110)
Cassette heater 240 set (AVGR26701A)
Bundled parts of cassette heater 100/120/240 set

Cassette heater 240
Wire saddles 4 pc
Screws (M3x8 with the binding head) 2 pc
Procedures
2. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the main unit (e) and
remove it in the direction of the arrow.
3. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the main unit (e) and remove it in the direction of the arrow.
4. Pull out the right paper deck (c) and left paper deck (d) from the paper feeder (f).
a e
b
G
c f
Figure 2-103
5. Secure the cassette heater (a) to the base with two screws (b) (M3x8).
6. Connect the heater connector (c) to the main unit side connector and secure the wire with four wire saddles (d).
7. Make sure the wire does not float.
b
c
b
Figure 2-104

8. Affix the caution label (a) on the groove of the base.
Figure 2-105

IMPORTANT

(9-4) In case of Side Paper Feeder (PF-7120)

Cassette heater 240 sets (AVGR26701A)
Bundled parts of cassette heater 240 sets

Cassette heater 240 assembly
Wire saddles 2 pcs
Edge saddle 1 pc
Screws (M3x8 with the binding head) 4 pcs
Procedures
(Side Paper Feeder side)
2. Remove the connector of the paper feeder at the main unit side.
3. Remove four screws (a) (M3x8) and then remove the rear cover (b).
a
a
a
Figure 2-106
4. Pull out the cassette (a),
a
Figure 2-107

5. Release four bosses (a) and remove the right cover (b) while sliding it in the direction of the arrow.
b a
a
a
Figure 2-108
6. Pass the heater cassette cable (a) through the aperture.

7. Insert the hook (d) of the cassette heater set (c) into two lancings (e) and secure it with two screws (M3×8) (f).
de
a
d
e
b
f
Figure 2-109

8. Connect the connector (b) of cassette heater wire (a) to the connector (c) of the inlet cable.
9. Attach the bundling band with the snap (d), two wire saddles (e) and the edge saddle (f) and secure the wire.
10. Attach the right cover and the rear cover.
f
c
a
e
d
Figure 2-110
(Paper Feeder side)
11. Remove two screws (a)(M3×8) and remove the cover plate (c) from the main unit side paper feeder (b).
a
c
Figure 2-111

12. Connect the connector (b) of the heater outlet set (a) to the paper feeder side connector (c).
13. Attach the heater outlet set (a) with two screws (d)(M3×8).
d
a
Figure 2-112
14. Connect the side feeder (a) to the main unit side paper feeder (b) with the AC cord (c) and the connector wire (d).
a b
Figure 2-113
IMPORTANT

(10)Banner Tray
Installation of banner tray requires the following parts:

Banner Guide 10 (B3332000) ........................... 1 pc
Bundled parts of Banner Guide 10 (1203RP0UN0)

Tray base 1 pc
paper guide A 1 pc
paper guide B 1 pc
paper guide C 1 pc
Procedures
1. Attach the paper guide A (b), the paper guide B (c) and the
paper guide C (d) to the tray base (a).
d
b
c
Figure 2-114
2. Unlock the stopper (a) and move it outward.
a
Figure 2-115

3. Open the multi purpose tray (a).
Figure 2-116
4. Put the banner tray (a) on the MP tray (b) and attach sliding in the direction of the arrow till locking.
b
Figure 2-117
2-4 About Optional Applications
application
Data Security Kit Internet FAX kit
Card Authentication Kit*1 Emulation upgrade kit
ThinPrint Option*1 OCR extension kit*1
*1: This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
*: Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending on the
application.
*: If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Starting Use of an Application

Use the procedure below to start using an application.
1. Select [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login]. Login
with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.

Model Name 40 ppm 50 ppm 60 ppm
model model model
Login User Name 4000 5000 6000
Login Password 4000 5000 6000
2. Select the desired application to start use and select [Activate].

*: You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ] or [Details].
Item
Function
License
Trial Counts
Date of Trial
Status
3. Select [Official] and enter a license key.

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to
Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4. Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
NOTE
If you started the Security Kit or Thin Print option and entered the license key, turn the power OFF/ON. Icons of acti-
vated application are displayed in the Home screen.

2-5 Initializing procedures after installing the FAX system
1. Connect the power plug of the main unit to the
outlet and turn the power on.
4. Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
*: Refer to the following destination code list.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the [Start] key to start data initialization.
*: Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
Destination code list
Destina- Destination Destina- Destination

tion code tion code
000 Japan 253 CTR21 (European nations)
007 Argentina ↑ Italy
009 Australia ↑ Germany
022 Brazil ↑ Spain
038 China ↑ U.K.
080 Hong Kong ↑ Netherlands
084 Indonesia ↑ Sweden
088 Israel ↑ France
097 Korea ↑ Austria
181 U.S.A. ↑ Switzerland
250 Russia ↑ Belgium
108 Malaysia ↑ Denmark
115 Mexico ↑ Finland
126 New Zealand ↑ Portugal
136 Peru ↑ Ireland
137 Philippines ↑ Norway
152 Middle East 254 Taiwan
156 Singapore
159 South Africa
169 Thailand
7. After completing installation, execute communication test to check if FAX normally operates.
IMPORTANT
Note the following points when installing the FAX system in the line via ISDN or PBX.
Check if the line to connect supports the V.34 (Super G3) FAX communication.
Especially, when communicating between extensions in PBX (private line via TDM), only 14400bps or 9600bps of
FAX communication speed is guaranteed and communication errors or TX/RX image failure may occur at V.34 com-
munication in such a line.

Corrective Measures
Set the following maintenance mode if the communication speed guaranteed on the line is 14400bps.
U633 [Enables or disables the V.34 communication]: Off (See page 6-244,)
U630 [Setting TX speed and RX speed] (See page6-239 ,)

3 Machine Design
3-1 Mechanical Configuration
(1) Cross-section view
11
7 6
10
12
5 3
2
Original path / Paper path

Optical path / Paper path (Option)
Figure 3-1
1. Cassette paper feed section 7. Toner container

2. MP paper feed section 8. Drum unit
3. Paper conveying section 9. Transfer and separation section
4. Image scanner unit 10. Fuser section
5. Laser scanner unit 11. Feedshift and eject section
6. Developer unit 12. Duplex conveying section

3-2 Extension device construction (option)
(1) Paper feeder cross-section view (PF-7100)
2
Paper path
Figure 3-2
1. Cassette paper feed section
2 3 1
Paper path
Figure 3-3
1. Right paper feed section 3. Paper conveying section

2. Left paper feed section

1
Paper path
Figure 3-4
1. Paper deck feed section

(4) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7100)
2
1
Original path
Figure 3-5
1. DP document feed section 3. DP original reversing/eject section

2. DP original conveying section
(5) Document processor cross-section view (DP-7110)
2 1
Original path
Figure 3-6
1. DP document feed section 3. DP original eject section

2. DP original conveying section

(6) Attachment kit cross-section view (AK-7100)
1
Paper path
Figure 3-7
1. Exit section 2. Paper conveying section
(7) Inner finisher cross-section view (DF-7100)

2 3 5
Paper path
Figure 3-8
1. Exit section 4. Staple unit

2. Paper conveying section 5. Punch unit (Option)
3. Reversing section for duplex

(8) 4000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7110)
4 2 1
Paper path
Figure 3-9
1. Punch unit 4. Eject section (tray B)

2. Paper conveying section 5. Eject section (tray A)
3. Staple unit

(9) 1000-sheet Finisher cross-section view (DF-7120)
2 1
4
Paper path
Figure 3-10
1. Punch unit 3. Staple unit

2. Paper conveying section 4. Eject section (main tray)

(10)Mailbox cross-section view (MT-730(B))
Paper path
Figure 3-11
1. Paper conveying section 3. Eject section (upper tray: DF)

2. Eject section (mail tray)

(11)Folding unit cross-section view (BF-730)
4 3 2
Paper path
Figure 3-12
1. Paper conveying section 3. Paper folding section

2. Staple unit 4. Exit section

(12)Job separator cross-section view (JS-7100)
Paper path
Figure 3-13
5. Eject section (tray)

3-3 Paper conveying and Paper detection
(1) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7100+DF-7100+PH-7110
T
A
H
I
C
Figure 3-14

(2) Main unit+DP-7110+PF-7110+PF-7120+AK-7100+DF-7110+MT-730(B)+
DF-7110+BF-730+PH-7
M
K
Q
J 66xx J
O
O O U
P
H
O
T F
A
H
B
R
I
E C
Figure 3-15

(3) Main unit+DP-7100+PF-7110+AK-7100+DF-7120+PH-7
N N
N U
N
H
T
A H
I
E C
Figure 3-16
[Paper jam] K. Paper jam at the mailbox

A. Paper jam at cassette 1 L. Inner finisher
B. Paper jam at cassette 2 M. Paper jam at the document processor
C. Paper jam at 550-sheet×2 cassette 3 N. Paper jam at the 1000-sheet finisher
C. Paper jam at 1750-sheet×2 cassette 3 O. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(inner)
D. Paper jam at 550-sheet×2 cassette 4 P. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(tray A)
E. Paper jam at 1750-sheet×2 cassette 4 Q. Paper jam at the 4000-sheet finisher(tray B)
F. Paper jam at cassette 5 (side paper feeder) R. Paper jam at the folding unit
G. Paper jam at the MP tray S. Paper jam at the folding tray
H. Paper jam at right cover 1 T. Paper jam at the conveying section
I. Paper jam at right cover 2 U. Paper jam at the duplex unit
J. Paper jam at the bridge conveying section V. Paper jam at the registration section

3-4 Electric parts
(1) Wire connection
(1-1) (Machine rear side)
Figure 3-17
1. Main PWB 4. Feed image PWB

2. Engine PWB 5. Feed drive PWB
3. Main high-voltage PWB

(1-2) Backside of the shield box
Figure 3-18
6. Transfer high-voltage PWB

7. Power source PWB

(2) Descriptions about the major PWBs
(2-1) Main PWB
It controls the software for the interface and

image data processing, and the hardware
generating operation section.
Figure 3-19
(2-2) Engine PWB
It controls the hardware for the generation

of the high-voltage and the bias, the image
scanner unit, and the paper conveying sys-
tem.
Figure 3-20

(2-3) Main high-voltage PWB
Output the main charger high-voltage and

the developer bias.
Figure 3-21
(2-4) Transfer high-voltage PWB
Output the transfer bias, separation bias

and transfer cleaning bias.
Figure 3-22

(2-5) Power source PWB
The input voltage (AC) from the AC power

supply is changed to DC such as DC24V.
Figure 3-23
(2-6) IH PWB
It controls the fuser IH.
Figure 3-24
(2-7) Operation panel main PWB
It consists of the wiring relay circuit for the

main PWB, the operation panel sub PWB
and the LCD.
Figure 3-25

(3) Electric parts layout
(3-1) PWBs
Primary transfer unit
Developer unit
16
12
Laser scanner unit 13
Drum unit
14 22 15 1
20 8 2
18 Main unit
24
Fuser unit
IH unit
21 3
10
25 11 23
7
4
17 25
Machine front side

Machine inside
Machine rear side
6 5
Figure 3-26

1. Main PWB ............................................. Controlling the entire software to control the interface to the PC
and network and image data process, etc. Controlling the entire
hardware to control operation section.
2. Engine PWB.......................................... Controlling the hardware such as electric parts drive, high volt-
age, bias output, image scanner unit, paper conveying, fuser tem-
perature, etc.
3. Feed image PWB.................................. Consisting of the engine PWB and wiring relay circuit for drum
units, developer units, fuser drive section and eject drive section.
4. Feed drive PWB.................................... Consisting of the engine PWB, and relay circuit for the paper feed
drive section and paper conveying drive section.
5. Main high-voltage PWB ........................ Generating the main charger high-voltage and the developer bias.
6. Power source PWB............................... Rectifying the AC power input to the full-wave and converting it to
DC.
7. Transfer connect PWB .......................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for the
transfer PWB.
8. Transfer high-voltage PWB ................... Generating the transfer bias, separation bias and transfer clean-
ing bias.
9. Transfer PWB........................................ Storing the drum unique data in an EEPROM. Wiring connection
PWB for the belt cleaning motor, belt thermistor and feed image
PWB.
10. Operation panel main PWB .................. It consists of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for the opera-
tion panel sub PWB and the LCD.
11. Operation panel sub PWB .................... Consisting of the LED indicator and the key switches.
12. APC PWB ............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
13. PD PWB................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
14. LED PWB.............................................. Controlling the LED.
15. CCD PWB ............................................. Scanning the original image.
16. Developer PWB BK............................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit.
17. Drum relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the feed image PWB and wiring relay circuit for
drum units, developer units.
18. Drum PWB BK ...................................... Wiring relay to the electric parts inside drum unit. Storing the drum
unique data in an EEPROM.
19. Fuser PWB............................................ Wiring relay to the electric parts inside developer unit. Storing the
drum unique data in an EEPROM.
20. IH PWB ................................................. Controlling the fuser IH.
21. NFC PWB ............................................. Antenna circuit for wireless communication.
22. RFID PWB ............................................ Reading the toner container information.
23. USB hub PWB ...................................... USB slot distribution.
24. KUIO relay PWB ................................... Consisting of the main PWB and wiring relay circuit for FAX
PWB.
25. Fuser high-voltage PWB ....................... Discharging the fuser belt.

Part name table
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
1 Main PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY EU SP AVGR26302E
2 Engine PWB PARTS PWB ENGINE ASSY SP AVGR26303A
3 Feed image PWB PARTS PWB FEED IMAGE ASSY SP AVGR26256W
4 Feed drive PWB PARTS PWB FEED DRIVE ASSY SP AVGR26294S
5 Main high-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN AVGR26311P

SP
6 Power source PWB AVGR26309U
PARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 200 SP
7 Transfer connect PWB PARTS PWB1 TRANSFER CONNECT AVGR26019U
ASSY SP
8 Transfer high-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE AVGR26313X
TRANS-FER SP
AVGR26210L
9 Transfer PWB TR-6500
10 Operation panel main PWB AVGR26300Z
PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN ASSY SP
11 Operation panel sub PWB AVGR26299X
PARTS PWB OPERATION ASSY SP
AVGR26206D
12 APC PWB LK-6500
13 PD PWB AVGR26206D
LK-6500
14 LED PWB AVGR26194Y
PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP
15 CCD PWB AVGR26188Y
PARTS ISU ASSY H SP
16 Developer PWB BK AVGR26207H
DV-8550K
PARTS PWB DRUM DLP CONNECT
17 Drum/Developer relay PWB AVGR26016F
ASSY SP
18 Drum PWB DK-8550 AVGR26208W
19 Fuser PWB FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
20 IH PWB PARTS PWB IH 200 ASSY SP AVGR26308Y
21 NFC PWB PARTS PWB NFC ASSY SP AVGR26298T

22 RFID PWB PARTS PWB RFID ASSY SP AVGR26259K
23 USB hub PWB PARTS PWB USB HUB ASSY SP AVGR26205Z
24 KUIO relay PWB PARTS PWB KUIO ASSY SP AVGR15033X

PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE FUSER
25 Fuser high-voltage PWB AVGR260205
SP

(3-2) Sensors and Switches
23
Developer unit
25
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
15 24 14
Fuser unit
IH unit
28
39
40
41
48
Main unit
46
38
52
53 11
27 37 36 42 45
44 26
51 43
29 55 34 16
7 9
47 4
57 21
17 49
32
58 1
8 3
35 12
54
Machine front side

Machine inside
Machine rear side 6
19 30 5 2 33 50
56 10 18 31 22 13 20
Figure 3-27

1. Paper sensor 1...................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette 1.
2. Paper sensor 2...................................... Detecting presence of paper in the cassette 2.
3. Lower paper gauge sensor 1 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 1.
4. Upper paper gauge sensor 1 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 1.
5. Lower paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 2.
6. Upper paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the cassette 2.
7. Paper length sensor 1........................... Detecting the paper length in the cassette 1.
8. Paper length sensor 2........................... Detecting the paper length in the cassette 2.
9. Paper width sensor 1 ............................ Detecting the paper width in the cassette 1.
10. Paper width sensor 2 ............................ Detecting the paper width in the cassette 2.
11. Duplex sensor 1 .................................... Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
12. Duplex sensor 2 .................................... Detecting paper jam at the duplex section.
13. Conveying sensor ................................. Detecting paper jam at the paper conveying section.
14. Original size sensor .............................. Detecting the original size
15. Home position sensor ........................... Detecting the position of the image scanner unit.
16. ID sensor rear ....................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
17. ID sensor front ..................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
18. MP tray sensor...................................... Detecting the MP tray is pulled out.
19. MP conveying sensor............................ Detecting paper jam at the MP paper conveying section.
20. MP paper sensor................................... Detecting the presence of paper on the MP tray.
21. MP paper length sensor........................ Detecting the MP paper length.
22. MP paper width sensor ......................... Detecting the MP paper width.
23. T/C sensor BK....................................... Detecting the toner density in the developer unit (Black)
24. Toner level sensor BK ........................... Detecting the toner level in the developer unit (Black)
25. Belt thermistor....................................... Detecting the transfer belt temperature.
26. Belt release sensor ............................... Detecting the transfer belt release position.
27. Front belt rotation sensor ...................... Detecting the fuser rotation position
28. Rear belt rotation sensor....................... Detecting the fuser rotation position
29. Belt roll-up sensor ................................. Detecting the fuser belt roll-up
30. Retard sensor 1 .................................... Detecting the retard roller rotation of cassette 1
31. Retard sensor 2 .................................... Detecting the retard roller rotation of cassette 2
32. Lift upper limit sensor 1......................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the
cassette 1.
33. Lift upper limit sensor 2......................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the
cassette 2.
34. Registration sensor ............................... Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding.
35. Weight detection sensor ....................... Detecting the waste toner box weight
36. Fuser jam sensor .................................. Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section.
37. Press-release sensor ............................ Detecting the mode of the fuser pressure.
38. IH position sensor ................................. Detecting the IH core home position.
39. Fuser thermistor 1 (middle)................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (middle)
40. Fuser thermistor 2 (center) ................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (center)
41. Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) ..................... Detecting the heat roller (fuser belt) temperature. (edge)
42. Fuser thermistor 4 (press)..................... Detecting the press roller temperature.
43. Eject reversing sensor .......................... Detecting jam at the eject section.
44. Lower eject full sensor .......................... Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
45. Upper eject full sensor .......................... Detecting the paper-full on the inner tray.
46. Job separator sensor ............................ Detecting the paper-full on the job separator or attachment kit.
47. Front cover switch................................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the front cover is
opened and reset.
48. Original sensor...................................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
49. PF setting switch................................... Detecting the paper feeder.
50. Main power switch ................................ AC power shutdown.

51. Power switch......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB
and the operation panel PWB, etc.
52. Conveying open/close switch................ Detecting the conveying section open/close.
53. Waste toner full sensor ......................... Detecting the waste toner box full.
54. Right cover switch................................. Detecting the right cover open/close.
55. Temperature/humidity sensor
(outside machine) ................................. Detecting the temperature and humidity outside the main unit.
56. MP position switch ................................ Detecting the MP bottom plate position
57. Cassette sensor 1 ................................. Detecting the cassette 1.
58. Cassette sensor 2 ................................. Detecting the cassette 2.

PF setting switchPart name table
1 MP paper sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
2 MP paper sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
3 Lower paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
4 Upper paper gauge sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
5 Lower paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
6 Upper paper gauge sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
7 Paper length sensor 1 SW.PUSH AVGR26025U
8 Paper length sensor 2 SW.PUSH AVGR26025U
9 Paper width sensor 1 SW.PUSH AVGR19883V
10 Paper width sensor 2 SW.PUSH AVGR19883V
11 Duplex sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
12 Duplex sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
13 Conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
14 Original size sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT SP AVGR26195U
15 Home position sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
16 ID sensor rear PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP AVGR26305T
17 ID sensor front PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP AVGR26305T
18 MP tray sensor SW.PUSH AVGR19883V
19 MP conveying sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR15387S
20 MP paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
21 MP paper length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
22 PARTS PWB PAPER SIZE SENSOR
MP paper width sensor AVGR26115L
ASSY SP
23 T/C sensor BK DV-8550K AVGR26207H
24 Toner level sensor BK PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP AVGR26021T
25 Belt thermistor TR-6500 AVGR26210L
26 Belt release sensor DR-6500 AVGR26253Z
27 Front belt rotation sensor FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
28 Rear belt rotation sensor FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
29 Belt roll-up sensorDetecting the
PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR15645L
fuser belt roll-up
30 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 1 AVGR26097K
SP
31 PARTS PWB RETARD SENSOR ASSY
Retard sensor 2 AVGR26097K
SP
32 Lift upper limit sensor 1 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
33 Lift upper limit sensor 2 PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
34 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR15655M

35 Weight detection sensor - -
36 Fuser jam sensor FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
37 Fuser pressure release sensor FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
38 IH position sensor FK-8595IH AVGR26213V
39 Fuser thermistor 1 (middle) FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
40 Fuser thermistor 2 (center) FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
41 Fuser thermistor 3 (edge) FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
42 Fuser thermistor 4 (press) AVGR26212Z

FK-8550
43 Eject reversing sensor AVGR24752X
PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP
44 Lower eject full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
45 Upper eject full sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
46 Job separator sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
47 Front cover switch SW.PUSH AVGR19883V
48 Original sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP AVGR24752X
49 PF setting switch INTER LOCK SWITCH AVGR02141X
50 Main power switch SW.SEESAW AVGR19542W
51 Power switch PWB SWITCH ASSY AVGR19868H
52 Conveying open/close switch SW.PUSH AVGR19883V
53 Waste toner full sensor - -
54 Right cover switch INTER LOCK SWITCH AVGR02141X
55 Temperature/humidity sensor (out-
PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP AVGR24819C
side machine)
56 MP position switch SW.PUSH AVGR19883V
57 Cassette sensor 1 SW.PUSH AVGR19883V
58 Cassette sensor 2 SW.PUSH AVGR19883V

(3-3) Motors
15
Developer unit
Laser scanner unit 4
Drum unit
8
9
20
Main unit
Fuser unit
IH unit
2
1 29
31
16
22
27 6
19 17
18 14
26 10
30 28
13
Machine front side

Machine inside
Machine rear side
23 25 7 21 12 11 24
Figure 3-28

1. IH core motor ........................................ Driving the IH core.
2. Scanner motor ...................................... Driving the optical section.
3. Polygon motor....................................... Driving polygon mirror.
4. LSU cleaning motor .............................. Driving the LSU glass cleaning mechanism.
5. Belt cleaning motor ............................... Driving the primary transfer belt cleaning roller.
6. Belt isolation motor ............................... Driving the primary transfer belt separation.
7. MP lift motor.......................................... Operates the MP plate.
8. Container motor .................................... Driving container
9. Toner motor BK ..................................... Supplying the toner to developer unit.(Black)
10. Drum motor BK ..................................... Driving the drum unit.(Black)
11. Lift motor 1 ............................................ Operating the bottom plate inside the cassette 1.
12. Lift motor 2 ............................................ Operating the bottom plate inside the cassette 2.
13. Paper feed motor .................................. Driving the paper feed.
14. Developer BK / Belt motor .................... Driving the developer unit BK and the paper feed section.
15. Vibration motor BK................................ Vibrating the developer unit BK.
16. Fuser motor........................................... Driving the fuser section.
17. Fuser isolation motor ............................ Driving the fuser pressure release.
18. Waste toner motor................................. Driving the waste toner mechanism.
19. Eject reversing motor ............................ Driving the eject section.
20. IH PWB fan motor ................................. Cooling the IH PWB.
21. Toner sucking fan motor........................ Sucking scattering waste toner.
22. Controller fan motor .............................. Cooling the main PWB
23. Developer fan motor BK........................ Cooling the developer.
24. Fuser edge fan motor............................ Cooling the fuser belt edge.
25. Power source fan motor........................ Cooling the power source PWB and high-voltage PWB.
26. Front eject/IH fan motor ....................... Eject paper/IH cooling.
27. Middle eject/IH fan motor ..................... Eject paper/IH cooling.
28. Container fan motor .............................. Cooling container/toner hopper.
29. Eject fan motor...................................... Cooling the eject section.
30. Vibration motor BK................................ Vibrating the waste toner duct BK.
31. Container cooling fan motor .................. Cooling container.

Part name table
1 IH core motor FK-8595IH AVGR26213V
2 Scanner motor PARTS MOTOR ISU SP AVGR19473T
3 Polygon motor LK-6500 AVGR26206D
4 LSU cleaning motor LK-6500 AVGR26206D
5 Belt cleaning motor TR-6500 AVGR26210L
6 Belt isolation motor DR-6500 AVGR26253Z
7 MP lift motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY A SP AVGR26156U
8 Container motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 SET SP -
9 Toner motor BK PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP -
PARTS MOTOR-BL W20 DRUM Z11
10 Drum motor BK AVGR26255J
SET SP
11 Lift motor 1 MOTOR LIFT ASSY AVGR26028Z
12 Lift motor 2 MOTOR LIFT ASSY AVGR26028Z
13 Paper feed motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 ASSY SP AVGR26290U

PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 DRUM SET
14 Developer BK / Belt motor AVGR26254N
SP
15 Vibration motor BK DV-8550K AVGR26207H
16 Fuser motor MOTOR-BL W20 ASSY SP AVGR26266X
17 Fuser isolation motor PARTS DC MOTOR ASSY B SP AVGR26260R
18 Waste toner motor - -
19 Eject reversing motor PARTS MOTOR SWITCHBACK SP AVGR26240P
20 IH PWB fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING DLP 70 SP AVGR15453Y
21 Toner sucking fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP AVGR15464N
22 Controller fan motor FAN BOX COOLING AVGR09569Z
23 Developer fan motor BK FAN IMAGE AVGR09495H
PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 ASSY

24 Fuser edge fan motor AVGR15464N
SP
25 Power source fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP AVGR14837L
26 Front eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP AVGR26018Y
27 Middle eject/IH fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 25 SP AVGR26018Y
28 Container fan motor PARTS FAN CENTER 60 15 SP AVGR26310N
29 Eject fan motor FAN LSU 60-25 -
30 Vibration motor BK PARTS TONER HOPPER H UNIT SP -
31 Container cooling fan motor PARTS FAN COOLING LSU 60 SP -

(3-4) Others
Developer unit
16
Laser scanner unit
Drum unit
15,19 12 13 18 17
Fuser unit
IH unit
Main unit
23 7
9
11 1
2
3
20
10
Machine front side

Machine inside
Machine rear side
4 5 6 8
Figure 3-29

1. Duplex clutch 1 ..................................... Controlling the duplex drive.
2. Duplex clutch 2 ..................................... Controlling the duplex drive.
3. MP clutch .............................................. Controlling the primary paper feeding from the MP tray.
4. Registration clutch ................................ Controlling the secondary paper feeding from the cassette.
5. Paper feed clutch 1 ............................... Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette 1.
6. Paper feed clutch 2 ............................... Controlling the primary paper feeding from the cassette 2.
7. Developer clutch ................................... Controlling the drive to developer unit.(Black)
8. Vertical conveying clutch....................... Controlling the MP tray conveying drive.
9. Middle clutch ......................................... Controlling the conveying section drive.
10. Cleaning solenoid ................................. Cleaning the ID sensor.
11. Container solenoid BK .......................... Releasing the container lock (Black).
12. Lower eject solenoid ............................. Operates the feedshift guide.
13. Upper eject solenoid ............................. Operates the feedshift guide.
14. HDD ...................................................... Hard disk (HDD)
15. LCD....................................................... Displaying the operation screen.
16. Cleaning lamp BK ................................. Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum.(Black)
17. Fuser thermostat................................... Prevention of the abnormal IH belt heating.
18. Speaker................................................. Generating the panel touch sound and error sound.
19. Touch panel........................................... Converting the operation position data.
20. Drum heater BK .................................... Prevention of the drum surface condensation.

Part name table
1 Duplex clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP AVGR26150N
2 Duplex clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP AVGR26150N
3 MP clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SPRING SP AVGR26150N
4 Registration clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 AVGR26064U
5 Paper feed clutch 1 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP AVGR26064U
6 Paper feed clutch 2 PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP AVGR26064U
7 Developer clutch DR-6500 AVGR26253Z
8 Vertical conveying clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP AVGR26064U
9 Middle clutch CLUTCH 35 Z35 AVGR26064U
10 Cleaning solenoid PARTS ID SENSOR ASSY SP AVGR26305T
11 Lower eject solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT AVGR15385J
12 Upper eject solenoid PARTS SOLENOID FEED SHIFT AVGR15385J
13 HDD PARTS STORAGE DEVICE SP AVGR26314L
14 LCD PARTS LCD OPERATION SP AVGR26297E
15 Cleaning lamp BK DK-8550 AVGR26208W
16 Fuser thermostat FK-8550 AVGR26212Z
17 Touch panel PARTS TABLET OPERATION SP AVGR26296A
18 Drum heater BK PARTS PWB DRUM HEATER ASSY

AVGR26015T
SP

3-5 Electric parts (Optional unit)
(1) Electric parts layout
(1-1) Document processor (DP-7100)
17 2
13
16 19
15
1
8 7
9 11
4
3 12
14 6
10
18
Machine front side / Machine inside / Machine rear side
1. DP main PWB ....................................... Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electric
parts.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7. DP paper feed sensor ........................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8. DP registration sensor .......................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
9. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.
10. DP feedshift sensor............................... Detecting the position of the feedshift guide in the document pro-
cessor.
11. DP eject sensor..................................... Detecting the document processor eject paper.
12. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
inside the document processor.
13. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate

14. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
15. DP lift motor .......................................... Driving the document processor original bottom plate.
16. DP feed motor....................................... Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
17. DP conveying motor.............................. Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
18. DP feedshift motor ................................ Driving the original feedshift section in the document processor.
19. DP reversing motor ............................... Driving the original reversing section in the document processor.
(1-2) Document processor (DP-7110)

18
21
17
9
12 16
15 20
14 7 19
11 1
8
22
4 5
13 6
3
10
1. DP main PWB ....................................... Consisting of the engine PWB and relay circuit for the DP electric
parts.
2. DP top cover switch .............................. Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the top cover is
opened.
3. DP open/close sensor........................... Detecting the opening and closing of the document processor.
4. DP original sensor................................. Detecting the presence of the original in the document processor.
5. DP original width sensor ....................... Detecting the original width in the document processor.
6. DP original length sensor...................... Detecting the original length in the document processor.
7. DP paper feed sensor ........................... Detects the primary feed timing of the document processor.
8. DP timing sensor................................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Front page)
9. DP backside timing sensor ................... Detecting the timing to scan the original in the document proces-
sor.(Back page)
10. DP eject sensor..................................... Detecting the document processor eject paper.

11. DP lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the original bottom plate
12. DP lift lower limit sensor........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the original bottom plate
13. DPLED PWB......................................... Document processor original set indication or original jam indica-
tion.
14. DPSHD PWB ........................................ Processing the scanned image data in the document processor.
15. DPCIS ................................................... Scanning the backside original data in the document processor.
16. DP lift motor .......................................... Driving the document processor original bottom plate.
17. DP feed motor....................................... Driving the original feed section in the document processor.
18. DP registration motor ............................ Driving the original registration section in the document proces-
sor.
19. DP conveying motor.............................. Driving the original conveying section in the document processor
20. DP eject motor ...................................... Driving the original eject section in the document processor.
21. DP drive fan motor ................................ Cooling the document processor drive section.
22. DPCIS fan motor................................... Cooling the CIS PWB in the document processor. Document pro-
cessor (DP-7120)

(1-3) Paper feeder (PF-7100)
1
26
11
9 19 17 22
5 15 24
6
10 3
27 12 2
8 21
13
7 23
18
20 4 25
14 16
28
Figure 3-30
1. PF main PWB ....................................... Controlling the electric parts in the PF.
2. PF right cover switch............................. Detecting the right cover open/close.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the upper cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the lower cassette.
5. Upper PF paper gauge sensor 1........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cas-
sette.
6. Lower PF paper gauge sensor 1........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the upper cas-
sette.
7. Upper paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cas-
sette.
8. Lower paper gauge sensor 2 ................ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the lower cas-
sette.
9. PF paper width switch 1 ........................ Detecting the paper width in the upper cassette.
10. PF paper width switch 2 ........................ Detecting the paper width in the lower cassette.
11. PF paper length switch 1 ...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of upper cassette.
12. PF paper length switch 2 ...................... Detecting the paper length and presence of lower cassette.
13. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of upper cassette.
14. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of lower cassette.
15. PF conveying sensor 1 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the upper paper conveying section.
16. PF conveying sensor 2 ......................... Detecting paper jam at the lower paper conveying section.
17. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 .................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the
upper cassette.
lower cassette.
19. PF lift motor 1........................................ Operating the bottom plate inside the upper cassette.
20. PF lift motor 2........................................ Operating the bottom plate inside the lower cassette.
21. PF feed motor ....................................... Driving the paper feeding system.
22. PF paper feed clutch 1.......................... Controlling the primary paper feeding from the upper cassette.

23. PF paper feed clutch 2.......................... Controlling the primary paper feeding from the lower cassette.
24. PF conveying clutch 1........................... Controlling the paper conveying section from the upper cassette.
25. PF conveying clutch 2........................... Controlling the paper conveying section from the lower cassette.
26. PF cassette switch 1 ............................. Detecting presence of the upper cassette.
27. PF cassette switch 2 ............................. Detecting presence of the lower cassette.
28. PF cassette heater................................ Dehumidifying paper.

1
19
14
4 21
20
16 11
18
7 22
8 17
10 24 12 2
13
5
15
3
6
9 23
25
Figure 3-31
2. PF right cover switch............................. Detecting the right cover open/close.
3. PF paper sensor 1 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the right cassette.
4. PF paper sensor 2 ................................ Detecting presence of paper in the left cassette.
5. PF upper paper gauge sensor 1 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the right cas-
sette.
6. PF lower paper gauge sensor 1 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the right cas-
sette.
7. PF upper paper gauge sensor 2 ........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the left cassette.
8. PF lower paper gauge sensor 2 ............ Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the left cassette.
9. PF retard sensor 1 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of right cassette.
10. PF retard sensor 2 ................................ Detecting the retard roller rotation of left cassette.
11. PF horizontal conveying sensor ............ Detecting paper jam at the horizontal paper conveying section.
12. PF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting paper jam at the vertical paper conveying section.
right cassette.
left cassette.
15. PF lift motor 1........................................ Operating the bottom plate inside the right cassette.
16. PF lift motor 2........................................ Operating the bottom plate inside the left cassette.
17. PF feed motor ....................................... Driving the paper feeding section.
18. Right PF paper feed clutch 1 ................ Controlling the primary paper feeding from the right cassette.
19. Left PF paper feed clutch 2 ................... Controlling the primary paper feeding from the left cassette.
20. PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 .......... Controlling the right horizontal paper conveying.
21. PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 .......... Controlling the right horizontal paper conveying.

22. PF vertical conveying clutch ................. Controlling the vertical paper conveying.
23. PF cassette switch 1 ............................. Detecting presence of the right cassette.
24. PF cassette switch 2 ............................. Detecting presence of the lower cassette.

13 9
2
11
5
10 8
1
7
12
3
6
4
14

2. PF paper sensor ................................... Detecting presence of paper in the paper deck.
3. Upper PF paper gauge sensor 1........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the paper deck.
4. Lower PF paper gauge sensor 2........... Detecting the level of the remaining paper inside the paper deck.
5. PF lift upper limit sensor ....................... Detecting the upper limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the
paper deck.
6. PF lift lower limit sensor ........................ Detecting the lower limit when lifting the bottom plate inside the
paper deck.
7. PF lift motor........................................... Operating the bottom plate inside the deck.
8. PF conveying motor .............................. Controlling the paper conveying.
9. PF paper feed clutch............................. Controlling the primary paper feeding from the deck.
10. PF paper feed solenoid......................... Switching the paper feeding section.
11. PF zero sensor......................................
12. PF deck detection switch ...................... Detecting the PF deck installation.
13. PF connection switch ............................ PF connection detection with the main unit

(1-6) Inner finisher (DF-7100)
7
6
9 10
11
1 8
5 4
21 17
18 15 23
25 20
19
27
12 24
13
22
16
26
14 3 2
Figure 3-32
1. DF main PWB ....................................... Controlling the electric parts.
2. DF staple relay PWB............................. Relaying the staple unit control signals.
3. DF front cover switch ............................ 24V power supply line shutoff when the front cover is open, inter-
lock switch.
4. DF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting presence of paper at the paper entry section.
5. DF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting the adjusting DF plate front home position.
6. DF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting the adjusting DF plate rear home position.
7. DF adjusting sensor .............................. Detecting the paper guides home position.
8. DF bundle eject sensor ......................... Detecting the bundle eject unit position.
9. DF eject sensor..................................... Detecting presence of paper the eject section.
10. DF paper press sensor 1 ...................... Detecting the bundle eject paper pressure.(Upper limit)
11. DF paper press sensor 2 ...................... Detecting the bundle eject paper pressure.(Lower limit)
12. DF paddle sensor.................................. Detecting the paddle home position.
13. DF tray sensor ...................................... Detecting the eject tray lower limit.
14. DF slide sensor ..................................... Detecting the staple unit slide position.
15. DF paper entry motor ............................ Driving the entry roller.
16. DF middle motor ................................... Driving the middle roller.
17. DF paddle motor ................................... Driving the paper guides.
18. DF eject release motor.......................... Driving the bundle eject unit.
19. DF side registration motor 1.................. Driving the adjusting plate front.
20. DF side registration motor 2.................. Driving the adjusting plate rear.
21. DF eject motor ...................................... Driving the eject roller.
22. DF tray motor ....................................... Eject tray ascending and descending drive.
23. DF slide motor....................................... Staple unit sliding drive.
24. DF staple unit........................................ Paper stapler.
25. DF paper press solenoid....................... Switching the bundle paper pressure.

26. DF connection sensor ........................... DF connection detection with the main unit (connection detec-
tion).
27. DF release LED .................................... Lit when releasing the inner finisher.
(1-7) Attachment kit (AK-7100)
4
1 5
2 3
Figure 3-33
1. BR main PWB ....................................... Controlling the electric parts in the BR.

2. BR cover switch .................................... Detecting the BR cover open/close.
3. BR conveying sensor 1 ......................... Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.(right side)
4. BR conveying sensor 2 ......................... Detecting paper conveyed in the bridge.(left side)
5. BR conveying motor.............................. Controlling the paper conveying to the bridge.
6. BR job separator sensor ....................... Detecting the job separator eject paper.

(1-8) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)
24 39
41 26 23 32 27 36
47 30
49 29
48
31
45
16
25
3 40 13 44
28 14 11 12 42
34 10 17 7
37 35
8 18
5 43
38
22 6
15 9 33
2
46 19
1
4
21
20
Figure 3-34

3. DF operation PWB ................................ Consisting of LEDs and keys.
4. DF front cover switch ............................ Detecting the front cover open/close.
5. DF eject cover switch............................ Detecting the eject cover open/close.
7. DF middle sensor.................................. Detecting presence of paper in the conveying section.
12. DF drum sensor .................................... Paper detection at the relief drum.
14. DF bundle eject switch.......................... Detecting the bundle eject unit position.
15. DF tray upper surface sensor 1 ............ Detecting the DF main tray paper upper surface.
17. DF tray sensor 1 ................................... Detecting the eject tray home position.
19. DF tray sensor 3 ................................... Detecting the eject tray middle position.
20. DF tray sensor 4 ................................... Detecting the eject tray lower limit.
21. DF tray sensor 5 ................................... Detecting the eject tray lower limit.(when the folding unit is
installed)
23. DF shift set sensor ................................ Detecting the shift guide home position.
24. DF shift release sensor ......................... Detecting the shift guide release position.
25. DF shift sensor 1................................... Detecting the front shift plate home position.
26. DF shift sensor 2................................... Detecting the rear shift plate home position.
27. DF sub eject sensor .............................. Detecting paper ejected to the tray B.
28. DF sub tray full sensor .......................... Detecting tray B paper full.
35. DF relief drum motor ............................. Driving the relief drum.
39. DF shift release motor........................... Detecting the shift guide release position.
40. DF shift motor 1 .................................... Driving the rear shift guide.
41. DF shift motor 2 .................................... Driving the front shift guide.
42. DF Feedshift solenoid 1 ........................ Switching the feedshift guide.
45. DF eject clutch ...................................... Driving the eject roller.
47. DF Eject fan motor 1 ............................. Cooling the eject paper.(rear) (not connected)
48. DF Eject fan motor 2 ............................. Cooling the eject paper.(front) (not connected)
49. DF Eject fan motor 3 ............................. Cooling the eject paper.(center) (not connected)

(1-9) 1000-sheet Finisher (DF-7120)
26
24
9
11 22
4
14 23
19
8 10
12 15
25
21
6 16 27
20
13 7
17
18 1
5
28 2
Figure 3-35

3. DF front cover switch ............................ Detecting the front cover open/close.
4. DF top cover switch .............................. Detecting the DF top cover open/close.
6. DF middle sensor.................................. Detecting presence of paper in the conveying section.
11. DF bundle eject switch.......................... Detecting the bundle eject unit position.
16. DF tray sensor 2 ................................... Detecting the eject tray middle position.
17. DF tray sensor 3 ................................... Detecting the eject tray lower limit.

(1-10) Mailbox (MT-730(B))
3
4 1
10
5
6
7
8
9
2
13
11
12
Figure 3-36
1. MB main PWB....................................... Controlling electric parts of the mailbox.

2. MB cover switch.................................... Detecting the mail box cover open/close.
3. MB tray sensor 1................................... Detecting overflow of paper ejected to the tray 1.
10. MB tray eject sensor 1 (photo receptor) Detecting paper jam.
11. MB tray eject sensor 2 (photo emitter).. Emitting LED pulses.
12. MB home position sensor ..................... Controlling the mailbox drive motor.
13. MB conveying motor ............................. Driving the mailbox paper conveying.

(1-11) Punch unit (PH-7)
4
2
3
7 10
11
8
5
6 1
Figure 3-37
1. Punch main PWB.................................. Controlling the electric parts of the punch unit.
2. Punch home position sensor................. Detecting the punch cam home position.
3. Punch pulse sensor .............................. Controlling the punch cam rotation.
4. Punch slide sensor................................ Detecting the punch unit home position.
5. Punch dust tank full sensor................... Detecting the punch dust tank full.
6. Punch paper edge sensor 1.................. Detecting the paper edge.
7. Punch paper edge sensor 2.................. Detecting the paper edge.
8. Punch dust tank switch ......................... Detecting the presence of the punch dust tank.
9. Punch motor.......................................... Driving the punch unit.
10. Punch slide motor ................................. Driving the punch unit.
11. Punch solenoid ..................................... Switching the punch holes.(Except 100 V model)

(1-12) Folding unit (BF-730)
22 16
12
23
13
6 10
8
3 9
4
19
2 7 21
17
18
11 20 1
15
14
Figure 3-38
1. BF main PWB ....................................... Controlling the electric parts of the folding unit.
2. BF tray switch ....................................... Detecting the folding tray open/close.
3. BF left cover switch ............................... Detecting the BF left cover open/close.
4. BF paper entry sensor .......................... Detecting paper entering into the folding unit.
5. BF vertical conveying sensor ................ Detecting paper on the BF bridge section.
6. BF paper sensor ................................... Detecting paper on the folding bridge section.
7. BF adjusting sensor 1 ........................... Detecting lower BF moving plate home position.
8. BF adjusting sensor 2 ........................... Detecting upper BF moving plate home position.
9. BF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting BF side registration guide home position.
10. BF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting BF side registration guide home position.
11. BF blade sensor.................................... Detecting BF blade home position.
12. BF eject sensor ..................................... Detecting paper ejected to the folding tray.
13. BF tray full sensor ................................. Detecting folding tray paper full.
14. BF switch .............................................. Detecting the folding unit.
15. BF main motor ...................................... Driving the folding conveying.
16. BF paper entry motor ............................ Driving the entry roller.
17. BF blade motor Driving the BF blade.
18. BF adjusting motor 1............................. Driving lower folding adjustor plate.
19. BF adjusting motor 2............................. Driving upper folding adjustor plate.
20. BF side registration sensor 1 ................ Detecting the lower BF side registration guide home position.
21. BF side registration sensor 2 ................ Detecting the upper BF side registration guide home position.
22. BF staple motor Driving the BF staple.
23. BF feedshift solenoid ............................ Operates the BF feedshift guide.

(1-13) Job separator (JS-7100)
Figure 3-39
1. JS eject paper sensor ........................... Detecting presence of the job tray paper.

3-6 Drive system
(1) Consisting of unit drive
(1)Paper feed and conveying drive Toner motor (BK)
Paper feed motor 1. Toner supply (Black)
1. Paper feed roller 1
2. Paper feed roller 2 (5)Fuser drive
3. MP paper feed roller Fuser motor
4. Vertical conveying roller 1. Heat roller (Fuser belt)
5. Middle roller
6. registration roller Fuser isolation motor
7. Secondary transfer roller 1. Fuser pressure release
8. DU conveying roller
(6)Container drive
(2)Drum dirve(Black) Container motor
Drum motor BK 1. Toner container
1. Drum (Black)
(3)Developer (Black)/ transfer drive

Developer BK / Belt motor
1. Developer sleeve roller (Black)
2. Primary transfer belt drive roller
Belt isolation motor

1. Primary transfer belt isolation
(4)Toner supply drive

Paper feed and conveying drive
Secondary transfer roller
Registration roller left
Middle roller
Registration clutch
Paper feed motor
Middle clutch
Paper feed clutch 1
Vertical conveying clutch
Paper feed clutch 2
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Retard roller
Vertical conveying roller
Pickup roller
Cassette1
Cassette2
Figure 3-40

MP drive
MP paper feed roller
Paper feed motor
MP clutch
MP tray
MP lift motor
Figure 3-41
Drum drive
Drum motor BK
Main drive unit
Drum (Black)
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Drum unit (Black)
Figure 3-42

Develop drive
Sleeve roller (Black)

࣋ࣝࢺ㞳㛫࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Developer clutch
Main drive unit
Developer unit (Black)
Figure 3-43
Transfer drive
Primary transfer roller (Black)
Main drive unit
Belt cleaning motor

Drive roller
Figure 3-44

Fuser/eject/duplex drive
Eject conveying motor
Upper eject roller
Lower eject roller
Eject conveying roller
Fuser motor
Fuser isolation motor
Press roller
Paper feed motor
Duplex clutch 2
Duplex clutch 1
DU conveying middle roller
DU conveying lower roller
DU registration roller
DU conveying upper roller
IH core motor
Figure 3-45

(2) Drive location
9
8
7
10
6
1
11
Figure 3-46
Feed drive unit

1. Paper feed motor Fuser drive unit
2. Paper feed clutch 1 9. Fuser motor
3. Vertical conveying clutch 10. Fuser isolation motor
4. Paper feed clutch 2
Toner supply drive unit
Main drive unit 11. Toner motor (BK)
5. Drum motor BK
6. Developer BK / Belt motor
7. Belt isolation motor
8. Container motor

(3) Drive unit
(3-1) Feed drive unit
Figure 3-47
(3-2) Main drive unit
Figure 3-48

(3-3) Toner supply drive unit
Figure 3-49
(3-4) Fuser drive unit
Figure 3-50

3-7 Mechanical construction
(1) Paper feed and conveying section
The paper feed and conveying section consists of the cassette paper feed section and the MP tray paper
feed section, and the paper conveying section conveying the fed paper to the transfer and separate sec-
tion.
(1-1) Cassette paper feed section

The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The cassette forwards
paper by rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to the paper conveying section by rotating the paper feed
roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
[Components parts]
8 7 62 3 1 4
1. Paper feed roller
2. Pickup roller
3. Pickup holder
4. Retard roller
5. Retard holder 13
6. Friction pad
7. Cassette bottom plate 12 5 1
8. Paper width guides 23
6
9. Paper length guide 8 14
10. Cassette base 7
11. Width guide release lever 4
12. Actuator
(paper sensor)
12
13. Vertical conveying roller 5
14. Vertical conveying pulley
Figure 3-51

9
8
10
3
12
8 1
7
2
12
11
4
13
2
14
1
4
Figure 3-52

[Block diagram]
Feed drive PWB

Cassette sensor 2 YC5-B11
Cassette sensor 1 YC5-A1
Paper width sensor 1 YC5-A7
Paper width sensor 2 YC5-B3
Lower paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A14
Upper paper gauge sensor 1 YC5-A11
YC5-A15
Lift motor 1
YC5-A16
Paper sensor 1 YC6-B9
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Duplex clutch 2 YC7-A3
Paper feed clutch 1 YC4-1
Lift upper limit sensor 1 YC6-B6
Vertical conveying clutch YC4-3
Paper feed clutch 1 YC4-5
PF lift upper limit sensor 2 YC6-B12
Paper sensor 2 YC6-12
Conveying sensor YC6-B3
YC5-B1
Lift motor 2
YC5-B2
Upper paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B7
Lower paper gauge sensor 2 YC5-B10
Retard sensor 2 YC6-A10
Retard sensor 1 YC6-A7
YC5-A3
Paper length sensor 1 YC5-A5
YC5-A6
YC5-B13
Paper length sensor 2 YC5-B15
YC5-B16
Figure 3-53

(1-2) MP tray paper feed section
The MP tray can load 150 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP
paper feed roller while lifting up the MP bottom plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by
the effect of the MP retard roller.
[Components parts] 3 1 6 9 5
1. MP paper feed roller
2. MP Retard roller
3. MP Retard guide
4. MP Retard holder
5. MP bottom plate
6. MP bottom pad
7. MP tray
8. MP frame
9. MP paper width guides
10. Paper stopper
11. Actuator
(MP paper sensor )
12. Sub tray
13. Actuator
(MP paper length sensor) 2 11
Figure 3-54
11
9
1
3
5 4
12
2 6 13
9 3
Figure 3-55

[Block diagram]
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
MP position switch YC8-
MP clutch YC7-A5
MP paper sensor YC8-9
MP paper width sensor YC7-A8
MP paper length sensor YC7-A14
Feed Drive PWB
MP conveying sensor YC8-11

MP tray sensor YC7-A10
YC8-1
MP lift motor YC8-2
Figure 3-56

(1-3) Paper conveying section
The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer and separation section when the paper is fed
from the cassette or the MP tray, or re-fed in the duplex print. The fed paper is conveyed to where it turns
the registration sensor on by the middle roller or the MP conveying roller, and then, conveyed to the trans-
fer and separation section by the registration front and rear rollers.
[Components parts]
1. Middle roller
2. Middle pulley 4 5
3. Registration guide sheet 3
4. Registration roller left 6
5. Registration roller right
6. Registration guide 7
7. Conveying frame 2
1
Figure 3-57
2
1
6
3
Figure 3-58

[Block diagram]
Belt roll-up sensor YC7-B5
Registration clutch YC9-13
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Middle clutch YC6-A4
Registration sensor YC6-A2
Duplex sensor 2 YC7-B9
Feed drive PWB
Figure 3-59

(2) Optical section
The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner
section to write the image.
(2-1) Image scanner section

The image on the original is exposed by the exposure lamp and that reflection light is scanned by the CCD
image sensor on the CCD PWB via three mirrors and the ISU lens to change the electric signal.
When using the document processor, the mirror unit A stops at the original scanning position (slit glass)
and scans the image from the original conveyed in the document processor.
8 5 9 3 6 1 12
8 16 7 15 2
Figure 3-60
[Components parts]
1. CCD 9. Exposure lamp
2. Scanner frame 10. Drive motor
3. Contact glass 11. Scanner wire
4. Original size indicator 12. Scanner wire drum
5. Slit glass 13. Original sensor
6. ISU lens 14. Home position sensor
7. Mirror A 15. Charger roller unit
8. Mirror B 16. Charger roller unit
Figure 3-61

5
4 14
9
7
3
13
10
11 6
1
2
12
Figure 3-62

[Block diagram]
Home position sensor YC16-A12
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor
YC16-A4
YC16-A5
Original size timing sensor YC16-A6

Lens
Original size sensor YC16-10
CCD PWB YC36
LED PWB
Engine PWB
Figure 3-63

(2-2) Laser scanner unit
The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser emitted from the laser scanner units. The laser reflects
to the polygon mirrors by rotating the polygon motor so that the laser scans horizontally to the image. The
laser scanner unit has some lenses and mirrors, that adjust the diameter of the laser to focus the laser to
the drum surface. Also, the LSU cleaning motor operates to automatically clean the LSU glass.
[Components parts]
1. Polygon motor (PM)
2. fθ lens A ࢻ࣒ࣛ
3. fθ lens B 㸦ࣈࣛࢵࢡ㸧
4. LSU glass
5. LSU base
6. Mirror 6 4
7. Laser emitting diode
8. Collimator lens
9. LD slit glass plate
10. LD mirror
11. Cylindrical lens
12. PD PWB
13. PD lens
14. PD mirror 5 1 2 3 7
Figure 3-64
9 8 7
12
11 13 14
1
2 10
6 3
Figure 3-65

[Block diagram]
Home position sensor YC16-A12
YC16-A2
YC16-A3
Scanner motor
YC16-A4
YC16-A5
Original size timing sensor YC16-A6

Lens
Original size sensor YC16-10
CCD PWB YC36
LED PWB
Engine PWB
Figure 3-66

(3) Developer section
(3-1) Developer unit
The developer section consists of the magnet roller forming the magnetic brush, the sleeve roller forming
the thin layer by replacing the toner, the developer blade, and the developer screw mixing up the toner.
The toner density is adjusted by impressing the bias to the magnet roller and the sleeve roller. The toner
amount inside the developer unit is detected by the toner sensor.
[Components parts]
1. Sleeve roller %
2. Magnet roller 6 2 1
3. Developer blade
4. Developer screw A
5. Developer screw B
6. Developer case
7. Toner sensor
5 7 4 3
Figure 3-67
5
4
2
3
Figure 3-68

[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Developer bias
Main high-voltage PWB YC34
YC33
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer BK / Belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Feed image PWB
Developer clutch YC23-4
T/C sensor BK
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK
Vibration motor
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮
Developer
⌧ീᇶᯈBK PWB BK YC2
Drum relay PWB
Figure 3-69

(4) Drum section
The drum section consists of the drum, the charger roller unit, and the cleaning unit. The drum surface is
evenly charged to prepare forming the electrical latent image by emitting the laser.
(4-1) Charger roller unit

The charged roller with the electric charge contacts the drum surface and rotates to charge the drum
evenly.
(4-2) Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected
to the waste toner box by the drum screw. The cleaning lamp consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the
remaining electric charge on the drum before the main charge.
[Components parts] 3 (B) 5 6 9

1. Charger roller
2. Charger cleaning roller
3. Drum
4. Drum frame
5. Cleaning blade
6. Cleaning roller
7. Toner conveying roller
8. Drum screw
9. Cleaning lamp
1 2 8 7
Figure 3-70
9
3
2
1
5
7
6
Figure 3-71

[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Main charger voltage YC34
Main high-voltage PWB
YC33
Feed image PWB
YC24-1
YC24-2
Drum motor BK
YC24-3
YC24-4
Drum relay PWB

Cleaning
᣺ື࣮ࣔࢱ࣮ lamp BK
Drum PWB BK
⌧ീᇶᯈBK YC10
Drum heater
T/Cࢭࣥࢧ࣮BK YC6
Figure 3-72

(5) Transfer and separation section
(5-1) Primary transfer unit
The primary transfer section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt and the primary transfer
rollers facing drum. The toner image formed on drum is transferred on the transfer belt by impressing the bias
to the primary transfer rollers facing drum, and then the toner image is formed. Also, the ID sensor attached to
the main unit measures the toner density on the transfer belt.
The transfer cleaning unit collects the remaining toner on the transfer belt after the secondary transferring,
and forwards it to the waste toner box as waste toner.
[Components parts]
1. Drive roller 8 7 6 5 3 1
2. Backup roller
3. Primary transfer roller
4. Tension roller
5. Transfer belt
6. Belt pre-brush
7. Cleaning fur brush
8. Cleaning roller
9. Cleaning screw
10 9 4 2 12
10. Cleaning blade (B)
11. Transfer unit cover
12. Drum
Figure 3-73
2
9
8
4
7 3
10
1
11
Figure 3-74

[Block diagram]
Transfer high-voltage YC34

Transfer bias PWB
Engine PWB
Belt release sensor YC23-7
YC23-1
YC23-2
Feed image PWB
YC24-13
YC24-14
Developer BK / Belt motor YC24-15
YC24-16
YC24-17
Transfer connect
PWB
Belt thermistor YC2-1

Transfer PWB
YC3-3
Belt cleaning motor
YC3-4
Figure 3-75

(5-2) Secondary transfer roller unit
The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller attached to the paper conveying
unit, and the separation brush. The DC bias from the transfer high-voltage PWB is impressed to the second-
ary transfer roller, and the toner image formed on the transfer belt is transfered to the paper by the potential
gap. After transferring, the paper is separated by self stripping and the electric charge on the paper is
removed by the separation brush contacting the ground.
[Components parts]
1. Secondary transfer roller
2
2. Separation brush
3. Secondary transfer section
4. Transfer front guide
5. Transfer spring
3 1 4
Figure 3-76
3 4
Figure 3-77

[Block diagram]
Engine PWB
Transfer Bias Transfer T2_OFF_REM

high-voltage T2_CNT YC34-A10
Separate bias T_REM YC34-A13
PWB YC34-A14
Figure 3-78

(6) Fuser section
The paper from the transfer and separation section is pinched between the heat roller and the press roller.
The heat roller is heated by the fuser IH, and the paper is pressed by the press roller with the pressure
added by the pressure spring toward the heat roller, so toner is fused on the paper by that heat and pres-
sure.
The surface temperature of the heat roller and the press roller is detected by the fuser thermistor and con-
trolled by the Engine PWB.
(6-1) Fuser unit

[Components parts]
1. Fuser belt 9 8
2. IH core
7
3. Fuser thermistor
4. Separator
5. Press roller 2 4
6. Press roller separation claw 3
5
7. Actuator
(Fuser jam sensor) 11
8. Fuser eject roller
9. Left fuser eject roller 13 12
10. Pressure switching cam
11. Fuser frame
12. Fuser front guide
13. Discharger needle 1
Figure 3-79
2
7
6
8
9
4
10 11
5
Figure 3-80

[Block diagram]
IH PWB YC10-1
YC10-2
YC2-1 Fuser motor
YC10-3
YC3-1
YC10-4
YC10-7
Fuser high-voltage Fuser isolation motor
YC10-8
PWB
Drive PWB
FSR-1
Fuser thermostat
Image PWB
Rear belt rotation sensor YC22-16
Fuser thermistor 1 YC22-13
YC22
Press-release sensor YC2-11
Fuser jam sensor YC2-6
Fuser PWB
Front belt rotation sensor YC2-3
IH position sensor YC32-B8
YC32-B9
YC32-B10
IH core motor
YC32-B11
YC32-B12
Figure 3-81

(7) Eject and feedshift section
The eject and feedshift section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the inner tray or the
duplex conveying section.
(7-1) Eject unit

1
[Components parts]
1. Upper eject roller
10
2. Upper eject pulley 2
3. Lower eject roller 9 8
4. Lower eject pulley 7
5. Eject conveying roller 5
6. Eject conveying pulley 3 6
7. Reversing guide
8. Reversing guide pulley 10
9
4
9. Actuator 9
(Eject paper full sensor)
10. Eject feedshift guide 7
11. Eject guide pulley
12. Actuator
(Eject reversing sensor)
Figure 3-82
8
2 7
9
1
9
4
10
5
6
12
11
Figure 3-83

[Block diagram]
Feed image PWB
Upper eject full sensor YC17-A10
Lower eject full sensor YC17-A7
YC17-A1
YC17-A2
Eject reversing motor
YC17-A3
YC17-A4
Eject sensor YC17-A19
YC17-1A5
Upper eject solenoid
YC17-A16
YC17-A12
Lower eject solenoid
YC17-A13
Figure 3-84

(7-2) Eject paper jam
Stretch the eject level lever if the next eject paper is caught up by paper ejected to the eject tray.
1. If the leading edge (b) of the paper

ejected is caught up by the trailing edge b b
(a) paper previously ejected, slide the a c
position of the eject actuator sub guide
(c) to extend it.
a
2. Pushes down the trailing edge (a) of
eject paper to prevent the (b) leading
edge of next paper from being caught
up.
Figure 3-85
In case of stretching the eject level lever
Figure 3-86
In case of restoring the eject level lever
Figure 3-87

(8) Duplex conveying section
(8-1) Duplex conveying unit
The duplex conveying section consists of the paper conveying path to forward the paper from the eject and
feedshift section in the duplex print to the paper conveying section.
[Components parts]
1. DU conveying upper roller 1
2. DU conveying upper pulley 9
3. DU conveying middle roller 2
4. DU conveying middle pulley 12
5. DU conveying lower roller 3
6. DU conveying lower pulley 4
7. DU registration roller
8. DU registration pulley
9. Actuator
Duplex sensor 1 6
10. Actuator 5
Duplex sensor 2
4
11. DU conveying base 11
12. DU conveying guide
10
7
8
Figure 3-88
1
9
3
2 4
12
5
6
10
11
7
8
Figure 3-89

[Block diagram]
Conveying open/close switch YC7-B13
Feed drive PWB
YC11-1
YC11-2
Paper feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
Figure 3-90

3-8 Mechanical construction (option)
(1) Paper feeder (PF-7100)
The cassette can load 550 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 500 sheets paper (80 g/m2) and consists of 2 cas-
settes. Paper from the cassette is picked up by rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit
by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
14 3 4
2 1 13
9 10 8 7
14
15
5
27
28
30
16
19
20
17
24 25 23 22 29 18
Figure 3-91
[Components parts]
1. PF paper feed roller 1 16. PF paper feed roller 2
2. PF Pickup roller 1 17. PF pickup roller 2
3. PF Pickup holder 1 18. PF pickup holder 2
4. PF retard roller 1 19. PF retard roller 2
5. PF retard holder 1 20. PF retard holder 2
6. PF friction pad 1 21. PF friction pad 2
7. PF cassette bottom plate 1 22. PF cassette bottom plate 2
8. PF paper width guides 1 23. PF paper width guides 2
9. PF paper length guide 1 24. PF paper length guide 2
10. PF cassette base 1 25. PF cassette base 2
11. PF width guide release lever 1 26. PF width guide release lever 2
12. PF conveying roller 1 27. PF conveying roller 2
13. PF conveying pulley 1 28. PF conveying pulley 2
14. PF actuator 1 29. PF actuator 2
(PF paper sensor 1) (PF paper sensor 2)
15. PF actuator 1 30. PF actuator 2
(PF paper conveying sensor 1) (PF paper conveying sensor 2)

8
9 12
7 13
14
2
11 4
6 1
Figure 3-92
22
23 21
28
16
26
27
18
22 15
20
25
Figure 3-93

[Block diagram]
PF main PWB
YC3-11
PF paper length switch 1 YC3-13
YC3-15
PF paper width switch 1 YC3-17
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
PF conveying sensor 1 YC4-6
PF paper sensor 1 YC3-3
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 YC4-3
PF paper feed clutch 1 YC9-3
PF conveying clutch 1 YC9-1
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
PF conveying clutch 2 YC9-5
PF paper feed clutch 2 YC9-7
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF paper sensor 2 YC5-3
PF conveying sensor 2 YC4-14
PF paper width switch 2 YC5-17
YC5-11
PF paper length switch 2 YC5-13
YC5-15
Figure 3-94

(2-1) Paper deck section
The deck can load 1750 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 1500 sheets paper (80 g/m2). Paper from the deck is
picked up by rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit by rotating the paper feed roller.
Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
1 1 10
[Components parts]
9 8 7 2 4 13 2 4 11
1. PF paper feed roller
2. PF pickup roller
3. PF pickup holder
4. PF retard roller
5. PF retard holder
6. PF friction pad 12 3
7. PF deck bottom plate 5 12 3 14
8. PF paper width guides 5
9. Paper length guide*1
10. PF conveying roller
11. PF conveying pulley
12. PF actuator
(PF paper sensor)
Figure 3-95
13. PF actuator
(PF horizontal conveying sensor)
14. PF actuator
(PF vertical conveying sensor)
*1: inch specification only
8
9
12
4
9 1 8 13
2 10
8 11 14
9
8
9 11 1
2
8 12
8
10
4
6
7
Figure 3-96

[Block diagram]
Left PF paper feed clutch 2 YC9-7
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 YC9-9
PF horizontal conveying sensor YC4-14
PF vertical conveying sensor YC4-6
PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 YC9-5
Right PF paper feed clutch 1 YC9-3
PF vertical conveying clutch YC9-1
YC6-1
PF lift motor 1
YC6-2
YC8-3
YC8-4
PF feed motor
YC8-5
YC8-6
YC6-3
PF lift motor 2
YC6-4
PF main PWB
Figure 3-97

The deck can load 3500 sheets paper (64 g/m2) or 3000 sheets paper (80 g/m2). Paper from the deck is
picked up by rotating the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit by rotating the paper feed roller.
Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
[Components parts]
9 1 3 2 7 6 8
1. PF paper feed roller
2. PF pickup roller
3. PF pickup holder 10
4. PF retard roller
4
5. PF friction pad
6. PF cassette bottom plate
7. PF paper width guides 11
8. Paper length guide 5
9. PF conveying roller
10. PF conveying pulley
11. PF actuator
(PF paper sensor)
Figure 3-98
1 7
9
10 8
4 2 6
5
7
Figure 3-99

[Block diagram]
PF paper feed clutch YC15-1
YC18-1
YC18-2
PF conveying motor YC18-4
YC18-5
YC18-6
PF main PWB
YC8-1
PF lift motor
YC8-2
PF lift upper limit sensor YC5-16
PF lift lower limit sensor YC6-9
YC5-9
PF paper feed solenoid
YC5-10
Figure 3-100

(4) Document processor (DP-7100)
(4-1) Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the original tray to
the original conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP forwarding pulley and the DP feed
roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP forwarding pulley
2. DP paper feed belt
11 12 2 3 5 7 13
3. DP feed holder
4. DF separation pulley 10 4 1 8
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original sensor
7. DP original width guide
8. DP original tray
9. DP paper feed sensor
10. DP registration roller
11. DP registration pulley
12. DP actuator
(DP registration sensor ) 9 6
13. DP actuator
(DP original length sensor )
Figure 3-101
2
13
12
11
8
1
4
6
8
9 12
Figure 3-102

(4-2) Original conveying section and Original switchback and eject section
The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The conveyed original is scanned at the
optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass.
The original switchback and eject section consists of the parts in the figure. The original already scanned is
ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller. When scanning the original in the duplex switchback
mode, the original is conveyed to the switchback tray once and then reconveyed to the original conveying
section by the switchback roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP conveying roller 1
2. DP conveying pulley 1 6 8 9
3. DP scanner guide
4. DP scanner guide pulley
6. DP conveying pulley 2
7. DP feedshift guide
8. DP reversing roller
9. DP reversing pulley 14
10. DP feedshift roller
11. DP feedshift pulley
12. DP eject roller
13. DP eject pulley
14. DP eject tray
1 3 6 11 15 13
2 4 5 7 10 12
15. DP actuator
(DP Eject sensor)
Figure 3-103
5
3
1 4
8
2 9
15 13 14
10 12
8 11
Figure 3-104

[Block diagram]
DP timing sensor YC7-5
YC9-9
YC9-10
DP conveying motor YC9-12
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-1
YC9-2
DP feed motor YC9-4
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP lift motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
DP lift lower limit sensor YC7-12
YC11-5
YC11-6
DP reversing motor YC11-8
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP eject sensor YC17-3
DP original width sensor YC6-5
DP original length sensor YC6-3
DP paper feed sensor YC4-2
DP registration sensor YC7-3
DP lift upper limit sensor YC16-8
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP feedshift motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP feedshift sensor YC16-5
Figure 3-105

(4-3) Reversing duplex scanning
2
The first side of original is scanned 3
at the slit glass (machine main body).
1
Slit glass: first side scanning
Conveyed to the DP switchback

2
3
tray by the DP switchback feedshift
guide. DP switchback roller
DP switchback tray
1
DP switchback feedshift guide
2
The original is reversed by the DP 3
switchback roller.
1
DP switchback roller
The second side of original is 2

3
scanned at the slit glass (machine
main body) and the original is
conveyed to the DP switchback tray. DP switchback tray
1
Slit glass: second side scanning
Ejected to the original eject table

DP regist roller
by the DP switchback, DP
feedshift and DP eject rollers. DP switchback roller
2
3 1
DP eject roller
Original eject table
DP conveying roller DP feedshift roller
Figure 3-106

(5-1) Original paper feed section
The original feed section consists of the parts in the figure, and conveys the original on the original tray to
the original conveying section. The original is fed by rotating the DP forwarding pulley and the DP feed
roller.
[Components parts]
1. DP forwarding pulley
11 10 2
2. DP paper feed belt
12 9 8 3 1 7 6 13 14
3. DP belt tension pulley
4. DF separation pulley
5. DF friction pad
6. DP original width guide
7. DP original bottom plate
8. DP paper feed sensor
9. DP registration roller
10. DP registration pulley
13. DP original tray 4 5
14. DP original length sensor
Figure 3-107
11
12
9
10
3 6
7
13
2 5 1
4
6
Figure 3-108

(5-2) Original conveying section and eject section
The original conveying section consists of the parts in the figure. The 2nd side of the conveyed original is
scanned when passing the CIS and the 1st side at the optical section (CCD) in the main unit when passing the
DP slit glass. The original already scanned is ejected to the original eject table by the eject roller.
[Components parts]
32 1
1. DP backside timing sensor
2. DPCIS
3. DPCIS roller
6. DP scanner guide pulley
7. DP scanner guide
9. DP conveying pulley 3 13
10. DP actuator
(DP eject sensor)
11. DP eject roller
12. DP eject pulley
13. DP eject tray
5 4 6 8 10 12
7 9 11
Figure 3-109
2
3
6 5
13 14
12
8 10
7 11
9
Figure 3-110

[Block diagram]
DP backside timing sensor YC7-5
DPSHD PWB
DP paper feed sensor YC7-5
YC9-10
YC9-12
DP conveying motor
YC9-13
YC9-14
YC9-2
YC9-4
DP registration motor
YC9-5
YC9-6
YC11-1
YC11-2
DP feed motor
YC11-3
YC11-4
YC11-6
YC11-8
DP lift motor
YC11-9
YC11-10
DP main PWB
DP original length sensor YC17-3
YC10-1
YC10-2
DP eject motor
YC10-3
YC10-4
DP original width sensor YC6-3
DP lift upper limit sensor YC2-10
DP lift lower limit sensor YC4-2
DP eject sensor YC16-8
DP timing sensor YC16-5
Figure 3-111

(6) Inner finisher (DF-7100)
(6-1) Paper conveying section
The conveying section consists of the parts as shown below. Paper on the middle tray is transferred after
adjusting the side registration by moving the DF side registration guides in the staple and sort modes.
[Components parts] 18 12 11 10 7 8 9 5 3 4
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF conveying roller 13
4. DF conveying pulley
5. DF entry sensor 14
6. DF paper stopper
7. DF Middle roller 2
8. DF Middle pulley
1
9. DF paddle
10. DF upper guide
11. DF paper width guides
12. DF bundle eject unit
13. DF eject roller 15 17 6 16
14. DF eject pulley
Figure 3-112
15. DF actuator
(Paper press sensor)
16. DF stapler
17. DF middle tray
18. DF tray
7 7
7
7
7
7
7
7 7
7
Figure 3-113

[Block diagram]
DF bundle eject sensor YC19-18
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF eject motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
DF side registration sensor 1 YC19-6
YC13-2
DF Paper pressing solenoid
YC13-3
DF eject paper sensor YC16-3
DF Paper pressing sensor 2 YC19-24
DF Paper pressing sensor 1 YC19-21
DF paper entry sensor YC17-5
DF Side registration sensor 2 YC19-3
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF adjustment sensor YC19-27
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC9-5 / YC9-6
DF Side registration motor 2
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
DF Side registration motor 1
YC9-11 / YC9-12
DF staple unit
DF staple reley PWB YC10
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF paper entry motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
DF paddle sensor YC17-3
DF slide sensor YC19-30
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF Eject release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-13 / YC8-14
DF middle motor
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
DF main PWB
Figure 3-114

(6-2) Bundle eject operation
1st sheet
a
1. By rotating the DF entry roller and DF
middle roller (a), paper is conveyed to
the process section and then conveyed
to the DF eject tray (b).
Figure 3-115
a
2. The DF bundle eject unit (b) descends
and The DF upper guide (c) descends d b
when the paper trailing edge passes the
DF middle roller (a). Then, the DF eject c
roller (d) is rotated reversely and paper
is sent to the DF middle tray (e).
Figure 3-116
b a
3. Then, the DF upper guide (a) ascends
and the DF bundle eject unit (b)
ascends by the DF eject release motor
drive. f c
By rotating the DF paddles(c), paper is
conveyed to the DF middle tray (d).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (e)
d
drive the DF side registration guides (f)
to adjust paper.
Figure 3-117

2nd sheet and after
c
middle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is con-
veyed to the process section as the 1st
b
sheet(a).
Figure 3-118
a
5. The DF bundle eject unit (b) descends
and The DF upper guide (c) descends d b
DF middle roller (a). Then, by rotating c
the DF eject roller (d) and the DF pad- e
dles (e) , paper is conveyed to the DF
middle tray (f). Paper is adjusted as well
f
as the 1st sheet.
Figure 3-119
a
6. When completing to adjust the last
sheet to bundle, the DF bundle eject b
unit (a) descends and by rotating the
DF eject roller (b), the paper bundle (c)
is ejected to the DF eject tray (d). c
Figure 3-120

(7) 4000-sheet Finisher (DF-7110)
(7-1) paper entry and feedshift and DF tray left eject section
The paper entry section convey paper from the main unit to the feedshift section. Also, the feedshift guide
3 switches the paper conveying path to convey paper to the DF tray B or finishing section.
[Components parts] 7 9 8
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley 6
3. DF feedshift solenoid 3
4. DF tray B conveying roller 11
6. DF tray B eject roller
7. DF eject pulley 10
8. DF sub eject sensor 4
5
9. DF actuator
(DF sub eject sensor) 2
3
10. DF entry sensor
11. DF tray B 1
Figure 3-121
11
9
6
7
3
4
5
1
2
Figure 3-122

[Block diagram]
DF Sub tray paper full sensor YC21-6
DF sub eject sensor YC21-3
YC12-5
YC12-6
DF eject motor
YC12-7
YC12-8
YC12-13
YC12-14
YC12-15
YC12-16
YC18-12
DF feedshift solenoid 3
YC18-13
DF main PWB
Figure 3-123

(7-2) Feedshift operation to the DF tray B or finishing section
The feedshift guide 3 (b) is activated by the DF feedshift solenoid 3 (a) and switches the paper conveying path
for the paper conveyed to the feedshift section to eject it to the DF tray B (c) or to convey it to the feedshift
section for the relief drum (d) or finishing section (e). Also, the DF sub eject sensor (f) detects paper jam at
eject to the DF tray B (c).
a
e
d
b
Figure 3-124

(7-3) Finishing section
The finishing section consists of the parts below and the paper conveyed from the main unit is ejected to
the DF tray A. Also, bundle eject mode and staple mode are processed.
Also, for folding, switch the paper conveying path to the relief drum side by the feedshift guide 1.
[Components parts] 13 16,17 15 10 9 6 4 7 1

14 11 8
1. DF relief drum 2
4. DF feedshift guide 1 12
5. DF feedshift guide 2
6. DF drum sensor 3
7. DF actuator
(DF drum sensor)
5
8. DF middle sensor
9. DF actuator
(DF middle sensor) 18
10. DF Middle roller
11. DF Middle pulley
12. DF tray A eject roller
19
13. DF eject pulley
14. DF eject sensor
16. DF side registration sensor 1
18. DF staple unit
19. DF slide sensor
20. DF tray A
Figure 3-125
20
10
11
13
12 9
1
5
2
3
Figure 3-126

[Block diagram]
DF shift sensor 1 YC23-3
YC14-5 / YC14-6
DF shift motor 2
YC14-7 / YC14-8
YC14-9 / YC14-10
DF shift motor 1
YC14-11 / YC14-12
DF shift sensor 2 YC23-6
DF Shift release sensor YC23-18
DF eject clutch YC14-13
YC14-1 / YC14-2
DF Shift release motor
YC14-3 / YC14-4
YC15-1 / YC15-2
DF paddle motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
YC12-17 / YC12-18
DF eject release motor
YC12-19 / YC12-20
YC12-9 / YC12-10
DF middle motor
YC12-11 / YC12-12
YC18-6
YC18-7
DF drum sensor YC20-3
DF middle sensor YC20-6
YC18-1 / YC18-2
DF relief drum motor
YC18-3 / YC18-4
YC18-9
YC18-10
YC12-1 / YC12-2
DF slide motor
YC12-3 / YC12-4
YC19-1 / YC19-2
DF tray motor
YC19-3 / YC19-4

DF main PWB
DF stapler relay PWB YC17
DF stapler unit
DF bundle eject switch YC22-15
DF tray paper full sensor 2 YC13-3
YC15-5 / YC15-6
DF side registration motor 2
YC15-7 / YC15-8
YC15-9 / YC15-10
YC15-11 / YC15-12
Figure 3-127

(7-4) Relief drum operation
When finishing multiple copies of A4 size paper to the finishing section or folding section, to secure the time to
finish paper, the 1st and 2nd paper of the next group is relieved until the 3rd paper is conveyed.
7. The feed-shift guide 1 (b) is activated by a

the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 (a) and the
conveying path for the conveyed paper
is switched. The 1st paper of the next
group is conveyed to the relief drum (c).
8. Likewise, 2nd paper of the next group is
conveyed to the relief drum (c).
b
c
Figure 3-128
9. When the 3rd paper of the next group is

conveyed into the relief drum, it is con-
veyed to the finishing section (a) with
the 1st and 2nd paper. Then, the paper
conveying path is switched by the feed-
shift guide 1 (b).
Figure 3-129

10. The DF feedshift solenoid 2 (b) acti-
vates the feedshift guide 2 (c) and it
switches the paper conveying path to
convey paper to the folding unit (a).
Figure 3-130

1st sheet c
1. By rotating the middle roller (a), paper is
conveyed to the process section. a
Paper is conveyed to the DF tray A (c)
by the DF tray A eject roller (b).
2. The conveying guide (d) descends

middle roller (a). Then, the DF tray A a
eject roller (b) is rotated reversely and
paper is sent to the adjusting tray (e).
d
b
e
f
g
3. Then, the paper conveying guide (d)
ascends and the bundle eject unit (g)
k
ascends by the DF eject release motor
(f) drive.
h
By rotating the DF tray A eject roller (b)
and adjusting paddles (h), paper is
conveyed to the adjusting tray (i).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (j)
drive the adjusting guides (k) to adjust
paper.
d
b i
j
Figure 3-131

2nd sheet and after
middle roller (c), 2nd paper (b) is con-
b
veyed to the process section as the 1st c
sheet(a).
5. The conveying guide (d) descends e f

when the paper trailing edge passes the c
DF middle roller (c). Then, by rotating
the paddles (e) and the adjusting pad-
dles (e), paper is conveyed to the
adjusting tray (g). Paper is adjusted as
well as the 1st sheet.
d
h
j
6. When adjusting the last paper of bundle
is complete, the bundle eject unit (h)
descends and the DF tray A eject roller
(i) rotates to eject the paper bundle to
the DF tray A (j).
Figure 3-132

(8-1) Finishing section
The finishing section consists of the parts below and the paper conveyed from the main unit is ejected to
the eject tray. Also, bundle eject mode and staple mode are processed.
[Components parts] 9 10 12 8 6 7 5 4 2 1 15 3
1. DF entry roller
2. DF entry pulley
3. DF entry sensor
4. DF middle sensor
5. DF actuator
(DF middle sensor)
6. DF Middle roller
11
7. DF Middle pulley
13,14
9. DF eject roller
10. DF eject pulley
11. DF eject sensor
12. DF adjusting tray
13. DF side registration sensor 1 16
15. DF staple unit
16. DF slide sensor
17. DF paddle
18. DF eject tray
Figure 3-133
18
6
7
18
10
9
1
2
Figure 3-134

[Block diagram]
YC9-1 / YC9-2
DF paddle motor
YC9-3 / YC9-4
YC11-1
DF tray motor
YC11-2
YC8-9 / YC8-10
DF eject release motor
YC8-11 / YC8-12
YC8-17 / YC8-18
DF middle motor
YC8-19 / YC8-20
YC8-13 / YC8-14
YC8-15 / YC8-16
YC8-1 / YC8-2
DF eject motor
YC8-3 / YC8-4
YC8-5 / YC8-6
DF slide motor
YC8-7 / YC8-8
DF main PWB
DF stapler reley PWB YC10
DF stapler unit
DF bundle eject switch YC19-12
DF middle sensor YC18-3
YC9-5 / YC9-6
YC9-7 / YC9-8
YC9-9 / YC9-10
YC9-11 / YC9-12
Figure 3-135

1st sheet
1. By rotating the DF entry roller (a) and
DF middle roller (b), paper is conveyed
to the process section and then con-
veyed to the finishing section. Paper is
d b
conveyed to the DF main tray (d) by the
eject roller (c).
c
a
2. The conveying guide (e) descends

when the paper trailing edge passes the b
middle roller (b). Then, the eject roller
(c) is rotated reversely and paper is
sent to the adjusting tray.
c
e
f
h g
3. Then, the conveying guide (e) ascends

and the bundle eject unit (h) ascends by
l
the DF eject release motor (g) drive.
By rotating the eject roller (c) and
adjusting paddles (i), paper is conveyed
to the side (j) of the adjusting tray (f).
The DF side registration motor 1,2 (k)
drive the adjusting guides (l) to adjust
paper.
j
i k
Figure 3-136

2nd sheet and after
4. By rotating the DF entry roller (c) and
DF middle roller (d), 2nd paper (b) is
conveyed to the process section as the
1st sheet(a).
b d
5. The conveying guide (e) descends f

d
middle roller (d). Then, by rotating the e g
paddles (f) and the adjusting paddles
(g), paper is conveyed to the adjusting
tray (h). Paper is adjusted as well as the
1st sheet.
6. When completing to adjust the last

sheet to bundle, the bundle eject unit (i)
descends and by rotating the main tray
eject roller (j), the paper bundle is
ejected to the DF main tray (k).
k
j
Figure 3-137

(9) Mailbox (MT-730(B))
The mailbox ejects paper to the tray 1 to 7 designated to stack
[Components parts] 9
1. MB conveying pulley
2. MB conveying roller 10
3. MB eject pulley
4. MB eject roller 11
5. MB lower entry guide 3
6. MB middle entry guide 4
12
7. MB upper entry guide 3
8. MB feedshift nail 4 7
9. MB tray 1 13
3 8
10. MB tray 2 4
11. MB tray 3 14 2 1
12. MB tray 4 3 8
4
13. MB tray 5 15
14. MB tray 6 3 8
4
15. MB tray 7 2 1
16. MB Actuator 3
4 8
(MB overflow sensor)
3 8
4
2 1
8
7
5 6
Figure 3-138
9
10
11
7
12 3
4
13 16 3
4
16 3
14 4
16 3
15 4
16 3
2 4
1
16 3
4
16 3
2 4
1
16 8
2
1
Figure 3-139

[Block diagram]
MB main PWB
MB tray eject sensor 2 YC1-18
MB tray sensor 1 YC1-2
YC5-1
MB conveying motor YC5-2
YC5-3
YC5-4
MB tray eject sensor 1 YC2-2
MB home position sensor YC2-4
YC3
YC7
DF main PWB
Figure 3-140

(9-1) Ejecting to the mailbox tray
If the belt (a) support plate (b) moving on the belt passes the feedshift nail lever (c), the feedshift nail (d) is
switches the conveying path to eject to each tray. Also, the tray eject sensor (d) detects paper jam.
b d
a e
Figure 3-141

(10)Punch unit (PH-7)
The punch unit is installed at the paper entry section of the document finisher and paper entered there is
stopped to make punch holes.
[Components parts]
1. PH cam
2. PH cutter 1
3. PH dust tank 6
4. PH cutter holder
7
5. PH cam shaft
6. PH home position sensor 2
7. PH punch pulse sensor
8. PH pulse plate
Figure 3-142
8
4
1
5
2
Figure 3-143

[Block diagram]
YC4-1
Punch motor
YC4-3
Punch slide sensor YC6-3
YC3-1
YC3-2
Punch slide motor
YC3-3
YC3-4
Punch pulse sensor YC8-3
Punch home position sensor YC8-6
Punch dust tank switch YC9-1
Punch main PWB

Punch dust tank full sensor YC5-10
YC5-4
YC5-5
Punch paper edge sensor 1
YC5-6
YC5-7
Punch paper edge sensor 2 YC7-1
YC5-2
Punch solenoid
YC5-3
YC1
YC7
DF main PWB
Figure 3-144

(11)Folding unit (BF-730)
The folding unit makes the conveyed paper bi-fold or tri-fold with the BF blade and eject paper to the fold tray.
Also, the BF staple unit makes paper half-folded and ejects booklet-stapled paper to the fold tray.
[Components parts] 1
2
1. BF conveying roller 1 3
2. BF conveying pulley 1
3. BF vertical conveying sensor
4. BF conveying roller 2
5. BF conveying pulley 2 21 17 16
6. BF entry roller 22 19 18 14 15
7. BF entry pulley 4
5
8. BF entry sensor
9. BF paper sensor 6
8
7
10. BF blade 25
11. BF blade sensor
12. BF right roller 26 20
13. BF left roller 23
14. BF upper roller 9
15. BF staple unit
16. BF eject sensor
17. BF conveying roller 3
18. BF conveying pulley 3
19. BF feedshift guide
20. BF eject roller
24 13 1211 10
21. BF eject pulley
Figure 3-145
22. BF tray full sensor
23. BF eject paper press arm
24. BF lower moving plate
25. BF upper moving plate
26. BF tray
1
2
1
18
1 21 17
14 20
5
6
4
26 4
13 12
Figure 3-146

[Block diagram]
BF tray full sensor YC20-9
BF side registration sensor 1 YC20-6
BF eject sensor YC20-12
YC17-2
BF feedshift solenoid
YC17-3
YC13-6 / YC13-7
BF staple motor
YC13-9 / YC13-10
BF vertical conveying sensor YC20-15
BF paper entry sensor YC20-29
BF adjusting sensor 2 YC20-26
BF side registration sensor 2 YC20-21
YC10-9 / YC10-10
BF paper entry motor
YC10-11 / YC10-12
YC15-1 / YC15-2
BF blade motor
YC15-3 / YC15-4
BF paper sensor YC20-18
YC20-5 / YC10-6
BF side registration sensor 2
YC10-7 / YC10-8
YC10-1 / YC10-2
BF adjusting motor 2
YC10-3 / YC10-4
YC10-13 / YC10-14
BF adjusting motor 1
YC10-15 / YC10-16
BF main PWB
YC16-1 / YC16-2
BF main motor
YC16-3 / YC16-4
YC10-17 / YC10-18
BF side registration sensor 1
YC10-19/ YC10-20
BF adjusting sensor 1 YC20-3
BF blade sensor YC20-24
YC3, 5, 7
YC9, 10
DF main PWB
Figure 3-147

(11-1) Paper folding operation (Center-folding, Tri-folding)
Center-folding
1. Paper (b) stuck in the folding unit (a) is conveyed to the center-folding position by the BF adjusting motor
1/2 (c) that move the upper BF moving plate (d) and lower BF moving plate (e).
2. The BF adjusting motor 1/2 (f) drives to adjust the paper side registration.
e a d
f c
c f
Figure 3-148
3. The BF blade (a) pushes up the center of paper by the BF blade motor drive to pinch it between the BF
right roller (b) and BF left motor (c).
4. Center-folded paper I ejected to the BF tray (e) by the BF right roller (b), BF left roller (c) and BF eject
roller (d).
c b
d a
Figure 3-149

Tri-folding
1. The paper in the folding unit is conveyed to the center-folding position by drive of the BF adjusting motor
1/2 as well as the center-folding operation.
2. After the paper side registration, the BF blade (a) pushes up the paper and have it pinched between the
BF right roller (b) and BF left roller (c).
3. The BF feed-shift solenoid (d) activates the BF feed-shift guide (e) it switches the paper conveying path
for the paper from the BF right/left roller to convey it to the relief section (f).
d
e
f
b
c a
Figure 3-150
4. When the paper stops at the relief section, the paper loop generated at the space is pinched between the
BF right roller (a) and upper BF roller (b). Then, the paper is folded inside.
Figure 3-151

5. Tri-folded paper (a) is ejected to the BF tray (d) by the BF conveying roller (b) and BF eject roller (c).
c b
a
Figure 3-152

(11-2) Tri-folding position adjustment for the folding unit
Execute the treatment below to make uniform width of A, B and C when tri-folding the paper.
A B C
B
Z
*: If this finishing is executed for the paper
bundle, there may be little margin for
the tri-folding position and Z section
A C
may be folded.
*: Machine shipment setting (B)

Metric (A4) : 100 to 102 mm
Inch (Letter) : 95 to 96 mm
X
Figure 3-153

Adjustment 1
Change the width of B.
Adjuster plate relocation method
1. Push the folding unit release lever and

pull out the folding unit.
a
Figure 3-154
2. Open the upper folding unit cover (a) b

upward and remove two screws (b) to
remove the eject cover (c).
b
c
Figure 3-155

3. Loosen two screws (b) securing the
adjuster plate (a) and move it.
*: Raise the adjuster plate to decrease the
F
width B and lower the adjuster to increase
the width.
(Scale: 1mm)
*: When adjusting, fix it where the left and

right scale are equal in reference to the
scale (c). b a b
Shipment setting position

Metric : A4 (d)
Inch : LT (e)
*: A4 and LT punch marks are at the
machine rear side only.
e
d
Figure 3-156
Treatment 2 B
Change the setting values in U246 [Setting:
Three Fold] to shift the tri-folding position (a)
and to change the width A and C. (Width of B A C A C
remains unchanged.)
ᕥ ྑ
Raise the set value to align the tri-folding to the
left.
Lower the set value to align the tri-folding to
the right. a a
Figure 3-157


4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
Before disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch to turn the power off. Make sure that the
power lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the
disassembly.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Make sure not to
damage the PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something charged with electrostatic.
Make sure to release the hook before disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to pinch up the wire and cable.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts once disassembled.
If the types and the sizes of screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
*: Due to the structure of the 30 ppm model, the operation panel is lit for a moment when the power code is
plugged in.

(2) Storage and handling of the drum
Note the following when handling and storing the drum.

When detaching the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Store in the range of ambient temperature of -20 to 40 degree C(–4°F to 104°F) and ambient humidity of
85% RH or less. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Avoid storing the drum unit in
the place where the temperature and humidity may suddenly change even if these changes are within the
tolerable range.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object.
Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves.
If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3) Storage of the toner container

Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or in a damp environment.

4-2 Maintenance parts
(1) Maintenance kits
Maintenance part name Quan Part No.

Name used in service Name used in parts list tity
manual
MK-6325 MK-6325/MAINTENANCE KIT B1090000
(600,000 images) DRUM(H) UNIT 1
DLP(H) K UNIT 1
FUSER UNIT(H) 1
TRANSFER MONO UNIT 1
ROLLER SECONDRY TRANSFER 1
ASSY
PULLEY FEED 2
PULLEY PICKUP 2
ROLLER RETARD ASSY 2
PULLEY FEED 1
RETARD ROLLER ASSY 1
FILTER TOP 1
FILTER REAR LOWER 1

(2) Executing the maintenance mode after replacing the maintenance kit
Execute the following maintenance modes after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Section Mode Maintenance item MK-6325

No.
Replac- U119 Drum unit initial settings ○
ing set-
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
tings
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit (Belt Initialize) ○
U127 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (Clear) ○
Image U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
adjust-
U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode) ○
ment
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically ○
Mainte- U251 Maintenance counter clear (Clear) ○
nance
Items to perform after replacing the unit

Drum unit
Section Mode Maintenance item

No.
Replac- U119 Drum unit initial settings ○
ing set-
U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
tings
adjust- U412 Adjusting the uneven density (Normal Mode) ○
ment
U464 ID correction operation setting (Calib) ○
Developer unit

No.
Replac- U140 Developer bias adjustment (AC Calib/Calibration) ○
ing set-
tings
adjust- U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically ○
ment


No.
Replac- U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit (Belt Initialize) ○
ing set-
tings
adjust-
ment
Secondary transfer roller unit

No.
Replac- U127 Checking/clearing the transfer counts (Clear) ○
ing set-
tings
Charger roller

No.
Replac- U930 Checking/clearing the main charger roller counts ○
ing set-
tings
adjust-
ment

4-3 Maintenance parts replacement procedures
Replacement of the maintenance kit is required after printing about 600,000 images. The message [Replace
MK.] appears at the replacement timing.
Execute maintenance mode U251 to reset the count after replacing the maintenance kit in the following proce-
dures.
(1) Cassette paper feed section

(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the pickup pulley and paper feed roller
Procedures
1. Pull out the upper cassette (a) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- c
tion of the arrow.
2. Pull out the lower cassette (b) from the
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- a
tion of the arrow.
b
Figure 4-1

*: Insert the positioning parts (b) and (d) into d
the rail shaft and pin (c) when attaching
the cassette (a). e
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-2

3. Pinch the lock lever (a) and pull the pri-
mary paper feed unit (c) from the upper
paper feed section of the main unit (b). b
mary paper feed unit (c) from the lower
paper feed section of the main unit (b). c
Figure 4-3
5. Turn over the primary paper feed unit

(a).
Figure 4-4

6. Slide the feed cover (b) from the pri-
mary feed unit (a).
Figure 4-5
7. Release hooks (a), and remove pickup

pulley (b) and paper feed roller (c) from
the bushing.
*: If the roller is not fully pulled up, it cannot
be removed, and lift up the hook to
remove.
c b
Figure 4-6
IMPORTANT
*: After replacing with the new pickup roller
and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a)
to the position where it is aligned to the
triangle mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-7

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley
Procedures
1. Release hooks (a), and remove retard a
pulley (b) from the bushing (c).
2. Attach the new retard pulley.

(d) again.
4. Attach the new paper feed roller.
5. Attach the new pickup pulley.
6. Reattach the parts in the original posi- c d
tion.
Figure 4-8
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller sur-
face.

*: When installing the primary paper feed
unit (a), align the protrusion (b) at the
lower part of the primary feed unit to the e
d
guide (c) and align the protrusion (d) at
the upper part of the primary feed unit to
the guide (e) of the main unit.
a
c b
Figure 4-9
Execute the following setting after replacing the feed roller.

Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the regist cleaner
1. Open the front cover (a) slightly.
Figure 4-10
2. Open the front cover (a) and then open

the front cover for maintenance (b)
while grasping the upper left and right
part. a
Figure 4-11

3. Open to pull left and right lever (b) of
the inner cover(a).
b b
Figure 4-12
IMPORTANT
When closing the inner cover (a), push A part
so that the lever (b) is at the same level of the
covers at the both sides
Figure 4-13

4. Pull out the regist cleaner (a) by holding
the handle of it.
5. Check the sponge of the regist cleaner
(a) and clean or replace it.
6. Reattach the parts in the original posi-
tion.
Figure 4-14

(2) MP paper feed section
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the MP paper feed roller
Procedures
1. Open the manual feed table (a).
Figure 4-15
2. Pinch the holder (a) and remove the MP b

feed roller (b) in the direction of the
arrow. a
Figure 4-16

Removing of MP paper feed pulley a
c
1. Being slided MP paper feed roller
b
holder (c) till the position which the
hook (b) can see.
2. Release the hook (b) by using the flat- d

head screwdriver, being turned MP
paper feed roller holder (c) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
e c
3. Unplug MP paper feed roller holder (c),
remove MP paper feed pulley (e).
4. Attach the new MP paper feed pulley
(e).
Figure 4-17

(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the MP separation pulley
Procedures
1. Remove the MP separation pulley (a) in
the direction of the arrow.
2. Attach the new MP paper feed roller.
3. Attach the new MP separation pulley. a
tion.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new MP separation pulley
or MP paper feed roller, take care not to touch
the roller surface.
Figure 4-18
Execute the following setting after replacing the MP paper feed roller.
Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear

(3) Transfer section
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the primary transfer unit
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (a) of the main unit
b
(b).
Figure 4-19
2. Open the front cover for maintenance

while slightly opening the front cover.
3. Open the inner cover. a
4. Push in the release lever (b) and grasp
the handle (c), and then pull out the pri-
mary feed unit in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-20

5. After that, hold the upper side handle
(b) and detach the primary feed unit (a)
in the direction of the arrow.
6. Check the primary transfer unit (a) and
clean or replace it. a
7. Reattach the parts in the original posi- b
tion.
IMPORTANT
Take care not to hit the primary transfer belt to
the inner cover (d) and front cover for mainte-
nance (c).
d
c
Figure 4-21

Before installing the primary transfer unit (a),
b
confirm the pressure release lever (b) is B A
aligned to the right edge of the primary transfer
unit cover (c).
If it protrudes at the side A, it will hit the lever

when inserting the unit. c
If aligned to B side, the transfer roller is
pressed and this may damage the belt or drum
when installing the unit.
b
a
b
Figure 4-22

*: When installing the primary transfer unit
(a), hold the handle by on hand and the
frame part by another hand while keeping
c
it horizontally. Install it while aligning the
bent part at the upper side (b) to the rail at c
the main unit.
b
b
a
Figure 4-23
Execute the following setting after replacing the primary transfer unit.
1. Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit (maintenance mode U469): Belt Initialize
2. ID correction operation setting (maintenance mode U464): Calib
3. Adjusting the halftone automatically (maintenance mode U410)

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller unit
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (d).
2. While pressing the front and rear d
machine of the transfer front guide plate
(a), press the rib (b) of its arm section in
a
the direction of the arrow, remove out of
the front and rear hook (c).
b
c
a
b
c
b
c
Figure 4-24
3. Push the lock lever (b) toward the

machine rear side.
4. Release the hooks (c) and rotate the 2
2
lock lever (b) in the direction of the
arrow. 1
5. Detach the secondary transfer roller
unit (d) while lifting up the machine front
b
side.
c
6. Check the secondary transfer roller unit
(d) and clean or replace it.
7. Reattach the parts in the original posi- d
tion.
Execute the following setting after replac-

ing the secondary transfer roller unit.
1. Checking/clearing the transfer counts
(maintenance mode U127): Clear
Figure 4-25

(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the secondary transfer roller
Procedures
1. Open the right cover (a).
2. Lift up the levers (b) at the front and a
rear transfer guide plate (d) and release
the hooks (c) at the front and rear arm.
Then, lift up the transfer guide plate (d).
b
c
b
c
Figure 4-26
3. Push the lock lever (b) toward the

machine rear side. 2
2
4. Release the hooks (c) and rotate the
lock lever (b) in the direction of the 1
arrow.
5. Detach the secondary transfer roller (d)
b
while lifting up the machine front side.
c
6. Check the secondary transfer roller (d)
and clean or replace it.
7. Reattach the parts in the original posi- d
tion.
Execute the following setting after replac-

ing the secondary transfer roller .
1. Checking/ clearing the transfer counts
(maintenance mode U127): Clear
Figure 4-27

(4) Drum section
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the drum unit
Procedures
Figure 4-28

part. a
Figure 4-29

3. Pull the left and right levers (b) of the
inner cover (a) and open it.
b b
Figure 4-30
IMPORTANT
In case of closing the inner cover(a), push A
part till lever (b) becomes the same aspects
with both side of covers.
Figure 4-31

b
(b).
Figure 4-32
5. Push up the lock lever (a) and remove

the drum unit (b). b
6. Attach the new drum units.
tion.
a
b
Figure 4-33

IMPORTANT
Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b) of the a
developer unit when installing the drum unit
while the developer unit is installed. Otherwise,
it causes the drum damage.
Figure 4-34
Execute the following setting after replacing the drum unit.

1. Drum unit initial setting (maintenance mode U119): Execute
3. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode

(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the main charge roller unit
Procedures
1. Open the front cover slightly. b
2. Open the inner cover for maintenance.
3. Open the inner cover.
4. Detach the drum unit (a).
5. Lay down the drum unit (a).
6. Push the lock lever (b).
c ղ
7. Pull up the main charge roller unit (c)
while pressing it and remove it from the
drum unit (a) in the direction of the
arrow. ձ
8. Check the main charge roller unit (c)
tion.
Figure 4-35
IMPORTANT
1. Install the main charge roller unit (a) in
the drum unit (c) while releasing the b
main charger roller release lever (b).
2. Insert the main charger release lever
(b) into the aperture and press down A
part to check it clicks to lock.
a
Figure 4-38
Figure 4-36

Execute the following setting after replacing the main charge roller.
1. Clearing the main charger roller counts (maintenance mode U930): Clear

(5) Developer section
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the developer unit
Procedures
Figure 4-37

part.
Figure 4-38

the inner cover(a).
b b
Figure 4-39
4. Push up the lock lever (a) and remove

the developer units (b).
5. Attach the new developer units.
tion.
Figure 4-40

IMPORTANT
1. When installing the developer unit,
securely insert it by pressing the front
side pressing part (a).
Figure 4-41
2. After inserting the developer unit (a), a

securely push the lock shaft (b).
*: Make sure to pull out the lock shaft (b)

when inserting the developer unit. Other-
wise, it causes the drum damage.
b
Figure 4-42

Execute the following setting after replacing the developer unit.
1. Developer bias adjustment (maintenance mode U140): AC Calibration

(6) Fuser section
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit
Procedures
b
(b).
Figure 4-43
2. Release the hook (b) while pressing the

left and right levers (a), detach the fuser
unit (c) in the direction of the arrow.
b b
a a
Figure 4-44

*: Insert the pin (b) into the main unit rail (c)
and push it until it is latched to the hook,
when installing the fuser unit (a).
b c
c
b
Figure 4-45
IMPORTANT
Insufficient lock will cause the phenomenon below when installing the fuser unit.
1. Back side lock failure
This will cause the C6600 fuser belt rotation failure without drive at the rear side.
2. Front side lock failure
This will cause the image squareness failure due to skew feed.

(6-2)Adjusting the fuser unit height (Trailing edge skew image adjustment)
Procedures
1. Compare the trailing edge of the output image with the original to check the correct image length side
(image front side or image rear side).
[Origin
nal]
P
Printing direc
ction
(Image front side) (Image rear side)
Output image
[O e A] [O
Output imagee B]
(Image front side is short) (Image rear side is short)
(Image front side) (Image rear side) (Image front side) (Image rear side)
Figure 4-46

(b).
b
Figure 4-47

c
b a a b
Figure 4-48
4. Loosen 2 screws (f) fixing the fuser positioning guide at the inner front frame.
5. Lift the fuser positioning guide (g), and relocate the fuser height adjustment lever (h) horizontally.
Note: [Shift amount reference] (Adjust based on the side with the correct image length)
• When the image front side is short (Output image A), relocate the fuser height adjustment lever (h)
toward the machine left side and lower the fuser positioning guide (g) by one step.
Therefore, the image rear side is reduced by about 0.4mm.
• When the image rear side is short (Output image B), relocate the fuser height adjustment lever (h) toward
the machine right side and lift the fuser positioning guide (g) by one step.
Therefore, the image rear side is extended by about 0.4mm.
f (Inner front frame viewed from the machine rear side)
f
Machine left side
Machine right side

h
Figure 4-49
6. After the above adjustment is finished, shift the fuser positioning guide (g) downward to contact the fuser
height adjustment lever (h). And then, tighten 2 screws (f).

(7) Others
(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the filter
Procedures
Rear top filter
1. Push the lever (a), the rear top filter b
cover (b) and remove the rear top filter
a
(c).
2. Clean or replace the rear top filter (c) c
and reattach in the original position.
Rear filter
1. Push the lever (d), the rear filter cover
(e) and remove the rear filter (f).
2. Clean or replace the rear filter (f) and
reattach in the original position.
Figure 4-50

4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (option)
Procedures
paper feeder (b) and pull it out on an
angle.
2. Pull out the lower cassette (a) from the
angle. a
Figure 4-51
3. Open the front cover (a).
Figure 4-52

stage of the paper feeder (b). b
stage of the paper feeder (b). c
Figure 4-53

(a).
Figure 4-54

7. Slide the feed cover (b) from the pri-
mary feed unit (a).
Figure 4-55
8. Release the hooks (a), and remove

pickup pulley (b) and paper feed roller
(c) from the bushing.
*: If the roller is not fully pulled up, it cannot
be removed, and lift up the hook to
remove.
c b
Figure 4-56
IMPORTANT
*: After replacing with the new pickup roller
and feed roller, reseat the feed cover (a)
to the position where it is aligned to the
triangle mark (b).
b
a
Figure 4-57

Procedures
1. Release hooks (a), and remove retard a
pulley (b) from the bushing (c).

(d) again.
c d
tion.
Figure 4-58
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.

*: When installing the primary paper feed
unit (a), align the protrusion (b) at the
lower part of the primary feed unit to the e
d
guide (c) and align the protrusion (d) at
the upper part of the primary feed unit to
the guide (e) of the main unit.
a
c b
Figure 4-59

Procedures
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-60

3. Slide the stopper (b) in the direction of
the arrow and detach it.
Figure 4-61

4. Pull out the right paper deck (a) and the
left paper deck (b) from the paper
feeder (c).
c
b
a
Figure 4-62
5. Hold the handle (a) and pull out the PF

conveying unit.
Figure 4-63

*: When attaching the PF conveying unit
(a), insert the PF conveying unit rail (b)
into the main unit side guide (c).
*: When attaching the PF conveying unit

(a), take care to avoid hitting the lower b
retard release lever (b) of it to the frame.
d
c
b
a
Figure 4-64
6. Turn over the PF conveying unit (a).

7. Release hooks (b), and remove pickup
pulley (c) and paper feed roller (d) from
the bushing.
c
b
Figure 4-65

Procedures
1. Rotate the PF conveying unit (a).
1. Release hooks (b), and remove retard
pulley (c) from the bushing (d).
a
tion.
Figure 4-66
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new paper feed roller, pickup pulley or retard pulley, take care not to touch the roller sur-
face.

(3) Sidefeeder (PF-7120)
Procedures
1. Pull out the deck.
2. Remove the screw (a)(M3x8) and
detach the wire cover (b).
b
Figure 4-67
3. Disconnect the connector (b) of the

main unit (a). d
4. Release the wire (d) from the clamp (c).
5. Remove one screw (e)(M3×8).
6. Slide the PF feed unit (f) frontward and
remove it while rotating it by using the a
positioning shaft (g) as fulcrum. c
g
b
f
e
Figure 4-68

7. Remove two stop rings A (b) from the b
PF paper feed shaft (a).
8. Remove two stop rings B (c) and slide c b
the joint (d).
Figure 4-69
9. Slide two bushings (b) at the both sides

of the feed roller holder (a). d b
10. Remove the feed roller holder (a) and
a
spring (d) upward from the PF feed unit
(c).
Figure 4-70

(4) Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley
Procedures
1. Detach the PF paper feed unit (a).
c
2. Turn over the PF paper feed unit (a).
3. Remove two stop rings (c) from the
separation pulley shaft (b). d
4. Pull out the spacer (d) from separation
pulley shaft and remove it.
*: Take care not to fall the set pin, when
removing the spacer.
Figure 4-71
5. Pull out the set pin (b) of torque limiter

(a).
6. Pull out the torque limiter (a) and PF
separation pulley shaft while pushing d
Retard release lever (c), and remove it.
7. Clean or replace the PF separation pul- b a
c
ley.
8. Attach the PF separation pulley back
again to the PF feed unit.
9. Reattach the PF paper feed unit in the
original position.
Figure 4-72
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch the roller surface.

(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Pulling release lever (b) and open the
fixing cover(c).
Figure 4-73
3. Rotating DP paper feed unit (a) and pull

out it in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-74

(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP separation pulley
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a). a
2. Remove hooks (b) and remove the DP
separation pulley cover (c). b c
Figure 4-75
3. Remove the stop rings (a), and remove

the DP separation pulley (b) and the
torque limiter (c).
4. Check or replace the DP separation
pulley, and then reattach the parts in the
original position.
a
c
b
Figure 4-76

(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley and DP paper feed roller
Procedures
1. Open the DP upper cover (a).

2. Remove one screw (b)(M3×8) of DP
b
paper feed unit (C). a
b
Figure 4-77
3. Tilt up the DP paper feed (a) and

remove it upward.
Figure 4-78

4. Raise the PF paper feed unit (a)
upward.
Figure 4-79
5. Detach the front side stop ring from the d

DP feed belt shaft (a). c
6. Slide the DP feed unit (c) frontward and
remove it from the document processor
(d) b
Figure 4-80

(6-2)Detaching and reattaching the DP separation pulley
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover.
2. Detach the DP paper feed guide (a) and
the DP feed unit.
3. Remove hooks (a) and remove the DP
separation pulley cover (c).
a
b
Figure 4-81
4. Remove the stop rings (a), and remove

the DP separation pulley (b) and the a
torque limiter (c).
5. Attach the new DP separation pad c
assembly. b
tion.
Figure 4-82

4-5 Adjustment procedures after replacing the maintenance kit
Execute the following procedures after replacing the above maintenance kit.
Executable with the preset in the U952 maintenance mode workflow. (6-276)
3. Select the [Execute] .
4. Select the maintenance kit to set.
5. Select the displayed maintenance modes from the top and press the [Start] key to enter the mainte-
nance mode.
6. After transition, execute the setting steps in the maintenance mode.
7. After executing, press the [Stop] key to go back to the original flow.
8. Repeat step 5, 6 and 7 and terminate the workflow.
Start
MK-6325
U119 Setting the drum

(Excute)
U140 Developer bias adjustment

(AC Calib> Calibration)
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit

(Belt Initialize > Excute)
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Clear)
U464 ID correction setting

(Calib > Excute)
U412 Adjusting the uneven density

(Normal Mode)

(Calib > Excute)
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
U251 Clearing the maintenance counter

(Clear)

4-6 Disassembly and Reassembly procedures
(1) OUTER COVERS
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the front cover
Procedures
Figure 4-83

part.
Figure 4-84

3. Close the front cover (a).
Figure 4-85
4. Remove the stopper (b) of the front

cover (a).
5. Slide the front cover in the direction of
the arrow and remove the fulcrum (d) a
from the fulcrum shaft (c).
c
d
Figure 4-86

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the front cover for maintenance
Procedures
main unit (b) and remove it in the direc-
tion of the arrow. b
Figure 4-87
2. Remove the stop ring (b) from the ful-

crum pin (a).
Figure 4-88

3. Open the front cover slightly.
(a).
5. Remove each one screw, remove the
strap (c) from the front cover (a) and b c
remove in the direction of the arrow.
c
b
Figure 4-89
(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the inner cover

Procedures
1. Open the inner cover for maintenance.
Figure 4-90

2. Open the inner cover.
3. Release the hook(b) with a flat-blade
screwdriver(a), remove the inner cover a
(c) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-91
(1-4)Rear top cover

Procedures
1. Remove one screw (a)(M3x10) and
remove the rear top cover (b) by sliding
a
it in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-92

(1-5)Detaching and reattaching the rear bottom cover
Procedures
2. Push down the rear bottom cover (b)
and unlatch the hook (d) at the upper
side. Open it slightly and unlatch the
hook (c) at the lower side. After that,
detach it in the direction of the arrow.
c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-93

(1-6)Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover
Procedures
1. If DP are mounted, Open it.
2. Remove the rear top cover.
3. Remove two screw (a)(M3x8).
4. Remove the DP rear cover (b) in the
direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-94
(1-7)Detaching and reattaching the LSU rear cover

Procedures
1. Remove the rear top cover. a
2. Remove the DP rear cover.
4. Detach the LSU rear cover (b) in the
direction of the arrow. a
Figure 4-95

(1-8)Detaching and reattaching the left top cover/ the rear left cover.
Procedures
1. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8). b
2. Release two hooks (c) and remove the
left rear cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
a
Figure 4-96

5. Insert the front side of aperture into flat-
head screwdriver (c), spread in the
direction of the arrow,release four
hooks (d) and remove the left top cover
(e).
c

Attach the top left cover (e) after latching four a
lower hooks (f) and then the upper hook (d).
d
e
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-97

6. Pull out the lower cassette.
7. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8).
8. Unlatch four hooks while lifting up the
left bottom cover (b), and remove it.
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-98

(1-9)Detaching and reattaching the right top cover
Procedures

2. After removing the front rib (c), remove
the right top cover (b) in the direction of
b
the arrow.
Figure 4-99
(1-10)Detaching and reattaching the rear right top cover, rear right bottom cover
Procedures
1. Detach the rear top cover.
2. Open the right cover. c
4. Release the hooks (b) and remove the
right rear top cover (c).
c
b
Figure 4-100

5. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8) and
remove the right rear bottom cover (c)

c
When reattaching it, latch two hooks (b).
Figure 4-101
(1-11)Detaching and reattaching the right cover assembly

Procedures
1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the hooks of the damper
spring (a).
3. Remove the stopper (c) of the fulcrum
pin (b). Slide the arm (d) in the direction
of the arrow and detach it from the ful-
crum pin (b).
a
c
b d
Figure 4-102

4. Rotate the wire cover (b).
5. Release the wire (c) from the hook (d) a
and disconnect two connectors (d).
b
c
d
Figure 4-103
6. Remove the stopper (a) ,and slide the

strap(b) and detach it from the pin (b).
Figure 4-104

7. Open front (a) and back (b) of the han-
dle cover.
8. Tilt up the front cover shaft (c). After
that, slide it in the direction of the arrow
9. Tilt up the back cover shaft (a). After
that draw up in the direction of the b
arrow.
d
d
a
c
Figure 4-105

10. Detach the right cover assembly (a) in
Figure 4-106

Detaching and reattaching the conveying unit
11. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8).

12. Release two hooks (b) and remove the
wire cover (c).
a
c
Figure 4-107
13. Disconnect the connector (a) and

remove two wire stoppers (b).
Figure 4-108

14. Remove the pins (c) from the cutout
parts (b) at the both sides of the middle
guide (a). c
15. Rotate it and remove the pin (e) upward c
from the oval hole (d).
16. Remove the pin (g) from the hole (f) in
the direction of the arrow and then
remove the middle guide (a).
b
e
Figure 4-109

17. Rotate and open the resist guide (a).
18. Tilt up the shaft (b) and (c), and slide it
Figure 4-110
19. Detach the conveying unit (a) in the a

Figure 4-111

(2) Optical section
(2-1)Detaching and reattaching the LSU
Procedures
b
(b).
Figure 4-112
2. Open the front cover (a) slightly and

open the front cover (b) for mainte-
nance.
Figure 4-113

the inner cover (a).
b b
Figure 4-114
4. Pull out the regist cleaner (a) by holding

the handle of it.
Figure 4-115

6. Detach the rear secondary transfer
guide (b) in the direction of the arrow.
b
a
b
Figure 4-116
7. Remove the middle conveying unit wire

(a) from the connector (b).
Figure 4-117

When reattaching it, insert the middle convey-
ing unit wires (a) in to the rib (b) after connect-
ing it to the connector.
Figure 4-118
8. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8) and

remove the middle conveying unit (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-119

When attaching the middle conveying unit (c), a
latch positioning parts (a) and the positioning
hole (b). a
b
c
b
Figure 4-120

9. Loosen the LSU fixing pins (c) or spring
(c) with a screwdriver (a) and remove
them.
c
b
c
b
Figure 4-121

arrow.
a
Figure 4-122

(e).
c

Attach latching the top side of hooks (d) after a
latching four lower hooks (f) when the left top
d
e
of cover (e).
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-123

17. Lift and remove four hooks (c) and
remove left lower cover (b).
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-124

detach the LSU left stay (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-125
19. Pull out the laser scanner unit (a) half

way. b
20. Detach the FFC connector (b) and the
FFC connector (c).
Figure 4-126

21. Pull out the laser scanner unit (a).
22. Check the laser scanner unit (a) and
clean or replace it.
tion.
Figure 4-127

Notes when replacing the laser scanner unit
Execute the following adjustment after replacing the laser scanner unit.
1. Drum unit initial setting (maintenance mode U119): Execute

(1)Input "119" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
*: Start the drum set up operation.
Press the [Stop] key.

(2)Select [Calib].
(4)Press the [Stop] key.
3. Adjusting the uneven density (maintenance mode U412): Normal Mode

(2)Select [Normal Mode].
(3)Press the [Start] key.
*: Output the test pattern with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
(4)Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern for an original.
(5)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(6)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (2nd sheet)
*: Output with 20% less light intensity than the 1st test pattern.
(8)Press the [Start] key. Correction starts.
(9)Press the [Start] key after completing correction. Output the test pattern. (3rd sheet)
*: Check the result of the correction. When correction has normally completed, [Fin] is displayed.

(2)Select [Calib].

(1)Input "410" using the numeric keys.
*: Test patterns 1 and 2 are output on the A4 paper.
(3)Set the output test pattern 1 as original, in the back side which the direction of the arrow is, looking down
the side which is printing to the original glass.

Figure 4-128

(5)Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
(7)[Finish] displays after normal completion.
6. Exiting from the maintenance mode

*: The maintenance mode is exited.

(2-2)Detaching and reattaching the lens unit
Procedures

b
the arrow.
Figure 4-129
3. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and D

remove the right ISU cover (b).
E
D
Figure 4-130

4. Detaches the contact glass (a) in the D
Figure 4-131
5. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8) and D

D
detach the lens cover (b).
D
D
D
Figure 4-132

6. Removes the FFC (a).
7. Disconnect the FFC from the FFC con- E
nector (b) with a lock.
Figure 4-133

a
8. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8). a
9. Detaches the lens unit (b) in the direc- a
tion of the arrow. a
a a
a b a
Figure 4-134

Detaching the lens unit
Decide the fix position of lens unit (a) by the

a
H
following.
The right and left of machine: Confirm the
number a on the label affixed on the lens (b).
Match the line (c) of lens unit (a) to the posi- G
tioning line (b) of same number on frame side.
The rear and front of machine: Match the edge
(e) of lens unit (a) to the positioning line (d) on F
frame side.
Fix the lens unit (a) as before with four screws. E
D b
Figure 4-137
Figure 4-135
(2-3)Detaching and reattaching the lamp unit

Procedures
1. Detach the original cover or the docu-
ment processor.
b
the arrow. a
Figure 4-136

4. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and D
then remove the right ISU cover (b).
E
D
Figure 4-137
5. Remove the contact glass (a) in the D

Figure 4-138

6. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and
then remove the front glass cover (b). a
*: Remove the right side of the machine
earlier and then detach it.
b
a
Figure 4-139
7. Remove two pins (a)(M3x8) and then a

remove the rear glass cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-140

8. Peel off two sheets (a).
Figure 4-141
9. Move the lamp unit assembly (a) to the

cut-out (b).
b
10. Remove the hook (c) and remove FFC
cover (d) from the lamp unit (a).
11. Remove FFC (f) from FFC connector
(e). a
12. Remove two hooks (g) and remove
FFC guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
b
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-142

a
remove the lamp unit (b) from mirror
frame A (c).
14. Check or replace the lamp unit (b), and b
then reattach the parts in the original a
position.
15. When replacing the lamp unit (b), exe-
cute maintenance mode U411 (adjust-
ing the scanner automatically).
c
IMPORTANT
Use an air blower brush when cleaning the
reflector, light guide plate and diffusion sheet
of the LED mount assembly. Clean not to leave
a hair dust.
Figure 4-143

(2-4)Detaching and reattaching the scanner wires
Precautions
When fitting the scanner wires, be sure to
use those specified below.
Machine front side (P/N: AVGR261905)
Machine rear side(P/N: AVGR26189U)
Fitting requires the following tools

Two frame securing tools (P/N: AVGR26422E)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N: AVGR26423A)
Procedures
1. Detach the right top cover.
2. Detach the ISU right cover.
3. Detach the contact glass.

then remove the front glass cover (b). a
*: Remove the right side of the machine
earlier and then detach it.
b
a
Figure 4-144

5. Remove two pins (a)(M3x8) and then a
remove the rear glass cover (b).
a
b
Figure 4-145
6. Peel off two sheets (a).
Figure 4-146

7. Move the lamp unit assembly (a) to the
cut-out (b).
8. Remove the hook (c) and remove FFC b
cover (d) from the lamp unit (a).
9. Remove FFC (f) from FFC connector
(e).
10. Remove two hooks (g) and remove
a
FFC guide (h) from the lamp unit (a).
b
g
f
h a
g
Figure 4-147

a
remove the lamp unit (b) from mirror
frame A (c).
b
a
Figure 4-148

12. Remove each one screw (c)
(M3x×8),remove the front wire presser f
plate (d) and the rear wire presser plate
(e) from mirror frame A (f).
13. Detach the mirror frame A (f) from the
main unit.
d e
c
c
Figure 4-149
14. Detach the round terminals (b) from the d

scanner wire springs (c) on scanner unit b
(a) left side.
15. Detach the scanner wire (d) from the
main unit.
a
b
d c
Figure 4-150

Detaching the scanner wires
1. Insert the locating ball (a) on the scan-

ner wire into the hole in the scanner
wire drum (b).
2. Wind the scanner wires (c) three turns
inward and five turns outward.
*: Shorter from small ball of the scanner
wire is wound to come outside.
*: Use the gray wire for the machine front
side and black wire for the machine rear
side.
3. Secure the scanner wires (c) using the
scanner wire stoppers (d). 5 3
3 5
d d
Figure 4-151

4. Move the mirror frame B (a) as shown c
in the figure and insert two frame secur-
ing tools (c) into the positioning holes
(b) at the front and rear of the machine b
center to fix the mirror frame B (a) in
position.
c
Figure 4-152
1. Wind the outer scanner wires (a) around the outside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from
above to below. ........................................................ (1)
*: The scanners wires pass the outside of positioning pin.
2. Hook the round terminals (c) to the catches (d) inside the scanner unit. ................................ (2)
3. Wind the inner scanner wires (e) around the grooves in the pulleys (f) at the left of the scanner unit from
below to above. ........................................................ (3)
*: The scanner wires pass the lower side of mirror frame B (j).
4. Wind the scanner wires around the inside grooves in the pulleys (b) of the mirror frame B from below to
above. ...................................................................... (4)
5. Wind the inner scanner wires (e) around the grooves in the pulleys (f) at the left of the scanner unit from
below to above. ........................................................ (5)
6. Hook the round terminals (h) to the scanner wire springs (i). .................................................. (6)
7. Apply the procedures 1 through 6 to another scanner wires.

hg
i
b
i
h
f
g
c
d
a
f
c
d e
a
b
i e
h
g
j
b e
d
LQQHU
c a
outer
Figure 4-153

5. Detach the scanner wire stoppers and
the frame securing tools.
6. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire
drum, align the scanner wires to the
inside.
7. Move the mirror frame B(b) from side to
side to correctly locate the wires in posi-
tion.
8. Refit the mirror frame A (a) in the main
unit.
9. Move the mirror frames A (a) and the
mirror frames B (b) to the machine left,
g g d
and insert two frame securing tools (d) e
into the positioning holes (c) at the front f
and rear of the scanner unit to secure d
the mirror frame A (a) and the mirror
frame B (b) in position.
10. Attach the front wire holder plate (e)
and rear wire holder plate (f) to the mir-
ror frame A (a) with each screw (g)
while holding the wire (h) with the c
plates.
11. Detach the frame securing tools (d).
12. Reattach the lamp unit in the original
position.
c h
b
a
a h
b
Figure 4-154

(3) Drive section
(3-1)Detaching and reattaching the feed drive unit
Procedures

2. Push down the rear lower cover (b),
release the upper rib, lift in slightly
opened state and release the lower
hook (c). Detach it in the direction of the
arrow.
c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-155

3. Remove ten connectors (b) from feed
drive PWB (a).
4. Release the wire saddle (c) and remove
the wire (d).
d
c
YC10
YC9
YC1
YC11
YC6
YC2
YC3
YC7
YC4
YC5
Figure 4-156

5. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8) and a
detach the feed drive unit (b).
6. Check the feed drive unit (b) and clean
b
or replace it.
7. Reattach the parts in the original posi- a a
tion.
a
a
b a
a
a a
Figure 4-157

(3-2)Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit
Procedures
a
Figure 4-158

hook (c). After that, detach it in the
c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-159

3. Remove three connectors (b) from feed
drive PWB (a).
Figure 4-160
4. Release four wire saddles(a). Release

the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove
the wire (c).
b c
Figure 4-161

5. Remove sixteen connectors (b) from
feed drive PWB (a).
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
22
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC C3
2
Y 1
YC
a
23
YC
2 29 35
YC YC YC
3
YC
a (b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-162
6. Remove the connector (b) and then

remove the cables (a).
b
a
Figure 4-163

7. Push up the hook (b) of the waste toner
joint (a) to release the stopper (c) and
pull it out toward you.
IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
a
without detaching the waste toner joint (a), the
sensor cleaning sprint inside the joint might 1 2
deform and the waste toner full might be mis-
detected.
c
b
Figure 4-164
8. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and

detach the main drive unit (b).
9. Check the main drive unit (b) and clean
or replace it.
tion. a
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-165

(3-3)Detaching and reattaching the container motor
Procedures
a
Figure 4-166

arrow.
c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-167

Figure 4-168

arrow.
a
Figure 4-169

b
(b).
Figure 4-170

10. Release the hooks (b) and remove the c
c
b
Figure 4-171

11. Release four connectors (b) from the
main PWB (a) and draw from the aper-
ture (e). Remove the wire (c) from two c
wire saddles (d). e
d
b
Figure 4-172
12. Disconnect the FFC and the connector

from the engine PWB.
b
c
Figure 4-173

13. Remove three screws (a)(M3x8).
a
Figure 4-174
14. After lifting the shield box (a), draw it

and release the hooks (b). a
15. Open the shield box (a).
b
Attention
When operating in the rear lower side of the
machine with open shield box, pay attention
not to hit the head in the shield box.
Figure 4-175

16. Remove the connector (b) from the con-
b
tainer motor (a).
a
Figure 4-176

then remove the container motor
assembly (b)
18. Check the transfer motor assembly (b)
tion.
b a
Figure 4-177

(3-4)Detaching and reattaching the toner supply drive unit
Procedures
a
Figure 4-178

arrow.
c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-179

Figure 4-180

arrow.
a
Figure 4-181

b
(b).
Figure 4-182

c
b
Figure 4-183

wire saddles (d). e
d
b
Figure 4-184

b
c
Figure 4-185

a
Figure 4-186

b
Attention
Figure 4-187

tainer motor (a). Remove ten connec- b
tors (d) from feed image PWB (c). a
18. Remove the wire (e) from the five wire
saddles (f).
b c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-188

20. Unlatch six upper side hooks (c) with a c
flat-blade screwdriver (b) and then four
lower side hooks (c), and then remove b
the transfer terminal cover (d).
a
d
Figure 4-189

IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (Eight parts) c
Figure 4-190
21. Remove three connectors (b) from feed

drive PWB (a).
Figure 4-191

22. Release four wire saddles(a). Release
the cable tie with a snap (b) and remove
the wire (c).
b c
Figure 4-192
23. Remove sixteen connectors (b) from

feed drive PWB (a).
36
YC
21
YC
19
YC 25
YC
22
YC
17
YC
6
YC
33
YC 30
28 YC
24 YC
YC C3
2
Y 1
YC
a
23
YC
2 29 35
YC YC YC
3
YC
a (b: )
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-193

24. Remove the connector (b) and then
remove the cables (a).
b
a
Figure 4-194

IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the main drive unit a
detected.
c
b
Figure 4-195

26. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and
detach the main drive unit (b).
a
a
a
b
a
a b a
a
a a a
Figure 4-196
27. Spread two hooks (a), release the hook

(b), pull and remove the joint section (c) d
of the toner supply drive unit (d).
b b
1 1
a a
c
2
Figure 4-197

remove the toner supply drive unit (b).
29. Check the toner supply drive unit (b)
tion.
a
b a
a a a
b
Figure 4-198

(3-5)Detaching and reattaching the fuser drive unit
Procedures
a
Figure 4-199

arrow.
c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-200

Figure 4-201

arrow.
a
Figure 4-202

b
(b).
Figure 4-203

c
b
Figure 4-204

wire saddles (d). e
d
b
Figure 4-205

b
c
Figure 4-206

a
Figure 4-207

b
Attention
16. Detach the fuser unit. a
Figure 4-208

17. Remove the two connectors (a) and
wire (b) from the hook (c).
b
c
Figure 4-209

19. Detach the fuser drive unit (c) in the
direction of the arrow, while pressing
the release lever (b).
20. Check the fuser drive unit (c) and clean
or replace it.
tion.
b
a
c
a
Figure 4-210

When reattaching the fuser drive unit (a), pull
the lever (b) in the direction of the arrow and
pass the opposite side lever (c) through the
aperture (d).
c
d
a
d
d c
b
Figure 4-211

(4) Others
(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the SSD
Procedures
a
Figure 4-212
2. Remove one screw (a)(M2).

3. Remove the SSD (b) from the connec-
tor (c).
*: Use a Phillips 1 screwdriver and take care e
not to damage the screws.
c
a
b
Figure 4-213
IMPORTANT
To avoid damage when attaching the SSD (b), align the screw hole (d) to the positioning boss (e).
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.

SSD replacement procedures when the SSD replacement is indicated.
*: Data transfer by U026 is not available since data cannot be read when SSD is broken or it is in Read
Only mode.
Procedures
Preparation: 2 USB memory (for firmware and data backup)
Before operating, perform data backup in U917.
(1)Firmware storage in a USB memory (USB memory A)

1. Store the firm upgrade pack of latest version in USB memory or release firmware (Main/MMI/
BROWSER/DICTIONARY/LANGUAGE/OCR).
*: Check the firmware applicable to the target model. When inputting the software of outside the target,
becomes unstable in action.
In order to reboot, require minimum main.
(2)SSD data backup (USB memory B)

*: When fully back up 32G SSD, it need 64GB USB memory.
1. Install the USB memory B.
2. Execute maintenance mode U026
Input "026" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Select [SSE].
Select [Backup]. Press the [Start] key.
Turn the power off after completion.
3. Replace the new SSD.
*: When equipping with SSD (8G/32G) which the capacity is different from the specification, pay attention
as F010 SSD and communication error happen.
4. Turn ON the power with equipping with USB memory A.
As the program from SSD can't load, SSD recovery program which is SNOR on the main PWB start up,
is formatted automatically.
*: When forgot the USB memory equipment, pay attention as F010 displays.
5. If UPDATE completion is displayed on the control panel, turn OFF/ON the power with inserted USB
memory A.
(3)Update firmware. (See page 5-1)

(4)Retrieve the data backed up in the USB memory B.
(5)Install from HyPAS application(FMU), application screen.
*: Check the kind of HyPAS application which is displayed in the application screen before replacing and
reinstall.

(4-2)Detaching and reattaching the hard disk
Procedures
a
Figure 4-214
2. Disconnect two connectors (a).

3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8).
Remove two hooks (b)(M3x8) and d d
remove the hard disk assembly (c).
b
b
c
b
Figure 4-215

IMPORTANT
When removing the connector of the hard disk
(a), pay attention not to apply the force on the
battery of the main PWB.
If applying to the force, there is a fear of termi- b

nal damaging.
Figure 4-216
4. Remove foure screws (a) and remove

the hard disk (b). a
a
5. Check the hard disk (b) and clean or
replace it.
tion.
Figure 4-217
*: Execute maintenance mode U024 (See page 6-31) when formatting a new HDD.

IMPORTANT
When installing the HDD (a), hold it without a a
touching the PWB side (b) to avoid damage.
b
Figure 4-218

(4-3)Detaching and reattaching the lift motor
Procedures
main unit (c) and remove it in the direc- c
tion of the arrow.
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-219

*: Insert the positioning parts (b) and (d) into
d
the cassette (a). e
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-220

paper feed section of the main unit (b). b
paper feed section of the main unit (b). c
Figure 4-221
c
5. Disconnect two connectors (a) and
b b
three screws (b)(M3x8).
6. Remove the lift motor (c).
b a
7. Check the lift motor (c) and clean or
replace it.
a
b b
c
b b
b
b b c
b
Figure 4-222

Procedure in case of replacing
In case of the upper (A) A a b
(1)When attaching the lift motor, disconnect
the connector (b), unltach two hooks (d)
d
and and remove the wire (c).
(2)Connect the connector (b) of the wire (c)

once disconnected to the new lift motor (e) c
and secure it onto two hooks (f).
e b
c
Figure 4-223
In case of the lower (B) d
(1)When attaching the lift motor, remove the B b
film (b) affixed to the old fan motor (a), dis- a
connect the connector (c) and remove the
wire (d).
*: The film (b) can not be used in the new lift
motor. c
(2)Connect the connector (c) of the wire (d)
once disconnected to the new lift motor (e).
*: Don't fix the wire (d) in the hook (f).
f
e d
Figure 4-224
c
tion.
Figure 4-225

(4-4)Detaching and reattaching the fuser discharger unit
Procedures
(b).
b
Figure 4-226

b b
a a
Figure 4-227

4. Remove the fuser discharger unit (c)
from the IH unit (b)
5. Check the fuser discharger unit (c) and
replace it.
tion.
a
c
a
b
a
Figure 4-228

(4-5)Detaching and reattaching the eject unit
Procedures
(b).
b
Figure 4-229
2. Detach the fuser unit. a

3. Disconnect the connector (a) of the
eject unit.
4. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the eject unit (c).
5. Check the eject unit (c) and clean or
replace it.
tion.
b
b
c
b
b b
Figure 4-230

(4-6)Detaching and reattaching the waste toner box unit
Procedures
*: With turning on the power, pull toner container(a).
*: When being locked the container cover (b), being operated the container solenoid in the maintenance
mode U033, and open the container cover.
b
a
Figure 4-231

main unit (b) and remove it in the direc- c
tion of the arrow.
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-232

*: Insert the positioning parts (b) and (d) into
d
the cassette (a). e
d
e
c
a
b
c
Figure 4-233
3. Release five hooks (b) of front right

cover (a) and remove it in the direction
of the arrow.
Figure 4-234

4. Remove the stop ring (b) from the ful-
crum pin (a) of the front cover for main-
tenance.
a
Figure 4-235
5. Open the front cover slightly.

(a).
7. Remove each one screw, remove the
strap (c) from the front cover (a) and b c
remove in the direction of the arrow.
c
b
Figure 4-236

8. Close the front cover (a).
Figure 4-237
9. Remove the stopper (b) of the front

cover (a).
10. Slide the front cover in the direction of
the arrow and remove the main unit ful- a
crum (d) from the fulcrum shaft (c).
c
d
Figure 4-238

11. Remove the pin (b) while bending the
fulcrum and detach the waste toner box
cover (a).
Figure 4-239
12. Detach the waste toner box (a).
Figure 4-240

the inner cover (a).
b b
Figure 4-241
14. Detach the primary transfer unit.

15. Detach the drum unit.
16. Detach the developer unit.
17. Release the hook (b) with the flat-blade

screwdriver (a) and remove inner cover
(c) in the direction of the arrow.
a
Figure 4-242

18. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).
Remove the connector (a) and then
remove the front container cover (c).
b c a
b
b c b b
Figure 4-243

c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-244

21. Remove the wire (b) from the connector
of waste toner box unit (a).
Figure 4-245
IMPORTANT
When attaching the connector, be routed so a
there is a margin to the wire (a).
When pulling the waste toner box unit by wir-
ing, take care that the erroneous detection of
the waste toner box presence or absence and
the erroneous detection of early full occur.
Figure 4-246

IMPORTANT
When attempting to detach the main drive unit
a
detected.
c
b
Figure 4-247
23. Pull the rail (b) of upper stage cassette,

remove one screw (a)(M3x8).
a b
Figure 4-248

24. Open the right cover.
25. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) of the
right front cover.
b
b
b
b
a
a
Figure 4-249
26. Disconnect the connector (c). Remove

eight screws (a)(M3x8) and then
remove the front inner cover (b).
c
aa b
a
a
a
a
a a
a a
a b
a
a
Figure 4-250

27. Disconnect two connectors (a).
29. Remove two hooks (c) and remove the b c
Drum/Developer relay PWB.
d
d d
Figure 4-251

31. Release four hooks (c) and remove the
arrow.
a
b
c
Figure 4-252

(e).
c

d
e
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-253

37. Lift and remove four hooks (c) and
remove left lower cover (b).
a
a
b
a
c
b
c c c c
Figure 4-254
Figure 4-255

remove the waste toner box unit (b).
40. Check the waste toner unit (b) and
clean or replace it.
tion.
Figure 4-256
Execute the following setting after replacing the waste toner bottle unit.
Waste toner bottle weight detection calibration (The Execution of maintenance mode U155): Calibration
Waste toner box threshold level setting procedure

1. Open the waste toner box cover and detach it.
2. Select maintenance mode U155 and close the waste toner box cover.
3. Select [Calibration] and confirm [None] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
4. Insert the empty waste toner box (Empty), close the waste toner box cover.
5. Select [Calibration] and confirm [Empty] indicated next to [Waste Toner]. Press the [Start] key.
6. Remove the empty waste toner box (Empty) and install it. Close the waste toner box cover.
7. Renew the value of [None/Empty] side, make sure the [OK] display of [Execute] side.
*: If numbers (error code) is indicated next to [Execute], redo from the first step.
(If the detected waste toner box weight fluctuates(box installed/not installed), an error is indicated)

(4-7)Fan motor attachment direction
*: When reattaching the fan motor, be aware of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).
h c
a
g j
e
b
d f
Figure 4-257
a. IH PWB fan motor: intake *2 f. Power source fan motor: intake *2

b. Toner sucking fan motor : intake *3 g. Eject/IH fan motor front: intake *2
c. Controller fan motor: intake : intake *1 h. Eject/IH fan motor middle: intake *2
d. Developer fan motor BK: intake *2 i. Eject fan motor: intake *2
e. Fuser edge fan motor: intake *2 j. Container cooling fan motor 1: intake *2
*1: rating label side: the upper side, *2: rating label side: the inside, *3: rating label side: the lower side

(5) PWBs
(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the engine PWB
Procedures
a
Figure 4-258

2. Disconnect all the connectors from the
engine PWB (b).
3. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8) and then
remove the engine PWB (b). a
4. Check or replace the engine PWB (b),
and then reattach the parts in the origi- a
nal position. b
a
a
YC1
YC6
YC36 YC29
YC16 YS1 YC38
YC43
YC35
YC42
YC40
YC39 YC33 YC23 20
1
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21 YC22
Figure 4-259
Notes when detaching a

In the case of the FFC connector (YC35) with a
lock, release the lock cover (a) and pull out the
FFC (b).
b b
Figure 4-260

Notes when replacing the engine PWB
When replacing the engine PWB (a), make sure to remove the EEPROM (b) (YS1) from the old board and
install it in the new board.
b
YS1
YS1
b
Figure 4-261

(5-2)Detaching and reattaching the main PWB
Procedures
remove the rear top cover (b) by sliding a
Figure 4-262
(Step 2 to 3 is only IB-35 equipment model)
2. Disconnect the connector (a) from the

connector (c) of the main PWB (b). e
3. Detach the screw (d)(M3x6) and
remove the PWB unit (e).
b
IMPORTANT
When pull the connector (a) out of the connec-
tor of the main PWB (b), straightly pull out
against the main PWB (b) and do not pull out a
c
on the skew.
When pulling out on the skew, it causes the
damage of FPC (f).
d e
Figure 4-263

(Procedure 4 to 6: Document processor (CIS)
only)
4. Disconnect the connector from the DP
relay PWB (a).
6. Detach the DP relay PWB (a) while b
removing the backside connector (d).
c
d
c
a
c
YC2
YC1
Figure 4-264

main PWB (a).
8. Remove eight screws (b)(M3x8) and b
remove the main PWB (a).
9. Check the main PWB (a) and clean or b
replace it if necessary.
10. Reattach the parts in the original posi- b
tion.
b
b
b
a b
b
YC6
YC59 YC11 YC63 YC9
YC58
YC12 YC8
YC43
YC5
YC10
YC2
YC51
YC33
YC32 YC42
YC23
Figure 4-265

Notes when replacing the main PWB
When replacing the main PWB, make sure to remove the SSD from the old board and install it in the new main
board. (4-130Reference)
IMPORTANT
A machine without the SSD does not start up.
Do not replace the main PWB, engine PWB and SSD at the same time.
Execute the following setting after replacing the main PWB.

1. Machine No. (maintenance mode U004)
*: If the C0180 error occurs, execute U004 to match the serial numbers in the PWBs.
Execute it after confirming the engine PWB machine serial number matches the main unit serial number.
Wrong data will be written when there is a discrepancy in U004.
*: Before executing U004, execute U026/ Flash, return to the SSD back up data.
(3)Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
2. Firmware update (See page 5-1)

*: Check the latest firmware and upgrade it.

(2)Select [Calib].

(1)Input "410" using the numeric keys.
*: Test patterns 1 and 2 are output on the A4 paper.
(3)Set the output test pattern 1 as original, in the back side which the direction of the arrow is, looking down
the side which is printing to the original glass.
Figure 4-266


(5)Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
(7)[Finish] displays after normal completion.
5. Resetting the initial settings

Reset the user default setting and FAX default setting (e.g. the local FAX information) from the System Menu
or Command Center.
6. Resetting the maintenance mode
Reset the following maintenance mode if necessary
No. Maintenance mode relating to the main unit No. Maintenance mode relating to
the main unit
U250 Maintenance counter preset U603 User data 1
U251 Maintenance counter clear U604 User data 2
U253 Double/single count switch U610 System 1
U260 Feed/eject counter switch U611 System 2
U345 Maintenance timing pre-caution setting U612 System 3
U402 Print margin adjustment U625 Communication Setting
U403 Scanning margin adjustment (table) U695 FAX function customization
U404 Scanning margin adjustment (DP)
U425 Target adjustment
7. Exiting from the maintenance mode

Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.

(5-3)Detaching and reattaching the main high voltage PWB
Procedures
a
Figure 4-267

c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-268

Figure 4-270

4. Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
Figure 4-269

main high voltage PWB (a).
6. Detach three screws (b)(M3x8).
7. Release two board supports (e).
8. Release the left side of one hook (c). c
9. Release the top of two hooks (c) and
remove the main high voltage PWB (a). d
10. Check or replace the main high voltage
PWB (a), and then reattach the parts.
c d
d
e
e
e
b
b a
b
Figure 4-270

(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the transfer high voltage PWB
Procedures
a
Figure 4-271
2. Open when DP is attached.

Figure 4-272

arrow.
a
Figure 4-273

(b).
b
Figure 4-274

c
b
Figure 4-275

wire saddles (d). e
d
b
Figure 4-276

b
c
Figure 4-277
Figure 4-278

b
Attention
Figure 4-279

b
tainer motor (a). Remove ten connec-
tors (d) from feed image PWB (c).
a
16. Remove the wire (e) from the five wire
saddles (f).
b c
YC36
YC22
YC19
YC21
YC33 YC17
YC24 YC25
YC32
YC6
YC28
YC2
YC1
YC23 YC30
YC3 YC29
YC35
Figure 4-280

18. Unlatch six upper side hooks (c) with a c
flat-blade screwdriver (b) and then four
lower side hooks (c), and then remove b
the transfer terminal cover (d).
a
d
Figure 4-281

IMPORTANT
When attaching the transfer terminal cover (a),
make sure that the rib (b) is between two termi-
nals. (Eight places)
c
Figure 4-282
19. Disconnect one connector (b) from the

transfer high voltage PWB (a).
20. Remove two screws (c)(M3x8).
21. Release two board supports (a)and
remove the transfer high voltage PWB d b
(a).
22. Check or replace the transfer high volt-
age PWB (a), and then reattach the
parts in the original position.
c
a
Figure 4-283

(5-5)Detaching and reattaching the lower voltage power PWB
Procedures

arrow.
c
2
1
1
c 3
Figure 4-284

4. Detach the rear stay (b).
a
a
b a
Figure 4-285
5. Disconnect two connectors (c).

6. Remove one screw (b)(M3x8) and
a
remove the ground terminal (c).
7. Remove the wire saddles (d). b
a d
Figure 4-286

8. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8). c
9. When attaching the PF drawer holder
(c), make sure to hang it to two lancings
(b).
IMPORTANT
When attaching the PF drawer holder (c),
make sure to hang it to the two lancings (b).
a
Figure 4-287

main high voltage PWB (a).
11. Detach three screws (b)(M3x8).
12. Release two board supports (e).
13. Release the left side of one hook (c). c
14. Release the top of three hooks (d) and
remove the main high voltage PWB (a). d
c d
d
e
e
e
b
b a
b
Figure 4-288

remove the shield lid (b).
a
b
Figure 4-289

17. Rotating to unplug the lower side in
advance and remove the power shield
(b).
a
a
b
b
a
Figure 4-290

power source PWB (a).
19. Remove five screws (b)(M3x8).
20. Release two board supports (c) and c
remove the low voltage power PWB (a).
21. Check or replace the power source
PWB (a), and then reattach the parts in b
the original position.
c
b
a
b
YC2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 YC5
YC3
YC1
TB1 TB2
TB3
YC4
Figure 4-291

(5-6)Detaching and reattaching the IH PWB
Procedures
1. Tilt down the operation unit (a).
a
Figure 4-292
2. Lift up the lever (b) of the sub tray (a) d

and release the lock. Lift up the
machine rear side (c) and slide it to the
front side.
3. Lift up the pin (d) and remove it. Detach
the sub tray (a).
d
b
4. Remove one screw (e)(M3×8). a
5. Disconnect the connector cover (f).
f
e
Figure 4-293

When the job separator is installed
b a
Figure 4-294
2. Lift the lever (b) of the upper tray (a),

release the lock, slide in the direction of
the arrow, unplug pin (c) and remove in
Figure 4-295

arrow.
a
Figure 4-296

5. Insert the flat-blade screw driver (c) into
the front side aperture (b) and unlatch
the four hooks (d) in the direction of the
arrow and then remove the top left
cover (e).
c

d
e
d
d
b
a
Figure 4-297

6. Detach the sub tray (a) in the direction
of the arrow.
Figure 4-298

8. Remove three hooks (a) and remove
the rear middle cover (c).
b a
Figure 4-299

10. Detach the sensor mounting plate (b).
Figure 4-300

12. Detach the IH shield plate (b).
b
a
a
Figure 4-301

13. Disconnect all connectors from the IH
PWB (b).
14. Remove six screws (a)(M3x8).
15. Release three board supports (c) and
remove the IH PWB (b). b
16. Check or replace the IH PWB (b), and
then reattach the parts which is
removed.
a
a
a
a
a
a
Figure 4-302

(5-7)Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB
Procedures
1. Tilt up the operation unit (a). e
2. Pull the ISU front right cover (b) toward
you while inserting a finger into the
aperture (c). Then, unlatch four lower
hooks (d). Release six upper side of
hooks (e) and then removed.
d
b
2
a
Figure 4-303

4. Release two ribs (d) in the flat-head d
screwdriver (c).
5. Detach the upper exit cover (b) in the
direction of the arrow. c

When fasten the screw (a) of the ejection
cover (b), fasten to pull the ejection cover (b) in
the front side of the machine.
b
d
c
Figure 4-304

7. Remove the operation lid (c) from the
operation unit (b) in the direction of the a
arrow.
b
Figure 4-305

8. Disconnect three connectors (b) from d
the operation unit (a). d
9. Detach the wire guide (c).
10. Remove two screws (d)(M3x8). a
Figure 4-306
11. Tilt down the operation unit (a).

12. Unlatch two hooks (b) with a flat-blade
screw driver and remove the eject front
cover (d) while tilting it.
a
b
c
d
Figure 4-307

When attaching to the eject front cover (d), after inserting the bottom side of two hooks, make sure to hang on
the hook while being turned.

remove the operation section (b). b
Figure 4-308
14. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8). g

15. Remove the operation rear top cover (c)
e
from the operation (b).
g
16. Remove one screw (f)(M3x8). d
17. Detach the operation cover (d) from the
operation unit (b).
18. Remove two screws (g)(M3x8).
f
19. Remove the operation rear lower cover
(e) from the operation unit (b).
b a
a
c
Figure 4-309

20. Disconnect all FFCs , FPCs and the
connectors from the operation PWB (c). a
21. Remove four screws (a)(M3x8). a
22. Remove the operation panel main PWB
a c a b
(c) from the operation section (b).
23.
Check or replace the operation panel
main PWB (c) and then reattach the
parts which are removed.
YC9
YC11
YC8
YC6
YC4
YC7
YC2
YC5
YC3 YC1
YC10
Figure 4-310

4-7 Disassembly & Reassembly (option)
(1-1)Detaching and reattaching the PF drive unit
Procedures
1. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8). b
2. Remove PF rear cover (c) from the
paper feed unit (b).
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-311
3. Disconnect the connector (b) of the

motor (a).
4. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the PF drive unit (d). a
5. Check or replace the PF drive unit (d),
and then reattach the parts in the origi- b
nal position.
c
c
c
c
Figure 4-312

(1-2)Detaching and reattaching the PF lift motor
Procedures
angle.
angle.
a
Figure 4-313

3. Disconnect two connectors (a) and
b a
three screws (b)(M3x8).
4. Remove the PF lift motor (c).
5. Check, clean or replace PF lift motor (c)
and then reattach in the original position
the parts which are removed.
c
b
b
b c
b
a
c
b
b
b b
b c
Figure 4-314
Procedure in case of replacing
a b
(1)When attaching the lift motor, disconnect
the connector (b), unltach two hooks (d) d
and and remove the wire (c).
(2)Connect the connector (b) of the wire (c)

once disconnected to the new lift motor (e) c
and secure it onto two hooks (f).
e b
Figure 4-315

(1-3)Detaching and reattaching the PF main PWB
Procedures
1. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8). b
a c a
a
a
Figure 4-316

PF main PWB (a).
4. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) and
remove the PF main PWB (a).
5. Check or replace the PF main PWB (a),
and then reattach the parts in the origi-
nal position.
b
a
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-317

Procedures
1. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8).
b
c a
a
a
Figure 4-318
3. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8).

4. Remove the interface assembly (a).
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-319

5. Release the three wire saddles, and
release the wire stoppers (b) and
a a
remove wires (c) a b
Figure 4-320
6. Pull the lever (b) of the wire holder (a)

and remove the wire holder (a).
a b
a
Figure 4-321

7. Remove five screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the PF drive unit (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
8. Check or replace the PF drive unit (a),
and then reattach in the original position
the parts which are removed.
a
b
b
b b
Figure 4-322

Procedures
1. Remove five screws (a)(M3x8).
b
c a
a
a
a
Figure 4-323

4. Remove the interface assembly (b).
b
b a
b
b
Figure 4-324

5. Disconnect one connector (c). Remove
three screws (b)(M3x8) and detach the
lift motor 2 (a).
b a
b c
Figure 4-325

7. Detach the PF lift motor 1 unit (a).
b
b
Figure 4-326

8. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8).
9. Disconnect one connector (c) and
detach the PF lift motor 1 (a).
10. Check or replace the PF lift motor (a),
and then reattach the parts in the origi- a
nal position. b
c
b
Figure 4-327

Procedures
b
c a
a
a
Figure 4-328

PF main PWB (a).
PF main PWB (a).
nal position.
c
b a
b
YC11 YC10
YC9
YC4
YC2 YC1
YC6
YC12
YC14
YC8 YC13
YC3 YC5
Figure 4-329

(3) Sidefeeder (PF-7120)
Procedures
a
a
a
Figure 4-330
3. Disconnect the three connectors (a)

and the connector (b) from the PF main a d
PWB (d).
4. Remove two wire stoppers (c) and
remove the wire.
b a
a
c c
Figure 4-331

5. Remove four screws (b) (M3x8) and
detach the PF drive unit (a) from the
c
main unit while pushing in the switch
lever (c).
b
b
Figure 4-332

Procedures
a
a
a
Figure 4-333
3. Release six wire stoppers (d) and one

cable lamp, and then remove the wire
of PF lift motor (a).
4. Disconnect the connector (b) and the
connector (c).
d
d
d
d
c d a
e
Figure 4-334

5. Remove three screws (b)(M3x8) and
detach the PF lift motor (a).
6. Check or replace the PF lift motor unit
(a), and then reattach the parts in the
original position.
Figure 4-335

Procedures
a
a
a
Figure 4-336
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the c

PF main PWB (a).
5. Remove the PF main PWB (a) from two
hooks (c).
b
nal position.
YC12 YC11
YC14
YC17
YC5
YC15
YC2
YC8 YC4
YC10
YC7
YC13
YC16 YC1
YC18 YC3 YC6
Figure 4-337

(4-1)Detaching and reattaching the document processor
Procedures
1. Open the document processor (a).
Figure 4-338

slide the rear top cover (b).
Figure 4-339

remove the DP rear cover (b).
Figure 4-340
4. Close the document processor (a).
Figure 4-341

5. Detach the DP wire cover (a).
Figure 4-342
6. Remove the DP wire connector (a).

7. Remove the DP wire from wire sad-
dles(b) and wire saddles(c)
Figure 4-343

8. Remove the DP wire connector from
the wire holder (b).
Figure 4-344
9. Lift up the document processor (a) in

the direction of the arrow and remove
the hinge (c) from the main unit (b).
c
b
Figure 4-345

Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (b) of the docu-
ment processor (a).
b
Figure 4-346

remove the DP rear left cover (b).
Figure 4-347

(4-3)Detaching and reattaching the DP main PWB
Procedures
ment processor (a).
b
Figure 4-348

remove the DP rear left cover (b).
Figure 4-349

3. Open the lid (a) and remove the DP
rear middle cover (b).
Figure 4-350
4. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8) and a

remove the DP rear right cover (b).
Figure 4-351

5. Remove two wire stoppers (a). b
6. Remove one screw (b)(M3x8) and
detach the wire guide (c).
a
Figure 4-352
7. Disconnect all the connectors from the c

DP main PWB (b). a
9. Detach the DP main PWB (b) from the
document processor (c).
10. Check or replace the DP main PWB (b), a
nal position.
b
Figure 4-353

(5-1)Detaching and reattaching the document processor
Procedures
1. Open the document processor (a).
Figure 4-354
2. Detach one screw (a)(M3x10) and

Figure 4-355

remove the DP rear cover (b).
a
Figure 4-356
4. Close the document processor (a).
Figure 4-357

5. Detach the DP wire cover (a).
Figure 4-358
6. Disconnect the connector (a), release

two wire saddle (b) and remove the DP
wire (b).
7. Remove the connector (d), release one
e
wire saddle (f) and detach the DP wire
(e).
f a
c b
c
Figure 4-359

8. Remove the connector (a) of the DP
wire from the wire holder (b).
a
Figure 4-360
9. Open the document processor.

10. Remove two screws (a)(M3x8) and the b a a
pin (b).
Figure 4-361

11. Slide the document processor (a) in the
direction of the arrow and remove the
hinge (c) from the main unit (b). b
a
c
c
Figure 4-362

Procedures
ment processor (a).
2. Remove the strap (c) from DP top
cover.
b
c
Figure 4-363

detach the DP rear cover (b).
a
b
a
a
Figure 4-364
(5-3)Detaching and reattaching the DP main PWB

Procedures
ment processor (a).
2. Detach the Strap (c) from the DP top
cover (b).
b
c
Figure 4-365

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-366

DP main PWB (b). c a
6. Detach the DP main PWB (b) from the
document processor (c).
7. Check or replace the DP main PWB (b), b
a
nal position.
Figure 4-367

(5-4)Detaching and reattaching the CIS
Procedures
ment processor (a).
2. Detach the Strap (c) from the DP top
cover (b).
b
c
Figure 4-368

a
b
a
a
Figure 4-369

4. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8) at the
machine rear side, detach CIS unit (a)
the upward.
Figure 4-370
5. Disconnect two connectors (b) from the

DPSHD PWB (a).
b
Figure 4-371

6. Remove the CIS unit (a) while pushing b
the two hooks (c) of the front and rear 1 b
glass holder (b) in the direction of the
arrow to unlatch them.
7. Detach the CIS glass (d) or CIS (e) from
CIS assembly (a). 2 2 f
c c
IMPORTANT
Check the position of black marking (f) for dis-
b
tinction of the surface / back side of the glass.
Also, make sure not to touch the glass surface.
If it is dirty, wipe it off with a dry cloth.
*: Take care of the front and rear side when d

attaching the CIS glass.
Take care of the marking in the figure.
Paper dust easily adheres if mistaken and e
it is affected when scanning originals.
a
Figure 4-374
Figure 4-372
8. Disconnect the connector (e).
9. Remove four pins (c) with the flat-head
screwdriver (b) and detach DPSHD
PWB (d).
10. Replace the CIS assembly (a), and then
reattach the parts in the original posi- b
tion.
a c
11. When replacing the new CIS assembly,
execute the following procedures.
12. Clean the CIS roller and contact glass
(CIS). c
13. Execute maintenance mode U091 e
(White lines correction setting). (Refer6- d c
73)
14. Make test copy with gray originals.
15. When white streak appears on the
image of the test copy, executing step
13, 14 again, repeating till white streak c
disappears.
Figure 4-373
16. Execute maintenance mode U411
(scanner auto adjustment) (6-
196Reference)

(6) Inner Finisher (DF-7100)
(6-1)Detaching and reattaching the DF main PWB
Procedures
1. Slide the DF main unit (a) in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Figure 4-374
2. Open the staple cover (a). Remove the

staple cartridge (b).
Figure 4-375

Figure 4-376

5. Lift up the DF front cover (b) and
unlatch two hooks (c) to remove it.
c
a b
Figure 4-377

DF main PWB (a). YC4 YC8 YC13 YC9
YC7
7. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8) and YC17

YC20
YC5
detach the DF main PWB (a). YC10

YC11
8. Check or replace the DF main PWB (a), YC6
YC16
YC3
and then reattach the parts in the origi- YC19
nal position.
b
a b b
Figure 4-378

(7-1)Detaching and reattaching the staple unit
Procedures
1. Open the DF front cover (a).
2. Pull out the waste toner box (b) and
then remove it.
Figure 4-379
3. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under

the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and
lift it up to release the lock and open the
staple cover (a).
Figure 4-380

staple unit (a).
a
b
b
Figure 4-381
5. Lift up the staple unit (a) from the front

side to release the hook (b) and pull it
out toward you.
6. Check or replace the staple unit (a), and
then reattach the parts in the original
position.
Figure 4-382

Procedures
2. Detach the lid rear cover (b).
Figure 4-383

2. Release three hooks (b) and remove
the DF rear cover (c).
c
a a
Figure 4-384

YC8 YC9
DF main PWB (a). YC4
4. Remove four screws (b)(M3x8). YC17

YC5
5. Remove the board support (c) and YC10
YC11
remove the DF main PWB (a). YC19

YC16
U3

nal position.
b
c
a
b
Figure 4-385

(8-1)Detaching and reattaching the staple unit
Procedures
1. Open the DF front cover (a).
2. Pull out the waste toner box (b) and
then remove it.
a
b
Figure 4-386
3. Insert a flat-head screwdriver (c) under

the lever (b) of the staple cover (a) and
lift it up to release the lock and open the
staple cover (a).
Figure 4-387

staple unit (a).
a
b
b
Figure 4-388
5. Lift up the staple unit (a) from the front

side to release the hook (b) and pull it
out toward you.
6. Check or replace the staple unit (a), and
then reattach the parts in the original
position.
Figure 4-389

Procedures
2. Detach the lid rear cover (b).
Figure 4-390

4. Detach the DF rear cover (b). b
Figure 4-391

5. Disconnect all the connectors from the YC3 YC12 YC18 YC17 YC16
YC19
DF main PWB (a). YC21

YC14
6. Remove six screws (b)(M3x8) and YC5 YC20
remove the DF main PWB (a). YC4

YC15

YC7 YC22
and then reattach the parts in the origi- YC9

YC6
nal position. YC10

YC2
YC1
U3
YC23
YC13
a
b
b b
Figure 4-392


4-8 Periodic maintenance Procedures
Check the maintenance counts by the maintenance mode U901.
(1) Main body

CH:Check / CL:Clean / AD:Adjust / LU:Lubrication / RE:Replace
PM maintenance (x1000 counts) Remark

Parts name Parts No.
Set UP User Call 300 600 900 1200 Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
A <Set Up>
1 TONER (CARTRIDGE) --------
2 IMAGE QUALITY -------- CH CH CH CH CH CH

AD AD AD AD AD AD
MK-8515A -------- RE RE DK(BK),DV(BK),TR,2ND TR ROLLER
FK,FILTER,PARTS PULLEY SET
MK-8515B -------- RE RE COLOR DV-3UNIT
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CH CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 SHEET DUCT PU H -------- CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
In-machine cooling air filter

3 FILTER TRANSFER AVGR25967N CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
Primary transfer cooling air intake filter
4 FILTER COVER RIGHT -------- CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
PWB cooling air intake filter
C <PF and Conveying section>
1 PARTS CLEANER REGIST ASSY SP AVGR26067G CL CL CL CL CL VACUUM
RE Paper dust removal
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP AVGR26076D CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
RE RE RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K.
3 PARTS PRIMARY FEED ASSY SP AVGR26071Y CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP AVGR26075Z CL CL CH CH CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement.
5 ROLLERS, PULLEYS -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
6 GUIDES -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
D <Exit and Duplex Section>
4-237
1 ROLLERS, PULLEYS -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 GUIDES -------- CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
E <Image scanner section>

1 PARTS CONTACT-GLASS ASSY(I)SP -------- CL CL CL CL CL CL Slit glass for DP: Dry cloth after cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
When inatalling DP,clean with dry cloth.
PARTS CONTACT-GLASS AVGR26200X Contact glass for putting the original on: Dry cloth after cleaning with alcohol (FACE SIDE)
ASSY(C)SP
2 MIRROR A/B/C -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
3 LENS ISU -------- CL Clean only at an image failure (streaks) (wipe with a dry cloth and air blowing)
4 PARTS MOUNT LED ASSY SP AVGR26194Y CL Replace at the image failure

RE
5 RAIL ISU R/F -------- LU Apply grease only at an abnormal sound, shake, etc
Grease to the optical rail: PG-671 P/N 6017000
6 SENSOR OPT. AVGR26195U CH Clean with alcohol or wipe with a dry cloth only at an error (sensor transmitter and receiver
only)
CL
7 PARTS ISU AVGR26188Y CH Replace at an image failure
RE
F <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH CH CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
RE
*:If replaced at check, retrieve the original maintenance at the next maintenance. If not replaced at check, check again at the next maintenance.
4-238
(2) Option
(2-1)DP-7100

A <Set Up>
1 IMAGE QUALITY ------ CH CH CH CH CH CH
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol
2 DP glass of the main unit CH CL CL CL CL Main unit side
CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

1 BELT PF AVGR14852R CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
2 PULLEY LF AVGR15670M CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3 PULLEY SEPARATION AVGR12895Z CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
4 SENSOR OPT AVGR15645L CL CL CL CL CL CL:Airbrush or dry cloth
D <Conveying and Reversing section>
1 ROLLER REGISTRATION AVGR26424X CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 PULLEY, REGISTRATION AVGR23803G CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3 ROLLER CONVEYING LEFT AVGR26425T CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4 PULLEY CONVEYING BK AVGR16452G CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
5 ROLLER CONVEYING RIGHT AVGR26426F CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-239
7 ROLLER LOOP AVGR26427B CL CL CL CL CL
9 ROLLER EXIT AVGR26428Y CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
10 PULLEY EXIT AVGR03266C CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
11 ROLLER SHIFT AVGR26429U CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
12 PULLEY EXIT AVGR03266C CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
13 GUIDE READING AVGR26430S CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
14 SENSOR OPT AVGR15655M CL CL CL CL CL CL:Airbrush or dry cloth
E <Other section>
1 PLATE ORIGINAL AVGR08556F CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-240
(2-2)DP-7110

A <Set Up>
1 IMAGE QUALITY ------ CH CH CH CH CH CH
AD AD AD AD AD AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol
2 DP glass of the main unit CH CL CL CL CL Main unit side
CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

C <PF Section>
1 BELT PF AVGR14852R CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
2 PULLEY LF AVGR15670M CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
3 PULLEY SEPARATION AVGR12895Z CL RE RE RE RE CL:Alcohol
4 PARTS GUIDE SEPARATE ASSY AVGR15911F CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol

SP
D <Conveying Section>
1 PARTS ROLLER REGISTRATION AVGR15656Z CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

SP
2 PULLEY, REGISTRATION BK AVGR15711J CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
3 PULLEY REG B BK AVGR15710R CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
4 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING AVGR15651L CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

LEFT SP
5 PULLEY GUIDE READING AVGR16254M CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth
6 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING AVGR15652Y CL CL CL CL CL CL:Alcohol or dry cloth

RIGHT SP
4-241
7 PARTS ROLLER CONVEYING AVGR15658J CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth

UPPER SP
8 PARTS ROLLER EJECT SP AVGR15667W CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth
9 GUIDE READING AVGR16451U CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth
10 SENSOR OPT. AVGR15655M CL CL CL CL CL CL: Airbrush or dry cloth
E <Table Section>
1 SENSOR OPT. AVGR15650K CL CL CL CL CL CL: Airbrush or dry cloth
F <Other Section>
1 PLATE ORIGINAL AVGR08556F CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
G <CIS Section>
1 PARTS ROLLER CIS SP ------ CL CL CL CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 GLASS CIS ------ CL CL CL CL CL CL: Alcohol or dry cloth (wet cloth is strictly prohibited.)
4-242
(2-3)PF-7100

Parts name Parts No. Based on cycle of the
Set UP User Call Please do not use spray containing flamable gas for air-blow or air-brush purposes.
machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH
AD
B <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
1 PARTS PULLEY SET SP AVGR26074V CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
RE CH:Performing U901 and check feeding count: Target to replace at 300K
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP AVGR26076D CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
3 PULLEY FEED AVGR19138F CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP AVGR26075Z CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
5 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP AVGR26431T CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS
6 GUIDES -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
D <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
4-243
(2-4)PF-7110

machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH
AD
B <Cover>
1 PARTS PULLEY SET SP AVGR26074V CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2 PARTS ROLLER RETARD ASSY SP AVGR26076D CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
3 PULLEY FEED AVGR19138F CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
4 PARTS PULLEY PICKUP SP AVGR26075Z CL Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
5 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOW SP AVGR26431T CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS
6 PARTS ROLLER FEED LOWER SP AVGR26432F CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
PULLEYS
D <Drive and other section>
1 CLUTCHS -------- CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
2 SENSORS -------- CH CH Dry cloth or Airblow if light reception part of photo sensor is dirt or paper dust.
4-244
(2-5)PF-7120

machine
A <Set Up>
1 PAPER LINE -------- CH CH:check the center alignment gap.
AD (check after center adjustment of copier)
B <PF Section>
1 PULLEY FEED AVGR15559L CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
2 PULLEY RETARD AVGR15560J CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
3 PULLEY PICKUP AVGR15561K CL CH Alcohol or dry cloth if no replacement
4 PARTS ROLLER ASSIST SP AVGR15717T CL Alcohol or dry cloth
5 CLUTCH 50 Z35R AVGR15396X CH CH Check the copy registration and paper feed condition on registration and paper feed section.
RE
4-245
(2-6)AK-7100

machine
2 PARTS ROLLER FEED A SP AVGR26433B CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3 PARTS ROLLER FEED C SP AVGR26434Y CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3RG94040
4 PULLEYS -------- CL CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4-246
(2-7)DF-7100

machine
A <Cover>
1 OUTER COVERS, TRAY -------- CL Alcohol or dry cloth
B <PF, Conveying and exit sections>
1 ROLLER FEED AVGR26435U CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER AVGR26436G CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3 ROLLER CONVEYING AVGR26437C CL Alcohol or dry cloth
4 PULLEY MIDDLE A AVGR19035R CL Alcohol or dry cloth
5 ROLLER MIDDLE AVGR26438Z CL Alcohol or dry cloth
6 PULLEY MIDDLE AVGR24494W CL Alcohol or dry cloth
7 PULLEY PAPER FEED AVGR00735W CL Alcohol or dry cloth
8 PULLEY EXIT AVGR26439V CL Alcohol or dry cloth
9 PULLEY EXIT ONEWAYCLUTCH AVGR26440T CL Alcohol or dry cloth
10 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER --- CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
DF-7110
11 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT AVGR26441U CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
C <Sensor>
1 SENSOR OPT AVGR24752X CL Airblow
4-247
machine
2 SENSOR OPT AVGR26442G CL Airblow
3 SENSOR OPT AVGR15655M CL Airblow
4-248
(2-8)DF-7110

machine
A <Cover>
1 ROLLER FEED LOWER AVGR26443C CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER AVGR26444Z CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3 ROLLER MIDDLE AVGR26445V CL Alcohol or dry cloth
5 ROLLER EXIT AVGR16122X CL Alcohol or dry cloth
6 PULLEY EXIT AVGR23594B CL Alcohol or dry cloth
7 ROLLER SUB CONVEYING AVGR26447D CL Alcohol or dry cloth
8 ROLLER SUB EXIT AVGR16128R CL Alcohol or dry cloth
9 PULLEY SUB EJECT AVGR16280S CL Alcohol or dry cloth
10 PULLEY SUB EJECT AVGR23601B CL Alcohol or dry cloth
11 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 418095Q CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
12 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER AVGR26449W CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
13 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE AVGR26450U CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
4-249
machine
14 STATIC-ELIMINATOR SUB EJECT AVGR26451V CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
C <Sensor>
1 SENSOR OPT -------- CL Airblow
2 SENSOR OPT AVGR15544N CL Airblow
4 SENSOR A, SEPARATION AVGR03561D CL Airblow
4-250
(2-9)DF-7120

machine
A <Cover>
1 ROLLER FEED LOWER AVGR26443C CL Alcohol or dry cloth
2 ROLLER FEED UPPER AVGR26444Z CL Alcohol or dry cloth
3 ROLLER MIDDLE AVGR26445V CL Alcohol or dry cloth
5 ROLLER EXIT AVGR16238L CL Alcohol or dry cloth
6 PULLEY EXIT AVGR23594B CL Alcohol or dry cloth
7 STATIC ELIMINATOR EJECT 418095Q CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
8 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT CENTER AVGR26449W CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
9 STATIC-ELIMINATOR EJECT SIDE AVGR26450U CH CH: Remove paper dust at the end of brush
C <Sensor>
3 SENSOR OPT. AVGR15544N CL Airblow
4-251
machine
4 SENSOR A, SEPARATION AVGR03561D CL Airblow
4-252
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.

*: The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
step
1 Controller firmware DL_CTRL.2NK CTRL
2 Panel data DL_PANL.2ND PANL
3 Optional language data DL_OPT.2ND OPT
4 Dictionary data DL_DIC.2ND DIC
5 Browser data DL_BRWS.2ND BRWS
6 OCR dictionary data DL_OCR.2R6 OCR
[GROUP2 UPDATE]
step
1 Slot 1 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX1
2 Slot 2 FAX firmware DL_FAX.3R2 FAX2
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
step
1 INNER PUNCH DL_03RF.2ND INNER-PU
2 MAIL BOX DL_03N0.2ND MAIL-BOX
3 BOOKLET DL_03ND.2ND BOOKLET
4 PUNCH UNIT DL_03NK.2RH P-UNIT
5 3000/4000-sheets DF DL_03RW.2ND DF
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF DL_03RD.2ND INNER-DF
6 DP DL_03R7.2ND DP-REV
DL_03R8.2ND DP-CIS
7 A4 Side Paper Feeder DL_03RL.2ND PF-SIDE
8 3000-sheets PF DL_03RB.2ND PF-UNDER
500-sheets×2 PF
9 Engine firmware DL_ENGN.2NK ENGN
[GROUP4 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available.

[GROUP5 UPDATE]
step
1 Panel firmware DL_SPNL.2ND SPNL

Verify the signature at firmware update
Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data.
File names of the signature and firmware certificate

Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file
name
Controller data 2NK_CTRL_sign.bin 2NK_CTRL_cert.pem
Panel data 2ND_PANL_sign.bin 2ND_PANL_cert.pem
Optional language data 2ND_OPT_sign.bin 2ND_OPT_cert.pem
Dictionary data 2R6_DIC_sign.bin 2ND_DIC_cert.pem
Browser data 2ND_BRWS_sign.bin 2ND_BRWS_cert.pem
OCR dictionary data 2R6_OCR_sign.bin 2R6_OCR_cert.pem
FAX PWB 3R2_FAX_sign.bin 3R2_FAX_cert.pem
INNER PUNCH 2ND_03RF_sign.bin 2ND_03RF_cert.pem
PUNCH UNIT 2RH_03NK_sign.bin 2RH_03NK_cert.pem
BOOKLET 2ND_03ND_sign.bin 2ND_03ND_cert.pem
MAIL BOX 2ND_03N0_sign.bin 2ND_03N0_cert.pem
4000-sheets DF
2ND_03RW_sign.bin 2ND_03RW_cert.pem
1000-sheets DF
INNER DF 2ND_03RD_sign.bin 2ND_03RD_cert.pem
2ND_03R7_sign.bin 2ND_03R7_cert.pem
DP 2ND_03R8_sign.bin 2ND_03R8_cert.pem
2ND_03RJ_sign.bin 2ND_03RJ_cert.pem
3000-sheets PF
2ND_03RB_sign.bin 2ND_03RB_cert.pem
500-sheets×2 PF
A4 Side Paper Feeder 2ND_03RL_sign.bin 2ND_03RL_cert.pem
Engine PWB 2NK_ENGN_sign.bin 2NK_ENGN_cert.pem
Panel PWB 2ND_SPNL_sign.bin 2ND_SPNL_cert.pem
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file
(skip files: ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB memory.
*: If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.

Procedures
1. After turning the power switch (a) on
and the screen is properly displayed,
turn the power switch (a) off.
2. Insert the USB memory (b) with the
firmware into the USB memory slot.
3. Turn the power switch (a) on.
c
b
Figure 5-1
䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢䢢 FW -U PD ATE䢢䢢䢢䢢
4. [FW-UPDATE] and the progress indica-
䢢
tor is displayed. &75/ 0$,/%2;
䢢 3$1/
*: Several kinds of firmware updates are 237
%22./(7
䢢 381,7
processed simultaneously. ',& ')
䢢 %5:6
,11(5')
䢢 3&/87 '35(9
3&/87 '3&,6
䢢
&&/87 '3/2:
䢢 &&/87 3)6,'(
2&5 3)81'(5
䢢
)$; (1*1
)$; 631/
,11(538
Figure 5-2
FW -UPDATE䢢䢢䢢䢢 Com pleted

5. "Completed" is displayed when the firm-
ware update is completed. &75/1'B 0$,/%2;1R&KDQJH
6. Check if the new firmware versions are 3$1/1R&KDQJH %22./(71R&KDQJH
2371R&KDQJH 381,71R&KDQJH
displayed. ',&1R&KDQJH ')1R&KDQJH
%5:61R&KDQJH ,11(5')1R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '35(91R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '3&,61R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH '3/2:1R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH 3)6,'(1R&KDQJH
2&51R&KDQJH 3)81'(51R&KDQJH
)$; (1*11'B
)$; 631/1R&KDQJH
,11(5381R&KDQJH
Figure 5-3
*: When there is no corresponding master file, "No Change" is displayed.
* is displayed after the firmware version update that has been skipped.
*: ----------is displayed when the FAX PWB, the option equipment, etc. is not installed.

For the case of an error FW -U P D A T E E rror
When an error occurs during the firmware
&75/1'B
upgrade, the process is immediately inter- 3$1/1R&KDQJH
0$,/%2;1R&KDQJH
%22./(71R&KDQJH
rupted and the error code and error message 2371R&KDQJH 381,71R&KDQJH
are indicated. ',&1R&KDQJH ')1R&KDQJH
%5:61R&KDQJH ,11(5')1R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '35(91R&KDQJH
3&/871R&KDQJH '3&,61R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH '3/2:1R&KDQJH
&&/871R&KDQJH 3)6,'(1R&KDQJH
2&51R&KDQJH 3)81'(51R&KDQJH
)$; (1*1(UURU
)$; 631/1R&KDQJH
,11(5381R&KDQJH
Figure 5-4
Error Error content Error Error content

code code
0000 Other S000 Other signature verification error *1
0100 No Master file S001 Signature verification file is inadequate
0200 Version mismatch of the master file N001 Network connection failed. *2
(There is no upgrade target interrupted)
03xx No Download File (No.xx)
04xx File (No.xx) Checksum mismatch N002 Network connection failed. *3
(There is an upgrade target interrupted)
05xx File (No.xx) Preparation failure
x6xx File (No.xx) Oversize
08xx File (No.xx) Writing failure
*1: Including the expired FM certificate

*2: Automatically restarted for the normal start-up since the normal start-up is available next time.
*3: Transferred to the USB upgrade mode instead of the automatic restart since the normal start-up may not
be available next time.
Indication of the signature verification result

Official signature verification file Indicate the result
Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is suc- Version number
cessful.
Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is unsuc- S000
cessful.
Neither certificate nor signature files exist. S001
Or either of them does not exist.
7. Unplug the power cord and disconnect

the USB memory.
8. Plug in the power cord and turn the
power switch (a) on.
9. Check that the "Home" screen is dis-
played and then turn the power switch
(a) off.

Precautions
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB memory (b) during the firmware update.
Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB memory during the
firmware update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB memory is installed.
*: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.

6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the
machine.
(1) Executing the maintenance mode
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the [▲] [▼] keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End

(2) Maintenance modes list
Section No. Maintenance item Outline
General U000 Printing Maintenance Report Printing the reports and exporting them to a
USB memory
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exiting from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initializing to the factory-default setting
U003 Setting the telephone number of the Sets the telephone number of the service per-
service person son.
U004 Machine Number Display of the machine serial number and set-
ting
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Setting the maintenance mode ID
U018 Firmware self verification Check the firmware falsification.
U019 Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of the PWB
Initializa- U021 Initializes Memory Initializing the backup RAM
tion
U024 Formatting an HDD Formats/configures the HDD
U025 Firmware update (S) Updates the firmware
U026 Retrieve the backup data Retrieve the backup data
Drive U030 Motor operation check Drive the drive motor
Paper U031 Check the conveying switch Check the conveying switch On/Off
feed
Convey- U032 Clutch operation check Check the paper conveying clutch operation
ing U033 Solenoid operation check Drive the paper conveying and toner supply
Cooling solenoids
U034 Paper timing data adjustment Adjusting the leading edge timing and the center
line
U035 Folio size setting Sets the Folio paper length and width.
U037 Fan motor operation check Drive each fan motor.
U051 Registration paper loop amount Adjusts the paper loop amount between the roll-
adjustment ers
U053 Adjusting the motor speed Sets each motor's speed correction
U059 Fan mode setting Sets the drive mode of the conveying fan motor
Optical U061 Lamp lighting check Turns the exposure lamp on
U063 Shading position adjustment Changes the scanner shading position
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjusting the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjusting the leading edge timing for table scan-
ning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center Adjusting the center line for table scanning
line
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjusting the starting position for DP scanning
U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning

U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Tim- Adjusting the DP scanning timing
ing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjusting the center line for DP scanning
U073 Scanner motor operation check Move the scanner in the set condition
U074 Adjusting the DP input characteris- Sets the DP image scanning density
tics
U087 Setting the DP scanning position Change the scanning position as the corrective
change operation measures for the black lines
U089 MIP-PG pattern output Output MIP-PG pattern
U091 White lines correction setting Sets the white lines detection threshold
Optical UO9 Original size detection setting Sets the original size detection check and detec-
9 tion threshold
High volt- U100 Main high voltage adjustment Adjust the drum surface potential
age sys-
tem
U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment Sets high voltage except the main high voltage
and outputs
U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjust- Set the secondary transfer voltage correction
ment
U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage Set the primary transfer belt cleaning voltage
adjustment
U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment Sets the transfer belt unit cleaning control volt-
age
U110 Drum counter Displays/sets the drum counter
U117 Drum unit number Displays the drum number
U118 Drum unit history Displays the drum history
U119 Setting the drum Sets the initial LSU light intensity
U120 Drum drive distance counter Displays the drum drive distance counter
U122 Displays the primary transfer unit Displays the primary transfer unit number
number
U123 Primary transfer unit history Displays the machine number and the primary
transfer unit counter history
U127 Clearing the transfer count Displaying the counts
U128 Transfer timing adjustment Adjust the transfer high-voltage output ON/OFF
timing
Devel- U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjust- Adjust the the toner sensor control voltage
oper sys- ment
tem
U132 Forcible toner supply operation Execute the toner supply in the toner control
level
U135 Checking the toner motor operation Drives the toner motor

Devel- U136 Toner level detection setting Sets the number of pages printable at toner near
oper sys- end
tem
U139 Temperature, humidity Displays the machine inside and outside humid-
ity
U140 Developer bias adjustment Adjust the developer bias values or set the high
altitude mode.
U147 Setting the toner applying mode Sets the overcharge toner removal mode
U148 Drum refresh mode setting Setting auto drum refresh
U155 Toner sensor output Displays the toner sensor output
U156 Toner control level adjustment Displays/adjusts the toner supply level
U157 Developer drive time Displays/sets the developer drive time
U158 Developer counter Displays/sets the developer counter
U159 Toner container function setting Sets the toner container lock and waste toner
box
Fuser U161 Fuser temperature adjustment Sets the fuser control temperature
U164 Developer unit history Displays the machine number and the fuser unit
history
U165 Fuser unit number Displays the fuser unit number
U167 Clearing the fuser count Displaying/clearing the counts
U169 Setting the fuser power source Displays/sets the IH PWB control voltage
U197 Setting the fuser power source Change the fuser control setting
U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Opera- U200 All LEDs lighting Light all the LEDs on the operation panel
tion sec- U201 Initializing the touch panel Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch
tion / panel
Support
equip- U203 Check DP operation Checking the DP paper conveying operation
ment with the DP alone
U204 Key card/key counter setting Key card/key counter connection setting
U206 Sets the coin vendor Sets the coin vendor
U207 Operation key check Check the operation panel key operation
U208 Setting the paper size for the side Sets the side feeder paper size
feeder
U211 Enhancement unit connection set- Sets the connection of the enhancement units
ting
U221 USB host lock function setting Sets USB Host lock function ON/OFF
U222 Setting the IC card type Sets the ID card type
U223 Operation panel lock Set On/Off of the operation unit lock
U224 Setting Original Panel Display Sets the opening screen
U230 Optional device serial number Displays the serial number of optional device
U234 Setting destination for punch Set the punch destination

Opera- U237 Finisher eject volume limit Sets the main tray stack capacity
tion sec-
U240 Finisher operation check Checks the drive operation
tion /
Support U241 Finisher switch check Check the switch operation
equip- U243 Checking the DP motor Drive the PF motor and solenoid
ment
U244 DP switch check Drive the DP sensor
U245 Checking the message Check message
U246 Finisher adjustment Sets the finisher adjustment value
U247 Paper feed operation check Drives the PF motor and clutch
U249 Finisher line test Execute the 4000-sheet finisher operation test
Mode U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set Changes the preset value
Setting
U251 clearing the maintenance counter Displaying/clearing/changing the counter value
U252 Destination Sets the machine operation and indication
depending on the specification of the destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Setting the double and single counts
U260 Switching paper feed/eject feed Setting the count-up timing
counting
U265 Setting by destination Sets the OEM code
U271 Setting the page count unit Set the long paper count unit
U278 Delivery date setting Register Delivery Date
U285 Set Service Status Page Setting the print coverage report output
U286 Optional language setting Add/delete/change the optional language
U287 Automatic recovery function Sets whether to automatically recover afer error
U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity Switches the indication mode of the abnormal
notification setting temperature and humidity detection
U325 Paper interval setting Sets the print interval at high coverage
U326 Black line cleaning indication Switch the black line cleaning guidance indica-
tion
U327 Cassette heater control setting Selects the cassette heater control setting
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coeffi- Setting the coefficient of the custom size
cient
U339 Drum heater ON mode setting Sets the drum heater
U340 Setting the applied mode Sets the memory allocation
U341 Printer cassette setting Sets the cassette to printer output only
U343 Duplex priority mode Switches the duplex printing priority mode
U345 Setting the value for maintenance Setting the maintenance timing display
due indication
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Setting the BAM related sleep mode

Image U402 Adjusting the printing margins Adjusts the scan image margins
process-
ing
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
original from the document proces-
sor
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/ Adjusting the writing timing when duplex printing
Reversal)
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically Acquiring the data for the automatic halftone
adjustment and the ID correction
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Adjusting the scanner and DP automatically
U412 Adjusting the uneven density Corrects the LSU density unevenness
U415 Adjusting the print position automati- Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing
cally
U425 Set Target Inputs the Lab value printed on an adjustment
original
U464 ID correction setting Sets the ID correction
U465 ID correction data Displays the light intensity control value after the
ID correction
U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit Set the primary transfer unit
U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate Sets the JPEG compression rate
U474 Checking the LSU cleaning Sets the LSU cleaning operation check and
cleaning cycle
U485 Image process mode setting Sets the image processing
U520 TDRS setting Checking/setting the TDRS
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initializes all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initializing the software switches of other than
the machine data
U603 User data 1 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U604 User data 2 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U605 Data clear Initializing the FAX communication data
U610 System 1 Set the number of lines to be ignored when
receiving a FAX at 100% magnification and in
the auto reduction mode.
U611 System 2 Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduc-
tion.
U612 System 3 Setting regarding the FAX communication oper-
ation

FAX U615 System 6 Sets the size to print at FAX reception and
received image size
U620 FAX system Sets the signal detection method for remote
switching
U625 Communication settings Sets the auto redialing interval and the number
of times of auto redialing
U630 Communication control procedures Setting the FAX communication
1
U631 Communication control procedures Sets the FAX communication
2
3
4
U634 Communication control procedures Set the acceptable error when judging the
5 received TCF signal
U640 Communication time setting 1 Setting the detection time by remote switching
mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Sets the time-out time for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Sets the modem output level
U660 Ring setting Setting the NCU (network control unit)
U670 List output Outputting the list of the fax communication data
U671 FAX backup data clear Clear the FAX backup data
U695 FAX function customization FAX batch transmission is set up.
U698 Setting the maintenance port Set the port to apply
U699 Software switch: Set Sets the software switches individually
Others U901 Clearing the counters by paper Displays/clears the counters by paper source
source
U903 Clearing the jam counter Displays/clears number of occurrence by jam
trigger code
U904 Clearing the service call error coun- Displays/clears the service call error and system
ter error counts
U905 Optional counter Displaying the counts
U906 Resetting the partial operation Resets the partial operation
U908 Total counter Displays the FAX count
U910 Black rate data Clearing the print coverage data and its period
U911 Counter by media type Displays/clears the counts by media type
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Reading/writing the backup data to a USB mem-
ory
U920 Billing counter Displays the billing count

Others U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters Clearing the billing count and machine life count
U928 Machine life counter Displays the machine life count
U930 Clear the main charger roller counts Displaying/setting the counts
U933 Setting the maintenance mode log Sets the maintenance mode log
U942 DP loop amount setting Adjust the paper loop amount when using the
document processor
U952 Maintenance mode workflow Execute the maintenance flow with the Work-
Flow data
U969 Toner area code Displays the toner area code
U977 Setting the data capture mode Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB
memory
U984 Developer unit number Displays the developer unit number
U985 Developer unit history Displays the developer unit number history
U989 HDD scan disk Execute the HDD scan disk
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time Displays the accumulated CIS lighting time
U991 Scanner counter Displays the scanner count

(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode
U000 Printing Maintenance Report
(Message: Output Maintenance Report)
Contents
Prints the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error
occurrences. Output the event log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to a USB memory.
Purpose
Checks the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occur-
rences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the
maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
2.Select the item to output.
Items Output list

Maintenance Maintenance mode setting list
User Status Output User Status Page
Service Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
Network Status Output Network Status Page
All All reports output
3.Press the [Start] key to output the list.

* :If A4 paper is available, it is output with this size. If A4 paper is unavailable, sekect the paper
source. Output status is displayed.
Method: when sending output data to a USB memory

2.Insert a USB memory into the USB memory slot.
3.Select the item to send.
4.Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)].
Items Output list

Print A report is printed.
USB(Text) Destination: send to USB memory (text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: send to USB memory (HTML format)

* :The output data is sent to the USB memory.
Completion
* :The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Detail of event log
Event Log
MFP (6 ) XXXXXXXXXX
d-Copia 6000MF (2) 2016/03/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version 2NK_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6 )Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 (7) Life Count:1000
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriprions Date and Time (10) Maintenance Log
12 5555555 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 # Count. Item. Data and Time
11 4444444 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 2 444444 02.01 2014/02/12 17:30
10 3333333 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30 1 222222 02.02 2014/02/12 17:30
9 2222222 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
8 1111111 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
7 999999 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 888888 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5
4 0501.01.08.01.00
777777
666666
4002.01.08.01
0501.01.08.01
2014/02/12 17:30
2014/02/12 17:30
3 555555
(a) 4002.01.08.01
(b) (c) (d) 2014/02/12 17:30
(e)
2 444444 0501.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 4002.01.08.01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
(9) Service Call Log

# Count. Service Code Data and Time (11) Unknown toner Log
8 600 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 # Count. Item. Data and Time
7 500 01.01.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 5 500 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
6 400 01.01.0000 2014/02/12 17:30 4 400 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
5 300 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30 3 300 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
4 200 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30 2 200 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
3 100 01.01.4000 2014/02/12 17:30 1 100 01.00 2014/02/12 17:30
2 10 01.00.6000 2014/02/12 17:30
1 1 01.00.2100 2014/02/12 17:30
Figure 6-1

Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
2016/03/19 15:15
Firmware version 2ND_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Machine No.:Z2C5Y00100 Life Count:100000
(11) Counter Log

(f) J0000: 0 J4302: 0
J0100: 1 J4303: 1
J0101: 11 J4304: 11
J0104: 222 J4309: 2
J0105: 1 J9000: 1
J0106: 1 J9004 0
J0107: 1 J9010: 1
J0110: 1 J9060: 1
J0111: 1 J9061: 2
J0211: 1 J9062: 1
J0212: 1 J9110: 1
J0213: 999 J9120: 0
J0501: 1 J9200: 1
J0502: 1 J9210: 1
J0503: 1 J9220: 2
J0504: 1
J0508: 1 (g) C0000: 0
J0509: 1 C0001: 1
J0511: 1 C0002: 2
J0512: 1 C0003: 3
J0513: 1 C0004: 4
J0514: 1 C0005: 5
J0518: 1 C0006: 6
J0519: 1 C0007: 7
J1403: 1 C0008: 8
J1404: 1 C0009: 9
J1413: 1 C0010: 10
J1414: 1 CF245: 11( 0)
J1604: 1 CF248: 12( 0)
J1614: 1 CF345: 13( 0)
J4002: 1 (h) T00: 10
J4003: 1 M00: 20
J4004: 1 M02: 30
J4009: 1
J4012: 1
J4013: 1
J4014: 1
J4019: 1
J4201: 1
J4202: 0
J4203: 1
J4204: 1
J4208: 0
J4209: 1
J4211: 11
J4212: 222
J4213: 1
J4214: 2
J4218: 1
J4219: 2
J4301: 1

Description of event log
No. Items Contents

(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Machine life counter
(8) Paper Jam Log
# Count. Event Descriptions Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in hexa- Date and
occurrence. time of a paper jam. decimal) time of
If the past paper jam occur-
occurrence is less than 16, (a) Cause of paper jam rence
all of them are indicated. (b) Paper source
The oldest log is deleted (c) Paper size
when exceeding 16 (d) Paper type
events. (e) Paper eject
(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
Refer to "2-2 Paper Misfeed Detection",for the detail of Cause of paper jam. (P.7-90)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
06 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Hagaki B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Folio
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 34: Youkei type 2
0A: A3 35: Youkei type 4

No. Contents
(8) Paper Jam Log
cont.
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(e) Details of eject paper (hexadecimal)

01: Main unit face down (FD)
02: Main unit face up (FU)/1,000-sheet finisher (FU)/
4000-sheet finisher tray B (FU)
03: 1,000-sheet finisher(FD)
4,000-sheet finisher tray A (FD)
05: Job separator tray
07: 4,000-sheet finisher tray B(FD)
0A: Folding unit tray
0B: Mailing box tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailing box tray 1 (FU)
15: Mailing box tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailing box tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailing box tray 3 (FD)
2A: Mailing box tray 4 (FU)
3D: Mailing box tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailing box tray 6 (FU)

No. Contents
(9) Service Call Log
# Count. Service Code Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 th of The total page count at the The first two digits (identifi- Date and
occurrence of self diagnos- time of the self diagnostic cation) time of
tics error. error. 01: Service call / System occur-
If the occurrence of the error rence
previous self-diagnostic 02: Unit replacement
error is 8 or less, all of the
diagnostics errors are Next two digits (Auto
logged. reboot information)
00: Without auto reboot
01: Auto reboot execution
Last four digits

Self diagnostic error code
(7-201See page )
(Example) 01.00.6000
01 indicates Self diagnos-
tic error, 00 without auto
beboot and 6000 Self diag-
nostic error code.
*: U287 sets the auto
reboot function

No. Contents
(10) Maintenance Log
# Count. item Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 of Total page count at the Maintenance item code (1- Date and
occurrence of unknown time of the replacement of byte value to indicate 2 time of
toner detection. If the the maintenance item. items) occur-
occurrence of the previous rence
unknown toner detection is First byte (Replacing item)
less than 8, all of the The toner replacement log 02: Maintenance kit
unknown toner detection is triggered by toner empty.
are logged. This record may contain Second 1 byte (replace-
such a reference as the ment item type)
toner container is inserted (Low-end model)
twice or a used toner con- 01:MK-6325
tainer is inserted.
(11) Toner Log

# Count. Item. Serial Number Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 5 of The total page count at the log code Date and
occurrence of unknown time of the request of toner First 1byte(Replacing item) time of
toner detection. If the container replacement, 01: Genuine product occur-
occurrence of the previous when using the non-genu- 02: Non-genuine product rence
unknown toner detection is ine toner container.
less than 5, all of the Next 1byte (type of
unknown toner detection replacement item)
are logged. 00: Black
Last 16 digits
Displays the serial number
of the toner container.

(12) Counter Log
(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for main-
tenance Item
Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter Consist of
paper jams depending on self diagnostics errors depending on the mainte- three log
location. depending on cause. nance replacing item. counters
Refer to Paper Jam Log. of paper
The number of auto reboot T: Toner container jams, self
All instances including is also displayed at the 00: Black diagnos-
those not having occurred service call/system error. tics errors,
are displayed. M: Maintenance kit and main-
01:MK-6325 tenance
(Example) CF245: 4(2) replace-
System Error 245 occurred ment
last four times and then Example: T00: 1 items.
executed the auto reboot The toner container
twice. (Black) has been replaced
once.
The toner replacement log

is triggered by toner empty.
This record may contain
such a reference as the
toner container is inserted
twice or a used toner con-
tainer is inserted.

Detail of service status page
Service Status Page (2) [XXXXXXXXXX]

MFP (3) 2016/03/03 15:15
TASKalfa 6002i (4) [XXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] (5)
(1) Firmware version 2NK_2000.001.133 2016.02.02 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(6) (7) (8)
Controller Information
Memory status (38) FRPO Status
(9) Total Size 4.0 GB User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.00
Time User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.00
(10) Local Time Zone +01:00 Amsterdam .
(11) Date and Time 06/04/2010 12:00 .
(12) Time Server 10.183.53.13 .
Installed Options .
(13) Document Processor Installed .
(14) Paper Feeder LCF(1500X2) .
(15) Side Feeder Not Installed .
(16) SD Card Not Installed .
(17) Finisher Not Installed .
(18) Mail Box Not Installed .
(19) Job Separator Not Installed .
(20) Card Authentication Kit (B) .
Installed .
(21) Internet Fax Kit (A) Not Installed
.
(22) Data Security Kit (E) Installed
.
(23) UG-33 Installed
.
(24) UG-34 Installed
.
(25) USB Keyboard Installed .
(26) USB Keyboard Type US-English PDF mode Y5 00
(27) Scan extention Kit(A) Installed e-MPS error control Y6 03
Print Coverage RP Code
Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) (39) 1234 5678 9012
(28) Total (40) 5678 9012 3456
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 (41) 9012 3456 7890
(29) Copy (42) 3456 7890 1234
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(30) Printer
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(31) FAX
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(32) Period (27/10/2009 - 03/11/2009 08:40)
(33) Last Page (%) 1.00
FAX Information
(34) Rings (Normal) 3
(35) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(36) Rings (TAD) 3
(37) Option DIMM Size 16MB
Figure 6-2

Service Status Page [XXXXXXXXXX]
MFP
MFP 2016/03/03 15:15
TASKalfa i [XXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Firmware version 2NK_2000.001.133 2016.02.20 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Controller Information Engine Information

Print Settings (45) NVRAM V ersion _CI04709_CI04709
(43) MP Tray Priority (46) FAX Slot1 2NM_1200.001.089
Auto Feed
FAX BOOT Version 2NM_5000.001.006
(44) Altitude Adjustment FAX APL Version 2NM_5100.004.001
FAX IPL Version 2NM_5200.001.006
Status Normal
(47) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D
Send Information
(48) Date and Time 14/03/05 15:30
(49) Address [email protected]
1/2 (50) (51)
(52) 100/100
(53) 0/0/0/0/
(54) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/1/1/1/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/0/1/ (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64) (65) (66) (67) (68) (69)
(70) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(71) 0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/0000/0100/0500/1000/
(72) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
0000000000000000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(76) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(77) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(78) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(79) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(80) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(81) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(82) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(83) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(84) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(85) XXXXXXXX/
(86) [ABCDEFGHIJ][ABCDEFGHIJ]
[ABCDEFGHIJ]
(87) 00070107FE/0700FE00FE/00FE000100/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/00000A010A/0A0A0A3200/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/0000002C00/0000000000/0000000000/0000000000/
0008000000/080000001D/0096009B00/9B009BFFFB/0082000000/000000001F/
(88) 1/1/1/0/1/0/0/ 2010/12/15 12:34:56
1/5/ (89)(90)
1/1/ (91) (92)
1/0/0 (93)(94)(95)
(96) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
(97) ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/ABCDEFGHIJKL/
Figure 6-3

No. Items Contents
(1) Firmware Version -
(2) Machine serial number -
(3) System date -
(4)
(5)
(6) Engine firmware version -
(7) Engine boot version -
(8) Operation panel firmware version -
(9) Total memory size -
(10) Local time zone -
(11) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute
(12) NTP server name -
(13) Whether the DP is installed or not Installed/Not Installed
(14) Whether the paper feeder is installed Cassette(500-sheet×2) / Cassette(1500-sheet×2) / Not
or not Installed
(15) Whether the side feeder is installed or Installed/Not Installed
not
(16) Availability of the SD memory card Installed/Not Installed
(17) Availability of the finisher 1000-sheet finisher/inner finisher/
4000-sheet finisher/not installed
(18) Availability of Mailbox Installed/Not Installed
(19) Equipment availability of job separator Installed/Not Installed
(20) Introduction availability of the ID Card Introduced/ before introduction/trial
Authentication Kit (B)
(21) Availability of the Internet FAX Kit(A) Installed/Not Installed
(22) Introduction availability of the Data Installed/Not Installed
Security Kit(E)
(23) Availability of UG-33 Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(24) Availability of UG-34 Installed/Not Installed
(25) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected
(26) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German
France
(27) Availability of the Scan extension Introduced/ before introduction/trial
kit(A)
Page count converted to the A4/Letter Print Coverage provides a close-matching reference of
size toner consumption and will not match the actual toner
consumption.
(28) Entire average coverage Black
(29) Average coverage for copy Black

No. Items Contents
(30) Average printer coverage Black
(31) Average coverage for FAX Black
(32) Cleared date and output date -
(33) Coverage on the last output page -
(34) Number of rings 0 to 15
(35) Number of rings before automatic 0 to 15
switching
(36) Number of rings before connecting to 0 to 15
the answering machine
(37) Optional DIMM size -
(38) FRPO setting -
(39) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
previous update.
(40) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the latest
update.
(41) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
previous update.
(42) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the previ-
ous update.
(43) MP tray priority setting Off (No setting)/Auto(Auto paper feed)/Always(All times)
(44) High altitude adjustment set data Normal/1001-2000m/2001-3000m/3001-3500m
(45) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225
(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the
database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the
ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are
identical with (c) and (f).
(46) FAX firmware version -
(47) Mac address -
(48) The last sent date and time -
(49) Transmission address -
(50) Destination information -
(51) Area information -

No. Items Contents
(52) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin
(53) L parameters Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left mar-
gin integer part /Left margin decimal part
(54) Life counter (The first line) Machine life/MP tray/ Paper feeder 1/ Paper feeder 2/
Paper feeder 3/ Paper feeder 4/ Paper feeder 5/ Duplex
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit K/ The primary transfer unit/ The secondary
transfer roller unit/ Developer unit K/ Charger roller K/
Fuser unit
Life counter (The third line) Maintenance kit
(55) Panel lock information F00: OFF
F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock
(56) USB information U00: Not Connected
U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed
(57) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select
1: Paper source fixed
(58) Auto cassette change 0: OFF
1: ON (Default)
(59) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(60) Billing counts timing 0: When secondary paper feed starts
1: When the paper is ejected
(61) Temperature (machine inside) -
(62) Temperature (machine outside) -
(63) Relative outside humidity -
(64) Absolute outside humidity -
(65) Machine inside humidity
(66) Asset Number -
(67) Job end judgment time-out time -
(68) Job end detection mode 0: Detects as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detects as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a
break in job
(69) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On

No. Items Contents
(70) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
*: For details on settings, refer to 2: Normal 2 2: Low
MDAT command in "Prescribe 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
Commands Reference Manual". 4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Heavy 4 1: Enable
8: Heavy 5
9: Extra Heavy
(71) IO Calibration information K
(72) Bias Calibration information -
(73) Sensor initial information -
(74) Calibration information -
(79) Paper loop correction shift amount -
(80) Paper loop correction interval -
(81) Paper loop correction patch amount -
(84) RFID information (K) -
(85) RFID reader/writer version -
(86) Optional paper feeder firmware ver- -
sion
(87) Maintenance information -
(88) Data sanitization information FAX Board/Main Memory/Panel Memory/SSD/Executed
time
1: Success
0: Fail
-: Not performed or Not installed
(89) Toner low setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
(90) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(91) banner print affirmation displays to set. 0: No display
1: Display every page
(92) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)
1: Full-page mode
(93) Wake-up mode 0: Off (Don't wake up)
1: On (Do wake up)

No. Items Contents
(94) Wake-up timer Displays the wake-up time
(95) BAM conformity mode setting 0: Non-conformity mode
1: Conformity Mode
(96) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/yellow
(97) Developer serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/yellow
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
(Message:Exit Maintenance Mode)
Contents
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method
2.The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Set Factory Default

(Message: Set Factory Default)
Contents
Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Executes the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
2.Select [Mode1(All)].
Items Contents
Mode1(All) Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
4.Turn the power switch off.

* :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using mainte-
nance mode U002.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0003 Controller (OS error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error

U003 Setting the telephone number of the service person
(Message: Set Telephone Number for Service Call)
Contents
Sets the phone number indicated at the service call error.
Purpose
Execute to set the service telephone number at the installation of the machine.
Setting
* :Input keys are indicated on the touch panel.
2.Input telephone number (15 digits maximum).
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
Completion
U004 Machine Number

(Message: Machine Number)
Contents
Sets or displays the machine serial number.
Purpose
Checks the machine serial number
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the "C0180 machine number mismatch"
occurs.
Method
When the machine serial number in the engine PWB matches the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main
PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number in the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number in the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.
1.Select [Execute].
* :The serial number writing starts.
3.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion

U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID
(Message: Set Maintenance Mode ID)
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for service for more security.
Method
2.Select the item to set.
Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Initialize Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.
Setting: New ID
1.Select [New ID].
2.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID.
* :Either [*] or [#] must be included.
4.Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to re-enter the new 8-digit ID.
Method: Initialize
1.Select [Initialize].
2.Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.
Completion
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input

U018 Firmware self verification
(Message: Check Firmware Checksum)
Contents
Verifies that the firmware is not falsified3.
Purpose
Re-calculate the checksum to verify the firmware is not falsified.
Method
Items Contents
Expected Displays the checksum expected value
Result Displays the checksum calculation
Execute Execute self-verification
2.Select [Execute].
After execution, display the checksum obtained in the [Expected].
The following appears if the verification result is illegal.
Items Contents
f001 The expected value file does not exist
f002 Expected value file read failure
f003 Illegal data of the expected value file (not 64-byte data)
s001 Fails to obtain the checksum
NG Expected value and checksum are different
Completion

U019 Firmware Version
(Message: Firmware Version)
Contents
Displays the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
Method
* :The firmware version is displayed.
2.Change the screen using the [▲][▼] key.
Items Contents
Main Main firmware
MMI Operation firmware
Panel Main Panel firmware
Panel Boot Panel Boot
Browser Browser firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
RFID RFID
Dictionary Dictionary firmware
Option Language Optional language firmware
OCR OCR dictionary firmware
HyPAS Embedded API HyPAS Embedded API firmware
DP DP firmware
DP Boot DP Boot
DP SSW DP SSW
PF1 Paper feeder 1 firmware
PF1 Boot Paper Feeder 1 boot
Side PF Side PF firmware
Side PF Boot Side PF Boot
SMT SSW SMT SSW
PF2 Paper feeder 2 firmware
PF2 Boot Paper Feeder 2 boot
DF finisher firmware
DF Boot finisher boot
PH Punch firmware
PH Boot Punch Boot
MT mailbox Firmware
MT Boot mailbox boot

Items Contents
BF BF firmware
BF Boot BF Boot
Fax APL1 Fax APL1
Fax Boot1 FAX Boot1
Fax IPL1 Fax IPL1
Fax APL2 Fax APL2
Fax Boot2 FAX Boot2
Fax IPL2 Fax IPL2
Application Name 01 Application 1 firmware
Completion

U021 Initializes Memory
(Message: Initialize Memory)
Contents
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, ser-
vice call error history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area
specification selected in the maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.

* :All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting.
* :An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
nance mode U021.
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
Completion

U024 Formatting an HDD
(Message: Format HDD)
Contents
Initialize the HDD.
Purpose
Initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD in the field.
Precautions
The following settings are initialized if the HDD is initialized.
System Menu (User Management, Job Accounting, Address Book, One Touch Key, Document
Box, etc.),Shortcut key, Panel program.
If executing full-format, the following installed software is deleted.
Optional language, HyPAS application (FMU, etc.), OCR dictionary software.
Method
2.Select the item to execute.
Items Contents
HDD Format Executing the HDD format
SSD Format Executing the SSD format
3.Select the item to execute. Displays the item to delete.
Items Contents
Full Full format
Data Data format (save in the application software)
4.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Excute Starts operation
5.Press the [Start] key to execute the initialization.

* :Manually reinstall deleted software.

Optional language, OCR dictionary software, (OCRDATA): Install using a USB memory.
Install the HyPAS application (FMU, etc.) from the Application screen.
* :If there is no OCR dictionary software, a warning dialog is displayed, and the OCR function
is unavailable.
Completion

U025 Firmware update (S)
(Message: Firm Update(Security))
Contents
Executes Firmware-Update from the USB memory while "Very High" is selected in the Security
Level settings under the System Menu.
Supplement
Initiate the firmware upgrade by a service person by executing U025 while a USB memory is
inserted
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware

* :This is not executable when a USB memory is not installed.
4.After normal completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between
the power off and on.
Completion

U026 Retrieve the backup data
(Message: Pulling Backup Data)
Contents
Execute to retrieve backup data after replacing the main PWB.
Purpose
Restores the setting values backup from the HDD to the flash memory on the main PWB.
Data is transferred from an SSD to another via a USB memory.
Method
Items Contents
Flash Updates the firmware
SSD SSD data is backed up and retrieved when a USB memory is installed.
Method:Flash
1.Select [Restore].
Items Contents
Restore Restore the backup data

Method:SSD
Items Contents
Backup Backup the SSD data
Restore Restore the backup data

3.After [Restore] completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds
between the power off and on.
* :Indicates "NG" when completing abnormally.

Saved data:
U278 Delivery date setting
U402 margin adjustment
U952 Maintenance workflow data
Completion

U030 Motor operation check
(Message: Check Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each motor.
Contents
Execute to check each motor's operation.
Method
2.Select the motor to operate.
* :Each operation starts.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the paper feed motor
DLP(K) Operate the the developer(BK)/Belt motor
Belt Lift Operate the belt release motor
Belt Clean Operate the belt cleaning motor
Drum(K) Operate the drum motor(BK)
IH Core Operate the IH Core motor
Fuser Operate the fuser motor
Fuser Release Operate the fuser release motor
SB(CW) Operate the exit motor(CW)
SB(CCW) Operate the exit motor(CCW)
Bridge Operate the BR conveying motor
Container Mix Operate the toner container motor
Toner Recovery Operate the waste toner motor
Vibration Operate the vibration motor motor
* :To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion

U031 Check the conveying switch
(Message: Check Conveying Switch)
Contents
Displays the on/off status of each switch and sensor to detect paper on the paper conveying
path.
Purpose
Execute to check the conveying switches and sensors are operating correctly.
Method
2.Check the switches and sensors by manually turning them on/off.
3.The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Casstte2 Feed Displays the switching status of the conveying sensor
Regist Displays the switching status of the registration sensor
Belt Jam Indicates the state of the switch of the belt wound sensor
Exit Feed Displays the switching status of the exit sensor
DU1 Displays the switching status of the duplex sensor 1
DU2 Displays the switching status of the duplex sensor 2
Bridge1 Feed Displays the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 1
Bridge2 Feed Displays the switching status of the bridge conveying sensor 2
Exit Paper Displays the switching status of the exit switchback sensor
Fuser Feed Displays the switching status of the fuser sensor
Inner Job Separator Displays the switching status of the job separator sensor
Completion

U032 Clutch operation check
(Message: Check Clutch Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each clutch.
Purpose
Execute to check each clutch's operation.
Method
2.Select the clutch to operate.
Items Contents
Feed Operate the vertical conveying clutch
Middle Operate the middle clutch
DU1 Operate the duplex clutch 1
DU2 Operate the duplex clutch 2
DLP Operate the developer clutch
Regist Operate the registration clutch
MPT Feed Operate the MP clutch
Cassette2 Operates the paper feed clutch 2
Cassette1 Operates the paper feed clutch 1
Motor Operate the motor
* :The clutch operation is available while the motor is operated.
4.To stop the clutch operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion

U033 Solenoid operation check
(Message: Check Solenoid Operation)
Contents
Supply power to each solenoid.
Purpose
Execute to check each solenoid's operation.
Method
2.Select the solenoid to operate.
* :Select the motor before checking the motor rotation.
Items Contents
Branch Eject Up Operate the exit solenoid up
Branch Eject Down Operate the exit solenoid down
ID Sensor Operate the cleaning solenoid
Container Cover(K) Operate the toner container solenoid(K)
Motor Operate the motor
* :The solenoid operation is available while the motor is operated.
4.To stop the operation of the solenoid, press the [Stop] key.
Completion

U034 Paper timing data adjustment
(Message: Adjust Paper Timing Data)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method
2.Select the item to adjust.
* :The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Adjust the leading edge timing
LSU Out Left Adjusts the center line
LSU Out Top B/W Adjust the leading edge timing (B/W)
LSU Out Top 3/4 Adjust the leading edge registration (3/4 speed)
Mode*1 Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset*1 Reset the conveying timing inspection data
On Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor ON)
Off Timing*1 Check the conveying timing (sensor retrieve time)
*1: This is only factory inspection use.
Adjustment: LSU Out Top

2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data

setting varia-
tion
MPT(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (L)
MPT Half(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray Half (L)
Cassette(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette paper feed (L)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) sette paper feed Half (L)
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copy (L)
Duplex Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(L) duplex copy Half (L)
MPT(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray (S)

setting varia-
tion
MPT Half(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
tray Half (S)
Cassette(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
sette paper feed (S)
Cassette Adjust the leading edge timing for the cas- -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) sette paper feed Half (S)
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copy (S)
Duplex Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Half(S) duplex copy Half (S)
5.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward
when the setting value is decreased.
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-4
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in
the maintenance mode.
U034 > U066(P.6-61) > U071(P.6-65)

Adjustment: LSU Out Top B/W

setting varia-
tion
tray (L) when monochrome copying
sette feed (L) when monochrome copying
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
monochrome duplex copying (L)
tray (S) when monochrome copying
sette feed (S) when monochrome copying
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing for the -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
monochrome duplex copying (S)
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-5
Precautions
U034 > U066(P.6-61) > U071(P.6-65)

Adjustment: LSU Out Top 3/4

setting varia-
tion
tray (L) at 3/4 speed
sette feed (L) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(L) Adjust the leading edge timing when -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (L) at 3/4 speed
tray (S) at 3/4 speed
sette feed (S) at 3/4 speed
Duplex(S) Adjust the leading edge timing when -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
duplex copying (S) at 3/4 speed
Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-6
Precautions
U034 > U066(P.6-61) > U071(P.6-65)

Adjustment: LSU Out Left

setting varia-
tion
MPT Adjust the center line for the MP tray -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette1 Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette2 Adjust the center line for cassette 2 feed -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
Cassette3 Adjust the center line for cassette 3 -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
(Optional unit) feed
Duplex Adjusting the center line when duplex -3.0 to 3.0 0 0.1mm
copying (Back page)
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the
setting value is decreased.
Center line of printing
(within ± 2.0 mm)

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-7
Precautions
U034 < U067(P.6-62) < U072(P.6-67)

Execution: Mode
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
* :Operation is started and data is reset
Items Contents
Excuse Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Method: On Timing/Off Timing

* :Display the measured value.
Items Contents
Value(Plain) Check the measured value(Plain)
Value(Thick) Check the measured value(Thick)
Completion

U035 Folio size setting
(Message: Adjust Folio Size)
Contents
Changes the printable area when copyng with Folio paper.
Purpose
Setting the actual size of Folio to use prevents the image dropout at the trailing edge or right/left
edges.
Method

setting varia-
tion
Length Sets the Folio paper length. 330 to 356 330 1(mm)
(mm)
Width Sets the Folio paper width. 200 to 220 210 1(mm)
(mm)
Completion

U037 Fan motor operation check
(Message: Check Fan Motor Operation)
Contents
Drive each fan motor.
Contents
Execute to check each fan motor's operation.
Method
2.Select the fan motor to operate.
Items Contents
All Operate all the fan motors
Fuser Edge Operate the fuser edge fan motor
IH PWB Operate the IH PWB fan motor
DLP 4 Operate the developer fan motor BK
Exit Cooling Operate the exit fan motor
Exit Paper IH Coil Operate the exit/IH fan motor
Toner Operates the toner suction fan motor
LVU Operate the power source fan motor
Belt Cooling Operate the transfer belt fan motor
Completion

U051 Registration paper loop amount adjustment
(Message: Adjust Paper Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjusts the paper loop amount.
Purpose
The leading edge of the image may drop, image position may shift irregularly or paper is folded
in a Z-shape.
* :Use to check/adjust skew feed.
Method
Items Contents
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at B/W
B/W
Paper Loop Amount Paper loop amount adjustment at 3/4 speed
3/4
Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount

3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
Items Contents Setting range Data

varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L)
MPT Half(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L) at half speed
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(L) cassette feed (L) at half speed
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
duplex (L)
Duplex Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(L) duplex (L) at half speed
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S)
MPT Half(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S) at half speed

varia-
tion
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (S)
Cassette Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(S) cassette feed (S) at half speed
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
duplex (S)
Duplex Paper loop amount adjustment for the -30 to 20 1mm
Half(S) duplex (S) at half speed
Initial setting
Items 60ppm 50ppm 40ppm

MPT(L) -4 -4 -4
MPT Half(L) -4 -3 -3
Cassette(L) -4 -4 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4
Half(L)
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -3
Duplex -3 -2 -2
Half(L)
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4
MPT Half(S) -4 -3 -3
Cassette(S) -4 -4 -4
Cassette -5 -4 -4
Half(S)
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -3
Duplex -3 -2 -2
Half(S)
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
* :When the setting value is increased, the paper loop amount increase, and it decreases
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-8

Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount B/W

varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W MP tray feed (L)
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W MP tray feed (S)
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W cassette feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the B/ -30 to 20 1mm
W duplex feed (S)
Initial setting

MPT(L) -4 -6 -6
Duplex(L) -4 -4 -4
MPT(S) -4 -6 -6
Duplex(S) -4 -4 -4
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-9

Adjustment: Paper Loop Amount 3/4

varia-
tion
MPT(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (L)
Cassette(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (L)
Duplex(L) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (L)
MPT(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 MP -30 to 20 1mm
tray feed (S)
Cassette(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
cassette feed (S)
Duplex(S) Paper loop amount adjustment for the 3/4 -30 to 20 1mm
duplex feed (S)
Initial setting

MPT(L) -4 -4 -4
Duplex(L) -3 -3 -3
MPT(S) -4 -4 -4
Duplex(S) -3 -3 -3
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-10

Completion

U053 Adjusting the motor speed
(Message:Adjust Motor Speed)
Contents
Execute the motor speed fine tuning.
Purpose
No need to change the basic settings. Change the set value when an image failure occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Motor1 Sets the Motor1
Motor1 Half Sets the Motor1 Half
Motor1 3/4 Sets the Motor1 3/4
Setting: Motor1/Motor1 Half/Motor1 3/4

2.The screen for adjusting is displayed.

varia-
tion
Drum(K) Adjusts the drum motor(K) -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting

Drum(K) 0/16/11 8/16/11 11/22/16

Setting: Motor2

varia-
tion
Trans Belt Adjusts the developer motor(BK)/transfer -5000 to 5000 -
belt motor
Initial setting

Trans Belt 0 0 0
Setting: Motor3

varia-
tion
SB Adjusts the eject motor -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjusts the fuser motor -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjusts the BR conveying motor -5000 to 5000 -
Feed Adjusts the paper feed motor -5000 to 5000 -
Initial setting

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -105 -124 -157
Bridge1 -45 -53 -67
Feed 65 58 73

Setting: Motor4

varia-
tion
Drum Adjusts the drum motor(COL) -5000 to 5000 -
Mono(K)
Initial setting

Drum 22 25 32
Mono(K)
Setting: Motor2 Half


setting varia-
tion
Trans Belt Adjusts the developer motor(BK)/transfer -5000 to 5000 0 -
belt motor at half speed
Initial setting

Trans Belt 0 0 0
Setting: Motor3 Half


varia-
tion
SB Adjusts the eject motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjusts the fuser motor at half speed -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjusts the BR conveying motor at half -5000 to 5000 -
speed
Feed Adjusts the paper feed motor at half -5000 to 5000 -
speed

varia-
tion
Option Adjusts the motors for the optional device -5000 to 5000 -
at half speed
Initial setting

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -307 -328 -426
Bridge1 -96 -96 -134
Feed 70 74 97
Setting: Motor2 3/4


varia-
tion
Trans Belt Adjusts the developer motor(BK)/transfer -5000 to 5000 -
belt motor at 3/4 speed
Initial setting

Trans Belt 0 0 0
Setting: Motor3 3/4


varia-
tion
SB Adjusts the eject motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Fixing Adjusts the fuser motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Bridge1 Adjusts the BR conveying motor at 3/4 -5000 to 5000 -
speed
Feed Adjusts the paper feed motor at 3/4 speed -5000 to 5000 -
Option Adjusts the motors for the optional device -5000 to 5000 -
at 3/4 speed

Initial setting

SB 0 0 0
Fixing -213 -213 -307
Bridge1 -67 -67 -96
Feed 49 49 70
Completion

U059 Fan mode setting
(Message: Set Fan Mode)
Contents
Sets the conveying fan motor drive mode during paper conveying.
Purpose
A fan is added in the conveying unit so that the leading edge of paper is conveyed along with the
conveying path to prevent paper creases.
Setting
Items Contents
Cooling Mode Sets the Cooling Cycle
Setting: Cooling Cycle


setting varia-
tion
Cooling Sets the Cooling Mode -3 to 3 0
Mode
Completion

U061 Lamp lighting check
(Message: Check Lamp ON) 30/40ppm mod-
els only
Contents
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
Light the exposure lamp to confirm.
Method
2.Select the item to operate.
Items Contents
CCD Turns the exposure lamp on
CIS Turn the CIS lamp on (when the simultaneous duplex scanning docu-
ment processor is installed)
3.Press the [Start] key. Lamps are lit.

* :Press the [Stop] key to turn the lamp off.
Completion

U063 Shading position adjustment
(Message: Adjust Shading Position)
Contents
Changes the scanner shading position.
Purpose
Execute if the vertical white lines appears on the image and they are not improved after cleaning
the shading plate, namely there are scratches or dirt inside the shading plate.
By changing the shading position, shading is available where there is no influence of dirt or
scratch of the shading plate.
Setting

setting varia-
tion
Position Changes the scanner shading position 0 to 18 0 0.16mm
* :If the set value is increased, the shading position moves toward the machine left side and
toward the right side if the value is reduced.
Precautions
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion

U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning
(Message: Adjust Scanner Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusts the magnification in the main and sub scanning direction of the table scanning if the
above incorrect
Precautions
The magnification adjustment in the main scanning direction could cause black streaks depend-
ing on the content of the original document.
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.
U065(main scanning direction)(P.6-59)>U065((sub scanning direction)(P.6-59)
Method

setting varia-
tion
Main Scan Scanner magnification in the main scan- -75 to 75 0 0.02%
ning direction
Sub Scan Adjusts scanner magnification in the sub- -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction
Adjustment: Main Scan

* :When the setting value is increased, the image widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-11

Adjustment: Sub Scan
* :When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-12
Completion

U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing
(Message: Adjust Table Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. -30 to 30 0 0.16 mm
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-13
Precautions
U034(P.6-38) > U065(P.6-59) > U066
Completion

U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line
(Message: Adjust Table Center)
Contents
Adjusts the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner center line -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-14
Precautions
U034(P.6-38) > U065(P.6-59) > U067
Completion

U068 DP scanning position adjustment
(Message: Adjust DP Scan Position)
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is
used
* :Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is
changed.
Method

setting variation
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning -38 to 38 0 0.16 mm
originals.
Black Line Adjusts the scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals.
Adjustment: DP Read
1.Select [DP Read].
Adjustment: Black Line

1.Select [Black Line].
4.Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu]
key.
5.Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy.
6.Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check
that no black line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion

U070 DP magnification adjustment
(Message: Adjust DP Motor Speed)
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
* :Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
Items Contents Setting Initial Data

range setting varia-
tion
Sub Scan (F) Adjusting the magnification for table scanning -125 to 125 0 0.02%
Sub Scan (B) Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
scanning direction when duplex scanning
Main Scan Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the main -100 to 100 0 0.02%
（CIS） scanning direction when duplex scanning
(CIS)
Sub Scan Adjusts the 2nd side magnification in the sub -125 to 125 0 0.02%
(CIS) scanning direction when duplex scanning
(CIS)
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-15
Completion

U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing
(Message: Adjust DP Leading Edge Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image when the DP is used
Method
DP-7100

setting variation
Front Head Leading edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Front Tail Trailing edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Head Leading edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
Back Tail Trailing edge registration. (Back page) -32 to 32 0 0.21 mm
DP-7110

setting variation
CIS Head Adjusts the leading edge timing for the -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
CIS scanning
CIS Tail Adjusts the trailing edge timing for the CIS -27 to 27 0 0.30 mm
scanning
DP-7120

setting variation

Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head/CIS
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-16
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-38) > U071
Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail/CIS Tail

value is decreased.
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 6-17
Completion

U072 Adjusting the DP original center
(Message: Adjust DP Original Center)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the original and the copy image
when the DP is used
Adjustment

setting variation
Front DP center line. (Front page) -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
Back DP center line. (Back page) -60 to 60 0 0.085
mm
CIS Adjusts the DPCIS center line -39 to 39 0 0.085
mm
* :When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-18
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
U034(P.6-38) > U065(P.6-59) > U067(P.6-62) > U072
Completion

U073 Scanner motor operation check
(Message: Check Scanner Motor Operation)
Contents
Simulate the scanner operation in any condition.
Purpose
Execute the scanner operation to check the abnormal operation and dust adhesion on the slit
glass.
Method
Items Contents
Scanner Motor Execute the scan operation
Home Position Home positioning operation
Dust Check Check if there is dust by turning the exposure lamp on
DP Reading scan position operation for the document processor
3.Select [Execute].
* :Scanning starts with the condition specified.
5.To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Setting: Scanner Motor


setting varia-
tion
Zoom Magnification 25 to 400 (%) 100 1%
Size Original size 0 to 10200 10200 100
Lamp Turning the exposure lamp on/off 0: Off 1: On -
1: On
Paper size corresponding to each set value
setting Destination setting Destination setting Destination

4300 B5 6100 B5R 8600 B4
5000 A4 6600 8 1/2"×11" 9000 11"×15"
5000 A5R 7100 A4R 10000 A3
5100 11"×8 1/2" 7800 Folio 10200 11"×17"
5100 5 1/2"×8 1/2" 8400 8 1/2"×14"
Completion

U074 Adjusting the DP input characteristics
(Message: Adjust DP Input)
Description
Sets the DP image scanning density
Purpose
Changes the setting if the background image appears when scanning bluish original or originals
with slightly thick background Adjusts the image difference between the table scanning and DP
scanning CIS scanning is not corrected.
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial

setting
Coefficient DP image scanning density correction 0: No correction 0
1: Low-level
correction
2: Middle-level
DP Color Permitting the color registration correction opera- 1: On 1
Regist tion 2: Off
Completion

U087 Setting the DP scanning position change operation
(Message: Set DP Scanning Position Operation)
Contents
If dust can be detected by comparing the original trailing edge scanned data with the scanned
data after the original feed, change the original scan position next time.
Also, reduce the black lines by image correction.
Purpose
Use as the corrective measures for the black lines appearing with dust on the original scanning
position when using the document processor.
Setting

setting
Front Set the 1st side scanning data threshold 0 to 255 145
Back Sets the 2nd side scanning data threshold when 0 to 255 145
duplex scanning
Black Line Initialize the original scanning position 0 to 255 145
* :If the set value is reduced, dark density image is regarded as dust and dust detection
becomes more likely.
If the set value is increased, dust detection becomes less likely.
Method: Black Line

1.Select [Clear].
* :Original scan position returns to the initial line.
Completion

U089 MIP-PG pattern output
(Message: Output MIP-PG Pattern)
Contents
Select and output the MIP-PG pattern generated by the main unit.
Purpose
When adjusting the image scanning items, execute to check the machine status except the scan-
ner section using the MIP-PG pattern output without image scanning process.
* :Test pages printed from the maintenance mode are not counted for the print coverage and
page count displayed on the service status page.
Method
2.Select the MIP-PG pattern to output
Items Contents
Gray scale Gray scale pattern PG
Mono1 PG for Gray confirmation(Density:0)
Mono4 PG for Gray confirmation(Density:70)
256Gradation PG for the grayscale level check (256 grayscale PG1)
Sample Set Outputs the following output patterns for the long life unit warranty appli-
cation
PG for the developer status , engine ID check and drum quality check
(Gray scale, Mono1, Mono4)

4.Press the [Start] key to output a MIP-PG pattern.
Completion

U091 White lines correction setting
(Message: Set White Line Correction)
Contents
Set the error detection threshold for white lines correction and display the abnormal pixel count.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the CIS, DP main PWB or CIS roller.
Setting

setting varia-
tion
Coefficient(R) Displays the red pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Coefficient(G) Displays the green pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Coefficient(B) Displays the Blue pixel error counts 0 to 8191 - -
Threshold(R) Sets the red error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold(G) Sets the green error detection thresh- 0 to 1023 112 -
old
Threshold(B) Sets the blue error detection threshold 0 to 1023 112 -
Threshold Sets the abnormal pixel threshold 0 to 8191 75 -
(Abnormal)
Mode Set the white lines correction mode 0: No correction 0 -
1: Correction
2: Test mode
Execute Execute retaining the white reference - - -
data
* :Normally do not change the threshold from the initial value of 112.
Increase the value if white lines appear while the CIS roller/glass is not dirty.
Reduce the set value if thin lines disappear depending on the original to use.
Set in the range of 50 to 200. (In the case of out of range, it may affect the image output)

Method: Execute
1.Select [Execute].
* :Starts retaining the white reference data.
4.Set the gray original face-down on the document processor and set paper in the cassette.
* :Match the original and paper size.
* :Outputs 2-sheet test pattern.
1st sheet: black band of about 60mm width2nd sheet: blank (or may be gray band of about
60mm width)
6.Setting is correctly complete if no vertical line is observed on both sheets.
If a vertical black line appears on blank paper or a gray band or vertical white line appear on
the black band, execute the white line correction again after cleaning the CIS roller or CIS
glass.
White line correction is complete if both sheets have vertical black lines or vertical white lines.
However, check the engine since there are factors of vertical streaks at the engine Side.
* :Mode is set to [1].
How to check the test copy
Blank paper Black band Factor Corrective action

No lines No lines - Completion
Black line White lines CIS roller/glass Execute the U091 CIS roller/glass contamination
contamination
Black line No lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
No lines White lines Engine PWB Check engine PWB after completing U091
Completion

U099 Original size detection setting
(Message: Set Original Size Detection)
Description
Sets the original size detection check and detection threshold
Purpose
Changes the detection threshold if the original size is often mis-detected with entirely dark origi-
nals (high density) or dark originals at edges only
Changes the detection threshold.
Setting
* :The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Data1 Display of the original width of original area color
B/W Level1 Original size detection threshold setting
Data2 Display of the original width of original area color (when the document
processor is installed)
Execution
1.Place an original copy on the table and close the original copy cover or document processor.
2.The light source is turned on and the CCD sensor detects the original width. The original size
sensor detects the original lengthwise. (Detected twice when the document processor is
installed)
Items Contents
Original Area(dot) Detected number of pixels (dot) in the original width
Original Area(mm) Detected number of pixels (mm) in the original width
Size SW L Indicating ON/OFF of the original length sensor (0: Off/1: On)

Setting: B/W Level1

setting varia-
tion
Original1 Sets the threshold to judge the original
* :Lowering the setting value improves the sensor's sensitivity and high density originals can
be detected but the original mat may be detected as an original.
* :If differentiating each setting value, mis-detection may appear depending on the condition of
placing the original.
ේⓂࡑ࠶࠻ 1TKIKPCN
࿑ਛ ේⓂ᏷ࠨࠗ࠭▸࿐
4)$
1 #4㨪# 㨪
1 2 3 2 $4㨪#4 㨪
OO 3 㨪$4 㨪
Figure 6-19
Completion

U100 Main high voltage adjustment
(Message: Adjust Main High Voltage Output)
Contents
Adjust the surface potential by changing the voltage impressed to the main charge roller.
Purpose
Change the set value to adjust the image when an image failure (background image) occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Adj AC Bias Adjust the main charge AC bias
Set AC Auto Adj Sets the automatic AC bias adjustment
Set DC Bias Before Displays the main charge DC bias correction value. (Adjusted value
before correction)
Set DC Bias After Displays the main charge DC bias base value. (Adjusted value after cor-
rection)
Adj DC Bias Adjust the surface potential additional value
Set Charger Freq Sets the frequency of the main charger
Chk Current Displays the electric current flows
Set AC Gain Sets the AC Gain
Setting: Adj AC Bias

* :When the setting value is increased, the image get thinner, and it gets thicker when the set-
ting value is decreased.
Set value is variable depending on the environment.

setting
AC Bias(K) Black main charge AC bias value 0 to 2300 1/04*0

Setting: Set AC Auto Adj
Items Contents
On Adjust automatically
Off Not adjusted automatically
* :Initial setting: On
Setting: Set DC Bias Before

1.Displays the current setting.
Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value before correction (Full
speed)
Setting: Set DC Bias After

Items Contents
DC1 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias correction value after correction (Full
speed)
Setting: Adj DC Bias

* :When the setting value is increased, the image get thinner, and it gets thicker when the set-

setting
DC2 Bias(K) Black main charge DC bias additional value (Full -200 to 200 0
speed)

Setting: Set Charger Freq
* :When the setting value is increased, the image get thicker, and it gets thinner when the set-

setting
Generally Setting the frequency of the main charger (Normal 200 to 3300 2400
speed)
3/4 Setting the frequency of the main charger (3/4 200 to 3300 2400
speed)
Half Setting the frequency of the main charger (Half 200 to 3300 2400
speed)
Setting: Chk Current

Items Contents
K Black inflow current
Setting: Set AC Gain

Items Contents
Mode Multiplication Mode setting
Value Multiplication value setting
Setting: Value
Items Contents
Auto Automatic environmental setting (default)
Mode Charge Multiplication Mode
Setting: Mode

setting
Multiple Charge Multiplication value
0.8 to 1.3 1.0
Value
* :Initial setting: Auto


Completion

U101 Primary transfer voltage adjustment
(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Voltage Output)
Contents
Set the primary transfer control voltage
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Setting
Items Contents
Voltage Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage
Altitude Adjustment Altitude Adjustment setting
Current Sets the primary transfer feedback current
Final Current Sets the primary transfer feedback final current
Prohabit Reflection Sets the primary transfer feedback correction ON/OFF setting
Force Excute Sets the forcing primary transfer feedback
Surround Correct Setting the environmental correction
Setting: Voltage
Items Contents
Target Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage target
Step Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage step
Value Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage (1st side)
Value 2nd Sets the primary transfer feedback voltage (2nd side)
Setting: Target

setting varia-
tion
K Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 70 -
target

Setting: Step

setting varia-
tion
Step Primary transfer feedback voltage atep 0 to 290 30 -
Setting: Value

varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
Constant speed)
B/W Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
(Monochrome printing at Constant speed)
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
(3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
(Monochrome printing at 3/4 speed)
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
(Half speed)
B/W Half Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage
(Monochrome printing at half speed)
Initial setting

Normal(K) 199 194 180
B/W 210 190 130
3/4(K) 180 180 161
B/W 3/4 180 180 160
Half(K) 161 157 142
B/W Half 160 150 140

Setting: Value 2nd

varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
Constant speed)
B/W Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
(3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Cyan primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback voltage 0 to 290 -
(Half speed)
B/W Half Monochrome primary transfer feedback 0 to 290 -
voltage
Initial setting

Normal(K) 184 179 166
B/W 200 180 170
3/4(K) 166 166 146
B/W 3/4 170 170 150
Half(K) 146 142 128
B/W Half 150 150 135
Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
1st Side Altitude Adjustment setting (1st side)
2nd Side Altitude Adjustment setting (2nd side)
Setting: 1st Side



setting varia-
tion
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -2 -

Setting: 2nd Side

setting varia-
tion
K Altitude Adjustment setting (K) -250 to 250 -2 -
Setting: Current
Items Contents
Target Primary transfer feedback current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer feedback current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target
Items Contents Setting Data

range varia-
tion
Normal(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Constant speed)
B/W Cyan primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
3/4(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(3/4 speed)
B/W 3/4 Cyan primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
Half(K) Black primary transfer feedback current target 0 to 500 -
(Half speed)
B/W Half Monochrome primary transfer feedback current 0 to 500 -
target

Initial setting

Normal(K) 242 223 174
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 174 174 121
B/W 3/4 156 156 109
Half(K) 121 113 87
B/W Half 109 102 78
Setting: Target 2nd


range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
(3/4 speed)
(Half speed)
target
Initial setting

Normal(K) 185 171 133
B/W 202 171 133
3/4(K) 133 133 93
B/W 3/4 133 133 93
Half(K) 93 87 67
B/W Half 93 87 67
Setting: Final Current


Items Contents
Target Primary transfer final current target setting (1st side)
Target 2nd Primary transfer final current target setting (2nd side)
Setting: Target

range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)
(3/4 speed)
(Half speed)
target
Initial setting

Normal(K) 242 223 174
B/W 260 200 156
3/4(K) 174 174 121
B/W 3/4 156 156 109
Half(K) 121 113 87
B/W Half 109 102 78
Setting: Target 2nd


range varia-
tion
(Constant speed)

range varia-
tion
(3/4 speed)
(Half speed)
target
Initial setting

Normal(K) 185 171 133
B/W 202 171 133
3/4(K) 133 133 93
B/W 3/4 133 133 93
Half(K) 93 87 67
B/W Half 93 87 67
Setting: Prohabit Reflection

Items Contents
On Setting of prohibiting the reflection of the primary transfer feedback
result On
Off Setting of prohibiting the reflection of the primary transfer feedback
result: Off
* :Default value setting:

Setting: Force Execute

1.Select [Excute] and press the [Start] key.
* :The operation is started.
Items Contents
Execute Forcibly executes the primary transfer feedback

Setting: Surround Correct
Items Contents
On Setting of prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer
feedback On
Off Setting of prohibiting the environmental correction of the primary transfer
feedback: Off
* :Default value setting:

Completion

U106 Secondary transfer voltage adjustment
(Message: Adjust 2nd Transfer Roller Output)
Contents
Set the secondary transfer control voltage.
Purpose
Change setting if a failure such as faint image, etc. occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Light/Normal1 Transfer control value for Light and Normal1
Normal2/3 Transfer control value for Normal 2 / 3
Heavy1 Transfer control value for Normal 1 / 3
Heavy2/3 Transfer control value for Heavy 2 / 3
Heavy4/5 Transfer control value for Heavy 4 / 5
OHP Transfer control value for Transparency
Bias Bias setting
Setting: Light / Normal1 / Normal2/3

Items Contents
1st 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2nd 2nd side transfer control value at full speed
1st 3/4(Gloss) 1st side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
2nd 3/4(Gloss) 2nd side transfer control value of gloss mode at 3/4 speed
1st B/W 1st side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
2nd B/W 2nd side transfer control value of B/W at full speed
Setting: 1st / 2nd / 1st 3/4(Gloss) / 2nd 3/4(Gloss) / 1st B/W / 2nd B/W

range varia-
tion
Width=105 Setting paper width = 2 to 200 1[uA]
105
210
297

[1st]
Initial setting

Width=105 96 120 91
Width=210 82 93 69
Width=297 42 65 50
[2nd]
Initial setting

Width=105 107 158 126
Width=210 105 104 81
Width=297 48 61 48
[1st 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting

Width=105 71 71 39
Width=210 53 53 32
Width=297 50 50 30
[2nd 3/4(Gloss)]
Initial setting

Width=105 118 118 68
Width=210 65 65 38
Width=297 34 34 19
[1st B/W]
Initial setting

Width=105 96 88 69
Width=210 82 76 59
Width=297 42 39 32
[2nd B/W]
Initial setting

Width=105 107 102 96
Width=210 105 99 81
Width=297 48 44 34

Setting: Heavy1
Items Contents
1st 3/4 1st side transfer control value at full speed
2nd 3/4 2nd side transfer control value at full speed
Setting: 1st 3/4 / 2nd 3/4


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st 3/4]
Initial setting

Width=105 63 63 37
Width=210 51 51 31
Width=297 51 51 31
[2nd 3/4]
Initial setting

Width=105 85 85 49
Width=210 78 78 45
Width=297 44 44 26

Setting: Heavy2/3
Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed
Setting: 1st Half / 2nd Half


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st Half]
Initial setting

Width=105 56 52 33
Width=210 46 42 29
Width=297 45 42 27
[2nd Half]
Initial setting

Width=105 77 71 44
Width=210 71 65 40
Width=297 40 37 23

Setting: Heavy4/5
Items Contents
1st Half 1st side transfer control value at half speed
2nd Half 2nd side transfer control value at half speed
Setting: 1st Half / 2nd Half


range varia-
tion
105
210
297
[1st Half]
Initial setting

Width=105 40 37 28
Width=210 27 25 19
Width=297 24 23 17
[2nd Half]
Initial setting

Width=105 58 53 42
Width=210 41 39 30
Width=297 24 24 17

Setting: OHP

range varia-
tion
105
210
297
Initial setting

Width=105 49 46 35
Width=210 41 38 30
Width=297 40 37 29
Setting: Bias

varia-
tion
Reverse Reverse bias setting (Full speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse Half Reverse bias setting (Half speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse 3/4 Reverse bias setting (3/4 speed) 0 to 200 -
Reverse B/W Reverse bias setting (B/W) 0 to 200 -
Cleaning Cleaning (Full speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning Half Cleaning (Half speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Cleaning 3/4 Cleaning (3/4 speed) 2 to 200 1[uA]
Initial setting

Reverse 0 0 0
Reverse Half 0 0 0
Reverse 3/4 0 0 0
Reverse B/W 0 0 0
Cleaning 67 62 48
Cleaning Half 50 46 36
Cleaning 3/4 56 52 40

Completion

U107 Primary transfer cleaning voltage adjustment
(Message: Adjust 1st Transfer Unit Cleaning Output)
Contents
Sets the transfer belt cleaning control voltage
Purpose
Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
Method
Items Contents
Belt(A) Belt A setting
Belt(B) Belt B setting
Setting: Belt(A)

varia-
tion
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Initial setting

Full 50 50 47
Half 15 15 14
3/4 20 20 15
B/W 25 23 20
Setting: Belt(B)

varia-
tion
Full Full speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
Half Half speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
3/4 3/4 speed setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
B/W B/W setting 0 to 60 1[uA]

Initial setting

Full 37 35 32
Half 10 10 10
3/4 10 10 10
B/W 15 14 13
Completion

U108 Separation Shift bias adjustment
(Message: Adjust Separation Shift Bias)
Description
Sets the transfer belt cleaning control voltage
Purpose
Change the setting when offset images appear with the transfer belt cleaning failure.
Method
Items Contents
Output Separation Shift bias output adjustment
Output 3/4 Separation Shift bias output adjustment at 3/4 speed
Timing ON/OFF timing adjustment by paper position
Subtranction Value Subtracted value for the separation bias (correction by fuser count)
Setting: Output

varia-
tion
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
for front side of thin paper at
full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
for back side of thin paper at
full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
for front side of normal paper
at full speed
Nomal 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
for back side of normal paper
at full speed
Add Normal Lead Additive setting for the lead- -60 to 60 1[uA]
ing edge of normal paper
Heavy/OHP Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 1[uA]
for Heavy and Transperency

Initial setting

Light 1st 20 17 14
Light 2nd 20 17 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Nomal 2nd 5 5 5
Add Normal 1 2 2
Lead
Heavy/OHP 0 0 0
Setting: Output 3/4 / Output B/W


setting varia-
tion
Light 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 5 1[uA]
for front side of thin paper at
full speed
Light 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 5 1[uA]
for back side of thin paper at
full speed
Normal 1st Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 5 1[uA]
for front side of normal paper
at full speed
Nomal 2nd Separation shift bias setting 0 to 60 5 1[uA]
for back side of normal paper
at full speed
Initial setting
Output 3/4

Light 1st 14 14 14
Light 2nd 14 14 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Nomal 2nd 5 5 5
Output B/W

Light 1st 20 17 14
Light 2nd 20 17 14
Normal 1st 5 5 5
Nomal 2nd 5 5 5

Setting: Timing

setting varia-
tion
On Timing Lead Separation shift bias ON tim- -200 to 200 -20 0.1mm
ing at the leading edge
On Timing Center Separation shift bias ON tim- -200 to 200 30 0.1mm
ing at the center of page
Off Timing Separation shift bias OFF -200 to 200 10 0.1mm
timing
Setting: Subtraction Value

1.Select [Vallue].

setting varia-
tion
Value Subtracted value for the sep- -60 to 60 -35 1[uA]
aratikon bias
Completion
U110 Drum counter

(Message: Drum Unit Counter)
Contents
Displays the drum counter values.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum usage status.
Method
* :The drum counter is displayed.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum counter
Completion

U117 Drum unit number
(Message: Drum Unit Number)
Contents
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
Execute to check the drum number.
Method
* :Displays the drum number.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum number
Completion
U118 Drum unit history

(Message: Drum Unit History)
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and drum counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and drum counter values.
Method
* :Select the item to refer to.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum history
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the drum counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 The drum counter history
Completion

U119 Setting the drum
(Message: Set Up Drum Unit)
Contents
Sets the initial LSU luminosity based on the drum sensitivity
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Detect the main charge current and save the current value.

* :Starts the drum setup operation.
Completion
U120 Drum drive distance counter

(Message: Drum Driving Distance Counter)
Contents
Displays the drum drive distance counter.
Purpose
Execute to displays the drum drive distance counter.
Method
* :Displays the count.
Items Contents
K Displays the black drum drive distance counter
Completion

U122 Displays the primary transfer unit number
(Message: 1st Transfer Unit Number)
Description
Displays the primary transfer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the primary transfer unit number.
Execution
* :Displays the primary transfer unit number
Completion
U123 Primary transfer unit history

(Message: 1st Transfer Unit History)
Description
Displays the machine number and the primary transfer unit counter history
Purpose
Confirms the machine number and primary transfer unit counter
Method
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the primary transfer unit counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine Number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Primary transfer unit counter history
Completion

U127 Clearing the transfer count
(Message: Clear Transfer Roller Counter)
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Verify the primary/secondary transfer unit counts after replacing. Also, clear the secondary trans-
fer counts after replacement.
Method
* : The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Mid Trans(Cnt) Displays the primary transfer counts
2nd Trans(Cnt) Displaying the secondary transfer counts
Mid Trans(Time) Displays the primary transfer unit drive time counts
2nd Trans(Time) Displays the secondary transfer unit drive time counts
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
Completion

U128 Transfer timing adjustment
(Message: Adjust Transfer Timing)
Contents
Adjust On/Off timing of the transfer high voltage output.
Purpose
Prevent paper from being rolled up by the drum.
Setting

range varia-
tion
On Timing 1st 1st side transfer On timing adjust- -200 to 200 0.1 mm
ment value
On Timing 2nd 2nd transfer On timing adjustment -200 to 200 0.1 mm
value
Off Timing Transfer Off timing adjustment -200 to 200 0.1 mm
value
Initial setting

On Timing 1st 72 72 71
On Timing 2nd 72 72 71
Off Timing 10 13 16
Completion

U131 Toner sensor control voltage adjustment
(Message: Adjust Toner Sensor Control Voltage)
Description
Adjusts the the toner sensor control voltage
Purpose
If control values are not correctly retrievable due to the EEPROM of the developer unit fail-
ure,etc., use manual adjustment and obtain a temporary control value.
Method
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
Mode Change manual adjustment/automatic adjustment
Setting: Manual
Items Contents Setting Initial setting

range
Control(K) Toner sensor(K) control voltage 4400 to 4650 4500
Method: Auto
1.The current setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Default(K) Toner sensor(K) default control voltage
Method: Mode
Items Contents
Manual Toner sensor control voltage manual adjustment
Auto Toner sensor control voltage automatic adjustment
* :Initial setting: Auto

Completion

U132 Forcible toner supply operation
(Message: Supply Toner Forcefully)
Contents
Toner is supplied forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply level.
Purpose
Execute if toner empty is often detected.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Installs toner

* :Execute toner supply forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner supply
level.
Items Contents
Supply(K) Black toner supply level
Sensor(K) Black toner sensor output value
Completion

U135 Checking the toner motor operation
(Message: Check Toner Motor Operation)
Contents
Drives the toner motor.
Purpose
Execute to check the toner motor operation.
Precautions
If driven for a long time or several times repeatedly, the developer unit will be full of toner inside
and it may lock up.
Method
* :The operation starts.
Items Contents
Toner Drives the toner supply motor
Hopper Drives the toner motor
Completion

U136 Toner level detection setting
(Message: Set Toner Near End Detection)
Contents
Execute the level setting of printable pages between toner near end and toner empty.
Purpose
Change the timing of detecting toner near end earlier than the current setting if the interval
between toner near end and toner empty is too short.
Setting
* :By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the setting value.

setting varia-
tion
K Setting the black toner level 0 to 9 3 -
If the set value is increased, the time interval from the toner near end to the toner empty
becomes longer.
If the set value is reduced, the time interval from toner near end to toner empty becomes shorter.
0: no toner near end detection
Completion

U139 Temperature, humidity
(Message: Temperature/Humidity)
Contents
Displays the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Purpose
Check the machine inside and outside temperature and machine outside humidity.
Method
Items Contents
Ext/Int Machine inside and outside temperature (°C) and machine outside
humidity (%)
LSU Machine inside temperature around LSU (°C)
Developing Machine inside temperature around Developer (°C)
Method: Ext/Int
1.Displays the current temperature and humidity
Items Contents
External Temp Machine outside temperature (°C)
External Humidity Machine outside humidity (%)
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature (°C)
Method: LSU
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Laser Scanning Unit (°C)
Method: Developing
Items Contents
Internal Temp Machine inside temperature around Developer Unit (°C)
Completion

U140 Developer bias adjustment
(Message: Adjust Developing Bias)
Contents
Displays/changes the developer bias set values or sets high altitude mode.
Purpose
Execute to check/change the developer bias set values.
Method
Items Contents
Sleeve DC Set the developer sleeve roller DC bias.
Sleeve AC Set the developer sleeve roller AC bias.
Mag DC Set the developer magnet roller DC bias.
Mag AC Set the developer magnet roller AC bias.
Sleeve Freq Set the developer sleeve roller frequency.
Sleeve Duty Set the developer sleeve roller duty.
Mag Duty Set the developer magnet roller duty.
AC Calib Execute and set AC Calibration
Image Preference Sets the toner density
Altitude Adjustment Sets the altitude adjustment mode
Setting: Sleeve DC / Sleeve AC

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting

K *1 Black developer sleeve DC/AC bias setting 0 to 100/ 40/1450
1000 to 1900
High *2 Developer sleeve DC/AC bias setting (High 40/1450
speed)
*1: 40/50 ppm models only, *2: 60 ppm models only

Setting: Mag DC

K *1 Black developer magnet roller DC bias setting 150 to 500 350
High *2 Developer magnet roller DC bias setting (High 150 to 500 350
speed)
Setting: Mag AC

K *1 Black developer magnet roller AC bias setting 1500 to 2800 2200
High *2 Developer magnet roller AC bias setting (High 1500 to 2800 2200
speed)
Setting: Sleeve Freq


K *1 K developer sleeve roller frequency setting 3500 to 4900 4000/4189
(Full speed)
High *2 Developer sleeve roller frequency setting 3500 to 4900 4000
(High speed)
Setting: Sleeve Duty


K *1 K developer sleeve roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 40/43
speed)
High *2 Developer sleeve roller duty setting (High 1 to 99 43
speed)

Setting: Mag Duty

K *1 K developer magnet roller duty setting (Full 1 to 99 68
speed)
High *2 Developer magnet roller duty setting (High 1 to 99 68
speed)

Setting: AC Calib
Items Contents
Calibration Executing AC Calibration (Developer AC bias setting)
Execution timing
1.Setup at high altitude
2.When replacing the developer unit or drum unit
3.When the developer leakage occurs
4. When the solid image density is low after executing the AC calibra-
tion
Magnification Setting the AC calibration target bias value
Execution timing
1. When the developer leak occurs after executing the AC calibration
Setting: Calibration
2.Changes the developer to execute AC calibration.

K Turns on/off Black developer 0: Off / 1: On
Type - - 0
Execute Executing Calibration
3.Select [Execute].
4.Press the [Start] key. AC calibration is started.
* :An error code appears when there is an error.
Setting: Magnification

K Set it at the time of Black developing leak out- -10 to 15 7/11/11
break
* :Initial setting: 40/50/60 ppm


Setting: Image Preference

Copy Sets the copy toner density -1 to 1 0
* :If the set value is reduced, toner consumption decreases.
Setting: Altitude Adjustment

Items Contents
Normal Sets 1000m or less
1001 to 2000m Set at 1001 to 2000m
2001 to 3000m Set at 2001 to 3000m
3001 to 3500m Set at 3001 to 3500m
* :Initial setting: Normal

Completion

U147 Setting the toner applying mode
(Message: Set Toner Apply Mode)
Contents
Mode selection for the operation to remove overcharged toner in the developer unit (Toner apply-
ing mode). Also, sets the operation to take toner accumulated on the developer blade back to the
developer unit (vibration motor control).
Purpose
Change the setting to reduce the toner applying amount. Execute to change the vibration motor
control frequency.
* :Density is lowered if overcharged toner stays in the developer unit.
Method
Items Contents
Timing Sets the toner apply timing
Mode Sets the toner applying mode.
Upper limit Sets the upper limit of the toner applying amount for each operation
mode.
Setting: Timing

Job End Sets the toner apply count (job end) 1 to 255 12
Setting: Mode
Items Contents
On Execute the toner applying operation
Off Not to execute the toner applying operation
Setting: Upper limit

Items Contents Setting range Initial setting Data

varia-
tion
Value Sets the upper limit of the toner 0 to 2.0 20 0.1%
applying amount for each operation
mode.

Completion
U148 Drum refresh mode setting

(Message: Set Drum Refresh Mode)
Contents
Sets the mode to use the drum refresh in the user adjustment.
Purpose
Change the setting if the drum refresh is frequently operated.
Setting

Mode Sets Auto drum refresh 1: Off
2: Short 2
3: Standard
4: Long
Completion

U155 Toner sensor output
(Message: Toner Sensor Output Value)
Contents
Displays the toner sensor output
Purpose
Execute to check the output value when an image failure occurs.
Method
2.Select the item to refer to.
* :Switched to each reference screen.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Displays the toner sensor value
Toner Displays the toner sensor value
Calibration Executing the calibration for the waste toner
Method: Waste Toner

1.Displays the waste toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Full Displays the waste toner sensor value 1 (WTS1)
Near Full Displays the waste toner sensor value 2 (WTS2)
Method: Toner
1.Displays the toner sensor value.
Items Contents
Sensor(K) Displays the black toner sensor output value
Method: Calibration
1.Display each setting values.
Items Contents
Waste Toner Displays the waste toner weight detection sensor output value
Mode Displays the calibration execution mode
None Displays the adjustment value (no bottle)
Empty Displays the adjustment value (empty bottle)
Full Displays the adjustment value (full bottle)
Level Displays the accumulate waste toner amount
Execute Executing the calibration
Completion

U156 Toner control level adjustment
(Message: Adjust Toner Control Level)
Contents
Displays and adjusts the toner empty level.
Purpose
Execute displaying and adjusting the toner empty level.
Setting
2.Select [Empty].
Items Contents
Empty Displays the toner empty level
3.Displays the toner supply level.
Items Contents
K Displays the black toner empty level
Completion

U157 Developer drive time
(Message: Developing Unit Drive Time)
Contents
Displays the developer drive time to be a reference for the toner density control correction.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer drive time since replacing the developer unit.
Method
* :Displays the developer drive time.
Items Contents
K Displays the Black developer unit drive time.
Completion
U158 Developer counter

(Message: Developing Unit Counter)
Contents
Displays the developer counter
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit usage status.
Method
* :The developer count is displayed.
Items Contents
K Displays the black developer counter.
Completion

U159 Toner container function setting
(Message: Set Toner Container Function)
Description
Display/set/clear the toner disposed of from the developer unit and set the use of the BK toner
container as the waste toner box.
Purpose
Display/set/clear the toner disposed of from the developer unit.
Sets the message display to replace the waste toner box with the BK toner container and job
control at BK toner empty or depending on waste toner amount in the waste toner box.
Execution
Items Contents
Container Lock Container Lock setting
Container Unlock Display Display setting of the toner container lock
Waste Box Setting Setting reuse of the toner container as the waste toner box
Setting: Container Lock

Items Contents
Off Lock disabled
Low Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Low
Empty Lock enabled: set the release timing to Toner Empty
* :Initial setting: Empty

Setting: Container Unlock Display

Items Contents
On Displays the unlock operation
Off Not to display the unlock operation
* :Initial setting: Off


Setting: Waste Box Setting

Message Setting the message display to replace the On/Off Off
waste toner box with the BK toner con-
tainer
Waste Toner Setting the waste toner amount to judge 0 to 20 20
Level whether to display messages and to output
jobs
Completion

U161 Fuser temperature adjustment
(Message: Adjust Fuser Control Temperature)
Contents
Sets the fuser temperature.
Purpose
Normally no need to change. However, change the setting as corrective measures for paper curl,
creases and fusing failure on thick paper.
Method
Items Contents
Warm Up Control temperature except at printing
Print Control temperature at printing
Grain Mode -
Ready Time Adjust Setting the low-temperature aging temperature
Setting: Warm Up
Items Contents Setting range

Ready(Center) Control temperature at displaying Ready (Center) 100 to 200
Ready(Edge) Control temperature at displaying Ready (Edge) 100 to 200
Ready(Press) Control temperature at displaying Ready (Press) 0 to 200
Drive(Center) Stable temperature during driving (Center) 100 to 200
Wait(Center) Stable temperature during halt (Center) 100 to 200
Low Power Control temperature at low power consumption (Press) 0 to 200
(Center)
Full Speed Full speed shift temperature (Center) 0 to 200
Shift(Center)
Pressure Pressurizing beginning temperature (Press) 0 to 200
(Center)

Initial setting
220-240V

Ready(Center) 170 165 145
Ready(Edge) 135 130 105
Ready(Press) 40 40 40
Drive(Center) 175 170 150
Wait(Center) 180 175 155
Low Power 85 85 85
(Center)
Full Speed 50 50 50
Shift(Center)
Pressure 120 115 110
(Center)

Setting: Print
Items Contents Setting range

Full Speed Temperature at maximum print speed 100 to 200
Print(Center) (Center)
Duplex Shift temperature at full speed duplex print 0 to 255
Shift(Center) (Center)
Initial setting
220-240V

Full Speed 180 175 165
Print(Center)
Duplex 0 0 0
Shift(Center)
Completion

U164 Developer unit history
(Message: Fuser Unit History)
Description
Displays the machine serial number and the fuser unit counter history.
Purpose
Execute to check the machine serial number and the fuser counter values.
Execution
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the fuser counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Fuser unit history
Completion

U165 Fuser unit number
(Message: Fuser Unit Number)
Description
Displays the fuser unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser unit number.
Execution
* :Displays the fuser unit number.
Completion

U167 Clearing the fuser count
(Message: Clear Fuser Counter)
Contents
Displays the fuser count.
Purpose
Verify the fuser count after replacement.
Method
* : The fuser count is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the fuser count
Release(Time) Displays the fuser unit drive time (release)
Press(Time) Displays the fuser unit drive time (press)
Completion

U169 Setting the fuser power source
(Message: Set Fuser Power Source)
Description
Displays and settings the reference voltage of the IH PWB.
Purpose
To check the reference voltage
* :When U021 is being executed, set the same voltage with the voltage of the IH controlPWB.
Setting
Items Contents
Set Fuser Destination setting for Fuser

Mode Destination setting for Fuser 2: 200 V -
specifications (Destination)
Completion

U197 Setting Fuser Control
(Message: Set Fuser Control)
Description
Change the fuser control setting
Purpose
When the security gate malfunctions due to the fuser setting, the fuser control setting is
changed.
* : This is noise canceller from antishoplifting system for Japan market.
Setting
Items Contents
Security Gate Set the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunction prevention
Execution: Security Gate

Items Contents
On Turn on the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunction prevention
Off Turn off the security gate (anti-theft gate) malfunction prevention
Security gate
Direct Path
Swept Transmitter Signal
Reradiated
Signal
Swept
Transmitter Tag
Signal
Transmitter Receiver
Figure 6-20

U199 Fuser temperature
(Message: Fuser Temperature)
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method
* :Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Roller Edge 1 Displays the heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Center Displays the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Heat Roller Middle Displays the heat roller center temperature (°C)
Press Roller Center Displays the press roller center temperature (°C)
Completion
U200 All LEDs lighting

(Message: Turn ON All Panel LEDs)
Contents
All the LEDS on the operation panel are lit.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation panel LED lighting.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
* :All the LEDs on the operation panel are blinking.
4.Press the [Stop] key to turn the display off.
Completion

U201 Initializing the touch panel
(Message: Initialize Touch Panel)
Contents
Adjusts touch panel detecting positions.
Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation
panel is replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned.
* :When unable to press the software numeric keys due to the touch screen press position
error and unable to enter the maintenance mode, press and hold [Home], [Stop] and [Reset]
keys 3 seconds to start up U201.
Method Maintenance Mode

1.Press the [Start] key. Maintenance Mode Active U201
2.Select the item to execute. Initialize Touch Panel
3.Press the [Start] key. Initialize
* :The screen for executing is displayed.
Check
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically corrects the touch panel display position
Check Checks the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
* :Do not touch the touch panel.
Please do not touch a operation panel.

1.Press the center of indicated "+".

Press the center of the "+" sign.

*Press it using a tool with a fine tip.


If you cannot proceed to the next step, press the Stop key and try again.



6.[Initialize Completed] appears after setting

and the touch panel is automatically cor-
rected.
7.After finishing setting, the [Check] screen is
automatically displayed.
Initialize completed.
Method: Check
Single Tap Check
1.Press the center of indicated three "+", and
then check the display position. Initialize
Single Tap Check.


If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.
2.Check that the gap of the X and Y axis of the

displayed coordinate is 6 or less.
(13, -3)
* :If out of the specified value, select [Initial- Initialize
ize] and press the [Start] key to return to Multi Tap

Step.1. Check
Single Tap Check.

(-8, 15)
Select "Mult Tap Check" and press the Startkey to go to the next step.
If you need to perform initialization again, select "Initialize" and press the Startkey.

(4, -1)

Multi Tap Check
Step 1 : Not completed.
1. Select [Multi Tap Check] and press the Step 2 : Not completed.
[Start] key.
2.Press 2 points of [ ] simultaneously. Initialize
(Step1)
* :Displays the detected point with a red dot Multi tap Check. Step1.
if it is out of the default value. Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
* :If out of the specified value, select [Initial-
ize] and press the [Start] key to return to
Step.1.
3.Press 2 points of [ ] simultaneously.

Step 1 : Not completed.
(Step2) Step 2 : Not completed.
* :[Completed] appears in Step1 and Step2 if
it is within the default value. Initialize
Multi tap Check. Step1.

Press both circles. Finalize with both pressed at the same time.
*Press with the tips of your fingers. (NOT your fingenails)
4.[Multi Tap Check completed.] appears when

Step 1 : Completed.
the setting is complete. Step 2 : Completed.
Multi Tap Check completed.

Press the Stopkey.
The screen for selecting a maintenace item No. is displayed.
Completion

U203 Check DP operation
(Message: Check DP Operation)
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method
2.Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3.Select the scan speed
Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scanning
Mode Set the conveying timing inspection mode
Reset Reset the conveying timing inspection data
Result Check the conveying timing
Method: Normal Speed/High Speed

Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD
CCD RADP With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD
CIS With paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous
operation)
CCD RADP (Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous
operation)
CIS(Non-P) Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS (continuous
operation)

Setting: Mode
Items Contents
On Set the conveying timing inspection mode to On
Off Set the conveying timing inspection mode to Off
Method: Reset
1.Select [Execute].
2.Press the [Start] key to reset.

Method: Result
1.Displays the conveying timing data.
Completion
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U204 Key card/key counter setting
(Message: Set Key-Card/Key-Counter)
Contents
Sets the optional key card or key counter connection.
Purpose
Execute when installing the key card or key counter.
Method
Items Contents
Device Sets the key card/key counter connection.
Message Sets the message indicated when the device is not installed.
Setting: Device
1.Select the type of the optional counter.
Items Contents
Key-Card Key card installation
Key-Counter Key counter installation
Off Not installed

Setting: Message
Items Contents
Key Device Prioritized display of the key device on the login screen when multiple
devices are used.
Coin Vendor Prioritized display of the coin vendor on the login screen when multiple
devices are used .
* :Initial setting: Coin Vendor

Completion
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U206 Sets the coin vendor
(Message: Set Coin Vendor Mode)
Description
Sets the optional Coin Vendor connection.
Also, sets the details such as the operation mode and unit price when the coin vendor is
installed. (This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification
machines.)
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a coin vender is installed.
Method
Items Contents
On/Off Config Sets the presence or absence of the coin vender
No Coin Action Behavior when change runs out during copying
Price Charge per copy by size
Boot Mode Setting activation mode
Apl Charge Mode Extended charge unit price
Setting: On/Off Config

Items Contents
On The coin vender is installed
Off The coin vender is not installed

Setting: No Coin Action

Items Contents
All Clear All clear at coin shortage
Auto Clear Auto clear at coin shortage
Off Do nothing at coin shortage


Setting: Price
Items Contents
Normal Charge setting: Normal
AD Charge setting: Commercial
Print Charge setting: Print
Apl Charge setting: Extended
Setting: Normal / AD
Items Contents
B/W Black & White
2.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, change the charger setting value.

A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10
Other Others 0 to 300 10
* :Settable in 10-yen increments

* :Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)
Setting: Print
Items Contents
B/W Black & White


A3-Ledger A3/Ledger size 0 to 300 10
B4 B4 size 0 to 300 10
Card Cardstock 0 to 300 10
Other Others 0 to 300 10
* :Settable in 10-yen increments

* :Value of 0 allows non-restricted copying. (At a periodic maintenance, etc.)

Setting: Apl

Apl1 Expanded charging unit 1 0 to 300 10
Apl2 Expanded charging unit price 2 0 to 300 10
Setting: Boot Mode

Items Contents
Normal Assign activation to normal mode
Copy Service Assign activation to copy service display
* :Initial setting: Copy Service

Setting: Apl Charge Mode

Items Contents
On The extended charge unit is used.
Off The extended charge unit is not used.

Completion

U207 Operation key check
(Message: Check Panel Key Operation)
Contents
Check the operation panel keys.
Purpose
Check the operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key to display execution window.
2.[Count 0] appears and the LED at the most left column in the operation panel is turned on.
3.Pressing the keys in order from the top at the row where the LED is lit, count increases one by
one. When pressing all the keys at the row and there is an LED at the next right side row, the
LED is lit.
* :The job separator LED is lit during execution and turns off when completing.
Completion

U208 Setting the paper size for the side feeder
(Message: Set Deck Paper Size)
Description
Sets the size of paper used in side feeder
Purpose
To change the setting when installing the side feeder or the size of paper used in the side feeder
is changed.
Setting
Items Contents
Cassette3 Setting the paper size for Cassette3
Setting
Items Contents
A4 Paper size of the side feeder: A4
B5 Paper size of the side feeder: B5
Letter Paper size of the side feeder: Letter
* :Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications), A4 (Other specifications)

Completion

U211 Enhancement unit connection setting
(Message: Set Enhancement Connection)
Contents
Execute the inner job separator installation setting.
Purpose
Execute when installing the inner job separator.
* :Make sure to set to [Off] to prevent wrong LED lighting when not installed.
Method
2.Select [Inner Job Separator].
Items Contents
Inner Job Separator Inner job separator setting
Method
Items Contents
On Installing the inner job separator
Off The inner job separator is not installed

Completion

U221 USB host lock function setting
(Message: Set USB Host Lock Function)
Contents
Sets ON/OFF of the USB Host lock function. When setting it to on, the device connected to the
USB host is not recognized.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Method
2.Select [Host Lock].
Items Contents
Host Lock Turns the USB Host lock function on/off
Items Contents
On The USB Host lock function is available
Off The USB Host lock function is not available

Completion

U222 Setting the IC card type
(Message: Set IC Card Type)
Contents
Sets the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting
Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
* :Initial setting: Other

Completion

U223 Operation panel lock
(Message: Set Panel Operation Lock)
Contents
Execute setting the operation panel function.
Purpose
Execute to prohibit the system menu and job cancel operations from the operation panel by the
users other than those with administrator privileges.
Setting
Items Contents
Unlock Unlock System Menu operation
Partial Lock 1 Lock System Menu operation and Input/Output setting
Partial Lock 2 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting and Job execution
setting
Partial Lock 3 Lock System Menu operation, Input/Output setting, Job execution set-
ting and Paper settings
Lock Lock System Menu operation and Job Cancel operation
* :Initial setting: Unlock

Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock

Entering the maintenance mode Prohibition Prohibition
Switching to System Menu Prohibition Prohibition
Send, Send from Document Box Prohibition Prohibition
Switches the Yellow developer On/Off set- Prohibition Prohibition
ting
Switch to registration/editing Document Prohibition Prohibition
Box
Pressing the [Stop] key Permission Prohibition
Pressing the [Status/Job Cancel] key Permission Prohibition
Disconnect the FAX line Permission Prohibition
Completion

U224 Setting Original Panel Display
(Message: Install Original Panel Display)
Description
Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and
theimage data and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Setting
1.Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
3.Turn the power switch on.
Items Contents
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data
Operation item Partial Lock 1 Lock

Opening Img Startup screen Entire start display
Call Img Service call screen Graphic display area
Home Menu Img Home Menu screen Home Menu display area
Call Msg Top Service call message 1 Message display area (top)
Call Msg Detail Service call message 2 Message display area (descriptive
area)

* :Installation or uninstallation is started.
8.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Supplement 1: File information
Description File name Image size (in pixels) File format

Startup screen opening_ext_image.png Length: 480 PNG
Width : 800
Service call screen callwin_ext_image.png Length: 200 PNG
Width : 180
Home Menu menu_background.png Length: 480 PNG
screen Width : 800
Service call callwin_ext_mes_top.txt - TEXT
message 1 (Unicode)
Service call callwin_ext_mes_detail.txt - TEXT
message 2 (Unicode)

Supplement 1: Displaying Startup screen
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at power on or recovering from sleeping.
Graphics display on service call screen
The pre-installed graphics file is displayed at a service call.
How to change the message
After, entering #562 (4 letters) using the numeric keypad during a service call display, service call
messages 1 and 2 display.
How to reset the message display

Reverting the maintenance mode will automatically reset the message to the previous.
Caution
The graphics file for startup screen must be opaque. (To avoid the background from overlapping
at recovering from sleeping.)
The total size of the files installable is approximately 4 MB.
Completion

U230 Optional device serial number
(Message: Optional Device Serial No)
Contents
Displays the optional device serial number
Purpose
Specify the production lot from the serial number to make it help of investigation at problem
occurrence.
Method
* :Displays the serial number.
Items Contents
DP Displays the document processor serial number.
Finisher Displays the finisher serial number.
Booklet Displays the book let folder serial number.
PF1 Displays the paper feeder 1 serial number.
PF2 Displays the paper feeder 2 serial number.
Completion
U234 Setting destination for punch

(Message: Set Punch Destination)
Contents
Sets destination of the punch unit for the finisher.
Purpose
Execute when installing the punch unit for the destination different from the main unit.
Setting
2.Select [Destination].
Items Contents
Auto Match the destination setting.
Japan Metric Japan metric
Inch North American inch specification
Europe Metric European metric

Completion

U237 Finisher eject volume limit
(Message: Set Finisher Paper Stack Limit)
Contents
Sets the stacking count of the main tray and middle tray.
Purpose
Execute when stacking failure occurs.
Method
2.Select [Main Tray].

setting
Main Tray Sets the main tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0
Middle tray Sets the middle tray stack capacity 0 to 1 0

Main Tray Center tray

Input value 4000-sheet fin- 1000-sheet fin- 4000-sheet fin- 1000-sheet fin-
isher isher isher isher
0 4000 sheets 1000 sheets 50 sheets 65 sheets
1 1500 sheets 500 sheets 30 sheets 30 sheets
Completion

U240 Finisher operation check
(Message: Check Finisher Operation)
Contents
Turn the finisher's motors and solenoids on.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's motors and solenoids operation check.
Method
Items Contents
Motor Finisher motor operation check
Solenoid Finisher solenoid operation check
Mail Box Mail Box motor operation check
Booklet Booklet folder operation check
Method: Motor
Items Contents
Feed In(H) Drive the DF paper entry motor at high speed.
Feed In(L) Drive the DF paper entry motor at low speed.
Middle(H) Drive the DF middle motor at high speed.
Middle(L) Drive the DF middle motor at low speed.
Eject(H) Drive the DF exit motor at high speed.
Eject(L) Drive the DF exit motor at low speed.
Save(H) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at high speed
Save(L) *1 Drives the DF relief drum motor at low speed
Tray Drive the DF tray motor.
Operation pattern: After descending to the lower limit, ascends and
descends again when passing 1s after detecting the middle sensor off.
ascends again when detecting the middle sensor on and stops at the
upper limit.
Staple Move Drive the DF slide motor.
Staple Drive the DF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Width Test(LD) Drive the DF side registration motor 1, 2.
Beat Drive the DF paddle motor.
Eject Unlock(HP) Drive the DF exit release motor at the home position.
Sort Test *1 Execute the DF shift operation.

Items Contents
Eject Unlock(30) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 30-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(50) Drive the DF exit release motor at the 50-sheet bundle position
Eject Unlock(Fix) Drive the DF exit release motor at the fixed position
Eject Unlock(Full) Drive the DF exit release motor at the full open position
Punch Drive the punch motor.
Punch Move *2 Drive the punch slide motor.
Eject Conv(H) Drive the DF drum motor at high speed.
Eject Conv(L) Drive the DF drum motor at low speed.
Cooling Fan *1 Drive exit fan motor.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only. *2: Except Inner finisher
Method: Solenoid
Items Contents
Sub Tray *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 1 on
Save Drum *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 2 on
Booklet *1 Turn the DF feed-shift solenoid 3 on
Punch Turn the punch solenoid on
Three Fold *1 Turn the BF feed-shift solenoid on
Press Paper *2 Turn the DF paper press solenoid
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Inner finisher only

Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Conv Drives the MB drive motor to convey paper
Branch Drives the MB drive motor for feed-shift

Method: Booklet
Items Contents
Folding Drive the BF main motor.
Blade Drives the BF blade motor.
Bundle Up Drives the BF adjuster motor 2
Bundle Down Drives the BF adjuster motor 1
Staple Drive the BF staple motor.
Width Test(A3) Execute the side registration test (A3).
Width Test(LD) Execute the side registration test (LD).
Feed In Drive the BF paper entry motor.
Completion

U241 Finisher switch check
(Message: Check Finisher Switches)
Contents
Displays the status of finisher's switches and sensors operation.
Purpose
Execute for the finisher's switches and sensors operation check.
Method
Items Contents
Finisher Check the finisher switch and sensor operation.
Mail Box Check the mail Box switch and sensor operation.
Booklet Check the booklet switch and sensor operation.
Punch Check the punch unit switch and sensor operation.
Method: Finisher
* :The switch indication is inversed when the switch is detected.
Items Contents
Front Cover DF front cover switch
Eject Cover DF exit cover switch
Top Cover *2 DF top cover switch
Tray U-Limit *3 DF tray sensor 1
Tray HP2 *1 DF tray sensor 2
Tray Middle *3 DF tray sensor 3
Tray L-Limit DF Tray sensor 4
Tray L-Limit(BL) *1 DF tray sensor 5
Tray Top *3 DF tray upper side sensor
HP DF paper entry sensor
Sub Tray Eject *1 DF sub tray exit sensor
Middle Tray Eject *3 DF middle exit sensor
Drum *1 DF drum sensor

Staple HP DF slide sensor
Middle Tray DF exit paper sensor
Width Front HP DF width adjustment 1
Width Tail HP DF width adjustment 2
Bundle Eject HP DF bundle exit sensor
Match Paddle DF adjustment sensor
Lead Paddle DF paddle sensor
Shift Front HP *1 DF shift sensor 1

Items Contents
Shift Tail HP *1 DF shift sensor 2
Shift Unlock HP *1 DF shift release sensor
Sub Tray Full *1 DF sub tray full sensor
Shift Set *1 DF shift set sensor

Press Paper Up *4 DF press paper sensor 1
Press Paper Down *4 DF press paper sensor 2
Release *4 DF installation detection switch
*1: 4000-sheet only, *2: 1000-sheet finisher only, *3: Except Inner finisher, *4: Inner finisher only
Method: Mail Box

Items Contents
Eject MB tray exit sensor
Cover MB cover open close switch
Over Flow1 MB tray sensor 1
Over Flow 6 MB tray sensor 6
Over Flow 7 MB tray sensor 7
Motor HP MB home position switch

Method: Booklet
Items Contents
HP BF paper entry sensor
Eject BF exit sensor
Paper BF paper detection sensor
Tray Full BF tray full sensor
Bundle Up HP BF adjustment sensor 2
Bundle Down HP BF adjustment sensor 1
Width Up HP BF side registration sensor 1
Width Down HP BF side registration sensor 2
Blade HP BF blade sensor
Tray BF tray open/close detection switch
Set BF set switch
left Guide BF left cover switch
Vertical Feed Vertical feed sensor
Method: Punch
Items Contents
Punch HP *1 Punch home position sensor
Edge Face 1 *1 Punch paper edge sensor 1

Tank Punch tank set switch
Tank Full Punch tank full sensor
HP *2 PH paper entry sensor
*1: Except Inner finisher, *2: Inner finisher only
Completion

U243 Checking the DP motor
(Message: Check DP Motors)
Contents
Drive the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Purpose
Check the operation of the motor or solenoid of the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Feed Motor *3 Drive the DP papaer feed motor for normal rotation
Conv Motor DP conveying motor
Rev Motor *2 Drive DP feedshift motor.
Lift Motor *3 DP lift motor

Feed clutch *2 Drive DP feed clutch.
Regist clutch *2 DP registration clutch
Eject motor *3 DP eject motor
Regist Motor *1 DP registration motor
DP Fan *1 DP drive fan motor
CIS Fan *1 DP CIS fan motor
*1: DP-7110 only, *2: DP-7120 only, *3: Except DP-7120
3.Press the [Start] key. Each operation starts.

Completion

U244 DP switch check
(Message: Check DP Switches)
Contents
Displays each switch and sensor status of the document processor.
Purpose
Execute to check the operation of switches and sensors of the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Feed *2 Check DP feed sensor.
Regist Check DP registration sensor.
Timing Check DP timing sensor.
CIS Head Check DP CIS sensor.
Set Check DP original detection sensor.
Longitudinal Check DP original length sensor.
Lift U-Limit Check DP lift upper limit sensor.
Lift L-Limit Check DP lift lower limit sensor.
Cover Open Check DP top cover switch.
Open Check DP open/close switch.
Eject Check DP eject sensor.
Branch Motor HP *1 Check DP feedshift sensor.
*1: DP-7100 only, *2: DP-7110 only
Completion

U245 Checking the message
(Message: Check Display Message)
Contents
Displays messages indicated on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
Execute to check messages indicated.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, display messages in order.
* :Enter the message number using the numeric keys,then press the [Start] key to display the
message of the designated number.
3.By using the [+] [-] keys key, switch the language.
Completion

U246 Finisher adjustment
(Message: Adjust Finisher)
Contents
Execute adjustment for the finisher installation.
Purpose
Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust if paper skews or is folded in A z-shape in the punch mode.
Punch position stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust if the punch hole position is not as specified in the punch mode.
Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Adjust the punch center position if it is shifted in the punch mode.
Front/rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
Adjustment of front/rear shift home position
Performed when adjustment is lost with the ejected paper
Front/rear staple home position adjustment
Adjust if the staple is not centered on the paper in the staple mode.
Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position
Adjust when the consistency of the side registration guides and paper is not good and paper jam
occurs.
Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of tri- folding position
Adjusts the tri-folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Setting
Items Contents
Finisher Setting the finisher adjustment value
Booklet Adjustment value setting of folding unit

Setting: Finisher
Items Contents
Punch Regist Punch registration stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Punch Feed Punch position stop timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Punch Width *2 Punch center position timing adjustment in the punch mode.
Width Front HP Front width adjuster home position adjustment
Width Tail HP Rear width adjuster home position adjustment
Shift Front HP *1 Adjustment of front shift home position
Shift Tail HP *1 Adjustment of rear shift home position
Staple HP Front/rear staple home position adjustment
*1: 4000-sheet finisher only, *2: Except Inner finisher
Setting: Punch Regist

1.Select [Punch Regist].
Content to adjust Setting Initial setting Data varia-

range tion
Adjusting the punch registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 0 to 25 mm
* :Increase the value if paper is skewed (sample 1).

Reduce the set value if paper is folded in a Z-shape (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-21
Setting: Punch Feed

1.Select [Punch Feed].

range tion
Adjusting the punch stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.52mm

* :Increase the specified value if the punch position is shorter than specified.
Reduce the specified value if the punch position is longer than specified.
A
Preset value A: 13 mm (metric)
9.5 mm (inch)
Figure 6-22
Setting: Punch Width

1.Select [Punch Width].

range tion
Punch center position timing adjustment -4 to 4 0 0.52 mm
* :Reduce the specified value if the punch position is shorter than specified.
Increase the specified value if the punch position is longer than specified.
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-23
Setting: Width Front HP / Width Tail HP

1.Select [Width Front HP] or [Width HP].

range tion
Front width adjuster home position adjust- -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
ment
Rear width adjuster home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.97mm

4.Press the [Stop] key to return to the screen to select the maintenance item No.
5.Enter U240 and select [Motor] and then [Width Test(A4R)].
* :The middle tray side registration guides move to A4R size position.
6.Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
7.Repeat the above adjustment until the consistency is appropriate.

Setting: Staple HP
1.Select [Staple HP].

range tion
Front/rear staple home position adjustment -30 to 30 0 0.97mm
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine front side (sample1).
Lower the set value if the staple position is shifted to the machine rear side (sample2).
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-24
Method: Booklet
1. Select the item to set.
Items Contents
Width Up HP Adjustment of upper side registration home position
Width Down HP Adjustment of lower side registration home position
Staple Pos 1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
Staple Pos 2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
Staple Pos 3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Booklet Pos 1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
Booklet Pos 2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
Booklet Pos 3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger/8K size
Three Fold Adjustment of tri- folding position

Setting: Width Up HP/Width Down HP
1.Select [Width Up HP] or [WWidth Down HP].

range tion
Adjustment of upper side registration home -15 to 15 0 0 to 34 mm
position
Adjustment of lower side registration home -15 to 15 0 0 to 34 mm
position
3. Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.

4. Press the [Stop] key to return to the screen to select the maintenance item No.
5. Enter U240 and select [Booklet] and then [Width Test(A3)].
*: The width guides of the folding unit will move to A3-size position.
6. Insert paper into the side registration guides to check the consistence.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.

Setting: Staple Pos
1.Select [Staple Pos 1], [Staple Pos 2] or [Staple Pos 3].

range tion
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for -15 to 15 0 0 to 32 mm
A4/Letter size
B4/Legal size
A3/Ledger/8K size
* :Increase the set value if the staple position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the staple position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mmA3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper
× 1/2 ± 3 mm
2 mm 2 mm
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-25
Setting: Booklet Pos

1.Select [Booklet Pos 1], [Booklet Pos 2] or [Booklet Pos 3].

range tion
Adjustment of center folding position for A4/ -15 to 15 0 0 to 32 mm
Letter size
Adjustment of center folding position for B4/ -15 to 15 0 0 to 32 mm
Legal size
Adjustment of center folding position for A3/ -15 to 15 0 0 to 32 mm
Ledger/8K size
* :Increase the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the center folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).

Reference value A: A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ± 3mm
Center line Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-26

Setting: Three Fold
1.Select [Three Fold].

range tion
Adjustment of tri- folding position -15 to 15 0 0 to 32 mm
* :Increase the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the right side (sample 1).
Decrease the set value if the tri- folding position is shifted to the left side (sample 2).
Reference value A: 7.0 ± 2mm
A
Sample 1 Sample 2
Figure 6-27
Completion

U247 Paper feed operation check
(Message: Check Paper Feeder)
Contents
Turn the motor and clutch power on for each feed unit.
Purpose
Execute to check motor and clutch operation of each feed unit.
Method
Items Contents
2PF Operates 2-tray paper feeder
LCF Operate the high capacity feeder
Side Deck Operate the side feeder
Setting: 2PF
Display Contents
Motor Off PF paper feed motor OFF
On PF paper feed motor ON
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF conveying clutch 2: ON
Execute Starts operation
2.Select [Execute].
3.Press the [Start] key. Starts the motor operation.
* :To stop the operation of the motor, press the [Stop] key.

Setting: LCF
Display Contents
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 1: ON
C2 Clutch PF paper feed clutch 2: ON
Feed 1 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 1: ON
Feed 2 Clutch PF horizontal conveying clutch 2: ON
2.Select [Execute].
Setting: Side Deck

Display Contents
Clutch C1 Clutch PF paper feed clutch: ON
Cassette1 Solenoid PF paper feed solenoid: ON
2.Select [Execute].
Completion

U249 Finisher line test
(Message: Finisher Line Test)
Description
Execute the 4,000-sheet finisher operation test
Purpose
Execute to check the 4,000-sheet finisher operation
Setting
Items Contents
Punch Position Check the stop position of punching
Booklet Pass Check the paper paths to the folding unit

4.Press the [System / Menu] key to make a test copy.
Completion

U250 Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set
(Message: Set Maintenance Counter Pre-set)
Contents
Changes the pre-set values for the maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Change the timing to display the message for maintenance and automatic grayscale adjustment
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial

range setting
M.Cnt A Changes the maintenance counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999 600000
M.Cnt HT Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999
(HT adjustment)
Cassette 1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000
(Cassette 1)
Cassette 2 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000
(Cassette 2)
Cassette 3 *1 Change the maintenance counter preset value 0 to 9999999 300000
(Cassette 3)
(Cassette 4)
(Cassette )
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2 only, *2: 3000-sheet side paper feeder only

Completion

U251 clearing the maintenance counter
(Message: Clear Maintenance Counter)
Contents
Displays, clears or changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
Execute to check the maintenance count
Also, clear the count at the maintenance.
Setting
Items Contents Setting

range
M.Cnt A Maintenance cycle counter (Kit A) 0 to 9999999
M.Cnt HT Maintenance cycle counter (HT adjustment) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 1) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 2 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 2) 0 to 9999999
Cassette 3 *1 Maintenance cycle counter value (cassette 3) 0 to 9999999
Clear Clears all the maintenance counts 0
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
2.Press the [Start] key to clear the setting value.
Completion

U252 Destination
(Message: Set Destination)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before
replacement or initialization
Method
Items Contents
Japan Metric *1 Japan metric
Inch *2 Inch
Europe Metric *2 Europe Metric
Asia Pacific *2 Asia Pacific
Australia *2 Australia
China *2 China
Korea *2 Korea
*1: 100 V model only, *2: Except 100 V model

* :Initial setting: Destination
* :Initializes according to the destination
* :An error code is displayed when an error occurs.
nance mode U252.
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error

U253 Switching the double/single counts
(Message: Set Double/Single Count)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be
counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
2.Select [B/W].
Items Contents
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode (Single/Double Count)
3.Select [SGL] or [DBL]
Items Contents
SGL(All) Set single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(A3/Ledger) Set single count for A3(420mm) size or smaller
DBL(B4) Set single count for Legal(356mm) size or smaller
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger *2
* :Initial setting:
SGL(All) (100V model), DBL(A3/Ledger) (220-240V model)
*2: The Folio length can be set to between 330 and 356 mm using maintenance mode U035.
However, the double count will be applied when the set value is 330mm (Initial value) or lon-
ger.
Completion

U260 Switching paper feed/eject feed counting
(Message: Set Copy Count Mode)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
2.Selects the copy count timing.
Items Contents
Feed When secondary paper feed starts.
Eject Selects the paper eject timing
* :Initial setting: Eject

Completion
U265 Setting by destination

(Message: Set Model Destination)
Contents
Sets the OEM code.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the main PWB, etc.
Setting
Items Contents
No. Displays the OEM code

Completion

U271 Setting the page count unit
(Message: Set Page Count Unit)
Contents
Execute the long paper count setting.
Purpose
Execute to change the long paper count.
* :If double count is set in U253, the value multiplied with this is the long paper count.
Setting

setting varia-
tion
Banner A Count setting of Long Paper A (470.1mm 2 to 30 2 -
to 915mm/18.51” to 36”)
Banner B Count setting of Long Paper B (915.1mm 2 to 30 3 -
to 1220mm/36.01” to 48”)
Completion

U278 Delivery date setting
(Message: Set Delivery Date)
Contents
Registers the date of delivery of the machine.
Purpose
Execute when installing the machine. Execute to check the delivery date of the machine.
Method
2.Select [Today].
* :Sets the delivery date of the machine.
Clearing
1.Select [Clear].
* :Clears the delivery date of the machine.
Completion
U285 Set Service Status Page

(Message: Set Service Status Page)
Contents
Determines whether to display the digital dot coverage report on the report print.
Purpose
Setting
Items Contents
On Displays the digital dot coverage.
Off Not to display the digital dot coverage.
3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion

U286 Optional language setting
(Message: Set Option Language)
Description
Add/delete/change the optional language
Purpose
Sets the optional languages selectable from System Menu
Setting
Items Contents
Option Language 1 Optional language 1 setting
Setting
Items Contents
ARABIC Installed langauage list
CHINESE-S
DANISH
JAPANESE
PORTUGUESE
SWEDISH
VIETNAMESE
None
* :Display varies depending on installed optional language package.

Completion

U287 Automatic recovery function
(Message: Set Auto Reset Function)
Description
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error
Purpose
Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the service call error or system error
Setting
Items Contents
C0XXX SETS WHETHER TO ENABLE THE AUTOMATIC RECOVERY FUNCTION AFTER
THE SERVICE CALL ERROR
C1XXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the C1xxx
code service call error
CFXXX Sets whether to enable the automatic recovery function after the CF
Completion

U323 Abnormal temperature and humidity notification setting
(Message: Set Abnormal Heat and Humidity Warning)
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the notification when detecting abnormal temperature and humidity.
Purpose
Setting
Items Contents
On Indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Off Do not indicate the abnormal temperature and humidity notification
Completion
U325 Paper interval setting

(Message: Set Paper Interval (Add Toner))
Contents
Sets the print interval at high coverage.
Purpose
Changes the print interval at high coverage.
Setting

setting
Interval Sets On/Off of print interval at high coverage. On/Off Off
Mode Sets the print interval mode at high coverage 1 to 10 1
Completion

U326 Black line cleaning indication
(Message: Set Black Line Clean Display)
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the con-
tact glass when scanning from the document processor.
Method
Items Contents
Black Line Mode Sets On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance indication
Items Contents
On Indicate the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not indicated
Completion

U327 Cassette heater control setting
(Message: Set Cassette Heater Control)
Contents
Selects the cassette heater control setting.
Purpose
Selects the cassette heater control setting
Sets the cassette heater for the optional cassette.
Method
Items Contents
Mode1 Sets the cassette heater control Mode1.
Mode2 Sets the cassette heater control Mode2.
Off Sets the cassette heater control Off (not installed).

* :Drum refresh is not executed at power-up when the cassette heater control is [On].
* :Mode1: ON at 65%RH or more of the machine outside humidity (OFF: during drive ),
Mode2: always ON
Completion

U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient
(Message: Adjust Coverage Size Calculation Rate)
Contents
Sets the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert
the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial set-

ting
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Completion

U339 Drum heater ON mode setting
(Message: Set Drum Heater On Mode)
Description
Sets the drum heater
Purpose
Sets the drum heater setting display and drum heater setting in System Menu
Method
Items Contents
System Check if the drum heater setting in System Menu is displayed or not.
Drum Heater Sets the drum heater
Setting
Items Contents
On Enabled
Off Disabled

* :If it is set to [Off] in [System Memu], [Drum Heater] is set to [Off]
Completion

U340 Setting the applied mode
(Message: Set Applied Mode)
Description
Allocates memory to ensure that there is sufficient memory available for the printer to use as a
working area.
Purpose
Modify the memory allocation if insufficient memory for transparency support or XPS direct print-
ing occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Adj Memory Sets the memory allocation
Adj Max Job Setting the maximum of multiple jobs
setting: Adj Memory


range
Image Area temporarily used to create output image. -100 to 0
100(MB)
* :Set the values below in case print failure occurs with the memory shortage. (recommended
value)
Image : +100
* :The work area for copy is small and it may cause output failure if the values are large.

Setting: Adj Max Job


range
Copy Maximum copy (Scan To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 10
Printer Maximum printer (Host To Print) Jobs 10 to 50 -
* :The maximum [Printer] jobs should be (maximum jobs) – (maximum copy jobs).
Completion

U341 Printer cassette setting
(Message: Set Printer Exclusive Cassette)
Contents
Sets the cassette to printer output only.
Purpose
Execute it when securing a cassette for printer. The cassette set to on is for printer only and it
cannot be used for copy.
Setting
* :Multiple cassettes are selectable.
Items Contents
Cassette1 Setting cassette 1 to the printer paper source
Cassette2 Setting cassette 2 to the printer paper source
Cassette 3 *1 Setting cassette 3 to the printer paper source (paper feeder)

* :Initial setting: Off (Cassette1 to 5)
Completion

U343 Duplex priority mode
(Message: Set Duplex Priority Mode)
Contents
Switches between duplex or simplex copy for the initial copy mode.
Purpose
Sett the frequently used settings depending on the user’s usage.
Setting
* :Select the item to set.
Items Contents
On Duplex print priority is enabled
Off Duplex print priority is disabled

Completion
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication

(Message: Set Maintenance Time Soon Display)
Contents
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to reach, by set-
ting the number of prints that can be made before the current maintenance cycle reaches.
Displays the maintenance precaution message when the page count reaches the set value
before the maintenance count.
Purpose
Change the time for maintenance precaution display.
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial set-

range ting
Cnt Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 9999 0
(Remaining number of prints that can be made
before the current maintenance cycle reaches)
SSD Life Setting the maintenance time precaution display 0 to 99 5(%)
for the SSD replacement.
Completion

U346 Selecting Sleep Mode
(Message: Selecting Sleep Mode)
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method
Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switches AutoSleep function setting
Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off
Sets Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
* :Initial setting: More Energy Save

Setting: Auto sleep

Items Contents
On The sleep mode is enabled from the system menu.
Off The sleep mode is disabled from the system menu.
Completion

U402 Adjusting the printing margins
(Message: Adjust Print Margin)
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
* :If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
* :If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on
the second page.
Adjustment

setting varia-
tion
Lead Adjusts the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
* :When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting
value is decreased.
Printer leading edge margin
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-28

Precautions
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance
mode.
U034(P.6-38) > U402
Completion

U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact
glass
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(Table))
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

setting varia-
tion
A Margin Adjusts the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
C Margin Adjusts the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
value is decreased.
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-29
Precautions
U034(P.6-38) > U402(P.6-189) > U403
Completion

U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the docu-
ment processor
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjusts the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

tion
A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
C Margin Sets the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
A Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP left margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
(2nd side)
C Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP right margin (2nd side) 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin(Back) *1 Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
(2nd side)
*1: Simultaneous duplex scan model only

value is decreased.
(4.0 +1.5/-0 mm)
Printer Printer
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

(2.5 +1.0/-1.0 mm)
Figure 6-30

Precautions
U034(P.6-38) > U402(P.6-189) > U403(P.6-190) > U404
Completion

U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/Reversal)
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(DP))
Contents
Adjusts the writing timing when duplex printing.
Purpose
Adjusted when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the
scanner reading image (image on the memory)
Precautions
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-38) > U402(P.6-189) > U66(P.6-61) >
U403(P.6-190) > U71(P.6-65) > U404(P.6-191) > U407
Adjustment
5.Select [Adj Data].

setting varia-
tion
Adj Data Adjusts the leading edge timing when -47 to 47 0 1dot
writing the image in the memory
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-31
Completion

U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
(Message: Half Tone Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Acquires the data for the automatic halftone adjustment and ID correction.
Purpose
Execute when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped
Adjustment
* :Displays the execution information screen.
* :Test pattern 1 and Test pattern 2 are output on the A4 paper.
2.Set the test pattern output on the original glass with the arrow facing the rear side and print
side face-down.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 1.
Figure 6-32
* :The first auto adjustment is executed.
4.Set the output Test Pattern 2 as the original.
* :Load about 20 sheets of the blank paper on Test Pattern 2.
* :The second auto adjustment is executed.
7.An error code appears when an error occurs.

Error codes
Codes Occurrence Contents Re-

position adjust-
ment
S001 Scanner Original reference patch is not detected Enable
S002 Original deviation is in excess in the main scan- Enable
ning direction
S003 Original deviation is in excess in the sub-scan- Enable
ning direction
S004 Original skew is in excess Enable
S005 Original type error Enable
SFFF Other scanner error Disable
E001 Engine Engine status error Disable
E002 Adjustment result error Disable
EFFF Other engine error Disable
C001 Controller Pause status Disable
C002 Adjustment result error Disable
C110 Adjustment value (increase amount) value error Disable
(black)
(cyan)
(magenta)
(yellow)
C210 Adjustment value (increase rate) error (black) Disable
C220 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error Disable
(cyan)
C240 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error Disable
(magenta)
C280 Adjustment value (increase rate) value error (yel- Disable
low)
CFFF Other controller error Disable
Completion

U411 Scanner auto adjustment
(Message: Scanner Auto Adjustment)
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the
DP scanning sections.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberra-
tion in main/sub scanning direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color cor-
rection matrix automatic adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF cor-
rection, Input gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Items Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
Table (Chart Execute automatic adjusts the table scan- AVGR14938B
A) ning.
Magnification in the sub scanning direction

/ Leading edge timing
Center line / chromatic aberration
Sub scanning chromatic aberration / MTF
correction COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
gamma in color mode / color correction

No.302K357010
matrix
Input gamma in monochrome mode
DP Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment AVGR11211F
FU(ChartB)*1 in the DP scanning section.
Execute the 2nd side automatic adjustment
in the DP scanning section.
DP
FD(ChartB)*2 Magnification in the sub-scanning direction
Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing

Items Contents Original for adjustment
(P/N)
DP Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment AVGR14938B
FU(ChartA)*1 in the DP scanning section.
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF cor-
rection
matrix
DP Execute the 2nd side automatic adjustment
FD(ChartA) *2 in the DP scanning section.
Main scanning chromatic aberration / sub

scanning chromatic aberration / MTF cor-
rection
matrix
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value AVGR14938B
DP Auto Adj Adjusting the document processor scan- Without Chart B, executed in a sim-
*1 ning section with the chart output by the plified manner.
local machine
Magnification in the sub-scanning direction

Leading edge timing
Center line
*1: DP installed machine only, *2: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP machine only

Method: Table (Chart A)
Automatic input of the target value
* :Usually, it adjusts here.
1.Set the specified original (P/N: AVGR14938B) on the
table. 2.Enter maintenance item U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [Table(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjust-
ment.
8.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and
the barcode is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Manual input of the target value
1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment
original (P/N: AVGR14938B) by executing the maintenance mode
U425. 2.Set the specified original (P/N: AVGR14938B) on the table.
3.Enter maintenance item U411.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [Table(ChartA)].
8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when
adjusting it with ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA
(color).
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: AVGR11211F) face-up on the DP.
*:Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as shown below.
5 mm
149 ± 1 mm
74 ± 1 mm
Figure 6-33

3.Select [DP FU(ChartB)].
Method: DP FD (Chart B)
* :Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: AVGR11211F) face-up on the DP.
3.Select [DP FD(ChartB)].

Method: DP Auto Adj
1.Set A4/Letter paper.
2.Press the [Start] key to print the adjustment original.
3.Set the adjustment original output on the table and press the [Start] key.
4.Set the output adjustment original with face-up on the DP.
5.Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
6.Press the [Start] key to start the 1st side automatic adjustment.
7.Set the output adjustment original with face-down on the DP.
8.Press the [Start] key and scan the original.
9.Press the [Start] key to start the 2nd side automatic adjustment.
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
1.Set the specified original (P/N: AVGR14938B) face-up on the DP.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
ment.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and

original (P/N: AVGR14938B) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
ment.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and

original (P/N: AVGR14938B) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
* :When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If an error occurs
during auto adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case,
check the error and execute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Codes Contents Corrective action

00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error 1. Set the original correctly and
(Table scanning leading edge skew in the execute the adjustment again.
sub-scanning direction) 2. Check lighting of the lamp or
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading replace it.
edge in the sub-scanning direction)
05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in
the main scanning direction)
06 Black band is not detected (Table near end
in the main scanning direction)
07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in 1. Check the attachment position of
the main scanning direction) DP.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in 2. Check lighting of the lamp or
the main scanning direction) replace it.
3. Check the back and front of the
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading adjustment original.
0b Black band is not detected
(Original check of DP leading edge in the
sub-scanning direction)
0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing
0d White band is not detected (DP trailing

0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off then on,
and execute again.
0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning 1. Turn the power switch off then
direction on, and execute again.
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning 2. Adjust manually.
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
direction
11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning
direction
12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direc-
tion
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off then on,
and execute again.
14 Center line error in the main scanning 1. Turn the power off and on, and
direction execute again.
2. Adjust manually.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning direc-
(U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
tion
16 Magnification error in the main scanning
direction
17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and exe-
cute again.
18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
19 PWB replacement error -
1a Original error 1. Clean the contact glass and slit
glass.
2. Exchange the adjustment origi-
nal.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference correction
coefficient error
1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?

20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original
error
63 Completed to obtain the test RAW -
Completion

U412 Adjusting the uneven density
(Message: Adjust Uneven Density)
Contents
Scan the test pattern image distribution directly from the scanner .
Purpose
Execute when the drum unit or laser scanner unit is replaced.
Correct uneven developer/transfer density in the main scanning direction.
* :After completing, execute maintenance mode U464 [Calibration].
Method
Items Contents
Normal Mode Normal Mode
On/Off Config Uneven density correction On/Off setting
Method: Normal Mode

* :Output the test patter with the initial light intensity setting. (1st sheet)
2.Set the test pattern 1 and place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on it.
3.Press the [Start] key. Scanning starts.
* :Test pattern is output after completing scanning. (2nd sheet)
* :According to the test pattern of 1st sheet, output with -20% light intensity setting.
5.Press the [Start] key. Scanning starts.
* :Test pattern is output after completing scanning. (3rd sheet)
* :Check the correction result. [Finish] appears after normal completion.
1st retrial
8.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
9.Execute Step 3 to 7
2nd retrial
10.[Retry] appears unless normally completed.
11.Execute Step 3 to 7
* :An error code appears when an error occurs.

Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Patch is not detected E002 Background image error
S002 Original position shift in the main E003 Density error
scanning direction
S003 Original position shift in the sub- E004 Uneven density error
scanning direction
S004 Original skew error EFFF Other engine error
S005 Original type error C001 Controller error
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
E001 Engine status error

Items Contents
On Enable the uneven density correction
Off Disable the uneven density correction
* :Automatically set to on after completing correction.
Completion

U415 Adjusting the print position automatically
(Message: Print Position Auto Adjust)
Description
Execute the automatic adjustment of the timing at the print engine
Adjusting the leading edge timing, enter line and margins
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the print engine.
* :* Execute this mode in a simplified manner when the Chart B(AVGR11211F) is not available.
Method
1.Set A3/Ledger paper.
* :Load A4/Letter when the large capacity feeder is used.
3.Select [Execute].
* :A test pattern is outputted.
5.Set the output Test Pattern as the original.
* :Automatically perform adjustment from the top to bottom cassettes.
7.When normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
Error codes list
Display Contents Display Contents

S001 Black band is not detected (main C101 Adjustment value error (main
scanning direction far end) scanning direction magnification)
S002 Black band is not detected (main C101 Adjustment value error (auxiliary
scanning direction near end ) scanning direction magnification)
S003 Black band is not detected (auxil- C101 Adjustment value error (leading
iary scanning direction leading edge timing)
edge)
S004 Black band is not detected (auxil- C101 Adjustment value error (center
iary scanning direction trailing line)
edge)
S005 Auxiliary scanning direction skew C101 Adjustment value error (B margin)
error (1.5 mm or more)
S006 Main scanning direction skew error C101 Adjustment value error (A margin)
(1.5 mm or more)
S007 Original error (detection of reverse C101 Adjustment value error (C margin)
original paper)
S008 Original error (page mismatch) C101 Adjustment value error (D margin)
SFFF Other scanner error CFFF Other controller error
Completion

U425 Set Target
(Message: Set Target Adjustment Value)
Description
Enter the Lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N:
7505000005).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Execution
Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Sets the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA
Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the
back page of the adjustment original.

setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
a A value setting -200 to 200 0.9 -
b B value setting -200 to 200 -0.4 -

Setting: Black

setting variation
a A value setting -200 to 200 -0.2 -
Setting: Gray1

setting variation
b B value setting -200 to 200 1.2 -
Setting: Gray2

setting variation
Setting: Gray3

setting variation

Setting: C

setting variation
Setting: M

setting variation
Setting: Y

setting variation
Setting: R

setting variation

Setting: G

setting variation
Setting: B

setting variation
Setting: Adjust Original

* :This setting is usually unnecessary.

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 4.0 to 6.0 5.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm
left edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 189.0 to 191.0 190.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of
black belt 3 of the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the
left edge, B: 105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2.Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
4.Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment
original.
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the
right edge of black belt 2.
5.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.

7.Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black
belt 3 on the adjustment original at two positions.
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance
from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of
the left edge and deduct A. E: Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge
of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8.Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
30mm 148.5mm 267mm
A Black belt 1 B C Leading edge

15mm
Black
belt 2
D E
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
Left edge
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
COLOR SCANNER
CHART A4
No.302K357010
Black belt 3
Original for adjustment (P/N: AVGR14938B)
Figure 6-34

Setting: DP(ChartB)
* :This setting is usually unnecessary.

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
left edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 388.0 to 392.0 390.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment
original.
2.Enter the value measured in "Lead" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
3.Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
5.Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside)
on the adjustment original.
6.Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the the [+] [-] keys keys.
&
ChartB (AVGR11211F)
Figure 6-35
Completion

(Message: Set ID Adjustment Mode)
Contents
Set permission/prohibition of the ID correction operation (calibration). Executes each setting of
the calibration.
Purpose
Execute the calibration setting when an image failure occurs or depending on the user’s request.
Execute Calibration when replacing the maintenance kit.
Method
Items Contents
Permission Permit/Prohibit Calibration
Time Interval Sets the time interval to execute calibration after completing printing.
Mode Select the length of thecalibration cycle
On/Sleep Out Calibration operation setting (power-up/recovery from sleep mode)
AP/NE Calibration operation setting (AP/NE)
Leaving Time Setting the time to determine whether to execute calibration when recov-
ering from Sleep mode
Timing Setting the execution timing by drive time
Target Value Setting the target sensor value for the toner thick layer calibration and
light intensity calibration
Calib Executing Calibration
Solid Image Edge reduction setting
Setting: Permission
1.Select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On 1: Permitting Calibration
Off 0: Prohibiting Calibration

Setting: Time Interval

range
Time(sec) Calibration interval 0 to 9999 480
* :Setting is changeable in 10 count increments.

Setting: Mode
Items Contents
Short 0: Calibration cycle setting: Short
Normal 1: Calibration cycle setting: Normal
Long 2: Calibration cycle setting: Long
Custom 3: Calibration cycle setting: Custom
* :Initial setting: Normal

Setting: On/Sleep Out

Items Contents
Setting: AP/NE
Items Contents
Setting: Leaving Time


range
Time(min) Setting the sleep timer 0 to 480 4 to 80

Setting: Target Value

range
Thickness(K) Toner layer calibration (Black) 0 to 1000 110
Gamma(K) Light amount calibration (Black) 0 to 500 350
Setting: Print Rate(B/W)


range
Threshold Proportion of black/white printing (Threshold) 1: On / 0: Off 0
Method: Calib
1.Select [Execute].
* :Calibration is started.
Items Contents
Execute Executes Full Calibration
Setting: Solid Image

Items Contents
On 1: Enable smoothing edges
Off 0: Disable smoothing edges
Completion

U465 ID correction data
(Message: ID Adjustment Data)
Contents
Refers to the ID correction data.
Purpose
Execute for data check.
Method
2.Select the item to check.
* :The screen is switched.
Items Contents
Laser Power Primary transfer belt durability
Laser Power(En) Displays the light intensity control value(En)
Laser Power(Drum) Displays the light intensity control value(Drum)
Laser Power(Max) Displays the light intensity control value(Max)
Bias Calib Sensor value for the toner layer calibration
T7 CTD T7 control value
Stress Primary transfer belt durability
Method: Laser Power

* :The current value is displayed.
Items Contents
K Displays the Black light intensity control value.
Method: Laser Power(En)

Items Contents
K Displays the Black light intensity control value.(En)
Method: Laser Power(drum)

Items Contents
K Displays the Black light intensity control value.(Drum)
Method: Laser Power(Max)

Items Contents
K Displays the Black light intensity control value.(Max)

Method: Bias Calib
Items Contents
K Sensor value for toner thick layer calibration (Black)
Method: T7 CTD
Items Contents
K T7 control value (Black)
Method: Stress
Items Contents
Front Primary transfer belt durability (Front)
Rear Primary transfer belt durability (Rear)
Completion

U469 Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit
(Message: Initial Set 1st Transfer Unit)
Contents
Perform the transfer belt speed correction.
Purpose
Execute when replacing the transfer belt unit.
Method
Items Contents
Belt Initialize Executing the primary transfer belt speed correction
Method: Belt Initialize

1.Select [Execute].
* :Primary transfer belt speed correction starts.
3.When adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.

Error codes list
Codes Description
1 Main body cover open
2 toner empty
3 Waste toner over-filled
4 Detecting the service call error
22 No discharge detection error K
Completion

U470 Setting the JPEG compression rate
(Message: Adjust JPEG Compression Rate)
Contents
Sets the JPEG compression rate by image mode.
Purpose
Change the setting depending on the image desired by the user. Lower the set value to reduce
the image roughness by changing the compression rate in case of 200% or more of the enlarged
copy . If the set value is reduced, compression is high and image quality is lowered. If the set
value is increased, image quality is improved but processing speed is slower.
Method
Items Contents
Copy Compression rate of the copy
Send Compression rate of the Send
System Compression rate of the temporary saving in the system
Print Compression rate for printer
Method: Copy
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
Setting: Photo

range
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 1 to 0
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 1 to 0
Setting: Text

range
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 1 to 0
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 1 to 0

Method: Send
Items Contents
Photo Compression rate of the photo mode
Text Compression rate of the text mode
HC-PDF(BG) Sets the compression rate for high compression PDF
HC-PDF(Char) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (text color).
HC-PDF(File Size) Set the compression rate for High compression PDF (compression prior-
ity).
Setting: Photo

range
Y1 Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 30(%)
CbCr1 Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 30(%)
Setting: Text

range

range
Setting: HC-PDF(BG)

range
Setting: HC-PDF(Char)

range

Setting: HC-PDF(File Size)

range
Setting: System

range
Y Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 100 90(%)
CbCr Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 100 90(%)
Setting: Print

range
Luminance Compression rate of the brightness 1 to 10 7(%)
Chrominance Compression rate of the color difference 1 to 10 7(%)
Supplement
Test copy of the original is available by pressing the [System Menu] key as interruption copy
mode when executing this maintenance mode.
Completion

U474 Checking the LSU cleaning
(Message: Check LSU Cleaning Operation)
Contents
Execute the LSU cleaning by operating the LSI cleaning motor. Also, sets the cleaning operation
interval and timing to enter the operation.
Method
Items Contents
Execute Executes the LSU cleaning operation.
Cycle Sets the LSU cleaning operation.
Method: Execute
* :The LSU slit glass is cleaned.
Method: Cycle

range
Cnt Sets the LSU cleaning cycle. 0 to 5000 1000
Setting: Cnt
* :Settable in 500-sheet increments
Completion

U485 Image process mode setting
(Message: Set Image Process Mode)
Contents
Sets the PDF image rotation.
Purpose
Change the PDF image rotation setting.
Setting
Items Contents
PDF Rotation Rotate the PDF image
setting Contents
0 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
1 The image rotation is designated to the actual image
2 The image rotation is designated to the internal parameter
(CTM rotation)
Completion

U520 TDRS setting
(Message: Set TDRS)
Contents
Checks/sets the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method
Items Contents
Registration Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog
Information Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog
Setting: Registration
Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password
Access Code Registers Access Code
Setting: TDRS User / Access Code / TDRS User & Access Code
Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Sets the TDRS server URL
TDRS User Sets the TDRS Username
Access Code Sets the TDRS access code
Proxy Server Sets the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Sets the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Sets the TDRS proxy username
Text Sets the TDRS description
* :[Regist] is not executable if a USB memory is not installed.

* :When the USB memory is inserted, TDRS information is automatically retrieved and dis-
played.
After obtaining the TDRS information, select [Regist] and then register the TDRS information
by pressing the [OK] or [Start] key.
* :After the normal completion, [Complete] is indicated in the status information of the item
that was performed.
When an error occurs, the following numbers are indicated in the status information of the
item that has been operated.
* :If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the
"TDRS User" will be indicated.
If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the "Access Code" will be
indicated.

Error codes
Items Contents Items Contents

e0001 HDD is unavailable. t0001 Fatal error
e0002 The USB memory is unavailable. t0002 Error in processing the network
e0003 The file to import does not exist in t0003 An illegal parameter error
the USB memory.
e0004 Reading from the USB memory t0004 Insufficient resource
has failed.
e0005 Unmounting the USB memory has t0005 Communication error
failed.
e0006 Moving or renaming the file has t0006 Error in processing communica-
failed. tion.
e0007 Opening the file has failed. t0007 Login error
e0008 Closing the file has failed. t0008 External error
e0009 Error in reading the file t0009 Authentication error
e000A Copying the file has failed. t000A HTTP error: Request error
e000B Opening the directory has failed. t000B HTTP error: Error due to the
server
e000C Creating the working directory has t000C HTTP error: Error due to the client.
failed.
e000D Deleting the working file has failed.
Setting: Information
1.Displays the set contensts
Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model Display of the model name
Serial No Display of the machine serial number
Offline Display of the TDRS connection state

Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS

Completion

U600 Initialize: All Data
(Message: Initialize: All Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX
PWB according to the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered con-
tents if the file system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
2.Select [Execute].
* :The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code] and enter a destination code using the numeric keys.
* :Refer to the following destination code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Destination code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

* :Data initialization starts.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
5.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
* :When initialization is successful, "Completed" is displayed for one second.

* :Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)

Destination code list
Destina- Destination Destina- Destination

tion code tion code
000 Japan 253 CTR21 (European nations)
007 Argentina ↑ Italy
009 Australia ↑ Germany
022 Brazil ↑ Spain
038 China ↑ U.K.
080 Hong Kong ↑ Netherlands
084 Indonesia ↑ Sweden
088 Israel ↑ France
097 Korea ↑ Austria
181 U.S.A. ↑ Switzerland
250 Russia ↑ Belgium
108 Malaysia ↑ Denmark
115 Mexico ↑ Finland
126 New Zealand ↑ Portugal
136 Peru ↑ Ireland
137 Philippines ↑ Norway
152 Middle East 254 Taiwan
156 Singapore
159 South Africa
169 Thailand

U601 Initialize: Keep data
(Message: Initialize: Keep Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the des-
tination and OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
2.Select [Execute].
* :The screen for entering the destination code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code].

* :Refer to the destination code list. (P.6-226See page )
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Destination code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
* :No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

* :Data initialization starts.
Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
6.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.

U603 User data 1
(Message: User Data 1)
Contents
Sets the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2.Select [Line Type].
Items Contents
Line Type Line Type
Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
20PPS 20PPS

* :[Completed] is displayed.
Completion

U604 User data 2
(Message: User Data 2)
Contents
Sets the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching
Method
2.Select [Rings(F/T)].

range
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 -
* :If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.
Completion
U605 Data clear

(Message: Clear Data)
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
2.Select [Clear Com.Rec.].
Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

Completion

U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto
reduction mode.
Method
Items Contents
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction
mode.
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/Let-
terR) in the auto reduction mode.
Setting: Cut Line(100%)

Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record-
ing capacity when recording the data at 100% magnification.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting,
they are recorded on the next page.
Contents Setting Initial Data

tion
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax 0 to 22 3 -
at 100% magnification.
* :Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception.
Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Setting: Cut Line: Auto

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record-
ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the
entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

tion
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.

Setting: Cut Line: Auto

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the record-
ing capacity when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the
entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

tion
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the A4R 0 to 22 0 -
auto reduction mode.
* :Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with
the trailing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Completion

U611 System 2
Contents
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Method
Items Contents
ADJ LINES Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
ADJ LINES(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is
set.
ADJ LINES(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size
paper is set.
Setting: ADJ LINES


tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 0 to 22 7 -

Setting: ADJ LINES(A4)


tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 22 -
A4 paper is set.


Setting: ADJ LINES(LT)
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 26 -
letter size paper is set.

Completion

U612 System 3
Contents
Sets the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
Items Contents
Auto reduct Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Sets the automatic protocol list printing.
Setting: Auto Reduct

Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direc-
tion or at 100% magnification.
Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the
FAX paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.
Setting: Protocol List

Sets the automatic protocol list printing.
Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.

Completion

U615 System 6
Contents
Sets the record width capacity and process if 11 inch width paper is set for the inch specification
machine
Method
Items Contents
RX WIDTH FOR 11"
Setting: RX WIDTH FOR 11"

Items Contents
LEDGER Transmits the A3 width to the destination machine
B4 Transmits the B4 width to the destination machine
* :Initial setting: LEDGER

Completion

U620 FAX system
(Message: FAX System)
Contents
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
2.Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode
Items Contents
One Sets the one-shot type detection
Cont Sets the continuous type detection
* :Initial setting: One

Completion

U625 Communication settings
(Message: Set Communication)
Contents
Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to
complete transmission. Changes the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method
Items Contents
Interval Sets the auto redialing interval
Times Sets the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval

tion
Sets the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 min- -
utes

Setting: Times

tion
Sets the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -

Completion

U630 Communication control procedures 1
(Message: Communication Control 1)
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality
line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method
Items Contents
TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Sets the reception speed.
TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the
sender.
RX Echo Sets the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Sets the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability,
V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1.Select the communication speed.
Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
* :Initial setting: 14400bps/V17

Setting: RX Speed
Sets the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destina-
tion unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1.Select the reception speed.
Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)

* :Initial setting: 14400bps
Setting: TX Echo
Sets the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error
occurs with echo at the transmitter side.
Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
* :Initial setting: 300

Setting: RX Echo
Sets the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when
an error occurs with echo at the receiver side.
Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
Completion

Contents
Purpose
Sets the transmission and reception of ECM
Sets the CED frequency
Method
Items Contents
ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.
ECM RX Sets ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
* :Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.
* :Completed is displayed.
Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
* :Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.

Setting: CED Freq
Sets the CED frequency. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement mea-
sures for the international communication.
Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz

Completion

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Sets the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.
Setting: DIS 4Byte

Sets whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.
Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Sets the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.
Items Contents
1Time Detects CNG once.
2Time Detects CNG twice.
* :Initial setting: 1Time (100V model)/2Time (Others)

Completion

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Sets the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Sets whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and recep-
tion.
Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.

Setting: DIS 2Res
Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the cor-
rective measures for transmission errors and other problems.
Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
* :Initial setting: Once

Setting: RTN Check

Sets the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors
occur frequently due to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.
Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
* :Initial setting: 15%

Completion

Contents
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Exe-
cute it as one of measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
* :Relax the communication conditions
Setting
2.Select [TCF Check].

setting
TCF Check Sets the allowed error bytes when detect- 1 to 255 0
ing the TCF signal

Completion

U640 Communication time setting 1
(Message: Communication Time 1)
Contents
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method

range setting
Time(One) Sets the one-shot detection time for 0 to 255 7
remote switching. 1 (New Zealand)
Time (Cont) Sets the continuous detection time for 0 to 255 80
remote switching.

Completion

U641 Communication time setting 2
(Message: Communication Time 2)
Contents
Sets the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method
Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Sets the T0 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Sets the Ta time-out time.
Tb1 TIME OUT Sets the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Sets the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Sets the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Sets the Td time-out time.
Setting: T0 Time Out

Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Sets to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or
when the destination unit sets the auto switching function.
Contents Setting Initial

range setting
Sets the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 56
58 (100V model)


Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
*This setting is usually unnecessary.

range setting
Sets the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 (s) 36
38 (100V model)


The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception

range setting
Sets the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

Setting: Ta Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call
in the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-18). If either receiving a FAX
signal within this time or passing this time, the mode automatically switches to the FAX reception
mode. Execute when a reception error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range setting
Sets the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 s 30

Ring back tone send start
Start of fax reception

as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring detection
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
Figure 6-36 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time
Setting: Tb1 Time Out

Sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the
FAX/telephone automatic switching mode, (See figure 1-3-18). Execute when a reception error
occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range setting
Sets the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20


Setting: Tb2 Time Out
Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call
in the FAX/telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-27). Execute when a reception
error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range setting
Sets the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after
a connected handset receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, oper-
ated as a normal phone after this.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to
receive a call.

range setting
Sets the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 s 60

Setting: Td Time Out

Sets the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to
receive a call. Be sure not to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the
unit is being used as a telephone.

range setting
Sets the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 6

Completion

U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Sets the modem detection level.
Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
* :Initial setting: 0dB
Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
* :Initial setting: 0dB
Setting: RX Mdm Level

1.Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].
* :Initial setting: -43dBm
Completion

U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Sets the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting

range setting
Sgl LVL Modem Sets the modem output level -15 to 0 11
10 (100V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
(Cent)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Sets the DTMF output level (level dif- 0 to 5.5 2
ference) 1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

Completion

U660 Ring setting
(Message: Set Calls)
Contents
Sets the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Sets the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Sets the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
* :Initial setting: PSTN

Setting: Dial Tone

Selects whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax
is connected to a public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.

Setting: Busy Tone
Sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone
is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this prob-
lem may be improved. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if
the destination line is busy.
Items Contents
On Detects the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
* :Initial setting: On/Off (Australia)

Setting: PBX Setting

Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
*According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
* :Initial setting: Loop

Setting: DC Loop
Sets if the loop current is detected before dialing.
Items Contents
On Detects the loop current before dialing.
Off Detects the loop current before dialing.
Completion

U670 List output
(Message: Output List)
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
* :Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print
Jobs] is pressed to halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
4.Output selected list.
Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential
boxes, firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance
mode (self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion

U671 FAX backup data clear
(Message: Clear FAX Back Up Data)
Contents
Clears the FAX/i-FAX communication history and scheduled FAX transmission backup data in
the FAX PWB.
Execute the memory DIMM initialization.

Purpose
Execute to prevent information disclosure of the backup data.
Setting
2.Select the item to output.
Items Contents
RESERVATION Clears the scheduled FAX data in the FAX PWB.
CLEAR
RECOVERY FAX Enable to use the DIMM used in another machine.
DIMM
FAX DIMM CLEAR Clears all the data in the DIMM.

* :Clears the backup data.
4.When selecting [RECOVERY FAX DIMM] or [FAX DIMM CLEAR], turn the power switch off
and on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion

U695 FAX function customization
(Message: Customize FAX Function)
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Setting: FAX Bulk TX

1.By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.
Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg

1.By using the [+] [-] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
2.Initial setting: Off

Completion

U698 Setting the maintenance port
(Message: Set Port for Maintenance)
Contents
Sets the port applicable to the maintenance mode.
Purpose
Sets the maintenance mode target port when installing multiple ports .
Setting is unnecessary if the same contents are set for both ports. Sets only when different items
are set for each port.
* :This maintenance mode only appears when the multiple ports are installed.
Setting
2.Press [Port Select].
* :Current setting display is inverted.
Items Contents
ALL All ports
PORT 1 Port 1 (FAX PWB port)
PORT 2 Port 2 (Optional multiple port)
Precautions
These contents to set are cleared when exiting the maintenance mode or turning the power off
and the settings are necessary when entering the maintenance mode.
Completion

U699 Software switch: Set
(Message: Set: Soft SW)
Contents
Sets the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
* :Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be
changed.
Method
2.Select [SW No.].
3.Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the
[Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
4.Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.
Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

Completion
List of software switches which can be configured

Communication control procedures
No. Bit Contents

36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34

No. Bit Contents
38 0 2400bps/V34
41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or
more
Communication time setting
No. Bit Contents

53 76543210 T3 timeout setting
54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)
55 76543210 T5 timeout setting
60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)
64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Modem setting
No. Bit Contents

89 76543 RX gain adjust
NCU setting
No. Bit Contents

121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern
122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching
125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
126 7654 Ringback tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Calling time setting
No. Bit Contents

133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected

No. Bit Contents
147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the
DC circuit
151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time

U901 Clearing the counters by paper source
(Message: Clear Paper Feeder Counter)
Contents
Displays and clears the counts by paper source.
Purpose
Check the maintenance parts replacement timing. Executes to clear counters when replacing the
maintenance parts.
Method
* :Displays the counts by paper source.
Items Contents
MPT Displays/clears the MP tray feed counter
Cassette1 Displays/clears Cassette 1 count
Cassette2 Displays/clears Cassette 2 count
Cassette 3 *1 Displays Cassette 3 count
Duplex Displays/clears the duplex unit count
*1: 500-sheetx2/1500-sheetx2, *2: 3000-sheet side deck

2.Select the counter to clear.
* :Unable to clear [Cassette 3], [Cassette 4] and [Cassette 5]
Completion

U903 Clearing the jam counter
(Message: Clear Paper Misfeed Counter)
Contents
Displays/clears the jam counter by paper jam type.
Purpose
Execute to check the paper jam status. Executes to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
Items Contents
Cnt Displaying/clearing the jam counts
Total Cnt Displaying the accumulate jam counts
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the jam counts.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt

1.Select [Total Cnt].
* :Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by jam code.
2.Change the screen using the [▲] [▼] key.
* :Unable to clear the accumulated jam counter values.
Completion

U904 Clearing the service call error counter
(Message: Clear Service Call Counter)
Contents
Displays/clears the number of times of service call errors by service call error type.
Purpose
Executes to check the service call error. Executes to clear counters when replacing the mainte-
nance parts.
Method
Items Contents
Cnt Displays/clears the service call counter.
Total Cnt Displays accumulate service call error counts.
Method: Cnt
1.Select [Cnt].
* :Number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Code of no occurrence is not indicated.
2.Select [Clear] to clear the service call error counter.
* :Individual counters cannot be cleared.
Method: Total Cnt

1.Select [Total Cnt].
* :Accumulate number of occurrence is displayed by service call error.
Unable to clear the accumulated service call error counter values.
Completion

U905 Optional counter
(Message: Option Counter)
Contents
Displays the counter values of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet finisher
and inner finisher.
Purpose
Execute to check the usage status of the document processor, 1000-sheet finisher, 3000-sheet
finisher and inner finisher.
Method
2.Select the device to check.
* :Switched to the counter screen.
Items Contents
DP *1 Displays the document processor count.
DF *2 Displays the document finisher count.
*1: DP installed machine, *2: DF installed machine
Method: DP
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
ADP Simplex original count is displayed.
RADP Duplex original count is displayed.
CIS *1 Displays the count of simultaneous duplex scanning
*1: Simultaneous duplex scanning DP installed machine
Method: DF
* :Each counter is displayed.
Items Contents
Sorter Displays the sorter counter.
Staple Displays the staple counter.
Punch Displays the punch counter.
Stack *1 Displays the main tray eject counter.
Saddle *1 Displays the saddle eject counter.
Fold *1 Displays the center folding counter.
Three Fold *1 Displays the three folding counter.
*1: 4000-sheet finisher installed machine
Completion

U906 Resetting the partial operation
(Message: Reset Disable Function Mode)
Contents
Release the service call error with partial operation.
Purpose
If the partial operation is executed with a broken cassette, etc., make sure to execute it after
repairing the parts.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Reset the partial operation.
3.Press the [Start] key to release the partial operation.

Completion
U908 Total counter

(Message: Total Counter)
Contents
Displays the total counter.
Purpose
Displays the total counter for check.
Method
* :Displays the total count.
Completion

U910 Black rate data
(Message: Clear Coverage Data)
Contents
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as
shown on the service status page).
Purpose
Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clears the print coverage data.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.
Completion

U911 Counter by media type
(Message: Paper Size Counter)
Contents
Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Purpose
Displays the counts to confirm when replacing the maintenance parts .
Method
* :Displays the paper feed counts by paper size.
Items Contents
A3 *1 Displays A3 feed counts
B4 *1 Displays B4 feed counts
B5 *1 Displays B5 feed counts
Folio *1 Displays Folio feed counts
Ledger *2 Displays Ledger feed counts
Legal *2 Displays Legal feed counts
Letter *2 Displays Letter feed counts
Statement *2 Displays Statement feed counts
ETC Displays Other paper feed counts.
*1: *1: metric specification, *2: inch specification
Completion

U917 Read/Write Backup Data
(Message: Read/Write Backup HDD Data(USB))
Contents
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB
memory to the main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit infor-
mation
Method
1.Turn the power switch off.
* :Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB memory.
5.Select the object item.
Items Contents Depending data*

Address Book Address book informa- -
tion
Job Account Job accounting infor- -
mation
One Touch One-touch key informa- Address book information
tion
User User management Job accounting information
information
Document Box Document box informa- Job accounting, User information
tion
Shortcut Short-cut information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
Fax Forward FAX forward informa- Job accounting, User, Document Box information
tion
System System setting informa- -
tion
Network Network setting infor- -
mation
Job Setting Job setting information -
Printer Printer setting informa- -
tion
Fax Setting FAX setting information -
Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX
setting
Panel Setting Panel setting informa- Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
tion management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX set-
ting and Program
* :Since data are dependent with each other, data other than selected are also retrieved or
written.

6.Select [Export] or [Import].
Items Contents
Import Imports data from the USB memory to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB memory.
7.Press the [Start] key. Starts reading or writing.

* :The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
* :When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.
9.When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more
than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data
e0c00: toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import
(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header
e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process
Completion

U920 Billing counter
(Message: Charge Counter)
Contents
Displays the billing count.
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method
2.Select the item to display.
* :Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Main Function Main function counts
Sub Function Sub functions count
Method: Main Function

* :The charge counts for the main functions are displayed.
Items Contents
B/W Copy B/W copy count is displayed.
B/W Prn B/W print count is displayed
B/W FAX FAX count
Method: Sub Function

* :The charge counts for the sub functions are displayed.
Items Contents
Simplex Simplex print count is displayed
Duplex Duplex print count is displayed
Combine(Off) Combine print counts (Off) is displayed
Combine(2in1) Combine print counts (2in1) is displayed
Combine(4in1) Combine print counts (4in1) is displayed
Completion

U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters
(Message: Clear All Charge/Life Counter (one time only))
Contents
Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values
are 1000 or less.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.

* :Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Completion
U928 Machine life counter

(Message: Machine Life Counter)
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method
* :The current machine life counts is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the machine life count
Completion

U930 Clear the main charger roller counts
(Message: Clear Charger Roller Counter)
Contents
Displays and clears the current main charger roller counts.
Purpose
To verify the main charger roller counts after replacing. Also, clear the counts after replacement
Method
* :The main charge roller counter is displayed.
Items Contents
K The current main charger roller count for K is displayed.
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
Completion

U933 Setting the maintenance mode log
(Message: Set Maintenance Mode Execute Log)
Contents
Sets the function to record the in/out date of the maintenance mode or date executing each
maintenance item individually and output the log file.
Purpose
Record the maintenance mode history to analyze the cause when a problem occurs.
Method
Items Contents
Export Exports Maintenance Log.
Setting Maintenance log output setting
Method: Export
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Export the maintenance log to a USB memory.

Export the maintenance log to a USB memory.
* :If a USB memory is not inserted, [Execute] is grayed out .
* :Display OK/NG after execution.
Setting: Setting
* :Select the key including the number to set indicated by each block.
Items Contents
U000-U019 Sets the maintenance log output for U000 to U019.

2.Set on/off for the number desired to set.
Completion
U942 DP loop amount setting

(Message: Adjust DP Original Loop Amount)
Contents
Adjust the paper loop amount when using the document processor.
Purpose
Execute when original no-feed jam, skew or creases on the original appears.
Method

range setting variation
Front Single-side original loop amount -32 to 32 0 0.20mm(DP-
7100)
0.16mm(DP-
7110)
Back *1 Double-side original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
Mix *2 Mixed original loop amount -31 to 31 0 0.18mm
*1: Reversing duplex scanning machine only, *2: except DP-7120

Increase the set value if no feed jam or skew feed occurs and reduce the set value if creases
appear on the original.
Completion

U952 Maintenance mode workflow
(Message: Maintenance Mode Work Flow)
Contents
Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the main unit or the USB memory.
Purpose
Execute to register regular maintenance items.
Method
Items Contents
Continue Resume interrupted workflow.
Execute(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory.
Execute Execute the workflow saved in the main unit.
Entry(USB) Executes the workflow in a USB memory.
Entry Register the workflow in the main unit manually.
Log Displays the latest workflow execution history.
Method: Continue
1.Select maintenance item number to execute.
* :Selected maintenance mode is executed.
Method: Execute(USB)
1.Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
5.Select [Execute(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory

* :Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.
Method: Excute
1.Select the place to save the data to execute.
Items Contents
Data 1 - 8 Workflow save area in the main unit

3.Press the [Start] key to start the processing.

* :The machine is preset with the following workflow at shipment.
Items Contents
SET UP 464,410,000,927,278
HIGH ALTITUDE 140,101,464
WARRANTY 089,000
MK 119,140,469,127,464,412,464,410,251
EH SETUP 411,034,246,211
Method: Entry(USB)
5.Select [Entry(USB)].
6.Select [workflow].
Items Contents
WorkFlowData 01 - 07 Workflow data in a USB memory
7.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
8.Select [Execute].
* :Registers the workflow in a USB memory to the main unit.
Method: Entry
1.Select [Entry].
2.Select the workflow save area.
Items Contents
3.By using the [+] [-] keys or the numeric keys, enter the maintenance number to register in the
workflow.
Items Contents
Flow 1 - 14 Registered maintenance numbers

* :Execute the maintenance items in the order of registration in the workflow.

e.g.
When inserting a USB memory the following items can be registered: commands, texts and
maintenance numbers (variable).
File format: xxx.mwf
1, SET UP, 464, 469, 410, 000, 927, 278

2, WARRANTY, 089, 000
3, MK-A, 119, 930, 140, 127, 167, 464, 469, 412, 410, 251
4, MK-B, 119, 930, 140, 464, 469, 412, 410, 251
5, EH SETUP, 411, 034, 246, 211
Completion

U964 Log check
Contents
Transfer the log files save in the HDD to a USB memory.
Purpose
Transfer the log file saved in the HDD to a USB memory for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
5.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

* :Starts transferring the log files saved in the HDD to a USB memory.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)
7.[Completed] appears after normal completion.
Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Log retrieving starts when pressing three keys on the operation panel (Status/Job Cancel + Sys-
tem Menu/Counter + Stop) for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns on when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB memory.
Error codes
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB memory is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB memory
Copy Error HDD to USB memory copy failure
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion

U969 Toner area code
(Message: Toner Area Code)
Contents
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
Execute to check the currently set toner area code and model code.
Method
* :Displays the toner area code and model code
Items Contents
Area Code Toner container area code
Model Code Model code
Completion
U977 Setting the data capture mode

(Message: Set Data Capture Mode)
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB memory to check it.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB memory.

* :When the operation is completed abnormally, an error code is displayed.
Error codes
Items Contents
1 USB memory is broken. USB memory was disconnected during data
processing or is write-protected.
4 USB memory is full.
50 Other error occurs
Completion

U984 Developer unit number
(Message: Developing Unit Number)
Contents
Displays the developer unit number.
Purpose
Execute to check the developer unit number.
Method
* :Displays the developer unit number.
Items Contents
K Displays the Black developer unit number.
Completion

U985 Developer unit history
(Message: Developing Unit History)
Contents
Displays the machine serial number and developer counter history.
Purpose
Displays the machine serial number and developer count to check.
Method
* :Select K.
Items Contents
K Displays the Black developer unit history.
* :Displays the machine serial number and 3 items of the developer counter history.
Items Contents
Machine History 1 to 3 Machine serial number history
Cnt History1 to 3 Developer counter history
Completion

U989 HDD scan disk
(Message: HDD Scandisk)
Contents
Apply Scandisk to the HDD for data recovery.
Purpose
Execute recovery of HDD management data error by turning the power off while accessing to the
HDD.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute HDD scan disk request
3.Press the [Start] key to execute scandisk.

Completion
U990 Clearing the scanner lighting time

(Message: Clear Scanner Lamp ON Time)
Contents
Displays the accumulated CIS lighting time
Purpose
Execute to check the CIS usage.
Method
* :CIS accumulated lighting time is displayed in minutes.
Items Contents
CIS Displays the accumulated CIS lamp lighting time
Completion

U991 Scanner counter
(Message: Scanner Counter)
Contents
Displays the scanner operation counts.
Purpose
Display the number of scanner operation to check the usage status.
Method
* :Current number of operation is displayed.
Items Contents
Copy Scan Displays times of copy and scan operations.
Fax Scan Displays times of FAX scan operations.
Other Scan Displays times of other scan operations.
Completion

7 Troubleshooting
7-1 Image formation problems
(1) Isolate the place of image failure
<How to isolate the cause>
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor
1. Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](See page 7-2).

(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass --> CCD failure at scanning factor)
Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP simplex (Main unit CCD scan)
b. On the contact glass (scan by the main unit CCD)
2. Refer to image failure with engine factor (See page 7-47).

(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Primary transfer image formation process failure)
<Image data flow>
Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB (LSU)
Sending :
LED lamp CCD Engine PWB PC
Printing data from PC :

APC PWB
Printer driver Engine PWB
(LSU)

(2) Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)
No. Contents Image sample

(2-1) Abnormal image
(2-2) The background is colored.
(2-3) Black or color spots appear on the image.
(2-4) Blurred characters
(2-5) Original center and copy image center are

mismatched.
(2-6) Horizontal black streak appears.
(2-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands

appear on the image.

(2-8) There is a regular difference between the
image leading edges of the original and
copy.
(2-9) Vertical white streaks or band appear.
(2-10) Moire
(2-11) Blank image (White)Entire black image
(2-12) A part of image is dark or light.
(2-13) Image is blurred.
(2-14) Part of the image is not copied.

(2-15) Color shift
(2-16) Skewed image
(2-17) The entire image is too light.
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

When scanning the second (back) side through the dual scan DP
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the DP relay The DP relay PWB is not Reattach the DP relay PWB.
PWB properly attached.
2 Checking the SATA cable The SATA cable is not Reinsert the connectors of Electrical
properly connected. the SATA cable between the Diagram of
DPSHD PWB and the DP PWBs
relay PWB.
3 Replacing the SATA cable The SATA cable is Replace the SATA cable Electrical
deformed or broken. between the DPSHD PWB Diagram of
and the DP relay PWB. PWBs
4 Checking the DPSHD The DPSHD PWB is not Reconnect the DPSHD PWB
PWB properly connected. to the DPCIS.
5 Replacing the DPSHD The DPSHD PWB is faulty. Replace the DPSHD PWB.
PWB
6 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then DP CIS
execute U091 and U411. Replace-
ment
7 Replacing the DP relay The DP relay PWB is Replace the DP relay PWB.
PWB faulty.

8 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Main PWB
Replace-
ment
When scanning the first (front) side or the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP

1 Checking the FFC The FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC. Electrical
connected, or it is faulty. When the FFC terminals are Diagram of
peeled off or deformed or the PWBs
FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.• CCD PWB - Engine
PWB
2 Checking the cable The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD cable, or
connected, or is faulty. replace it.
3 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD. HDD
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the ISU The ISU is attached Reattach the ISU. ISU
improperly. Replace-
ment
5 Replacing the ISU The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the ISU. ISU
Replace-
ment
6 Replacing the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Replace the engine PWB. Engine
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment


1 Setting Background Den- The original background Set [Background Density Back-
sity Adjustment density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
ground density adjustment Quality]. Density
is set to Off. Adjust-
ment
sity Adjustment density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ground density adjustment Image Quality], and adjust Density
is dark. the background density. Adjust-
ment

3 Executing U411 The CIS image adjust- Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
ment (U411 [DP FD(ChartA)]. cution
FD(ChartA)]) is not exe-
cuted.
4 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
5 Checking the CIS roller The CIS roller does not Reattach the CIS roller driv-
rotate properly. ing section.
relay PWB.
PWB
ment
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the settings The Background Density Set [Background Density] to Function
Adjustment is not set. [Auto] at [System Menu/ Defaults
Counter] > [Common Set- (System
tings] > [Function Defaults] Menu)
2 Checking the settings The background density is Set [Background Density] to Function
dark. [Manual] to adjust the den- Defaults
sity at [System Menu/Coun- (System
ter] > [Common Settings] > Menu)
[Function Defaults]
3 Setting Background Den- The Background Density Set [Background Density Back-
sity Adjustment Adjustment is not set. Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
Quality]. Density
Adjust-
ment

sity Adjustment density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
ground density adjustment Image Quality], and adjust Density
ment
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during press-
scanning. ing.
6 Checking the contact glass The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at ISU Upper
the backside of the contact Assy
glass. Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. When the same phenomenon U411 Exe-
occurs at the table scanning cution
too, execute U411
[Table(chartA)].
8 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Reattach the home position
tion sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
PWB
10 Checking the mirror units The mirror units are not Reattach the mirror units.
properly attached.
11 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty or Clean the DP slit glass or
not properly attached. reattach it.
12 Checking the DP The original is raised at Adjust the left DP hinge
scanning. height.
13 DP replacement The DP frame is deformed Replace the document pro- DP
or the DP hinges are faulty. cessor. Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment
15 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Lamp Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment


1 Checking the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
relay PWB.
PWB
ment
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment

2 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass.
PWB
4 Checking the ISU The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the ISU. ISU
Replace-
ment

5 Checking the engine PWB The engine PWB is faulty. Reconnect the connectors on Engine
the engine PWB. Then, fix or PWB
replace the wires if they are Replace-
pinched by the other part or if ment
they have any damage.
When the issue is not
resolved after that, replace
the engine PWB.
6 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Reconnect the connectors on Main PWB
the main PWB. Then, fix or Replace-
replace the wires if they are ment
pinched by the other part or if
resolved, replace the main
PWB.


1 Checking the first (front) This is the same as the Perform the treatment when Measures
side DP scanning issue that occurs when scanning the first (front) side for 1st
scanning the first (front) through DP. Page DP
side through DP. Scanning
2 Checking the CIS roller The originals are conveyed Reattach the CIS roller.
without contacting the CIS
roller.
3 Checking the DPCIS The originals are away Reattach the DPCIS. DP CIS
from the CIS glass. Replace-
ment

1 Checking the original The originals out of specifi- Ask a user to use the speci-
cation are used. (They are fied paper.
thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
3 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying roller or Clean the DP conveying
ing roller and its bushing the bushing is dirty. roller and the bushing.
4 Checking the DP convey- The original conveying pul- Reattach the DP conveying
ing pulley ley does not rotate pulley and the pressure
smoothly. spring.

5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive components Reattach the DP drive com-
components are not properly attached. ponents.
6 Checking the original pick- The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up
up guide does not operate properly. guide.
7 Checking the scanning The scanning guide is Replace the scanning guide.
guide deformed.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights Adjust the left DP hinge
height of the DP do not match. height.
9 Checking the DP The document processor Check the positioning of the
is not properly installed in document processor and
the main unit. tighten the screws again.
10 Checking the DP hinges The DP hinges holding Adjust the DP hinges holding
holding pressure pressure is adjusted pressure.
improperly.(The hingesver-
ticalmotionisunsmooth-
andtheopenedDPcannotbe
held.So,theDPisskewed-
horizontally.)'
11 Checking the DP hinges The DP hinges are faulty. Replace the DP hinges.
(The hingesverticalmotion-
isunsmooth,theopenedDP-
cannotbeheld,andtheDPiss
kewedhorizontally.)'
(2-5) Original center and copy image center are mismatched.


1 Reloading the original The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly.
erly set on the original tray.
2 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust the DPCIS center line U072 Exe-
is not adjusted. by executing U072 [CIS]. cution
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. U411 Exe-
is not adjusted. cution
4 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
is not adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. cution
When scanning the first (front) side through DP

1 Checking the original The originals are not prop- Reset the originals.

2 Executing U072 The center line when scan- Adjust U072 [Front]. U072 Exe-
ning the front page of the cution
originals at the document
processor is not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjust- Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. U411 Exe-
ment when DP scanning is (For the dual scan DP only) cution
not executed.
4 Executing U411 The auto scanner adjust- Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart U411 Exe-
ment when DP scanning is B)]. cution
not executed.
When scanning the second (back) side through the automatic duplex DP

1 Checking the original The originals are not prop- Reset the originals.
2 Executing U072 The center line when scan- Adjust U072 [Back]. U072 Exe-
ning the back page of the cution
originals at the document
processor is not adjusted.


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
relay PWB.
PWB
ment

PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment

3 Executing U072 The image at the backside Adjust U072 [Front]. U072 Exe-
of the size indication plate cution
is scanned.(The adjust-
ment value of U072 [Front]
is incorrect.)
4 Executing U411 The image at the backside Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
of the size indication plate A)]. cution
is scanned.(The adjust-
ment value of U411
[Table(ChartA)] is incor-
rect.)
PWB
6 Checking the CCD PWB The CCD PWB is faulty. Reconnect the CCD PWB ISU
wire. Then, replace the ISU if Replace-
the issue is not resolved. ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
(2-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands appear on the image.

1 Executing U072 The leading edge timing is Adjust U072 [CIS]. U072 Exe-
improperly adjusted. cution
(Streaks or bands appear
on the image outside the
original.)

2 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. U411 Exe-
improperly adjusted. cution
original.)
3 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
improperly adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. cution
original.)
4 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
5 Cleaning the DP convey- The DP conveying guide is Clean the DP conveying
ing guide dirty. guide.
6 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration pulley Clean the DP registration pul-
tion pulley is dirty. ley.
8 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line cor- Execute U091. U091 Exe-
rection) is not executed. cution
relay PWB.
PWB
ment
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment


1 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass and
the DP conveying guide.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and ISU Upper
shading plate at the back- the shading plate at the back- Assy
side of the contact glass is side of the contact glass. Detach-
dirty. ment /
Reattach-
ment
3 Checking the mirror The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror of the mirror
units.
4 Checking the mirror units There is dust on the mirror Remove dust in the laser
units. path of the mirror units.
5 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using
an air-blower.
6 Executing U063 The image scanning posi- Execute U063 to change the U063 Exe-
tion is incorrect. scanner shading position. cution
8 Checking the settings Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original
detected original size are Size
mismatched. (Function
Menu)
9 Checking the original The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
cover
10 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust U067 [Front]. U067 Exe-
incorrect. (The streaks or cution
bands appear out of the
original image.)
11 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
incorrect. (Streaks or A)]. cution
original.)
12 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust U068 [DP Read]. U068 Exe-
scanning an original on the cution
DP is incorrect.
original image.)
14 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. U411 Exe-
incorrect. (Streaks or cution
original.)

15 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart U411 Exe-
incorrect. (Streaks or B)]. cution
original.)
Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.
(2-8) There is a regular difference between the image leading edges of the original
and copy.

1 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust the DPCIS center line U072 Exe-
is not adjusted. by executing U072 [CIS]. cution
2 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. U411 Exe-
is not adjusted. cution
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
is not adjusted. FD(ChartA)]. cution

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Front]. U071 Exe-
original leading edge at the cution
document processor is not
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP Auto Adj]. U411 Exe-
scanning an original on the (For the dual scan DP only) cution
DP is incorrect.
3 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart U411 Exe-
scanning an original on the B)]. cution
DP is incorrect.
ing roller the bushing is dirty. roller and the bushing.
5 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying roller is Replace the DP conveying
ing roller worn down. roller.

6 Applying the grease The DP drive motor rotates Apply the grease to the DP
irregularly and the exces- drive gears.
sive load is applied to the
DP drive gear.
7 Checking the DP drive The DP drive motor rotates Reattach the DP drive motor
motor irregularly due to the fault. and reconnect the connector.
Replace it if it is not fixed.

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust U071 [Back]. U071 Exe-
leading edge on the back cution
page of the originals at the
document processor is not
properly set.


2 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is dirty. Clean the CIS glass and the
DP conveying guide.
3 Executing U091 U091 (Set white line cor- Execute U091. U091 Exe-
rection) is not executed. cution
relay PWB.
PWB
ment
PWB faulty.

Replace-
ment

units.
4 Checking the lens cover The lens cover is off. Reattach the lens cover. Lens Unit
Replace-
ment
5 Executing U063 The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the U063 Exe-
backside of the contact scanner shading position. cution
glass is dirty.
Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.
(2-10) Moire

1 Changing the image qual- The image quality mode is Change the image quality Printer
ity mode set improperly. mode. Driver
Operation
Guide
2 Reloading the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90
set. (Moire appears in the degrees and reset them.
original scanning direc-
tion.)

3 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
adjustment is not exe- FD(ChartA)]. cution
cuted.

1 Checking the settings The original imaging qual- Set [Original Image] at [Sys- Function
ity is not properly set. tem Menu/Counter] > [Com- Defaults
(Moire changes depend- mon Settings] > [Function (System
ing on the print quality.) Defaults] Menu)
tion.)

1 Checking the settings The original imaging qual- Set [Original Image] at [Sys- Function
ity is not properly set. tem Menu/Counter] > [Com- Defaults
(Moire changes depend- mon Settings] > [Function (System
ing on the print quality.) Defaults] Menu)
tion.)


relay PWB.

PWB
ment
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
2 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is not Reattach the DP slit glass.
properly attached.
DP is incorrect.
PWB
6 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt comes off. belt.
7 Checking the scanner The scanner drive gear is Reattach the scanner drive
drive gear not properly attached. gear.
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment


1 Checking the image quality Image quality is not prop- Select the image quality fit- Original
mode erly adjusted. (Original ting the original type. Image
type and image quality are (Function
mismatched.) Menu)
2 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
3 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the fold or creases of
creased. the original.
DP conveying guide.
relay PWB.
PWB
ment
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the situation The table scanning of origi- Perform the measures at the Measures
nals is faulty. table scanning. for Table
Scanning
2 Cleaning the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is dirty. Clean the DP slit glass.
3 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass is bent. Reattach the DP slit glass.

4 Checking the scanning The scanning guide is not Reattach the scanning guide.
guide properly attached.


1 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass has conden- Remove condensation on the
sation. CIS glass.
DP conveying guide.
3 Checking the CIS glass The CIS glass is warped. Reattach the CIS glass.
4 Replacing the CIS glass The CIS glass has some Replace the CIS glass.
scratches.
6 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
adjustment is not exe- FD(ChartA)]. cution
cuted.
7 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is not properly Reattach the DPCIS. DP CIS
attached. Replace-
ment
8 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then DP CIS
ment

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Checking the DP slit glass The DP slit glass has con- Remove the condensation on
densation. the DP slit glass.
3 Checking the mirror units The mirror has condensa- Remove the condensation on Lamp Unit
tion. the mirror in the mirror units. Replace-
ment
4 Checking the ISU The lens has condensa- Remove the condensation on Lens Unit
tion. the ISU lens. Replace-
ment
5 Checking the ISU The glass of the CCD Remove the condensation on Lens Unit
PWB has condensation. the CCD PWB glass using a Replace-
blower brush ment
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
the scanner is incorrect. A)]. cution

Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.
PWB.


1 Reloading the original The originals are not prop- Reload the original properly.
2 Setting the original size Actual original size and Set the original size manu- Common
detected original size are ally. Settings
mismatched. (System
Menu)
3 Changing the Border The Border Erase function Lower the setting of the Bor- Border
Erase function is not properly set. (Setting der Erase. Erase Set-
is too large.) tings
relay PWB.
PWB

ment
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the original The original is not set Reset the originals.
properly.
2 Checking the settings The original size and the Set the original size manu- Common
paper side do not match ally. Settings
on the operation panel. (System
(The setting is incorrect.) Menu)
3 Checking the settings The copy position is Set [Auto Image Rotation] to Function
rotated automatically. [Off] from the System Menu. Defaults
(System
Menu)
properly attached.
PWB
ment
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

(2-15) Color shift

2 Checking the CIS roller The originals are conveyed Reattach the CIS roller.
without contacting the CIS
roller.
3 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying roller is Clean the DP conveying
ing roller (before and after dirty. roller and the bushing.
scanning)
4 Checking the DPCIS The originals are away Reattach the DPCIS. DP CIS
from the CIS glass. Replace-
ment

1 Checking the original The originals out of specifi- Ask a user to use the speci-
cation are used. (They are fied paper.
thick, thin, or smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
ing roller the bushing is dirty. roller and the bushing.
4 Checking the DP convey- The original conveying pul- Reattach the DP conveying
ing pulley ley does not rotate pulley and the pressure
smoothly. spring.
5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive components Reattach the DP drive com-
components are not properly attached. ponents.
6 Checking the scanning The scanning guide is Replace the scanning guide.
guide deformed.
7 Checking the original pick- The original pick-up guide Reattach the original pick-up
up guide does not operate properly. guide.
8 Adjusting the left DP hinge The front and rear heights Adjust the left DP hinge
height of the DP do not match. height.
9 Checking the DP The document processor Check the positioning of the
is not properly installed in document processor and
the main unit. tighten the screws again.

10 Checking the DP hinges The DP hinges holding Adjust the DP hinges holding
holding pressure pressure is adjusted pressure.
improperly.(The hingesver-
ticalmotionisunsmooth-
andtheopenedDPcannotbe
held.So,theDPisskewed-
horizontally.)'
11 Checking the DP hinges The DP hinges are faulty. Replace the DP hinges.
(The hingesverticalmotion-
isunsmooth,theopenedDP-
cannotbeheld,andtheDPiss
kewedhorizontally.)'
(2-16) Skewed image


attached. Replace-
ment

1 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
creased. paper creases of the original.
2 Checking the original width The original skews. Relocate the original width
guides guides.
3 Adjusting the right DP The right DP hinge position Adjust the right DP hinge Right DP
hinge position is not adjusted back and position back and forth. Hinge
forth. Adjust-
ment
4 Checking the DP feed The DP feed roller is dirty. Clean the DP feed roller.
roller (It can be removed by
cleaning.)
5 Checking the DP feed The DP feed roller is dirty. Replace the DP feed roller.
roller (It cannot be removed by
cleaning.)
6 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration roller Clean the DP registration
tion roller is dirty. roller.

7 Checking the DP registra- The operation of the DP Reattach the DP registration
tion pulley registration pulley is faulty. pulley.
8 Executing U942 The original loop amount Adjust the original loop U942 Exe-
before registration is amount at U942. cution
improper.


1 Checking the table scan- The table scanning of origi- Perform the measures at the Measures
ning nals is faulty. table scanning. for Table
Scanning
2 Executing U411 U411 [DP FD(ChartA)] is Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
not executed. FD(ChartA)]. cution
3 Cleaning the CIS roller The CIS roller is dirty Clean the CIS roller
attached. Replace-
ment
relay PWB.
PWB
ment
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment


DP is incorrect.
properly attached.
4 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the image quality accord- Original
adjusted. (The original ing to the originals. Image
type and image quality dif- (Function
fers.) Menu)
5 Checking the settings The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
to "On".) Setting] > [Function Defaults] (System
> [EcoPrint] Menu)
6 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the density setting to be Adjust-
adjusted. (The density set- dark. ment/
ting is too light.) Mainte-
nance
(System
Menu)
7 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Back- Adjust-
adjusted. ([Background ground Density Adjustment to ment/
density] is set to "Off".) make dark. Mainte-
nance
(System
Menu)
8 Checking the settings [Prevent Bleed-thru] set- Change to [Off] at [System Function
ting is [On] Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Setting] > [Function Defaults] (System
> [Prevent Bleed-thru] Menu)
9 Checking the shading The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at ISU Upper
plate the backside of the contact Assy
glass. Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
10 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
adjusted. FD(ChartA)] and [DP cution
FU(ChartA)].
PWB

Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.
PWB.

(3) Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(3-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift

mismatched.
(3-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands


(3-8) There is a regular difference between the
image leading edges of the original and
copy.
(3-10) Moire

(3-15) Skewed image
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

PWB
2 Checking the cable The cable is not sufficiently Reconnect the HDD cable, or
connected, or is faulty. replace it.
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the settings The Background Density Set [Background Density] to Function
Adjustment is not set. [Auto] at [System Menu/ Defaults
Counter] > [Common Set- (System
tings] > [Function Defaults] Menu)
2 Checking the settings The background density is Set [Background Density] to Function
dark. [Manual] to adjust the den- Defaults
sity at [System Menu/Coun- (System
ter] > [Common Settings] > Menu)
[Function Defaults]
3 Checking the Background The Background Density Set [Background Density Back-
Density Adjustment set- Adjustment is not set. Adj.] to [Auto] in [Color/Image ground
tings Quality]. Density
Adjust-
ment
4 Changing the Background The original background Set [Background Density Back-
Density Adjustment set- density is dark. The back- Adj.] to [Manual] in [Color/ ground
tings ground density adjustment Image Quality], and adjust Density
ment
5 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during press-
scanning. ing.
6 Checking the contact glass The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at ISU Upper
the backside of the contact Assy
glass. Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
A)]. cution
PWB
properly attached.
ment
12 Replacing the lamp unit The LED PWB is faulty. Replace the lamp unit. Lamp Unit
Replace-
ment

Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass. Regular
Mainte-
nance
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

(3-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift
1 Checking the scanner rails There is a load on the Remove the foreign objects
scanner movement since on the scanner rails.
the foreign objects adhere
on the scanner rails.
properly attached.
3 Checking the scanner A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt
motor belt tension scanner movement since tension properly.
the belt tension is
improper.
4 Checking the wire drums The foreign objects adhere Remove the foreign objects Optical
on the wire drums. on the wire drums. Wires
Replace-
ment
5 Checking the pulleys in the The foreign objects adhere Remove the foreign objects
secondary mirror unit on the pulley groove. adhering on the pulleys in the
secondary mirror unit.
6 Checking the scanner The scanner wires are dirty Clean and reattach the scan- Optical
wires or off. ner wires. Wires
Replace-
ment
7 Checking the scanner The scanner wires have Replace the scanner wires. Optical
wires some scratches. Wires
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set on the contact glass.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass. ISU Upper
properly attached. Assy
Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is Adjust U067 [Front]. U067 Exe-
not adjusted. cution
4 Executing U411 The automatic table scan- Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
ning adjustment is not exe- A)]. cution
cuted.

Mainte-
nance
3 Executing U066 The image at the backside Adjust U066 [Front]. U066 Exe-
of size direction plate is cution
scanned.(Adjustment
value of [Front] in U066 is
incorrect.)
4 Executing U411 The image at the backside Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
of size indication plate is A)]. cution
scanned.(Adjustment
value of U411
[Table(ChartA)] is incor-
rect.)
PWB
6 Checking the CCD PWB The CCD PWB is faulty. Reconnect the CCD PWB ISU
wire. Then, replace the ISU if Replace-
the issue is not resolved. ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

(3-7) The vertical black / color streaks or bands appear on the image.
2 Checking the settings Actual original size and Set the original paper size. Original
detected original size are Size
mismatched. (Function
Menu)
3 Checking the original The original cover is dirty. Clean the original cover.
cover
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
incorrect. (Streaks or A)]. cution
original.)
6 Checking the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and ISU Upper
shading plate at the back- the shading plate at the back- Assy
side of the contact glass is side of the contact glass. Detach-
dirty. ment /
Reattach-
ment
units.
9 Cleaning the CCD PWB Dust is on the CCD PWB. Clean the CCD PWB using
an air-blower.
10 Executing U063 The image scanning posi- Execute U063 to change the U063 Exe-
tion is incorrect. scanner shading position. cution
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

(3-8) There is a regular difference between the image leading edges of the original
and copy.
placed.(The original lead-
ing edge is not aligned to
the contact glass properly.)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front]. U066 Exe-
timing is incorrect cution
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
timing is incorrect A)]. cution
5 Checking the scanner The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive
drive belt loose. belt.
6 Checking the wire drums The attachment of the wire Re-tighten the screws for the Optical
drums is loose. wire drums. Wires
Replace-
ment
7 Checking the scanner The attachment of the Retighten the screw of the
drive gear scanner drive gear is scanner drive gear.
loose.

units.
Replace-
ment
5 Checking the shading The shading plate at the Execute U063 to change the U063 Exe-
plate backside of the contact scanner shading position. cution
glass is dirty.
Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.
Replace-
ment

(3-10) Moire
1 Checking the settings The original imaging qual- Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
ity is not properly set. tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
(Moire changes depend- [Common Settings] > [Func- (System
ing on the print quality.) tion Defaults]. Menu)
2 Checking the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90
tion.)
3 Executing U065 The ratio in the main scan- Change the value at U065 U065 Exe-
ning direction is large. [Main Scan] to reduce the cution
(This problem occurs when scanner magnification in the
the print ratio is set as main scanning direction.
100%.)
4 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
scanner section is incor- A)]. cution
rect

1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the settings Image quality is not prop- Set [Original Image] in [Sys- Function
erly adjusted. (Original tem Menu/Counter] key > Defaults
type and image quality are [Common Settings] > [Func- (System
mismatched.) tion Defaults]. Menu)
3 Checking the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
creased. paper creases of the original.
4 Checking the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
Mainte-
nance
Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
7 Checking the contact glass Original is scanned on the Set the booklet original while
bent contact glass. not bending the contact
glass.
Replace-
ment
9 Checking the mirror units The mirror is dirty. Clean the mirror of the mirror
units.
10 Replacing the lamp unit A part of LED does not Check if the LED lamp lights Lamp Unit
switch on. by executing U061 [CCD]. If it Replace-
does not light, replace the ment
lamp unit and execute U411
[Table(ChartA)].
11 Checking the scanner rails The mirror units dontmove- Remove the foreign objects
properlysincetheforeignob- on the scanner rails, and
jectsadhereonthescannerr apply the grease (Part name:
ailsorthegreaseonthereis- PG-671 / Part number:
notenough.' 60170000) to there if neces-
sary.
12 Checking the LED reflector The LED reflector is not Replace the lamp unit. Lamp Unit
attached properly or Replace-
deformed. ment
13 Checking the mirror units The mirror is attached at Reattach the mirror units.
the incorrect position.
Replace-
ment

the engine PWB.
16 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. Replace the main PWB. Main PWB
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass has con- Remove the condensation on ISU Upper
densation. the contact glass. Assy
Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
3 Checking the mirror units The mirror has condensa- Remove the condensation on Lamp Unit
tion. the mirror in the mirror units. Replace-
ment
4 Checking the ISU The lens has condensa- Remove the condensation on Lens Unit
tion. the ISU lens. Replace-
ment
5 Checking the CCD PWB The glass of the CCD Remove the condensation on Lens Unit
PWB has condensation. the CCD PWB glass using a Replace-
blower brush ment
6 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
the scanner is incorrect. A)]. cution
Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the settings Marked part by highlighter Set [Highlight] to [On] at Original
pen on the original cannot [System Menu/Counter] > Image
be scanned. [Common Settings] > [Func- (Function
tion Defaults] > [Original Menu)
Image]
2 Checking the original The original is not set Reset the originals.
properly.
3 Checking the settings The original size and the Set the original size manu- Common
paper side do not match ally. Settings
on the operation panel. (System
(The setting is incorrect.) Menu)
4 Checking the settings The copy position is Set [Auto Image Rotation] to Function
rotated automatically. [Off] from the System Menu. Defaults
(System
Menu)
5 Checking the settings The Border Erase function Lower the setting of the Bor- Border
is not properly set. (Setting der Erase. Erase Set-
is too large.) tings
6 Checking the contact glass The original scanning side Clean the original scanning Regular
of the contact glass is dirty. side of the contact glass. Mainte-
nance
glass. Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
PWB
ment

11 Checking the original size The original size and the Replace the original size
switch paper side do not match switch.
on the operation panel.
(The original size switch
misdetects.)
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment
(3-15) Skewed image

set. (The original is
skewed.)
2 Checking the scanner unit The scanner unit height is Adjust the whole scanner unit Adjust-
improper. height. ment of
Scanner
Unit
Height
properly attached.

1 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the image quality accord- Original
adjusted. (The original ing to the originals. Image
type and image quality dif- (Function
fers.) Menu)
2 Checking the settings The density is not properly Change to [Off] at [System Function
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
to "On".) Setting] > [Function Defaults] (System
> [EcoPrint] Menu)
3 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the density setting to be Adjust-
adjusted. (The density set- dark. ment/
ting is too light.) Mainte-
nance
(System
Menu)
4 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the Back- Adjust-
adjusted. ([Background ground Density Adjustment to ment/
density] is set to "Off".) make dark. Mainte-
nance
(System
Menu)
5 Checking the settings [Prevent Bleed-thru] set- Change to [Off] at [System Function
ting is [On] Menu/Counter] > [Common Defaults
Setting] > [Function Defaults] (System
> [Prevent Bleed-thru] Menu)
glass. Detach-
ment /
Reattach-
ment
7 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411 [Table(Chart U411 Exe-
A)]. cution
PWB
ment
Replace-
ment

PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

(4) Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

(4-2) Black spots appear on the image.
(4-3) The image is not partly printed. (blank or

white spots)
(4-4) Blank image

mismatched.
(4-6) Paper creases

(4-7) Dirty reverse side
(4-9 Horizontal streaks or band with white, black

appear.
(4-10) The irregular misalignment occurs between

the leading edges of the original and copy
image. (Variation of paper leading edge
timing)
(4-12) Offset occurs.
(4-13) Fusing failure

(4-14) Paper skew at the trailing edge
(4-15) Uneven transfer
(4-17) The vertical white streaks or bands appear

on the image when scanning the first or
second side through DP.
(4-18) The vertical black streaks or bands appear

on the image.

Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

1 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failure Primary
transfer unit surface is dirty. appears with the primary Transfer
transfer belt pitch (long Unit
period that spans between Replace-
the sheets), clean the primary ment
transfer belt. Then, replace
the primary transfer unit
when the imaging failure is
not cleared even after exe-
cuting Calibration after clean-
ing.
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the secondary trans-
transfer bias contact bias contact is deformed. fer bias contact so that it
grounds the shaft of the sec-
ondary transfer roller
securely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure Second-
transfer roller unit roller is dirty. appears with the secondary ary Trans-
transfer roller pitch, clean the fer Roller
secondary transfer roller. Or, Unit
replace the secondary trans- Replace-
fer roller unit. ment

1 Checking the cleaning pre- The primary transfer belt Clean the cleaning prebrush.
brush cannot be cleaned since
the cleaning prebrush is
dirty.
2 Checking the primary There are smudges or When the image failure Primary
transfer unit scratches on the primary appears with the primary Transfer
transfer belt surface, and transfer belt pitch (long Unit
they will cause the image period that spans between Replace-
failure with the belt pitch the sheets), clean the primary ment
(long period that spans transfer belt. Then, replace
between the sheets). the primary transfer unit if the
imaging failure is not cleared.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failures Second-
transfer roller unit roller is dirty or has some appear with the secondary ary Trans-
scratches. transfer roller pitch, clean the fer Roller
secondary transfer roller. If Unit
not repaired, replace the sec- Replace-
ondary transfer roller unit. ment
4 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt surface is When the image failure Fuser Unit
dirty or has some appears in the fuser belt Replace-
scratches. length interval, clean the ment
fuser belt. If not repaired,
replace the fuser unit.
5 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Replace the primary transfer Primary
transfer unit cannot be cleaned with the unit. Transfer
faulty cleaning prebrush. Unit
Replace-
ment

(4-3) The image is not partly printed. (blank or white spots)
1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- The paper is stored in the Install the cassette heater if Cassette
age place high humidity environment. necessary.Also, ask users to Heater
store paper in a dry place. Installation
transfer unit surface is dirty or has appears with the primary Transfer
some scratches. transfer belt pitch (long Unit
the primary transfer unit if the
5 Setting the media type The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
properly set. the System Menu. MP Tray
Settings
6 Checking the settings The fuser temperature is Execute U161 [Print] and U061 Exe-
shifted largely. reset the fuser temperature to cution
the default value.

(4-4) Blank image
1 Checking the right cover The right conveying unit is Check the lock of the right
not closed. cover assy, and open and
close the right cover (convey-
ing unit).
2 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Check the following wire con- Electrical
connected or is faulty. nection. Clean the terminals Diagram of
and insert the connectors all PWBs
the way. When the following
wire is broken, short-cir-
cuited or has a ground fault,
or the wire terminals are
peeled off, replace the wire.•
Transfer high-voltage PWB -
Engine PWB
3 Checking the transfer high- The secondary transfer Replace the transfer high- Transfer
voltage PWB bias output from the trans- voltage PWB. High-volt-
fer high-voltage PWB is age PWB
faulty. Replace-
ment
4 Checking the engine PWB The ON signal of the sec- Replace the engine PWB. Engine
ondary transfer high-volt- PWB
age (3.3V to 0V) is not Replace-
output from the engine ment
PWB.

1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to fit them with the
fit with the paper size. paper size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when Adjust the center line at U034 U034 Exe-
image writing the data is [LSU Out Left]. cution
incorrect.

(4-6) Paper creases
1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides to fit them with the
width guides paper width guides do not paper size.
fit with the paper size.
2 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper.
3 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in a damp Ask users to store paper in a
age place place. dry place. Put the dry paper
into the plastic bag and seal
the bag to prevent moisture
from getting in.
4 Checking the pressure The pressure springs are Reattach the springs at both
spring not attached properly at ends of the registration roller.
both ends of the registra-
tion roller, so the pressure
balance is uneven.
5 Checking the fuser unit The pressure springs at Check the pressure balance Fuser Unit
the machine front and rear of both ends of the fuser unit Replace-
ends of the fuser unit are by checking the nipped pres- ment
not properly attached. sure on the solid image. If the
balance is uneven, replace
the fuser unit.
(4-7) Dirty reverse side

2 Checking the settings The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer U106 Exe-
bias is improperly set. bias to the default value at cution
U106.
3 Checking the press roller The pressure roller is dirty Clean the press roller and set Cassette /
due to the media type setup the proper media type in MP Tray
ting. the System Menu. Settings
4 Checking the conveying The conveying guide or the Clean the conveying guide
guide and the developer developer unit is dirty. and developer unit.
unit

1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if Cassette
age place humidity environment. necessary.Also, ask users to Heater
3 Checking the right cover The right DP hinge position Open the right cover (convey-
is not adjusted back and ing unit) once, and close it
forth. firmly.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the secondary transfer
transfer roller unit roller does not contact the roller shifts, correct the pres-
primary transfer belt or the sure position.
contact is not enough.
5 Checking the settings The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer U106 Exe-
voltage is improperly set. voltage to the default value at cution
U106.
6 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Clean the secondary transfer
transfer bias contact bias contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its
deformed, so, the impres- shape so that it is grounded
sion is unavailable. securely.
7 Replacing the transfer The secondary transfer Replace the transfer high- Transfer
high-voltage PWB bias output from the trans- voltage PWB. High-volt-
fer high-voltage PWB is age PWB
faulty. Replace-
ment

(4-9) Horizontal streaks or band with white or black appear.
1 Cleaning the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failures Primary
transfer belt surface is dirty. appear with the primary Transfer
transfer belt pitch (long cycle Unit
spreading over the sheets), Replace-
clean the primary transfer ment
belt.
2 Cleaning the fuser belt The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure Fuser Unit
appears in the fuser belt Replace-
length interval, clean the ment
fuser belt.
3 Checking the right cover Only one side of the right Close the right cover (con-
cover (conveying unit) is veying unit).
closed, or the pressure
spring is deformed.
4 Checking the secondary The pressure spring is not Reattach the pressure spring. Second-
transfer roller unit properly attached or Replace the secondary trans- ary Trans-
deformed. fer roller unit if the issue is not fer Roller
resolved. Unit
Replace-
ment
transfer unit surface is faulty. unit. Transfer
Unit
Replace-
ment
6 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
some scratches. Replace-
ment

(4-10) The irregular misalignment occurs between the leading edges of the original
and copy image. (Variation of paper leading edge timing)
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is Adjust the leading edge tim- U034 Exe-
not properly adjusted. ing at U034 [LSU Out Top]. cution
2 Executing U051 The paper loop amount Execute U051 to adjust the U051 Exe-
before registration is paper loop amount before cution
improper. registration.
3 Checking the wire The wire of the paper feed Reconnect the wire of the
clutch, middle clutch or the paper feed clutch, middle
registration clutch is not clutch and the registration
properly connected, so it clutch.
does not operate smoothly.
4 Checking the clutch The paper feed clutch, Reattach the paper feed
middle clutch or the regis- clutch, middle clutch and the
tration clutch is not prop- registration clutch.
erly attached, so it does
not operate smoothly.
5 Replacing the paper feed The paper feed clutch, Replace the paper feed drive Feed Drive
drive unit middle clutch or the regis- unit. Unit
tration clutch is faulty, so it Replace-
does not operate smoothly. ment

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within Basic
used. the specification. Paper
Specifica-
tions
2 Checking the settings The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
3 Applying the grease The drives from the con- Apply the grease to the gear.
veying motors are not
smoothly transmitted.
4 Checking the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Checking the fuser unit The fuser front guide is Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
deformed or the fuser Replace-
pressure is uneven. ment

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within Cassette /
used. the specification, or change MP Tray
to the media type setting Settings
closest to the specified paper.
2 Checking the settings The media type is not Change the settings accord- Cassette /
properly set. ing to the media type (paper MP Tray
weight). Settings
3 Executing U107 The setting value of the Reset the primary transfer U107 Exe-
primary transfer cleaning cleaning voltage to the cution
voltage at U107 is incor- default value at U107.
rect.
4 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failures Primary
transfer unit surface is dirty. appear with the primary Transfer
belt.
5 Checking the primary The primary transfer clean- Clean the primary transfer
transfer cleaning bias con- ing bias contact smudges cleaning bias contact. Or,
tact or is deformed. correct its shape so that it is
securely grounded.
6 Executing U106 The secondary transfer Reset the secondary transfer U106 Exe-
voltage is improperly set. voltage to the default value at cution
U106.
7 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer roller unit roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
8 Executing U161 The higher fuser tempera- Execute U161 [Print] and U061 Exe-
ture is set. reset the fuser temperature to cution
the default value.
9 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt is dirty. When the image failure Fuser Unit
appears in the fuser belt Replace-
length interval, clean the ment
fuser belt.
10 Checking the fuser dis- If toner organic material If the image failure appears in
charger needles adheres and accumulates the fuser belt length interval
on the leading ends of the after cleaning the fuser belt,
fuser discharger needles check the fuser discharger
depending on the high needles.When yellow mate-
print volume with the high rial (toner organic material)
print coverage, the charg- adheres on, replace the fuser
ing efficiency is reduced. discharger needle unit and
reset U167 [Correction].

11 Primary transfer unit Transfer cleaning voltage Replace the primary transfer Primary
replacement is not applied due to the unit. Transfer
broken wire in the primary Unit
transfer unit. Replace-
ment
12 Replacing the transfer The transfer high-voltage Replace the transfer high- Transfer
high-voltage PWB PWB is faulty. voltage PWB. High-volt-
age PWB
Replace-
ment
13 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt surface has Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
some scratches. Replace-
ment
(4-13) Fusing failure

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the proper
used. paper.
2 Checking the paper The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
3 Executing U161 The lower fuser tempera- Change the fuser tempera- U161 Exe-
ture is set. ture to the default value. cution
4 Checking the fuser unit The nipped pressure Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
(width) to the solid image is Replace-
low and fuser pressure set- ment
ting (spring) is too weak.

(4-14) Paper skew at the trailing edge
1 Cleaning the secondary The neighboring parts of Clean the secondary transfer Second-
transfer unit the secondary transfer roller, separation needles, ary Trans-
roller are dirty with paper discharger sheet and the fer Section
dust. paper path. Cleaning
2 Removing foreign material Paper is caught by foreign Replace the toner sucking
material such as a piece of fan motor if it does not oper-
paper. ate properly when executing
U037 [Toner].
3 Relocating the paper width The set position of the Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper paper width guides / MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides is mis- guides to fit them with the
matched with the paper paper size.
size, and so, the paper is
skewed.
4 Checking the conveying The registration rollers or Check if the registration roll-
section the middle pulleys are not ers and the middle pulleys
properly attached, or they are properly attached. If nec-
are dirty. essary, reattach them. Also,
they are dirty with toner or
paper dust, clean them.
5 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (convey-
right cover closed. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
6 Reinstalling the fuser unit The fuser unit is not prop- Insert the fuser unit straight Fuser Unit
erly installed. into the main unit, and lock Replace-
both sides of the fuser unit ment
firmly.
7 Adjusting the fuser unit The fuser unit height is Adjust the height adjusting Adjust-
height improper. lever at the machine inner ment of
front side that can adjust the Fuser Unit
fuser unit height. Height

(4-15) Uneven transfer
1 Checking the conveying The conveying section is Open the right cover (convey-
section not closed completely. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.
2 Checking the cleaning pre- Paper dust is accumulated Remove the cleaning cover
brush around the cleaning pre- and clean the cleaning pre-
brush. brush.
securely grounded.
4 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failures Primary
transfer unit surface is dirty. appear with the primary Transfer
belt.
5 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer roller unit roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
6 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the shape of the Second-
transfer roller unit roller is faulty. Or, the pres- pressure spring. Replace the ary Trans-
sure spring is deformed. secondary transfer roller unit fer Roller
if nit is not fixed. Unit
Replace-
ment
transfer unit surface has some unit. Transfer
scratches. Unit
Replace-
ment
8 Checking the primary The primary transfer clean- Replace the primary transfer Primary
transfer cleaning bias con- ing bias contact is faulty. unit, or the transfer high-volt- Transfer
tact age PWB. Unit /
Transfer
High-volt-
age PWB
Replace-
ment
9 Checking the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
the drive section or the Replace-
fuser press-release section ment
are deformed or worn
down.

1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the new dry
paper.
2 Checking the paper stor- Paper is stored in the high Install the cassette heater if Cassette
age place humidity environment. necessary.Also, ask users to Heater
(4-17) The vertical white streaks or bands appear on the image when scanning the
first or second side through DP.
3 Checking the feedshift The paper is hitting the Check the paper loop when
guide feedshift guide strongly. ejecting the paper, and reat-
tach the exit guide.

(4-18) The vertical black streaks or bands appear on the image.
1 Checking the fuser unit The separation claws are Clean the separation claws.
dirty with toner.
2 Checking the settings The media type is not Set the proper media type via Cassette /
Settings
3 Checking the feedshift There is toner dirt or weld- Clean the feedshift guide.
guide ing on the feedshift guide.
4 Checking the transfer The separation needles is Clean the separation nee-
separation needles dirty with paper dust or dles by using the cleaning
toner. brush, etc.
transfer roller unit roller is dirty, is deformed appear with the secondary ary Trans-
or is worn down. transfer roller pitch, clean the fer Roller
7 Checking the cleaning pre- The primary transfer belt Clean the cleaning prebrush.
brush cannot be cleaned since
the cleaning prebrush is
dirty.
securely grounded.
9 Replacing the transfer The cleaning bias is not Replace the transfer high- Transfer
high-voltage PWB generated from the trans- voltage PWB. High-volt-
fer high-voltage PWB. age PWB
Replace-
ment

(5) Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(5-2) Blank image
(5-4) Entire black image.
(5-5) Horizontal white / black streaks or bands

(5-6) Irregular horizontal white spreads or spots


(5-7) Horizontal uneven density
(5-11) Color reproduction is poor.
(5-13) The slight vertical black streaks appear at

the both paper ends where are out of the
image area when using the SRA3 paper
(paper width is 320mm).

(5-14) Vertical black streaks or bands appear on
the image.
(5-15) Vertical uneven density

Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)
1 Checking the machine's Uncharged toner increases Execute "Developer Adjust-
usage due to the continuous high Refresh", "Calibration" and ment/
coverage printing in the "Tone Curve Adjustment" in Mainte-
high temperature environ- order. nance
ment. Or the developer Menu
bias in controlled at the
higher level since the cali-
bration was executed
when the density was too
light.
2 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Clean the developer bias
bias contact is dirty or deformed. contact, or correct its shape
so that it grounds securely.
3 Checking the developer The toner sensor is faulty. Reinstall the developer unit. Developer
unit Replace it if it is not fixed. Unit
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the When the internal tempera- U139 Exe-
inside the main unit installation environment. ture indicated in U139 is cution
16°C / 60.8°F or less, request
the user to change the instal-
lation environment where the
room temperature is warmer
than 16°C / 60.8°F.
5 Checking the drum unit The drum unit does not Reattach the main charger Drum Unit
and the developer unit ground. unit to the drum unit and rein- / Main
stall the drum unit into the Charger
main unit to ensure secure Unit
contact . Replace-
ment
6 Checking the settings The setting value of the If the setting values at U100 U100 Exe-
main high-voltage is incor- are not the default values, cution
rect. reset them to the default val-
ues.
7 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Clean the main charger roller Main
unit surface is dirty. surface. Replace the main Charger
charger unit if improvement is Unit
inadequate. Replace-
ment

connected or is faulty. nection. Clean the terminals Diagram of
Engine PWB
9 Replacing the main high- The high-voltage contact of Replace the main high-volt- Main High-
voltage PWB the main high-voltage age PWB. voltage
PWB is deformed or dam- PWB
aged. Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

(5-2) Blank image
2 Checking the developer The developer drive gear Replace the developer unit. Developer
unit is faulty. Unit
Replace-
ment
3 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Reconnect the wires on the Electrical
connected. main high-voltage PWB. Diagram of
PWBs
4 Executing U140 The setting value of the Execute U140 and reset the U140 Exe-
developer bias is improper. developer bias to the default cution
value.
5 Checking the developer The developer clutch does Reconnect the developer Main Drive
clutch not engage or is not prop- clutch wire. Then, replace the Unit
erly attached, the wire is main drive unit if it the issue Replace-
not properly connected, or is not resolved. ment
the drive components such
as the drive gears or the
couplings are faulty.
6 Checking the developer The developer motor does Reattach the developer motor Main Drive
motor not properly rotate, or the and reconnect the wire. Unit
drive components such as Then, replace the developer Replace-
the drive gears and the motor if it is not fixed. ment
couplings are faulty.
7 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its
deformed. shape so that it grounds
securely.
8 Replacing the main high- The main high-voltage Replace the main high-volt- Main High-
voltage PWB PWB is faulty. age PWB. voltage
PWB
Replace-
ment
9 Checking the contact The contact is dirty or Clean the contacts between
deformed. the transfer high-voltage
PWB and the primary transfer
section, or correct them so
that they ground securely.
age PWB
Replace-
ment

11 Checking the FFC The FFC is not properly Reconnect the FFC to the
connected, or it is faulty. LSU. If the FFC is broken,
replace it.
12 Checking the LSU The APC PWB in the LSU Replace the LSU. LSU
is faulty. Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.

1 Checking the drum The drum surface is dirty Execute the drum refresh. If Drum Unit
or has some scratches. not repaired, replace the Replace-
drum unit. ment
Turn the drum heater on.
2 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Replace the main charger Main
unit surface is dirty. unit. Charger
Unit
Replace-
ment
3 Checking the settings The developer bias is easy Execute U140 [Altitude U140 Exe-
to leak since the main unit Adjustment] and set the cution
is installed in the low alti- proper altitude.
tude environment.
4 Executing U140 Developer bias leaks. Execute U140 [AC Calib]. U140 Exe-
(Except the OPC models) cution
5 Checking the developer The developer roller or the Clean the developer roller. Developer
unit magnet roller is dirty, or is Or, replace the developer unit Unit
faulty. if not repaired after cleaning. Replace-
ment

(5-4) Entire black image.
1 Checking the drum unit The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger Drum Unit
and the developer unit charger unit is not prop- unit to the drum unit and rein- / Main
erly installed. stall the drum unit into the Charger
main unit to ensure secure Unit
contact . Replace-
ment
roller contact contact is dirty or contact and correct its shape Charger
deformed. so it is grounded securely. Unit
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the high-voltage The high-voltage contact of Clean the high-voltage con- Main High-
contact the main high-voltage tact and correct it so that it voltage
PWB is dirty or deformed. grounds securely. Or reattach PWB
the main high-voltage PWB. Replace-
ment
5 Checking the wire The wires are not suffi- Check the wire connection of Electrical
ciently connected to the the main high-voltage PWB. Diagram of
main high-voltage PWB, or Clean the terminals and PWBs
the main high-voltage insert the connectors all the
PWB is faulty. way. When the following
wires are broken, short-cir-
cuited or have a ground fault,
peeled off, replace the wires.
PWB
Replace-
ment
7 LSU replacement The APC PWB in the LSU Replace the LSU. LSU
is faulty. Replace-
ment
the engine PWB.

(5-5) Horizontal white / black streaks or bands appear on the image.
1 Executing U140 U140 [AC Calib] is not exe- Change the settings of [Cali- U140 Exe-
cuted. bration] with full color from [0] cution
(Off) to [1] (On) at [AC Calib]
in U140, and execute the AC
calibration.(The Sleeve AC
values becomes lower than
the ones before executing the
AC Calibration.)
2 Checking the developer Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the devel-
unit roller are dirty and it oper roller and the developer
causes the developer bias bias contact.
leakage.
3 Executing Developer The last image remains on Execute the developer Adjust-
refresh the developer roller sur- refresh. ment/
face. Mainte-
nance
Menu
4 Developer unit replace- Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit. Developer
ment roller and the developer Unit
bias contact are deterio- Replace-
rated and it causes the ment
developer bias leakage.
5 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
Turn the drum heater on. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
6 Drum unit replacement There are some scratches Replace the drum unit. Drum Unit
on the drum surface. Replace-
ment
7 Main charger unit replace- The main charger roller When the image failures Main
ment surface is dirty or has appear with the main charger Charger
some scratches. roller pitch, replace the main Unit
charger unit. Replace-
ment
8 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer Primary
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its Transfer
deformed. shape so that it grounds cer- Unit
tainly. If it is not fixed, replace Replace-
the primary transfer unit. ment
9 Checking the wire The bias voltage is irregu- Reconnect the wires on the Electrical
larly generated from the main high-voltage PWB. Diagram of
high-voltage PWB due to PWBs
the contact failure.

voltage PWB PWB is faulty and the bias age PWB. voltage
current is not evenly out- PWB
put. Replace-
ment
(5-6) Irregular horizontal white spreads or spots appear on the image.

1 Checking the installation The settings do not match Change the setting of [Alti- U140 Exe-
environment the installation environ- tude Adjustment] to [1001- cution
ment (High altitude 2000m] (if not improved, fur-
exceeding 1,500m above ther change to [2001-
sea-level). 3000m].)
Execute U140 to set [Calibra-
tion] of the K to [On] at [AC
Calib] , and set the setting
value lower than 0 at [Magni-
fication]. (The lower limit
value: -10)
2 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Correct the main charger
roller contact contact does not ground. roller contact so that it
grounds securely.
3 Checking the drum unit The drum unit is not prop- Reinstall the drum unit. Drum Unit
and the developer unit erly installed, so it does not Replace-
ground the drum drive ment
shaft.
4 Checking the paper Paper with the high sur- Replace with the recom-
face resistance is used. mended paper.

(5-7) Horizontal uneven density
1 Checking the main charger The main charge roller Reattach the main charger Main
unit rotates irregularly. unit. Charger
Unit
Replace-
ment
2 Main charger unit replace- The charger cleaning roller Replace the main charger Main
ment is deformed. unit. Charger
Unit
Replace-
ment
3 Checking the developer The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
unit ends of the developer unit.
4 Developer unit replace- The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit. Developer
ment Unit
Replace-
ment
5 Checking the developer The conduction is not sta- Clean the developer bias
bias contact bilized due to the dirty contact.
developer bias contact.
6 Checking the developer The developer powder in Execute the developer Adjust-
unit the developer unit is deteri- refresh. If not repaired, ment/
orated. replace the developer unit. Mainte-
nance
Menu
7 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
shape of a streak are on Turn the drum heater on. ment/
both ends of the drum sur- Mainte-
face. nance
Menu
8 Drum unit replacement The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit. Drum Unit
down. Replace-
ment
9 LSU replacement The laser emission is Replace the LSU. LSU
uneven. Replace-
ment

1 Reinstalling the toner con- Toner is collected on one Sufficiently shake the toner Toner
tainer side. container and reinstall it to Container
the main unit. Replace-
ment
2 Checking the toner supply The toner supply opening Replace the toner container. Toner
opening does not open. Container
Replace-
ment
3 Checking the print pattern Toner is deteriorated due Execute "Developer Adjust-
to frequent low coverage Refresh", "Calibration" and ment/
printing. "Tone Curve Adjustment" in Mainte-
order. nance
Menu
4 Checking the drum unit The drum unit or the devel- Reinstall the drum unit and Drum Unit
and the developer unit oper unit is not properly the developer unit. / Devel-
attached, and so the developer Unit
oper roller does not con- Replace-
tact the drum. ment
5 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Correct the developer bias
bias contact is deformed. contact so that it grounds
securely.
6 Executing U140 The developer bias values Execute U140 and reset the U140 Exe-
that are fixed (except developer bias to the default cution
"Sleeve AC" and "Mag value.
DC") and are not changed
according to the Calibra-
tion are changed from the
default value.
7 Checking the developer The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
unit ends of the developer unit.
8 Developer unit replace- The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit. Developer
ment Unit
Replace-
ment
9 Checking the developer The toner sensor has a Execute Developer Refresh Developer
unit fault and so toner is not when the PG image output as Unit
supplied. test page is too light. Replace-
If not repaired, replace the ment
developer unit.
10 Checking the developer The developer bias is set When the Mag DC value at U464 Exe-
bias to low. U140 is less than the upper cution
limit value, change U464
[Target Value] > [Thickness]
from the default value to the
value between 0 and +30.
Then, execute Calibration at
U464.

11 Checking the drum unit The drum surface has con- Execute the drum refresh. If Drum Unit
and the developer unit densation or is worn down. not repaired, replace the Replace-
drum unit. ment
12 Checking the main charger The voltage applied to the Correct the main charger
roller contact main charger roller con- roller contact so that it
tact is too high. grounds securely.
13 Cleaning the eraser The eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.
14 Checking the eraser The eraser is faulty. Insert the unit all the way to Drum Unit
reconnect the connector. If Replace-
the issue is not resolved, ment
replace the drum unit.
connected. nection. Clean the terminals Diagram of
Engine PWB
PWB
Replace-
ment
17 Checking the LSU The LSU is dirty, or is Check the wire connection LSU
faulty. and replace the LSU. Replace-
ment
18 Checking the primary The primary transfer roller When the primary transfer Primary
transfer unit is not properly attached. roller comes off, replace the Transfer
primary transfer unit. Unit
Replace-
ment
19 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it
grounds securely.
20 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer belt is Replace the primary transfer Primary
replacement deteriorated. unit. Transfer
Unit
Replace-
ment
21 Checking the settings The setting value of the If the setting values at U106 U106 Exe-
transfer high-voltage PWB are not the default values, cution
is changed. reset them to the default val-
ues.

22 Checking the transfer high- The transfer high-voltage Check the connection to the Transfer
voltage PWB PWB is faulty. engine PWB, and then High-volt-
replace the transfer high-voltage PWB
age PWB if necessary. Replace-
ment
23 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Check the toner motor wire Electrical
connected or is faulty. connection, and then clean Diagram of
the terminals and insert the PWBs
connector all the way. When
the following wire is broken,
short-circuited or has a
ground fault, or the wire ter-
minals are peeled off, replace
the wire.
the engine PWB.

Mainte-
nance
Menu
2 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer roller Replace the primary transfer Primary
replacement is dirty or deformed. unit. Transfer
Unit
Replace-
ment

1 Checking the drum unit The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
and the developer unit Turn the drum heater on. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
down or has some Replace-
scratches. ment
3 Checking the developer The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
unit
4 Developer unit replace- The developer roller sur- Replace the developer unit. Developer
ment face is worn down or has Unit
scratches. Replace-
ment
(5-11) Color reproduction is poor.

1 Adjusting the image Calibration is not exe- Execute [Calibration] and Adjust-
cuted. [Tone Curve Adjustment] ment/
from [Adjustment/Mainte- Mainte-
nance] in the System Menu. nance
Menu

1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
densation. Turn the drum heater on. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
2 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU glass is dirty. Execute Laser Scanner Adjust-
ner Cleaning Cleaning. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
3 LSU replacement The LSU glass is deterio- Replace the LSU. LSU
rated. Replace-
ment

(5-13) The slight vertical black streaks appear at the both paper ends where are out
of the image area when using the SRA3 paper (paper width is 320mm).
1 Executing Developer Toner outside the devel- As a relief measure, execute Developer
Refresh oper area width (311mm) Developer Refresh. Refresh
of the developer roller flies
to the drum and is trans-
ferred. As a result, it
appears as the slight black
streaks on both ends (out
of the image area) of the
SRA3 paper which is wider
than the developer area
width.
2 Explanation for user Toner outside the devel- Explain user that this issue is
oper area width (311mm) the vertical black streaks out
of the developer roller flies of the image area, and it the
to the drum and is trans- complete solution is difficult.
ferred. As a result, it (This issue cannot be com-
appears as the slight black pletely solved by the devel-
streaks on both ends (out oper unit
of the image area) of the replacement.)"SRA3
SRA3 paper which is wider (450x320mm) is the paper
than the developer area width that can print "Mark line
width. for aligning the image posi-
tion on the design work or for
cutting paper" on the paper
margin. The vertical black
streaks appear out of the
marking line that it is out of
the image area. Therefore,
this issue is not image failure,
and the actual use has no
problem."

(5-14) Vertical black streaks or bands appear on the image.
Mainte-
nance
Menu
down. Replace-
ment
3 Checking the main charger The main charge roller sur- Clean the main charge roller Main
unit face is dirty in the shape of surface. Charger
a streak. Unit
Replace-
ment
4 Main charger unit replace- The main charge roller sur- Replace the main charger Main
ment face is deteriorated in the unit. Charger
streak shape. Unit
Replace-
ment
5 Checking the developer Foreign objects are on the Clean the developer roller. Developer
unit developer roller surface. Or, replace the developer unit Unit
if not repaired after cleaning. Replace-
ment

(5-15) Vertical uneven density
1 LSU replacement LSU emits the laser Replace the LSU. LSU
unevenly. (Inner mirror Replace-
comes off.) ment
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Reattach the primary trans-
transfer unit does not contact the drum. fer unit.
(The primary transfer roller
does not evenly press the
primary transfer belt to the
drum.)
3 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer belt Replace the primary transfer Primary
replacement contacts the drum unit. Transfer
unevenly. Unit
Replace-
ment
4 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has con- Execute Drum refresh. Adjust-
densation. Turn the drum heater on. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
5 Checking the main charger The main charge roller sur- Clean the main charger roller Main
unit face is dirty in the shape of surface. Replace the main Charger
a streak. charger unit if improvement is Unit
ment
down. Replace-
ment
7 Installing the cassette The cassette heater is not Install the cassette heater. Cassette
heater installed in the high humid- Heater
ity environment. Installation
8 Checking the developer The toner layer on the Execute the developer Adjust-
unit developer roller is uneven. refresh. If not repaired, ment/
replace the developer unit. Mainte-
nance
Menu

1 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU glass is dirty. Execute Laser Scanner Adjust-
ner Cleaning Cleaning. ment/
Mainte-
nance
Menu
2 Checking the developer Foreign objects are in the Replace the developer unit. Developer
unit developer unit. Unit
Replace-
ment
3 Checking the laser path There are foreign objects Remove foreign objects on
on the laser path of the the frame or sealing material
LSU. between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
4 Checking the drum unit The drum surface is dirty Execute the drum refresh. If Drum Unit
and the developer unit or has some scratches. not repaired, replace the Replace-
drum unit. ment
unit surface is dirty or has surface. Replace the main Charger
some scratches. charger unit if improvement is Unit
ment
6 Cleaning the eraser The eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.

7-2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1) Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feedshift guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)

Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
1 Opening and reclosing the The paper conveying unit Check if the vertical paper
paper conveying unit is not aligned to the other conveying section and the
exterior covers. horizontal paper conveying
section at the paper deck
cannot be opened by slightly
pulling back and force or right
and left. Then, open the right
cover (conveying unit) and
securely close it.
2 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not Open the right cover (convey-
right cover aligned to the other exte- ing unit) once, and close it
rior covers. firmly.
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough or the cutting by reversing the paper direc-
edge of loaded paper is tion. Correct or replace
damaged. paper if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If
you cannot get user agree-
ment about the paper
replacement, relocate the
leading end of paper and the
trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used Ask a user to use the speci- Basic
or foreign objects are on fied paper type. Or, remove Paper
the paper. the paper with foreign Specifica-
objects. tions
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
3 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.

(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the
paper curl
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs,
and the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the check if a piece of torn paper,
leading edge of the sheet foreign objects or the burrs
is bent. on the part do not exist on the
paper path, and remove
them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Reset the fuser temperature U161 Exe-
fuser temperature is to the default value at U161 cution
improper. when the paper curls.
(1-4) Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feedshift
guide
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign
piece of paper, etc. objects on the paper path and
remove the burrs on the parts
such as the guide or the actu-
ator.
2 Checking the guide The guide is dirty. If the guide or the separation
needles are dirty with toner or
paper dust, etc., clean them
with a dry cloth or a brush.
3 Checking the guide The guide does not prop- Check the guide, and remove
erly operate due to the any burrs. Also, if the guide
incorrect attachment or a does not operate smoothly
fault. manually, reattach the guide.
Then, replace the guide if it is
not fixed or if there is defor-
mation or frictional wear.
4 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not Execute U033 and check if U033 Exe-
operate properly. the guide can move smoothly cution
by the operation sounds. If
the guide does not operate
thoroughly or smoothly, reat-
tach the guide. And, replace
the solenoid if the issue is not
resolved.

(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette or the paper deck

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides width guides do not fit with guides or the MP paper width
the paper size. guides along the paper size
when the paper skew or the
paper creases occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the
enough. paper source. If a part of the
paper is bent, remove it.
3 (When feeding the paper The paper is not properly When the paper is loaded
from the large capacity loaded. over the guide in the deck of
feeder) Checking the the large capacity paper
paper feeder, reload the paper so
the paper edge is not on the
corner of the deck.
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the Basic
used. paper within the specifica- Paper
tions. Specifica-
tions

(1-7) Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys

1 Cleaning the roller The roller is dirty. Check if the conveying rollers
or the pulleys have no paper
dust, toner, foreign objects,
diameter change or frictional
wear and clean their surface.
If they have a diameter
change or frictional wear,
replace the parts.
2 Checking the clutch The clutch does not oper- After checking if the relative U030/
ate properly. motors operate properly by U240/
executing U030 and U240, U032 Exe-
check the clutch operation at cution
U032. If the clutch does not
operate properly, go to the
next step. (If the motor opera-
tion is faulty, perform the
proper measures depending
on the jam code.)
3 Checking the clutch The clutch is not properly Check if the connector is
attached, is not properly securely connected to the
connected, or the foreign clutch, the clutch is properly
objects adhere on the attached, and there are no
clutch. foreign objects on the clutch.
Then, perform the proper
measures if necessary.
4 Replacing the clutch The clutch is faulty. If the clutch does not operate
properly after reattaching and
reconnecting, or if the clutch
is rusted, replace it. (Use the
individual clutch or the unit
containing the clutch.)
5 Checking the bushing The bushing is dirty. Clean the rollersshaftorthe-
bushingwhentheloadisap-
pliedtotherotationoftheconvey
ingrollersduetodirtonthem.'
6 Checking the spring The spring comes off. Check if the spring came off,
or if it adequately presses the
roller or the pulley, and reat-
tach it if necessary.

(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
1 Checking the sensor The sensor is faulty. The actuator for the PF paper
feed sensor is caught. Also, if
it comes off, reattach the
actuator and its release
spring.
2 Checking the sensor The sensor is dirty. When the sensor surface or
photoreceptor black felt is
dirty by paper dust, etc.,
clean them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor is faulty. Check the sensor operation U031/
by executing U031 and U241, U241 Exe-
and clean or replace the sen- cution
sor if it does not operate
properly.
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

1 Checking the paper lead- The leading edge margin is When there is no margin from U402 Exe-
ing edge margin not enough. the paper leading edge to cution
4.0mm(+1.5/-0.0mm), and,
when there is no check line
(fuser jam) on 20mm(+/-
1mm) from the paper leading
edge of the test pattern that is
output in U034,adjust the
leading margin at U402.
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is misde- Relocate the paper width
guides tected. guides or the MP paper width
guides along the paper size
to properly detect the paper
size.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not If the media type is not Original /
properly set. matched to the actual paper Paper Set-
weight (the paper jam occurs tings
due to the paper separation
failure), set the media type at
[System Menu/Counter] key
> [Common Settings] > "Org./
Paper Set.".

(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
1 Checking the ground The static electricity accu- When the main unit is
mulates. installed in the low humidity
environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates
on the conveying guide dur-
ing the continuous printing,
check if the discharge sheet
in the eject section and the
metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded
securely. If necessary, reat-
tach the parts.
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette
are always damp.)
1 Checking the paper stor- Papers have been stored Ask users to store paper in a
age place in the improper place. dry place.
2 Installing the cassette The paper is damp. Install the cassette heater Cassette
heater and set the mode by execut- Heater
ing U327. Installation

(2) Paper misfeed detection
(2-1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper misfeed
message on the operation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the
front cover or paper conveying cover.
The locations are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred.
Jam location indication

K
M
Q L
O J H N
P P H N
N N
P P H
H
H G
A
H
B F
E C
R I
S D
1. Shows the location of a paper jam.

2. Shows the previous step.
3. Shows the next step.
4. Shows the removal procedure.
Figure 7-1
A. Misfeed in the cassette 1 K. Misfeed inside the mail box paper

B. Misfeed in the cassette 2 L. Misfeed inside the inner finisher
C. Misfeed in the cassette 3 (550-sheet × 1) M. Paper jam at the document processor
D. Misfeed in the cassette 3 (1750-sheet × 2) N. Misfeed inside the 1000-sheet finisher
C. Misfeed in the cassette 4 (550-sheet × 1) O. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (inner) finisher
E. Misfeed in the cassette 4 (1750-sheet × 2) P. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (Tray A) finisher
F. Misfeed in the cassette 5 (side feeder) Q. Misfeed inside the 4000-sheet (Tray B)finisher
G. Misfeed in MP tray R. Center fold unit
H. Misfeed inside the right cover 1 S. Center fold tray
I. Misfeed inside the right cover 2
J. Misfeed inside the bridge conveying

(2-2) Paper misfeed detection condition
Main unit + Optional unit1
K M
Q
J
P Q
P O O
P
H
P
N F
A
H
B
R
I
E C
Figure 7-2

Main unit + Optional unit
N N L
N
Q
N O
P G
N
A H
I
E C
Figure 7-3
Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J0000 - J4002 T J4302 V J4912 J J6200 P J7700 /
J0100 - J4003 T J4303 V J4913 J J6210 P J7710 /

Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM Error JAM
Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi- Code Posi-
tion tion tion tion tion tion
J0101 - J4004 T J4304 V J4914 J J6300 P J7800 K
J0104 - J4005 / J4305 / J4915 / J6301 N J7810 K
J0105 - J4012 U J4309 V J4918 J J6310 P J7900 P
J0106 - J4013 U J4311 V J4919 J J6311 N J7901 N
J0107 - J4014 U J4312 V J5001 J J6400 / J7902 L
J0110 - J4015 / J4313 V J5002 J J6401 / J9000 /
J0111 - J4101 U J4314 V J5003 J J6402 / J9001 /
J0114 - J4102 U J4315 / J5004 J J6410 P J9002 /
J0212 - J4103 U J4319 V J5005 / J6411 N J9004 M
J0213 - J4104 U J4401 / J5008 J J6412 L J9005 /
J0300 - J4105 / J4402 / J5009 J J6500 / J9006 /
J0501 A J4108 U J4403 / J5011 J J6510 P J9007 /
J0502 B J4109 U J4404 / J5012 J J6511 N J9008 /
J0503 C J4111 J J4405 / J5013 J J6512 L J9009 M
J0504 D J4112 J J4409 / J5014 J J6600 / J9010 -
J0508 V J4113 J J4701 / J5015 / J6610 / J9011 -
J0509 G J4114 J J4702 / J5018 J J6710 / J9110 M
J0511 P J4115 / J4703 / J5019 J J6810 P J9200 M
J0512 T J4118 J J4704 / J6000 O J6811 N J9210 M
J0513 T J4119 J J4705 / J6001 N J6812 L J9300 M
J0514 T J4201 V J4709 / J6002 L J6910 P J9310 M
J0518 U J4202 V J4711 / J6012 - J6911 N J9400 M
J0519 U J4203 V J4712 / J6020 - J6912 L J9410 M
J0523 / J4204 V J4713 / J6021 - J7000 P J9600 M
J0524 / J4205 / J4714 / J6041 - J7001 N J9610 M
J0533 / J4208 / J4715 / J6050 / J7002 L
J0534 / J4209 V J4719 / J6060 / J7100 /
J0545 / J4211 J J4901 P J6070 / J7110 /
J0555 / J4212 J J4902 P J6080 / J7200 /
J1403 C J4213 J J4903 P J6100 D J7210 /
J1404 I J4214 J J4904 P J6101 N J7300 /
J1413 I J4215 / J4905 / J6102 L J7310 /
J1414 I J4218 J J4908 P J6110 P J7400 /
J1604 I J4219 J J4909 P J6111 N J7500 /
J1614 I J4301 V J4911 J J6112 L J7600 /

(3) Jam Codes
Error code Contents note

J0000 Power ON jam
J0107 Fuser temperature stabiliza-
tion time-out
J0100/J0101/J0104/ Paper jam caused by the
J0105/J0106 firmware factor
J0110/J0111/J0114 Cover open detection J0110: Right cover open detection (Right cover
switch), J0111: Front cover open detection (Front
cover switch), J0114: Bridge cover open detection
(BR cover switch)
J0212/J0213 PF right cover open detection
J0300 Paper eject completion non- Object: Main units with the 4000-sheet / 1000-
detection jam sheet finisher
J0508 No paper feed from the
duplex section
J0509 No paper feed from the MP
tray
J0501/J0502/J0503/ No paper feed from cassette Condition: The paper arrives at the registration
J0504 1-4 section
J0501/J0502/J0503/ No paper feed from cassette Condition: The paper does not arrive at the regis-
J0504 1-4 tration section
J0501/J0502/J0503/ No paper feed from cassette Condition: The paper does not arrive at the paper
J0504 1-4 feed roller.
J0501/J0502/J0503/ No paper feed from cassette Condition: The paper stops at the paper feed
J0504 1-4 roller.
J0501/J0502/J0503/ No paper feed from cassette Advance checkpoints at no paper feed from the
J0504 1-4 cassette
J0511 Multi-feeding from cassette 1
J0518 Multi-feeding from the duplex
section
J0519 Multi-feeding from the MP
tray
J0512/J0513/J0514 Cassette multi-feeding jam
J0523/J0524 No paper feed from the large
capacity paper feeder
J0533/J0534 Multi-feeding from the large
capacity paper feeder
J0545 No paper feed from the side
feeder
J0555 Multi-feeding from the side
feeder

J1403/J1404 PF paper feed sensor 2 non-
arrival jam
J1413/J1414 PF paper feed sensor 2 stay
jam
J1604 PF paper feed sensor 3 non-
arrival jam
J1614 PF paper feed sensor 3 stay
jam
J4002/J4003/J4004/ Registration sensor non-
J4005 arrival jam
J4012/J4013/J4014/ Registration sensor stay jam
J4015
J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor non-
J4104/J4105/J4108/ arrival jam
J4109
J4101/J4102/J4103/ Belt winding sensor stay jam
J4104/J4105/J4108/
J4109
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4204/J4205/J4208/ leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4204/J4205/J4208/ leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4203/ Fuser sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam before the fuser unit
J4204/J4205/J4208/
J4209
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the eject unit
J4214/J4215/J4218/
J4219
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam at the eject section that
J4214/J4215/J4218/ occurs when feeding the LetterR or the Legal size
J4219 paper in the main unit with the punch unit for the
inner finisher (For inch models)
J4211/J4212/J4213/ Fuser sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4214/J4215/J4218/ leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
J4219
J4301/J4302/J4303/ Duplex sensor 1 non-arrival
J4304/J4305/J4309 jam
J4311/J4312/J4313/ Duplex sensor 1 stay jam
J4314/J4315/J4319
J4401/J4402/J4403/ Duplex sensor 2 non-arrival
J4404/J4405/J4409 jam
J4701/J4702/J4703/ Eject switchback sensor non-
J4704/J4705/J4709 arrival jam

J4711/J4712/J4713/ Eject switchback sensor stay
J4714/J4715/J4719 jam
J4901/J4902/J4903/ BR conveying sensor 1 non- Object: Main units with the 4000-sheet / 1000-
J4904/J4905/J4908/ arrival jam sheet finisher
J4909
J4919
J5009
J5011/J5012/J5013/ BR conveying sensor 2 stay Object: Main units with the 4000-sheet / 1000-
J5014/J5015/J5018/ jam sheet finisher
J5019
J6000/J6001/J6002 DF paper entry failure jam Object: J6000 (4000-sheet finisher), J6001
(1000-sheet finisher), J6002 (Inner finisher)
J6012 Inner DF open jam Object: Inner finisher
J6020/J6021 DF front cover open jam Object: J6020 (4000-sheet finisher), J6021
(1000-sheet finisher)
J6041 DF top cover open jam Object: 1000-sheet finisher
J6050 BF tray open jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6060 MB cover open jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6070 BF unit open jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6080 BF left cover open jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6100/J6101/J6102 DF paper entry sensor non- Object: J6100 (4000-sheet finisher), J6101
arrival jam (1000-sheet finisher), J6102 (Inner finisher)
J6110/J6111/J6112 DF paper entry sensor stay Object: J6110 (4000-sheet finisher), J6111 (1000-
jam sheet finisher), J6112 (Inner finisher)
J6200 DF sub eject sensor non- Object: 4000-sheet finisher
arrival jam
J6210 DF sub eject sensor stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6300/J6301 DF middle sensor non-arrival Object: J6300 (4000-sheet finisher), J6301
jam (1000-sheet finisher)
J6310/J6311 DF middle sensor stay jam Object: J6310 (4000-sheet finisher), J6311 (1000-
sheet finisher)
J6400/J6401/J6402 DF eject paper sensor non- Object: J6400 (4000-sheet finisher), J6401
arrival jam (1000-sheet finisher), J6402 (Inner finisher)
J6410/J6411/J6412 DF eject paper sensor stay Object: J6410 (4000-sheet finisher), J6411 (1000-
jam sheet finisher), J6412 (Inner finisher)
J6500 DF eject paper sensor non- Object: 4000-sheet finisher
arrival jam when ejecting the
paper stack

J6510/J6511/J6512 DF eject paper sensor stay Object: J6510 (4000-sheet finisher), J6511 (1000-
jam when ejecting the paper sheet finisher), J6512 (Inner finisher)
stack
J6600 DF drum sensor non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J6610 DF drum sensor stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J6710 DF drum sensor stay jam dur- Object: 4000-sheet finisher
ing paper conveying into the
BF unit
J6810/J6811/J6812 Front DF side registration jam Object: J6810 (4000-sheet finisher), J6811 (1000-
sheet finisher), J6812 (Inner finisher)
J6910/J6911/J6912 Rear DF side registration jam Object: J6910 (4000-sheet finisher), J6911 (1000-
sheet finisher), J6912 (Inner finisher)
J7000/J7001/J7002 DF staple jam Object: J7000 (4000-sheet finisher), J7001
J7100 BF paper entry sensor non- Object: 4000-sheet finisher
arrival jam
J7110 BF paper entry sensor stay Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J7200 BF eject sensor non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J7210 BF eject sensor stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J7300 BF eject sensor non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam at tri-folding
J7310 BF eject sensor stay jam at Object: 4000-sheet finisher
tri-folding
J7400 Upper BF side registration Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J7500 Lower BF side registration Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J7600 BF staple jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J7700 BF vertical conveying sensor Object: 4000-sheet finisher
non-arrival jam
J7710 BF vertical conveying sensor Object: 4000-sheet finisher
stay jam
J7800 Mail Box ejection non-arrival Object: 4000-sheet finisher
jam
J7810 Mail Box eject stay jam Object: 4000-sheet finisher
J7900/J7901/J7902 DF paddle jam Object: J7900 (4000-sheet finisher), J7901
J9000 No original feed from the DP
J9001 DP small size original jam

J9002 Paper jam detected when
starting the paper conveying
J9004 DP registration sensor non- Object: Automatic duplex DP
arrival jam during the original
reversing
J9005 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP and automatic duplex DP
with the DP feed belt
J9006 DP eject sensor non-arrival Object: Automatic duplex DP with the DP feed
jam during the original revers- belt
ing
J9007 DP eject sensor stay jam dur- Object: Automatic duplex DP with the DP feed
ing the original reversing belt
J9008 No original feed from the DP Object: Dual scan DP
(Original is B6 size or smaller)
J9009 DP original jam caused by Object: Dual scan DP and automatic duplex DP
the image scanning with the DP feed belt
J9010 Document processor open
detection
J9011 DP top cover open detection
J9110 DP feed sensor multi-feeding
jam
J9200 DP registration sensor non- Object: Automatic duplex DP
arrival jam
J9210 DP registration sensor stay Object: Automatic duplex DP with the DP feed
jam belt
J9300 DPCIS non-arrival jam Object: Dual scan DP
J9310 DP backside timing sensor Object: Dual scan DP
stay jam
J9400 DP timing sensor non-arrival
jam
J9410 DP timing sensor stay jam
J9600 DP eject sensor non-arrival Object: Dual scan DP and automatic duplex DP
jam with the DP feed belt
J9610 DP eject sensor stay jam Object: Dual scan DP and automatic duplex DP
with the DP feed belt

Content of Jam Code
J0000: Power ON jam
The power was turned on while the unspecified conveying sensor turns on.

ator.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. Clean the registration sen-
sor, the paper conveying sen-
sor, the eject switchback
sensor and the duplex sen-
sors.
3 Checking the connection The sensor is not properly Reconnect the registration
connected. sensor, the paper conveying
sensor, the eject switchback
sors.
4 Replacing the sensor The sensor is faulty. Replace the registration sen-
sor, the paper conveying sen-
sor, the eject switchback
sor.
J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out

The fuser temperature does not achieve to the paper feed-able temperature within the specified time.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove a piece of paper
activate properly. from each conveying section
and check the sensors. Then,
turn the power switch and the
main power switch off . After
5s passes, turn the main
power switch and the power
switch on.
2 Checking the installation The electric power supply Plug the power cord into
environment fluctuates or the electric another wall outlet.
voltage reduces.
3 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
type, paper size) do not Settings
match.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
properly activate. latest version. Upgrade

5 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heater is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
Replace-
ment
J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the firmware factor

The firmware does not properly activate.

switch on.
J0110/J0111/J0114: Cover open detection

J0110: Right cover open detection (Right cover switch), J0111: Front cover open
detection (Front cover switch), J0114: Bridge cover open detection (BR cover switch)
The cover-open is detected during print.

1 Checking the cover The covers are not fitted. Check if the cover is securely
closed, and reattach it if nec-
essary. Fix or replace it if it is
deformed.
2 Checking the cover switch The cover switch is not Reconnect the cover switch.
properly connected.
3 Checking the cover switch The cover switch does not Reattach the cover switch if it
operate properly. is off.
4 Replacing the cover switch The cover switch is faulty. Replace the cover switch.
J0212/J0213: PF right cover open detection

The PF right cover open is detected when printing paper fed from cassette 3 or 4.

1 Checking the PF right The PF right cover is not Check if the PF right cover is
cover aligned to the other exte- securely closed, and reat-
rior covers. tach it if necessary. Fix or
replace it if it is deformed.

2 Checking the PF right The PF right cover switch Reconnect the PF right cover
cover switch is not properly connected. switch.
3 Checking the PF right The PF right cover switch Reattach the PF right cover
cover switch does not operate properly. switch if it is off.
4 Checking the PF right The PF right cover switch Replace the PF right cover
cover switch does not operate properly. switch if it is faulty.
J0300: Paper eject completion non-detection jam

Object: Main units with the 4000-sheet / 1000-sheet finisher
The paper eject completion is not communicated from the finisher.

switch on.
2 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Reconnect between the main Electrical
connected. PWB and the DF main PWB. Diagram of
PWBs
4 Replacing the DF main The DF main PWB is Replace the DF main PWB. DF Main
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

The registration sensor is not turned on after turning on the duplex clutch (The paper switchbacks).

1 Performing the prior stan- There is a mechanical Perform the prior standard Prior Stan-
dard check items cause such as the dirty check items. dard
guide, etc. Check
Items
ator.
3 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper if it is
damp.

4 Checking the duplex sen- The duplex sensor does Reattach the duplex sensor
sor not operate properly. and reconnect the wire.
Then, replace it if it is not
fixed.
5 Checking the duplex clutch The duplex clutch does not Reattach the duplex clutch
operate properly. and reconnect the wire.
fixed.
6 Checking the paper feed The drive from the paper Reattach the paper convey- Convey-
motor feed motor is not transmit- ing unit. ing Unit
ted to the duplex roller. Replace-
ment
7 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Reconnect the wire between Electrical
connected. the feed drive PWB and the Diagram of
engine PWB. PWBs
8 Checking the feed drive The wires on the feed drive Reconnect the connectors on Electrical
PWB PWB are not properly con- the feed drive PWB wires. Diagram of
nected, or the feed drive Then, fix or replace the wires PWBs
PWB is faulty. if they are pinched by the
other part or if they have any
damage. When the issue is
not resolved, replace the feed
drive PWB.
9 Checking the engine PWB The wires on the engine Reconnect the connectors on Engine
PWB are not properly con- the engine PWB. Then, fix or PWB
nected, or the engine PWB replace the wires if they are Replace-
is faulty. pinched by the other part or if ment
the engine PWB.
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

The MP conveying sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray.

1 Checking the MP bottom The MP bottom plate is not When the MP bottom plate
plate properly attached. does not lift up, reattach it.
2 Checking the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not Reattach and reconnect the
operate properly. MP lift motor when the MP
bottom plate is not lifted up.
Replace the MP lift motor if it
is not fixed.

3 Checking the MP position- The MP positioning switch Check the connection of the
ing switch does not operate properly. MP positioning switch and
reattach the switch when the
MP bottom plate is not lifted
up. Replace the MP position
switch if it is not fixed.
4 Checking the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
5 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
6 Checking the paper The paper is curled down- Correct or replace paper. If
ward or wavy. you cannot get user agree-
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions
8 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with for-
paper. eign objects.
ator.
10 Checking the MP paper The paper conveying per- Clean the MP paper feed MP Feed
feed roller formance of the MP feed roller surface. If worn down, Roller
roller is not enough. replace it. Replace-
ment
11 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not The actuator or the spring is
the spring operate properly. deformed. If the actuator
does not properly operate,
replace it.
12 Checking the registration The registration sensor Reattach the registration sen-
sensor does not operate properly. sor and reconnect the con-
nector. Replace it if it is not
fixed.
13 Checking the MP convey- The MP conveying sensor Reattach the MP conveying
ing sensor does not operate properly. sensor and reconnect the
connector. Replace it if it is
not fixed.

14 Checking the MP convey- The MP conveying clutch Reattach the MP conveying
ing clutch does not operate properly. clutch and reconnect the con-
nector. Then, replace them if
they are not fixed.
engine PWB. PWBs
16 Replacing the feed drive The feed drive PWB is Replace the feed drive PWB.
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment
J0501/J0502/J0503/J0504: No paper feed from cassette 1 - 4

Condition: The paper arrives at the registration section
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the paper leading edge comes out
from the cassette but the next sensor does not turn on.

1 (When the paper skew The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
occurs) Relocating the width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
paper width guides the paper size. paper size.
2 (When the paper skew The actuator does not The actuator or the spring is
occurs) Checking the actu- operate properly. deformed. If the actuator
ator and the spring does not properly operate,
replace it.
3 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with Reattach the conveying
occurs) Checking the con- the conveying guide. guide. Remove the burrs on
veying guide the conveying guide surface
or replace the conveying
guide if there are burrs on it.
4 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign
occurs) Checking the piece of paper, etc. objects on the paper path and
paper path remove the burrs on the parts
ator.
5 (When there is a paper The registration sensor Reattach the registration sen-
loop mark) Checking the does not operate properly. sor and reconnect the con-
registration sensor nector. Replace it if it is not
fixed.
6 (When the paper is fed The PF paper feed sensor Reattach the PF paper feed
from cassette 2-4) Check- does not operate properly. sensor and reattach the con-
ing the PF paper feed sen- nector. Replace it if it is not
sor fixed.

engine PWB. PWBs
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.
10 Checking the main PWB The wires on the main Reconnect the connectors on Main PWB
PWB are not properly con- the main PWB. Then, fix or Replace-
nected or the main PWB is replace the wires if they are ment
faulty. pinched by the other part or if
PWB.

Condition: The paper does not arrive at the registration section
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the paper leading edge comes out
from the cassette but the next sensor does not turn on.

1 Checking the paper feed The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller Pickup
roller the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, Pulley &
enough. replace it. Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
2 Checking the pressure The press-release lever Reattach the pressure
release lever and the and the retard holder are release lever and the retard
retard holder attached oppositely. holder.
3 Checking the middle clutch The middle roller does not Reattach the middle clutch
rotate due to no engage- and reconnect the connector.
ment of the middle clutch. Then, replace them if they
are not fixed.

replace it.
ator.
8 (When the paper is fed The PF paper feed sensor Reattach the PF paper feed
from cassette 2-4) Check- does not operate properly. sensor and reattach the con-
ing the PF paper feed sen- nector. Replace it if it is not
sor fixed.
engine PWB. PWBs
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.
PWB.

Condition: The paper does not arrive at the paper feed roller.
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the paper leading edge does not
come out from the cassette, or the next sensor does not turn on.

guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
2 Checking the pressure The conveying function of Reattach the spring for the Pickup
spring for the pickup pulley the pickup pulley is not pickup pulley if it comes off. If Pulley &
enough. deformed, replace it. Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
3 Checking the pickup pulley The conveying function of Clean the pickup pulley sur- Pickup
the pickup pulley is not face. If worn down, replace it Pulley &
enough. Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the retard guide The retard guide is hooked Remove the retard guide.
with the other part, so the Then, reattach it while the
load increases. cassette is inserted into the
main unit. Or, replace the
retard guide.
5 Checking the paper feed The paper feed roller does Reattach the paper feed shaft
shaft and the pin not rotate because the and the pin. Then, replace
shaft or the pin for the them if not repaired.
paper feed roller are not
properly attached.
6 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch is Reattach the paper feed
clutch not connected, so the clutch and reconnect the
paper feed roller does not wire. Then, replace them if
rotate. they are not fixed.
7 Removing the foreign The bottom plate does not Remove a piece of paper or
objects and checking the ascent till the upper limit foreign objects. Check if the
operation of the actuator position while the lift sen- actuator of the lift sensor is
sor turns on. switched to on when the bot-
tom plate is lifted up.
8 Checking the gear The drive from the paper Replace the parts if there is a
feed motor is not transmit- fault such as deformation in
ted. the gear, etc. inside the drive
unit.

Condition: The paper stops at the paper feed roller.
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on
since the paper stops at the paper feed roller.

ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment
3 Checking the pressure The press-release lever Reattach the pressure
release lever and the and the retard holder are release lever and the retard
retard holder attached oppositely. holder.
4 Checking the clutch The clutches do not Reattach the clutches related
engage so the paper feed to paper feeding and recon-
roller does not rotate. nect their wires. Then,
replace them if they are not
fixed. (Cassette 1: Middle
clutch, Cassette 2 - 4: PF
paper feed clutches)

Advance checkpoints at no paper feed from the cassette
After the paper feed clutch turns on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the next sensor does not turn on
after passing the certain time.

tion
bent.
upside down.

tions. Specifica-
tions
J0511: Multi-feeding from cassette 1

The registration sensor does not turn off.

tion
bent.
4 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper, or install Cassette
the cassette heater. Heater
Installation
5 Checking the retard pulley The paper separation force Clean the retard pulley sur- Retard
of the retard pulley is not face. If worn down, replace Pulley
enough. the retard pulley. Replace-
ment
6 Checking the retard pres- The retard pressure spring Reattach the retard pressure
sure spring comes off. spring.
7 (When there is a paper The registration clutch Reattach the registration U032 Exe-
loop mark) Checking the does not engage and so clutch and reinsert the con- cution
registration clutch the registration roller does nector into it. Then, check the
not rotate. operation by executing U032.
If it does not operate properly,
replace it.
drive PWB.

the engine PWB.
J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the duplex section.

tion
bent.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy or curls Correct or replace paper. If
due to the moisture. you cannot get user agree-
upside down.
5 (When the paper is at the The registration clutch Reattach the registration U032 Exe-
registration section and the does not engage and so clutch and reinsert the con- cution
paper loop mark is on the the registration roller does nector into it. Then, check the
paper) Checking the regis- not rotate. operation by executing U032.
tration clutch If it does not operate properly,
replace it.
6 Checking the duplex sen- The duplex sensor does Reattach the duplex sensor
sor not operate properly. and reconnect the wire.
fixed.
7 Checking the duplex clutch The duplex clutch does not Reattach the duplex clutch
operate properly. and reconnect the wire.
fixed.
8 Checking the paper feed The drive from the paper Reattach the paper feed
motor feed motor is not transmit- motor and the drive compo-
ted to the duplex roller. nents.
engine PWB. PWBs

drive PWB.
the engine PWB.
PWB.
J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray

The MP conveying sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the MP tray.

tion
bent.
4 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If
upside down.
5 Checking the MP feed The paper fanning is not Clean the MP feed roller and MP Feed
roller and the MP bottom enough. the MP bottom pad. Or, Roller
pad replace them. Replace-
ment

replace it.
7 Checking the MP convey- The MP conveying sensor Reattach the MP conveying
ing sensor does not operate properly. sensor and reconnect the
connector. Replace it if it is
not fixed.
8 Checking the MP convey- The MP conveying clutch Reattach the MP conveying
ing clutch always turns on. clutch and reconnect the con-
nector. Then, replace them if
they are not fixed.
9 Checking the middle clutch The middle clutch always Reattach the middle clutch
turns on. and reconnect the connector.
Then, replace them if they
are not fixed.
engine PWB. PWBs
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.
J0512/J0513/J0514: Cassette multi-feeding jam

The PF paper feed sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2-4.

tion
bent.

4 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper, or install Cassette
the cassette heater. Heater
Installation
5 Checking the retard pulley The paper separation force Clean the retard pulley sur- Retard
of the retard pulley is not face. If worn down, replace Pulley
enough. the retard pulley. Replace-
ment
6 Checking the retard pres- The retard pressure spring Reattach the retard pressure
sure spring comes off. spring.
7 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed sensor Reattach the PF paper feed
feed sensor does not operate properly. sensor and reattach the con-
fixed.
8 Checking the installation The grounding between Check the continuity between
the main unit and the the main unit and the paper
paper feeder is unavail- feeder and reconnect the
able. drawer connector.
9 Checking the middle clutch The middle clutch does not Reattach the middle clutch
operate properly. and reconnect the connector.
are not fixed.
10 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch Reattach the paper feed
clutch does not operate properly. clutch and reconnect the
wire. Then, replace them if
they are not fixed.
engine PWB. PWBs
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.

PWB.
J0523/J0524: No paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder

The PF paper feed sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the PF paper feed clutch
turned on during paper feed from the large capacity paper feeder.

tion
bent.
4 Checking the PF retard The paper separation force Clean the PF retard pulley Retard
pulley of the PF retard pulley is surface. If it is worn down, Pulley
insufficient. replace it. Replace-
ment
5 Checking the PF retard The PF retard spring Reattach the PF retard
spring comes off. spring.
6 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Reattach the PF horizontal
conveying sensor and the ing sensor or the PF verti- conveying sensor or the PF
PF vertical conveying sen- cal conveying sensor does vertical conveying sensor and
sor not operate properly. reconnect the connectors.
are not fixed.
7 Checking the installation The ground between the Check the continuity between
main unit and the large the main unit and the large
capacity paper feeder is capacity paper feeder, and
not secured. reconnect the drawer con-
nector.
8 Checking PF paper feed PF paper feed clutch 1 or 2 Reattach PF paper feed
clutches 1 and 2 does not operate properly. clutches 1 and 2 and recon-
nect the connectors. Then,
fixed.

9 Checking the PF main The wires on the PF main Reconnect the connectors on PF Main
PWB PWB are not properly con- the PF main PWB. At that PWB
nected, or the PF main time, fix or replace the wires if Replace-
PWB is faulty. they are pinched by the other ment
part or have any damage.
resolved, replace the PF
main PWB.
the engine PWB.
J0533/J0534: Multi-feeding from the large capacity paper feeder

The PF paper feed sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on during paper feed
from the large capacity paper feeder.

tion
bent.
ment
6 Checking the PF horizontal The PF horizontal convey- Reattach the PF horizontal
conveying sensor and the ing sensor or the PF verti- conveying sensor or the PF
PF vertical conveying sen- cal conveying sensor does vertical conveying sensor and
sor not operate properly. reconnect the connectors.
are not fixed.
7 Checking the installation The ground between the Check the continuity between
main unit and the large the main unit and the large
capacity paper feeder is capacity paper feeder, and
not secured. reconnect the drawer con-
nector.

8 Checking PF paper feed PF paper feed clutch 1 or 2 Reattach PF paper feed
clutches 1 and 2 does not operate properly. clutches 1 and 2 and recon-
nect the connectors. Then,
fixed.
main PWB.
the engine PWB.
J0545: No paper feed from the side feeder

The PF paper feed sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the paper feed clutch turned
on during paper feed from the side feeder.

tion
bent.
ment
feed sensor is not properly attached or sensor and reattach the con-
the wire is not properly nector. Replace it if it is not
connected. Or, the wire is fixed.
faulty.

7 Checking the installation The ground between the Attach the side feeder rail Side
main unit and the side (bundled with the side feeder) Feeder
feeder is not secured. to the main unit. Installa-
tion Guide
8 Checking the PF paper The PF paper feed clutch Reattach PF paper feed
feed clutch does not operate properly. clutch and reattach the con-
fixed.
main PWB.
the engine PWB.
J0555: Multi-feeding from the side feeder

The PF paper feed sensor does not turn off.

tion
bent.
ment
faulty.

7 Checking the installation The ground between the Attach the side feeder rail Side
main unit and the side (bundled with the side feeder) Feeder
feeder is not secured. to the main unit. Installa-
tion Guide
feed clutch does not operate properly. clutch and reattach the con-
fixed.
main PWB.
the engine PWB.
J1403/J1404: PF paper feed sensor 2 non-arrival jam

PF paper feed sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 3 or 4.

ator.
2 (When the paper skew The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller Pickup
occurs) Checking the the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, Pulley &
paper feed roller enough. replace it. Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
replace it.

6 (When the paper convey- The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller Pickup
ing was delayed) Checking the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, Pulley &
the paper feed roller enough. replace it. Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
tion
bent.
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions
faulty.
nected. Or, the wires or the time, fix or replace the wires if Replace-
PF main PWB are faulty. they are pinched by the other ment
main PWB.

J1413/J1414: PF paper feed sensor 2 stay jam
PF paper feed sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 3 or 4.

ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment
replace it.
6 Checking the PF cover The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is
closed securely. Replace it if
it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
tion
bent.
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions

faulty.
feed clutch does not engage or is not clutch and reattach the con-
properly attached. The nector. Replace it if it is not
wire is not properly con- fixed.
nected or it is faulty.
main PWB.
J1604: PF paper feed sensor 3 non-arrival jam

The PF paper feed sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 4.

ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment
replace it.

tion
bent.
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions
faulty.
main PWB.
J1614: PF paper feed sensor 3 stay jam

The PF paper feed sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 4.

ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment

replace it.
6 (When the paper convey- The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is
ing was delayed) Checking closed securely. Replace it if
the PF cover it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
tion
bent.
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions
faulty.
main PWB.

J4002/J4003/J4004/J4005: Registration sensor non-arrival jam
The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 2-4 or the side feeder.

ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment
replace it.
6 (When the paper convey- The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller Pickup
ing was delayed) Checking the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, Pulley &
the paper feed roller enough. replace it. Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
7 (When the paper convey- The PF cover is deformed. Check if the PF cover is
ing was delayed) Checking closed securely. Replace it if
the PF cover it cannot be closed due to
deformation.
tion
bent.
upside down.

tions. Specifica-
tions
13 Setting the paper loop The paper is not suffi- Set the paper loop amount at U051 Exe-
amount ciently pinched between U051. cution
the registration rollers.
14 Checking the registration The registration sensor Reattach the registration sen-
sensor does not operate properly. sor and reconnect the con-
fixed.
15 Checking the registration The registration clutch Reattach the registration U032 Exe-
clutch does not operate properly. clutch and reinsert the con- cution
nector into it. Then, check the
operation by executing U032.
replace it.
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.
PWB.

J4012/J4013/J4014/J4015: Registration sensor stay jam
The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 2-4 or the side feeder.

ator.
replace it.
5 (When multifeed occurs) The paper fanning is not Clean the paper feed roller Retard
Checking the paper feed enough. and the retard pulley. Or, Pulley
roller and the retard pulley replace them. Replace-
ment
6 Checking the conveying The paper conveying force Clean or replace the convey-
rollers of the conveying rollers is ing rollers.
insufficient.
7 (When multifeed occurs) The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
Reloading the paper crushed. by reversing the paper direc-
tion
bent.
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions

12 Checking the registration The registration sensor is Reattach the registration sen-
sensor not properly attached or sor and reconnect the con-
faulty.
clutch does not engage or is not clutch and reinsert the con- cution
properly attached. Or, the nector into it. Then, check the
wire is not properly con- operation by executing U032.
nected or it is faulty. If it does not operate properly,
replace it.
PWB.
J4101/J4102/J4103/J4104/J4105/J4108/J4109: Belt winding sensor non-arrival jam

The belt winding sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex sec-
tion or the MP tray.

guide, etc. Check
Items
2 Setting the paper loop The paper is not suffi- Set the paper loop amount at U051 Exe-
amount ciently pinched between U051. cution
the registration rollers.
3 Checking the belt winding The belt winding sensor Reattach the belt winding U031 Exe-
sensor does not operate properly. sensor and reinsert the con- cution
nector into it, and check the
operation at U031. If it does
not operate properly, replace
it.
clutch does not operate properly. clutch and reinsert the con- cution
nector into it. Then, check the
operation by executing U032.
replace it.

5 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Be sure to close the right
transfer roller and the drive roller does not rotate prop- cover so that the drive of the
components erly. registration roller is transmit-
ted into the secondary trans-
fer roller. Also, replace when
the secondary transfer roller
is deformed, drive gear gets
damaged or bushing is worn
out.
6 Checking the drive compo- The drive is not transmitted Repair the paper feed motor
nents to the registration roller. drive gears that transmit drive
to the registration roller.
7 Checking the connection The connector at the paper Reconnect the connector
conveying unit that con- between the paper conveying
nects to the main unit is unit and the main unit.
not properly connected.
(Loose connection, etc.)
8 Checking the connection The connector is not prop- Reconnect the wire between Electrical
erly connected. the feed drive PWB and the Diagram of
engine PWB. PWBs
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment
J4101/J4102/J4103/J4104/J4105/J4108/J4109: Belt winding sensor stay jam

The belt winding sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since the registration sensor turns on
during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex section or the MP tray.

guide, etc. Check
Items
2 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with a If a piece of paper, the foreign
occurs) Checking the piece of paper, etc. objects are on the paper
paper path path, or if the burrs are on the
guide, remove them.

5 Cleaning the transfer sep- The paper rolls up to the Clean the transfer separation
aration needles primary transfer belt since needles.
the transfer separation
needles are dirty.
6 Checking the belt winding The belt winding sensor Reattach the belt winding U031 Exe-
sensor does not operate properly. sensor and reinsert the con- cution
nector into it, and check the
operation at U031. If it does
it.
7 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Be sure to close the right
transfer roller and the drive roller does not rotate prop- cover so that the drive of the
components erly. registration roller is transmit-
ted into the secondary trans-
fer roller. Also, replace when
the secondary transfer roller
is deformed, drive gear gets
damaged or bushing is worn
out.
8 Checking the drive compo- The drive is not transmitted Repair the paper feed motor
nents to the registration roller. drive gears that transmit drive
to the registration roller.
engine PWB. PWBs
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment

J4201/J4202/J4203/J4204/J4205/J4208/J4209: Fuser sensor non-arrival jam
Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The paper is rolled up around the fuser roller and the fuser sensor does not turn on during paper feed from
cassette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Adjusting the paper lead- The margin at the paper If each margin is not uneven, U034 Exe-
ing edge timing leading edge is incorrect. adjust the leading margin in cution
U034.
ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment
replace it.
7 (When the paper skew The paper conveying force Clean the middle roller or the
occurs) Checking the con- of the conveying rollers is registration roller. If worn
veying rollers insufficient. down, replace it.
bent.
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions

12 Checking the press roller The foreign objects are on Clean the press roller and the Fuser Unit
and the fuser belt the press roller or the fuser fuser belt. Or, replace the Replace-
belt. fuser unit. ment
13 Checking the fuser separa- Foreign objects such as Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
tion plate toner are on the fuser sep- Replace-
aration plate. Or, the fuser ment
separation plate is
deformed or improperly
attached.
14 Cleaning the machine The machine inside is con- Clean the machine inside.
inside taminated with toner.
15 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
16 Checking the fuser sensor The fuser sensor does not Check the fuser sensor oper- Fuser Unit
operate properly. ation by executing U031 Replace-
[Fuser Feed], and replace the ment
fuser unit if it does not oper-
ate properly.
17 Checking the feedshift The feedshift solenoid Execute U033 to check the U030 Exe-
solenoid does not operate properly. feedshift guide operation. If it cution
does not operate properly,
reattach the feedshift sole-
noid and reconnect the con-
nector. After that, replace the
feedshift solenoid if it is not
fixed.
18 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor does not Execute U030 to check the U030 Exe-
operate properly. fuser motor operation. If it cution
reattach the fuser motor and
reconnect the connector.
19 Checking the connection The drawer connector is Reconnect the drawer con- Fuser Unit
not properly connected. nector between the fuser unit Replace-
and the feed image PWB. ment
20 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Reconnect the wires between Electrical
connected. the feed image PWB and the Diagram of
engine PWB. PWBs
21 Checking the feed image The wires on the feed Reconnect the connectors on
PWB image PWB are not prop- the feed image PWB. Then,
erly connected, or the feed fix or replace the wires if they
image PWB is faulty. are pinched by the other part
or if they have any damage.
resolved, replace the feed
image PWB.

the engine PWB.

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The paper is rolled up around the fuser roller and the fuser sensor does not turn on during paper feed from

separation plate is
attached.
paper.
5 (When using the thin Thin paper of 55g or less is In the System Menu, change Cassette /
paper) Checking the image used and the solid image the media type of the cas- MP Tray
of 30mm and more sette to use to [Custom7] and Settings
appears at the leading change the paper weight of
edge. "Custom7" to [Light].Custom7
setting for the thin paper use:
This is the mode to prevent
the fuser separation failure by
reducing the paper conveying
speed and lowering the fuser
temperature. (After changing
this setting, "Adjusting..." is
displayed till the fuser tem-
perature is lowered.)
ate properly.

fixed.
9 Checking the connection The drawer connector is Reconnect the drawer con- Fuser Unit
not properly connected. nector between the fuser unit Replace-
and the feed image PWB. ment
engine PWB. PWBs
erly connected, or the feed fix or replace the wires if they
image PWB is faulty. are pinched by the other part
image PWB.
the engine PWB.

Condition: Paper jam before the fuser unit
The paper jam occurs before the fuser rollers and the fuser sensor does not turn on during paper feed from

ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment
replace it.
bent.
upside down.
tions. Specifica-
tions
10 Checking the paper The paper curls. Lower the fuser temperature U161 Exe-
during printing at U161. cution
Then, replace the paper if
moist.

11 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace the paper if it is
damp. (Replace with long
grain paper.)
12 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type via Cassette /
paper settings (media the System Menu. MP Tray
type, paper size) do not Settings
match.
ate properly.
fixed.
engine PWB. PWBs
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.

J4211/J4212/J4213/J4214/J4215/J4218/J4219: Fuser sensor stay jam
Condition: Paper jam in the eject unit
The paper jam occurs in the eject section and the fuser sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cas-
sette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Checking the paper tray There is an obstacle on the Remove an obstacle.
tray.
2 Checking the paper tray The paper stopper is not Store the paper stopper.
stored on the tray.
ator.
replace it.
7 Checking the eject guide Foreign objects such as Clean the eject guide, or
toner are on the eject replace it.
guide.
8 Checking the eject roller The eject roller does not Replace the eject unit if the Eject Unit
rotate. drive gear is deformed, the Replace-
torque limiter is faulty, or the ment
bushing is worn down.
9 Checking the eject motor The eject motor is not (For the 25/32 ppm models U030 Exe-
(for 25/32 ppm models) properly attached, is not only)Reattach the eject motor cution
properly connected, or it is and reconnect the connector.
faulty. (For the 25/32 ppm Then, execute U030 to check
models) the motor operation, and
replace it if it is not fixed.
ate properly.

11 Checking the actuator The actuator is not prop- Reattach the actuator for the
erly attached. (The fuser sensor.
attached locations of it and
the actuator are mistakenly
interchanged.)
12 (When the sensor does not The fuser unit or the eject Check the installation of the Fuser Unit
turn on while the paper unit is not properly fuser unit and the eject unit / Eject Unit
stays in) Checking the installed. and reinstall them if neces- Replace-
fuser unit and the eject unit sary. ment
13 Checking the feedshift The feedshift solenoid Reattach and reconnect the U033 Exe-
solenoid does not operate properly. feedshift solenoid. Then, execution
cute U033 to check the sole-
noid operation and replace it
if it is not fixed.
14 (If occurring when ejecting The eject switchback Reattach and reconnect the U030 Exe-
paper to the job separator) motor does not operate eject switchback motor. Then, cution
Checking the eject switch- properly. execute U030 to check the
back motor motor operation and replace
it if it is not fixed.
erly connected, or it is fix or replace the wires if they
faulty. are pinched by the other part
image PWB.
the engine PWB.

Condition: Paper jam at the eject section that occurs when feeding the LetterR or the
Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch unit for the inner finisher (For inch
models)
The corners of the paper leading edge are caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit when
feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray, and the
dog-ear occurs.

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled Reload paper upside down.
upward. And so, it is easy
to be caught by the PH cut-
ter receiving hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since Relocate the paper width
guides there is a gap between the guides so that there is no gap
paper width guides and the between them to the paper
paper edges. edges.
3 Explanation for user The corners of the paper Please request user to feed
(request to change from leading edge of LetterR paper as "Letter" not but "Let-
"LetterR" to "Letter") are close to the PH cutter terR". If user accepts, relo-
receiving holes of the cate the paper width guides
punch unit. Consequently, to "Letter" position and load
the corners are caught by the paper. Then, explain
the holes if each center users who need to change
position is not adjusted. "Orientation" in Quick Print on
the printer drive so that the
orientation is rotated to 90
degrees C.
4 Adjusting the center posi- The center positions of the Adjust each center position Adjust-
tions of the punch unit and punch unit and the paper by the following proce- ment of
the paper width guides width guides are mis- dures.(Refer to the reference Center
matched, and so, the cor- document" for the details.)1. Position of
ners of the paper leading Load paper on the MP tray. Punch Unit
edge is caught by the PH Then, set the punch holes / Paper
cutter receiving holes of and execute the test print to Width
the punch unit. align the position of the Guides
punch unit.2. Feed paper
from each paper source
except the MP tray to check if
the forward and backward
punch holes are not shifted.3.
If the forward and backward
punch holes are shifted aside
in above 2, change the center
position of the paper width
guides to adjust. After chang-
ing the center position, exe-
cute U034 [LSU Out Left] and
adjust the center line except
for "MPT".

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The paper jam occurs inside the fuser unit and the fuser sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cas-
sette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Adjusting the paper lead- The margin at the paper If each margin is not uneven, U034 Exe-
ing edge timing leading edge is incorrect. adjust the leading margin in cution
U034.
ator.
Roller
Replace-
ment
replace it.
7 (When the paper skew The paper conveying force Clean the middle roller or the
occurs) Checking the con- of the conveying rollers is registration roller. If worn
veying rollers insufficient. down, replace it.
bent.
upside down.

tions. Specifica-
tions
separation plate is
attached.
paper.
ate properly.
fixed.
engine PWB. PWBs

drive PWB.
the engine PWB.
J4301/J4302/J4303/J4304/J4305/J4309: Duplex sensor 1 non-arrival jam

Duplex sensor 1 does not turn on after duplex switchback during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder
or the MP tray.

1 Checking the paper con- The parts such as the roller Clean and fix the paper con-
veying parts or the guide are not prop- veying parts such as the
erly attached, or they are roller or the guide, and reat-
dirty, deformed or worn tach them. Replace them if
down. they are not fixed.
2 Checking duplex sensor 1 Duplex sensor 1 is not Reinsert the connector and U031 Exe-
properly connected. check the operation at U031. cution
3 Checking duplex sensor 1 Duplex sensor 1 is not Reattach duplex sensor 1 U031 Exe-
properly attached. and check the operation by cution
executing U031.
4 Replacing duplex sensor 1 Duplex sensor 1 is faulty. Replace duplex sensor 1 and U031 Exe-
check the operation by execution
cuting U031.
5 Checking duplex clutch 1 Duplex clutch 1 is not Reinsert the connector and U032 Exe-
properly connected. check the operation at U032. cution
6 Checking duplex clutch 1 Duplex clutch 1 is not Reattach duplex clutch 1 and U032 Exe-
properly attached. check the operation by execution
cuting U032.
7 Replacing duplex clutch 1 Duplex clutch 1 is faulty Replace duplex clutch 1 and U032 Exe-
check the operation by execution
cuting U032.
8 Checking the drive compo- The drive transmission is Repair the drive components
nents faulty. from the paper feed motor to
the upper/lower duplex roll-
ers.

engine PWB. PWBs
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment
J4311/J4312/J4313/J4314/J4315/J4319: Duplex sensor 1 stay jam

Duplex sensor 1 does not turn off after the duplex switchback during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side
feeder or the MP tray.

2 Checking duplex sensor 1 Duplex sensor 1 does not Reattach duplex sensor 1 U031 Exe-
operate properly. and reinsert the connector cution
into it. Then, check the opera-
tion by executing U031. If it
replace it.
3 Checking duplex clutch 1 Duplex clutch 1 does not Reattach duplex clutch 1 and U032 Exe-
operate properly. reinsert the connector into it. cution
Then, check the operation by
executing U032. If it does not
operate properly, replace it.
4 Checking the drive compo- The drive transmission Repair the drive components
nents from the paper feed motor from the paper feed motor to
to the upper/lower duplex the upper/lower duplex roll-
rollers is faulty. ers.

engine PWB. PWBs
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment
J4401/J4402/J4403/J4404/J4405/J4409: Duplex sensor 2 non-arrival jam

Duplex sensor 2 does not turn on after passing the certain time since duplex sensor 1 turns on during paper
feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder or the MP tray.

2 Checking duplex sensor 2 Duplex sensor 2 does not Reattach duplex sensor 2 U031 Exe-
operate properly. and reinsert the connector cution
into it. Then, check the opera-
tion by executing U031. If it
replace it.
3 Checking duplex clutch 2 Duplex clutch 2 does not Reattach duplex clutch 2 and U032 Exe-
operate properly. reinsert the connector into it. cution
Then, check the operation by
executing U032. If it does not
operate properly, replace it.
4 Checking the drive compo- The drive transmission Repair the drive components
nents from the paper feed motor from the paper feed motor to
to the upper/lower duplex the upper/lower duplex roll-
rollers is faulty. ers.
engine PWB. PWBs
PWB faulty.

PWB
Replace-
ment
J4701/J4702/J4703/J4704/J4705/J4709: Eject switchback sensor non-arrival jam

The eject switchback sensor does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder or the MP
tray.

ator.
replace it.
5 Checking the feedshift Foreign objects such as Clean the feedshift guide, or Eject Unit
guide toner adhere on the feed- replace the fuser unit. Replace-
shift guide ment
6 Checking the retard roller The retard roller does not Replace the eject unit if the Eject Unit
7 Checking the connection The connector is not prop- Reinsert the eject unit con- U031 Exe-
erly connected. nector and check the opera- cution
tion by executing U031 [Exit
Feed].
8 Checking the eject switch- The eject switchback sen- Check the operation of the U031 Exe-
back sensor sor does not operate prop- eject switchback sensor by cution
erly. executing U031. If it is faulty,
reattach the eject switchback
sensor and reconnect the
wire. Replace it if it is not
fixed.

fixed.
10 Checking the eject switch- The eject switchback Check the operation of the U030 Exe-
back motor motor does not operate eject switchback motor by cution
properly. executing U030. If it is faulty,
motor and reconnect the
fixed.
engine PWB. PWBs
12 Replacing the feed image The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment
J4711/J4712/J4713/J4714/J4715/J4719: Eject switchback sensor stay jam

The eject switchback sensor does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder or the MP
tray.

ator.
replace it.

5 Checking the feedshift Foreign objects such as Clean the feedshift guide, or Eject Unit
guide toner adhere on the feed- replace the fuser unit. Replace-
shift guide ment
6 Checking the retard roller The retard roller does not Replace the eject unit if the Eject Unit
7 Checking the connection The connector is not prop- Reinsert the eject unit con- U031 Exe-
erly connected. nector and check the opera- cution
tion by executing U031 [Exit
Feed].
8 Checking the eject switch- The eject switchback sen- Check the operation of the U031 Exe-
back sensor sor does not operate prop- eject switchback sensor by cution
erly. executing U031. If it is faulty,
sensor and reconnect the
fixed.
fixed.
10 Checking the eject switch- The eject switchback Check the operation of the U030 Exe-
back motor motor does not operate eject switchback motor by cution
properly. executing U030. If it is faulty,
motor and reconnect the
fixed.
11 Checking the connection The connector is not prop- Reconnect the wires between Electrical
erly connected. the feed image PWB and the Diagram of
engine PWB. PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment

J4901/J4902/J4903/J4904/J4905/J4908/J4909: BR conveying sensor 1 non-arrival jam
BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex sec-

ator.
replace it.
5 Checking the conveying The foreign objects such Clean or replace the convey-
guide as toner are on the con- ing guide.
veying guide.
6 Checking the paper con- The paper conveying roller Replace the parts if the gear
veying roller does not rotate. is deformed, the torque lim-
iter is faulty, or the bushing is
worn down.
7 Checking BR conveying BR conveying sensor 1 is Reconnect BR conveying
sensor 1 not properly connected. sensor 1.
8 Replacing BR conveying BR conveying sensor 1 is Replace BR conveying sen-
sensor 1 faulty. sor 1.
9 Replacing the BR convey- The BR conveying motor is Replace the BR conveying
ing motor faulty. motor.
10 Reinstalling the bridge unit The drawer connector Reinstall the bridge unit. Bridge
between the BR main Unit Instal-
PWB and the feed image lation
PWB is not properly con-
nected.
11 Replacing the BR main The BR main PWB is Replace the BR main PWB.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.

PWB
Replace-
ment

BR conveying sensor 1 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex sec-

ator.
replace it.
veying guide.
worn down.

nected.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn on during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex sec-

ator.
replace it.
veying guide.
worn down.

nected.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment
J5011/J5012/J5013/J5014/J5015/J5018/J5019: BR conveying sensor 2 stay jam

BR conveying sensor 2 does not turn off during paper feed from cassette 1-4, the side feeder, the duplex sec-

ator.
replace it.

veying guide.
worn down.
9 Checking the BR convey- The BR conveying motor is Replace the BR conveying
nected.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment
J6000/J6001/J6002: DF paper entry failure jam

Object: J6000 (4000-sheet finisher), J6001 (1000-sheet finisher), J6002 (Inner
finisher)
Turning on of the DF paper entry sensor is detected before the paper eject from the main unit.

ator.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. Clean the DF paper entry
sensor.
3 Checking the connection The sensor is not properly Reconnect the DF paper
connected. entry sensor.
4 Replacing the sensor The sensor is faulty. Replace the DF paper entry
sensor.

5 Replacing the DF main The DF main PWB is Reconnect the connectors on DF Main
PWB faulty. the DF main PWB. Replace PWB
the DF main PWB if the issue Replace-
is not resolved. ment
J6012: Inner DF open jam

Object: Inner finisher
The Inner DF open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF connec- The DF connection sensor Reconnect the DF connection
tion sensor is not properly connected. sensor.
2 Checking the DF connec- The DF connection sensor Reattach the DF connection
tion sensor does not operate properly. sensor if it is off.
3 Replacing the DF connec- The DF connection sensor Replace the DF connection
tion sensor is faulty. sensor.
J6020/J6021: DF front cover open jam

Object: J6020 (4000-sheet finisher), J6021 (1000-sheet finisher)
The DF front cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF front The DF front cover is not Check if the DF front cover
cover aligned to the other exte- closes securely, and reattach
rior covers. it if necessary. Fix or replace
it if it is deformed.
2 Checking the DF front The DF front cover switch Reconnect the DF front cover
cover switch is not properly connected. switch.
3 Checking the DF front The DF front cover switch Reattach the DF front cover
cover switch does not operate properly. switch if it is off.
4 Replacing the DF front The DF front cover switch Replace the DF front cover
cover switch is faulty. switch.
J6041: DF top cover open jam

Object: 1000-sheet finisher
The DF top cover open is detected during the DF operation.

1 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover is not Check if the DF top cover
aligned to the other exte- closes securely and reattach
rior covers. it if necessary. Fix or replace
it if it is deformed.

2 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover switch is Reconnect the DF top cover
switch not properly connected. switch.
3 Checking the DF top cover The DF top cover switch Reattach the DF top cover
switch does not operate properly. switch if it is off.
4 Replacing the DF top The DF top cover switch is Replace the DF top cover
cover switch faulty. switch.
J6050: BF tray open jam

The BF tray open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray does not oper- Check if the BF tray is
ate properly. securely closed, and reat-
tach it if necessary. Fix or
2 Checking the BF tray The BF tray switch is not Reconnect the BF tray
switch properly connected. switch.
3 Checking the BF tray The BF tray switch does Reattach the BF tray switch if
switch not operate properly. it is off.
4 Replacing the BF tray The BF tray switch is Replace the BF tray switch.
switch faulty.
J6060: MB cover open jam

The MB cover open is detected during the paper conveying to the Mail Box.

1 Checking the MB cover The MB cover is not Check if the MB cover is
aligned with the other exte- securely closed, and reat-
rior covers. tach it if necessary. Fix or
2 Checking the MB cover The MB cover switch is not Reconnect the MB cover
switch properly connected. switch.
3 Checking the MB cover The MB cover switch does Reattach the MB cover
switch not operate properly. switch if it is off.
4 Replacing the MB cover The MB cover switch is Replace the MB cover switch.
switch faulty.

J6070: BF unit open jam
The BF unit open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF set switch The BF set switch is not Reconnect the BF set switch.
properly connected.
2 Checking the BF set switch The BF set switch does not Reattach the BF set switch if
operate properly. it comes off.
3 Replacing the BF set The BF set switch is faulty. Replace the BF set switch.
switch
J6080: BF left cover open jam

The BF left cover open is detected during the folding operation.

1 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover is not Check if the BF left cover can
switch aligned with the other exte- turn the BF left cover switch
rior covers. on securely. If the BF left
cover is deformed, fix or
replace it.
2 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover switch is Reconnect the BF left cover
3 Checking the BF left cover The BF left cover switch Reattach the BF left cover
switch does not operate properly. switch if it is off.
4 Replacing the BF left cover The BF left cover switch is Replace the BF left cover
switch faulty. switch.
J6100/J6101/J6102: DF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

finisher)
• J6100/6101: The DF paper entry sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since BR conveying
sensor 2 turned on.• J6102: The DF paper entry sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since
the fuser sensor in the main unit turned on.

2 Checking the DF paper The DF paper entry sensor Reconnect the DF paper
entry sensor is not properly connected. entry sensor.

3 Replacing the DF paper The DF paper entry sensor Replace the DF paper entry
entry sensor is faulty. sensor.
4 Checking the DF paper The DF paper entry motor Reconnect the DF paper
entry motor is not properly connected. entry motor.
5 Replacing the DF paper The DF paper entry motor Replace the DF paper entry
entry motor is faulty. motor.
6 Checking the DF main The DF main PWB is not Reconnect the DF main Electrical
PWB properly connected. PWB. Diagram of
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6110/J6111/J6112: DF paper entry sensor stay jam

finisher)
The DF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on.

2 Checking the DF paper The DF paper entry sensor Reconnect the DF paper
3 Replacing the DF paper The DF paper entry sensor Replace the DF paper entry
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J6200: DF sub eject sensor non-arrival jam
The DF sub eject sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the DF paper entry sensor
turned on.

2 Checking the DF sub eject The DF sub eject sensor is Reconnect the DF sub eject
sensor not properly connected. sensor.
3 Replacing the DF sub eject The DF sub eject sensor is Replace the DF sub eject
sensor faulty. sensor.
4 Checking DF feedshift DF feedshift solenoid 3 is Reconnect DF feedshift sole-
solenoid 3 not properly connected. noid 3.
5 Replacing DF feedshift DF feedshift solenoid 3 is Replace DF feedshift sole-
solenoid 3 faulty. noid 3.
8 Checking the DF eject The DF eject motor is not Reconnect the DF eject
motor properly connected. motor.
9 Replacing the DF eject The DF eject motor is Replace the DF eject motor.
motor faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6210: DF sub eject sensor stay jam

The DF sub eject sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since the DF sub eject sensor turned
on.


2 Checking the DF sub eject The DF sub eject sensor is Reconnect the DF sub eject
3 Replacing the DF sub eject The DF sub eject sensor is Replace the DF sub eject
sensor faulty. sensor.
motor faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6300/J6301: DF middle sensor non-arrival jam

The DF middle sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the DF paper entry sensor turned
on.

1 Checking the mechanical The parts such as the roller Perform the prior standard Prior Stan-
factor or the guide are not prop- check items. dard
erly attached, or they are Check
dirty, deformed or worn Items
down.
2 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor is Reconnect the DF middle
3 Checking the DF middle The DF middle sensor is Replace the DF middle sen-
sensor faulty. sor.

8 Checking the DF middle The DF middle motor is not Reconnect the DF middle
9 Replacing the DF middle The DF middle motor is Replace the DF middle
motor faulty. motor.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6310/J6311: DF middle sensor stay jam

The DF middle sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on.

3 Replacing the DF middle The DF middle sensor is Replace the DF middle sen-
sensor faulty. sor.
4 Checking the DF eject The DF eject clutch is not Reconnect the DF eject
clutch properly connected. clutch.
5 Replacing the DF eject The DF eject clutch is Replace the DF eject clutch.
clutch faulty.
motor faulty.
8 Checking the DF middle The DF middle motor is not Reconnect the DF middle
9 Replacing the DF middle The DF middle motor is Replace the DF middle

PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6400/J6401/J6402: DF eject paper sensor non-arrival jam

finisher)
The DF eject paper sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the DF middle sensor turned
on.

sensor faulty. sor.
4 Checking the DF eject The DF eject paper sen- Reconnect the DF eject
paper sensor sor is not properly con- paper sensor.
nected.
5 Replacing the DF eject The DF eject paper sen- Replace the DF eject paper
paper sensor sor is faulty. sensor.
motor faulty.
8 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is not Reconnect the DF tray motor.
motor properly connected.
9 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor.
motor
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J6410/J6411/J6412: DF eject paper sensor stay jam
finisher)
The DF eject paper sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on.

nected.
motor faulty.
motor
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6500: DF eject paper sensor non-arrival jam when ejecting the paper stack
The DF eject paper sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the DF middle sensor turned
on during the paper stack ejection.


sensor faulty. sor.
nected.
motor faulty.
motor
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6510/J6511/J6512: DF eject paper sensor stay jam when ejecting the paper stack
finisher)
The DF eject paper sensor does not turn off after starting the paper stack eject.

nected.

motor faulty.
motor
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6600: DF drum sensor non-arrival jam

The DF drum sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the DF paper entry sensor turned
on.

2 Checking the DF drum The DF drum sensor is not Reconnect the DF drum sen-
sensor properly connected. sor.
3 Replacing the DF drum The DF drum sensor is Replace the DF drum sensor.
sensor faulty.
5 Checking DF feedshift DF feedshift solenoid 1 is Replace DF feedshift sole-
6 Checking the DF drum The DF drum motor is not Reconnect the DF drum
7 Checking the DF drum The drum motor is faulty. Replace the DF drum motor.
motor
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J6610: DF drum sensor stay jam
The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on.

sensor faulty.
5 Checking DF feedshift DF feedshift solenoid 1 is Replace DF feedshift sole-
6 Checking the DF drum The DF drum motor is not Reconnect the DF drum
7 Checking the DF drum The drum motor is faulty. Replace the DF drum motor.
motor
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6710: DF drum sensor stay jam during paper conveying into the BF unit
The DF drum sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on when conveying the
paper to the folding unit.


sensor faulty.
4 Checking the DF retraction The DF retraction drum Reconnect the DF retraction
drum motor motor is not properly con- drum motor.
nected.
5 Replacing the DF retrac- The DF retraction drum Replace the DF retraction
tion drum motor motor is faulty. drum motor.
6 Checking the BF paper The BF paper entry motor Reconnect the BF paper
7 Replacing the BF paper The BF paper entry motor Replace the BF paper entry
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6810/J6811/J6812: Front DF side registration jam

finisher)
DF side registration sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the certain time since DF side registration motor 1
turned on during the standby operation.

1 Checking the front DF The front DF adjusting Check if the DF front adjust-
adjusting plate plate is not properly ing plate shifts manually.
attached, or it is dirty, Clean and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not shift smoothly. Then,
2 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration sensor Reconnect DF side registra-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly con- tion sensor 1.
nected.
3 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration sensor Replace DF side registration
tion sensor 1 1 is faulty. sensor 1.
4 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Reconnect DF side registra-
tion motor 1 1 is not properly con- tion motor 1.
nected.
5 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Replace DF side registration
tration motor 1 1 is faulty. motor 1.
PWBs

PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J6910/J6911/J6912: Rear DF side registration jam

finisher)
DF side registration sensor 2 does not turn off after passing the certain time since DF side registration motor 2
turned on during the standby operation.

1 Checking the rear DF The rear DF adjusting Check if the DF rear adjusting
adjusting plate plate is not properly plate shifts manually. Clean
attached, or it is dirty, and reattach it if it does not
deformed, or worn down. shift smoothly. Then, replace
it if it is not fixed.
2 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration sensor Reconnect DF side registra-
tion sensor 2 2 is not properly con- tion sensor 2.
nected.
3 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration sensor Replace DF side registration
tration sensor 2 2 is faulty. sensor 2.
4 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Reconnect DF side registra-
tion motor 2 2 is not properly con- tion motor 2.
nected.
5 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Replace DF side registration
tration motor 2 2 is faulty. motor 2.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J7000/J7001/J7002: DF staple jam
finisher)
The DF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the DF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up
was detected during the DF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF reg- Check if the lower BF regis- Staple
istration guide shifts manu- tration guide shifts manually, Jam Clear
ally, and reattach it if it and reattach it if it does not
does not smoothly shift. smoothly shift.
2 Checking the DF staple The DF staple motor does Check if the DF staple motor DF Staple
motor drive components not rotate due to the rotates manually. Replace the Unit
excessive load. DF staple unit if it does not Replace-
rotate smoothly due to the ment
damaged gear, etc.
3 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit is not Reconnect the DF staple unit.
unit properly connected.
4 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. DF Staple
unit Unit
Replace-
ment
5 Checking the DF staple The DF staple relay PWB Reconnect the DF staple
relay PWB is not properly connected. relay PWB.
6 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple relay PWB Replace the DF staple relay
relay PWB is faulty. PWB.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7100: BF paper entry sensor non-arrival jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the BF vertical conveying
sensor turned on.


2 Checking the BF paper The BF paper entry sensor Reconnect the BF paper
3 Replacing the BF paper The BF paper entry sensor Replace the BF paper entry
6 Checking the BF main The BF main PWB is not Reconnect the BF main
PWB properly connected. PWB.
7 Replacing the BF main The BF main PWB is Replace the BF main PWB.
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7110: BF paper entry sensor stay jam

The BF paper entry sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since the BF vertical conveying sen-
sor turned on.

2 Checking the BF paper The BF paper entry sensor Reconnect the BF paper
3 Replacing the BF paper The BF paper entry sensor Replace the BF paper entry
PWB faulty.

PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7200: BF eject sensor non-arrival jam

The BF eject sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the center fold operation started.

2 Checking the BF eject sen- The BF eject sensor is not Reconnect the BF eject sen-
sor properly connected. sor.
3 Replacing the BF eject The BF eject sensor is Replace the BF eject sensor.
sensor faulty.
4 Checking the BF blade The BF blade motor is not Reattach and reconnect the
motor properly connected or BF blade motor.
attached.
5 Replacing the BF blade The BF blade motor is Replace the BF blade motor.
motor faulty.
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J7210: BF eject sensor stay jam
The BF eject sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on during the center fold
operation.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reat-
attached. tach the BF tray.
sensor faulty.
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7300: BF eject sensor non-arrival jam at tri-folding

The BF eject sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since starting the tri-fold operation.

sensor faulty.
4 Checking the BF feedshift The BF feedshift solenoid Reattach and reconnect the
solenoid is not properly attached or BF feedshift solenoid.
connected.

5 Replacing the BF feedshift The BF feedshift solenoid Replace the BF feedshift
solenoid is faulty. solenoid.
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7310: BF eject sensor stay jam at tri-folding

The BF eject sensor does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on during the tri-fold opera-
tion.

1 Checking the BF tray The BF tray is not properly Remove the paper and reat-
attached. tach the BF tray.
sensor faulty.
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J7400: Upper BF side registration jam
BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing the certain time since the upper BF side registra-
tion guide shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the upper BF The upper BF side regis- Check if the upper BF side
side registration guide tration guide is not properly registration guide shifts man-
attached, or it is dirty, ually, and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not smoothly shift.
2 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reconnect BF side registra-
tion sensor 2 2 is not properly con- tion sensor 2
nected.
3 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration sensor Replace BF side registration
tration sensor 2 2 is faulty. sensor 2
4 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration motor Reconnect BF side registra-
tion motor 2 2 is not properly con- tion motor 2
nected.
5 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration
tration motor 2 2 is faulty. motor 2
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7500: Lower BF side registration jam

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the certain time since the lower BF side registra-
tion guide shifted toward the sensor.

1 Checking the lower BF The lower BF side registra- Check if the lower BF side
side registration guide tion guide is not properly registration guide shifts man-
attached, or it is dirty, ually, and reattach it if it does
deformed, or worn down. not smoothly shift.
2 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reconnect BF side registra-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly con- tion sensor 1
nected.

3 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration sensor Replace BF side registration
tration sensor 1 1 is faulty. sensor 1
4 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration motor Reconnect BF side registra-
tion motor 1 1 is not properly con- tion motor 1
nected.
5 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration
tration motor 1 1 is faulty. motor 1
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7600: BF staple jam

The BF staple home position cannot be detected after activating the BF staple motor. Or the motor lock-up
was detected during the BF staple motor operation.

1 Checking the staple Check if the upper BF reg- Check if the lower BF regis- Staple
istration guide shifts manu- tration guide shifts manually, Jam Clear
ally, and reattach it if it and reattach it if it does not
does not smoothly shift. smoothly shift.
2 Checking the staple The BF staple motor does Check if the BF staple motor
not rotate due to the rotates manually. Replace the
excessive load. BF staple unit if it does not
rotate smoothly due to the
damaged gear, etc.
3 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit is not Reconnect the BF staple unit.
unit properly connected.
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple unit is faulty. Replace the BF staple unit.
unit
PWB faulty.
PWBs

PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7700: BF vertical conveying sensor non-arrival jam

The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since the eject signal from
the main unit was received.

2 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Reconnect the BF vertical
conveying sensor sensor is not properly con- conveying sensor.
nected.
3 Replacing the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Replace the BF vertical con-
conveying sensor sensor is faulty. veying sensor.
5 Checking the BF paper The BF paper entry motor Repair the BF paper entry
entry motor drive compo- drive components are motor drive components.
nents faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J7710: BF vertical conveying sensor stay jam
The BF vertical conveying sensor does not turn on after passing the certain time since it turned on.

2 Checking the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Reconnect the BF vertical
conveying sensor sensor is not properly con- conveying sensor.
nected.
3 Replacing the BF vertical The BF vertical conveying Replace the BF vertical con-
conveying sensor sensor is faulty. veying sensor.
5 Checking the BF paper The BF paper entry motor Repair the BF paper entry
entry motor drive compo- drive components are motor drive components.
nents faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7800: Mail Box ejection non-arrival jam

MB tray eject sensor 1 does not turn on after passing the certain time since the paper is ejected from the main
unit.

1 Checking the belt The belt and its neighbor- Execute U240 [Mail Box] > U240 Exe-
ing parts are not properly [Conv] to check the belt oper- cution
attached, or they are dirty, ation. If it does not operate
deformed or worn down. properly, correct the belt and
the neighboring parts such as
the feedshift claw lever or the
guide. After that, replace the
parts if they are not fixed.
2 Checking MB tray eject MB tray eject sensor 1 is Reconnect MB tray eject sen-
sensor 1 not properly connected. sor 1.

3 Checking MB tray eject MB tray eject sensor 1 is Replace MB tray eject sensor
sensor 1 faulty. 1.
4 Checking the MB home The belt holding plate does Reconnect or reattach the
position sensor not operate properly since MB home position sensor.
the MB home position sen-
sor is not properly con-
nected or not attached.
5 Replacing the MB home The belt holding plate does Replace the MB home posi-
position sensor not operate properly since tion sensor.
the MB home position sen-
sor is faulty.
6 Checking the MB convey- The MB conveying motor Reconnect the MB convey-
ing motor is not properly connected. ing motor.
7 Checking the MB convey- The MB conveying motor Replace the MB conveying
ing motor is faulty. motor.
8 Checking the MB main The MB main PWB is not Reconnect the MB main
9 Replacing the MB main The MB main PWB is Replace the MB main PWB.
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7810: Mail Box eject stay jam

The MB tray eject sensor 1 does not turn off after passing the certain time since it turned on.

1 Checking the belt The belt and its neighbor- Execute U240 [Mail Box] > U240 Exe-
ing parts are not properly [Conv] to check the belt oper- cution
attached, or they are dirty, ation. If it does not operate
deformed or worn down. properly, correct the belt and
the neighboring parts such as
the feedshift claw lever or the
guide. After that, replace the
parts if they are not fixed.
2 Checking the MB tray The MB tray is not properly Reattach the MB tray.
attached.
3 Checking MB tray eject MB tray eject sensor 1 is Reconnect MB tray eject sen-
sensor 1 not properly connected. sor 1.

4 Checking MB tray eject MB tray eject sensor 1 is Replace MB tray eject sensor
sensor 1 faulty. 1.
5 Checking the MB convey- The MB conveying motor Reconnect the MB convey-
ing motor is not properly connected. ing motor.
6 Checking the MB convey- The MB conveying motor Replace the MB conveying
ing motor is faulty. motor.
7 Checking the MB main The MB main PWB is not Reconnect the MB main
PWB faulty.
PWBs
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J7900/J7901/J7902: DF paddle jam

finisher)
Turning on of the DF paddle sensor is not detected after passing 1s since the DF paddle motor activated.

1 Removing the paper The paper is jammed in Remove the jammed paper
the DF paddle. from the DF paddle.
2 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle does not Check if the DF paddle motor
motor drive components rotate due to the excessive rotates manually. And replace
load. the motor or the drive compo-
nents if the motor does not
rotate smoothly due to the
part damage.
3 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Reconnect the DF paddle
4 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Replace the DF paddle sen-
sensor faulty. sor.
5 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is Reconnect the DF paddle
motor not properly connected. motor.
6 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is Replace the DF paddle
PWBs

PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J9000: No original feed from the DP

The DP feed sensor does not turn on after the paper feed was retried.

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is folded.
2 Checking the original The original curls down- Correct or replace the origi-
ward, or is wavy. nal. If the original cannot be
replaced, relocate the leading
end of the original and the
trailing end.
3 Checking the original The original out of specifi- Explain users to use the origi-
cation is used. nal within the specifications.
4 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on Remove the original with the
the original. foreign objects.
5 Checking the paper path The original is caught up Remove any paper or foreign
by a piece of paper. objects on the paper path and
ator.
6 Checking the DP feed The paper conveying force Clean the DP feed roller sur-
roller of the DP feed roller is face. If worn down, replace it.
insufficient.
replace it.
8 Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed sensor is Reattach and reconnect the
sor faulty. DP feed sensor. Then,
9 Checking the DP feed The DP feed motor is not Reattach and reconnect the
motor properly attached, is not DP feed motor. Then, replace
properly connected, or it is it if it is not fixed.
faulty.
10 Replacing the DP main The DP main PWB is Replace the DP main PWB. DP Main
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J9001: DP small size original jam
If one of the following applies, 1. The DP timing sensor turns off immediately after the DP timing sensor
turned on.2. The DP feed sensor or the DP registration sensor is Off when starting the secondary paper
feed.3. The DP feed sensor or the DP registration sensor is Off when the DP timing sensor is On.4. The origi-
nal during the secondary paper feed does not arrive at the DP timing sensor when the DP registration sensor
is Off.

cation is fed. nal within the specifications.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying

The unspecific conveying sensor turns on when starting the paper conveying.

1 Checking the paper path The foreign objects such Remove any paper or foreign
as a piece of paper are on objects on the paper path and
the paper path. remove the burrs on the parts
ator.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. Clean the DP feed sensor,
the DP timing sensor, the DP
backside timing sensor (for
the dual scan DP), and the
DP eject sensor.
3 Checking the connection The connector is not prop- Reconnect the connectors to
erly connected to the sen- the DP feed sensor, the DP
sor. timing sensor, the DP back-
side timing sensor (for the
dual scan DP), and the DP
eject sensor.
4 Replacing the sensor The sensor is faulty. Replace the DP feed sensor,
the DP timing sensor, the DP
backside timing sensor (for
the dual scan DP) and the DP
eject sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J9004: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing
Object: Automatic duplex DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the reverse operation
started.

ator.
2 (When the original is The paper conveying per- Clean the DP conveying
skewed) Checking the DP formance of the DP con- roller surface. If worn down,
conveying roller veying roller is insufficient. replace it.
3 (When the original is The location of the original Align the original width
skewed) Relocating the width guides and the origi- guides to the original size.
original width guides nal size are mismatched.
4 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the feedshift guide.
skewed) Checking the the DP feedshift guide. If the burrs are on the paper
feedshift guide conveying side of the feed-
shift guide, remove them or
replace the feedshift guide.
5 Checking the DP feedshift The DP feedshift motor or Reattach and reconnect the
motor and the DP feedshift the DP feedshift solenoid DP feedshift motor or the DP
solenoid does not operate properly. feedshift solenoid. Replace
them if they are not fixed.
6 (When the original convey- The paper conveying force Clean the DP reverse roller
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller is surface. If worn down,
DP reverse roller insufficient. replace it.
original is folded.
trailing end.
11 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration sensor Clean and reattach the DP
tion sensor is dirty, not properly registration sensor, and
attached, not properly con- reconnect it. Replace it if it is
nected, or it is faulty. not fixed.

12 Checking the DP reverse The drive transmission Reattach and reconnect the
motor from the DP reverse motor DP reverse motor, and
is faulty, or the DP reverse replace it if it is not fixed.
motor is not properly
attached or connected.
13 Checking the DP main The DP main PWB is not Reconnect the connectors on DP Main
PWB properly connected, or it is the DP main PWB. Then, fix PWB
faulty. or replace them if they are Replace-
resolved, replace the DP
main PWB.
J9005: No original feed from the DP

Object: Dual scan DP and automatic duplex DP with the DP feed belt
The DP lift upper limit sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the DP original lift plate
started lifting up.

1 Checking the original lift The DP original lift plate is Reattach the DP original lift
plate not properly attached. plate if it is not lifted up.
2 Checking the DP lift motor The DF lift motor does not When the DP original lift plate
operate properly. is not lifted up, reattach and
reconnect the DP lift motor.
3 Checking the DP original The DP original detection When the DP original lift plate
detection sensor sensor is not properly is not lifted up, reattach and
attached. reconnect the DP original
detection sensor. Replace it if
it is not fixed.
4 Checking the original The original is not set Insert the original all the way
properly. and align the original width
guides to the original.
original is folded.
trailing end.

8 Checking the DP lift upper The actuator of the DP lift When the actuator is not
limit sensor upper limit sensor does not switched on by the original,
operate properly. reattach the actuator and the
DP lift upper limit sensor, and
reconnect the sensor. Then,
replace the parts if they are
not fixed.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
J9006: DP eject sensor non-arrival jam during the original reversing

Object: Automatic duplex DP with the DP feed belt
The DP eject sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the reverse operation started.

ator.
4 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feedshift
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feedshift guide. guide. If the burrs are on the
feedshift guide original conveying side of the
DP feedshift guide, remove
them or replace the guide.
solenoid does not operate properly. feedshift solenoid.
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller or surface and the DP feedshift
DP reverse roller and the the DP feedshift roller is roller surface. If worn down,
DP feedshift roller insufficient. replace them.
original is folded.

trailing end.
11 Checking the DP eject The DP eject sensor is Clean and reattach the DP
sensor dirty, is not properly eject sensor, and reconnect
attached, is not properly it. Replace it if it is not fixed.
connected, or it is faulty.
13 Checking the DP main The wires on the DP main Reconnect the connectors on DP Main
PWB PWB are not properly con- the DP main PWB. Then, fix PWB
nected, or the DP main or replace them if they are Replace-
PWB is faulty. pinched by the other part or if ment
main PWB.
J9007: DP eject sensor stay jam during the original reversing

The DP eject sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the reverse operation started.

ator.

4 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feedshift
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feedshift guide. guide. If the burrs are on the
feedshift guide original conveying side of the
DP feedshift guide, remove
them or replace the guide.
solenoid does not operate properly. feedshift solenoid.
ing delays) Checking the of the DP reverse roller or surface and the DP feedshift
DP reverse roller and the the DP feedshift roller is roller surface. If worn down,
DP feedshift roller insufficient. replace them.
original is folded.
trailing end.
11 Checking the DP eject The DP eject sensor is Clean and reattach the DP
sensor dirty, is not properly eject sensor, and reconnect
attached, is not properly it. Replace it if it is not fixed.
connected, or it is faulty.
main PWB.

J9008: No original feed from the DP (Original is B6 size or smaller)
Object: Dual scan DP
The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the original feeding
started.

ator.
2 (When the original is The paper conveying per- Clean the DP feed belt sur-
skewed) Checking the DP formance of the DP feed face. If worn down, replace it.
feed belt belt is not enough.
3 Checking the original The original is not set Insert the original all the way
properly. and align the original width
guides to the original.
original is folded.
trailing end.
7 Checking the DP backside The actuator of the DP When the actuator is not
timing sensor backside timing sensor switched on by the original,
does not operate properly. reattach the actuator and the
DP backside timing sensor
and reconnect the sensor. If
the issue is not resolved,
replace them.
8 Checking the DP feed The drive transmission Reattach and reconnect the
motor from the DP feed motor is DP feed motor. Then, replace
faulty, or the motor is not it if it is not fixed.
properly attached, or not
properly connected.
9 Checking the DP main The DP main PWB is Replace the DP main PWB. DP Main
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J9009: DP original jam caused by the image scanning
The next original is in standby of the secondary paper feed during the image scanning.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove the originals and
activate properly. check the sensors. Then, turn
the power switch and the
switch on.
3 Checking the DP relay The image data transmis- Reconnect the DP relay
cable sion processing failed due cable.
to the DP relay cable con-
nection failure.
4 Executing [Memory Diag- The memory in the main Execute [Memory Diagnos- Adjust-
nostics] PWB is faulty. tics] at [Adjustment/Mainte- ment/
nance] in the System Menu. Mainte-
nance
(System
Menu)
J9010: Document processor open detection

The document processor open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP The document processor Check if the document pro-
is not properly installed, or cessor is securely closed,
it is faulty. and reinstall it if necessary.
Fix or replace the DP covers
if it is deformed.
2 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Reconnect the DP opening/
closing sensor sensor is not properly con- closing sensor.
nected.
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Reattach the DP opening/
closing sensor sensor does not operate closing sensor if it is off.
properly.
4 Replacing the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Replace the DP opening/
closing sensor sensor is faulty. closing sensor.

J9011: DP top cover open detection
The DP top cover open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover is faulty. Check if the DP top cover is
securely closed, and reat-
tach it if necessary. Fix or
2 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover switch is Reconnect the DP top cover
3 Checking the DP top cover The DP top cover switch Reattach the DP top cover
switch comes off. switch.
4 Replacing the DP top The DP top cover switch is Replace the DP top cover
cover switch faulty. switch.
J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

The DP feed sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

original is folded.
trailing end.
5 (Except for the dual scan The paper separation force Clean the DP reverse roller
DP) Checking the DP of the DP reverse roller is surface. If worn down,
reverse roller insufficient. replace it.
6 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse cover Reattach the DP reverse
cover comes off. cover.
7 (When the original is The paper conveying force Clean the DP feed roller sur- DP Pickup
skewed) Checking the DP of the DP feed roller or the face or the DP feed belt sur- Pulley /
feed roller or the DP feed DP feed belt is insufficient. face. If worn down, replace it. DP Feed
belt Roller
Replace-
ment

9 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feed guide.
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feed guide. If the burrs are on the original
feed belt conveying side of the DP
feed guide, remove them or
replace the DP feed guide.
10 Checking the DP feed sen- The DP feed sensor is Clean and reattach the DP
sor dirty, is not properly feed sensor, and reconnect
attached, is not properly the connector. Replace it if it
connected, or it is faulty. is not fixed.
main PWB.
J9200: DP registration sensor non-arrival jam

Object: Automatic duplex DP
The DP registration sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor turned
on.

ator.
belt Roller
Replace-
ment
4 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the conveying
skewed) Checking the the DP conveying guide. guide. Remove the burrs on
conveying guide the conveying guide surface
5 (When the original convey- The paper conveying per- Clean the DP conveying
ing delays) Checking the formance of the DP con- roller surface. If worn down,
DP conveying roller veying roller is insufficient. replace it.

6 (When the original convey- The DP top cover is Check if the DP top cover is
ing delays) Checking the deformed. securely closed. If it cannot
DP top cover be closed due to the defor-
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
trailing end, or reload the
original upside down at the
duplex scan.
11 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration sensor Reattach and reconnect the
tion sensor is not properly attached, DP registration sensor.
not properly connected, or Replace it if it is not fixed.
it is faulty.
12 Checking the DP convey- The DP conveying motor is Reattach and reconnect the
ing motor not properly attached, is DP conveying motor. Then,
not properly connected, or replace it if it is not fixed.
it is faulty.
main PWB.
J9210: DP registration sensor stay jam

The DP registration sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor turned
on.

ator.

mation, replace it.
original is folded.
duplex scan.
11 Checking the DP registra- The DP registration sensor Reattach and reconnect the
tion sensor is not properly attached, DP registration sensor.
not properly connected, or Replace it if it is not fixed.
it is faulty.
it is faulty.
main PWB.

J9300: DPCIS non-arrival jam
The DP backside timing sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor
turned on.

ator.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
duplex scan.
11 Checking the DP backside The DP backside timing Reattach and reconnect the
timing sensor sensor is not properly DP backside timing sensor.
attached, is not properly Then, replace it if it is not
connected, or it is faulty. fixed.

it is faulty.
main PWB.
J9310: DP backside timing sensor stay jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor
turned off.

ator.
mation, replace it.
original is folded.

duplex scan.
11 Checking the DP backside The DP backside timing Reattach and reconnect the
timing sensor sensor is not properly DP backside timing sensor.
attached, is not properly Then, replace it if it is not
connected, or it is faulty. fixed.
it is faulty.
main PWB.
J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP reg-
istration sensor turned on.

ator.
belt Roller
Replace-
ment

mation, replace it.
original is folded.
duplex scan.
11 Checking the DP timing The DP timing sensor is Reattach and reconnect the
sensor not properly attached, not DP timing sensor. Replace it
properly connected, or it is if it is not fixed.
faulty.
it is faulty.
main PWB.

J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam
The DP timing sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor or the DP reg-
istration sensor turned off.

ator.
belt Roller
Replace-
ment
mation, replace it.
original is folded.
duplex scan.
11 Checking the DP timing The DP timing sensor is Reattach and reconnect the
sensor not properly attached, not DP timing sensor. Replace it
properly connected, or it is if it is not fixed.
faulty.

it is faulty.
main PWB.
J9600: DP eject sensor non-arrival jam

The DP eject sensor does not turn on after passing the certain pulse since the DP timing sensor turned on.

ator.
4 (When the original convey- The height of the DP Adjust the height of the DP
ing delays in the dual scan hinges is improper. hinges.
DP) Adjusting the height of
the DP hinges
5 (When the original convey- The opening/closing oper- Check if the document pro-
ing delays) Checking the ation of the document processor is securely closed. If it
opening/closing motion of cessor is faulty. cannot be closed due to the
the document processor DP frame deformation,
replace the document pro-
cessor.
original is folded.

duplex scan.
10 Checking the DP eject The DP eject sensor is not Reattach and reconnect the
sensor properly attached, is not DP eject sensor. Replace it if
properly connected, or it is it is not fixed.
faulty.
it is faulty.
main PWB.
J9610: DP eject sensor stay jam

The DP eject sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the DP timing sensor turned off.

ator.
3 (When the original convey- The paper conveying force Clean the DP eject roller sur-
ing delays) Checking the of the DP eject roller is face. If worn down, replace it.
DP eject roller insufficient.

4 (When the original convey- The height of the DP Adjust the height of the DP
ing delays in the dual scan hinges is improper. hinges.
DP) Adjusting the height of
the DP hinges
5 (When the original convey- The opening/closing oper- Check if the document pro-
ing delays) Checking the ation of the document processor is securely closed. If it
opening/closing motion of cessor is faulty. cannot be closed due to the
the document processor DP frame deformation,
replace the document pro-
cessor.
original is folded.
duplex scan.
10 Checking the DP eject The DP eject sensor is not Reattach and reconnect the
sensor properly attached, is not DP eject sensor. Replace it if
properly connected, or it is it is not fixed.
faulty.
it is faulty.
main PWB.

(4) Other Feeding/Conveying Failures
No. Contents Condition

(1) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size The corners of the paper leading edge are caught
paper in the main unit with the punch unit by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit
for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the cor- when feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper
ners of the paper leading edge being from cassette 1-4, side feeder, duplex section or
caught by the PH cutter receiving holes the MP tray, and the dog-ear occurs.
(2) Paper creases
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(4-1) (When feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper in the main unit with the punch
unit for the inner finisher) Dog-ear at the corners of the paper leading edge being
caught by the PH cutter receiving holes
Condition: When feeding the LetterR or the Legal size paper in the main unit with the
punch unit for the inner finisher (For inch models)
The corners of the paper leading edge are caught by the PH cutter receiving holes of the punch unit when
feeding the LetterR or Legal size paper from cassette 1-4, side feeder, duplex section or the MP tray, and the
dog-ear occurs.

1 Reloading the paper The paper is curled Reload paper upside down.
upward. And so, it is easy
to be caught by the PH cut-
ter receiving hole.
2 Relocating the paper width Paper skew occurs since Relocate the paper width
guides there is a gap between the guides so that there is no gap
paper width guides and the between them to the paper
paper edges. edges.
3 Explanation for user The corners of the paper Please request user to feed
(request to change from leading edge of LetterR paper as "Letter" not but "Let-
"LetterR" to "Letter") are close to the PH cutter terR". If user accepts, relo-
receiving holes of the cate the paper width guides
punch unit. Consequently, to "Letter" position and load
the corners are caught by the paper. Then, explain
the holes if each center users who need to change
position is not adjusted. "Orientation" in Quick Print on
the printer drive so that the
orientation is rotated to 90
degrees C.

4 Adjusting the center posi- The center positions of the Adjust each center position Adjust-
tions of the punch unit and punch unit and the paper by the following proce- ment of
the paper width guides width guides are mis- dures.(Refer to the reference Center
matched, and so, the cor- document" for the details.)1. Position of
ners of the paper leading Load paper on the MP tray. Punch Unit
edge is caught by the PH Then, set the punch holes / Paper
cutter receiving holes of and execute the test print to Width
the punch unit. align the position of the Guides
punch unit.2. Feed paper
from each paper source
except the MP tray to check if
the forward and backward
punch holes are not shifted.3.
If the forward and backward
punch holes are shifted aside
in above 2, change the center
position of the paper width
guides to adjust. After chang-
ing the center position, exe-
cute U034 [LSU Out Left] and
adjust the center line except
for "MPT".
(4-2) Paper creases

1 Checking the paper The paper curls due to Reload paper upside down.
moisture. Or, replace paper.
2 Cleaning the secondary The neighboring parts of Clean the secondary transfer Second-
transfer unit the secondary transfer roller, separation needles, ary Trans-
roller are dirty with paper discharger sheet and the fer Section
dust. paper path. Cleaning
3 Removing foreign material Paper is caught by foreign Replace the toner sucking
material such as a piece of fan motor if it does not oper-
paper. ate properly when executing
U037 [Toner].
4 Relocating the paper width The set position of the Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper paper width guides / MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides is mis- guides to fit them with the
matched with the paper paper size.
size, and so, the paper is
skewed.
5 Checking the conveying The registration rollers or Check if the registration roll-
section the middle pulleys are not ers and the middle pulleys
properly attached, or they are properly attached. If nec-
are dirty. essary, reattach them. Also,
they are dirty with toner or
paper dust, clean them.

6 Opening and reclosing the The right cover is not firmly Open the right cover (convey-
right cover closed. ing unit) once, and close it
firmly.

7-3 Self diagnostic
(1) Self diagnostic codes
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
*: * Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the
power switch off and unplug the machine from power. (Allow at least 5 s before starting to conduct ser-
vice until the capacitors on the circuit boards have been completely discharged.)

Self diagnostic error code
Error code Contents

C0030 FAX PWB system error
C0070 FAX PWB incompatible detection error
C0080 Optional Printing System device error
C0100 Backup memory device error
C0120 MAC address data error
C0130 Backup memory reading/writing error
C0150 Engine EEPROM reading / writing error
C0160 EEPROM data error
C0170 Charger count error
C0180 Machine serial number mismatch
C0350 Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication error)
C0361 Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
C0362 Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
C0640 Hard Disk error
C0650 FAX image storage pair-check error
C0660 Hard Disk encryption key error
C0670 Hard Disk overwriting error
C0680 SSD error
C0800 Image processing error
C0830 FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
C0840 RTC error ("Time for maintenance T" appears)
C0870 PC FAX Image data transmission error
C0920 FAX file system error
C0950 FAX job stay error
C0980 24V power interruption detection
C1000 MP lift motor error
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 Lift motor 2 error
C1030 PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder)
C1040 PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder)
C1140 PF lift motor error (Side Feeder)
C1800 Paper Feeder communication error
C1820 Paper Feeder communication error (Side Feeder)
C1900 Paper Feeder EEPROM error
C1920 Paper Feeder EEPROM error (Side Feeder)
C1950 Primary transfer unit EEPROM error
C2201 Drum motor BK steady-state error

Error code Contents
C2300 Fuser motor error
C2500 Paper feed motor error
C2600 PF feed motor error
C2700 Primary / secondary transfer release error
C2760 Developer BK/belt motor startup error
C2810 Waste toner motor error
C2840 Belt cleaning motor error
C3100 Carriage error
C3200 LED lamp startup error
C3210 CIS lamp error
C3300 CCD AGC error
C3310 CIS AGC error
C3500 Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC
C3600 Scanner sequence error
C3800 AFE error
C4001 Polygon motor synchronization error
C4011 Polygon motor steady-state error
C4101 BD initialization error
C4201 BD steady-state error
C4600 LSU cleaning motor error
C4701 VIDEO ASIC device error 1
C4801 LSU type mismatch error
C5101 Main high-voltage error BK
C5130 Primary transfer high-voltage error
C6000 IH heating error 1
C6020 Center thermistor high temperature error
C6030 Center thermistor broken
C6050 Center thermistor low temperature error
C6120 Press thermistor high temperature error
C6130 Press thermistor broken
C6200 IH heating error 2
C6220 Edge thermistor high temperature error
C6230 Edge thermistor broken
C6250 Edge thermistor low temperature error
C6320 Middle thermistor high temperature error
C6330 Middle thermistor broken
C6410 Uninstalled fuser unit

Error code Contents
C6600 Fuser belt rotation error
C6610 Fuser pressure release sensor error
C6620 IH core motor rotation error
C6740 IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2)
C6760 Fuser IH input excessive electric current error
C6770 IH low power error
C6900 Edge fan motor error
C6910 Engine firmware unexpected error
C6920 Eject/IH fan motor error
C6950 IH PWB communication error
C6980 Fuser unit EEPROM error
C6990 Fuser power source destination error
C7001 Container motor error
C7101 T/C sensor BK error
C7200 Inner thermistor broken (developer)
C7210 Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)
C7221 LSU thermistor broken
C7231 LSU thermistor short-circuited
C7241 Belt thermistor broken
C7251 Belt thermistor short-circuited
C7301 Toner motor BK error
C7320 Toner container detection connector error
C7420 Uninstalled primary transfer unit
C7470 Toner sucking fan motor error
C7480 Power source fan motor error
C7490 Eject fan motor error
C7601 Front ID sensor error
C7602 Rear ID sensor error
C7611 Bias calibration read value error (Black)
C7800 Outer thermistor broken
C7810 Outer thermistor short-circuited
C7901 Drum unit BK EEPROM error
C7911 Developer unit BK EEPROM error
C7941 LSU EEPROM error
C7970 Weight detection sensor error
C8010 PH motor error 1

Error code Contents
C8090 DF paddle motor error
C8100 DF eject release motor error
C8110 DF shift motor 1 error
C8120 DF shift motor 2 error
C8130 DF shift release motor error
C8140 DF tray motor error 1
C8150 DF tray motor error 2 (1): 1000-sheet finisher
C8160 DF tray motor error 3 (3): Inner finisher
C8170 DF side registration motor 1 error 1
C8210 DF staple motor front/rear error
C8230 DF staple motor error 1
C8250 DF main tray error 4
C8260 DF middle motor HP detection error
C8300 Main program error / BF unit communication error
C8310 BF side registration motor 2 error
C8320 BF adjustment motor error
C8330 BF blade motor error
C8340 BF staple motor error 1
C8350 BF side registration motor 1 error
C8360 BF main motor error
C8370 BF staple motor error 2
C8410 PH slide motor error 1
C8420 PH slide motor error 2
C8430 Main program error / Punch unit communication error
C8500 Main program error / Mail Box communication error
C8510 MB conveying motor error 1
C8520 MB conveying motor error 2
C8800 Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)
C8900 DF backup error
C8930 BF unit backup error

Error code Contents
C9000 Main program error / DP communication error
C9040 DP lift motor ascend error
C9050 DP lift motor descend error
C9060 DP EEPROM error
C9070 DP - SHD communication error
C9080 LED failure detection
C9180 DP reverse motor error
Content of Self Diagnostic

C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch. After lation
5s passes, reinstall the FAX Guide
PWB, and then turn on the
main power switch and the
power switch.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Upgrade
3 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB,
any normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the Related
PWB is installed. applicable model. Product
List
2 Checking the firmware The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Upgrade
Replace-
ment

C0080: Optional Printing System device error
Object: Printing System 15 (for 240V)
The FPGA version of the interface PWB to control Fiery cannot be read. (FPGA failure)

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn the power switch and
operate properly. the main power switch off .
After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Checking the interface The interface PWB for Replace with the interface Printing
PWB other models is installed. PWB for the applicable mod- System
els. Installa-
tion Guide
3 Firmware upgrade The main firmware version Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware
does not support the inter- the latest version. Upgrade
face PWB.
4 Checking the interface The interface PWB is not Reconnect the connectors on Printing
PWB properly connected, or it is the interface PWB. Then, fix System
faulty. or replace the wires if they Installa-
are pinched by the other part tion Guide
resolved, replace the inter-
face PWB.
5 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is not prop- Reconnect the wire connec- Main PWB
erly connected, or it is tors between the main PWB Replace-
faulty. and the interface PWB. Then, ment
fix or replace the wires if they
are pinched by the other part
PWB.
C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does Turn the power switch and
not operate properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.

PWB.
C0120: MAC address data error

The MAC address data is incorrect.

power switch on.
2 Checking the MAC The MAC address is incor- Replace the main PWB when Main PWB
address rect. the MAC address is not indi- Replace-
cated on the network status ment
page.
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

power switch on.
PWB.

C0150: Engine EEPROM reading / writing error
1. No response from the device is detected for 5s or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the
data.2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.3. The reading data and the writing data
mismatch 8 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Turn the power switch and
engine PWB does not the main power switch off .
operate properly. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM on EEPROM
the engine PWB erly attached. the engine PWB. Replace-
ment
3 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the EEPROM
the engine PWB engine PWB and execute Replace-
U004. ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM on the Turn the power switch and
engine PWB does not the main power switch off .
operate properly. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Executing U021 The storage data in the Execute U021. U021 Exe-
EEPROM on the engine cution
PWB is faulty.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the EEPROM
engine PWB and execute Replace-
U004. ment

C0170: Charger count error
The values in one of the billing counters, life counter or the scanner counter mismatch between the main side
and the engine side.

1 Checking the machine The main unit for the differ- Check the machine serial U004 Exe-
serial No. of the main PWB ent main unit is installed. Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at cution
U004, and install the correct
main PWB if the MAIN No.
differs.
2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the dif- Check the machine serial U004 Exe-
serial No. in the EEPROM ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at cution
on the engine PWB installed. U004, and install the correct
EEPROM on the engine
PWB if the ENGINE machine
serial No. differs.
3 Checking the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine U004 Exe-
serial No. differs at U004, cution
replace the main PWB and
execute U004.
4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. When the machine serial U004 Exe-
the engine PWB No.in the engine PWB differs cution
at U004, reattach the
PWB. If not repaired, replace
the EEPROM and execute
U004. Note: Be sure not to
execute U004 if the machine
serial No. differs from the
machine serial No. indicated
on the main unit to prevent
the different machine serial
No. from overwritten. (Dont-
select[Execute]and-
pressthe[Start]key.)'
PWB
Replace-
ment
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the engine PWB mismatch when turning the
power on.

1 Checking the machine The main unit for the differ- Check the machine serial U004 Exe-
serial No. of the main PWB ent main unit is installed. Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at cution
U004, and install the correct
main PWB if the MAIN No.
differs.

2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the dif- Check the machine serial U004 Exe-
serial No. in the EEPROM ferent main unit is Nos of MAIN and ENGINE at cution
on the engine PWB installed. U004, and install the correct
PWB if the ENGINE machine
serial No. differs.
3 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty. When the MAIN machine U004 Exe-
serial No. differs at U004, cution
replace the main PWB and
execute U004.
4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. When the machine serial U004 Exe-
the engine PWB No.in the engine PWB differs cution
at U004, reattach the
PWB. If not repaired, replace
the EEPROM and execute
U004. Note: Be sure not to
execute U004 if the machine
serial No. differs from the
machine serial No. indicated
on the main unit to prevent
the different machine serial
No. from overwritten. (Dont-
select[Execute]and-
pressthe[Start]key.)'
PWB
Replace-
ment
C0350: Panel PWB communication error (Electronic volume I2C communication

error)
Since NACK was received during the I2C communication, the retry was repeated 5 times and the initial com-
mand was transmitted, and then the retry was repeated 5 times again. After that, NACK was also received.

1 Resetting the main power The operation of the oper- Turn the power switch and
ation panel main PWB is the main power switch off .
faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Reinsert the following wire Electrical
connected to the opera- connectors.• Operation panel Diagram of
tion panel main PWB. PWB - Main PWB• Operation PWBs
panel PWB - NFC PWB

3 Replacing the wire The wire connecting to the Replace the following wires if Electrical
operation panel main PWB they are broken, short-cir- Diagram of
is faulty. cuited or have a ground PWBs
fault.• Operation main PWB -
Main PWB• Operation main
PWB - NFC PWB
4 Replacing the operation The operation panel main Replace the panel main Operation
panel main PWB PWB is faulty. PWB. Panel
Main PWB
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment
6 Replacing the NFC PWB The NFC PWB is faulty. Replace the NFC PWB.
C0361: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
est version. to the latest version Upgrade
3 Checking the feed drive The feed drive PWB is Reconnect the wire connec- Electrical
PWB faulty. tors between the feed drive Diagram of
PWB and the engine PWB. PWBs
Then, fix or replace the wires
if they are pinched by the
drive PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C0362: Communication error between the engine CPU and the feed ASIC
The communication with the feed ASIC failed 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The engine PWB does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
3 Checking the feed image The feed image PWB is Reconnect the wire connec- Electrical
PWB faulty. tors between the feed image Diagram of
PWB and the engine PWB. If PWBs
the wires are pinched or it
have any damage, fix or
replace them.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C0640: Hard Disk error

The HDD cannot be accessed properly.

1 (When abnormal sounds The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the HDD
occur) Replacing the HDD abnormal sounds are from Replace-
the HDD. ment
2 Checking the SATA cable The SATA cable between Reconnect the SATA cable HDD
and the wire the HDD and the main and the wire between the Replace-
PWB is not properly con- HDD and the main PWB. ment
nected.
3 Replacing the SATA cable The SATA cable between Replace the SATA cable and HDD
and the wire the HDD and the main the wire between the HDD Replace-
PWB is faulty. and the main PWB. ment
4 Initializing the HDD The HDD storage data is Execute U024 [FULL] (HDD U024 Exe-
faulty. Format). cution
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD SSD
age) already used in other used once, replace with the Replace-
unit is installed. correct SSD. ment
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD U671 Exe-
age) already used in other used once, execute U671 cution
unit is reused without exe- [FAX Data CLEAR].
cuting U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Be sure to install the SSD to SSD
age) is not properly the connector on the main Replace-
installed. PWB. ment
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Replace with the new SSD. SSD
age) is faulty. Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment
C0660: Hard Disk encryption key error

1. The encryption password input when replacing the main PWB was incorrect.2. The SSD used in the other
main unit was installed.

1 (When the issue occurs The encryption key after Execute U004 when this U004 Exe-
after replacing the main replacing the main PWB is issue occurs after replacing cution
PWB) Executing U004 faulty. the main PWB.
2 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the HDD
(abnormal sounds) abnormal sounds are from Replace-
the HDD. ment
nected.
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

C0670: Hard Disk overwriting error
The area that cannot be properly overwritten exists in a part of the HDD.

1 Replacing the HDD The HDD is faulty. Replace the HDD when the HDD
(abnormal sounds) abnormal sounds are from Replace-
the HDD. ment
nected.
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment
C0680: SSD error

The SSD cannot be accessed, or the error occurs when accessing to the SSD.

1 Checking the SSD (if lit An SSD out of specifica- Install the SSD matching the
after replacing the SSD) tion is installed. memory capacity specifica-
tion.
2 Resetting the main power The SSD is faulty. Turn the power switch and
the main power switch off .
power switch on.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The connection with the Reinstall the SSD on the SSD
main PWB is faulty. main PWB. Replace-
ment
4 Initializing the SSD The data stored in the SSD Retrieve the SSD storage U026 /
is faulty. data at U026, and then initial- U024 Exe-
ize the SSD at U024. cution
5 Replacing the SSD The SSD is faulty. Retrieve the SSD storage U026 Exe-
data at U026, and then cution /
replace the SSD. SSD
Replace-
ment

Replace-
ment
C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only
when handling the certain
image data, check if the
image data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of Acquire the jobslogifthephe- Checking
the certain file is faulty. nomenoncanbereproduced- Job & Job
byspecifyingthejobwhentheer Operation
rorwasdetected.'
PWB.
C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Upgrade
2 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not con- Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main power switch. After lation
power switch.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB Execute U600 to initialize the U600 Exe-
is faulty. FAX. cution
lation
Guide

C0840: RTC error ("Time for maintenance T" appears)
[Check at start-up]• RTC values are old.• Power has not been turned on for over 5 years.• RTC value is older
than 2000/1/1 00:01.[Periodic check per 5 minutes after start-up]• RTC values are older than the ones at the
last check.• Partial operation by power reset after C840 error and "Time for Maintenance T" is indicated.

1 Executing U906 The backup battery on the Execute U906 to reset the Date/
main PWB is faulty, and indication "Maintenance T". Timer/
so, the RTC settings are After that, set the data (RTC) Energy
erased after unplugging via the System Menu.(This Saver
the power cord. treatment needs to be per- (System
formed when unplugging and Menu)
reconnecting the power
cord.)
2 Replacing the main PWB The main PWB is faulty, or The user call regarding Main PWB
the backup battery runs C0840 is frequent even if per- Replace-
out. forming the previous treatment
ment, replace the main PWB.
C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data
is transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch off . lation
After 5s passes, reattach the Guide
FAX PWB and turn the main
switch on.
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
the latest version. Upgrade
lation
Guide
Replace-
ment
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD Execute U024 [SSD Format]. U024 Exe-
is faulty. cution

C0920: FAX file system error
The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the U600 Exe-
incorrect FAX. cution
power switch.
3 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not con- Reconnect the FAX PWB to FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main PWB. lation
Guide
Upgrade
lation
Guide
C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power Print processing is not Turn the power switch and
properly executed. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
C0980: 24V power interruption detection

1. The 24V power interruption signal was detected for 1s continuously.2. After passing 100ms since the 24V
power interruption signal was detected, the other service call error appeared. Then, the 24V power supply
recovered.

1 Resetting the main power The printing process is not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
2 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Reconnect the wire connec- Electrical
connected, or it has a tors between the LVU and the Diagram of
ground fault. engine PWB. If the wire is PWBs
pinched or has any damage,
fix or replace the wire.

3 Replacing the LVU The LVU is faulty. When the +24V generation LVU
from the LVU is not stable, Replace-
and it lowers, replace the ment
LVU.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C1000: MP lift motor error

1. The MP position switch does not turn on within 1850ms when rotating the MP lift motor in the descend
direction.2. The MP position switch does not turn off within 1600ms when rotating the MP lift motor in the
ascend direction.

1 Checking the MP bottom The MP bottom plate does If the MP bottom plate of the
plate not operate properly. MP tray does not move verti-
cally, fix or replace the lift
base.
2 Checking the lift lever The lift lever is not properly Check if the lift lever is verti-
attached. cally shifted by the lift motor
cam, or if it has the excessive
load. Then, reattach the MP
tray. Then, replace the MP
tray if it is not fixed.
3 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not Check if the MP bottom plate
rotate properly. lift-up drive gears rotate
smoothly or have no exces-
sive load. And apply the
grease to the frictional parts
and fix the related parts so
that they can rotate smoothly.
connected. connectors, and replace the Diagram of
wires when they have no con- PWBs
tinuity.• MP position switch -
Relay connector - Feed drive
PWB • Feed drive PWB -
Engine PWB
5 Replacing the MP lift motor The MP lift motor does not Replace the MP lift motor.
operate properly.
6 Checking the MP position- The MP positioning switch Reattach the MP positioning
ing switch is not properly attached. switch.
7 Replacing the MP position- The MP positioning switch Replace the MP positioning
ing switch is faulty. switch.
PWB faulty.

PWB
Replace-
ment
C1010: Lift motor 1 error

Either of the following was detected 5 times continuously.1. Lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after
passing 16s since cassette 1 was inserted.2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of
lift motor 1.3. Since lift upper limit sensor 1 turned off during printing, lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on
after passing 1s from the ascend control.

1 Checking the cassette The cassette base does Repair or replace the cas-
base not operate properly. sette base if it cannot move
vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the lift motor drive
cassette base does not gears to lift up the cassette
rotate properly. base rotate smoothly or have
no excessive load. And apply
the grease to the frictional
parts and repair the related
parts so that they can rotate
smoothly.
wires if there is no continuity.• PWBs
Lift motor 1 - Feed drive
PWB• Feed drive PWB -
Engine PWB
4 Checking lift motor 1 Lift motor 1 is faulty. Check the operation of lift Lift Motor
motor 1, and replace it if nec- Replace-
essary. ment
Lift upper limit sensor 1 -
Feed drive PWB• Feed drive
PWB - Engine PWB
6 Checking lift sensor 1 Lift upper limit sensor 1 is Reattach lift upper limit sen-
not properly attached, or it sor 1. Replace it if it is not
is faulty. fixed.
PWB faulty.

PWB
Replace-
ment
C1020: Lift motor 2 error

Either of the following was detected 5 times continuously.1. PF lift sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 16s
since cassette 2 was inserted.2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of lift motor 2.3.
Since lift sensor 2 turned off during printing, lift sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s from the ascend
control.

vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not Check if the lift motor drive
rotate properly. gears to lift up the cassette
base rotate smoothly or have
smoothly.
tinuity.• Lift motor 2 - Feed
drive PWB• Feed drive PWB
- Engine PWB
4 Checking lift motor 2 Lift motor 2 is faulty. Check the operation of lift Lift Motor
motor 2, and replace it if nec- Replace-
essary. ment
tinuity.• Lift upper limit sensor
2 - Feed drive PWB• Feed
drive PWB - Engine PWB
6 Checking lift sensor 2 Lift upper limit sensor 2 is Reattach lift upper limit sen-
not properly attached, or it sor 2. Then, replace it if it is
is faulty. not fixed.
PWB faulty.

PWB
Replace-
ment
C1030: PF lift motor 1 error (Paper Feeder)

[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)]1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 3
was inserted.2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 1.3. Since PF lift
sensor 1 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s from the
ascend control.[PF-7110 (Paper Deck)]1. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 24s since
cassette 3 was inserted.2. PF lift upper limit sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 3s from the ascend con-
trol when starting printing.

vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not Check if the drive gears to lift
rotate properly. up the cassette base rotate
smoothly or have no exces-
and repair the related parts
so that they can rotate
smoothly.
wire when it has no continu- PWBs
ity.• PF lift motor 1 - PF main
PWB
4 Checking PF lift motor 1 PF lift motor 1 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 1.
ity.• PF lift sensor 1 - PF main
PWB
6 Checking PF lift sensor 1 PF lift upper limit sensor 1 Reattach PF lift upper limit
is not properly attached, or sensor 1. Then, replace it if it
it is faulty. is not fixed.
7 Replacing the PF main The PF main PWB is Replace the PF main PWB. PF Main
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

C1040: PF lift motor 2 error (Paper Feeder)
[PF-7100 (Paper Feeder)]1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 16s since cassette 4 is
inserted.2. The lock-up signal is not released for 300ms after turning on of PF lift motor 2.3. Since PF lift sen-
sor 2 turned off during printing, PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s from the ascend
control.[PF-7110 (Paper Deck)]1. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 24s since cassette
4 is inserted.2. PF lift upper limit sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 3s from the ascend control when
starting printing.

vertically.
2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the lift motor drive
cassette base does not gears to lift up the cassette
rotate properly. base rotate smoothly or have
smoothly.
ity.• PF lift motor 2 - PF main
PWB
4 Replacing PF lift motor 2 PF lift motor 2 is faulty. Replace PF lift motor 2.
ity.• PF lift upper limit sensor
2 - PF main PWB
6 Checking PF lift sensor 2 PF lift upper limit sensor 2 Reattach PF lift upper limit
is not properly attached, or sensor 2. Then, replace it if it
it is faulty. is not fixed.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C1140: PF lift motor error (Side Feeder)

1. The PF lift upper limit sensor does not turn on after passing 30s since cassette 5 was inserted.2. The lock
signal is detected for 200ms continuously while the PF lift motor is operating.3. The PF lift upper limit sensor
does not turn on for passing 2s from the ascending control during the printing.

1 Checking the bottom plate The bottom plate does not Repair or replace the bottom ISU
operate properly. plate when it does not move Replace-
vertically. ment

2 Checking the drive gear The drive gear to lift up the Check if the drive gears to lift ISU
bottom plate does not up the bottom plate rotate Replace-
rotate properly. smoothly or have no exces- ment
and fix the related parts so
that they can rotate smoothly.
ity.• PF lift motor - PF main
PWB
4 Checking the PF lift motor The PF lift motor is faulty. Replace the PF lift motor.
ity.• PF lift upper limit sensor -
PF main PWB
6 Checking the PF lift upper The PF lift upper limit sen- Reattach the PF lift upper
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor. Then, replace it if
attached, or it is faulty. it is not fixed.
7 Checking the PF main The PF main PWB is Replace the PF main PWB. PF Main
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C1800: Paper Feeder communication error

The communication error was detected 10 times continuously.

1 Checking the connection The cable is not properly Reconnect the cable into the
connected to the main unit. main unit.
ity.• PF main PWB - Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C1820: Paper Feeder communication error (Side Feeder)
The communication error was detected 10 times continuously.

1 Checking the connection It is not properly connected Reconnect to the main unit.
to the main unit.
connected. connectors• PF main PWB - Diagram of
PF main PWB for the side PWBs
feeder
4 Checking the PF main The PF main PWB (Side Replace the PF main PWB PF Main
PWB (Side Feeder) Feeder) is faulty. (Side Feeder). PWB
Replace-
ment (Side
Feeder)
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C1900: Paper Feeder EEPROM error

The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Checking the connection It is not properly connected Reconnect the paper feeder Electrical
to the main unit. into the main unit. Also, Diagram of
reconnect the wire connec- PWBs
tors between the engine
PWB and the PF main PWB.
2 Checking the wire and the The wire or the PF main If the wires on the PF main PF Main
PF main PWB PWB is faulty. PWB are pinched or have PWB
any damage, fix or replace Replace-
the wires. When the issue is ment
not resolved, replace the PF
main PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C1920: Paper Feeder EEPROM error (Side Feeder)
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.

1 Checking the connection It is not properly connected Reconnect the side feeder Electrical
to the main unit. into the main unit. Also, Diagram of
reconnect the wire connec- PWBs
tors between the engine
PWB and the PF main PWB
for the side feeder.
2 Checking the wire The wire is not properly If the wires on the PF main PF Main
connected. PWB for the side feeder are PWB
pinched or have any damage, Replace-
fix or replace the wires. When ment (Side
the issue is not resolved, Feeder)
replace the PF main PWB for
the side feeder.
3 Checking the PF main The PF main PWB is Replace the PF main PWB PF Main
PWB faulty. (Side Feeder). PWB
Replace-
ment (Side
Feeder)
C1950: Primary transfer unit EEPROM error


1 Reinstalling the primary The primary transfer unit is Reinstall the primary transfer Primary
transfer unit not properly installed. unit. Transfer
Unit
Replace-
ment
tinuity.• Primary transfer unit -
Transfer PWB• Transfer PWB
- Feed image PWB• Feed
image PWB - Engine PWB
3 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer Primary
replacement faulty. unit. Transfer
Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.

PWB
Replace-
ment
C2201: Drum motor BK steady-state error

The ready signal is at the H level for 2s continuously after drum motor BK becomes stable.

1 Checking drum motor BK The drive of drum motor Execute U030 [Drum K] to U030 Exe-
BK is faulty. check the drum motor BK cution
operation.Check if the drive
gears rotate smoothly or
have no excessive load. And
apply the grease to the fric-
tional parts and fix the related
smoothly.
tinuity.• Drum motor BK -
Feed image PWB• Feed
image PWB - Engine PWB
3 Checking drum unit BK The drum unit is faulty. Check if the drum or the drum Drum Unit
screw is rotated manually, Replace-
and replace the drum unit if ment
not rotated.
4 Checking drum motor BK Drum motor BK is faulty. Replace drum motor BK. Main Drive
Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C2300: Fuser motor error
The ready signal is at the H level for 1.5s continuously during the fuser motor drive.

1 Checking the fuser motor The fuser motor operation Execute U030 [Fuser] to U030 Exe-
is faulty. check the fuser motor opera- cution
tion.Check if the drive gears
rotate smoothly or have no
excessive load. And apply
parts and fix the related parts
smoothly.
connected or is faulty. connectors, and replace the Diagram of
tinuity.• Fuser motor - Feed
- Engine PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
Replace-
ment
4 Replacing the fuser drive The fuser drive unit is Replace the fuser drive unit. Fuser
unit faulty. Drive Unit
Replace-
ment
5 Replacing the fuser motor The fuser motor is faulty. Replace the fuser motor. Fuser
Drive Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C2500: Paper feed motor error
The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 2s since the paper feed motor drive was started.

1 Checking the paper feed The operation of the paper Execute [Feed] at U030 to U030 Exe-
motor feed motor is faulty. check the paper feed motor cution
operation.Check if paper feed
roller and the drive gears
rotate smoothly or have no
excessive load. And apply
parts and fix the related parts
smoothly.
tinuity.• Feed motor - Feed
- Engine PWB
3 Replacing the paper feed The paper feed motor is Replace the paper feed
4 Replacing the paper feed The paper feed drive unit Replace the paper feed drive Feed Drive
drive unit is faulty. unit. Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
to the latest version Upgrade
PWB
Replace-
ment

C2600: PF feed motor error
The ready signal is not at the L level (stable rotation) after passing 1s since the PF feed motor drive started.

1 Checking the PF feed The PF feed motor is not Check the paper feed opera- U247 Exe-
motor properly connected, or it is tion by executing [2PF] or cution
faulty. [LCF] at U247 and [Motor
On].if it is faulty, reinsert the
connector of the paper feed
motor.Check if the PF paper
feed roller and the drive
gears rotate smoothly or
have no excessive load. And
apply the grease to the fric-
tional parts and fix the related
smoothly.
ity.• PF paper feed motor - PF
main PWB
3 Checking the connection The connection between Check the following wire con- Electrical
the PF main PWB and the nection, and correct the ter- Diagram of
main PWB is incorrect. minals and reinsert the PWBs
connectors all the way.If the
connection parts are
deformed or damaged,
replace them.• PF main PWB
- Engine PWB (Drawer con-
nector between the paper
feeder and the main unit)
4 Replacing the PF feed The PF feed motor is Replace the PF feed motor. PF Drive
motor faulty. Unit
Replace-
ment
5 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware or the Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
PF firmware is faulty. and the PF firmware to the Upgrade
latest version.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C2700: Primary / secondary transfer release error
The release or pressure state of the belt release motor continued for 2.3s after driving the motor in the release
or pressure direction.

1 Checking the drive compo- The belt release motor Execute U030 [Belt U030 Exe-
nents drive transmission is faulty. Lift].Repair the drive compo- cution
nents when the motor drive is
not transmitted.
connected. connectors.• Belt release Diagram of
motor - Feed image PWB• PWBs
Belt release sensor - Feed
image PWB• Feed image
PWB - Engine PWB
3 Checking the belt release The belt release sensor Reattach or replace the belt
sensor comes off. release sensor.
4 Checking the belt release The belt release motor Reattach or replace the belt
motor does not operate properly. release motor.
5 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer roller Replace the primary transfer Primary
replacement lift-up drive section is unit. Transfer
faulty. Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
7 Firmware upgrade The engine firmware is Upgrade the engine firmware Firmware
faulty. to the latest version Upgrade
PWB
Replace-
ment
C2760: Developer BK/belt motor startup error

1. The motor FG pulse of is not input for 2s continuously during the motor operation.2. The FG pulse exceed-
ing 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.3. The motor speed was out of the target speed (+/- 6.25%),
and the condition was continued for 2s.

1 Checking the developer The developer BK/belt Execute U030 [DLP(K)] to U030 Exe-
BK/belt motor drive com- motor drive transmission is check the excessive load is cution
ponents faulty. not applied to the drive gears,
roller and the belt by rotating
them. After that, clean the
drive section of the primary
transfer unit.

tinuity.• Developer BK/belt
motor - Feed image PWB•
Feed image PWB - Engine
PWB
3 Checking the developer The developer BK/belt Reattach the developer BK/ Main Drive
BK/belt motor motor is faulty. belt motor and reconnect the Unit
wire. Replace it if it is not Replace-
fixed. ment
5 Checking the feed image The feed image PWB is Reconnect the connectors on
PWB faulty. the feed image PWB. Then,
fix or replace the wires if they
are pinched by the other part
image PWB.
the engine PWB.
C2810: Waste toner motor error

The lock detection signal reaches the L level while the waste toner motor is driving (3 retries of successive
0.5s per 2ms).2. The lock detection signal does not reach L level within 50ms since the REM signal switched
from L to H (3 retry per 500ms).

1 Checking the waste toner The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box. Waste
box properly installed. Toner Box
Replace-
ment
2 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor Execute U030 [Toner Recov- U030 Exe-
motor does not operate properly. ery] to check if the excessive cution
load is not applied to the
waste toner motor. Then,
repair the part if necessary.

3 Checking the drive gear The drive gear does not Check if the excessive load is
rotate properly. not applied to the drive gears
by rotating the gears, and
clean the drive gears and the
bushing, etc.
4 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner box is Replace the waste toner box. Waste
box faulty. Toner Box
Replace-
ment
5 Checking the waste toner The waste toner motor is Reinsert the connector into
motor not properly connected. the waste toner motor.
ity.• Waste toner motor -
Engine PWB
PWB
Replace-
ment
C2840: Belt cleaning motor error

1. The motor FG pulse of is not input for 2s continuously during the motor operation.2. The FG pulse exceed-
ing 4000rpm was detected 10 times continuously.3. The motor speed was out of the target speed (+/- 6.25%),
and the condition was continued for 2s.

1 Checking the primary The primary transfer unit is Reinstall the primary transfer Primary
transfer unit not properly installed. unit. Transfer
Unit
Replace-
ment
2 Cleaning the primary The roller in the primary Remove the waste toner
transfer cleaning section transfer cleaning section remaining in the primary
does not rotate properly. transfer cleaning section.
tinuity.• Belt cleaning motor -
Transfer PWB• Transfer PWB
- Transfer connection PWB•
Transfer connection PWB -
Feed image PWB

4 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Reconnect the wire connec- Electrical
connected. tors between the feed image Diagram of
PWB and the engine PWB. If PWBs
the wires are pinched or it
have any damage, fix or
replace them.
5 Checking the belt cleaning The belt cleaning motor is Reattach or replace the belt
motor not properly attached, or it cleaning motor.
is faulty.
6 Primary transfer unit The cleaning drive section Replace the primary transfer Primary
replacement in the primary transfer unit unit. Transfer
is faulty. Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C3100: Carriage error

The position of the home position sensor (turning on / off) mismatches when turning the main power on or fin-
ishing the original scan by the scanner.

1 Unlocking the primary mir- The primary mirror unit is Unlock the primary mirror Unlocking
ror unit not unlocked. unit. Primary
Mirror Unit
2 Checking the scanner A load is applied to the Check the mirror unit opera- Optical
movement scanner movement. tion by executing U073 or Wires
shifting it manually. If it has Replace-
the excessive load, check if ment
there is the foreign objects
are on the scanner wires or
the wire drums, and clean
them. After that, apply the
grease to the scanner rails.
3 Checking the scanner The scanner wires are dirty Clean and reattach the scan- Optical
wires or come off. ner wires. Wires
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the scanner The scanner motor is Reattach the scanner motor
motor faulty. and reconnect the wire.

5 Checking the belt tension A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt
of the scanner motor scanner movement since tension properly.
the belt tension is
improper.
wire if there is no continuity.• PWBs
Scanner motor - Engine PWB
Home position motor -
Engine PWB
9 Checking the home posi- The home position sensor Replace the home position
tion sensor is faulty. sensor.
the engine PWB.
C3200: LED lamp startup error

The white reference data acquired by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is at the specified value or less.
(Over 2 LED lamps do not light.)

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp does not Check if the LED lamp lights Lamp Unit
light. by executing U061 [CCD]. If it Replace-
[Table(ChartA)].
PWB• LED PWB - CCD PWB
3 Replacing the ISU The CCD PWB is faulty. Replace the ISU and then ISU
execute U411. Replace-
ment

the engine PWB.
C3210: CIS lamp error

The input data did not exceed threshold for 5s when lighting the CIS lamp.

1 Releasing the partial oper- The partial operation is Execute resetting the partial U906 Exe-
ation executed. operation at U906. cution
2 Checking the DPCIS The CIS lamp does not Check if the CIS lamp lights DP CIS
light. by executing U061 [CIS]. If it Replace-
DPCIS and execute U091
and U411.
3 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass or the CIS Clean the CIS glass and the
and the CIS roller roller is dirty. CIS roller.
tinuity.• DPSHD PWB - DP
main PWB• DP main PWB -
Engine PWB
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C3300: CCD AGC error
The brightness of the LED lamps is darker (1 LED lamp does not turn on) or brighter than anticipated when
executing the AGC process for the CCD lamp.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp is broken. Check if the LED lamp lights Lamp Unit
by executing U061 [CCD]. If it Replace-
[Table(ChartA)].
2 Cleaning the backside of The white reference sheet Clean the white reference Contact
the contact glass is dirty. sheet at the backside of the Glass
contact glass. Detach-
ment
FFC.• LED PWB - CCD
PWB• CCD PWB -Engine
PWB
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C3310: CIS AGC error

The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed.

1 Releasing the partial oper- The partial operation is Execute resetting the partial U906 Exe-
ation executed. operation at U906. cution
2 Cleaning the CIS glass The CIS glass or the CIS Clean the CIS glass and the
and the CIS roller roller is dirty. CIS roller.

PWB
ment
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC

The communication error was detected during the communication between the scanner ASIC and the engine
CPU.

PWB
Replace-
ment
C3600: Scanner sequence error

The program internal processing error of the scanner sequence occurs.

1 Executing U021 The memory operation is Execute U021. U021 Exe-
faulty. cution
PWB
Replace-
ment

C3800: AFE error
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously when writing.The response from AFE is
not returned for 100ms.

PWB
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C4001: Polygon motor synchronization error

The ready signal is not at the L level after passing 15s since the polygon motor drive was started.

1 Checking the wire and the The wire or the FFC is not Reinsert the following wire Electrical
FFC properly connected, or connectors and reconnect the Diagram of
they are faulty. FFC. Replace the wire If PWBs
there is no continuity. Then,
replace the FFC if the FFC
terminals are deformed or the
FFC is broken.• LSU cleaning
motor - APC PWB (LSU)•
APC PWB (LSU) - Engine
PWB
2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of LSU
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and reat- Replace-
tach or replace the LSU if it ment
does not rotate properly.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C4011: Polygon motor steady-state error
The ready signal is at the H level for 15s continuously after the polygon motor drive becomes stable.

PWB
2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of LSU
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and reat- Replace-
tach or replace the LSU if it ment
does not rotate properly.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C4101: BD initialization error

The BD signal was not detected for 1s after driving the polygon motor.

FFC.• APC PWB (LSU) -
Engine PWB
2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU LSU
diode is faulty. while paying attention to the Replace-
static electricity. ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C4201: BD steady-state error
The BD signal is not detected during the laser lighting.

Engine PWB
2 Checking the LSU The BD sensor or the laser Reinstall or replace the LSU LSU
diode is faulty. while paying attention to the Replace-
static electricity. ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C4600: LSU cleaning motor error

The LSU cleaning motor lock-up was detected, or the motor continued to be shifted in the same direction for
8s or more.

1 Executing the Laser Scan- The LSU cleaning drive Execute Laser Scanner Adjust-
ner Cleaning gear and the cleaning pad Cleaning. ment/
have the load and so they Mainte-
are not shifted smoothly. nance
Menu
2 Cleaning the LSU clean- The LSU cleaning drive Clean the LSU cleaning drive
ing drive gear and the gear and the cleaning pad gear and the cleaning pad.
cleaning pad have the load and so they
are not shifted smoothly.
3 LSU replacement The LSU cleaning drive Replace the LSU. LSU
gear, cleaning wire or the Replace-
cleaning pad are ment
deformed, or they are
faulty.
PWB

5 Checking the LSU clean- The LSU cleaning motor is Reattach the LSU cleaning
ing motor not properly attached, or it motor and reconnect the con-
is faulty. nector. Then, replace it if it is
not fixed.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C4701: VIDEO ASIC device error 1

The communication with VIDEO ASIC failed 10 times continuously.(This is the value mismatching error by try-
ing to read the data from the same address after writing the data to VIDEO ASIC.)

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn the power switch and
engine is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware Firmware
est version. and the engine firmware to Upgrade
the latest version.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C4801: LSU type mismatch error

The LSU mismatches with the main unit.

1 Checking the LSU The different type LSU is Install the correct LSU. LSU
installed. Replace-
ment
Engine PWB
3 LSU replacement The APC PWB is faulty. Replace the LSU. LSU
Replace-
ment

C5101: Main high-voltage error BK
1. When measuring the inflow electric currents changing Vpp to 3 steps during the Vpp adjustment, the gap
between the 0 electric current value and the 2nd electric current value is at the reference value or less.2. The
detected ldc is poor even if applying Vpp[C]. (5μA or less)

1 Reinstalling the main high- The main charger roller Reinstall the main high-volt- Main High-
voltage PWB contacts of the main high- age PWB. voltage
voltage PWB are not prop- PWB
erly contacted, and so, the Replace-
proper voltage is not ment
applied.
2 Checking the drum unit The drum or the drum Check if the drum or the drum Drum Unit
and the developer unit screw is not rotated prop- screw is rotated manually, Replace-
erly due to the excessive and replace the drum unit if ment
load. not rotated.
3 Replacing drum motor BK Drum motor BK is faulty. Replace drum motor BK. Main Drive
Unit
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the main charger The proper voltage is not Clean the high-voltage con- Main
unit applied since the foreign tact of the main charger unit, Charger
objects adhered on the and apply conductive grease Unit
high-voltage contact of the to the roller shaft. Replace-
main charger unit. ment
5 Main charger unit replace- The proper voltage is not Replace the main charger Main
ment applied since the high-volt- unit and execute U930. Charger
age contact of the main Unit
charger unit is deformed or Replace-
damaged. ment
ity.• Main high-voltage PWB -
Engine PWB
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C5130: Primary transfer high-voltage error
When adjusting the feedback, the detected electric current value exceeds the upper limit or is less than the
lower limit, or the adjustment result is 300V or less or is 2,900V or more.

transfer unit not properly installed. unit so that the connector Transfer
firmly connects. Unit
Replace-
ment
2 Checking the high-voltage Foreign material adheres Clean the high-voltage con-
contact on the high-voltage contact of the primary transfer
tacts of the primary trans- roller, and apply conductive
fer roller, and so, the grease to the roller shaft.
proper voltage is not
applied.
3 Reinstalling the transfer The high-voltage contacts Reinstall the transfer high- Transfer
high-voltage PWB on the transfer high-volt- voltage PWB. High-volt-
age PWB are faulty, and age PWB
so, the proper voltage is Replace-
not applied. ment
Engine PWB• Transfer high-
voltage PWB - Feed image
PWB
age PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C6000: IH heating error 1
1. The center thermistor does not detect 100°C / 212°F or more after passing 60s during the warm-up.2. The
center thermistor does not detect the specified temperature (ready indication temperature) after it detected
100°C / 212°F during the warm-up.

1 Executing U169 The IH setting mis- Set the destination same as U169 Exe-
matches the power supply the voltage of the IH PWB at cution
specification. U169.
2 Removing foreign material There is foreign material Remove foreign material if it Fuser Unit
between the fuser unit and is on between the fuser unit Replace-
the fuser IH unit. Or, for- and the fuser IH unit, or on ment
eign material adheres on the heat roller. Then, reinstall
the heat roller. the fuser unit.
3 Reinstalling the fuser unit The drawer connector of Check if the pins of the Fuser Unit
the fuser unit is not prop- drawer connector of the fuser Replace-
erly inserted. unit do not bend. If it bend, ment
replace the fuser unit. When
the pins are proper, reinstall
the fuser unit so that the
drawer connector firmly con-
nects.
Drawer connector of the fuser
unit - Feed image PWB•
PWB• Fuser IH unit - IH
PWB• IH PWB - Engine PWB
6 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature cannot Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
be detected properly due Replace-
to the broken thermostat or ment
the thermistor error.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
Fuser IH unit - IH PWB• IH
PWB - Engine PWB

10 Replacing the IH PWB The IH PWB is faulty. Replace the IH PWB. IH PWB
Replace-
ment
C6020: Center thermistor high temperature error

The center thermistor detects 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

nects.
tinuity.• Drawer connector of
the fuser unit - Feed image
PWB• Feed image PWB -
Engine PWB
to the thermistor error, etc. ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6030: Center thermistor broken

The center thermistor temperature is detected at less than 41°C / 104°F for 1s when the edge thermistor
detects 100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.


nects.
Engine PWB
5 Replacing the fuser unit The temperature is not Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
properly detected due to Replace-
the broken wire or the ment
thermistor error in the fuser
unit.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6050: Center thermistor low temperature error

The center thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

1 Changing the wall outlet The power voltage Connect the power cord to a
descends by 10% or more different wall outlet if the
of the rated voltage when power supply voltage
printing. descends by 10% or more of
the rated voltage.

nects.
Engine PWB
unit.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
ity.• IH PWB - Engine PWB
Replace-
ment
ity.• Fuser IH unit - IH PWB
12 Replacing the fuser IH unit The fuser IH unit is faulty. Replace the fuser IH unit. Fuser IH
Unit
Replace-
ment

C6120: Press thermistor high temperature error
The press thermistor detected 210°C / 410°F or more for 1s.

nects.
Engine PWB
to the thermistor error, etc. ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6130: Press thermistor broken

1. The press thermistor detected less than 35°C / 95°F for 60s continuously during the warm-up.2. The press
thermistor detected less than 35°C / 95°F for 1s continuously after finishing the warm-up.

nects.

Engine PWB
unit.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6200: IH heating error 2

1. The edge thermistor does not detect 80°C / 176°F or more within 60s since starting the warm-up.2. The
edge thermistor does not detect the specified temperature (ready indication temperature) within 420s after it
detected 100°C / 212°F during the warm-up.

nects.

Engine PWB
unit.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
Replace-
ment
Unit
Replace-
ment
C6220: Edge thermistor high temperature error

The edge thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

nects.

Engine PWB
unit.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
Unit
Replace-
ment
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan
motor properly attached. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
C6230: Edge thermistor broken

The edge thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor detected
100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.


nects.
Engine PWB
to the heater broken or the ment
thermistor error.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6250: Edge thermistor low temperature error

The edge thermistor detected less than 80°C / 176°F for 1s during printing.

nects.

Engine PWB
thermistor error.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
Replace-
ment
Unit
Replace-
ment
C6320: Middle thermistor high temperature error

The middle thermistor detected 245°C / 473°F or more for 1s.

nects.

Engine PWB
the wire short-circuit or the ment
unit.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
Unit
Replace-
ment
8 Reattaching the edge fan The edge fan motor is not Reattach the edge fan motor. Fan
motor properly attached. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
C6330: Middle thermistor broken

The middle thermistor detects less than 41°C / 105.8°F for 1s continuously when the center thermistor or the
edge thermistor detects 100°C / 212°F or more during the warm-up.

nects.

Engine PWB
thermistor error.
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
Unit
Replace-
ment
C6410: Uninstalled fuser unit

The unit identification code is mismatched. The unit for other models is installed.

1 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit for other Install the fuser unit for the Fuser Unit
models is installed. applicable models. Replace-
ment
nects.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Upgrade
Engine PWB

Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6600: Fuser belt rotation error

The belt rotation pulse is not input for 1.8s continuously.

nects.
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit parts such Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
as the fuser belt, the belt Replace-
rotation detecting system, ment
or the belt rotation sensor
are faulty
3 Applying the grease The load increases due to Check the fuser motor opera- U030 Exe-
the lack of grease on the tion by executing U030 cution
bushing or the gears for [Fuser], and apply the grease
the fuser motor. to the bushing or the gear if it
does not rotate smoothly.
Fuser motor - Feed drive
Engine PWB• Feed image
PWB - Engine PWB
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty.

PWB faulty. PWB.
9 Replacing the fuser drive The fuser drive gear is Replace the fuser drive gear.
gear faulty.
C6610: Fuser pressure release sensor error

1. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn off after passing 3s from the instruction to reduce the fuser
pressure by the fuser release motor, or to relocate the paper jam processing position.2. The fuser pressure
release sensor does not turn on after passing 6s from the instruction to increase the fuser pressure by the
fuser release motor.3. The lock-up signal of the fuser release motor is low for 200ms. (However, when shifting
to the paper jam processing mode, the fuser release motor is stopped but the service call error does not
appear if it is in between the stop position and the position in front of the stop position by 500ms.)

nects.
2 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Execute U030 [Fuser Electrical
connected or is faulty. Release] to check the fuser Diagram of
release motor operation. If it PWBs
reinsert the following wire
connectors. Then, replace
the wires if there is no conti-
nuity.• Fuser release motor
(in the fuser unit) - Feed drive
Engine PWB• Drawer con-
nector of the fuser unit - Feed
PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty at Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
the fuser pressure release Replace-
mechanism or the fuser ment
pressure release sensor .
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment

PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Replacing the fuser The fuser release motor is Replace the fuser release Fuser
release motor faulty. motor. Drive Unit
Replace-
ment
9 Replacing the gear in the The gear of the fuser pres- Replace the gears in the
fuser pressure releasing sure releasing mechanism fuser pressure releasing
system at the main unit at the main unit is faulty. mechanism at the main unit.
C6620: IH core motor rotation error

1. Turning on of the IH position sensor is not detected within 5s after the IH core motor drives while the IH
position sensor is off at the home position detecting operation.2. Turning off/on of the IH position sensor is not
detected within 5s after the IH core motor drives while the IH position sensor is on at the home position detect-
ing operation.3. Turning off of the IH position sensor is not detected within the specified pulse after the IH core
motor drives while the IH position sensor is on when shifting to the small size paper position.

1 Checking the fuser IH unit The connector of the fuser Check if the connector pins of
IH unit is not properly con- the fuser IH unit do not bend.
nected. If the pins bend, fix
them.Next, reinstall the fuser
IH unit so that the connector
firmly connects.
2 Checking the IH position- The IH positioning sensor Reattach the IH positioning
ing sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
3 Cleaning the IH positioning The IH positioning sensor Clean the IH positioning sen-
sensor cannot detect properly sor.
since it is dirty.
tinuity.• IH core motor (Fuser
IH unit) - Feed drive PWB•
Feed drive PWB - Engine
PWB
5 Replacing the fuser IH unit The IH positioning sensor Replace the fuser IH unit. Fuser IH
or the IH core motor is Unit
faulty. Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.

PWB
Replace-
ment
C6740: IH PWB high temperature error (IGBT2)

The IGBT temperature acquired from the power microprocessor detected is 115°C / 239°F or more for 1s con-
tinuously.

1 Checking the IH PWB fan The connection of the IH Execute U037 [IH PWB] and U037 Exe-
motor PWB fan motor, or the IH check the IH PWB fan motor cution
PWB fan motor is faulty. operation.If it does not prop-
erly operate, go to step 2
"Connecting the IH PWB fan
motor". If it properly operates,
go to step 3 "Replacing the IH
PWB fan motor".
2 Connecting the IH PWB The connector of the IH Reinsert the connector of the
fan motor PWB fan motor wire is not IH PWB fan motor.
inserted securely.
3 Replacing the IH PWB fan The IH PWB fan motor is Replace the IH PWB fan Fan
motor faulty. motor. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C6760: Fuser IH input excessive electric current error
The input current acquired from the power microprocessor continued at 10A or more (for 220-240V) for
200ms.

1 Checking the fuser unit The fuser belt is faulty. Detach the fuser unit and Fuser Unit
check if the fuser belt is not Replace-
faulty. If there is any damage, ment
replace the fuser unit.
Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C6770: IH low power error

The IH PWB detects 30% or less of the setting power value for the certain time after the fuser heating is
started.

tinuity.• Fuser IH unit - IH
PWB• IH PWB - Engine PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.

6 Checking the cause The input power is Change the input power.
depending on the input improper.
power
(The coil is broken.) Unit
Replace-
ment
C6900: Edge fan motor error

The lock-up was detected for 20s continuously when driving the fan motor.

1 Checking the edge fan The wire is not properly Execute U037 [Fuser Edge], U037 Exe-
motor connected or is faulty. and reinsert the connector of cution
the paper conveying unit
(edge fan motor) into the
relay connector at the main
unit side if the edge fan motor
does not operate properly.
tinuity.• Edge fan motor -
PWB - Engine PWB
3 Replacing the edge fan The edge fan motor is Replace the edge fan motor. Fan
motor faulty. Motors
Attach-
able Direc-
tion
PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C6910: Engine firmware unexpected error
1. The engine stabilization control was continued for 1 hour.2. The paper feed motor does not drive after pass-
ing 3s or more when driving the drum motor or the developer BK/belt motor.3. Only the high-voltage remote
signal turned on while the drum was stopped.4. The main charger bias turned off while the developer bias was
on.

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
3 Checking the engine PWB The engine PWB is not Retighten the screws secur- Engine
properly attached or con- ing the engine PWB so that it PWB
nected. can ground securely, and Replace-
reinsert the connectors all the ment
way.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C6920: Eject/IH fan motor error


1 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Execute U037 to check the Electrical
connected or is faulty. operation of the eject/IH fan Diagram of
motors. If they do not operate PWBs
properly, reconnect the fol-
lowing wire connectors. If
there is no continuity, replace
the wires.• Front/Middle/Rear
eject IH fan motors - Feed
PWB - Engine PWB
2 Checking the eject/IH fan The eject/IH fan motors do Clean the following fan
motors not properly operate. motors, and remove foreign
material if it adheres on the
fan motors. Then, replace the
fan motors if they are not
fixed.• Front eject/IH fan
motor• Middle eject/IH fan
motor• Rear eject/IH fan
motor

PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C6950: IH PWB communication error

1. The communication between the IH PWB and the engine PWB does not succeed at the initial communica-
tion. (The retry is executed 10 times in 150ms intervals.)2. The communication between the IH PWB and the
engine PWB does not succeed for 500ms after the initial communication success.

1 Resetting the main power The power startup delays. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
ity.• LVU - IH PWB
4 Checking the power supply The abnormal electric Plug the power cord into
voltage noise is mixed in the power another wall outlet.
supply voltage.
5 Checking the LVU The fuse on the LVU is Check the continuity of the LVU
broken. fuse (F002) on the LVU. Replace-
Then, replace the LVU if ment
there is no continuity.
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C6980: Fuser unit EEPROM error
The EEPROM in the fuser unit cannot be accessed since the machine condition matches to either of the fol-
lowing.1. No response from the device is detected for 5s or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing
the data.2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.3. The reading data and the writing
data mismatch 8 times continuously.

nects.
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6990: Fuser power source destination error

The information mismatches between the engine backup and the IH PWB.

1 Executing U169 The voltage setting at Set the destination same as U169 Exe-
U169 mismatches the volt- the voltage of the IH PWB at cution
age of the IH PWB. U169.
PWB
Replace-
ment

C7001: Container motor error
1. The ready signal does not turn on after passing 2s since the container motor was started up.2. The ready
signal is off for 2s continuously after the container motor was stabilized.

1 Replacing the toner con- The toner container locks Replace the toner container. Toner
tainer up and is not rotated. Container
Replace-
ment
2 Checking the toner con- The toner container drive Check the container motor U030 Exe-
tainer drive components components are not oper- operation by executing U030 cution
ated properly, or the [Container Mix]. If it does not
excessive load is applied operate properly, clean the
to it. drive gears and the couplings
in the container drive unit and
apply the grease to them.
ity.• Container motor - Feed
image PWB
4 Checking the toner con- The toner container motor Reattach the container motor Container
tainer motor is faulty. and reconnect the wire. Motor
Replace it if it is not fixed. Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7101: T/C sensor BK error

For the specified value of the initial toner stored in the EEPROM of the developer unit, the output value of the
T/C sensor is out of the range between +100 (undetection toner) and -1000 (Coming off of the sensor connec-
tor). And that status was detected 3 times continuously.

1 Reinstalling the developer The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit BK Developer
unit properly installed. so that the connector firmly Unit
connects. Replace-
ment
tinuity.• Drum/developer relay
PWB - Feed image PWB•
PWB

3 Replacing the drive gear The drive gear for devel- Replace the drive gear for
oper unit BK is damaged. developer unit BK.
(The spiral is not rotated.)
4 Developer unit replace- Developer unit BK (T/C Replace the developer unit Developer
ment sensor BK) is faulty. BK. Unit
Replace-
ment
6 Replacing the drum/devel- The drum/developer relay Replace the drum/developer Drum/
oper relay PWB PWB is faulty. relay PWB. Developer
Relay
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C7200: Inner thermistor broken (developer)

The input sampling value of T/C sensor BK (inner thermistor) is at the reference value or more.

connects. Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

Relay
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)

The input sampling value of T/C sensor BK (inner thermistor) is the reference value or less.

connects. Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
Relay
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.

C7221: LSU thermistor broken
The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or more.

FFC.• LSU - Engine PWB
2 LSU replacement The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU. LSU
is faulty. Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C7231: LSU thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is at the reference value or less.

FFC.• LSU - Engine PWB
2 LSU replacement The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU. LSU
is faulty. Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C7241: Belt thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or more.

Replace-
ment

tinuity.• Transfer PWB -
Transfer connection PWB•
Feed image PWB
Unit
Replace-
ment
5 Replacing the transfer con- The transfer connection Replace the transfer connec-
nection PWB PWB is faulty. tion PWB.
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7251: Belt thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the belt thermistor is at the reference value or less.

Replace-
ment
tinuity.• Transfer PWB -
Transfer connection PWB•
Feed image PWB
Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.

C7301: Toner motor BK error
The toner supply motor drive stopped and waited for 0.1s when the pulse plate of the toner supply screw
could not detect the pulse for 2s during the toner supply motor operation. Even if these operations repeated 3
times continuously, the pulse could not be detected.

1 Checking the toner supply The toner supply screw is Check if the toner is not
drive unit not rotated properly due to clogged inside the toner sup-
the excessive load. (The ply drive unit by rotating the
pulse plate is not rotated.) toner supply screw manually.
Then, clean the unit if neces-
sary.
Toner motor BK - Feed image
PWB
3 Replacing the toner sup- The toner supply drive unit Replace the toner supply Toner Sup-
ply drive unit (toner motor BK or toner drive unit. ply Drive
level sensor BK) is faulty. Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7320: Toner container detection connector error

Disconnection of the toner container detection connector was detected when closing the toner container
cover.

ity.• Container drive unit -
Feed image PWB
2 Checking the container The wire is not properly Reconnect the connectors in Container
drive unit connected or is faulty. the container drive unit if they Drive Unit
are disconnected. Then, Replace-
replace the container drive ment
unit when the issue is not
resolved.
PWB faulty. PWB.

C7420: Uninstalled primary transfer unit
1. Unit identification code mismatches.2. The unit for other models is installed.

1 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer unit Install the primary transfer Primary
replacement for other models is unit for the applicable mod- Transfer
installed. els. Unit
Replace-
ment
2 Reinstalling the primary The connector of the pri- Reinstall the primary transfer Primary
transfer unit mary transfer unit is not unit so that the connector Transfer
firmly connected. firmly connects. Unit
Replace-
ment
ity.• Transfer connection
PWB - Feed image PWB
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Reinstall the engine firmware. Firmware
Upgrade
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7470: Toner sucking fan motor error


ity.• Toner absorption fan
motor - Feed image PWB
2 Checking the toner suck- The fan motor does not Clean the toner sucking fan Fan
ing fan motor rotate properly since it is motor and check if the fan is Motors
dirty. rotated manually. Then, reat- Attach-
tach it. able Direc-
tion
3 Replacing the toner suck- The toner sucking fan Execute U037 [Toner] to Fan
ing fan motor motor is faulty. check the operation. If the Motors
toner absorption fan motor Attach-
does not properly operate, able Direc-
replace it. tion

PWB faulty. PWB.
C7480: Power source fan motor error


ity.• Power source fan motor -
Engine PWB
2 Checking the power The fan motor does not Clean the power source fan Fan
source fan motor rotate properly since it is motor and check if the fan is Motors
dirty. rotated manually. Then, reat- Attach-
tach it. able Direc-
tion
3 Replacing the power The power source fan Replace the power source Fan
source fan motor motor is faulty. fan motor if it does not oper- Motors
ate properly when executing Attach-
U037 [LVU]. able Direc-
tion
PWB
Replace-
ment
C7490: Eject fan motor error


ity.• Eject fan motor (Fuser
drive unit) - Feed image PWB
2 Checking the eject fan The fan motor does not Clean the eject fan motor and Fan
motor rotate properly since it is check if the fan is rotated Motors
dirty. manually. Then, reattach it. Attach-
able Direc-
tion

3 Replacing the eject fan The eject fan motor is If the eject fan motor does not Fan
motor faulty. operate properly when exe- Motors
cuting U037 [Exit Cooling], Attach-
replace it. able Direc-
tion
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7601: Front ID sensor error

• Dark potential error: The sensor output value (FrontDarkP and FrontDardS) is less than 0.15V, or more than
0.80V.• Light potential error: FrontBrightS is less than FrontDarkS, or FrontBrightP is less than Front-
DarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the front ID sen- The front ID sensor is dirty. Clean the front ID sensor sur-
sor face.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does If the ID sensor shutter does U033 Exe-
shutter not operate properly. not operate properly when cution
executing U033 [ID Sensor],
reattach the cleaning sole-
noid.
tinuity.• Cleaning solenoid -
PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is Replace the cleaning sole-
solenoid faulty. noid.
5 Checking the front ID sen- The front ID sensor is not Reattach the front ID sensor.
sor properly attached.
ity.• Front ID sensor - Feed
drive PWB
7 Replacing the front D sen- The front ID sensor is Check if the value of U465 U465 Exe-
sor faulty. [T7 CTD] is fluctuated before cution
and after Calibration, and
replace the front ID sensor if
it was not fluctuated (uncali-
brated).

PWB faulty.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C7602: Rear ID sensor error

• Dark potential error: The sensor output value (FrontDarkP and FrontDardS) is less than 0.15V, or more than
0.80V.• Light potential error: FrontBrightS is less than FrontDarkS, or FrontBrightP is less than Front-
DarkP+0.5V.

1 Cleaning the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is dirty. Clean the rear ID sensor sur-
sor face.
noid.
tinuity.• Cleaning solenoid -
PWB - Engine PWB
4 Replacing the cleaning The cleaning solenoid is Replace the cleaning sole-
solenoid faulty. noid.
5 Checking the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is not Reattach the rear ID sensor.
sor properly attached.
ity.• Rear ID sensor - Feed
drive PWB
7 Replacing the rear ID sen- The rear ID sensor is Check if the value of U465 U465 Exe-
sor faulty. [T7 CTD] is fluctuated before cution
and after Calibration, and
replace the front ID sensor if
it was not fluctuated (uncali-
brated).
PWB faulty.

PWB
Replace-
ment
C7611: Bias calibration read value error (Black)

The ID sensors cannot properly read the patch density on the primary transfer belt when executing Calibra-
tion.

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
2 Cleaning the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the ID sensor surface.
3 Executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute U464 [Calib]. U464 Exe-
cution
noid.
5 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Clean the surface of the pri- Primary
transfer unit surface is dirty. mary transfer belt, or replace Transfer
the primary transfer unit. Unit
Replace-
ment
6 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is not prop- Reattach the ID sensor and
erly attached, or the wire is reconnect the wire.
7 (When the image is too The contacts of the main Reinstall the main high-volt- Main High-
light) Checking the main high-voltage PWB and the age PWB and the transfer voltage
high-voltage PWB and the transfer high-voltage PWB high-voltage PWB. PWB /
transfer high-voltage PWB are faulty, and so, the Transfer
proper voltage is not High-volt-
applied. age PWB
Replace-
ment
8 (When the print is too light) The parts in the drum unit, Clean or replace the drum Drum Unit
Cleaning or replacing the developer unit or the LSU unit, developer unit and the / Devel-
drum unit / developer unit / are dirty or worn down. LSU if the output image is too oper Unit /
LSU light. LSU
Replace-
ment
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
est version. latest version. Upgrade

10 Checking the feed drive The feed drive PWB is Reconnect the connectors on Electrical
PWB faulty. the feed drive PWB wires. Diagram of
Then, fix or replace the wires PWBs
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.
C7800: Outer thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or
more.

ity.• Temperature/humidity
sensor - Engine PWB
2 Replacing the tempera- The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/
ture/humidity sensor sensor is faulty. humidity sensor.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the temperature/humidity sensor (outer thermistor) is at the reference value or
less.

ity.• Temperature/humidity
sensor - Engine PWB

2 Replacing the tempera- The temperature/humidity Replace the temperature/
ture/humidity sensor sensor is faulty. humidity sensor.
PWB
Replace-
ment
C7901: Drum unit BK EEPROM error


1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn the power switch and
EEPROM in the drum unit the main power switch off .
is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Reinstalling the drum unit The drum unit is not prop- Reinstall drum unit BK so that Drum Unit
erly installed. the connector firmly con- Replace-
nects. ment
PWB
4 Drum unit replacement The EEPROM in the drum Replace drum unit BK. Drum Unit
unit is faulty. Replace-
ment
Relay
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB.

C7911: Developer unit BK EEPROM error

1 Resetting the main power The data stored in the Turn the power switch and
EEPROM in the developer the main power switch off .
unit is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Reinstalling the developer The developer unit is not Reinstall developer unit BK Drum Unit
unit properly installed. so that the connector firmly Replace-
connects. ment
PWB
4 Developer unit replace- The EEPROM in the devel- Replace the developer unit Developer
ment oper unit is faulty. BK. Unit
Replace-
ment
Relay
PWB
Replace-
ment
7 Checking the feed image The feed image PWB is Replace the feed image
PWB faulty. PWB.
C7941: LSU EEPROM error

1. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.2. The reading data and the writing data mis-
match 8 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in the Turn the power switch and
LSU is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.

Engine PWB
3 LSU replacement The APC PWB (LSU) is Replace the LSU. LSU
faulty. Replace-
ment
C7970: Weight detection sensor error

The sensor output value was at the specified value (54) or less and that state continued for 500ms.

1 Reinstalling the waste The waste toner box is not Reinstall the waste toner box Waste
toner box properly installed. into the main unit slowly, and Toner Box
then check if it moves verti- Replace-
cally. ment
2 Checking the wire The relay connector which Rearrange the wire alignment Connec-
connects between the so that the wire of the relay tion of
engine PWB and the waste connector at the waste toner Relay
toner motor / weight detec- box unit backside is not Connector
tion sensor is loose or dis- excessively stretched. Then, of Waste
connected since the wire reconnect the relay connec- Toner Box
of the relay connector was tor. Unit
stretched excessively at
the backside of the waste
toner box unit during the
maintenance work.
3 Checking the weight The weight detection sen- Reconnect the weight detec-
detection sensor and the sor is not properly con- tion sensor, or correct the
actuator nected, or the actuator is position of the actuator.
not properly attached.
4 Checking the weight The weight detection Reattach the weight detection
detection spring spring is not properly spring.
attached.
5 Cleaning the weight detec- The weight detection sen- Clean the weight detection
tion sensor and the neigh- sor and the neighboring sensor and the neighboring
boring parts parts are dirty. parts with an air-blower.
6 Executing U155 The calibration of the Execute the waste toner cali- U155 Exe-
weight detection sensor bration at U155. cution
was not executed properly.

7 Replacing the waste toner The waste toner box is Replace the waste toner box. Waste
box faulty. Toner Box
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C8010: PH motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher with the punch unit
1. The PH home position sensor does not turn on after passing 200ms when driving the PH motor.2. The
pulse plate does not count the specified pulse after passing 300ms since the punch operation was started.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch unit is not shifted
assembled properly. manually, repair the part that
restricts the operation.
2 Checking the punch cam The punch cam drive com- Reattach the punch cam
drive components ponents are not properly drive components. Then,
attached, or they are faulty. replace them if they are not
fixed.
tinuity.• PH motor - PH main
PWB• PH main PWB - DF
main PWB
4 Replacing the PH motor The PH motor is faulty. Replace the PH motor if it U240 Exe-
does not operate properly cution
when checking the operation
at U240.
5 Checking the PH home The PH home position Execute U241 to check the U241 Exe-
position sensor sensor is not properly PH home position sensor cution
attached, or it is faulty. operation. If it does not oper-
ate properly, reattach it.When
it is not fixed, replace the PH
home position sensor.
6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the PH firmware to Firmware
est version. the latest version. Upgrade
7 Replacing the PH main The PH main PWB is Replace the PH main PWB.
PWB faulty.

PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

The positioning alignment of the home position is not completed within 3s when initializing or waiting the home
position.

fixed.
main PWB
at U240.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

The home position detection does not turn off within 50ms when initializing the home position.

fixed.
main PWB
at U240.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8090: DF paddle motor error

1. The DF paddle sensor does not turn on after passing 1s when driving the DF paddle motor.2. The DF pad-
dle sensor does not turn off when driving the DF paddle motor for 1s.

1 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle drive com- Reattach the DF paddle drive
drive components ponents are not properly components. Then, replace
attached, or it is faulty. them if they are not fixed.
tinuity.• DF paddle motor - DF
main PWB• DF paddle sen-
sor - DF main PWB

3 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle motor is Replace the DF paddle motor U240 Exe-
motor faulty. if it does not operate properly cution
at U240.
4 Replacing the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Replace the DF paddle sen- U241 Exe-
sensor faulty. sor if it does not operate cution
properly when checking the
operation at U241.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8100: DF eject release motor error

1. The DF paper stack eject switch does not turn on after passing 1s when driving the DF eject release
motor.2. The DF paper stack eject switch does not turn off when driving the DF eject release motor for 1s.

1 Checking the DF paper The eject guide in the DF Correct the DF paper stack
stack eject unit paper stack eject unit is eject unit.
deformed.
2 Checking the DF paper The DF paper stack eject Reattach the DF paper stack
stack eject unit drive com- unit drive components are eject unit drive components.
ponents not properly attached, or Then, replace them if they
they are faulty. are not fixed.
tinuity.• DF eject release
motor - DF main PWB• DF
paper stack eject switch - DF
main PWB
4 Replacing the DF eject The DF eject release Replace the DF eject release U240 Exe-
release motor motor is faulty. motor if it does not operate cution
operation at U240.
5 Checking the DF paper The DF paper stack eject Reattach the DF paper stack U241 Exe-
stack eject switch switch is not properly eject switch and execute cution
attached, or it is faulty. U241 to check the operation.
If it does not properly oper-
ate, replace the switch.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

C8110: DF shift motor 1 error
DF shift sensor 1 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 1.

1 Checking the front shift The front shift guide is not If the front shift guide is not
guide assembled properly. shifted manually, repair the
part that restricts the opera-
tion.
2 Checking the front shift The front shift guide drive Reattach the front shift guide
guide drive components components are not prop- drive components. Then,
erly attached, or they are replace them if they are not
faulty. fixed.
tinuity.• DF shift motor 1 - DF
main PWB• DF shift sensor 1
- DF main PWB
4 Replacing DF shift motor 1 DF shift motor 1 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 1 if it U240 Exe-
at U240.
5 Checking DF shift sensor 1 DF shift sensor 1 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 1 U241 Exe-
properly attached, or it is and execute U241 to check cution
faulty. the operation. If it does not
properly operate, replace the
sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8120: DF shift motor 2 error

DF shift sensor 2 does not turn on even if shifting 160mm when driving DF shift motor 2.

1 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide is not
tion.
2 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide drive Reattach the rear shift guide
faulty. fixed.

DF shift motor 2 - DF main
PWB• DF shift sensor 2 - DF
main PWB
4 Checking DF shift motor 2 DF shift motor 2 is faulty. Replace DF shift motor 2 if it U240 Exe-
at U240.
5 Checking DF shift sensor 2 DF shift sensor 2 is not Reattach DF shift sensor 2. U241 Exe-
properly attached, or it is Then, execute U241 to check cution
sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8130: DF shift release motor error

1. The DF shift release sensor does not turn on for passing 1s when the DF shift release motor is driving.2.
The DF shift release sensor does not turn on even if the DF shift release motor drives for 3s toward the direc-
tion where the home position is detected.3. The DF shift release sensor does not turn off even if it drives for 3s
toward the direction where the home position is not detected.

1 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide is not If the rear shift guide is not
tion.
2 Checking the rear shift The rear shift guide drive Reattach the rear shift guide
faulty. fixed.
DF shift release motor - DF
main PWB• DF shift release
sensor - DF main PWB
4 Checking the DF shift The DF shift release motor Replace the DF shift release U240 Exe-
release motor is faulty. motor if it does not operate cution
operation at U240.

5 Checking the DF shift The DF shift release sen- Reattach the DF shift release U241 Exe-
release sensor sor is not properly sensor. Then, execute U241 cution
attached, or it is faulty. to check the operation. If it
replace the sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8140: DF tray motor error 1

Object: 4000-sheet finisher or 1000-sheet finisher
The DF tray sensor or the DF tray upper side sensor does not turn on after passing 30s when ascending the
DF main tray or the DF tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray / DF tray If the DF main tray/DF tray is
/ DF tray is not assembled properly. not shifted manually verti-
cally, repair the part that
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray / DF tray Reattach the DF main tray /
/ DF tray drive components drive components are not DF tray drive components.
properly attached, or they Then, replace them if they
are faulty. are not fixed.
wires there is no continuity.• PWBs
DF tray motor - DF main
PWB• DF tray sensor 4 - DF
main PWBOr, • DF tray sen-
sor 5 (with the folding unit) -
DF main PWB
4 Replacing the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if U240 Exe-
motor it does not operate properly cution
at U240.
5 (When installing the 1000- The wire is not properly Reinsert the following wire Electrical
sheet finisher) Checking connected or is faulty. connectors, and replace the Diagram of
the wire wires when they have no con- PWBs
tinuity.• DF tray sensor 1 - DF
main PWB• DF tray sensor 2
- DF main PWB

6 (When installing the 4000- The wire is not properly Reinsert the following wire Electrical
sheet finisher) Checking connected or is faulty. connectors, and replace the Diagram of
the wire wires when they have no con- PWBs
tinuity.• DF tray sensor 1 - DF
main PWB• DF tray sensor 2
- DF main PWB
tinuity.• DF tray upper side
sensor 1 - DF main PWB• DF
tray upper side sensor 2 - DF
main PWB
tinuity.• DF tray upper side
sensor 1 - DF main PWB• DF
tray upper side sensor 2 - DF
main PWB
9 (When installing the 1000- DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1 U241 Exe-
sheet finisher) Checking properly attached, or it is and execute U241 to check cution
DF tray sensor 1 faulty. the operation. If it does not
sensor.
10 (When installing the 4000- DF tray sensors 1, 2 are Reattach DF tray sensors 1, U241 Exe-
sheet finisher) Checking not properly attached, or 2 and execute U241 to check cution
DF tray sensor 1, 2 they are faulty. the operation.If they do not
sensors.
11 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper surface sen- Reattach DF tray upper sur- U241 Exe-
side sensors 1, 2 sors 1, 2 are not properly face sensors 1, 2 and execution
attached, or they are faulty. cute U241 to check the
operation.If they do not prop-
erly operate, replace the sen-
sors.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

C8140: DF tray motor error 1
Turning on/off of DF paper holding sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing 4s when ascending the
DF tray.

1 Checking the DF tray The DF tray is not assem- If the DF tray is not shifted
bled properly. manually vertically, repair the
tion.
2 Checking the DF tray drive The DF tray drive compo- Reattach the DF tray drive
components nents are not properly components. Replace them if
attached, or they are faulty. they are not fixed.
DF main PWB
at U240.
5 Checking DF paper hold- DF paper holding sensors Reattach DF paper holding U241 Exe-
ing sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly sensors 1, 2 and execute cution
attached, or they are faulty. U241 to check the operation.
If they do not properly oper-
ate, replace the sensors.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8150: DF tray motor error 2 (1)

Turning on and off of DF tray sensor 1 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after passing
5s when descending the DF tray.

tion.

DF main PWB
at U240.
5 Checking DF tray sensor 1 DF tray sensor 1 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 1 U241 Exe-
properly attached. and execute U241 to check cution
the operation. If it does not
sensor.
6 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper side sensors Reattach DF tray upper sur- U241 Exe-
side sensors 1, 2 1, 2 are not properly face sensors 1, 2 and execution
attached. cute U241 to check the
sors.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

Turning on and off of DF tray sensors 1, 2 or DF tray upper side sensors 1, 2 could not be detected after pass-
ing 5s when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray is not
assembled properly. shifted manually vertically,
repair the part that restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive Reattach the DF main tray
drive components components are not prop- drive components. Then,
faulty. fixed.

DF main PWB
at U240.
5 Checking DF tray sensors DF tray sensors 1, 2 are Reattach DF tray sensors 1, U241 Exe-
1, 2 not properly attached, or 2 and execute U241 to check cution
they are faulty. the operation.If they do not
sensors.
6 Checking DF tray upper DF tray upper surface sen- Reattach DF tray upper sur- U241 Exe-
side sensors 1, 2 sors 1, 2 are not properly face sensors 1, 2 and execution
attached, or they are faulty. cute U241 to check the
sors.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

DF tray sensor 3 does not turn on after passing 30s when descending the DF tray.

tion.

DF main PWB
4 Checking the DF tray The DF tray motor is faulty. Replace the DF tray motor if U240 Exe-
at U240.
5 Checking DF tray sensor 3 DF tray sensor 3 is not Reattach DF tray sensor 3 U241 Exe-
properly attached, or it is and execute U241 to check cution
faulty. the operation.If it does not
operate properly, replace the
sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

DF tray sensors 4, 5 does not turn on after passing 60s when descending the DF main tray.

1 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray is not If the DF main tray is not
assembled properly. shifted manually vertically,
the operation.
2 Checking the DF main tray The DF main tray drive Reattach the DF main tray
drive components components are not prop- drive components. Then,
faulty. fixed.
DF main PWB
at U240.

5 Checking DF tray sensors DF tray sensors 4, 5 are Reattach DF tray sensor 4, or U241 Exe-
4, 5 not properly attached, or DF tray sensor 5 (when cution
they are faulty. equipping the folding
unit).Next, execute U241 to
the operation check. If it does
each sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

The DF tray sensor does not turn on after passing 4s when descending the DF tray.

tion.
DF main PWB
at U240.
5 Checking the DF tray sen- The DF tray sensor is not Reattach DF tray sensor 4 U241 Exe-
sor properly attached, or it is and execute U241 to check cution
sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

C8170: DF side registration motor 1 error 1
The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the front DF side The front DF side registra- If the front DF side registra-
registration guide tion guide is not assem- tion guide is not shifted man-
bled properly. ually, repair the part that
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive front guide drive compo- tration front guide drive com-
components nents are not properly ponents. Then, replace them
attached, or they are faulty. if they are not fixed.
DF side registration motor 1 -
DF main PWB• DF side regis-
tration sensor 1 - DF main
PWB
4 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Replace DF side registration U240 Exe-
tration motor 1 1 is faulty. motor 1 if it does not operate cution
operation at U240.
5 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration sensor Reattach DF side registra- U241 Exe-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly attached, tion sensor 1 and execute cution
or it is faulty. U241 to check the operation.
ate, replace the sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J6810/J6811/J6812 (Front DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the front DF side The front side registration If the front DF side registra-
registration guide guide is not assembled tion guide is not shifted man-
properly. ually, repair the part that
2 Checking the front DF side The DF side registration Reattach the front DF side
registration guide drive front guide drive compo- registration guide drive com-
components nents are not properly ponents.
attached, or they are faulty.
3 Replacing the front DF The front DF side registra- Replace the front DF side
side registration guide tion guide drive compo- registration guide drive com-
drive components nents are faulty. ponents.

PWB
5 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Replace DF side registration U240 Exe-
tion motor 1 1 is faulty. motor 1 if it does not operate cution
operation at U240.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

The home position cannot be detected after passing 3s when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registra- If the rear DF side registration
registration guide tion guide is not assem- guide is not shifted manually,
bled properly. repair the part that restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the rear DF side The DF side registration Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive rear guide drive compo- tration rear guide drive com-
components nents are not properly ponents. Then, replace them
PWB
4 Replacing DF side regis- DF side registration motor Replace DF side registration U240 Exe-
operation at U240.

PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

J6910/J6911/J6912 (Rear DF side registration jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the rear DF side The rear DF side registra- If the rear DF side registration
registration guide tion guide is not assem- guide is not shifted manually,
bled properly. repair the part that restricts
the operation.
2 Checking the rear DF side The side registration rear Reattach the DF side regis-
registration guide drive guide drive components tration rear guide drive com-
components are not properly attached, ponents. Then, replace them
or they are faulty. if they are not fixed.
PWB
4 Checking DF side registra- DF side registration motor Replace DF side registration U240 Exe-
tion motor 2 2 is faulty. motor 2 if it does not operate cution
operation at U240.
tion sensor 2 2 is not properly attached. tion sensor 2 and execute cution
U241 to check the operation.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

C8210: DF staple motor front/rear error
The home position could not be detected after passing 3s when replacing to the home position at the initial
operation.

1 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple unit is not
unit assembled properly. shifted manually back and
forth, repair the part that
2 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit drive Reattach the DF staple unit
unit drive components components are not prop- drive components. Then,
faulty. fixed.
tinuity.• DF staple motor - DF
main PWB• DF staple sensor
- DF main PWB
4 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple motor is Replace the DF staple unit if DF Staple
motor faulty. the DF staple motor does not Unit
operate properly when check- Replace-
ing the operation at U240. ment
5 Checking the DF staple The DF staple motor is not Reattach the DF staple sen- DF Staple
sensor properly attached, or it is sor. Then, replace the DF sta- Unit
faulty. ple unit if the sensor is not Replace-
fixed. ment
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8230: DF staple motor error 1

The DF staple jam was detected 2 times continuously.(Detection condition of 2nd paper jam: The home posi-
tion cannot be detected after passing 600ms since starting up the motor.)

1 Checking the DF staple The DF staple unit is not If the DF staple cannot oper-
unit assembled properly. ate manually without paper
jam, repair the part that
restricts the DF staple.
ity.• DF staple unit - DF main
PWB

3 Replacing the DF staple The DF staple unit is faulty. Replace the DF staple unit. DF Staple
unit Unit
Replace-
ment
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8250: DF main tray error 4

The lock-up signal was 0.7V or less for 10s continuously during the DF tray motor operation.

tion.
DF main PWB
at U240.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8260: DF middle motor HP detection error

J790X (Middle paddle jam) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle drive com- Reattach or replace the DF
drive components ponents are not properly paddle drive components.
attached, or it is faulty.

DF middle motor - DF main
PWB• DF paddle sensor - DF
main PWB
3 Replacing the DF middle The DF middle motor is Replace the DF middle motor U240 Exe-
at U240.
4 Checking the DF paddle The DF paddle sensor is Reattach the DF paddle sen- U241 Exe-
sensor not properly attached, or it sor and execute U241 to cution
is faulty. check the operation.If it does
the sensor.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8300: Main program error / BF unit communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the folding unit
The communication could not succeed after confirming the connection with the BF unit.

1 Checking the BF set switch The BF set switch is not Reattach the BF set switch.
properly attached.
ity.• BF main PWB - DF main
PWB
3 Replacing the BF set The BF set switch is faulty. Replace the BF set switch if it U241 Exe-
switch does not operate properly cution
at U241.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

C8310: BF side registration motor 2 error
BF side registration sensor 2 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the upper BF The upper BF side regis- If the upper BF side registra-
side registration guide tration guide is not assem- tion guide is not shifted man-
bled properly. ually back and forth, repair
the part that restricts the
operation.
2 Checking the upper BF The BF side registration Reattach the upper BF side
side registration guide upper guide drive compo- registration guide drive com-
drive components nents are not properly ponents. Then, replace them
BF side registration motor 2 -
BF main PWB• BF side regis-
tration sensor 2 - BF main
PWB
4 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration U240 Exe-
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reattach BF side registration U241 Exe-
tion sensor 2 2 is not properly attached, sensor 2 and execute U241 cution
or it is faulty. to check the operation.If it
replace the sensor.
PWB faulty.
C8320: BF adjustment motor error

At the initialization, turning on of the BF adjustment sensor is not detected after 2.5s passes.

1 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt is not If the BF shift belt is not oper-
assembled properly. ated manually, repair the part
that restricts the operation.
2 Checking the BF shift belt The BF shift belt drive Reattach the BF shift belt
drive components components are not prop- drive components. If the belt
erly attached, or they are comes off, reattach it.When
faulty. they are not fixed, replace
them if they are not fixed.

tinuity.• BF adjustment
motors 1, 2 - BF main PWB•
BF adjustment sensors 1, 2 -
BF main PWB
4 Replacing BF adjustment BF adjustment motors 1, 2 Replace BF adjustment U240 Exe-
motors 1, 2 are faulty. motors 1, 2 if they do not cution
operate properly when check-
ing the operation at U240.
5 Checking BF adjustment BF adjustment sensors 1, Reattach BF adjustment sen- U241 Exe-
sensors 1, 2 2 are not properly sors 1, 2 and execute U241 cution
attached, or they are faulty. to check the operation. If they
do not properly operate,
replace the sensors.
PWB faulty.
C8330: BF blade motor error

The BF blade sensor does not turn on after passing 3s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the BF blade The BF blade is not If the BF blade is not oper-
assembled properly. ated manually, repair the part
that restricts the operation.
2 Checking the BF blade The BF blade drive compo- Reattach the BF blade drive
drive components nents are not properly components.Then, replace
attached, or they are faulty. them if they are not fixed.
BF blade motor - BF main
PWB• BF blade sensor - BF
main PWB
4 Replacing the BF blade The BF blade motor is Replace the BF blade motor if U240 Exe-
motor faulty. it does not operate properly cution
at U240.
5 Checking the BF blade The BF blade sensor is not Reattach the BF blade sen- U241 Exe-
sensor properly attached. sor and execute U241 to cution
check the operation.Then,
replace the BF blade sensor
if it does not operate properly.

PWB faulty.
C8340: BF staple motor error 1

The BF staple jam was detected 2 times continuously.(Detection condition of 2nd paper jam: The home posi-
tion cannot be detected after passing 600ms since starting up the motor.)

1 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit is not
unit assembled properly. operated manually, repair the
tion.
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit drive Reattach the BF staple unit
faulty. fixed.
ity.• BF staple unit - BF main
PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple motor is Replace the BF staple motor U240 Exe-
at U240.
unit
PWB faulty.
C8350: BF side registration motor 1 error

BF side registration sensor 1 does not turn on after passing 1s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the lower BF The lower BF side registra- If the lower BF side registra-
side registration guide tion guide is not assem- tion guide is not operated
bled properly. manually, repair the part that
2 Checking the lower BF The BF side registration Reattach the BF side regis-
side registration guide lower guide drive compo- tration lower guide drive com-
drive components nents are not properly ponents. Then, replace them

ity.• BF side registration
motor 1 - BF main PWB• BF
side registration sensor 1 -
BF main PWB
4 Replacing BF side regis- BF side registration motor Replace BF side registration U240 Exe-
operation at U240.
5 Checking BF side registra- BF side registration sensor Reattach BF side registration U241 Exe-
tion sensor 1 1 is not properly attached, sensor 1 and execute U241 cution
or it is faulty. to check the operation.If it
replace the sensor.
PWB faulty.
C8360: BF main motor error

The lock-up signal was detected for 1s continuously during the motor operation.

1 Checking the BF convey- The BF conveying roller is If the BF conveying roller is
ing roller not assembled properly. not rotated manually, repair
operation.
2 Checking the BF convey- The BF conveying roller Reattach the BF conveying
ing roller drive components drive components are not roller drive components.
properly attached, or they Then, replace them if they
are faulty. are not fixed.
ity.• BF main motor - BF main
PWB
4 Replacing the BF main The BF main motor is Replace the BF main motor if U240 Exe-
at U240.
PWB faulty.

C8370: BF staple motor error 2
The BF staple jam was detected 2 times continuously.(Detection condition of 2nd paper jam: The lock-up sig-
nal was generated for 500ms continuously during the motor operation.)

1 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit is not If the BF staple unit is not
unit assembled properly. operated manually, repair the
tion.
2 Checking the BF staple The BF staple unit drive Reattach the BF staple unit
faulty. fixed.
ity.• BF staple unit - BF main
PWB
4 Replacing the BF staple The BF staple motor is Replace the BF staple motor U240 Exe-
at U240.
unit
PWB faulty.
C8410: PH slide motor error 1

The PH slide sensor does not turn on after shifting 30mm when relocating to the home position.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section is
assembled properly. not shifted manually forward-
backward, repair the part that
2 Checking the punch drive The punch drive compo- Reattach the punch drive
components nents are not properly components. Then, replace
tinuity.• PH slide motor - PH
main PWB• PH slide sensor -
PH main PWB• PH main
PWB - DF main PWB

4 Replacing the PH slide The PH slide motor is Replace the PH slide motor if U240 Exe-
at U240.
5 Checking the PH slide sen- The PH slide sensor is not Reattach the PH slide sensor U241 Exe-
sor properly attached, or it is and execute U241 to check cution
sensor.
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8420: PH slide motor error 2

The paper edge cannot be detected even if shifting 30mm when detecting the paper edge.

1 Checking the punch unit The punch unit is not If the punch slide section is
assembled properly. not shifted manually forward-
backward, repair the part that
2 Checking the punch drive The punch drive compo- Reattach the punch drive
components nents are not properly components. Then, replace
tinuity.• PH slide motor - PH
main PWB• PH slide sensor -
PH main PWB• PH main
PWB - DF main PWB
4 Replacing the PH slide The PH slide motor is Replace the PH slide motor if U240 Exe-
at U240.
5 Checking the PH paper PH paper edge sensors 1, Reattach PH paper edge sen- U241 Exe-
edge sensors 1, 2 2 are not properly sors 1, 2. Then, execute cution
attached, or they are faulty. U241 to check the opera-
tion.If it does not operate
properly, replace the sensors.
PWB faulty.

PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8430: Main program error / Punch unit communication error

The communication could not succeed after confirming the connection with the punch unit.

ity.• PH main PWB - DF main
PWB
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8500: Main program error / Mail Box communication error

Object: 4000-sheet finisher with the mail box
The communication failed after confirming the connection with the mail box.

1 Resetting the main power The PWB malfunctions. Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
ity.• MB main PWB - DF main
PWB
PWB faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

C8510: MB conveying motor error 1
The MB home position sensor does not turn on after passing 5s during the initial operation.

1 Checking the MB convey- The MB conveying roller is If the MB conveying roller is
operation.
MB conveying motor - MB
main PWB• MB home posi-
tion sensor - MB main PWB
3 Replacing the MB convey- The MB conveying motor Replace the MB conveying U240 Exe-
ing motor is faulty. motor if it does not operate cution
operation at U240.
4 Checking the MB home The MB home position is Reattach the MB home posi- U241 Exe-
position sensor not properly attached, or it tion sensor and execute cution
is faulty. U241 to check the opera-
properly, replace the sensor.
PWB faulty.
C8520: MB conveying motor error 2

The MB home position sensor does not turn off after passing 1s during the standby operation.

1 Checking the MB convey- The MB conveying roller is If the MB conveying roller is
operation.
2 Checking the MB convey- The MB conveying roller Reattach the MB conveying
ing roller drive components drive components are not roller drive components.
properly attached, or they
are faulty.
3 Replacing the MB convey- The MB conveying roller Replace the MB conveying
ing roller drive components drive components are roller drive components.
faulty.

MB conveying motor - MB
main PWB• MB home posi-
tion sensor - MB main PWB
5 Replacing the MB convey- The MB conveying motor Replace the MB conveying U240 Exe-
ing motor is faulty. motor if it does not operate cution
operation at U240.
6 Checking the MB home The MB home position is Reattach the MB home posi- U241 Exe-
position sensor not properly attached, or it tion sensor and execute cution
is faulty. U241 to check the opera-
PWB faulty.
C8800: Main program error / Engine - DF communication error (DF)

1. The main program is faulty when turning the power on.2. The communication error between the engine and
the DF was detected 10 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start Turn the power switch and
up properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the DP firmware to Firmware
ity.• DF main PWB - Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment

C8900: DF backup error
The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously.

ity.• DF main PWB - Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C8930: BF unit backup error

The writing data and the reading data mismatch 3 times continuously.

ity.• BF main PWB - DF main
PWB
PWB faulty.
C9000: Main program error / DP communication error

The document processor cannot be communicated.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware version Upgrade the firmware for the Firmware
between the main unit and main unit and the document Upgrade
the document processor processor to the latest ver-
mismatches. sion.
ity.• DP main PWB - Engine
PWB
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment

PWB
Replace-
ment
C9040: DP lift motor ascend error

Turning on of the DP lift upper limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift
motor ascend drive. That status was continued 5 times or more.

1 Checking the original lift The DP original lift plate is If the original lift plate is not
plate not properly attached. shifted manually vertically,
the operation.
tinuity.• DP lift motor - DP
main PWB• DP lift upper limit
sensor - DP main PWB
3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Replace the DP lift motor if it U243 Exe-
at U243.
4 Checking the DP lift upper The DP lift upper limit sen- Reattach the DP lift upper U244 Exe-
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor and execute cution
attached, or it is faulty. U241 to check the opera-
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C9050: DP lift motor descend error

Turning on of the DP lift lower limit sensor could not be detected after passing 3000 pulses during the DP lift
motor descend drive. (The recovery is 3 times.)

1 Checking the original lift The DP original lift plate is If the original lift plate is not
plate not properly attached. shifted manually vertically,
the operation.

tinuity.• DP lift motor - DP
main PWB• DP lift upper limit
sensor - DP main PWB
3 Replacing the DP lift motor The DP lift motor is faulty. Replace the DP lift motor if it U243 Exe-
at U243.
4 Checking the DP lift lower The DP lift lower limit sen- Reattach the DP lift lower U244 Exe-
limit sensor sor is not properly limit sensor and execute cution
attached, or it is faulty. U241 to check the opera-
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C9060: DP EEPROM error

The writing data and the reading data into the EEPROM mismatch.

1 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM on
erly installed. the DP main PWB.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
3 Replacing the EEPROM The EEPROM is faulty. Replace the EEPROM on the U411 Exe-
DP main PWB and execute cution
U411.
C9070: DP - SHD communication error

The communication error between the DP main PWB and the DPSHD PWB was detected during communica-
tion.

ity.• DPSHD PWB - DP main
PWB

PWB
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
C9080: LED failure detection

After 4 blocks of the LED lamps of the DPCIS are lit when turning on the power, the acquired peak value of
some blocks is the reference value or less.

1 Checking the LED lamp The LED lamp of the Execute U203 to confirm that U203 Exe-
DPCIS does not light. the LED lamp of the DPCIS cution
does not light. Go to the next
step.
ity.• DPSHD PWB - DP main
PWB
4 Executing U411 DP scanning is not prop- Execute U411 [DP U411 Exe-
erly adjusted. FD(ChartB)] and [DP cution
FD(ChartA)].
ment
PWB

C9180: DP reverse motor error
The home position cannot be detected even if executing the retry of the home position detection 3 times con-
tinuously. [Note]Home position detection: When shifting the DP reverse motor to the home position, the retry
will be executed if the home position could not be detected after driving the DP reverse motor 1-round.

1 Resetting the main power The DP reverse motor is Turn the power switch and
not controlled properly. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
2 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse motor Remove the DP reverse
motor does not rotate properly or motor and fix it by rotating the
the excessive load is drive components manually.
applied to it. Then, reattach it.
DF reverse motor - DP main
PWB• DP timing sensor - DP
main PWB
5 Checking the DP reverse The DP reverse motor is Reconnect the DP reverse
motor faulty. motor. Replace it if it is not
fixed.
6 Checking the DP timing The DP timing sensor is Reattach the DP timing sen-
sensor not properly attached, or it sor. Replace it if it is not fixed.
is faulty.
7 Checking the DP main The connectors on the DP Reconnect the connectors on DP Main
PWB main PWB are not properly the DP main PWB. Then, fix PWB
connected, or the wires are or replace them if they are Replace-
faulty. pinched by the other part or if ment
main PWB.

C9500: Image processing PWB error (Scanner)

FFC.• Engine PWB - Main
PWB
Replace-
ment
PWB
Replace-
ment
C9510: Image processing circuit error (DP)

properly connected, or it is the SATA cable between the Diagram of
faulty. DPSHD PWB and the DP PWBs
relay PWB. If the issue is not
resolved, check the continu-
ity, and replace the SATA
cable if there is no continuity.
PWB
PWB faulty.
Replace-
ment

C9540: Backup data error
When multiple parts are replaced at the same time, the internal data is changed and it interferes with the
machine operation. Consequently, the main unit cannot recover.

1 Checking the PWB Multiple PWBs were Recover to the original, if 2 or
replaced at the same time. more of the following related
parts were replaced at the
same time.• Related parts:
Memory, each PWB
2 Checking the unit Multiple units were Be sure not to perform the
replaced at the same time. following works at the same
time when the memory or
each PWB is replaced.•
Replacing the drum unit or
the developer unit• Relocat-
ing the drum units to other
colorspositioninsideam-
ainunit'

(2) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline
The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis error code list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
*: Please initially check the following when the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
- Check the DIMM (DDR memory) and neighboring parts: Check the contact on the control PWB by releasing and reinserting the DIMM.
If the error repeats after that, replace the DIMM.
*: Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power off and then on.
Num- Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks A3

ber
- It locks on a Welcome screen. 1. Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), and * Execution of U024 will vanish user
It locks on a starting logo (Taskalfa/Ecosys) the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main data and the software installed.
screen. boards, and perform an operation check. Reinstallation is required.
(Even if time passes for a definite period of time 2. Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an
in more than * notes, a screen does not operation check.
change) If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation
check.
3. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
(FULL of U024) *
4. U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an oper-
ation check is performed.
5. Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation check.
6. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
7. It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service head-
quarters.
* : only HDD standard model
F000 CF000 will be displayed if * notes progress is 1. Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), and
carried out for a definite period of time with a the connection state of a connector between Panel<=>Main
Welcome screen. boards, and perform an operation check.
The communication fault between Panel-Main 2. Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an
boards operation check.
Communication fault between Panel Core-Main If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation
Core Notes 2 check.
(FULL of U024) *
6. Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation check.
7. It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service head-
quarters.
* : only HDD standard model
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model
7-316
ber
F10X, Abnormality detecting in OS and a device driver 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F11X part (FULL of U024) *
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper-
ation check.
4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check.
*
5. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F12X Abnormality detecting in a Scan control section 1. Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards, and the
connection state of a connector, and perform an operation
check.
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation check.
F13X Abnormality detecting in a Panel control section 1. Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and the
check.
* Notes
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check.
F14X Abnormality detecting in a FAX control part 1. Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and the con-
nection state of a connector, and perform an operation check.
(FULL of U024) *
4. Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.
* Notes
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are
required.)
5. Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
* Notes
6. Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
7-317
ber
F15X Abnormality detecting in an authentication 1. Check the harness between authentication device <=>Main Authentication device: IC card reader
device control section boards, and the connection situation of a connector, and per- etc.
form an operation check.
(FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F16X Abnormality detecting in a KMAS control sec- 1. Check the harness between KMAS<=>Main boards, and the
tion connection situation of a connector, and perform an operation
check.
(FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F17X Abnormality detecting in a printer data control 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
part 2. (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F18X Abnormality detecting in a Video control section 1. Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and the
check.
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation check.
7-318
ber
F19X, Abnormality detecting in OS and a device driver 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F1AX part (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F1BX Abnormality detecting of a security manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
ment department (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F1CX Abnormality detecting of a FileSystem control 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * Poor arrangement of F1D4:Random
section (FULL of U024) * Access Memory
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper- (1) Confirmation of U340
ation check. (2) Initialization of a set point (U021)
*
F1DX Abnormality detecting of the image memory 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Management Department (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F1EX, Abnormality detecting in OS and a device driver 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F1FX, part (FULL of U024) *
F20X, 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper-
ation check.
*
7-319
ber
F21X, Abnormality detecting in an image-processing 1. Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an operation
F22X, part check.
F23X 2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
(FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F24X Abnormality detecting in the system Manage- 1. Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an operation * F248 is the abnormalities of a printer
ment Department check. process.
2. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. In recurring by specific printer data,
(FULL of U024) * please give me cooperation at acquisi-
3. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper- tion of capture data and USBLOG.
ation check.
*
F25X Abnormality detecting in a network manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * It may occur according to a visitor's
ment department (FULL of U024) * network environment.
ation check.
4. Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service head-
quarters.
F26X, Abnormality detecting in the system Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F27X, ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F29X, ation check.
F2AX 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
*
F2BX, Abnormality detecting in a network control part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F2CX, (FULL of U024) *
F2DX, 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper-
F2EX, ation check.
F2FX, 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F30X, 4. Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F31X, (Depending on an analysis result, it is packet capture acquisi-
F2BX tion)
7-320
ber
F33X Abnormality detecting in the Scan Management 1. Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards, and the
Department connection state of a connector, and perform an operation
check.
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation check.
F34X Abnormality detecting in the Panel Manage- 1. Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and the
ment Department connection state of a connector, and perform an operation
check.
* Notes
(FULL of U024) *
4. Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check.
* Notes
* Note : A Dual Core CPU model and HyPAS model
F35X Abnormality detecting in the printing controlling 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
ation check.
*
F36X Abnormality detecting in a printer data control 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
department (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
7-321
ber
F37X Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
Department (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
3. Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.
(Since it disappears when received data remain, cautions are
required.) * notes
4. Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check.
* Notes
*
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
F38X Abnormality detecting in the authentication 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
authorized Management Department (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F39X Abnormality detecting in the KMAS Manage- 1. Check the harness between KMAS<=>Main boards, and the
ment Department connection situation of a connector, and perform an operation
check.
(FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F3AX, Abnormality detecting in the Entity Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F3BX, ment Department (FULL of U024) *
F3CX, 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper-
F3DX, ation check.
F3EX, 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F3FX, 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check.
F40X, *
F42X, * Only HDD standard model
F43X,
F44X,
F45X
7-322
ber
F46X Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part 1. Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of a printer
2. the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out process.
(Depending on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) In recurring by specific printer data,
* Only HDD standard model please give me cooperation at acquisi-
tion of capture data and USBLOG.
F47X, Abnormality detecting of an image editing pro- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F48X, cessing part (FULL of U024) *
F49X 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper-
ation check.
*
F4AX, Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F4CX (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F4DX, Abnormality detecting in the Entity Manage- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F4EX ment Department (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F4FX, Abnormality detecting in the JOB Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after
Department (FULL of U024) * occurrence is needed for analysis,
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper- please give me cooperation of acquisi-
ation check. tion.
*
F50X, Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after
Department (FULL of U024) * occurrence is needed for analysis,
ation check. tion.
*
7-323
ber
F51X, Abnormality detecting in a JOB execution part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after
F52X, (FULL of U024) * occurrence is needed for analysis,
F53X, 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper- please give me cooperation of acquisi-
F55X, ation check. tion.
F56X, 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F57X 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check.
*
F58X, Abnormality detecting in the various-services 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log at the time of occur-
F59X, Management Department (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please
F5AX, 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper- give me cooperation of acquisition.
F5BX, ation check.
F5CX, 3. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F5DX, 4. Exchange HDD and perform an operation check.
F5EX *
F5FX Abnormality detecting in a service execution 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log immediately after
part (FULL of U024) * occurrence is needed for analysis,
ation check. tion.
*
F60X Abnormality detecting in the maintenance mode 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
ation check.
*
F61X Abnormality detecting in a report creation part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
(FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
7-324
ber
F62X Abnormality detecting in a service execution 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. Since the USB log at the time of occur-
part (FULL of U024) * rence is needed for analysis, please
2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper- give me cooperation of acquisition.
ation check.
*
F63X Abnormality detecting in a device control sec- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
tion (FULL of U024) *
ation check.
*
F64X, Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F65X, (FULL of U024) *
F67X ation check.
*
F68X Abnormality detecting in a storage device con- 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. * F684 is the overwrite error at the time
trol section (FULL of U024) * of an HDD security kit.
ation check.
*
F69X, Abnormality detecting in a HyPAS-E part 1. Initialize HDD and perform an operation check.
F6AX, (FULL of U024) *
F6BX, 2. Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an oper-
F6CX ation check.
*
7-325
ber
F6DX, Abnormality detecting in the external server 1. Check an external server and perform an operation check. * FieryOption relation
F6EX, Management Department 2. Check connection with an external server and perform an oper-
F6FX, ation check.
F70X, 3. network setup is checked and an operation check is performed.
F71X, 4. Exchange a Bridge board and perform an operation check.
F72X, 5. Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F74X, * Only HDD standard model
F75X
7-326
7-4 FAX Related Errors
(1) FAX Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card.
(2) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error
(5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error
(7) C0920: FAX file system error
(8) C0950: FAX job stay error
(9) F14D
(10) FAX cannot be sent.
(11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished.
(12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data.
Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1) The login fails with other than the ID card.

1 Checking the settings [User/Job Account] is valid Set [Permit] at [User/Job ID Card
while the card authentica- Account] > [ID Card Settings] Authenti-
tion kit is not installed. > [Key Login] via the System cation Set-
Menu. tings
(1-2) C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the FAX firmware error.

power switch.
Upgrade

lation
Guide
(1-3) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB,
any normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the Related
PWB is installed. applicable model. Product
List
2 Checking the firmware The FAX firmware is faulty. Reinstall the FAX firmware. Firmware
Upgrade
Replace-
ment
(1-4) C0650: FAX image storage pair-check error

The SSD (FAX image storage) used in other main unit is installed.

1 Checking the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD SSD
age) already used in other used once, replace with the Replace-
unit is installed. correct SSD. ment
2 Executing U671 The SSD (FAX image stor- When installing the SSD U671 Exe-
age) already used in other used once, execute U671 cution
unit is reused without exe- [FAX Data CLEAR].
cuting U671.
3 Reinstalling the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Be sure to install the SSD to SSD
age) is not properly the connector on the main Replace-
installed. PWB. ment
4 Replacing the SSD The SSD (FAX image stor- Replace with the new SSD. SSD
age) is faulty. Replace-
ment
Replace-
ment

(1-5) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

Upgrade
2 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not con- Turn off the power switch and FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main power switch. After lation
power switch.
lation
Guide
(1-6) C0870: PC FAX Image data transmission error

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retry were made when the large volume data
is transmitted between the FAX PWB and the main PWB.

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn the power switch and FAX Instal-
operate properly. the main power switch off . lation
After 5s passes, reattach the Guide
FAX PWB and turn the main
switch on.
3 Firmware upgrade The FAX firmware is faulty. Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
the latest version. Upgrade
lation
Guide
Replace-
ment
6 Executing U024 The data stored in the SSD Execute U024 [SSD Format]. U024 Exe-
is faulty. cution

(1-7) C0920: FAX file system error
The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the U600 Exe-
incorrect FAX. cution
power switch.
3 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not con- Reconnect the FAX PWB to FAX Instal-
nected properly. the main PWB. lation
Guide
Upgrade
lation
Guide
(1-8) C0950: FAX job stay error

Print processing of the received FAX could not be executed and the job continues staying.

1 Resetting the main power Print processing is not Turn the power switch and
power switch on.
(1-9) F14D
An error in the FAX control section is detected.

est version. and the FAX firmware to the Upgrade
latest version.
2 Checking the connection The FAX PWB is not con- Check the connection FAX Instal-
nected properly. between the main PWB and lation
the FAX PWB, and reconnect Guide
it if necessary.
lation
Guide

(1-10) FAX cannot be sent.

1 Checking the connection The modular cable discon- Reconnect the modular
of the modular cable nects. cable.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit
switching device or the like to the telephone line.
is connected to the tele-
phone line, it is affected.
3 Checking the settings The line settings are incor- Correct the line settings.
rect. (Reduce the transmission
speed, etc.)
4 Checking the destination The destination unit is Wait a while and then redial
unit busy. the number if busy tones are
heard.
5 Checking the destination The modular cable is dis- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit connected in the destina- to reconnect the modular ation
tion unit if the destination cable. Guide
unit does not receive the
calling.
6 Checking the setting in the The manual reception is Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
destination unit set in the destination unit if change the reception set- ation
the destination unit does tings. Guide
not receive the calling.
7 Checking the sending con- When transmitting the data Input a pause at the last of FAX Oper-
tent to the other country, the the destination FAX number. ation
communication line is Guide
automatically cut.
(1-11) The beep sounds when the copying or printing is finished.

1 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
(1-12) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is

transmitted as the A4 size data.

1 Checking the settings The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger] FAX Oper-
destination unit is A4 / Let- according to the receivable ation
ter. size at the Address book reg- Guide
istration display > [i-FAX] >
[Paper size].

2 Checking the settings The receivable size in the Select the condition of the FAX Oper-
destination unit is A4 / Let- destination unit when trans- ation
ter. mitting the data, choose [B4] Guide
or [A3/Ledger] according to
the receivable sizes.

(2) Communication Errors
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error
code indication U followed by a 5-digit number. (The V.34 error is indicated with E of the error code and 5-
digit number)
Regarding the 5-digit number, upper 3 digits indicate error and large classification of cause, lower 2 digits
small classification of cause. The lower 2 digits are 00 for the item not requiring the category.
Error code
EXXXXX
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code

General classification of error code
Error code indication
Figure 7-1

7-2 Communication Errors
Error code Contents

U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set number of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted num-
ber.Or, subaddress-based bulletin board transmission request was received but inter-
rupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub
address password was not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address
password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was notpresent
in the sub address box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address
password was not registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match
in the restricted transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number
was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specifiedencryp-
tion box was not registered.
U00601/E00601 Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00613/E00613 Image writing section problem
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps.Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM
signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after send-
ing CNC signal. (between own machines)
ing CTC signal. (ECM)

Error code Contents
ing EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
ing RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028 T5 time-out was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and
communication speed at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an
RRsignal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).

Error code Contents
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed com-
monly used with the destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed com-
monly used with the destination unit.
U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the box-
specified by the destination unit.
U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a mis-
match in permitted ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice subaddress-based bulletin
board reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID or tele-
phone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destina-
tion unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password
was not registered in the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mis-
match in the specified sub address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had
no sub address bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub
address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was
not registered in the destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address
transmission was executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the desti-
nation unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the
other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not
match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted
FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination
unit did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception). Conse-
quently, the transmission was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID did not
match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the own unit did not return its phone num-
ber.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.

Error code Contents
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.
Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000
1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
can receive the data and ation
resend the data if there is no Guide
particular problem.
U00100/E00100
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted by a press of the
stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted Suspend resending from the FAX Oper-
by a press of the [Stop] destination unit or request the ation
key. destination unit to resend the Guide
data.
U00300/E00300
1 Request to the destination Recording paper on the Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit destination unit has run out to set the recording papers. ation
during transmission. Guide

U00430/E00430
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address bul- Register a valid permitted FAX Oper-
number letin board transmission number ation
were requested, but the Guide
communication was inter-
rupted because the permit-
ted ID did not match. (It
occurs in the transmitting
unit.)
U00431/E00431
1 Checking the destination An sub address bulletin Register the sub address FAX Oper-
unit board transmission was password in the destination ation
interrupted because the unit. Guide
specified sub address
password was not regis-
tered.
U00432/E00432
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Send by using correct the sub FAX Oper-
password board transmission was address password. ation
interrupted because the Guide
sub address password did
not match.
U00433/E00433
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Set data in the sub address FAX Oper-
box board transmission box. ation
request was received but Guide
data was notpresent in the
sub address box.

U00440/E00440
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address FAX Oper-
password reception was interrupted password. ation
because the specified sub Guide
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
1 Checking the permitted The reception was inter- Register the permitted num- FAX Oper-
number rupted because the permit- ber to be consistent at own ation
ted ID and FAX number did machine side. Guide
not match in the restricted
transmission (password
check transmission) in the
destination unit.
U00460/E00460
1 Checking the encryption The encryption reception Register an encrypted box FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because number. ation
the specified encryption Guide
box number was not regis-
tered.
U00462/E00462
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key. FAX Oper-
key interrupted because the ation
encryption key for the Guide
specifiedencryption box
was not registered.
U00601/E00601
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and
resend.
2 Checking the original The original length Check if the original length
exceeds the maximum does not exceed 1.6 meter
allowed. and resend.

U00613/E00613
1 Checking the service call Image writing section error Check the service call error Event Log
error record record and perform the cor- Report
rective actions. Output
U00656/E00656
1 Resending Transmission was inter- Resend.
rupted because there was
an error in the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was inter- Turn off the power switch and
and reinstalling the FAX rupted because there was pull out the power plug. After
PWB an error in the modem. passing 5s, reattach the FAX
PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
3 Checking the firmware The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the U600 Exe-
changed. FAX. cution
5 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide
U00690/E00690
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and
pull out the power plug. After
passing 5s, reinsert the
power plug and turn on the
power switch.
2 Measures for the system System error in the main Perform the corrective System
error unit actions for the system error in Error List
the main unit.

U00800/E00800
1 Checking the transmit start A page transmission error In case pages are not prop- U630 Exe-
speed occurred because of erly sent and resending does cution
reception of a RTN or PIN not solve it, reduce transmit
signal. start speed and resend the
data.
U00811/E00811
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not prop- U630 Exe-
remained after retry of erly sent and resending does cution
transmission in the ECM not solve it, reduce transmit
mode. start speed and resend the
data.
U00900/E00900
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a
transmitted because of a page not transmitted prop-
page reception error. erly.
U01000/E01000
1 Resending An FTT signal was Resend.
received for a set number
of times after TCF signal
transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was
received in response to a
Q signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400
bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed (Destination unit) reduce the transmit start cution
speed. Then, resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the default value of U630 Exe-
(Own machine) the transmit start speed by cution
executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01001/E01001
1 Resending Function as indicated by Resend.
DIS signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
data.
U01016/E01016
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since Resend.
MBF signal is received but
DIS signal is not after
sending EOM signal.
data.
U01019/E01019
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since signif-
icant signal is not received
after sending CNC signal.
(between own machines)
data.

U01020/E01020
after sending CTC signal.
(ECM)
data.
U01021/E01021
after sending EOR•Q sig-
nal. (ECM)
data.
U01022/E01022
after sending RR signal.
(ECM)
data.

U01028/E01028
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected Resend.
when sending in ECM
(ECM)
data.
U01052/E01052
1 Resending DCN signal is received Resend.
after sending RR signal
(ECM)
data.
U01080/E01080
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
data.

U01092/E01092
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol
speed and communication
speed at V.34 sending.
data.
U01093/E01093
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection U650 Exe-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mdm cution
received signal is attenu- Level]. (Initial setting: -
ated with its frequency 43dBm)
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable U650 Exe-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Reg G3 cution
received signal is attenu- RX Eqr]. (Initial setting:
response.
U01094/E01094
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send Resend.
retrial time is exceeded at
phase B during transmis-
sion.
data.

U01096/E01096
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid com- Resend.
mand is received at phase
D during transmission.
data.
U01097/E01097
1 Resending The preset number of com- Resend.
mand retransfers was
exceeded after transmis-
sion of an RRsignal or no
response.
data.
U01100/E01100
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request resending.
signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed U630 Exe-
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX cution
Speed].

U01101/E01101
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request resending.
signal except communica-
tion type is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
Speed].
U01102/E01102
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is Request resending.
received while own
machine has no transmis-
sion data.
Speed].
U01110/E01110
1 Request for resending No response is received Request resending.
after sending DIS signal.
Speed].
U01111/E01111
after sending DTC (NSC)
signal.
Speed].

U01113/E01113
1 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the modem detection U650 Exe-
detected since the level at U650 [RX Mdm cution
received signal is attenu- Level]. (Initial setting: -
response.
2 Checking the settings The modem is not Set the G3 reception cable U650 Exe-
detected since the equalizer in U650 [Reg G3 cution
received signal is attenu- RX Eqr]. (Initial setting:
response.
U01125/E01125
after sending CNS signal.
(between own machine)
Speed].
U01129/E01129
1 Request for resending No response after trans- Request resending.
mitting an SPA signal.
(Short protocol)
Speed].
U01141/E01141
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request resending.
after sending DTC signal.
Speed].

U01143/E01143
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received Set the G3 reception cable U650 Exe-
after sending FTT signal. equalizer in U650 [Reg G3 cution
RX Eqr]. (Initial setting:
0dBm)
U01155/E01155
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request resending.
after sending SPA signal.
(simplified protocol)
Speed].
U01160/E01160
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request resending.
time per line is exceeded
while receiving message.
Speed].
U01162/E01162
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request resending.
time per line is exceeded
while receiving message.
Speed].

U01191/E01191
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request resending.
with error during image
data receipt sequence at
V.34.
Speed].
U01193/E01193
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal Extend T2 time-out time in U641 Exe-
or invalid command is U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. cution
received at phase C/D dur- (Change from the initial set-
ing reception. ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures U630 Exe-
for echoes at the reception in cution
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set-
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting U630 Exe-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. cution
U01194/E01194
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request resending.
phase B during reception.
Speed].

U01195/E01195
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time in U641 Exe-
phase C during reception. U641 [T2 TIME OUT]. cution
(Change from the initial set-
ting 69 to 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures U630 Exe-
for echoes at the reception in cution
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial set-
ting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting U630 Exe-
timing speed to "9600bps" or less. cution
U01196/E01196
1 Resending Error line control overflow Resend.
and decoding error
occurred in messages dur-
ing reception.
Speed].
U01400/E01400
1 Checking the telephone "#" exists in advance of "x" Delete "#" from the registered FAX Oper-
number on the phone numbers of numbers if "#" exists in ation
the destination unit, so it is advance of "x" on the phone Guide
processed as the invalid numbers of the destination
dial line. unit.
U01500/E01500
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is Execute U630 [TX Speed] to U630 Exe-
speed the poor condition. reduce the transmit start cution
data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the default value of U630 Exe-
speed condition is poor and an the transmit start speed by cution
error frequently occurs. executing U630 [TX Speed].

U01600/E01600
1 Checking the destination The communication line is Request the destination unit
unit the poor condition. to resend the data after
reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit U630 Exe-
timing condition is poor and an to resend the data after low- cution
error frequently occurs. ering the reception start
speed.
U01700/E01700
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
data.
U01720/E01720
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4
(replacing the modem
parameter).
data.

U01721/E01721
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
interrupted because there
is no communication
speed commonly used
with the destination unit.
data.
U01800/E01800
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 2 (line to resend the data after
probing). reducing the transmit start
speed.
Speed].
U01810/E01810
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
Speed].

U01820/E01820
occurred in phase 3 (pri- to resend the data after
mary channel equivalent reducing the transmit start
device training). speed.
Speed].
U01821/E01821
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit
interrupted because there to resend the data after
is no communication reducing the transmit start
speed commonly used speed.
with the destination unit.
Speed].
U03000/E03000
1 Checking the destination No document was present Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit in the destination unit to set the originals. ation
when polling reception Guide
started.
U03200/E03200
1 Checking the destination There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit address box in the main to store the original data in ation
unit that are specified from the sub address box. Guide
the destination unit.

U03300/E03300
1 Checking the destination The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit number registered in the to register the own ID and the ation
destination unit are incor- own FAX number as the per- Guide
rect. mitted ID and the permitted
FAX number.
U03400/E03400
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
U03500/E03500
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the pass- FAX Oper-
unit operation was interrupted word input at the destination ation
because the password machine is consistent with Guide
input in the destination unit the receiversownFAXIDtore-
and the own FAX number ceiveagain.'
in the receiver did not
match.
U03600/E03600
1 Checking the destination Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after input- FAX Oper-
unit reception was interrupted ting the sub address pass- ation
because the specified sub word registered in the Guide
address password did not destination unit.
match.

U03700/E03700
1 Checking the setting in the Destination machine has Check if the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit no sub address bulletin has a sub address bulletin ation
board communication board communication func- Guide
function or no originals are tion. If available, request the
stored in any original deliv- destination unit to save the
ery box (sub address box). original data in the sub
address box.
U04000/E04000
1 Checking the setting in the The original was transmit- Register the sub address FAX Oper-
destination unit ted to the sub address box, password in the destination ation
but the specified box was unit. Guide
not registered in the desti-
nation unit that is our own
model.
2 Checking the sub address The original was transmit- Match the sub address in the FAX Oper-
of the FAX transmission ted to the sub address box FAX forward condition ation
condition in the destination unit that Guide
is our own model, but the
sub address of the trans-
mission condition did not
match.
U04100/E04100
1 Checking the setting in the The destination unit had no Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
destination unit sub address reception to the reception function in ation
capability while the sub the destination unit. Guide
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
1 Checking the setting in the In encrypted transmission, Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit the specified encryption to register the encrypted box. ation
box was not registered in Guide
the destination unit.

U04300/E04300
1 Checking the setting in the The encryption transmis- Transmit the data according FAX Oper-
destination unit sion was carried out, but to the reception function in ation
there is no encryption func- the destination unit. Guide
tion at the other machine.
U04400/E04400
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
U04500/E04500
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after FAX Oper-
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key ation
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving Guide
agree. and sending machines.
U05100/E05100
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the FAX Oper-
number interrupted because the authorization number that ation
permitted ID and FAX has been registered. Guide
number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check transmis-
sion).
U05200/E05200
1 Checking the settings The number does not Change the restricted recep- FAX Oper-
match a permitted FAX tion settings. ation
number / ID, or it matches Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Checking the setting in the The own telephone num- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
destination unit ber is not informed from to register the own telephone ation
the destination unit. number. Guide

U05300/E05300
1 Checking the setting in the The number does not Ask the destination unit to FAX Oper-
destination unit match a permitted FAX change the restricted recep- ation
number / ID, or it matches tion settings. Guide
a rejected FAX number.
2 Checking the settings The main unit did not Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
acknowledge its phone to register the own telephone ation
number in question . number. Guide
U14000/E14000
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX Release memory by printing
box was interrupted due to originals stored in memory or
memory overflow in its cancel FAX box reception.
unit.
U14100/E14100
1 Checking the destination Transmission was inter- Request the destination unit FAX Oper-
unit rupted due to the memory to release memory. ation
overflow in the destination Guide
unit when transmitting into
the sub address box.
U19000/E19000
1 Checking the memory The reception was inter- Release memory by printing
rupted due to the memory originals stored in memory.
overflow in the main unit
during memory reception.

U19100/E19100
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
and reinstalling the FAX interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
PWB is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
U19300/E19300
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data dur-
ing transmission.
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
and reinstalling the FAX interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
PWB is an error in the data dur- passing 5s, reattach the FAX
ing transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
3 Checking the firmware The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the fax firmware to Firmware
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the U600 Exe-
changed. FAX. cution
5 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB. FAX Instal-
lation
Guide

7-5 Send Related Errors
(1) Send Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security soft-
ware settings.
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear.
(3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent.
Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or
the security software settings.

1 Checking the settings The incorrect port number Change the SMB port num- SMB
has been set. ber from "139" to "445". Transmis-
sion Set-
tings
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear.

1 Checking the settings The Windows Fire Wall is Select [Allow a program or
not properly set. (Win- feature through Windows
dows Vista / 7 / 8) Firewall] at [Control Panel] >
[System and Security] > [Win-
dows Firewall] and check
[File and Printer Sharing] and
also check the right side
checkbox
(1-3) The scanning data from the contact glass is automatically sent.

1 Checking the settings [Continuous Scan] is not Press [Send] key or [FAX] Continu-
set to [On]. key, and select [On] in ous Scan
[Advanced setup] > [Continu- Settings
ous scan].

2 Checking the settings [Continuous Scan] is not Select [On] at [Functions] > Continu-
set to [On]. [Continuous scan] ous Scan
Settings

(2) Error codes
Scan to PC (SMB/FTP/Email) transmission error codes, contents, checkpoints and remedies are
described.
The error code not listed here may be the software failure.
Turn the power switch off then on, and execute again.

(3) Sending Errors (Error Codes)
(3-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 Invalid SMTP protocol
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session.
Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
server name name is incorrect. server name at [Function Set- Center RX
tings] > [E-mail] via the com- Operation
mand center. Guide
2 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the Command
incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Command Center. Operation
Guide
3 Checking the settings The network settings that Correct the network settings Network
the main unit is connected that the main unit is con- Settings
to are incorrect. nected to.

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3 Command
server name password is incorrect. user name or password at Center RX
[Function Settings] > [E-mail] Operation
via the command center. Guide
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Command
server settings are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1 Checking the settings Destination address Correct the settings in the Command
domain is restricted and Network Settings via the Center RX
transmission is denied. Command Center. Operation
Guide

Invalid SMTP protocol

1 Checking the settings Invalid SMTP protocol Correct the protocol in the Command
Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

The sender address is not set.

1 Checking the settings The sender address is not Correct the protocol in the Command
set. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

mand center. Guide
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not con- Connect the LAN cable to the
nected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is incor- Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
port No. rect. number.
Guide
6 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the Command
settings are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

mand center. Guide
Guide
Guide

The server cannot establish communication.

mand center. Guide
Guide
Guide

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Guide

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Guide

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

Guide

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

Guide
Guide

No SMTP authentication is found.

1 Checking the settings The SMTP server settings Set the correct SMTP Command
are incorrect. Authentication Protocol at Center RX
[Function Settings] > [E-mail] Operation
via the command center. Guide

Failed to establish the SSL session.

1 Checking the self-signed The self-signed certificate Correct the certificates in the Command
certificate of the device is incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
2 Checking the settings The service certificate set- Correct the certificates in the Command
tings are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide

3 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 settings Correct the protocol in the Command
are incorrect. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

(3-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a certain period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.
Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

1 Checking the FTP host The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name Command
name incorrect. via the Command Center. Center RX
Operation
Guide
Guide

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1 Checking the FTP host The user name or the Correct the user name and
name password is incorrect. the password.

2 Checking the FTP server FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the Command
Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1 Checking the settings FTP protocol is not Correct the protocol in the Command
enabled. Network Settings via the Center RX
Guide

Initializing TLS has failed.

1 Checking the settings The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Command
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide

TLS negotiation has failed.

1 Checking the settings The security settings of the Correct the settings in the Command
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the Center RX
Guide
2 Checking the settings The FTP server settings Correct the protocol in the Command
Guide

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

Operation
Guide

2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not con- Connect the LAN cable to the
nected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Checking the FTP port The port number is incor- Correct the FTP port number.
number rect.
Guide
Guide

Connection to the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Operation
Guide
number rect.
Guide
Guide

The server cannot establish communication.

Operation
Guide
number rect.

Guide
Guide

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

Guide
3 Checking the destination The destination folder Set the correct destination
folder name name is incorrect. folder.
Guide

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Guide

No response from the server during a certain period of time.

Guide

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

Guide

FTP server responded with an error.

Guide
Guide

(3-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes
Error code Contents

1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

1 Checking the destination The destination host name Correct the destination host
host name is incorrect. name.
Guide

Login to the host has failed.

1 Checking the user name The user name or the Correct the user name and
and the password password is incorrect. the password.
Guide
3 Checking the settings The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings
destination host / folder are of the destination host /
incorrect. folder.

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1 Checking the host name, The host name, destina- Revise invalid characters in
destination folder name tion folder name, or the file destination host name, desti-
and the file name name contains the invalid nation folder name and file
character. name properly.
2 Checking the destination The destination folder Revise the destination folder
folder name and the file name or the file name is and file name according to
name incorrect. the naming rules.
3 Checking the destination The destination host name Revise the destination host
host and the destination or the destination folder and destination folder prop-
folder name is incorrect. erly.

7-6 Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears.
(2) The paper direction is incorrect.
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray. The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(4) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray. The media types of each paper source defined
in the printer driver and the main unit are mis-
matched.
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out. A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print
[Printer unavailable] is indicated on the printer
properties.
(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the The main unit locks up.
printer standby message is indicated.
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the The main unit locks up.
main unit startup error.Processing/Memory lamp
is turned on.
(10) Print stops after printing several pages and The image processing fails due to the insuffi-
locks up. Processing and Memory lamps on cient memory, so the main unit locks up.
operation panel are lit.
(11) Print output is unavailable due to the network The network has some troubles or the network
factor. setting is incorrect.
(12) Print output is unavailable due to the network The cable between the main unit and the PC is
factor. not properly connected.
(13) Print output is unavailable due to the network The access point (router or HUB) in the network
factor. does not operate properly.
(14) Print output is unavailable due to the network The router is faulty, or the router settings are
factor. incorrect.
(15) Print output is unavailable due to the network "Offline" appears and the print function is
factor. unavailable.
(16) Print output is unavailable due to the network Only one PC can not print among those
factor. installed. No error is indicated but print jobs are
suspended. [Condition]• PC OS: Windows7•
File: Test Page• Connection: Wireless LAN
(17) Print output is unavailable due to the network The main unit IP address is changed.
factor.
(18) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver [Disconnection error] appears on the PC screen
setting. and the print job cannot be output due to this
error. (Print is unavailable.)[Condition]• PC OS:
Windows7• File: Test Page• Connection: Wire-
less LAN

(19) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver [Please wait] is indicated at the main unit. The
setting. Job is retained without outputting printed mate-
rial. [Condition] PC OS: Windows 7, Print file:
Test Page, Connection: wireless LAN
(20) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver A PC does not recognize the main unit.
setting.
(21) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver PC operation does not stabilize.
setting.
(22) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver Check if the issue occurs when printing the data
setting. from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC.
Then, print out the data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
(23) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver The incorrect printer driver was selected.
setting.
(24) Data is not printed out due to the printer driver Installed printer driver shows "Deleting" and it
setting. remains when reinstalling it
(25) The printed image is partly missing. The image data processing with a certain appli-
cation (Excel, PDF) is faulty.
(26) "Paper Mismatch Error" appears. The paper size is not detected properly.
Content of Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears.

1 Checking the paper The size of the loaded Load the paper of the paper Printer
paper did not match the size defined at "Paper size" in Driver
paper size set in the printer the [Basic] tab in the print set- Operation
properties. tings at the PC to the cas- Guide
sette.
2 Checking the paper size The paper size on the Check if the paper size on the
operation panel and the operation panel and the one
one set for the paper set for the paper source do
source do not match. not match
guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
4 Checking the paper sensor The actuator or the spring Replace the actuator or the
for the paper sensor is not spring of the paper sensor if
properly attached. Or, the they are deformed or do not
paper sensor does not operate properly.
properly operate due to
their deformation.

5 Checking the situation The print data generated Check if the print data not
by a certain application generated by a certain appli-
(Word) is faulty. cation (Word) is output prop-
erly. And then, change the
application setting if neces-
sary.
6 Checking the settings Paper orientation is not Check the page orientation
properly set in the print with preview before printing
page setting on a certain and reset the page orienta-
application (Word). tion at the print setting on a
certain application (Word).
7 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size Printer
media type detected at the detected on the MP tray and Driver
main unit did not match the media type of the MP tray Operation
with the paper size and the set via the System Menu (for Guide
media type set in the the main unit) matched to the
printer driver. paper size and the media
type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in
the printer properties at the
PC.
8 Checking the settings The MP tray setting does Select "MP tray" at [Source] Printer
not match between the in the [Basic] tab in the print Driver
main unit and printer driver settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
(2) The paper direction is incorrect.

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in
error. process in the PC and the
main unit. Then, turn the
power switch and the main
power switch off. After 5s
passes, turn the main power
switch and the power switch
on.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from Report
resident. Excel and Word is normal, (System
print the font list to check if a Menu)
font for special data is resi-
dent.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font
setting) is unselected. (default setting) and print the
data.

4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
printer driver. Driver
Operation
Guide
(3) Paper is fed from the MP tray.

The main unit MP tray setting is wrong

1 Checking the settings The Auto Cassette Set [Off] at [Auto Cassette Printer
Change is [On]. Change] not to feed the (System
paper if there is no paper in Menu)
the selected paper source.
([System Menu/Counter] key
> [Printer] > [Auto Cassette
Change] > [Off])
2 Checking the settings "Media type" in the [Basic] Check the media type set on Printer
tab in the print settings at the main unit cassette and Driver
the PC differs from the MP tray and set the media Operation
media type of the cassette type for the main unit in the Guide
that is set in the main unit. [Basic] tab in the print set-
tings at the PC.
3 Checking the settings The same media type is Set different media types Cassette /
set between the main unit between the main unit cas- MP Tray
cassette and MP tray sette and MP tray Settings
(4) Garbled characters

The printer driver was not properly installed.

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in
error. process in the PC and the
main unit. Then, turn the
power switch and the main
power switch off. After 5s
passes, turn the main power
switch and the power switch
on.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from Report
resident. Excel and Word is normal, (System
print the font list to check if a Menu)
font for special data is resi-
dent.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font
setting) is unselected. (default setting) and print the
data.

4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
Operation
Guide
(5) Paper is not fed from the MP tray.

The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver and the main unit are mismatched.

1 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size Printer
media type detected at the detected on the MP tray and Driver
main unit did not match the media type of the MP tray Operation
with the paper size and the set via the System Menu (for Guide
media type set in the the main unit) matched to the
printer driver. paper size and the media
type at [Imaging] > [Basic] in
the printer properties at the
PC.
2 Checking the settings The MP tray setting does Select "MP tray" at [Source] Printer
not match between the in the [Basic] tab in the print Driver
main unit and printer driver settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
(6) The same data is repeatedly printed out.

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.

1 Deleting the job The generated data is Delete the print job spooled in
faulty. the PC and print it out again.
(7) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is indicated
on the printer properties.
The main unit is not ready to print

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready Check if the error appears on
to print the operation panel or the
error lamp blinks. Then if
there is, cancel it.
2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready Resolve the problem at the
to print main unit if any

(8) Processing and Memory lamps are lit while the printer standby message is
indicated.
The main unit locks up.

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready After confirming no error is
to print indicated on the main unit-
soperationpanel,cancelallPC-
printjobs.Then,turnthepowers
witchandthemainpowerswi-
tchoff.After5spasses,turnthe-
mainpowerswitchandthepow
erswitchon.'
(9) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup
error.Processing/Memory lamp is turned on.
The main unit locks up.

1 Checking the firmware The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
est version. latest version. Upgrade
2 Checking the settings The sleep level is not set to Turn the power switch and Date/
Quick Recovery mode. the main power switch off . Timer/
After 5s passes, turn on the Energy
main power switch and the Saver
power switch. Then, set the (System
sleep level to "Quick Recov- Menu)
ery".
(10)Print stops after printing several pages and locks up. Processing and Memory
lamps on operation panel are lit.
The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.

1 Checking the situation The data processing in a Check if the issue occurs
certain PC is faulty. when printing the data from
all PCs in the network or from
a certain PC. Then, print out
the data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
2 Checking the settings The application is not prop- Check if a problem occurring
erly set. from a certain application and
file (big data like CAD data)
and change application set-
ting and refer to application-
shelp.'
3 Checking the firmware The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware

4 Deleting the job Processing fails. Cancel the job in process and Checking
reprint in the main unit job Job & Job
status Operation
5 Memory allocation Memory allocation is insuf- If the processing memory in U340 Exe-
ficient. the main unit is insufficient, cution
set the Memory allocation by
executing U340 [Adj Mem-
ory].
6 Resetting the main power The main unit locks up. If the operation panel or the
buttons are not active, turn
main power switch off. After
switch on.
(11)Print output is unavailable due to the network factor.

The network has some troubles or the network setting is incorrect.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check if the memory LED on Checking
work. the operation panel of the Job & Job
main unit is blinking after Operation
printing out from the PC. If
not blinking, cancel the pro-
cessing job and reprint out.
2 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- When the printing error
work. appears on the operation
panel or the PC screen, clear
the error caused by the toner
or paper jam, etc.
3 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the main unit IP Network
work. Address in the status page, Settings
etc. and then check if Com-
mand Center can be opened
using that IP Address. If not,
reconfigure the network
again.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the internet connec-
work. tion and restore the network
connection if necessary
5 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the cable and reset
work. the router or HUB.
6 Restarting up The PC or the main unit Restart the PC or the main
locks up. unit, and print out again.

The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected.

1 Checking the cable The cable between the Check the cable connection
main unit and the PC is not between the main unit and
properly connected. the PC.
2 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart the main unit and
does not properly start up. then restart the PC.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Changing the connection Another network is faulty. Directly connect the main unit
to the PC with the cross cable
and then check if the same
data can be printed out.

The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate properly.

1 Restarting up The router or the HUB Check if the link lamp of the
does not properly activate. router or hub is lit and restart
it.
2 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is not In case the link lamp is off,
cable properly connected. once disconnect the Ether-
net cable from the router and
reconnect it to check the link
lamp is lit.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Restarting up The router, HUB, PC or the In case of no connection
main unit do not start up while the link lamp is lit,
properly. restart the router or hub and
then restart up the PC and
the main unit.

The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.

1 Checking the settings The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP Printer
erly set. Address indicated in the sta- Driver
tus page is the same as the Operation
IP Address in the [Port] tab of Guide
[Printer Properties] at the PC.
If not, correct the IP address
at the PC

2 Checking the settings The printer host name is Check the printer host name
not properly set. by printing out the status
report when there is a server
environment. Then, check the
printer host name at the [Port]
tab in the printer properties at
a PC. If they differ, correct the
printer host name.

"Offline" appears and the print function is unavailable.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check the internet connec-
work. tion and restore the network
connection if necessary
2 Restarting up The PC malfunctions. When "Offline" appears on
the printer driver, check if it is
used in the pause or offline.
Then, restart up the PC.
3 Checking the settings The application is not prop- Check if the other Excel /
erly set. Word data can be output and
change the setting of the
application.
4 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if the main unit IP Printer
erly set. Address indicated in the sta- Driver
at the PC
5 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if communication via Network
erly set. command center or PING is Settings
available with IP address set
up. Set up IP address again
and restart the main unit if
necessary.
6 Checking the settings The port settings in the Remove the checks at the
printer properties at the PC dual-directional support and
are incorrect. the SNMP status in the [Port]
tab of the printer properties in
a PC. Then, restart up the
main unit and the PC.
7 Restarting up The main unit does not Check if the test print is out-
start up properly. put after the printer is ready,
and restart up the main unit.

Only one PC can not print among those installed. No error is indicated but print jobs are suspended. [Condi-
tion]• PC OS: Windows7• File: Test Page• Connection: Wireless LAN

1 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart up the main unit or
does not properly start up. the PC.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check the cable connection
connected. (Check if the network con-
nection is available.)
3 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if the ID address is Network
erly set. properly set, and correct it if Settings
incorrect.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the net- Check if access via com- Command
work. mand center or PING is avail- Center RX
able and then check the hub Operation
or router. Guide
5 Checking the settings The printer port IP Correct the IP address and Printer
address, the SNMP of the remove the checks at the Driver
printer driver, or the bi- SNMP status and the dual- Operation
directional support is not directional support in the Guide
properly set. [Port] tab of the printer prop-
erties at a PC. Then, restart
up the main unit and the PC.
6 Uninstalling the security The restriction of the secu- Check if the printer is avail-
software or setting the rity software causes the able by uninstalling the secu-
exception phenomenon. rity software. Or, set the
exception setting.

The main unit IP address is changed.

1 Restarting up There is trouble in the net- Check if a problem occurs
work. with output from all PCs on
the network and restart up
hub or router.
2 Checking the cable The wire is not properly Check if there is problem with
connected. the cable connection on the
network.
3 Restarting up The main unit does not If the operation panel or the
start up properly. buttons are not active, turn
main power switch off. After
switch on.

4 Checking the settings IP address was changed. Check if the main unit IP Printer
Address indicated in the sta- Driver
at the PC
5 Checking the settings The static IP Address is Set the static IP Address in Network
not set in the System the System Menu Settings
Menu
(18)Data is not printed out due to the printer driver setting.

[Disconnection error] appears on the PC screen and the print job cannot be output due to this error. (Print is
unavailable.)[Condition]• PC OS: Windows7• File: Test Page• Connection: Wireless LAN

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains Printer
remaining. in the printer driver and Driver
delete the remaining. Operation
Guide

[Please wait] is indicated at the main unit. The Job is retained without outputting printed material. [Condition]
PC OS: Windows 7, Print file: Test Page, Connection: wireless LAN

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains Printer
remaining. in the printer driver and Driver
delete the remaining. Operation
Guide

A PC does not recognize the main unit.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Check if the printer icon on
properly set. the PC is ready.(Right click
the printer icon and perform
the troubleshooting.)
2 Installing the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the Printer
Operation
Guide
3 Restarting up The PC does not start up Restart up the PC.
properly.

4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is not the Update the printer driver. Printer
latest version. Driver
Operation
Guide

PC operation does not stabilize.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Restart up the PC.(Many
properly set. applications start up.The
availability of the PC memory
or the HDD storage is
decreased.)

Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print
out the data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.

1 Checking the IP address The IP address is not prop- Check if the IP Address indi-
erly set. cated in the main unit status
report and system menu is
same as the IP address in the
port setting of [Printer Proper-
ties] at the PC. If not, correct
the IP address at the port set-
ting

The incorrect printer driver was selected.

1 Installing the printer driver The incorrect printer driver Select the correct printer
is selected. driver. If it is not in the PC,
install the printer driver for the
destination unit in the PC.

Installed printer driver shows "Deleting" and it remains when reinstalling it

1 Deleting the job The print jobs remain in Delete all print jobs spooling Printer
the spool inside the printer inside the printer driver. Driver
driver. Operation
Guide
2 Checking the printer driver There is the unused printer Delete the unused printer
driver. driver.
3 Restarting the print The system is pausing. Right click the pausing printer
icon and select [Print resum-
ing]. Then, check the ready
port.
4 Checking the settings The host name or the IP When the main unit connects
address is not properly set. to a local network, check the
host name and the IP
address on the status report
of the main unit.
5 Adding the Standard TCP/ There is no main unit IP Add the main unit IP address
IP port Address in the Standard in Standard TCP/IP port and
TCP/IP Port print Test Page
(25)The printed image is partly missing.

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF) is faulty.

1 Checking the application The image data process- When the phenomenon
ing with a certain applica- occurs with a certain file only,
tion (Excel, PDF) is faulty. check if there is an abnormal-
ity in the image data.
2 Checking the application The data processing with a Check if the image does not
certain application (Excel, drop out on the print preview,
PDF) is faulty. and refer to the Help in the
application if necessary.
3 Checking the settings The PDL settings is incor- Select "GDI compatible Printer
rect. mode" at [PDL settings] in the Driver
print settings at the PC. Operation
Guide
4 Checking the firmware The firmware is not the lat- Upgrade the main firmware to Firmware

(26)"Paper Mismatch Error" appears.
The paper size is not detected properly.

1 Checking the settings The paper size for the MP Adjust the MP tray paper size
tray is not properly set.
2 Resetting the MP paper The locations of the MP Reset the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to match the paper
match the paper size. size.
3 Checking the MP tray The MP tray is not pulled Pull out the MP tray to extend
out. it if the A3 size paper is not
detected.
4 Checking the settings The paper size is not set Register the custom size in Cassette /
properly in the System [MP Tray Setting] in the Sys- MP Tray
Menu. tem Menu > [Paper Size] > Settings
[Size Entry].
5 Checking the settings Paper Mismatch Error is Set [Ignore] at [Common Set- Common
set to [Ignore]. tings] > [Error Handlings] > Settings
[Paper Mismatch Error] via (System
the System Menu. Menu)

7-7 Error Messages
No. Contents
(1) "Check the document processor" appears.
(3) F010: Program read error (SSD)
(4) F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
(5) F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
(6) F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between the
controller and the print engine)
(7) F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
(8) F050: Engine main program error
(9) F051: Scanner engine program error
(10) F052: Panel engine program error
(11) The cover open message appears after closing the front cover.
(12) The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray.
(13) The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the maintenance front cover.
Content of Error Messages

(1) "Check the document processor" appears.
Closing of the document processor cannot be detected.

1 Executing U244 The DP opening/closing Check the operation of the U244 Exe-
sensor does not operate DP opening/closing sensor cution
properly. by executing U244 [Open]. If
it does not operate properly,
reattach it.
2 Checking the wire The wire is improperly con- Reconnect or replace the Electrical
nected or faulty. wire between the DP open- Diagram of
ing/closing sensor and the PWBs
DP main PWB.
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Check the output of the DP
closing sensor signal sensor signal output is opening/closing sensor signal
faulty. from the DP main PWB.
PWB faulty. PWB
Replace-
ment
5 Checking the wire The wire is improperly con- Reconnect or replace the Electrical
nected or faulty. wire between the engine Diagram of
PWB and the DP main PWB. PWBs

6 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the Firmware
latest version. Upgrade
7 DP replacement The document processor Replace the document pro- DP
is faulty. cessor. Replace-
ment
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main PWB and the operation panel
main PWB is unavailable.

1 Resetting the main power The communication Turn the power switch and
between the main PWB the main power switch off .
and the operation panel After 5s passes, turn the
main PWB is faulty. main power switch and the
power switch on.
2 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Reconnect the wires between Electrical
connected. the main PWB and the opera- Diagram of
tion panel main PWB. Then, PWBs
fix or replace them if they are
3 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the U021 Exe-
faulty. backup RAM data. cution
PWB.
Main PWB
Replace-
ment

(3) F010: Program read error (SSD)
The garbled 2bit data was detected during the program read from the flash memory.

1 (When the service call The firmware is not stored Insert the USB memory Firmware
error appears after replac- in the SSD. device containing all released Upgrade
ing the SSD) Replacing the firmware into the main unit,
SSD along the correct pro- and turn the main power on.
cedures
2 Checking the SSD (if lit An SSD out of specifica- Install the SSD matching the
after replacing the SSD) tion is installed. memory capacity specifica-
tion.
power switch on.
4 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Reconnect the wires between Electrical
connected. the main PWB and the opera- Diagram of
tion panel main PWB. Then, PWBs
fix or replace them if they are
PWB.
(4) F020: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or CPU memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

power switch on.

PWB.
(5) F021: System memory error (RAM reading/writing error or ASIC memory error)
The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the ASIC when the main unit starts up.

1 Resetting the main power The main PWB does not Turn the power switch and
properly start up. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
PWB.
(6) F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication
error between the controller and the print engine)
The communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB is not normal.

between the controller and the main power switch off .
the print engine is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Checking the FFC The FFC is not properly Reconnect the FFC between Electrical
connected, or it is faulty. the main PWB and the Diagram of
engine PWB. When the FFC PWBs
FFC.

the latest version.
PWB.
the engine PWB.
(7) F041: Communication error between the main PWB and the scanner engine
The communication between the main PWB and the engine PWB (scanner) is not normal.

between the controller and the main power switch off .
the scanner is faulty. After 5s passes, turn the
power switch on.
2 Checking the FFC The FFC is not properly Reconnect the FFC between Electrical
connected, or it is faulty. the main PWB and the Diagram of
engine PWB. When the FFC PWBs
FFC.
the latest version.
PWB.

the engine PWB.
(8) F050: Engine main program error

The engine program cannot start up.

2 Resetting the main power The print engine ROM Turn the power switch and
checksum is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not prop- Reattach the EEPROM.
erly attached.
the engine PWB.
(9) F051: Scanner engine program error

The scanner program cannot start up

1 Checking the firmware The engine firmware is not Install the latest engine firm- Firmware
the latest version. ware. Upgrade
2 Resetting the main power The scanner engine ROM Turn the power switch and
checksum is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
erly attached.

the engine PWB.
(10)F052: Panel engine program error

The panel program cannot start up.

1 Firmware upgrade The panel firmware is not Install the latest panel firm- Firmware
the latest version. ware. Upgrade
2 Resetting the main power The panel ROM check- Turn the power switch and
sum is faulty. the main power switch off .
power switch on.
erly attached.
Main PWB
Replace-
ment
(11)The cover open message appears after closing the front cover.

1 Checking the front cover The front cover is aligned When the front cover switch
switch with the other exterior cov- does not turn on even if clos-
ers. ing the front cover, but when
it can turn on by direct push-
ing, check the front cover. If
the cover is not aligned to the
other exterior covers, reat-
tach it. When the switch does
not always turn on, go to the
next step.

2 Checking the wire The wire is not properly Insert the following wire con- Electrical
connected or is faulty. nectors all the way. Check Diagram of
the continuity of the wires, PWBs
and replace them if there is
no continuity.• Front cover
switch - Feed image PWB•
Feed image PW - Engine
PWB
3 Replacing the front cover The front cover switch is Replace the front cover
(12)The add paper message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray.

connected. connectors all the way. Diagram of
Check the continuity of the PWBs
wires, and replace them if
there is no continuity.• MP
paper sensor - Relay connec-
tor• Relay connector - Feed
drive PWB• Feed drive PW -
Engine PWB
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator for the
MP paper sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper sensor is Reattach the MP paper sen-
sensor not properly attached or it sor, and replace it if it is not
is faulty. fixed.
4 Checking the feed drive The feed drive PWB is Reconnect the connectors on Electrical
PWB faulty. the feed drive PWB wires. Diagram of
Then, fix or replace the wires PWBs
drive PWB.
the engine PWB.

(13)The cover open message appears after closing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover.

1 Checking the right cover The covers are not fitted. When the right cover switch
switch does not turn on even if clos-
ing the right cover or the
maintenance front cover, but
when it can turn on by direct
pushing, check the covers. If
the cover is not aligned to the
other exterior covers, reat-
tach it. When the switch does
not always turn on, go to the
next step.
connected or is faulty. connectors all the way. Diagram of
Check the continuity of the PWBs
wires, and replace them if
there is no continuity.• Right
cover switch - Feed drive
PWB• Feed drive PWB-
Engine PWB
3 Replacing the right cover The right cover switch is Replace the right cover

7-8 Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise occurs.
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
section sion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the
gears
(3) Abnormal noise from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal noise from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the
foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal noise from the eject section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject
section
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy.
(7) Abnormal noise from the primary paper feed Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
section sion, attachment failure of the primary paper
feed section
(8) Abnormal noise from the machine front side Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or
attachment failure at the MP feed section
(9) Abnormal noise from the lower side than the Rubbing sound between the bushing and the
fuser eject section stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the
smudges / foreign objects adhesion
(10) Abnormal noise from the upper side of the fuser Rubbing sound between the fuser eject pulley
eject section and the shaft due to the smudges / foreign
objects adhesion
(11) Abnormal noise from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the inter-
ference between the parts in the fuser section
(12) Abnormal noise from inside the machine Open and close operation failure of the toner
supply opening of the toner container, the lack of
toner amount, or the toner condensation
(13) Abnormal noise from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner
condensation in the developer section
(14) Abnormal noise from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhe-
sion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum
section
(15) Abnormal noise from inside the machine (jump- Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness,
ing sounds) smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste
toner vent of the primary transfer section
(16) The drive sounds are noisy during printing. The operation sounds in the drive section

Content of Abnormal Noise
(1) Abnormal noise occurs.

1 Applying the grease The grease on each gear Check the rotation of the
or bushing is not enough. roller, pulley and the gears,
and apply the grease to the
gears and the bushings if not
rotating smoothly.
2 Checking the gear and the The parts such as each Reattach the gear or the
bushing gear or bushing are not bushing.
properly attached.
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushings and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gears for the registration
on them. roller, middle roller, transfer
roller and the DU conveying
roller, and apply grease to
them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The inside of the pulley is Clean the drive shaft of the
grease worn down. middle pulley and apply the
grease to it.
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear tooth are dirty or Clean the transfer drive gear
grease foreign objects are on and the registration drive
them. gear and apply the grease to
them.
4 Checking the feed drive The paper feed drive unit Replace the paper feed drive Feed Drive
unit is faulty. unit. Unit
Replace-
ment
(3) Abnormal noise from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

1 Checking the developer The developer unit drive is Isolate the abnormal devel- U030 Exe-
unit faulty. oper unit by U030, and check cution
if the developer powder does
not leak from the developer
unit, there is no damage, or
the roller rotates manually.
Fix the parts if necessary.

2 Checking the developer The developer unit is Replace the developer unit Developer
unit faulty. with faulty color. Unit
Replace-
ment
(4) Abnormal noise from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushing and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are shaft of the DP conveying
on them. roller and apply the grease to
them.
2 Checking the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bushing.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the drive gears of the
grease foreign objects are on it. DP conveying motor and the
DP reverse motor and apply
the grease to them.
4 Checking the motor The DP conveying motor Reattach the DP conveying
or the DP reverse motor motor or the DP reverse
does not engage with the motor.
drive gear.
(5) Abnormal noise from the eject section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushing and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gear of the eject roller and
on them. apply grease to them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the shaft of the eject
grease objects are on it. pulley and apply grease to it.
3 Checking the shaft of the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the shaft of the feed-
feedshift guide objects are on it. shift guide and apply grease
to it.
(6) Fan rotating sounds are noisy.

1 Cleaning the fan motor The blades of the fan Isolate the noisy fan motor by U037 Exe-
motor are dirty. executing U037, and clean cution
the fan.

2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and Fan
reconnect the wire. Replace it Motors
if it is not fixed. Attach-
able Direc-
tion
(7) Abnormal noise from the primary paper feed section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment failure of the primary paper feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear Reattach the primary paper
clutch or the clutch are not prop- feed drive components such
erly attached. as the gear or the clutch if
they are not properly
attached.
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the primary paper feed
grease dirty or foreign objects are drive components such as
on them. the gear or the bushing and
3 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bush- Pickup
grease dirty or foreign objects are ing of the paper feed roller Pulley &
on them. and apply the grease to them. Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
4 Checking the paper feed The paper feed roller sur- Clean the paper feed roller, or Pickup
roller face is dirty or worn down. replace it if necessary. Pulley &
Feed
Roller
Replace-
ment
(8) Abnormal noise from the machine front side

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear When the gears or the clutch
clutch or the clutch are not prop- in the MP paper feed drive
erly attached. section are not properly
attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the bush-
grease dirty or foreign objects are ing of the MP paper feed
on them. roller and apply the grease to
them.
3 Checking the MP bottom The MP bottom pad sur- Clean the MP bottom pad
pad face is dirty or worn down. and replace it if necessary.

4 Checking the MP bottom The MP bottom plate is not Reattach the MP bottom
plate properly attached. plate.
(9) Abnormal noise from the lower side than the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the fuser eject roller due to the smudges / foreign
objects adhesion

1 Cleaning and applying the The fuser eject roller, Clean the fuser eject roller,
grease bushing or the stop ring bushing and the stop ring and
are dirty, or foreign objects apply the lubricant to them.
are on them.
Replace-
ment
(10)Abnormal noise from the upper side of the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the fuser eject pulley and the shaft due to the smudges / foreign objects adhesion

1 Cleaning and applying the The pulley or the shaft is Clean the fuser eject pulley
grease dirty, or foreign objects are and the shaft and apply the
on them. lubricant to them.
Replace-
ment
(11)Abnormal noise from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushings and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gears for the fuser rollers,
on them. and apply grease to them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser eject pulley
grease objects are on it. and the shaft and apply the
lubricant to them.
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear
grease objects are on it. and apply the grease to it.
4 Applying the grease The grease is not enough. Apply the grease to the pres-
sure release cam and the
frame.

5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser front guide is Replace the fuser unit. Fuser Unit
bent and it contacts the Replace-
press roller. ment
(12)Abnormal noise from inside the machine

Open and close operation failure of the toner supply opening of the toner container, the lack of toner amount,
or the toner condensation

1 Checking the toner con- The torque increases due Shake the toner container Toner
tainer to the toner condensation. enough and reinstall it. Or, Container
replace it. Replace-
ment

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section

1 Checking the developer The shaft or the bushing of Check if the developer roller
unit the developer roller is dirty rotates. If not rotating
or foreign objects are on smoothly, clean the shaft or
them. the bushing of the developer
roller.
2 Checking the developer The torque inside the Clean the developer unit. Developer
unit developer unit increased Then, replace it if the issue is Unit
due to the toner condensa- not resolved. Replace-
tion, etc. ment

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to Adjust-
drum. supply the toner to the clean- ment/
ing unit. Mainte-
nance
Menu
2 Checking the drum screw The drum screw does not Check if the drum cleaning Drum Unit
properly rotate. screw rotates. If not rotating Replace-
smoothly, clean it. If it locks ment
up, replace the drum unit.
3 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth of the drum
grease tooth of the drum drive drive gear and apply the
gear, or the grease is not grease to them.
enough.

4 Checking the drum unit The torque inside the drum Execute the drum refresh. If Drum Unit
and the developer unit unit increased due to the not repaired, replace the Replace-
waste toner clogging, etc. drum unit. ment
(15)Abnormal noise from inside the machine (jumping sounds)

Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the
primary transfer section

1 Checking the shutter of the The shutter of the waste Check the opening and clos-
toner waste vent toner vent is not properly ing operation of the shutter of
opened and closed. the toner waste vent in the
transfer cleaning unit, and fix
the parts if necessary.
2 Checking the cleaning The cleaning screw does Check if the cleaning screw in
screw not properly rotate. the transfer cleaning unit
rotates smoothly, and clean it
if not rotating smoothly.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear or the bush- Clean the parts in the primary
grease ing is dirty, or foreign transfer unit such as the drive
objects are on them. gear and the bushing, and
4 Checking the primary The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer Primary
transfer unit faulty. unit. Transfer
Unit
Replace-
ment
(16)The drive sounds are noisy during printing.

The operation sounds in the drive section

1 Checking the settings The Quiet Mode is off. Set [On] at [Adjustment/Main- Adjust-
tenance] > [Quiet Mode] via ment/
the System Menu. Mainte-
nance
(System
Menu)

7-9 Iris connector troubleshooting
*:Unless otherwise specified, it occurs at start-up
Phenomenon
PWB (2) Oblique insertion (A pin at (3) Oblique insertion (a pin at
Connector Connection point Remarks
name (1) Entire dropout the right or upper side might the left or lower edge might
not be connected) not be connected)
Engine YC6 Feed Drive PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No Occur JAM and service No Occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) call error, C7601 (ID sensor call error, but abnormal oper- occurs
error *D rank) ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and no cassette open/
close can be detected
YC40 Feed Image PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power It doesn't occur JAM and C (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
communication error) error) call, but abnormal operation occurs
*Refer to Remarks (2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC42 Feed Image PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM C2760 (Transfer belt motor No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) error) call error error occurs
(2) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC9 APC PWB When printing, C4001 (Poly- No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The polygon motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
gon motor synchronization call error call error, but abnormal (3) The K image signal is shut off and abnormal K images are output
error) image *Refer to Remarks
YC27 APC PWB, lower power C0980(24V power shutoff C0980(24V power shutoff No occur JAM and service (1) The 24V power output permission signal is shut off and no 24V power is gener-
PWB, waster toner motor and detection) detection) call error ated to cause 24V power error
weight detection sensor (2) The 24V output permission signal is shut off and no 24V power is generated to
cause 24V power error
YC16 DP, sensor and scanner motor C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) C3100(Carriage error) (1) The carriage drive motor control signal is shut off and carriage error occurs
(2) Power to the carriage position sensor is shut off and carriage error occurs
(3) The carriage drive motor control signal is shut off and carriage error occurs
YC36 CCD PWB C3800(AFE error) No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) CPU-AFE device communication line is shut off and no communication is estab-
call error call error lished to cause AFE error
YC34 Transfer High Voltage PWB No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer high voltage control signal is shut off and images become faint with-
call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal out transfer
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks (3) Transfer belt cleaning high voltage control signal is shut off and cleaning failure
occurs
YC33 Main High Voltage PWB C5101 (Main high voltage K No occur JAM and service C5101 (Main high voltage K (1) K current detection signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
error) call error error) (3) A main charge control signal is disconnected and high voltage error occurs
YC1 Lower voltage power Source System error F040 (1) The power line to Engine PWB is shut off and no communication with Main PWB
PWB is established without Engine PWB start-up
YC29 IH PWB C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- C6950(IH CPU communica- (1) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
tion error) tion error) tion error) (2) No power is supplied to IH PWB and no communication is established
(3) Ground is disconnected and no communication is established
YC43 Main PWB System error F040 No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) ASIC-CPU communication line is shut off and no communication is established
call error call error, but abnormal oper- (3) The signal to control "Job separator" LED on the operation panel is shut off and no
ation *Refer to Remarks LED is lit when ejected to the job separator
7-406
Phenomenon
Engine YC35 Main PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) A job does not start while continuing Copy scans display
YC38 Temperature and humidity No occur JAM and service (1) The outer temperature/humidity sensor signal is shut off and C7800 (D rank) error
sensor, power source fan call error, C7800 (Broken occurs Temperature is kept at 23°C and no temperature correction functions
motor outer thermistor wire *D rank)
*Refer to Remarks
YC4 Fiery Relay PWB
Feed YC6 Engine PWB C0362(Engine CPU-IO ASIS C6770(IH fuser lower power No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
image communication error) error) call error occurs
(2) The IH power control signal power line is shut off and IH low power error occurs
(3) The drum heater power line is shut off and drum heater is not activated
YC28 Engine PWB C7901 (Drum K EEPROM No occur JAM and service C2760 (Transfer belt motor (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
error) call error error) error occurs
(2) The drum motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The transfer belt motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
YC29 Feed Drive PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C7980(Waste toner over- C7470(Toner sucking fan (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) flow)*Refer to Remarks for error) (2) The waste toner sensor control signal is shut off and waste toner overflow occurs
occurrence condition (3) The toner sucking fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC32 The middle transfer belt fuser C1950(Middle transfer belt No occur JAM and service "Main unit cover is open" the (1) The communication line with the primary transfer EEPROM is shut off and com-
high voltage PWB container unit EEPROM error) call error, but abnormal oper- front cover open is displayed. munication error occurs
solenoid ation *Refer to Remarks (2) The Yellow toner container cover open/close control signal is shut off and the
cover is not opened at Yellow toner empty
(3) The front cover open/close sensor signal is shut of and constant cover open
occurs
YC33 IH PWB fan motor, Eject/IH C6920(IH coil cooling fan C6920(IH coil cooling fan No occur JAM and service (1) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
fan motor error) error) call error (2) Ejection or the IH fan motor control signal is shut off and FAN error occurs.
YC17 Ejection motor, sensor for C7901 (Drum K EEPROM When printing, JAM470x When printing, JAM430x (1) The communication line with unit EEPROM is not shut off and communication
conveying, drum developer error) (Switch-back sensor non- (Duplex sensor non-arrival x: error occurs
relay PWB arrival x: differ by cassette differ by cassette) (2) The signal of the sensor on the paper conveying path is shut off and jam is
detected while being unable to detect paper
(3) The switch-back motor control signal is shut off at duplex printing and no paper is
switched. Then, jam is detected.
YC12 RFID PWB C7320(Toner container No occur JAM and service C7320(Toner container (1) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
detection connector error) call error, but abnormal oper- detection connector error) (2) The power line to the PWB to communicate the toner container is shut off and the
ation *Refer to Remarks toner container indication disappears from the operation panel while being unable to
detect the toner container
(3) The toner container sensor line is shut off and connector error occurs
YC36 Container motor When supplying the toner, When supplying the toner, No occur JAM and service (1) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
C7001(container stir motor C7001(container stir motor call error (2) The control signal to container motor is shut off and motor error occurs.
error) error) (3) As the signal which controls the turn direction of the container motor is shut off
and the turn direction is fixed, but toner supply error doesn't occur since turned to the
supplying direction.
YC24 Drum motor Bk, Developer Bk C2201(Drum motor K steady- C2760(Transfer belt motor C2201(Drum motor K steady- (1) Since the control signal to drum motor Bk is shut off, motor error occurs.
or Belt motor state error) error) state error) (2) Since the control signal to developer Bk or belt motor is shut off, motor error
occurs.
(3) Since the control signal to drum motor Bk is shut off, motor error occurs.
7-407
Phenomenon
Feed YC23 Sensor belt, separation motor C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- C2700(Primary and second- (1) The primary and secondary transfer pressure motor control signal is shut off and
image ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release ary transfer pressure release pressure error occurs
error) error) error) (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and pres-
sure error occurs
(3) The primary and secondary transfer pressure sensor control signal is shut off and
pressure error occurs
YC19 Toner motor, sensor When printing, C7301(Hop- When printing, C7301(Hop- No jam and service call error (1) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
per motor K error) per motor K error) (2) The hopper motor K control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The hopper K toner detection control signal is shut off and no toner is supplied
from the toner container while constantly judging sufficient toner
YC2 The right cover switch "Main unit cover is open" the
front cover open is displayed.
YC35 Transfer High Voltage PWB, No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) No power is supplied to Main High Voltage PWB and blank pages are output
Main High Voltage PWB call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal call error, but abnormal (2) No power is supplied to the transfer high voltage and images become faint without
image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks image *Refer to Remarks transfer
(3) Power to the developer unit is shut off and faint images are output
YC3 Feed Drive PWB C2500(Conveying motor (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
error)
YC1 Lower voltage power source C2700(Primary and second- (1) No power is supplied to Feed Image PWB and motor error occurs
PWB ary transfer pressure release
error)
YC22 Fuser PWB, sensor, thermis- C6980(Fuser EEPROM C6030(Broken upper fuser No jam and service call error (1) The communication line with the fuser EEPROM is shut off and communication
tor error) thermistor detection) error occurs
(2) The fuser thermistor wire is broken and thermistor error occurs
YC30 BR Main PWB, DF Main PWB When copying, "Inner tray is No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
full. Remove the paper. " call error, but abnormal oper- call error, but abnormal oper- (1) AK detection signal is shut off and control is turned off while judging no AK. The
message is displayed. ation *Refer to Remarks ation *Refer to Remarks part attached to the eject section turns on the sensor there when no AK is installed
but it is turned off to cause mismatch when AK is installed and inner tray mis-detec-
tion occurs
(2) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
(3) No power is supplied to the paper sensor for the AK eject and [Job separator] LED
on the operation panel is not lit
YC25 DF Main PWB No occur JAM and service *AK, 4K finisher installation
call error, but abnormal oper- (1) The communication line with the finisher is shut off and communication error
ation *Refer to Remarks occurs to cause the finisher partial operation. Not entering into Finisher but staying
between AK and Finisher. No jam indication
Feed YC3 Engine PWB C0361(Engine CPU-IO ASIS No occur JAM and service No occur JAM and service (1) The communication line with ASIC is not connected and communication error
drive communication error) call error, but abnormal oper- call error, C7601 (ID sensor occurs
ation *Refer to Remarks error *D rank) (2) No power is supplied to the cassette open/close sensor and the cassette open/
close cannot be detected
(3) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
YC2 Feed Image PWB C2840(Transfer belt cleaning C2840(Transfer belt cleaning No occur JAM and service (1) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
motor error) motor error) call error (2) The transfer belt cleaning motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
7-408
Phenomenon
Feed YC7 Conveying cover JAM0000(Initial JAM) "Main unit cover is open" the No occur JAM and service (1) The signal of the paper sensor on the conveying path is shut off and jam occurs
drive right cover open is displayed. call error, but C6900 *Refer while detecting paper at power-up
to Remarks (2) The right cover open/close sensor signal is shut off and right cover open is
detected constantly
(3) The MPF paper size detection signal is shut off and size error occurs. For exam-
ple: A4 side to indefinite size, A3 to A4 side When continuous A4L printing, occurs
Fuser edge cooling fan error(C6900).
YC8 Conveying cover C1000(MPF lift motor error) No occur JAM and service No jam and service call error (1) MPF lift motor sensor signal is shut off and motor error occurs without detecting
call error, but when executing the position
the MPF paper feeding, (2) The primary and secondary transfer pressure control signal is shut off and motor
C1000 (MPF lift motor error). error occurs when feeding from MPF
YC10 Fuser motor C6610(Fuser pressure C7490(Eject cooling fan No jam and service call error (1) The fuser pressure motor control signal is shut off and fuser pressure position
releasing detection sensor error) sensor error occurs
error) (2) The eject fan control signal is shut off and fan error occurs
YC11 Feed motor C2500(Conveying motor C2500(Conveying motor JAM0501 at printing (1) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
error) error) (2) The feed motor control signal is shut off and motor error occurs
(3) The feed motor rotation direction control signal is shut off and jam occurs with the
reverse rotation
YC4 Feed clutch JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 No occur JAM and service JAM0501 at printing(CAS1 (1) Cassette 1 feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam occurs
no paper feed JAM) call error. no paper feed JAM) (2) Cassette 2 paper feed clutch control signal is shut off and no paper feed jam
occurs
(3) Cassette 1 paper feed clutch control signal is shut of and no paper feed jam
occurs
YC5 Main unit (cassette) Cassette paper size is not Cassette bottom plate is not Cassette 1 and Cassette 2 (1) The cassette paper size sensor is shut off and size cannot be detected
displayed at the copy screen lifted up are displayed (2) Cassette 1 open/close sensor signal is shut off and the lift-up operation is not exe-
which the error doesn't occur. cuted without detecting the cassette open/close
(3) Cassette 1 and 2 lift-up motor control signal is shut off and Cassette 1 and 2 error
occurs
YC9 Registration clutch, ID sensor When printing, JAM4101(belt No occur JAM and service When printing, JAM4101(belt (1) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and no paper is conveyed to cause
roll-up sensor is non-arrival). call error, C7601 (ID sensor roll-up sensor is non-arrival). jam
error *D rank) (2) The machine front side ID sensor signal line is shut off and C7601 error (D rank)
occurs
(3) The registration clutch control signal is shut off and paper cannot be conveyed to
cause jam
YC6 Paper feed conveying sensor, JAM0000(Initial JAM) JAM0000(Initial JAM) No occur JAM and service (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
clutch call error. However if execut- paper
ing cassette 2 feed, JAM0502 (1) The paper conveying path sensor signal is shut off and jam occurs while detecting
occurs. paper
(3) The power to the sensor on the paper conveying path passing through when feed-
ing from Cassette 2 is shut off and jam occurs if feeding from Cassette 2
YC1 Feed Image PWB C2500 or C6610(Conveying (1) No power is supplied to Feed Drive PWB and motor error occurs
motor error or Fuser pressure
releasing detection sensor
error)
7-409
Phenomenon
Main YC42 Power Source PWB The operation panel is not (1) No power is supplied to Main PWB and Panel does not start up
activated
YC6 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is acti-
vated but nothing appears
(White screen)
YC12 Panel Main PWB The operation panel is not The error doesn't occur. No (1) Since the power is not supplied to Panel, the Panel doesn't start up.
activated response when pressing the (2) Since the machine front side of power button signal is shut off, nothing is
main switch. responded.
(3) Since the signal for Panel recovery from sleep mode is shut off, when attempting
to recover by pressing the Energy Saver key in sleep mode, the operation panel side
cannot be recovered with the communication error, abnormal communication occurs
the service call error.
(Or when receiving FAX during sleep mode, the service call error appears while the
panel cannot return)
YC60 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC59 USB Hub PWB No error has occurred USB memory is not recognized when inserting it into the front side USB port
YC63 Engine PWB System error F040 No jam and service call error No jam and service call error
YC43 Engine PWB F186 at printing F186 at printing F186 at printing (1) to (3) Scanner scans Copy but Scan display does not finish
YC23 Cooling fan No error has occurred
YC2 HDD
YC32 HDD
YC8 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred
YC9 KUIO Relay PWB No error has occurred No error has occurred No error has occurred
7-410
Phenomenon occurring at contact failure of the FFC (YC35) between the engine PWB and main PWB
Pin number of YC35 on

Phenomenon occurring at copy without an original
the engine PWB
2 White printed in black with no error indication
3 (Intermediate brightness remains)
5,6,8,9 Lock-up at the scan display
11 Full-page solid red image with no error indication
12 No streaks
14 Full-page solid violet image with no error indication
15 No streaks
17 Full-page solid yellow image printed out of printable area
18 Clear vertical streaks, F186 error
19 Full-page solid cyan image printed out of printable area
21 Full-page solid magenta image printed out of printable area
23 Full-page solid black image printed out of printable area
25 to 32 F186 error
7-411
8 PWBs
8-1 Description for PWB
(1) BF main PWB
(1-1) Connector position
YC58 1 1 7 1 13 1 6
YC6
B15 1 B1 20 YC11 YC63 YC9
1 YC60 60
1 6 15
A1 YC12 A15 5 YC8 1
YC59
YC43
1
1
YC5
1
10
YC10
40
YC2 1
YC51 1
52
YC32 YC42
YC23 3
1 10
3 1 1
Figure 8-1

(1-2) PWB photograph
Figure 8-2

(1-3) Connector lists
Destination
YC2: HDD
YC6: Operation panel main PWB
YC8: KUIO relay PWB
YC9: KUIO relay PWB
YC12: Power switch, Operation panel main PWB
YC23: Controller fan motor
YC32: HDD
YC42: Power supply PWB
YC43: Engine PWB
YC58: WiFi PWB
YC59: USB hub PWB
YC60: USB hub PWB
YC63: Engine PWB
Connec- Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

tor
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
2 TXP O - HDD data signal
3 TXN O - HDD data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I - HDD data signal
6 RXP I - HDD data signal
7 GND - - Ground

2 LCD_OFF O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
3 LOCKN O DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 TX0P O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 VBUS1 O DC5V DC3.3V power output to IFPWB

2 USB_DN1 I/O - USB data signal
3 USB_DP1 I/O - USB data signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 AUDIO1 I Analog AUDIO signal
6 WAKEUP1 O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
7 RESET1 I DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
8 GND - - Ground

tor
YC8 9 VBUS0 O DC5V DC5V power output to IFPWB
10 USB_DN0 I/O - USB data signal
11 USB_DP0 I/O - USB data signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 AUDIO0 I Analog AUDIO signal
14 WAKEUP0 O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
15 RESET I DC0V/3.3V Reset signal

2 5V_CUT0 I DC0V/5V DC5V cut signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 5V O DC5V DC5V power output to IFPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 5V_CUT1 I DC5V DC5V cut signal
YC12 A1 I2C_SCL_NFC O DC0V/ I2C clock signal

3.3V(pulse)
A2 INT_ENERGYSA I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VEKEY
A3 FPRST O DC0V/3.3V Operation panel reset signal
A4 P2C_SDAT O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A5 C2P_SDAT I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A6 P2C_SDIR O DC0V/3.3V Panel communication direction signal
A7 P2C_SBSY O DC0V/3.3V Panel busy signal
A8 C2P_SCK O DC0V/ Panel clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A9 DISPLAY_POWE O DC0V/3.3V LCD backlight lighting-off signal
RON
A10 INT_ANYKEY O DC0V/3.3V Main recovery signal
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 +5.0V6 O DC5V DC5V power output
B1 POWER_ON O DC0V/3.3V Power key: On/Off
B2 GND - - Ground

tor
YC12 B3 JOB_LED O DC0V/3.3V JOB separator LED control signal
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 BEEP_POWERO O DC0V/3.3V Alert sound recovery signal
N
B8 LED_MEMORY O DC0V/3.3V Memory LED control signal
B9 LED_ATTENTION O DC0V/3.3V Attention LED control signal
B10 LED_PROCESSI O DC0V/3.3V Processing LED control signal
NG
B11 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal
B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ O DC0V/3.3V Panel recovery signal
B13 INT_ENERGYSA I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VEKEY
B14 NIRQ O DC0V/3.3V NFC interrupt signal
B15 I2C_SDA_NFC O DC0V/ I2C clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
YC23 1 SPEED CON- O DC0V/5V CONFM: On/Off

TROL
2 GND - - Ground
3 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output

2 +5V_HDD O DC5V DC5V power output to HDD
1 GND - - Ground
YC42 1 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input from Power supply

PWB
2 GND - - Ground
3 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input from Power supply
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
PWB
6 GND - - Ground
PWB
8 GND - - Ground

tor
YC42 9 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input from Power supply
PWB
10 GND - - Ground

2 AC_DETECT - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 SAR_2_CH21_N I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 SAR_2_CH21_P I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
10 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
13 GND - - Ground
14 SAR_2_VCLK2_N I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
15 SAR_2_VCLK2_P I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
16 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
19 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
22 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)

tor
YC43 24 SAR_2_CH13_P I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
25 GND - - Ground
26 SAR_2_VCLK1_N I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
27 SAR_2_VCLK1_P I DC0V/ Image data signal
3.3V(pulse)
28 GND - - Ground
29 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
30 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
31 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
32 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
33 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
34 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
35 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
36 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
37 SAT_2_HSYNC_ O DC0V/ Image data signal
D_N 3.3V(pulse)
D_P 3.3V(pulse)
C_N 3.3V(pulse)
C_P 3.3V(pulse)
41 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
42 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
43 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_N 3.3V(pulse)
44 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O DC0V/ Image data signal
_P 3.3V(pulse)
45 GND - - Ground

tor
YC43 46 OS_SAD1N O DC0V/ Serializer output data
3.3V(pulse)
47 OS_SAD1P O DC0V/ Serializer output data
3.3V(pulse)
48 GND - - Ground
49 OS_SAD2N O DC0V/ Serializer output data
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
51 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
54 GND - - Ground
55 OS_SACKN O DC0V/ Serializer transfer data
3.3V(pulse)
56 OS_SACKP O DC0V/ Serializer transfer data
3.3V(pulse)
57 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
60 GND - - Ground
YC58 1 SD_D3 I/O DC0V/ Data signal

3.3V(pulse)
2 SD_D2 I/O DC0V/ Data signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 SD_CMD I/O DC0V/ Data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 GND - - Ground
5 SD_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 GND - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
9 GND - - Ground

tor
YC58 10 VIO PI DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
11 VBAT PI DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 PAVDD PI DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 HOSTWAKE I DC0V/3.3V Interrupt signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 RESET I DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
18 DETECT - - Ground
19 USB_+ I/O USB data signal
20 USB_- I/O USB data signal
YC59 1 VBUS O DC5V DC5V power output

2 DATA- I/O LVDS USB data signal
3 DATA+ I/O LVDS USB data signal
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC60 1 +5V7 O DC5V DC5V power output

2 +5V7 O DC5V DC5V power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC63 1 JS_LED_REM O DC0V/3.3V JOB separator LED lighting signal

2 ENG_WAKEUP_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine sleep recovery signal
REQ(M_E)
3 HLD_ENG_N(M_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine stop signal
E)
4 E2C_SDAT(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication data output signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 C2E_SDAT(E_M) I DC0V/ G6 communication data input signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 C2E_SCLK(M_E) I DC0V/ G6 communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 E2C_SBSY(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication busy signal
3.3V(pulse)

tor
YC63 8 E2C_IR(E_M) O DC0V/3.3V G6 communication interrupt signal
9 E2C_SDIR(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication direction signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 ENG_POWOFF_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine power off signal
N(E_M)
11 HLD_SCN_N(E_ I DC0V/3.3V Scanner stop signal
M)
12 DP_WAKEUP_RE I DC0V/3.3V DP sleep recovery signal
Q
13 GND - - Ground

(2) Engine PWB
B16 B1 10 B11 B1
40 1 1 8
YC36 5 YC1 1 YC29
YC16 1 YC38
4 5 A11 A12
1 YC43 A1 A16 A1 B1
14 1
YS1
1 YC6
YC35 B12 A1
YC42 A20
B1
60
18
YC40
B20 A1
20 4
YC33 YC23
YC39 1 20 1
1 6 1
YC22
YC9 YC27 YC34 YC21
1 40 1 17 1 11 1 12
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4

Destination
YC6: Feed Drive PWB
YC9: APC PWB
YC16: DP, Home position sensor, Original size sensor, Original detection sensor, Scanner motor
YC21: Coin vendor
YC22: Key card 1, Key counter
YC23: Key card or MK2
YC27: APC PWB, Waste toner motor, Weight detection sensor, Power supply PWB
YC29: IH PWB
YC33: Main high voltage PWB
YC34: Transfer high voltage PWB
YC35: Main PWB
YC36: CCD PWB
YC38: Temperature/humidity sensor, Power supply fan motor, PF main PWB
YC40: Feed image PWB
YC42: Feed image PWB
YC43: Main PWB

tor
YC6 A1 3.3V3_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A2 3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal
A10 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog IDS2 detection signal
A11 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog IDS2 detection signal
A12 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal
B1 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 detection signal
B2 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 detection signal
B3 REG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
B4 ATLAS_CLK O DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B5 ATLAS_SDO(EN O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
G to DRI) 3.3V(pulse)
B6 ATLAS_EN O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication enable signal
B7 ATLAS_CS I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal

tor
YC6 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
to ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
B9 MPF_ORG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
B10 CAS1_2_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close detection signal
B11 REG_CL_REM O DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 DATAP2_K O LVDS Image data K

2 DATAN2_K O LVDS Image data K
3 GND - - Ground
4 DATAP1_K O LVDS Image data K
5 DATAN1_K O LVDS Image data K
6 GND - - Ground
7 LSU_TH O Analog LSU thermistor voltage
8 GND - - Ground
9 POL_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) PM clock signal
10 POL_RDY I DC0V/3.3V PM ready signal
11 POL_REM O DC0V/5V PM remote signal
12 BD I DC0V/5V BD signal
13 P4_BK O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
14 P2 O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
15 P0 O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
16 CSI_K O DC0V/3.3V EPROM tip select signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 DATAP2_M O LVDS Image data M
19 DATAN2_M O LVDS Image data M
20 GND - - Ground
21 DATAP1_M O LVDS Image data M
22 DATAN1_M O LVDS Image data M
23 GND - - Ground
24 SD_CLK O DC0V/3.3V Shading clock signal
25 P4_Col O DC0V/3.3V Laser control signal
26 CSI_C O DC0V/3.3V EPROM tip select signal
27 CSI_Y O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver tip select signal
28 INT_ST I DC0V/5V Laser driver initialization monitor signal
29 SET O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver set signal
30 CSI_M O DC0V/3.3V Laser driver tip select signal

tor
32 DIO I DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data input sig-
nal
33 GND - - Ground
34 DOI O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication data output
signal
35 GND - - Ground
36 SKOI O DC0V/3.3V Micro wire communication clock signal
37 GND - - Ground
38 CSO O DC0V/3.3V EPROM tip select signal
39 GND - - Ground
40 DATAP2_C O LVDS Image data C
41 DATAN2_C O LVDS Image data C
42 GND - - Ground
43 DATAP1_C O LVDS Image data C
44 DATAN1_C O LVDS Image data C
45 GND - - Ground
46 DATAP2_Y O LVDS Image data Y
47 DATAN2_Y O LVDS Image data Y
48 GND - - Ground
49 DATAP1_Y O LVDS Image data Y
50 DATAN1_Y O LVDS Image data Y
YC16 A1 GND - - Ground

A2 SCAN_MOT_2_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A3 SCAN_MOT_2_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) SM control signal
A6 PLT_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Original detection sensor: On/Off
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A9 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output
A10 ORG_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Original size detection sensor: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 HP_SENS I DC0V/3.3V HP: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground

tor
A16 GND - - Ground
B1 DP_CLK(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication clock signal
DP)
B2 DP_SOO(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data output signal
DP)
B3 DP_TMG(DP to I DC0V/3.3V DP scanning start signal
ENG)
B4 DP_CO(DP to I DC0V/3.3V DP cover open/close detection signal
ENG)
B5 DP_RDY(DP to I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
ENG)
B6 DP_FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V DP conveying sensor: On/Off
B7 DP_ORG_SET I DC0V/3.3V Original detection sensor: On/Off
B8 3.3V3_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 +24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output
B15 DP_SEL(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
DP)
B16 DP_SDI(DP to I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data input signal
ENG)

2 SGND - - Ground
3 SGND - - Ground
4 MCV_ENBL I DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor enable signal
5 FGND - - Ground
6 MCV_FED_COU O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
NT
7 MCV_EJ_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
8 MCV_COPY_SIG O DC0V/3.3V Coin vendor control signal
9 MCV_UART_TXD O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 SGND - - Ground

tor
YC21 11 MCV_UART_RXD I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
12 SGND - - Ground
2 DC1_SET I DC0V/3.3V Key counter set signal
3 DC1_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Key counter count signal
YC23 A1 +5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
A2 +5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
A9 MK2_ENBL I DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
A10 +24V4 O DC24V DC24V power output
B1 MK2_RKEY7 O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 MK2_COUNT O DC0V/3.3V Count signal
YC27 1 +5V4IL_LSU O DC5V DC5V power output

2 +5V4IL_LSU O DC5V DC5V power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 CLN_MOT_A O DC0V/24V Cleaning motor drive control
6 CLN_MOT_B O DC0V/24V Cleaning motor drive control
8 PGND - - Ground
9 WTNR_MOT_A O DC0V/24V Waste toner motor drive control

tor
YC27 10 WTNR_MOT_B O DC0V/24V Waste toner motor drive control
11 WTNR_WEIGHT I DC0V/3.3V Waste toner sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
14 AC DETECTOR I DC0V/3.3V AC shutdown detection signal
15 GND - - Ground
16 CAS_HEATER O DC5V Cassette heater control signal
17 SLEEP O DC0V/5V 24V output enabling signal

2 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI O DC0V/ IH Clock signal (High)
3.3V(pulse)
4 IH_IGBT_CLK_L O DC0V/ Clock signal (Low)
OW 3.3V(pulse)
5 IH_ERROR I DC0V/3.3V IH error signal
6 IH_TXD O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 IH_RXD I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
9 IH_RELAY O DC0V/3.3V IH relay signal
YC33 1 SGND - - Ground
2 SGND - - Ground
3 HV_REM O DC0V/3.3V High voltage remote signal
4 B_K_MAG_AC_C O DC0V/10V AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
5 B_K_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
6 M_C_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage C
7 B_M_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage M
NT
8 M_K_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage K
9 M_M_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage M
10 B_C_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage C
NT
11 B_C_MAG_AC_C O DC0V/10V AC magnet roller bias control voltage C
NT

tor
YC33 12 M_Y_DC_CNT O DC0V/10V DC charger control voltage Y
13 M_M_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection M
14 M_K_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Discharge detection voltage K
15 M_C_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection C
16 M_Y_I_SENS I DC0V/10V Charger current detection Y
17 B_Y_MAG_DC_C O DC0V/10V DC magnet roller bias control voltage Y
NT
18 B_MAG_AC_CLK O DC0V/10V AC Magnet roller bias clock signal
YC34 1 CL_CNT O Analog Cleaning control voltage

2 T1_Y_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
3 T1_C_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
4 T1_M_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
5 T1_I_SENS I Analog Primary transfer current detection
6 T2_OFF_REM O DC0V/16V Secondary transfer remote off signal
7 T1_K_CNT O Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
8 SP_CNT O Analog Separation bias control voltage
9 T2_CNT O Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
10 T_REM O DC0V/10V Transfer remote signal
11 SGND - - Ground

2 OS_SAD4P O LVDS Serializer output data
3 OS_SAD4N O LVDS Serializer output data
4 GND - - Ground
5 OS_SACKP O LVDS Serializer transfer data
6 OS_SACKN O LVDS Serializer transfer data
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground

tor
YC35 15 OS_SAD1N O LVDS Serializer output data
16 GND - - Ground
17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_P
18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_N
19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_P
20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_N
21 SAT_2_HSYNC_ O LVDS Image data signal
C_P
C_N
D_P
D_N
25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_P
26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A O LVDS Image data signal
_N
27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_P
28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B O LVDS Image data signal
_N
29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O LVDS Image data signal
_P
30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C O LVDS Image data signal
_N
31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O LVDS Image data signal
_P
32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D O LVDS Image data signal
_N
33 GND - - Ground
34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P I LVDS Image data signal
35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N I LVDS Image data signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 SAR_2_CH13_P I LVDS Image data signal
38 SAR_2_CH13_N I LVDS Image data signal
39 GND - - Ground

tor
YC35 40 SAR_2_CH12_P I LVDS Image data signal
42 GND - - Ground
45 GND - - Ground
46 SAR_2_VCLK2_P I LVDS Image data signal
47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N I LVDS Image data signal
48 GND - - Ground
51 GND - - Ground
54 GND - - Ground
57 GND - - Ground
58 GND - - Ground
59 AC_DETECT - - Ground
60 GND - - Ground

5 NC - - Not used
6 LED_PWM O DC0V/ LED driver PWM signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
8 DSI_CIS_5P I LVDS Serial input data
9 DSI_CIS_5N I LVDS Serial input data
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground

tor
YC36 15 DSI_CIS_3N I LVDS Serial input data
16 GND - - Ground
17 DSI_CIS_CKP I LVDS Transfer clock
18 DSI_CIS_CKN I LVDS Transfer clock
19 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 AFE_RD I DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication read signal
27 GND - - Ground
28 AFE_WD O DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication write signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 AFE_CLK O DC0V/ AFE serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
31 GND - - Ground
32 AFE_CS O DC0V/3.3V AFE serial communication select signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 AFE_MCLK_P O LVDS AFE clock signal
35 AFE_MCLK_N O LVDS AFE clock signal
36 GND - - Ground
37 NC - - Not used
YC38 A1 PF_CAS_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal

A2 PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
A3 PF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A4 PF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A5 PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
A6 PF_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A7 PF_SEL2 O DC0V/3.3V PF CPU signal

tor
YC38 A8 PF_SEL1 O DC0V/3.3V Side paper feeder CPU signal
A9 GND - - Ground
A11 PF_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V PF vertical conveying sensor: On/Off
B1 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 SUB_SDA I/O DC0V/ Communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B4 SUB_CLK O DC0V/ Communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B5 LVU_PWB_FAN_ I DC0V/3.3V Power supply fan alarm signal
ALM
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 LVU_PWB_FAN_ O DC0V/24V Power supply fan: On/Off
REM
B8 HUMID_CLK O DC0V/3.3V Temperature/humidity sensor clock signal
B9 HUMID_OUT I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (humidity)
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 TEMP I Analog Temperature/humidity sensor detection
voltage (temperature)
YC39 1 5V0 I DC5V DC5V power input

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 +24V4 I DC24V DC24V power input
YC40 A1 +5V0 O DC5V DC5V power output

A3 GND - - Ground
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground

tor
YC40 A10 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V BR job separator sensor: On/Off
A11 FRONT_CO_OPE I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
N
A12 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Job separator sensor: On/Off
A13 ANALOG_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Analog select signal
A14 KSS_EN O DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
A15 KSS_CS O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
A16 KSS_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A17 KSS_SDI I DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A18 KSS_SDO O DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A20 3.3V_TH_CUT I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
B1 DRUM HEAT O DC0V/3.3V Drum heater control signal
B2 DF_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B3 DF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B4 DF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B5 DF_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
B6 DF_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
B7 DF_SYNC O DC0V/ DF synchronizing signal
3.3V(pulse)
B8 DF_DET I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
B9 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (edge)
B10 FSR_TH_CENT I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (cen-
ter)
B11 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (press
roller)
B12 FSR_TH_MID I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (mid-
dle)
B13 FSR_ALARM I DC0V/3.3V Fuser alarm signal
B14 TPC_BK I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage K
B15 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
REM
B16 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
CLK

tor
YC40 B17 DRUM_BK_MOT_ I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal K
RDY
B18 GND - - Ground
B19 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O DC24V DC24V power output
T2
B20 FSR_OFFSET_C O Analog Fuser high voltage control voltage
NT
YC42 1 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor remote signal

OT_REM
2 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) Transfer belt motor clock signal
OT_CLK
3 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor rotation switching sig-
OT_DIR nal
4 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/3.3V Transfer belt motor synchronizing signal
OT_RDY
5 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/5V Transfer belt motor brake signal
OT_BRAKE
6 ANALOG_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Analog select signal
7 UNIT_E2P_SCL O DC0V/3.3V Unit EPROM communication clock
8 UNIT_E2P_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V Unit EPROM communication data signal
9 TPC_M I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage M
10 TPC_C I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage C
11 TPC_Y I DC0V/3.3V T/C sensor detection voltage Y
12 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal COL
REM
13 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal COL
CLK
14 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
DIR COL
15 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal
RDY COL
16 DRUM_COL_MO O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal COL
T_REM
17 DRUM_COL_MO O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal COL
T_CLK
18 DRUM_COL_MO I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal COL
T_RDY

tor
YC43 1 24V2 DC24V DC24V power input
2 GND - - Ground
3 DP_WAKEUP_RE O DC0V/3.3V DP sleep recovery signal
Q
4 HLD_SCN_N(E_ I DC0V/3.3V Scanner stop signal
M)
5 ENG_POWOFF_ I DC0V/3.3V Engine power off signal
N(E_M)
6 E2C_SDIR(E_M) O DC0V/ G6 communication direction signal
3.3V(pulse)

(3) Feed image PWB
1
YC33 1 18
14 YC36
B20 YC22 B1 6
A9 A1
YC19
8 1
A1 A20 YC12
YC17 4
1 B1 A18 YC25
YC24 A1 B20 1
26
1
YC32
YC6
YC28 1
B18 A1
1
2
18
YC23 20
1 A20
YC2 1 1 YC1 B1
7 YC30
1 YC3 4 YC29 YC35
14 1 8 1 10
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6

Destination
YC2: Right cover switch
YC3: Feed Drive PWB
YC6: Engine PWB
YC12: RFID PWB
YC17: Eject reversing motor, Eject full sensor lower/upper, Eject solenoid lower/upper, Eject sensor, Drum-
Developer relay PWB
YC19: Toner motor BK/M/C/Y, Toner level sensor BK/M/C/Y, Toner motor rotation detection sensor BK/M/
C/Y
YC22: Fuser PWB, Thermostat, Thermistor 1/2, Belt rotation sensor R
YC23: Belt release motor, Developer clutch, Belt release sensor
YC24: Developer BK/Belt motor, Drum motor BK
YC25: DF main PWB
YC28: Engine PWB
YC29: Feed Drive PWB, Waste toner sensor, Toner fan
YC30: BR main PWB, DF main PWB
YC32: Transfer connect PWB, Container solenoid BK, JOB separator sensor, Front cover switch, Fuser
high voltage PWB, eject motor
YC33: IH PWB fan motor, Eject/IH fan motor front/middle
YC35: Transfer high voltage PWB, Main high voltage PWB
YC36: Container motor

tor
YC1 1 +24V4 I DC24V DC24V power input
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 +24V3_IL O DC24V DC24V power output


2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground

tor
YC3 4 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O DC24V DC24V power output
T2
YC6 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

A3 KSS_IMAGE_SD I DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
O 3.3V(pulse)
(ENG to IMAGE)
A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI O DC0V/ KSS communication data signal
(IMAGE to ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
A5 KSS_IMAGE_CL O DC0V/ Clock signal
K 3.3V(pulse)
(ENG to IMAGE)
A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN I DC0V/3.3V Enable signal
(ENG to IMAGE)
A8 DRM_EEP_SELO I DC0V/3.3V Interrupt signal
A9 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Job separator sensor: On/Off
A10 FRONT_CO_OPE I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
N
A11 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V BR job separator sensor: On/Off
A12 GND - - Ground
A13 GND - - Ground
A17 GND - - Ground
A18 GND - - Ground
B1 FSR_OFFSET_C I DC0V/3.3V Control signal
NT
T2
B3 GND - - Ground
B4 DRUM_BK_MOT_ I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal K
RDY

tor
YC6 B5 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal
CLK
B6 DRUM_BK_MOT_ O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
REM
B7 TPC_BK I LVDS T/C sensor detection voltage K
B8 FSR_ALARM I DC0V/3.3V Fuser alarm signal
B9 FSR_TH_MID I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (mid-
dle)
B10 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (press
roller)
B11 FSR_TH_CENT I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (cen-
ter)
B12 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection voltage (edge)
B13 DF_DET I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
B14 DF_SYNC O DC0V/ DF synchronizing signal
3.3V(pulse)
B15 DF_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
B16 DF_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
B17 DF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B18 DF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B19 DF_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B20 DRUM HEAT I DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
YC12 1 5V2 O DC5V DC5V power output

2 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
3 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ RFID communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 GND - - Ground
5 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/3.3V RFID communication data signal
6 CONT_RECOG I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
7 GND - - -
8 CONNECT_REC I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
OG
YC17 A1 EXMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal

A2 EXMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal
A3 EXMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal

tor
YC17 A4 EXMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal
A5 +3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
A6 GND - - Ground
A7 EXMAIN_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Eject full sensor lower: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 EXINNER_FULL I DC0V/3.3V Eject full sensor upper: On/Off
A11 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A12 EXSOL1 O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid lower: On/Off (actuate)
A13 EXSOL1_KEEP O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid lower: On/Off (keep)
A15 EXSOL2 O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid upper: On/Off (actuate)
A16 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid upper: On/Off (keep)
A18 GND - - Ground
A19 EX_FEED_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Eject sensor: On/Off
A20 N.C. - - Not used
B1 VIB_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V VIBM remote signal
B2 DLP_FAN_HARF - - Not used
B3 DLP_FAN_REM O DC0V/3.3V Developer fan motor (full speed): On/Off
B4 5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
B5 DRM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
B6 ERASER_COL O DC0V/5V Eraser COL remote signal
B7 ERASER_BK O DC0V/5V Eraser K remote signal
B8 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 TPC_Y I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage Y
3.3V(pulse)
B11 TPC_C I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage C
3.3V(pulse)
B12 TPC_M I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage M
3.3V(pulse)
B13 TPC_BK I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage K
3.3V(pulse)
B14 DLP_TH I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
B15 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/ EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)

tor
YC17 B16 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ EEPROM clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1 O DC0V/3.3V Drum EEPROM select signal
B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0 O DC0V/3.3V Drum EEPROM select signal
B19 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B20 GND - - Ground
YC19 A1 TNMOT_BK_OUT O DC0V/ Toner supply motor control signal K

1 3.3V(pulse)
A2 TNMOT_BK_OUT O DC0V/ Toner supply motor control signal K
2 3.3V(pulse)
A3 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
A4 GND - - Ground
A5 THOP_PLS_BK I DC0V/3.3V Paper remaining quantity sensor K lower:
On/Off
A6 3.3V2 O DC1.2V LED power output
A7 THOP_FULL_BK I Analog Waste toner sensor LED detection signal
K
A8 THOP_LED_BK O DC0V/ Waste toner sensor LED emission signal
3.3V(pulse) K

2 FUSER_SDA I/O DC0V/ Fuser EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 FUSER_SCL O DC0V/ Fuser EEPROM clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 +3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 FSR_TH_PRESS I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (press
roller)
6 FSR_PRESS_SE I DC0V/3.3V Fuser release sensor: On/Off
NS
7 FSR_TH_EDGE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (edge)
8 FSR_JAM_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Fuser sensor: On/Off
9 FSR_ROLL_F_SE I DC0V/3.3V Belt rotation sensor F: On/Off
NS
10 +3.3V2_TH_CUT I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
12 GND - - Ground
13 FSR_TH_MIDDLE I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (middle)

tor
YC22 14 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
15 GND - - Ground
16 FSR_ROLL_R_S I DC0V/3.3V Belt rotation sensor R: On/Off
ENS
17 GND - - Ground
18 FSR_TH_CENTR I Analog Fuser thermistor detection signal (center)
AL
YC23 1 BLT_PRESS_OU O DC0V/ Belt release motor control signal

T1 3.3V(pulse)
2 BLT_PRESS_OU O DC0V/ Belt release motor control signal
T2 3.3V(pulse)
3 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
4 DLP_BK_CLT_RE O DC0V/24V Developer clutch: On/Off
M
5 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
6 GND - - Ground
7 BLT_4RELEASE_ I DC0V/3.3V Belt release sensor: On/Off
SENS
YC24 1 DRM_BK_MOT_D O DC0V/5V Drum motor rotation switching signal K

IR
2 DRM_BK_MOT_L I DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal K
D
3 DRM_BK_MOT_C O DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal K
LK
4 DRM_BK_MOT_R O DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal K
EM
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V2IL2 O DC24V DC24V power output
7 DRM_COL_MOT_ - - Not used
DIR
LD
CLK
REM
11 GND - - Not used
12 +24V2IL2 - - Not used

tor
YC24 13 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor brake signal K
OT_BRK
14 DLP_BK_BLT_M I DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal K
OT_DIR
15 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/5V Developer motor control signal K
OT_FG
16 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
OT_CLK
17 DLP_BK_BLT_M O DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
OT_REM
18 GND - - Ground
19 +24V2IL2 DC24V
20 DLP_COL_MOT_ - - Not used
DIR
LD
CLK
REM
24 GND - - Not used
25 +24V2IL2 - - Not used
26 N.C. - - Not used
YC25 1 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output

2 +24V2_FUSE2 O DC24V DC24V power output
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
YC28 1 DRUM_COL_MO O DC0V/3.3V Drum motor synchronizing signal COL

T_RDY
2 DRUM_COL_MO I DC0V/5V(pulse) Drum motor clock signal COL
T_CLK
3 DRUM_COL_MO I DC0V/5V Drum motor remote signal COL
T_REM
4 DLP_COL_MOT_ O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal
RDY COL
5 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
DIR COL
6 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal COL
CLK

tor
YC28 7 DLP_COL_MOT_ I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal COL
REM
8 TPC_Y O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage Y
9 TPC_C O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage C
10 TPC_M O DC0V/5V(pulse) T/C sensor detection voltage M
11 I2C_SDA I/O DC0V/24V Developer fan motor (half speed): On/Off
12 I2C_SCL I DC0V/24V Developer fan motor (full speed): On/Off
13 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
14 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V Developer motor brake signal K
OT_BRAKE
15 DLP_BK_BELT_M O DC0V/3.3V Developer motor synchronizing signal K
OT_RDY
16 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V Developer motor rotation switching signal
OT_DIR K
17 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V(pulse) Developer motor clock signal K
OT_CLK
18 DLP_BK_BELT_M I DC0V/5V Developer motor remote signal K
OT_REM
2 WTNR_LOCK_SE I DC0V/3.3V Waste toner sensor
NS
4 TBLT_CLMOT_P I DC0V/5V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
WM
5 TBLT_CLMOT_C O DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
HA
7 D_VIB_MOT O DC0V/3.3V Vibration motor: On/Off
8 EXSOL1_REM I DC0V/3.3V Eject solenoid upper: On/Off (actuate)
9 EXSOL1_KEEP I DC0V/3.3V Eject solenoid upper: On/Off (keep)
10 EXSOL2_REM O DC0V/3.3V Eject solenoid lower: On/Off (actuate)
11 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/3.3V Eject solenoid lower: On/Off (keep)
12 TN_FAN_LOCK I DC0V/3.3V Toner suction fan motor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
14 TN_FAN_REM O DC0V/24V Toner suction fan motor: On/Off
YC30 1 DF_RDY(DF to I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
ENG)
2 DF_SEL(ENG to O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
DF)

tor
YC30 3 DF_SDO(ENG to O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
DF) 3.3V(pulse)
4 DF_SDI(DF to I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
5 DF_SYNC(DF to - - Not used
ENG)
6 DF_DET(DF to I DC0V/3.3V Connection detection signal
ENG)
7 DF_CLK(ENG to O DC0V/ Clock signal
DF) 3.3V(pulse)
10 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
12 BRG_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge open detection signal
13 BRG_FEED_SEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge conveying detection signal 2
S2
14 BRG_FEED_SEN I DC0V/3.3V Bridge conveying detection signal 1
S1
15 BRG_SET I DC0V/3.3V Bridge presence detection signal
16 BRG_MOT_CLK O DC0V/ Bridge motor clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
17 BRG_MOT_FAN_ O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor remote signal
REM
18 BRG_MOT_PD O DC0V/3.3V Bridge motor control signal
19 JS_SENS_AK I DC0V/3.3V Paper presence detection signal
YC32 A1 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A2 N.C. - - Not used
A3 TBLT_CLMOT_P O DC0V/ Belt cleaning motor control signal
WM 3.3V(pulse)
A4 +3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A5 TBLT_CLMOT_C I DC3.3V Belt cleaning motor rotation control signal
HA
A6 BELT_TH I Analog Belt thermistor voltage
A7 BLT_SCL O DC0V/ Belt cleaning motor clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 BLT_SDA I/O DC3.3V EEPROM data I/O signal

tor
YC32 A11 +24V2_F1 O DC24V DC24V power output
A12 COTN_SOL_BK O DC0V/24V Container solenoid K: On/Off
A13 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
A14 COTN_SOL_M - - Not used
A16 COTN_SOL_C - - Not used
A18 COTN_SOL_Y - - Not used
B1 GND - - Ground
T1
B3 FSR_OFFSET_C O Analog Offset control signal
NT
B4 PWM - - Not used
B5 CW/CCW - - Not used
B6 3.3V2_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
B7 GND - - Ground
B8 IH_CORE_HP I DC0V/3.3V IH position sensor: On/Off
B9 IHMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B10 IHMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B11 IHMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B12 IHMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) IH core motor control signal
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 JS_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Job separator sensor: On/Off
B16 GND - - Ground
B17 FRONT_CO_OPE I DC0V/3.3V Front cover switch: On/Off
N
B18 N.C. - - Not used
YC33 1 TBELT_FAN - - Not used

2 GND - - Not used
3 TBELT_FAN_LOC - - Not used
K
4 IH_PWB_FAN_R O DC0V/24V IH PWB fan motor: On/Off
EM

tor
YC33 6 IHCOIL_FAN1 O DC24V DC24V power output
7 GND - - Ground
8 IHCOIL_FAN_LO I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
CK_F
9 IHCOIL_FAN1 O DC24V DC24V power output
10 GND - - Ground
11 IHCOIL_FAN_LO I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
CK_C
12 IHCOIL_FAN1 - - Not used
13 GND - - Not used
14 IHCOIL_FAN_LO - - Not used
CK_R
YC35 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O DC24V DC24V power output

T1
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V3_IL_F2_FE O DC24V DC24V power output
T2
T2
T2
YC36 1 CONT_MOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Container motor rotation switching signal
2 CONT_MOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Container motor synchronizing signal
3 CONT_MOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Container motor clock signal
4 CONT_MOT_RE O DC0V/5V Container motor remote signal
M
5 GND - - Ground
6 24V O DC24V DC24V power output

(4) Feed Drive PWB
1 YC10 1
YC9 11
14
A1 4
B17
YC11
1 6 YC1
1
YC6
11
A17
B1 YC2
1
1
YC8 B1 A12
12 YC3
A1 B14
B12 A1
YC7
YC4
A16 A1
1
A14 B1 YC5
B1 B16
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8

Destination
YC1: Feed image PWB
YC2: Feed image PWB
YC3: Engine PWB
YC4: Paper feed clutch 1/2, Vertical conveying clutch
YC5: Paper length sensor 1/2, Paper width sensor 1/2, Paper level sensor 1/2 upper, Paper level sensor 1/
2 lower, Lift motor 1/2, Cassette sensor 1/2
YC6: Registration sensor, Middle clutch, Retard sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor, Lift upper limit sensor 1/2,
Paper sensor 1/2, Container fan motor, Container cooling fan motor
YC7: Fuser edge fan motor, Belt roll-up sensor, Duplex sensor 1/2, Conveying open/close switch, Duplex
clutch 1/2, MP clutch, MP paper width sensor, MP tray sensor, MP paper length sensor
YC8: MP lift motor, MP paper sensor, MP conveying sensor, MP position switch
YC9: ID sensor F/R, Cleaning solenoid, Registration clutch
YC10: Fuser motor, Fuser release motor, Eject fan motor
YC11: Paper feed motor

tor
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 +24V3_IL_F2_FE I DC24V DC24V power input
T2
YC2 1 EXSOL2_KEEP O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid lower: On/Off (keep)

2 EXSOL2_REM O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid lower: On/Off (actuate)
3 EXSOL1_KEEP O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid upper: On/Off (keep)
4 EXSOL1_REM O DC0V/24V Eject solenoid upper: On/Off (actuate)
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
7 TBLT_CLMOT_C I DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
HA
8 TBLT_CLMOT_P O DC0V/3.3V Transfer cleaning motor control signal
WM
9 N.C. - - Not used
YC3 A1 REG_F_LED I Analog IDS1 control signal

A2 ID_SENS_R_P O Analog IDS2 detection signal
A3 ID_SENS_R_S O Analog IDS2 detection signal
A4 REG_R_LED I Analog IDS2 control signal
A5 GND - - Ground

tor
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 GND - - Ground
A9 3.3V2_FUSE I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B1 GND - - Ground
B2 REG_CL_REM I DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
B3 CAS1_2_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open detection sensor: On/Off
B4 MPF_ORG_SENS O DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
B5 ATLAS_SDO(DRI O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
to ENG) 3.3V(pulse)
B6 ATLAS_CS(ENG I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
to DRI)
B7 ATLAS_EN(ENG I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication enable signal
to DRI)
B8 ATLAS_SDI(ENG I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
to DRI) 3.3V(pulse)
B9 ATLAS_CLK(ENG I DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
to DRI) 3.3V(pulse)
B10 REG_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
B11 ID_SENS_F_P O Analog IDS1 detection signal
B12 ID_SENS_F_S O Analog IDS1 detection signal
YC4 1 CAS1_FEEDCL O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 1: On/Off

3 VFEED_CL O DC0V/24V Vertical conveying clutch: On/Off
5 CAS2_FEEDCL O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 2: On/Off
7 2WAY_CL - - Not used
8 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
YC5 A1 CAS1_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 1: On/Off

A2 GND - - Ground
A3 CAS1_LSIZE3 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A4 GND - - Ground

tor
YC5 A5 CAS1_LSIZE2 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A6 CAS1_LSIZE1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 1: On/Off
A7 CAS1_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground
A10 GND - - Ground
A11 CAS1_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 1 upper: On/Off
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 CAS1_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 1 lower: On/Off
A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 1 control signal
B1 LIFTMOT2_OUT1 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 2 control signal
B2 LIFTMOT2_OUT2 O DC0V/24V Lift motor 2 control signal
B3 CAS2_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width sensor 2: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 CAS2_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 2 upper: On/Off
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 CAS2_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 2 lower: On/Off
B11 CAS2_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Cassette sensor 2: On/Off
B12 GND - - Ground
B13 CAS2_LSIZE3 I DC0V/3.3V Paper length sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground

A2 REGIST_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
A4 MIDCL O DC0V/24V Middle clutch: On/Off
A7 TDRS1_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 1: On/Off
A8 GND - - Ground

tor
YC6 A9 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A10 TDRS2_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 2: On/Off
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 3.3V2 - - Not used
A13 NC - - Not used
A14 GND - - Not used
A15 3.3V2 - - Not used
A16 NC - - Not used
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 FEED_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 LIFT1_LIMIT I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 CAS1_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor 1: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 LIFT2_LIMIT I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 2: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 CAS2_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper sensor 2: On/Off
B16 EXFAN O DC0V/24V Container fan motor/ Container cooling
fan motor: On/Off
B17 GND - - Ground
YC7 A1 DU_CL1 O DC0V/24V Duplex clutch 1: On/Off
A3 DUCL2 O DC0V/24V Duplex clutch 2: On/Off
A5 MPFCL_REM O DC0V/24V MP clutch: On/Off
A8 MPF_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V MP paper width sensor: On/Off
A9 GND - - Ground
A10 MPF_TRAY I DC0V/3.3V MP tray sensor: On/Off

tor
A13 GND - - Ground
A14 MPF_LSIZE I DC0V/3.3V MP paper length sensor1: On/Off
B1 EDGE_FAN_LOC I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
K
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 EDGE_FAN O DC0V/24V Fuser edge fan motor: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 TRANSBELT_SE I DC0V/3.3V Belt roll-up sensor: On/Off
NS
B6 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 DU_SENS2 I DC0V/3.3V Duplex sensor 2: On/Off
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 DU_SENS1 I DC0V/3.3V Duplex sensor 1: On/Off
B13 RCOVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Conveying open/close switch: On/Off
B14 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 MPFLIFT_OUT1 O DC0V/24V MP lift motor control signal

2 MPFLIFT_OUT2 O DC0V/24V MP lift motor control signal
3 MPFLIFT_HP I DC3.3V MP home position switch: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 N.C. - - Not used
7 3.3V3_LED O DC1.2V LED power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 MPF_SET I DC0V/3.3V MP paper sensor: On/Off
11 MPF_FEED I DC0V/3.3V MP conveying sensor: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 3.3V2 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 REG_F_LED O Analog IDS1 control signal
3 GND - - Ground

tor
YC9 4 ID_SENS_F_S I Analog IDS1 control signal
5 ID_SENS_F_P I Analog IDS1 control signal
7 REG_R_LED O Analog IDS2 control signal
8 GND - - Ground
9 ID_SENS_R_S I Analog IDS2 control signal
10 ID_SENS_R_P I Analog IDS2 control signal
12 ID_SOL O DC0V/24V Cleaning solenoid: On/Off
13 REG_CL O DC0V/24V Registration clutch: On/Off
YC10 1 FSRMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V Fuser motor rotation switching signal

2 FSRMOT_LD I DC0V/3.3V Fuser motor synchronizing signal
3 FSRMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Fuser motor clock signal
4 FSRMOT_REM O DC0V/5V Fuser fan motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
T2_FUSE
7 FSR_RLSMOT_O O DC0V/24V Fuser release motor control signal
UT2
8 FSR_RLSMOT_O O DC0V/24V Fuser release motor control signal
UT1
9 EXFAN_LOCK I DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
10 GND - - Ground
11 EXFAN O DC24V DC24V power output
YC11 1 CASFEED_DIR O DC0V/5V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal

2 CASFEED_LD I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor synchronizing signal
3 CASFEED_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
4 CASFEED_REM O DC0V/5V Paper feed motor remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
T2

(5) Drum developer relay PWB
1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 7
2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8 2 8
1
YC5 YC13 YC4 YC12 YC3 YC11 YC2 YC10
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
YC1
YC9 YC8 YC7 YC6
20
1
4 YC14
Figure 8-9
(5-2) General view photograph
Figure 8-10

Destination
YC1: Feed image PWB
YC2: Developer PWB BK
YC6: Drum heater
YC10: Drum PWB BK
YC14: Developer fan motor BK

tor
5 +3.3V2_FUSE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
6 DRM_EEP_SEL0 I DC0V/3.3V EEPROM select signal
7 DRM_EEP_SEL1 I DC0V/3.3V EEPROM select signal
8 EEP_SCL I DC0V/ EEPROM clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/ EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 DLP_TH O Analog Developer thermistor voltage
11 TPC_BK O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage K
3.3V(pulse)
12 TPC_M O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage M
3.3V(pulse)
13 TPC_C O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage C
3.3V(pulse)
14 TPC_Y O DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage Y
3.3V(pulse)
15 GND - - Ground
17 ERASER_BK I DC0V/24V Cleaning lamp K remote signal
18 ERASER_COL I DC0V/24V Cleaning lamp COL remote signal
19 DRM_HEAT_REM I DC0V/3.3V Drum heater remote signal
20 5V0_FUSE I DC5V DC5V power input
YC2 1 N.C. - - Not used

2 VIB_MOT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Vibration motor remote signal
3 TPC_BK/M/C/Y I DC0V/ T/C sensor detection voltage K
3.3V(pulse)
4 DLP_TH or N.C. I Analog Developer thermistor voltage
5 3.3V2_DLPBK O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
6 EEP_SDA I/O DC0V/ EEPROM data I/O signal
3.3V(pulse)

tor
YC2 7 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ EEPROM clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 5V0_FUSE O DC5V DC5V power output
2 SCL O DC0V/5V Drum heater: On/Off
YC10 1 ERASER2 O DC0V/24V Cleaning lamp K: On/Off

2 ERASER3 O DC0V/24V Cleaning lamp K: On/Off
3 24V2/5V0 DC24V/DC5V DC24V/DC5V power output
4 ERASER1 O DC0V/24V Cleaning lamp K: On/Off
5 EEP_SCL O DC0V/ Drum heater clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 EEEP_SDA O DC0V/ Drum heater clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
YC14 1 REM O DC0V/3.3V Developer fan motor remote signal K

3 N.C. - - Not used

(6) Main high voltage PWB
YC1
1
YC2
Figure 8-11

Figure 8-12

Destination
YC1: Engine PWB
YC2: Feed image PWB

tor
YC1 1 M_K_I_SENS O Analog Discharge detection voltage K
2 DISCHARGE O Analog Discharge detection voltage
3 M_AC_CLK I DC0V/15V (plus) AC charger clock signal
4 B_SLV_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V (plus) Sleeve AC clock signal K
5 M_K_AC_CNT I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC charger control voltage K
6 B_MAG_AC_CLK I DC0V/16V (plus) Magnet roller AC clock signal K
7 M_K_DC_CNT I DC0V/13V (plus) DC charger control voltage K
8 B_K_SLV_DC_CN I DC0V/13V (plus) DC sleeve bias control voltage K
T
9 B_K_SLV_AC_CN I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC sleeve bias control voltage K
T
10 B_K_MAG_DC_C I DC0V/13V (plus) DC magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
11 B_K_MAG_AC_C I DC0V/10V(pulse) AC Magnet roller bias control voltage K
NT
12 HV_REM O DC0V/3.3V Remote signal
13 SGND - - Ground
YC3 1 PGND - - Ground

2 PGND - - Ground
3 +24V2IL I DC24V DC24V power input
4 +24V2IL I DC24V DC24V power input

(7) Transfer high voltage PWB
1 13
YC1
Figure 8-13
Figure 8-14

Destination
YC1: Engine PWB, Feed image PWB

tor
YC1 1 SGND - - Ground
2 T_REM I DC0V/14V Transfer remote signal
3 T2_CNT I Analog Secondary transfer control voltage
4 SP_CNT I Analog Separation control voltage
5 T1_K_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage K
6 T2_OFF_REM O Analog Charger current detection
7 T1_I_SENS O Analog Primary transfer current detection
8 T1_M_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage M
9 T1_C_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage C
10 T1_Y_CNT I Analog Primary transfer control voltage Y
11 CL_CNT I Analog Cleaning control voltage
12 +24V2IL O DC24V DC24V power output
13 PGND - - Ground

(8) Power supply PWB (PSPWB)
8
YC2 12
3 1 1 1 2
1 2
YC9 YC6
YC8 YC7 1
YC5
YC3
1 3
YC1
1 4
TB1 TB2
TB3
1 6
YC4
Figure 8-15

(220-240V)
Figure 8-16

Destination
TB1: Inlet
TB2: Inlet
TB3: Inlet
YC1: Power switch
YC2: IH PWB
YC4: Cassette heater
YC5: PF main PWB
YC6: Feed image PWB
YC7: Engine PWB
YC8: Main PWB
YC9: Engine PWB

tor
TB1 1 LIVE I 220-240V AC AC power input
TB2 1 NEUTRAL I 220-240V AC AC power input
TB3 1 DH_LIVE I 220-240V AC AC power input
YC1 1 LIVE_IN I 220-240V AC AC power input
2 LIVE_OUT O 220-240V AC AC power output
3 NEUTRAL_IN I 220-240V AC AC power input
4 NEUTRAL_OUT 0 220-240V AC AC power output
YC2 1 LIVE O 220-240V AC AC power output
2 NEUTRAL O 220-240V AC AC power output

tor
YC4 1 CH_LIVE O 220-240V AC AC power output
2 CH_LIVE O 220-240V AC AC power output
3 NC - - Not used
4 NC - - Not used
5 CH_NEUTRAL O 220-240V AC AC power output
6 CH_NEUTRAL O 220-240V AC AC power output

2 GND - - Ground

5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground

3 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground

tor
7 GND - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
11 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 SLEEP I DC0V/3.3V Sleep signal

2 DRM_HEAT_REM O DC0V/3.3V Drum heater: On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 AC DETECTOR - - Not used

(9) Operation panel main PWB
YC9
50 1
YC11
1 5
2
7 1 YC6
1
YC8
4
2 B1 A15 YC7
1
YC4
1
1
YC5 5 1
YC2
5 1
YC1
10 B15 A1
YC10
20
1
YC3
Figure 8-18
(9-2) General view photograph
Figure 8-19

Destination
YC3: Operation panel sub PWB
YC4: Speaker
YC5: Main PWB
YC6: LCD (backlight)
YC7: Touch panel
YC8: Main PWB
YC9: LCD
YC10: Numeric key (option)
YC11: NFC PWB

tor
2 LED0 O DCOV/5V LED control signal 0
3 NC - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 ATTENTION O DC0V/3.3V Attention LED control signal
6 MEMORY O DC0V/3.3V Memory LED control signal
7 PROCESSING O DC0V/3.3V Processing LED control signal
8 ENER- O DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver LED control signal
GYSAVERLED
9 INT_ENERGYSA I DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VERKEY_N
10 KEY0 I DC0V/ Operation panel key scan return signal 0
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
14 SCAN0 O DC0V/ Scan signal 0
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
18 JOB_LED I DC0V/3.3V Job separator LED control signal
19 NC - - Not used
20 LED2 O DC0V/5V LED control signal 2

tor
YC4 1 SPEAKER_P O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
2 SPEAKER_N O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
YC5 A1 +5.0V6 I DC5V DC5V power output

A2 +5.0V6 I DC5V DC5V power output
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 INT_ANYKEY O DC0V/3.3V Main recovery signal
A7 DISPLAY_POWE I DC0V/3.3V LCD backlight lighting-off signal
RON
A8 C2P_SCK I DC0V/ Panel clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
A9 P2C_SBSY I DC0V/3.3V Panel busy signal
A10 P2C_SDIR I DC0V/3.3V Panel communication direction signal
A11 C2P_SDAT O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A12 P2C_SDAT I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
A13 FPRST I DC0V/3.3V Operation panel reset signal
A14 VDDDX I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A15 I2C_SCL_NFC I DC0V/ I2C clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
B1 I2C_SDA_NFC I/O DC0V/ 12C data signal
3.3V(pulse)
B2 NIRQ I DC0V/3.3V NFC interrupt signal
B3 INT_ENERGYSA O DC0V/3.3V Energy Saver key interrupt signal
VEKEY
B4 PNL_WKUP_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Panel recovery signal
B5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
B6 LED_PROCESSI I DC0V/3.3V Processing LED control signal
NG
B7 LED_ATTENTION I DC0V/3.3V Attention LED control signal
B8 LED_MEMORY I DC0V/3.3V Memory LED control signal
B9 BEEP_POWERO I DC0V/3.3V Alert sound recovery signal
N
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 GND - - Ground

tor
YC5 B13 JOB_LED I DC0V/3.3V JOB separator LED control signal
B14 GND - - Not used
B15 NC - - Not used
YC6 1 LED_A O DC0V/5V LED control signal

2 LED_C I DC0V/5V LED control signal
YC7 1 YN_Bottom I Analog Touch panel YN position signal

2 XN_Left I Analog Touch panel XN position signal
3 YP_Top I Analog Touch panel YP position signal
4 XP_Right I Analog Touch panel XP position signal

2 LCD_OFF O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
3 LOCKN O DC0V/3.3V Lock signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 TX0N O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 TX0P O DC0V/ Transmission data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 VGH O DC19.83V LCD High power output

2 VDD O DC3.3V LCD Driver power output
3 VGL O DC-9.1V LCD Low power output
4 VCOM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
5 VCOM O DC3.67V LCD Common power output
6 AGND - - Ground
7 AVDD O DC10.34V LCD Analog power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 V1 O DC9.55V LCD V1 power output

tor
YC9 16 V7 O LCD V7 power output
17 HSD O DC0V/3.3V Control bit select signal
18 GND_LVDS - - Ground
19 RxIN3+ O LVDS Display data signal
20 RxIN3- O LVDS Display data signal
21 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
30 GND - - Ground
31 RxINCK+ O LVDS Display data signal
32 RxINCK- O LVDS Display data signal
33 GND - - Ground
34 VDD_LVDS O DC3.3V LVDS power output
35 V8 O LCD V8 power output
42 AGND - - Ground
43 AVDD O LCD Analog power output
44 VDD O DC3.3V LCD Driver power output
45 MODE O DC0V/3.3V Mode select signal
46 GBR O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
47 SHLR O DC0V/3.3V Left/Right writing start point setting signal
48 UPDN O DC0V/3.3V Upper/Lower writing start point setting
signal
49 COM O LCD Common power output
50 COM O LCD Common power output

tor
YC10 1 KEY0 I DC0V/ Operation panel key scan return signal 0
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
9 10key_detect O
10 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 VDDDX I DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 CLK O DC0V/ 12C clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 DATA I/O DC0V/ 12C data signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 NIRQ O DC0V/1.8V Interrupt signal

(10)IH PWB (High-end model)
3
YC5
1 YC3
YC2
1 2
7
YC5 YC6
1
Figure 8-20

(220-240V)
Figure 8-21

Destination
YC2: IH unit
YC3: IH unit
YC4: Engine PWB
YC5: Engine PWB
Connec- Pin Signal I/O Voltage Function

tor
YC1 1 LIVE I 220-240V AC AC power input
2 NEUTRAL I 220-240V AC AC power input
YC2 1 VS O AC65V to 160V Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC3 1 COIL_COM O AC65V to 160V Resonant circuit output to the IH coil
YC4 1 IH_RXD O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal

3.3V(pulse)
2 IH_TXD I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 IH_ERROR O DC0V/3.3V IH error signal
4 IH_IGBT_CLK_L I DC0V/ IH Clock signal (LOW)
OW 3.3V(pulse)
5 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI I DC0V/ IH Clock signal (High)
GH 3.3V(pulse)
6 3.3V2_FUSE I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
7 GND - - Ground

2 IH_RELAY I DC0V/3.3V IH relay signal
3 GND - - Ground

8-2 Description for PWB (OPTION)
(1) PF main PWB (PF-7100)
1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
17 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-22
Figure 8-23

Destination
YC3: Paper detection sensor 1, Paper level sensor 1 upper/lower, Paper length switch 1, Cassette inser-
tion switch 1
YC4: Lift upper limit sensor 1/2, Conveying sensor 1/2, Right cover switch, Paper width switch 1/2
YC5: Paper detection sensor 2, Paper level sensor 2 upper/lower, Paper length switch 2, Cassette inser-
tion switch 2
YC6: Lift motor 1/2
YC9: Conveying clutch 1/2, Paper feed clutch 1/2
YC10: PF main PWB
YC11: Engine PWB
YC12: Engine PWB
YC13: PF main PWB
YC14: Retard sensor 1/2

tor
YC3 1 3.3V4_LED O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 CAS1_EMPTY I DC0V/3.3V Paper detection sensor 1: On/Off
4 3.3V4_LED O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 CAS1_QUANT1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 1 upper: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 CAS1_QUANT2 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 1 lower: On/Off
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_SE I DC0V/3.3V Paper length switch 1: On/Off
NS
12 GND - - Not used
NS
14 GND - - Ground
NS
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS1_SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Cassette insertion switch 1: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 ULIM_SW_1 I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground

tor
YC4 6 VER_SENS_1 I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor 1: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 VER_SENS_2 I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor 2: On/Off
16 CAS1_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width switch 1: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
19 CAS2_WSIZE I DC0V/3.3V Paper width switch 2: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
NS
12 GND - - Not used
NS
14 GND - - Ground
NS
16 GND - - Ground
17 CAS2_SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Cassette insertion switch 2: On/Off
18 NC - - Not used

tor
YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 1 control signal
2 L_MOT1_DR O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 1 control signal
3 L_MOT2_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 2 control signal
YC8 1 +24V O DC24V DC24V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
5 LD I DC0V/24V Paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O DC0V/24V Conveying clutch 1: On/Off

3 FEED_CL1 O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 1: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O DC0V/24V Conveying clutch 2: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 2: On/Off
9 HDR_CL2 - - Not used
10 24V1 - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off

2 3.3V3 I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
3 GND - - Ground
4 PF_CAS1_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Cassette 1 select signal
6 EN_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)

tor
YC12 7 EN_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 EN_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 EN_PAU I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_CAS_OP I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal

EN
2 AN_PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 AN_PF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 AN_PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off

2 RETARD_SENS_ I DC0V/3.3V Retard sensor 1: On/Off
1
3 GND - - Ground
2
6 GND - - Ground

1 2 1 3
YC11 YC10
1
1
YC9
YC4
1
1
12 YC2 5 YC1 1
4
20
YC6
4 1
1
YC12
YC14
6 11
1
1
YC8 YC13
6
10
1
15 1
YC3 YC5
16
Figure 8-24
Figure 8-25

Destination
YC3: Paper detection sensor 1, Paper level sensor 1 lower/2 upper, Cassette switch 1
YC4: Lift upper limit sensor 1/2, Paper feed sensor, Right cover switch, Horizontal conveying sensor
YC5: Paper detection sensor 2, Paper level sensor 1 lower/2 upper, Cassette switch 3
YC6: Lift motor 1/2
YC9: Vertical conveying clutch, Paper feed clutch 1 right/2 left, Horizontal conveying clutch 1/2
YC10: PF main PWB
YC11: Engine PWB
YC12: Engine PWB
YC13: PF main PWB
YC14: Retard sensor 1/2

tor
2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
11 CAS1_SIZE1_SE I DC0V/3.3V Cassette switch 1: On/Off
NS
12 GND - - Not used
13 CAS1_SIZE2_SE - - Not used
NS
14 GND - - Not used
NS

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 VER_SENS_1 I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
7 COVER_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Right cover switch: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground

tor
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 VER_SENS_2 I DC0V/3.3V Horizontal conveying sensor 1: On/Off
15 3.3V4 - - Not used
16 P0R_SW - - Not used
17 GND - - Not used
18 3.3V5 - - Not used
19 P0L_SW - - Not used
20 GND - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Not used
NS
12 GND - - Ground
13 CAS2_SIZE2_SE I DC0V/3.3V Cassette switch 2: On/Off
NS
14 GND - - Not used
NS
16 GND - - Not used
YC6 1 L_MOT1_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 1 control signal

3 L_MOT2_RET O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor 2 control signal

tor
2 GND - - Ground
3 START/STOP O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor remote signal
4 CLOCK O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor clock signal
5 LD I DC0V/24V Paper feed motor ready signal
6 CW/CCW O DC0V/24V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
YC9 1 VER_CL1 O DC0V/24V Vertical conveying clutch: On/Off

3 FEED_CL1 O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 1 right: On/Off
5 VER_CL2 O DC0V/24V Horizontal conveying clutch 1: On/Off
7 FEED_CL2 O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch 2 left: On/Off
9 HDR_CL2 O DC0V/24V Horizontal conveying clutch 2: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 VER_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Vertical conveying sensor: On/Off

2 3.3V3 I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
3 GND - - Ground
6 EN_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 EN_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
8 EN_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 EN_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)

tor
YC12 10 EN_PAU I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
11 PF_CAS_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal
YC13 1 AN_PF_CAS_OP I DC0V/3.3V Cassette open/close signal

EN
2 AN_PF_PAUSE O DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
3 AN_PF_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 AN_PF_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 AN_PF_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 AN_PF_CLK O DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 PF_CAS2_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Cassette 2 select signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 AN_VER_SENS I DC0V/3.3V Vertical conveying sensor: On/Off

1
3 GND - - Ground
2
6 GND - - Ground

1 YC12 3 1 YC11 4
1 1
YC14
2
1
YC17
4
YC5
1
1
YC15 YC2 19
4
8 1
1
YC8 YC4
2
1
YC10 12
2
1 1
YC7
YC13
4
12
1 1
YC16 YC1
6 5
8 1 13 1
YC18 YC3 YC6

1 12
Figure 8-26
Figure 8-27

Destination
YC5: Set switch, Paper feed solenoid, Paper detection sensor, Lift upper limit sensor, Zero sensor
YC6: Paper level sensor 1 upper/2 lower, Lift lower limit sensor, Deck sensor
YC8: Lift motor
YC11: PF main PWB
YC13: PF main PWB
YC15: PF paper feed clutch
YC18: PF conveying motor

tor
2 CVROP_SW I DC0V/3.3V Set switch: On/Off
3 VER_CL - - Not used
4 +24V2_F1 - - Not used
5 VCVSW_3.3V1 - - Not used
6 GND - - Not used
7 VCVSW - - Not used
9 FDR_SOLA O DC0V/24V Paper feed solenoid (actuate): On/Off
10 FDR_SOLK O DC0V/24V Paper feed solenoid (keep): On/Off
11 EPRSW_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
12 GND - - Ground
13 EPRSW I DC0V/3.3V Paper detection sensor: On/Off
14 RULMSW_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
15 3.3V4 - - Ground
16 RULMSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
18 P0RSW I DC0V/3.3V Zero sensor: On/Off
19 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 LDPSW1_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 LDPSW1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 1 upper: On/Off
4 LDPSW2_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 LDPSW2 I DC0V/3.3V Paper level sensor 2 lower: On/Off
7 SZSW2_3.3V1 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 SZSW2 I DC0V/3.3V Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off

tor
YC6 10 DEK_OPN1_3.3V - - Not used
2
11 GND - - Ground
12 DEK_OPN1 I DC0V/3.3V Paper Feeder sensor: On/Off
13 NC - - Not used
YC8 1 OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal

2 OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal

2 GND - - Ground
3 24V2 I DC24V DC24V power input
YC13 1 SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal

3.3V(pulse)
2 SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PAUSE I DC0V/3.3V Pause signal
7 DEK_OPN1 O DC0V/3.3V Deck open/close signal output
8 DEK_OPN2 - - Not used
9 +3.3V4 O DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
10 GND - - Ground
11 SD_FINAL_SENS
12 PF_FINAL_SENS - - Not used
YC15 1 FDR_CL O DC0V/24V Paper feed clutch: On/Off

YC18 1 FMOT_CH_A I DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal

2 FMOT_CH_B I DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
3 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
4 FMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal

tor
YC18 5 FMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Paper feed motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 FMOT_BRAKE O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor stop signal
5 GND - - Ground

(4) DP main PWB (DP-7100)
4
1 YC5 3
1 YC10
5 1
16 YC2 5 YC11
YC1
1 12
YC3
4
1 YC12
4
1
YC4 YS1
1
YC17
6 1 16
3 YC8 1 YC7 1 YC6 8 YC16 1 3 1 YC9
12
Figure 8-28
Figure 8-29

Destination
YC3: Engine PWB
YC4: Paper feed sensor
YC5: Top cover switch
YC6: Original length sensor, Original width sensor
YC7: Registration sensor, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor, Lift lower limit sensor
YC8: Original detection sensor
YC9: Paper feed motor,Conveying motor
YC10: Feedshift motor
YC11: Lift motor, Switchback motor
YC16: LED PWB, Feedshift sensor, Lift upper limit sensor
YC17: Eject sensor

tor
YC3 1 ENG_TMG O DC0V/3.3V Timing signal
2 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
3 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
4 ENG_CLK I DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG_SI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 ENG_SO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 DP_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
8 EN_FD_SW O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
9 EN_SET_SW O DC0V/3.3V Original detection sensor: On/Off
10 +3.3V3 I DC0V/3.3V DC3.3V power input
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I DC24V DC24V power input

2 FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
4 NC - - -
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I DC0V/24V Interlock rear 24V

tor
YC6 1 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 LNG_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original length sensor: On/Off
5 HSIZE I Analog Original width sensor
6 GND - - Ground

2 GND - - Ground
3 RGST_SW I DC0V/3.3V Registration sensor: On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
5 CCD_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
6 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
7 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
8 GND - - Ground
9 DP_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V DP open/close sensor: On/Off
10 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output to sensor
11 GND - - Ground
12 LF_DNSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off

2 SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original detection sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 FMOT_CH_A I DC0V/ Paper feed motor control signal

3.3V(pulse)
2 FMOT_CH_B I DC0V/ Paper feed motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 FMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor rotation switching signal
5 FMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Paper feed motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 FMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed motor stop signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output
9 CMOT_CH_A I DC0V/ Conveying motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)

tor
YC9 10 CMOT_CH_B I DC0V/ Conveying motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
12 CMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor rotation switching signal
13 CMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Conveying motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
14 CMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Conveying motor stop signal
15 GND - - Ground
YC10 1 SFT_A1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal

2 SFT_B1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
3 SFT_A3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
4 SFT_B3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Feedshift motor control signal
YC11 1 LIFT_A1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal

2 LIFT _B1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
3 LIFT _A3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
4 LIFT _B3 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
5 RMOT_CH_A I DC0V/ Switchback motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 RMOT_CH_B I DC0V/ Switchback motor control signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 RMOT_DIR O DC0V/3.3V Switchback motor rotation switching sig-
nal
9 RMOT_PWM O DC0V/ Switchback motor drive signal
3.3V(pulse)
10 RMOT_BREAK O DC0V/3.3V Switchback motor stop signal
11 GND - - Ground
YC16 1 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LED remote signal

4 GND - - Ground
5 SFT_HP_SW I DC0V/3.3V Feedshift sensor: On/Off

tor
8 LF_UPSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 EXIT_SW I DC0V/3.3V Eject sensor: On/Off

(5) DP main PWB (DP-7110)
1 YC6 3
YC5
12
16
YS1 8
YC1 YC14
1
1
14 1 2 1 2
A1
8 A13 YC2 YC3 YC7
YC10
1
YC11 YC4 1
14 B1 1
1
B13
3
YC8
Figure 8-30
Figure 8-31

Destination
YC1: Engine PWB
YC2: Original length sensor, Original detection sensor, Lift lower limit sensor, Original width sensor
YC4: Lift upper limit sensor, Paper feed sensor, Eject sensor, LED PWB, CCD sensor, Open/close sensor
YC5: Paper feed motor, Registration motor, Lift motor
YC6: Top cover switch
YC7: Drive fan motor
YC8: CIS fan motor
YC10: SHD PWB
YC14: Conveying motor

tor
YC1 1 ENG_TMG O DC0V/3.3V Timing signal
2 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication ready signal
3 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
4 ENG_CLK I DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG_SI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
6 ENG_SO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
7 DP_OPEN O DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
8 EN_FD_SW O DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
9 EN_SET_SW O DC0V/3.3V Original detection sensor: On/Off
10 +3.3V3 I DC0V/3.3V DC3.3V power input
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 +24V I DC24V DC24V power output
YC2 1 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 LNG_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original length sensor: On/Off
4 LNG_CLK O DC0V/ Sensor LED clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
5 GND - - Ground
6 SET_SW I DC0V/3.3V Original detection sensor: On/Off
9 GND - - Ground

tor
YC2 10 LF_DNSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift lower limit sensor: On/Off
11 WIDE3 I DC0V/3.3V Original width sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground
YC4 A01 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A02 GND - - Ground
A03 LF_UPSW I DC0V/3.3V Lift upper limit sensor: On/Off
A04 GND - - Ground
A05 FD_SW I DC0V/3.3V Paper feed sensor: On/Off
A06 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A08 RGST_SW(V) - - Not used
A09 +3.3V - - Not used
A10 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 EXIT_SW(M) I DC0V/3.3V Eject sensor: On/Off
A13 NC - - Not used
B01 NC - - Not used
B02 +24V O DC24V DC24V power output
B03 LED_REM I DC0V/3.3V LED remote signal
B05 GND - - Ground
B06 CCD_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CCD sensor: On/Off
B07 +3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B08 ANODE O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
B09 GND - - Ground
B10 DP_OPEN I DC0V/3.3V Open/close sensor: On/Off
B11 ANODE - - Not used
B13 SKEW_SW - - Not used
YC5 1 FEED_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal

2 FEED_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
3 FEED_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
4 FEED_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper feed motor control signal
5 RGST_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal

tor
YC5 6 RGST_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
7 RGST_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
8 RGST_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Registration motor control signal
9 LIFT_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
10 LIFT_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
11 LIFT_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
12 LIFT_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Lift motor control signal
2 GND - - Ground
3 +R24V I DC0V/24V DC24V power input
YC7 1 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output

2 FAN_REM1 I DC0/DC24V Drive fan motor remote signal
YC8 1 R24V O DC24V DC24V power output

2 FAN_REM2 I DC0/DC24V CIS fan motor remote signal
YC10 1 CIS_TMG_SW I DC0V/3.3V CIS sensor: On/Off

2 SHD_CLK O DC0V/ Serial communication clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
3 SHD_SO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 SHD_SEL O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication select signal
5 SHD_PAGEST O DC0V/3.3V Sub-scanning valid range timing input
(VSYNC)
6 RESETN O DC0V/3.3V Reset signal
7 SHD_OVMON I DC0V/3.3V Monitoring signal for the sub-scanning
valid range signal
8 SHD_SI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal
3.3V(pulse)
9 SHD_RDY I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication synchronizing sig-
nal
10 NC - - -
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground

tor
YC14 1 CNVY4_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
2 CNVY3_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
3 CNVY2_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
4 CNVY1_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Conveying motor control signal
5 REVE4_OUT1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal
6 REVE2_OUT1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal
7 REVE1_OUT2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal
8 REVE3_OUT2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal

(6) DP Interface PWB (for DP-7110)
7
YC2
1
YC1
1 40
Figure 8-32
Figure 8-33

Destination
YC1: Main PWB
YC2: SHD PWB

tor
5 5.0V3 I DC5V DC5V power input
6 PCIEN_DP2M O DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
8 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
12 PCIEP_M2DP I DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
14 PCIEN_M2DP I DC-0.4V/0.4V PCIex communication data signal
16 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
20 PCIEP_REFCLK_ O DC0V/0.7V PCIex reference clock
DP2M
21 GND - - Ground
22 PCIEN_REFCLK_ O DC0V/0.7V PCIex reference clock
DP2M
23 GND - - Ground
24 GND - - Ground
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 PCIERC_SWRST I DC0V/3.3V PCIex reset input
_N_M2DP
29 GND - - Ground
30 DP_RST_N I DC0V/3.3V System reset input
31 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
33 GND - - Ground
34 GND - - Ground

tor
36 GND - - Ground
37 GND - - Ground
38 GND - - Ground
39 GND - - Ground
40 GND - - Ground

2 NC - - Not connected
3 LOCKN O DC0V/3.3V Control signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 RX0N I DC1.0V/1.5V Image data
6 RX0P I DC1.0V/1.5V Image data
7 GND - - Ground
Figure 8-34

(7) DF main PWB (DF-7100)
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 12 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
6
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1
YC15 YC10
9
1 YC6
YC14 12 1 5
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 4 1
Figure 8-35
Figure 8-36

Destination
YC3: Feed image PWB
YC4: Front cover switch
YC5: Feed image PWB
YC6: PH main PWB
YC7: PH main PWB
YC8: Eject motor, Slide motor, Eject release motor, Middle motor, Paper entry motor
YC9: Paddle motor, Side registration motor 1/2
YC10: Stapler
YC11: Tray motor
YC13: Paper pressing solenoid
YC14: Paper LED
YC16: Eject paper sensor
YC17: Paddle sensor, Paper entry sensor
YC19: Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 1, Bundle eject sensor, Paper pressing sensor 1/2, Adjust-
ment sensor, Slide sensor
YC20: Device sensor

tor
2 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Front cover switch: On/Off
3 TOP COV - - Not used
SOURCE
4 TOP COVSIG - - Not used
YC5 1 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal

2 ENG SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
3 ENG DI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
4 ENG DO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
7 ENG CLK I DC0V/ Serial clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground

tor
YC6 1 5V - - Not used
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM - - Not used
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V Punch motor remote signal
8 PU RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
9 PU SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
10 PU CLK O DC0V/ Serial clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
11 PU DI O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
12 PU DO I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)

YC8 1 EJECT MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal

2 EJECT MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal
3 EJECT MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal
5 STP MOV MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
9 EJE RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject release motor control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
13 MIDDLE MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal

tor
YC8 14 MIDDLE MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
15 MIDDLE MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal
17 ENTRY MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
19 ENTRY MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
YC9 1 PADDLE MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal

2 PADDLE MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal
3 PADDLE MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paddle motor control signal
5 SIDE REG R MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
9 SIDE REG F MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
YC10 1 STP MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler motor control signal

2 STP MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler motor control signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 LS I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit LS signal

tor
YC10 11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
13 HP I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit HP signal
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal

2 TRY MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal

2 PAP PRE SOL O DC0V/24V DFPPSOL: On/Off (actuate)
ACT
3 PAP PRE SOL O DC0V/24V DFPPSOL: On/Off (keep)
KEEP
YC14 1 5V O DC5V DC5V power output

2 LED O DC0V/5V Paper LED: On/Off
YC16 1 N.C. - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
3 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Eject paper sensor: On/Off
YC17 1 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
2 GND - - Ground
3 PADDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
4 GND - - Ground
5 ENTRY SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
A sensor 2
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS2: On/Off
SIG
A4 SID REG F SENS O DC5V DC5V power output to Side registration
A sensor 1
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS I DC0V/3.3V DFSRS1: On/Off
SIG

tor
A8 PH ENTRY SENS I DC0V/3.3V PH paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
A9 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A10 MTRY FULL O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
A11 GND - - Ground
A12 MTRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor: On/Off
SENS SIG
A13 PADDLE SENS A - - Not used
A15 PADDLE SENS - - Not used
SIG
B1 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B2 GND - Ground
B3 BUNDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle eject sensor: On/Off
SIG
B4 PAP PRE UP O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 PAP PRE UP I DC0V/3.3V Paper pressing sensor 1: On/Off
SENS SIG
B7 PAP PRE LOW O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 PAP PRE LOW I DC0V/3.3V Paper pressing sensor 2: On/Off
SENS SIG
B10 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 ADJUST SENS I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
B13 STP MOV SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC20 1 SET SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 SET SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Device sensor: On/Off

(8) PH main PWB (PH-7100/7110/7120)
6 1 11 3 1 1 4
1
YC6 YC8 YC7 YC9
13
1 4
3 YC4
YC1
YC5
1 5
1
YC3 1 1
YC2
3
Figure 8-37

Destination
YC1: DF main PWB
YC2: DF main PWB
YC5: Motor
YC6: Punch-hole switching solenoid, Tank solenoid
YC7: Paper entry sensor
YC8: Tank full sensor, Tank set switch, Pulse sensor, Home position sensor
YC9: Tank full sensor

tor
YC1 1 PH_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
2 PH_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)
3 PH_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 PH_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 PH_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Motor: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
9 3.3V I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input
12 PH_EN_SENS O DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
13 GND - - Ground

YC5 1 CCW O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal (clockwise)

2 NC - - Not used
3 CW O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal (counterclockwise)
YC6 1* 24V2 O DC24V DC24V power output

2* PHSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Punch-hole switching solenoid (actuate)
3* PHSOL_RET O DC0V/24V Punch-hole switching solenoid (return)
5 TNKSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Tank solenoid (actuate)
6 TNKSOL_HLD O DC0V/24V Tank solenoid (keep)

tor
2 PH EN SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor On/Off

2 TNK FULL PLS O DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo transmitter): On/
Off
3 SENS 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
4 GND - - Ground
5 PHTNK_SET I DC0V/3.3V Tank set switch: On/Off
7 GND - - Ground
8 PHMOT PLS I DC0V/3.3V Pulse sensor: On/Off
10 GND - - Ground
11 PHMOT HP I DC0V/3.3V Home position sensor: On/Off

2 TNK FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
3 GND - - Ground
4 TNK FULL PLS I DC0V/3.3V Tank full sensor (photo receptor): On/Off
*Not applied to 100V model

(9) DF main PWB (DF-7110)
1 6 14 1 12 1
30
YC19 YC14 YC15 16
YC22
15
1
YC13
4 1
11 1
18
1
YC6
YC16
6
YC23
1
1
YC17
13
YC18
13
1
5
YC1
1
8
YC12
YC2
1
6 1 10 1
20
YC20 YC4
4
12 1
YC3 YC7 5 1
7 1
YC9
1
19 1
YC11 8 1
YC21 4 YC5 1 2 YC8 1 YC10
Figure 8-38
Figure 8-39

Destination
YC3: Eject cover switch, Front cover switch
YC4: Feed image PWB
YC5: Feed image PWB
YC6: MT main PWB
YC7: PH main PWB
YC8: PH main PWB
YC9: BF main PWB
YC10: BF main PWB
YC12: Slide motor, Eject motor, Middle motor, Paper entry motor, Eject release motor
YC13: Tray paper full sensor 2
YC14: Shift release motor, Shift motor 1/2, Eject clutch
YC16: Eject fan
YC17: Stapler
YC18: Relief drum motor, Feedshift solenoid 1/2/3
YC19: Tray motor
YC20: Drum sensor, Middle sensor
YC21: Sub eject sensor, Sub tray full sensor, Paper entry sensor, DF operation PWB, Tray paper full sen-
sor 1
YC22: Slide sensor, Side registration sensor 1/2, Eject paper sensor, Bundle eject switch, Tray sensor 1/2,
Paddle sensor, Adjustment sensor, Shift sensor
YC23: Shift sensor 1/2, Tray sensor 3/4/5, Shift release sensor

tor
2 EJECT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Eject cover switch: On/Off
3 FRONT COV O DC24V DC24V power output
SOURCE
4 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Front cover switch On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)

2 GND - - Ground

tor

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
7 MT DO O DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial communication data signal output
8 MT DIN I DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial communication data signal input
9 MT CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Serial clock signal
10 MT SEL O DC0V/5V Select signal
11 MT RDY I DC0V/5V Ready signal

4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM I DC0V/3.3V PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
10 PU CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
11 PU DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output

YC9 1 BF DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input

2 BF DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output
3 BF CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
4 BF SEL O DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 BF RDY I DC0V/3.3V Ready signal

tor
2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 ST MOV MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal

2 ST MOV MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
3 ST MOV MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
4 ST MOV MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
2B
1B
2A
1A
YC13 1 MTRY U SENS K I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1_LED: On/Off
2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
SIG

tor
YC14 1 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
2B
2 SFT RELS MOT O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift release motor control signal
1B
2A
1A
5 SFT R MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
6 SFT R MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
7 SFT R MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
8 SFT R MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 2 control signal
9 SFT F MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
10 SFT F MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
11 SFT F MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
12 SFT F MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Shift motor 1 control signal
13 EJECT CL O DC0V/24V Eject clutch: On/Off

2B
1B
2A
1A
2B
1B
2A
1A

tor
YC16 1 EJECT FAN O DC0V/24V Eject fan 1: On/Off
MOT_SIDE
3 EJECT FAN O DC0V/24V Eject fan 2: On/Off
MOT_SIDE
5 EJECT FAN O DC0V/24V Eject fan 3: On/Off
MOT_CENT
YC17 1 STP_MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal

2 STP_MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
9 GND - - Ground
11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal
YC18 1 DRM MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal

2 DRM MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
3 DRM MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
4 DRM MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Relief drum motor control signal
6 MID_DRM SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 (actuate): On/Off
ACT
7 MID_DRM SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 1 (keep): On/Off
KEEP
9 DRM_BF SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 (actuate): On/Off
ACT
10 DRM_BF SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 2 (keep): On/Off
KEEP

tor
YC18 12 SUB_MID SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 (actuate): On/Off
ACT
13 SUB_MID SOL O DC0V/24V Feedshift solenoid 3 (keep): On/Off
KEEP
YC19 1 BRAKE O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal

2 DIR O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal
3 CLK O DC0V/5V Clock signal
4 ENABLE O DC0V/5V Tray motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC20 1 DRM SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 DRM SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Drum sensor: On/Off
4 MID EJE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 MID EJE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Middle sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC21 1 STRY EJE SENS O DC5V DC5V power output

A
2 GND - - Ground
3 STRY EJE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Sub eject sensor: On/Off
SIG
5 GND - - Ground
6 STRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V Sub tray paper full sensor: On/Off
SENS SIG
7 STRY FULL O DC0V/ Pulse signal
SENS PLS 3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground
9 ENTRY SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor On/Off
SIG
11 LED1 O DC0V/5V LED output

tor
YC21 14 LED4 O DC0V/5V LED output
15 KEY1 I DC0V/3.3V Key input
16 KEY2 I DC0V/3.3V Key input
17 GND - - Ground
19 MTRY U SENS K O DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off
YC22 1 STAPLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 STAPLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG
4 SID REG R SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
5 GND - - Ground
6 SID REG R SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
7 SID REG F SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
8 GND - - Ground
9 SID REG F SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
10 GND - - Ground
11 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Eject paper sensor: On/Off
13 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
14 GND - - Ground
15 BUNDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle eject switch: On/Off
SIG
16 MTRY HP1 SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
17 GND - - Ground
18 MTRY HP1 SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
19 MTRY HP2 SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
20 GND - - Ground
21 MTRY HP2 SENS I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
22 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

tor
24 PADDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
25 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
26 GND - - Ground
27 ADJUST SENS I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
28 SFT SET SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
29 GND - - Ground
30 SFT SET SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift set sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC23 1 SFT F HP SENS O DC5V DC5V power output

A
2 GND - - Ground
3 SFT F HP SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift sensor 1: On/Off On/Off
SIG
4 SFT R HP SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
5 GND - - Ground
6 SFT R HP SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift sensor 2: On/Off On/Off
SIG
7 MTRY HALF O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
8 GND - - Ground
9 MTRY HALF I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 3 On/Off
SENS SIG
10 MTRY BF SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
11 GND - - Ground
12 MTRY BF SENS I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 5 On/Off
SIG
13 MTRY FULL O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
14 GND - - Ground
15 MTRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V tray sensor 4 On/Off
SENS SIG
16 SFT RELS SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
17 GND - - Ground
18 SFT RELS SENS I DC0V/3.3V Shift release sensor: On/Off
SIG

(10)MT main PWB
YC1
YC7 1
13 1
5 1
YC2
20
11
YC6
1 7
YC3
YC4
1
YC5
1 4
Figure 8-40

Destination
YC1: Tray sensor 1/2/3/4/5, Eject sensor 2
YC2: Eject sensor 1, Home position sensor, Tray sensor 6/7
YC3: DF main PWB
YC4: Cover switch
YC5: Motor

tor
2 OFS1 I DC0V/5V tray sensor 1 On/Off
4 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
16 LED O DC0V/5V LED signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 TEJS I DC0V/5V(pulse) Eject sensor 2: On/Off (photo receptor)

2 LED O DC0V/5V(pulse) Eject sensor 1 Off/On (light emission)
3 GND - - Ground
4 HP SIG I DC0V/5V Home position sensor: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground

tor
13 NC - - Not used
YC3 1 - - - Not used

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 5V I DC5V DC5V power input
8 SDI I DC0V/5V(pulse) Mail box serial communication data signal
9 SDO O DC0V/5V(pulse) Mail box serial communication data signal
10 SCLK I DC0V/5V(pulse) Mail box clock signal
11 SEL I DC0V/5V Mail box select signal
12 READY O DC0V/5V Mail box ready signal
YC4 1 R24V I DC24V DC24V power input

YC5 1 MOTOR_A O DC0V/24V(pulse) MB motor control signal

2 MOTORA O DC0V/24V(pulse) MB motor control signal
3 MOTORB O DC0V/24V(pulse) MB motor control signal
4 MOTOR_B O DC0V/24V(pulse) MB motor control signal

(11)BF main PWB
30 1 5 YC2 1 5 YC1 1
16
15 YC20 YC18 YC8
1 1
9
1
1 1
YC5
YC7 4
YC11 7
12
1
12
YC3
4
7
1
YC16 YC19
7
1
1
YC4
6 2
1
YC15 YC9
2
1
10 YC13 1
20
2 YC14 1 YC12 1 YC17 3 YC10 4 YC6 1

1 13
1
Figure 8-41

Destination
YC3: Main PWB
YC4: Left cover switch
YC5: Main PWB
YC6: Set switch, Tray open/close switch
YC7: Main PWB
YC10: Adjustment motor 1/2, Side registration motor 1/2, Paper entry motor
YC13: Staple motor
YC15: Blade motor
YC16: Main motor
YC17: Feedshift solenoid
YC20: Adjustment sensor 1/2, Side registration sensor 1/2, Tray paper full sensor, Eject sensor, Conveying
sensor, Paper detection sensor, Blade sensor, Paper entry sensor

tor
2 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Left cover switch On/Off
YC5 1 3.3V I DC3.3V DC3.3V power input

2 GND - - Ground
3 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Set switch: On/Off
4 EJECT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Tray open/close switch: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 ENG_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
4 ENG_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 ENG_CLK I DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
6 ENG_DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
7 ENG_DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output

tor
YC10 1 EXTMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
2 EXTMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
3 EXTMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
4 EXTMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 2 control signal
5 MDLMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
6 MDLMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
7 MDLMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
8 MDLMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 2 control signal
9 CINMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
10 CINMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
11 CINMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
12 CINMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Paper entry motor control signal
13 EXCMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
14 EXCMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
15 EXCMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
16 EXCMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Adjustment motor 1 control signal
17 STMMOT_2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
18 STMMOT_1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
19 STMMOT_2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal
20 STMMOT_1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Side registration motor 1 control signal

2 STLS2 I DC0V/5V Staple unit LS2 signal
3 GND - - Ground
4 STLS1 I DC0V/5V Staple unit LS1 signal
5 STHP I DC0V/5V Staple unit HP signal
6 STMOT_OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler motor control signal
8 FGND - - Ground
YC15 1 FLDMOT_BRK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
2 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Blade motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground

tor
YC16 1 FLDMOT_DIR O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
2 FLDMOT_ALM O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
3 FLDMOT_CLK O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
4 FLDMOT_EN O DC0V/5V(pulse) Main motor control signal
5 N.C. - - Not used
6 GND - - Ground

2 3FSOL_ATT O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
3 3FSOL_HLD O DC24V Feedshift solenoid: On/Off (return)
2 GND - - Ground
3 BDLFT_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 1: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 WDL_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
12 OUT I DC0V/3.3V Eject sensor: On/Off
14 GND - - Ground
15 TRANSPORT I DC0V/3.3V Conveying sensor: On/Off
17 GND - - Ground
18 PAPER I DC0V/3.3V Paper detection sensor: On/Off
20 GND - - Ground
21 WDU_HP I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
23 GND - - Ground
24 BLD_HP I DC0V/3.3V Blade sensor: On/Off
25 GND - - Ground
26 BULOW_HP I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor 2: On/Off

tor
28 GND - - Ground
29 CARRY_IN I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor On/Off

(12)PH main PWB (PH-7)
YC5 YC3
YC4
11 1 4 1
1 3
1
3
YC2
YC6 2
1
2
YC7 1
6 1
YC8 YC10
1 4
1 YC1
2
YC9
1 12
5 YC11 1
Figure 8-42
Figure 8-43

Destination
YC1: DF main PWB
YC2: DF main PWB
YC3: Slide motor
YC4: Motor
YC5: Solenoid, paper edge sensor 1, Tank full sensor
YC6: Slide sensor
YC7: Paper edge sensor 2
YC8: Pulse sensor, Home position sensor
YC9: Tank set switch

tor
YC1 1 PH_SDI I DC0V/ Serial communication data signal input
3.3V(pulse)
2 PH_SDO O DC0V/ Serial communication data signal output
3.3V(pulse)
3 PH_CLK I DC0V/ Clock signal
3.3V(pulse)
4 PH_SEL I DC0V/3.3V Select signal
5 PH_RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal
6 PHMOT_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Punch motor On/Off
7 PHPES_REQ I DC0V/3.3V Paper edge detection: On/Off
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
12 5.0V I DC5V DC5V power input

YC3 1 PHADJ_MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal

2 PHADJ_MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
3 PHADJ_MOT 2A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
4 PHADJ_MOT 1A O DC0V/24V(pulse) Slide motor control signal
YC4 1 PHMOT_N O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal

2 NC - - Not used
3 PHMOT_P O DC0V/24V(pulse) Motor control signal

tor
2 PHSOL_PUL O DC0V/24V Solenoid: On/Off (actuate)
3 PHSOL_RET O DC0V/24V Solenoid: On/Off (return)
4 PHLED_A O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 A: On/Off
5 PHLED_B O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 B: On/Off
6 PHLED_C O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 C: On/Off
7 PHLED_D O DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 1 D: On/Off

8 PHLED_3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
9 5.0V O DC5V DC5V power output
10 PHTNK_FUL I DC0V/5V Tank full sensor: On/Off
11 GND - - Ground
YC6 1 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 PHADJ_HP I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
YC7 1 PHPES_DET I DC0V/3.3V Paper edge sensor 2: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 PHMOT_PLS I DC0V/3.3V Pulse sensor: On/Off
4 SENS3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHMOT_HP I DC0V/3.3V Home position sensor: On/Off
YC9 1 PHTNK_SET I DC0V/3.3V Tank set switch: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground

(13)DF main PWB (DF-7120)
1 YC4 4
YC8 YC9
1 4 20 1 3 1 13 1
YC21 YC13
1 2
YC7
1
YC17
1
9
1 YC20 3
YC5 1
1 8 YC11 2
1 13 1 1
YC15 YC10
9 YC12
1 YC6
6
YC14 12 1 5
2 4 YC1 A1 A15
YC18 YC16 YC19
YC3 1 5
1 YC2 U3 B15 B1
3 1 6 1
Figure 8-44
Figure 8-45

Destination
YC3: Feed image PWB
YC4: Front cover switch, Top cover switch
YC5: Feed image PWB
YC6: PH main PWB
YC7: PH main PWB
YV8: Eject motor, Slide motor, Eject release motor, Paper entry motor, Middle motor
YC10: Stapler
YC11: Tray motor
YC16: Tray paper full sensor 1/2
YC17: Paper entry sensor
YC18: Middle sensor
YC19: Side registration sensor 1/2, Eject paper sensor, Bundle eject sensor, Paddle sensor, Tray sensor 1/
2/3, Adjustment sensor, Slide sensor

tor
2 GND - - Ground

2 FRONT COV SIG I DC0V/24V Front cover switch: On/Off
3 TOP COV O DC24V DC24V power output
SOURCE
4 TOP COV SIG I DC0V/24V Top cover switch: On/Off
YC5 1 ENG RDY O DC0V/3.3V Ready signal

3.3V(pulse)
3.3V(pulse)
5 ENG PAU - - Not used
6 DET - - Ground
3.3V(pulse)
8 GND - - Ground


tor
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 PHPES REM O DC0V/3.3V PH paper edge sensor: On/Off
7 PHMOT REM O DC0V/3.3V PH motor: On/Off
10 PU CLK O DC0V/3.3V Clock signal
11 PU DI I DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal input
12 PU DO O DC0V/3.3V Serial communication data signal output

YC8 1 EJECT MOT 2B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Eject motor control signal

2B
1B
2A
1A
2B
1B
2A
1A

tor
YC8 18 MIDDLE MOT 1B O DC0V/24V(pulse) Middle motor control signal

2B
1B
2A
1A
2B
1B
2A
1A
YC10 1 STPMOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal

2 STPMOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Stapler control signal
9 GND - - Ground
11 READY I DC0V/3.3V Staple unit READY signal

tor
YC11 1 TRY MOT OUT2 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
2 TRY MOT OUT1 O DC0V/24V(pulse) Tray motor control signal
YC16 1 MTRY U SENS K I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 1: On/Off

2 GND - - Ground
3 MTRY U SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
6 MTRY U SENS K O DC0V/3.3V Tray paper full sensor: On/Off
YC17 1 MID EJE SENS A - - Not used

2 GND - - Not used
3 MID EJE SENS - - Not used
SIG
4 GND - - Ground
5 ENTRY SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paper entry sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC18 1 MID EJE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

2 GND - - Ground
3 MID EJE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Middle sensor: On/Off
SIG
YC19 A1 SID REG R SENS O DC5V DC5V power output

A
A2 GND - - Ground
A3 SID REG R SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 2: On/Off
SIG
A4 SID REG F SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
A5 GND - - Ground
A6 SID REG F SENS I DC0V/3.3V Side registration sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
A7 GND - - Ground
A8 PAP SENS SIG I DC0V/3.3V Eject paper sensor: On/Off
A9 3.3V O DC3.3V DC3.3V power output
A10 BUNDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output

tor
A12 BUNDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Bundle eject sensor: On/Off
SIG
A13 PADDLE SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
A14 GND - - Ground
A15 PADDLE SENS I DC0V/3.3V Paddle sensor: On/Off
SIG
B1 MTRY HP SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
B2 GND - - Ground
B3 MTRY HP SENS I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 1: On/Off
SIG
B4 MTRY HALF O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B5 GND - - Ground
B6 MTRY HALF I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 2: On/Off
SENS SIG
B7 MTRY FULL O DC5V DC5V power output
SENS A
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 MTRY FULL I DC0V/3.3V Tray sensor 3: On/Off
SENS SIG
B10 ADJUST SENS A O DC5V DC5V power output
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 ADJUST SENS I DC0V/3.3V Adjustment sensor: On/Off
SIG
B13 STP MOV SENS O DC5V DC5V power output
A
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 STP MOV SENS I DC0V/3.3V Slide sensor: On/Off
SIG


9 Appendixes
9-1 Appendixes
(1) Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
37.7 mm/1 15/32 " Chager roller
62.9 mm/2 15/32 " Sleeve roller

64.7 mm/2 17/32 " Secondly transfer roller
94.2 mm/3 11/16 " Drum

96.5 mm/3 25/32 " Heat roller (Fuser belt)
109.9 mm/4 11/16 " Press roller
845.0 mm/33 1/4 " Primaly transfer belt
*: The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.

(2) Firmware environment commands
The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters may be changed per-
manently with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
Using FRPO commands for reprogramming the firmware

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the parameter-
values before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send the-
FRPO INIT (FRPO-INITialize) command. (!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PC-PR201/65A
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Items FRPO Setting value Factory set-

ting
Top margin A1 Integer value in inch 0
A2 decimal value in 1/100 inch increments 0
Left margin A3 Integer value in inch 0
Page length A5 Integer value in inch 17
Page width A7 Integer value in inch 17
PRESCRIBE compatible mode B0 0 to 255 0
2 (100V)
Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
Default copy number C0 1 to 999 1
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0
1: Landscape
Default font* C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0
C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0
C5 First two digits of power-up font 0
PCL font switching C8 0:HP compatible mode 0
32:Compatibility mode

ting
Print density control parameter D4 1: Pale 3
2: Relatively pale
3: Normal
4: Relevantly dark
6: Dark
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 Calculation in FRPO S5 of value(0:5 K 5
bytes)
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
1 (100V)
Reduction (100V model only) J0 0: 100% 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %
Auto linefeed mode (100V model J7 0: Auto linefeed 0

only) 1: No auto linefeed
(Japanese emulation only)
Horizontal offset (100V model K0 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
only) K1 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Vertical offset (100V model only)* K2 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
K3 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Kanji font number setting K4 0: Same as V7 0
(100V model only) 1: Mincho 40 dots
2: Gothic 40 dots
5: Mincho 48 dots
6: Gothic 48 dots
New/old JIS code switching K6 0: JIS X 0208: 1990 0
1: JIS X 0208: 1978
8: JIS X 0213: 2004
KIR mode N0 0:OFF 2
2:ON
Duplex printing mode selection N4 0: OFF 0
1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind)
2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)
Sleep timer time-out time N5 1 to 240 minutes 10
Eco Print mode N6 0:OFF 0
2:ON
Resolution (35/40 ppm models N8 0: 300dpi 1
only) 1: 600dpi
3: 1200dpi

ting
Default emulation mode P1 6 : PCL6 (except PCL XL) 6
9 : KPDL
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: CR
2: CR+LF
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 0x0d 1
1: LF
2: CR+LF
KPDL auto switching P4 0: None 0
1: Auto switching model)
KPDL auto switching alternate P5 Same as P1 (except 9) 6

emulation
AES option P7 If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor 10

Page eject command and action alternate emulation after the AES is started, it
when automatic emulation switch- is processed in the alternate emulation .
ing (AES) is triggered 0: All page eject commands
1: None
2: All page eject commands and Prescribe
EXIT command
3: Prescribe EXIT command only
4: ^L command only
6: Prescribe EXIT command and ^L command
If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor
alternate emulation after the AES is started, it
is processed in KPDL.
10: Data other than KPDL print data is printed
in the alternate emulation.
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82(R)
Stacker setting at start-up R0 1: Inner tray 1
3: When the 1000-sheet finisher is installed
7: When the 3000-sheet finisher is installed

ting
Paper size(start-up) R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Envelope Monarch
2: Envelope #10
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
10: ISO A3
11: JIS B4
12: Ledger
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
20: B4toA4(100V model only)
21: A3toA4(100V model only)
22: A4toA4[98%](100V model only)
23: STKtoA4(100V model only)
30: C4
31: Hagaki
32: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II
38: 12x18
39: 8K
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2
53: Youkei type 4
Default paper source R4 0: MP paper feed section 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
3: Cassette 3
4: Cassette 4
5: Cassette 5
Sort pin full detection S3 0: Stop at paper full detection 1
1: Output tray change at paper full detection
A4/Letter override S4 0: OFF 1
1: ON 0(100V)

ting
Host buffer size rate S5 0: 10KB 1
(H8 value and integration) 1: 100KB
2: 1MB
Wide A4 T6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Line spacing U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (fraction value) 0
Character spacing U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (fraction value) 0
Country code of the resident fonts U6 0: US 41
1: France 0 (100V)
2: Germany
3: U.K.
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
Supported symbol sets U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53

1: IBM 0 (100V)
6: PCL
Default font pitch* U8 Default font pitch/integer 10

U9 Default font pitch/decimal 0

ting
ANK outline font size at start-up* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power- 0
up
Upper 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 09
V1 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power- 12
up
Lower 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 99
V2 Decimal value of ANK outline font size at 0
power-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
ANK outline font name at start-up* V3 ANK outline font name at power-up Courier
Initial Kanji outline font size (100 V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font 0
V model only)* size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 09
V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font 10
size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 99
V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font 0
size at start-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
Initial Kanji outline font name V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMIN-
(100V model only)* CHO-W3
Default weight(courier and letter V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
Gothic) Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular

ting
Paper type for the MP tray X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Labels
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
8: Rough (except 100V model)
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Hagaki
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
18: IndexTabs
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8
Paper type (Paper cassettes 1,2) X1 1: Plain 1
X2 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality
Paper type X3 1: Plain 1
(Option paper cassette 3 to 5) X4 3: Preprinted
X5 5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Vellum
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
16: Thick
17: High quality

ting
Cassette selection mode (PCL) X9 0: Paper selection depending on an escape 0
sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si
2: Paper selection depending on an escape
sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000
Auto error clear at an error Y0 0:OFF 0
1:ON
Auto error clear timeout time Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
Paper error detection at duplex Y3 0: Not detected 127
printing 127: Detected
Paper size and type error detec-
tion at fixed paper source
Forced duplex printing setting Y4 0:OFF 0
(Media type is Preprinted, Pre- 1:ON
punched and Letterhead only)
PDF direct printing Y5 0: Zoom depending on paper size 0
1: Loads paper which is the same size as the
image
2: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on
the image sizeEnlarges or reduces the
image to fit in the current paper size
the image size
8: Printed in full magnification
the image size
the image sizeEnlarges or reduces the
image to fit in the current paper size
13 to 99: Same action as default value(0)
Job box error control Y6 0: No error control 3
1: Output the error list
2: Displays the error
3: Displays the error and prints the error report
*: Ignored depending on emulation

(3) Chart of image adjustment procedures
Adjusting Maintenance mode Setting procedure

Item Image Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode Method Setting
Adjusting the center line of the MP U034 LSU Out Left P.6-38 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tray 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) [LSU Out Left]-[MPT] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the [Duplex].
1 Changes the LSU writing start tim-
(original: Test pattern) 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
ing.
(Pattern output)
5. Press the System Menu key. Press the [Stop] key.
6. Excute the adjustment.
Adjusting the center line of the U034 LSU Out Left P.6-38 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
cassettes 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves rightward.
(Adjustment of writing) LSU Out Left - change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
[Cassette1] to [Cassette5] 2. Press the Start key to set the [Duplex].
2 Changes the LSU writing start tim- 3. Press the System Menu key. setting value.
(original: Test pattern)
ing.
4. Press the Start key.
(Pattern output) Press the [Stop] key.
5. Press the System Menu key.
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U034 LSU Out Top P.6-38 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tration of the MP tray 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(Adjustment of writing) [Lsu Out Top] - [MPT(L)] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
3 Changes the secondary paper
feed timing.
(Pattern output)
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U034 LSU Out Top P.6-38 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
tration of the cassette 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, moves downward.
(Adjustment of writing) [Lsu Out Top] - [Cassette(L)] change the setting value. *When adjusting for the duplex copy, select
4 Changes the secondary paper (original: Test pattern) 4. Press the Start key. setting value.
feed timing.
(Pattern output)
Adjusting the leading edge margin U402 Lead P.6-189 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
[Lead] change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination start 3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
5 timing.
(Pattern output)
6. Execute the adjustment.
9-10
Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail P.6-189 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the mar-
$
(Adjustment of writing) 1. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, gin get larger.
[Trail] change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination end 2. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
6 timing.
(Pattern output)
Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin P.6-189 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] *When the setting value is increased, the image
$
(Adjustment of writing) C Margin 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, get longer.
Select [A Margin] or [C Margin]. change the setting value.
Changes the LSU illumination 3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
7 start/end timing.
(Pattern output)
Adjusting magnification of the U065 Main Scan P.6-59 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the main scanning 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
direction [Main Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
3. Press the System Menu key. 2. Press the Start key to set the
8 Processes data. 4. Place an original and press the Start key. setting value.
(original: Test copy) (Test copy output)
Adjusting magnification of the U065 Sub Scan P.6-59 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the sub scanning direc- P.6-64 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When the setting value is increased, the image
tion (scanning adjustment) U070 Sub Scan(F) U065: [Sub Scan] change the setting value. get larger.
Sub Scan(B) U070: [Sub Scan(F)], [Sub Scan(B)] or 2. Press the Start key to set the
Changes the original scanning Sub Scan(CIS) [Sub Scan(CIS)] setting value. U070: When using document processor
9 speed. *When the setting value is increased, the image
(original: Test copy) 3. Press the System Menu key.
get longer.
4. Place an original and press the Start key. Press the [Stop] key.
(Test copy output)
Adjusting the center line U067 Front P.6-62 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U067: When using on the contact glass
(Adjustment of reading) P.6-67 2. Select the adjustment content. cursor or the numeric keys, *When adjusting for the rotate copy, select
U067: [Front] change the setting value. [Rotate].
Scan data is processed. U072 Front U072: [Front], [Back] or [CIS] 2. Press the Start key to set the *When the setting value is increased, the image
Back 3. Press the System Menu key. setting value. moves leftward.
10 CIS
4. Place an original and press the Start key.
(original: Test copy) U072: When using document processor
(Test copy output) Press the [Stop] key.
*Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of
duplex mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
moves rightward.
9-11
Adjusting the leading edge regis- U066 Front P.6-59 1. Press the Start key. 1. By using the [Left/Right],[+/-] U066: When using on the contact glass
tration Rotate P.6-65 2. Press the System Menu key. cursor or the numeric keys, *When adjusting for the rotate copy, select
(Adjustment of reading) 3. Place an original and press the Start key. change the setting value. [Rotate].
U071 Front Head (Test copy output) 2. Press the Start key to set the *When the setting value is increased, the image
Changes the original scan start Back Head 4. Press the System Menu key. setting value. moves forward.
11 timing.
5. Select the adjustment content.
U071: When using document processor
(original: Test copy) U066: [Front] or [Rotate] Press the [Stop] key.
*Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the
U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head]
time of duplex mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
moves forward.
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 7505000107), the fol-
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Copy: ±1.5%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Using DP: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the main scanning direction Magnificaiton Copy: ±2.0%
Chromatic aberration in the sub scanning direction Using DP: ±2.5%
MTF correction
Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
Input gamma in color mode
Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Color correction matrix
Input gamma in monochrome mode Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
Copy: 2.0mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), the fol- Using DP: 2.5mm or less
lowing adjustments are automatically made: Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm /100mm or less
*:When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly (left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm /100mm or less(table)
positioned against the original. 1.5mm/100mm or less(document processor)
Make sure to set. Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
*:Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as follows. ±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)
±3.0mm or less(MP tray)
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)

±3.0mm or less(MP tray)

Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)

Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner: DP Auto Adj) is run using the specified original, the following adjustments are automatically made:
Adjusting the DP sub scanning magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
When executing U415 (Printing position automatic adjustment), making automatically the following adjustments. (P.6-205 Reference)
Adjusting the printer leading edge registration (U034)
Adjusting the printer center line (U034)
Adjusting the printer margin (U402)
9-12
(4) Wiring diagram
(4-1)Engine PWB / Feed Drive PWB
YC3 YC6 YC40 YC6

3.3V3_FUSE A12 A12 A1 A1 3.3V3_FUSE +5V0 A1 A1 A20 A20 +5V0_FUSE
3.3V2_FUSE A11 A11 A2 A2 3.3V2_FUSE +5V2 A2 A2 A19 A19 +5V2
3.3V2_FUSE A10 A10 A3 A3 3.3V2_FUSE GND A3 A3 A18 A18 GND
3.3V2_FUSE A9 A9 A4 A4 3.3V2_FUSE GND A4 A4 A17 A17 GND
GND A8 A8 A5 A5 GND +3.3V2 A5 A5 A16 A16 +3.3V2_FUSE
GND A5 A5 A8 A8 GND GND A8 A8 A13 A13 GND
REG_R_LED A4 A4 A9 A9 REG_R_LED GND A9 A9 A12 A12 GND
ID_SENS_R_S A3 A3 A10 A10 ID_SENS_R_S JS_SENS_AK A10 A10 A11 A11 JS_SENS_AK
ID_SENS_R_P A2 A2 A11 A11 ID_SENS_R_P FRONT_CO_OPEN A11 A11 A10 A10 FRONT_CO_OPEN
REG_F_LED A1 A1 A12 A12 REG_F_LED JS_SENS A12 A12 A9 A9 JS_SENS
KSS_INT A13 A13 A8 A8 DRM_EEP_SEL0
Relay Relay KSS_EN A14 A14 A7 A7 KSS_IMAGE_EN(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_S B12 B12 B1 B1 ID_SENS_F_S KSS_CS A15 A15 A6 A6 KSS_IMAGE_CS(ENG to IMAGE)
ID_SENS_F_P B11 B11 B2 B2 ID_SENS_F_P KSS_CLK A16 A16 A5 A5 KSS_IMAGE_CLK(ENG to IMAGE)
REG_SENS B10 B10 B3 B3 REG_SENS KSS_SDI A17 A17 A4 A4 KSS_IMAGE_SDI(IMAGE to ENG)
ATLAS_CLK(ENG to DRI) B9 B9 B4 B4 ATLAS_CLK KSS_SDO A18 A18 A3 A3 KSS_IMAGE_SDO(ENG to IMAGE)
ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) B8 B8 B5 B5 ATLAS_SDO(ENG to DRI) 3.3V3 A19 A19 A2 A2 3.3V3
ATLAS_EN(ENG to DRI) B7 B7 B6 B6 ATLAS_EN 3.3V_TH_CUT A20 A20 A1 A1 3.3V_TH_CUT
ATLAS_CS(ENG to DRI) B6 B6 B7 B7 ATLAS_CS
ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) B5 B5 B8 B8 ATLAS_SDI(DRI to ENG) Relay Relay
MPF_ORG_SENS B4 B4 B9 B9 MPF_ORG_SENS DRUM HEAT B1 B1 B20 B20 DRUM HEAT
CAS1_2_OPEN B3 B3 B10 B10 CAS1_2_OPEN DF_CLK B2 B2 B19 B19 DF_CLK
REG_CL_REM B2 B2 B11 B11 REG_CL_REM DF_SDO B3 B3 B18 B18 DF_SDO
GND B1 B1 B12 B12 GND DF_SDI B4 B4 B17 B17 DF_SDI
DF_SEL B5 B5 B16 B16 DF_SEL
DF_RDY B6 B6 B15 B15 DF_RDY
DF_SYNC B7 B7 B14 B14 DF_SYNC
DF_DET B8 B8 B13 B13 DF_DET
FSR_TH_EDGE B9 B9 B12 B12 FSR_TH_EDGE
FSR_TH_CENT B10 B10 B11 B11 FSR_TH_CENT
FSR_TH_PRESS B11 B11 B10 B10 FSR_TH_PRESS
FSR_TH_MID B12 B12 B9 B9 FSR_TH_MID
FSR_ALARM B13 B13 B8 B8 FSR_ALARM
TPC_BK B14 B14 B7 B7 TPC_BK
DRUM_BK_MOT_REM B15 B15 B6 B6 DRUM_BK_MOT_REM
DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK B16 B16 B5 B5 DRUM_BK_MOT_CLK
DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY B17 B17 B4 B4 DRUM_BK_MOT_RDY
GND B18 B18 B3 B3 GND
+24V3IL_F2_FET2 B19 B19 B2 B2 +24V3IL_IL_F2_FET2
FSR_OFFSET_CNT B20 B20 B1 B1 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
Engine PWB (1/7) YC42 YC28

DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM 1 1 18 18 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_REM
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK 2 2 17 17 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_CLK
Feed drive PWB (1/3) DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
3
4
3
4
16
15
16
15
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_DIR
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_RDY
DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE 5 5 14 14 DLP_BK_BELT_MOT_BRAKE
VIB_MOT_REM 6 6 13 13 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DLP_FAN_REM 7 7 12 12 I2C_SCL
DLP_FAN_REM_HALF 8 8 11 11 I2C_SDA
TPC_M 9 9 10 10 TPC_M
TPC_C 10 10 9 9 TPC_C
TPC_Y 11 11 8 8 TPC_Y
DLP_COL_MOT_REM 12 12 7 7 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
DLP_COL_MOT_CLK 13 13 6 6 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
DLP_COL_MOT_DIR 14 14 5 5 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
DLP_COL_MOT_RDY 15 15 4 4 DLP_COL_MOT_RDY
DRUM_COL_MOT_REM 16 16 3 3 DRUM_COL_MOT_REM
DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK 17 17 2 2 DRUM_COL_MOT_CLK
DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY 18 18 1 1 DRUM_COL_MOT_RDY
YC2 YC29
NC 11 11 GND 3 3 1 3 1 1 GND
NC 10 10 Waste toner full sensor Vout 2 2 2 Relay 2 2 2 WTNR_LOCK_SENS
NC 9 9 5V 1 1 3 1 3 3 5V
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM
TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 7 7 5 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
NC 6 6 1 2 1 2 6 6 3.3V2
NC 5 5 2 Relay 1 2 Relay 1 7 7 D_VIB_MOT
EXSOL1_REM 4 4 8 8 EXSOL1_REM
EXSOL1_KEEP 3 3 9 9 EXSOL1_KEEP
EXSOL2_REM 2 2 10 10 EXSOL2_REM
EXSOL2_KEEP 1 1 11 11 EXSOL2_KEEP
ALM 1 3 12 12 TN_FAN_LOCK
Toner suction fan motor GND 2
3
Relay 2 13
14
13
14
GND
TN_FAN_REM
24V 1
Vibration motor BK 2
1
2
1
Main drive Feed image PWB (1/6)
9-13
(4-2)Laser Scanner / Image Scanner and Document processor connection
Engine PWB (2/7)
YC9 YC1
DATAP2_K 1 1 1 1 DATAP2_K
DATAN2_K
GND
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
DATAN2_K
GND DP main PWB 16 1 B16
YC16
B16 DP_SDI(DP to ENG)
DATAP1_K 4 4 4 4 DATAP1_K YC16 DP_SEL(ENG to DP)
15 2 B15 B15
DATAN1_K 5 5 5 5 DATAN1_K
+24V4 16 16 14 3 B14 B14 +24V4
GND 6 6 6 6 GND
+24V4 15 15 13 4 B13 B13 +24V4
LSU_TH 7 7 7 7 LSU_TH
+24V4 14 14 12 5 B12 B12 +24V4
GND 8 8 8 8 GND
GND 13 13 11 6 B11 B11 GND
POL_CLK 9 9 9 9 POL_CLK
GND 12 12 10 7 B10 B10 GND
POL_RDY 10 10 10 10 POL_RDY
GND 11 11 9 8 B9 B9 GND
POL_REM 11 11 11 11 POL_REM
3.3V3_FUSE 10 10 8
Relay 9 B8 B8 3.3V3_FUSE
BD 12 12 12 12 BD
DP_ORG_SET 9 9 7 10 B7 B7 DP_ORG_SET
P4_BK 13 13 13 13 P4_BK
DP_FD_SW 8 8 6 11 B6 B6 DP_FD_SW
P2_KC 14 14 14 14 P2_KC
5 12 B5 B5 DP_RDY(DP to ENG)
P0_KC 15 15 15 15 P0_KC
DP_CO(DP to ENG) 7 7 4 13 B4 B4 DP_CO(DP to ENG)
CSI_K 16 16 16 16 CSI_K
DP_SDI(DP to ENG) 6 6 3 14 B3 B3 DP_TMG(DP to ENG)
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
DP_SDO(ENG to DP) 5 5 2 15 B2 B2 DP_SOO(ENG to DP)
DP_CLK(ENG to DP) 4 4 1 16 B1 B1 DP_CLK(ENG to DP)
DP_SEL(ENG to DP) 3 3
GND 20 20 20 20 GND
DP_RDY(DP to ENG) 2 2
DP_TMG(DP to ENG) 1 1
GND
SD_CLK
23
24
23
24
23
24
23
24
GND
SD_CLK
DP
P4_M 25 25 25 25 P4_M
CSI_M 26 26 26 26 CSI_M
NC 27 27 27 27 NC YC4 YC1
INT_ST_KM 28 28 28 28 INT_ST_KM +5V2IL_LSU 4 4 1 1 +5V2
SET_KM 29 29 29 29 SET_KM A16 A16 GND
NC 30 30 30 30 NC
BD
TH
3
2
3
2
2
3
2
3
BD
TH PD PWB A15 A15
Relay A14
GND
GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 1 1 4 4 GND 3.3V 3 3 A14 3.3V2
DIO_KM 32 32 32 32 DIO_KM Home position sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A13
A12
A13
A12
GND
HP_SENS
GND 33 33 33 33 GND
DOI_KM 34 34 34 34 DOI_KM
GND 35 35 35 35 GND
SKOI_KM 36 36 36 36 SKOI_KM YC5 GND 3 3 A11 A11 GND
GND 37 37 37 37 GND +24V4 1 1 5 5 +24V Original size sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
A10
A9
A10
A9
ORG_SENS
5V2
CSI_M 38 38 38 38 CSI_M P GND 2 2 4 4 GND
GND
DATAP2_M
39
40
39
40
39
40
39
40
GND
DATAP2_M
POL_REM
POL_RDY
3
4
3
4
3
2
3
2
START/STOP
LOCKED
Polygon motor 3.3V 3 3 A8 A8 3.3V3_FUSE
DATAN2_M
GND
41
42
41
42
41
42
41
42
DATAN2_M
GND
POL_CLK 5 5 1 1 EXT.CLOCK Original detection sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
A7
A6
A7
A6
GND
PLT_OPEN
DATAP1_M 43 43 43 43 DATAP1_M
DATAN1_M 44 44 44 44 DATAN1_M
GND 45 45 45 45 GND YC6 A/ 1 6 A5 A5 SCAN_MOT_1_B
DATAP4_M 46 46 46 46 DATAP4_M CLN_MOT_A 1 1 3 1 5 A4 A4 SCAN_MOT_1_A
DATAN4_M
GND
47
48
47
48
47
48
47
48
DATAN4_M
GND
NC 2 2 2 2 LSU cleaning motor Scanner motor A
B
3
4
4
3
A3
A2
A3
A2
SCAN_MOT_2_A
SCAN_MOT_2_B
CLN_MOT_B 3 3 1 3
DATAP3_M 49 49 49 49 DATAP3_M 2 A1 A1 GND
DATAN3_M 50 50 50 50 DATAN3_M B/ 6 1
YC1 YC36
+12V5 40 40 1 1 +12V5
+12V5 39 39 2 2 +12V5
+12V5 38 38 3 3 +12V5
+12V5 37 37 4 4 +12V5
NC 36 36 5 5 NC
LED_PWM 35 35 6 6 LED_PWM
GND 34 34 7 7 GND
DSI_CIS_5P 33 33 8 8 DSI_CIS_5P
DSI_CIS_5N 32 32 9 9 DSI_CIS_5N
GND 31 31 10 10 GND
GND 28 28 13 13 GND
GND 25 25 16 16 GND
DSI_CIS_CKP 24 24 17 17 DSI_CIS_CKP
DSI_CIS_CKN 23 23 18 18 DSI_CIS_CKN
GND 22 22 19 19 GND
GND 19 19 22 22 GND
GND 16 16 25 25 GND
AFE_RD 15 15 26 26 AFE_RD
GND 14 14 27 27 GND
AFE_WD 13 13 28 28 AFE_WD
GND 12 12 29 29 GND
AFE_CLK 11 11 30 30 AFE_CLK
GND 10 10 31 31 GND
AFE_CS 9 9 32 32 AFE_CS
GND 8 8 33 33 GND
APC PWB AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
7
6
7
6
34
35
34
35
AFE_MCLK_P
AFE_MCLK_N
GND 5 5 36 36 GND
NC 4 4 37 37 NC
YC27 YC3
+5V2 3 3 38 38 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 1 1 8 8 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 2 2 39 39 +5V2
+5V4IL_LSU 2 2 7 7 +5V4IL_LSU +5V2 1 1 40 40 +5V2
GND 3 3 6 6 GND
GND 4 4 5 5 GND
CLN_MOT_A 5 5 4 4 CLN_MOT_A
CLN_MOT_B 6 6 3 3 CLN_MOT_B
+24V4
PGND
7
8
7
8
2
1
2
1
+24V4
PGND Laser scanner unit YC1 YC2
㸦4 beam㸧 +12V
+12V
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
+12V
+12V
NC 3 3 3 3 NC
LED PWB LED_PWM
LED_ENA
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
LED_PWM
LED_ENABLE
WTNR_MOT_A 9 9 5 1 3 1 GND 6 6 6 6 GND
2 2 Waste toner motor GND 7 7 7 7 GND
WTNR_MOT_B 10 10 4 2 1 3
Relay
WTNR_WEIGHT 11 11 3 3
4
3
4
3
TH
OUT Weight detection CCD PWB
GND 12 12 2 4 2 2 GND
+5V2 13 13 1 5 1 1 5V sensor
Image scanner unit

YC9
AC DETECTOR 14 14 4 AC DETECTOR
GND
CAS_HEATER
15
16
15
16
3
2
3
2
GND
DRM_HEAT_REM Power supply PWB (1/2)
SLEEP 17 17 1 1 SLEEP
9-14
(4-3)Feed image PWB (Front side)

Transfer PWB Transfer relay PWB
YC2
Belt thermistor TH
GND
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
BELT_TH
GND YC1 YC2 YC3 YC32
+24V2_F1 10 1 +24V2_F1 +24V2_F1 10 10 A1 A1 +24V2_F1
TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK 9 2 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK TBLT_CLMOT_BRAK 9 9 A2 A2 N.C.
TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 3 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM TBLT_CLMOT_PWM 8 8 A3 A3 TBLT_CLMOT_BWM
3.3V2 7 4 +3.3V2 3.3V2 7 7 A4 A4 +3.3V2
YC3 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA TBLT_CLMOT_CHA 6 6 A5 A5 TBLT_CLMOT_CHA
Vm(24V) 1 1 1 1 +24V2_F1 BELT_TH 5 Relay 6 BELT_TH BELT_TH 5 5 A6 A6 BELT_TH
P_GND 2 2 2 2 GND BLT_SCL 4 7 BLT_SCL BLT_SCL 4 4 A7 A7 BLT_SCL
BRAKE 3 3 3 3 TBLT_CLMOT_BRAKE GND 3 8 GND GND 3 3 A8 A8 GND
Belt cleaning motor PWM
CW/CCW
4
5
4
5
4 4 TBLT_CLMOT_PWM GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
9
10
GND
BLT_SDA
GND
BLT_SDA
2
1
2
1
A9
A10
A9 GND
A10 BLT_SDA
3.3V2 6 6 5 5 3.3V2
CHB 7 7
CHA 8 8 6 6 CHA
7 7 GND
Container solenoid BK -
+
1
2
Relay
2
1
1
2 Relay
2
1
A11
A12
A11 +24V2_F1
A12 COTN_SOL_BK
A13 A13 +24V2_F1

A14 A14 COTN_SOL_M
A15 A15 +24V2_F1

A16 A16 COTN_SOL_C
A17 A17 +24V2_F1

A18 A18 COTN_SOL_Y
Relay
GND 3 3 B1 B1 GND
+24V3_IL_F1_FET1 2 2 B2 B2 +24V3_IL_F1_FET1
FSR_OFFSET_CNT 1 1 B3 B3 FSR_OFFSET_CNT
B4 B4 PWM
Fuser high voltage PWB B5 B5 CW/CCW
3.3V 3 3 B6 B6 3.3V2_LED
IH position sensor GND 2 2 B7 B7 GND
Vout 1 1 B8 B8 IH_CORE_HP
B/ 1 4 B9 B9 IHMOT_2B
IH core motor B
A
2
3 Relay
3
2
B10
B11
B10
B11
IHMOT_2A
IHMOT_1A
A/ 4 1 B12 B12 IHMOT_1B
3.3V 3 3 B13 B13 3.3V2_LED

Job separator sensor Vout
GND 2
1
2
1
B14
B15
B14 GND
B15 JS_SENS
Front cover switch 2

1
2
1
B16
B17
B16 GND
B17 FRONT_CO_OPEN
B18 B18 N.C.
Eject unit 1
2
12
11
3 10
4 9 YC17
A/ 1 4 5 8 A1 A1 EXMOT_1B
A 2 3 6 7 A2 A2 EXMOT_1A
Switchback motor B/ 3 2 7 6 A3 A3 EXMOT_2B
B 4 1 8 5 A4 A4 EXMOT_2A
Feed image PWB (2/6)
3.3V 3 3 9 4 A5 A5 +3.3V2_LED
Eject full sensor lower GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
3
2
A6
A7
A6
A7
GND
EXMAIN_FULL
12 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 1 12 A8 A8 +3.3V2_LED
Eject full sensor upper GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
11
10
A9
A10
A9
A10
GND
EXINNER_FULL
COM 1 3 4 9 A11 A11 +24V2_F1

YC33
Eject solenoid lower ACT
KEEP
2
3
Relay 2
1
5
6
8
7
A12
A13
A12
A13
EXSOL1
EXSOL1_KEEP TBELT_FAN 1 1
GND 2 2
COM 1 3 7 6 A14 A14 +24V2_F1 TBELT_FAN_LOCK 3 3
Eject solenoid upper ACT 2 Relay 2 8 5 A15 A15 EXSOL2
KEEP 3 1 9 4 A16 A16 EXSOL2_KEEP
3.3V 3 3 10 3 A17 A17 +3.3V2_LED 3 1 ALM

Eject sensor GND 2 2 11 2 A18 A18 GND IH_PWB_FAN_REM
+24V2_F1
4
5
4
5
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
24V
IH PWB fan motor
Vout 1 1 12 1 A19 A19 EX_FEED_SENS
A20 A20 N.C.
IHCOIL_FAN1 6 6 3 1 24V
Relay GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_F
7
8
7
8
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Eject/IH fan motor front
YC1
VIB_MOT_REM 20 20 B1 B1 VIB_MOT_REM
DLP_FAN_HARF 19 19 B2 B2 DLP_FAN_HARF
IHCOIL_FAN1 9 9 3 1 24V
DLP_FAN_REM 18 18 B3 B3 DLP_FAN_REM
5V0_FUSE 17 17 B4 B4 5V0_FUSE
GND 10 10 2 Relay 2 GND Eject/IH fan motor center
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_C 11 11 1 3 ALM
DRM_HEAT_REM 16 16 B5 B5 DRM_HEAT_REM
ERASER_COL 15 15 B6 B6 ERASER_COL
ERASER_BK 14 14 B7 B7 ERASER_BK
+24V2B) 13 13 B8 B8 +24V2_F1
IHCOIL_FAN1 12 12
GND 12 12 B9 B9 GND
Drum-Developer TPC_Y
TPC_C
11
10
11
10
B10
B11
B10
B11
TPC_Y
TPC_C
GND
IHCOIL_FAN_LOCK_R
13
14
13
14
relay PWB (1/2) TPC_M

TPC_BK
9
8
9
8
B12
B13
B12
B13
TPC_M
TPC_BK
DLP_TH 7 7 B14 B14 DLP_TH
EEP_SDA 6 6 B15 B15 EEP_SDA
EEP_SCL 5 5 B16 B16 EEP_SCL
DRM_EEP_SEL1 4 4 B17 B17 DRM_EEP_SEL1
DRM_EEP_SEL0 3 3 B18 B18 DRM_EEP_SEL0
3.3V2_FUSE 2 2 B19 B19 3.3V2_FUSE
GND 1 1 B20 B20 GND
9-15
(4-4)Feed image PWB (Rear side)
Toner container YC1 YC12

5V 5 5 1 1 5V2
3.3V2 4 4 2 2 3.3V2
RFID PWB EEP_SCL
GND
3
2
3
2
3
4
3
4
EEP_SCL
GND
EEP_SDA 1 1 5 5 EEP_SDA
YC19
TNMOT_BK_OUT1 A1 A1 9 1 3 1
TNMOT_BK_OUT2 A2 A2 8 2
2
1
2
3
Toner motor BK
6 6 CONT_RECOG
7 7 GND 3.3V2_LED A3 A3 7 3 3 3 3.3V

8 8 CONNECT_RECOG GND
THOP_PLS_BK
A4
A5
A4
A5
6
5
Relay 4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Toner level sensor BK
3.3V2 A6 A6 4 6 Collector
THOP_FULL_BK A7 A7 3 7 Emitter
THOP_LED_BK A8 A8 2 8 Cathode
YC36 3.3V2_LED A9 A9 1 9 Anode
+24V
GND
1
2
6
5
1
2
6
5
24V
GND
Toner Hopper
Container motor START/STOP
CLOCK
3
4
4
3
3
4
4
3
CONT_MOT_REM
CONT_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 5 2 CONT_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 CONT_MOT_DIR
Main drive unit YC24

26 25 N.C.
25 25 +24V2IL2
24 24 GND
23 23 DLP_COL_MOT_REM
22 22 DLP_COL_MOT_CLK
21 21 DLP_COL_MOT_LD
20 20 DLP_COL_MOT_DIR
+24V1 1 11 19 19 +24V2IL2
PGND 2 10 18 18 GND
START/STOP 3 9 17 17 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_REM
VM 4 8 16 16 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_CLK
FG 5 7 15 15 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_FG
Developer BK CW/CCW 6 6 14 14 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_DIR
BRAKE 7 5 13 13 DLP_BK_BLT_MOT_BRK
/ Belt motor +5V 8 4
SGND 9 3
SIG1 10 2
SIG2 11 1
12 12 +24V2IL2
11 11 GND
10 10 DRM_COL_MOT_REM
9 9 DRM_COL_MOT_CLK
8 8 DRM_COL_MOT_LD
7 7 DRM_COL_MOT_DIR
+24V 1 6 6 6 +24V2IL2
GND 2 5 5 5 GND
Drum motor BK START/STOP
CLOCK
3
4
4
3
4
3
4
3
DRM_BK_MOT_REM
DRM_BK_MOT_CLK
LD 5 2 2 2 DRM_BK_MOT_LD
CW/CCW 6 1 1 1 DRM_BK_MOT_DIR

YC23
1 3 1 1 BLT_PRESS_OUT1
Belt release motor 2
3
2
1 2 2 BLT_PRESS_OUT2
3 3 1 5 3 3 +24V2
Developer clutch 2 2
1 1 2 4 4 4 DLP_BK_CLT_REM
Relay
3.3V 3 3 3 3 5 5 3.3V2_LED
Belt release sensor GND 2 2 4 2 6 6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 1 7 7 BLT_4RELEASE_SENS
9-16
(4-5)Feed Drive PWB
YC7
EDGE_FAN_LOCK B1 B1 B14 B1 9 1 3 1 ALM
GND
EDGE_FAN
B2
B3
B2
B3
B13
B12
B2
B3
8
7
2
3
2
1
Relay 2
3
GND
24V
Fuser edge fan motor
Main unit YC5
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 6
Cassette sensor 1 GND 1 1 2 5
A1
A2
A1 CAS1_LSIZE3
A2 GND GND B4 B4 B11 B4 6 Relay 4 3 1 3 GND
TRANSBELT_SENS
3.3V2
B5
B6
B5
B6
B10
B9
B5
B6
5
4
5
6
2
1
Relay 2
3
2
1
Vout
3.3V
Belt roll-up sensor
CN-3 4 4 3 Relay 4 A3 A3 CAS1_LSIZE3
GND 3 3 4 3 A4 A4 GND
Paper length sensor 1 CN-2 2 2 5 2 A5 A5 CAS1_LSIZE2 3.3V2_LED B7 B7 B8 B7 3 7 3 3.3V
CN-1 1 1 6 1 A6 A6 CAS1_LSIZE1 GND B8 B8 B7 B8 2 8 2 GND Duplex sensor 2
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 A7 A7 CAS1_WSIZE
DU_SENS2 B9 B9 B6 B9 1 9 1 Vout
Conveying
Paper width sensor 1 GND 1 1 2 7 A8 A8 GND
3.3V 3 3 3 6 A9 A9 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 A10 A10 GND 3.3V2_LED B10 B10 B5 B10 5 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 5 4 A11 A11 CAS1_QUANT1 GND B11
DU_SENS1 B12
B11
B12
B4
B3
B11
B12
4
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
Duplex sensor 1
Relay
3.3V 3 3 6 3 A12 A12 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 1 lower GND 2 2 7 2 A13 A13 GND RCOVER_OPEN B13 B13 B2 B13 2 4 2 2
Right cover switch
Vout 1 1 8 1 A14 A14 CAS1_QUANT2 GND B14 B14 B1 B14 1 5 1 1
Relay Relay
2 2 1 2 A15 A15 LIFTMOT1_OUT1 DU_CL1 A1 A1 A14 A1 3 3
Lift motor 1 1 1 2
Relay
1 A16 A16 LIFTMOT1_OUT2 2 2 Duplex clutch 1
+24V2 A2 A2 A13 A2 1 1
Relay
DUCL2 A3 A3 A12 A3 3 3
Lift motor 2 2 2 1 Relay 2 B1 B1 LIFTMOT2_OUT1 2 2 Duplex clutch 2

1 1 2 1 B2 B2 LIFTMOT2_OUT2 +24V2 A4 A4 A11 A4 1 1
MPFCL_REM A5 A5 A10 A5 3 3
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 8 B3 B3 CAS2_WSIZE 2 2 MP clutch
Paper width sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 7 B4 B4 GND +24V2_FUSE A6 A6 A9 A6 1 1
3.3V 3 3 3 6 B5 B5 3.3V2_LED
Paper level sensor 2 upper GND 2 2 4 Relay 5 B6 B6 GND
Vout 1 1 5 4 B7 B7 CAS2_QUANT1
3.3V2_LED A7 A7 A8 A7 8 1 3 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 6 3 B8 B8 3.3V2_LED MPF_WSIZE A8 A8 A7 A8 7 2 2 2 Vout MP paper width sensor
Paper level sensor 2 lower GND 2 2 7 2 B9 B9 GND GND A9 A9 A6 A9 6 3 1 1 GND
Vout 1 1 8 1 B10 B10 CAS2_QUANT2
MPF_TRAY A10 A10 A5 A10 5 4 2 2
SIZE_WS 2 2 1 6 B11 B11 CAS2_LSIZE3 GND A11 A11 A4 A11 4
Relay
5 1 1 MP tray sensor
Cassette sensor 2 GND 1 1 2 5 B12 B12 GND
LED_3.3V2 A12 A12 A3 A12 3 6 3 3 3.3V
GND A13 A13 A2 A13 2 7 2 2 GND MP paper length sensor
Paper length sensor 2
CN-3
GND
4
3
4
3
3
4
Relay 4
3
B13
B14
B13
B14
CAS2_LSIZE3
GND MPF_LSIZE A14 A14 A1 A14 1 8 1 1 Vout MP tray
CN-2 2 2 5 2 B15 B15 CAS2_LSIZE2
CN-1 1 1 6 1 B16 B16 CAS2_LSIZE1
YC8
YC6
MPFLIFT_OUT1
MPFLIFT_OUT2
1
2
1
2
12
11
1
2
2
1
Relay 1
2 MP lift motor
GND 3 3 1 5 A1 A1 GND
Registration sensor Vout 2 2 2 4 A2 A2 REGIST_SENS
3.3V 1 1 3
Relay
3 A3 A3 3.3V2 MPFLIFT_HP
GND
3
4
3
4
10
9
3
4
2
1
2
1 MP position switch
3 3 4 2 A4 A4 MIDCL N.C. 5 5 8 5
Middle clutch 2 2
N.C. 6 6 7 Relay 6
1 1 5 1 A5 A5 +24V2_F2
3.3V3 7 7 6 7 6 1 3 3 3.3V
1
2
12
11
GND
MPF_SET
8
9
8
9
5
4
8
9
5
4
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
MP paper sensor
3 10 Relay
3.3V2 10 10 3 10 3 4 3 3.3V
3.3V 3 3 4 9 A6 A6 3.3V2_LED MPF_FEED 11 11 2 11 2 5 2 Vout MP conveying sensor
Retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 5
6
8
7
A7 A7 TDRS1_SENS GND 12 12 1 12 1 6 1 GND
GND 1 1 A8 A8 GND
Relay
Retard sensor 2
3.3V
Vout
3
2
3
2
7
8
6
5
A9
A10
A9
A10
3.3V2_LED
TDRS2_SENS
Coveying cover
GND 1 1 9 4 A11 A11 GND
10 3 A12 A12 3.3V2

11 2 A13 A13 NC
Paper feed 12 1 A14 A14 GND

CASFEED_DIR
YC11
1 6 1 6 CW/CCW
and conveying
A15 A15 3.3V2
A16 A16 NC CASFEED_LD 2 5 2 5 LD
A17 A17 GND CASFEED_CLK
CASFEED_REM
3
4
4
3
3
4
4
3
CLOCK
START/STOP
Paper feed motor
Relay GND 5 2 5 2 GND
+24V2IL2 6 1 6 1 +24V
3.3V 3 3 1 15 B1 B1 3.3V2_LED
Conveying sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
14
13
B2
B3
B2
B3
GND
FEED_SENS
YC4
3.3V 3 3 4 12 B4 B4 3.3V2_LED CAS1_FEEDCL 1 1 3 3
Lift upper limit sensor 1 GND 2 2 5 11 B5 B5 GND 2 2 Paper feed clutch 1

Vout 1 1 6 10 B6 B6 LIFT1_LIMIT +24V2_F1 2 2 1 1
3.3V 3 3 7 9 B7 B7 3.3V2_LED VFEED_CL 3 3 3 3

Paper sensor 1 GND 2 2 8 Relay 8 B8 B8 GND
+24V2_F1 4 4
2
1
2
1
Vertical conveying clutch
Vout 1 1 9 7 B9 B9 CAS1_EMPTY
3.3V 3 3 10 6 B10 B10 3.3V2_LED CAS2_FEEDCL 5 5 3 3

Lift upper limit sensor 2 GND 2 2 11 5 B11 B11 GND
+24V2_F1 6 6
2
1
2
1
Paper feed clutch 2
Vout 1 1 12 4 B12 B12 LIFT2_LIMIT
3.3V 3 3 13 3 B13 B13 3.3V2_LED 2WAY_CL 7 7

Paper sensor 2 GND 2 2 14 2 B14 B14 GND
+24V2_F1 8 8 Paper feed drive
Vout 1 1 15 1 B15 B15 CAS2_EMPTY
B16 B16 EXFAN
24V 1 2 B17 B17 GND
Container fan motor GND 2
Relay
1
24V 1 2 1 2 1 2
Container cooling fan motor GND 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1 2
Relay
1
YC10
+3.3V2 5 5 1 12 1
YC9
1 3.3V2 FSRMOT_DIR 1 1 1 11 1 6 CW/CCW Fuser drive
LEDREF 4 4 2 11 2 2 REG_F_LED FSRMOT_LD 2 2 2 10 2 5 LD
ID sensor front GND 3 3 3 10 3 3 GND FSRMOT_CLK
FSRMOT_REM
3
4
3
4
3
4
9
8
3
4
4
3
CLOCK
START/STOP Fuser motor
IDS 2 2 4 9 4 4 ID_SENS_F_S
IDP 1 1 5 8 5 5 ID_SENS_F_P GND 5 5 5 7 5 2 GND
+24V2IL2_FUSE 6 6 6 6 6 1 +24V
+3.3V2 5 5 6 7 6 6 3.3V2
LEDREF 4 4 7 Relay 6 7 7 REG_R_LED
ID sensor rear GND 3 3 8 5 8 8 GND
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT2 7 7 7
Relay
5 1 3
IDS 2 2 9 4 9 9 ID_SENS_R_S
IDP 1 1 10 3 10 10 ID_SENS_R_P
FSR_RLSMOT_OUT1
2 2 Fuser release motor
8 8 8 4 3 1
COM 1 2 11 2 11 11 +24V2_F2
Cleaning solenoid ACT 2 Relay 1 12 1 12 12 ID_SOL
EXFAN_LOCK 9 9 9 3 1 3 ALM
GND
EXFAN
10
11
10
11
10
11
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
24V
Eject fan motor
3 3 13 13 REG_CL
Registration clutch
Feed drive PWB (2/3)
2 2
1 1 14 14 +24V2_F2
9-17
(4-6)Drum-developer relay PWB
YC2 YC1
YC2 YC1 YC10 YC2 YC1 SDA 1 1 8 8 SDA
+24V2_F1 1 1 +24V2_F1 ERASER2 2 1 ERASER2 N.C. 1 2 N.C. GND 2 2 7 7 SCL
ERASE1 2 2 Erase1 ERASER3 1 2 ERASER3 VIB_MOT_REM 2 1 VIB_MOT_REM SCL 3 3 6 6 GND
Cleaning lamp BK ERASE2 3 3 Erase2 24V2_F1 4 3 24V2_F1 TPC_BK/M/C/Y 3 4 TPC_BK/M/C/Y ADR1 4 4 5 5 ADR1
ERASE3 4 4 Erase3 ERASER1 3 4 ERASER1 DLP_TH or N.C. 4
Relay 3 DLP_TH or N.C. ADR0 5 5 4 4 ADR0 T/C sensor BK
EEP_SCL 6 Relay 5 EEP_SCL 3.3V2_DRMBK 5 6 3.3V2_DRMBK 3.3V2_DRMBK 6 6 3 3 3.3V2_DRMBK
EEEP_SDA 5 6 EEEP_SDA EEP_SDA 6 5 EEP_SDA TPD 7 7 2 2 TPD
3.3V2_DRMBK 8 7 3.3V2_DRMBK EEP_SCL 7 8 EEP_SCL TH_BK 8 8 1 1 TH_BK
Drum PWB BK GND 7 8 GND GND 8 7 GND
YC6 Developer PWB BK

VIB_MOT
3.3V2_DRMBK
9
10
9
10
1
2
1
2 Vibration motor
Drum unit BK Drum heater 2
1
1
2
5V0_FUSE
SCL Developer BK
YC14
Developer fan motor BK GND

24V
1
2
Relay 2
1
1
2
1 REM
2 +24V2
3 3 N.C.
Image process cooling Drum-Developer

relay PWB (2/2)
9-18
(4-7)Low voltage power supply PWB / High voltage PWB
YC2 YC3 YC1

▷ 1 1 +24V3_IL +24V4 1 1 1 1 +24V4
Conveying cover switch
㛗 2 2 +24V3
GND
GND
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
GND
GND Feed drive PWB (3/3)
+24V3_IL_F2_FET2 4 4 4 4 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2
Transfer high
voltage PWB Feed image PWB (4/6)
YC1
+24V4 1 1
+24V3 2 2
YC35 +24V3 3 3
YC1 1 1 +24V3_IL_F2_FET1 +24V2 4 4 YC6 TB1
PGND 13 13 1 13 2 2 GND +24V2 5 5 1 1 +24V2 LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
+24V2IL 12 12 2 12 GND 6 6 2 2 +24V2 㯮㯮
3 3 GND GND 7 7 3 3 +24V3 TB2 Inlet 1
4 4 GND GND 8 8 4 4 +24V3 NEUTRAL 1 1 AC_NEUTRAL
5 5 GND GND 9 9 5 5 GND ⓑ ⓑ
6 6 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 GND 10 10 6 6 GND
7 7 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 7 7 GND
8 8 +24V3_IL_F2_FET2 8 8 GND
TB3
DH_LIVE 1 1 㟷 1 CH_LIVE
YC1 YC1
Relay 5V0 1 1 YC7 LIVE_IN 1 1 㯤 2 COM➃Ꮚ Power switch
GND 2 2 1 1 +24V4 LIVE_OUT 2 2 ⓑ 3 LIVE_OUT
GND 3 3 2 2 GND NEUTRAL_IN 3 3 㯤 5 COM➃Ꮚ
YC34 GND 4 4 3 3 GND NEUTRAL_OUT 4 4 ⓑ 6 NEUTRAL_OUT
CL_CNT 11 11 3 11 1 1 CL_CNT +24V4 5 5 4 4 +24V4
T1_Y_CNT 10 10 4 10 2 2 T1_Y_CNT +24V4 6 6 5 5 +24V4
T1_C_CNT 9 9 5 9 3 3 T1_C_CNT 6 6 GND
T1_M_CNT 8 8 6 8 4 4 T1_M_CNT
T1_I_SENS 7 7 7 7 5 5 T1_I_SENS
T2_OFF__REM 6 6 8 6 6 Relay 6 T2_OFF__REM
T1_K_CNT 5 5 9 5 7 7 T1_K_CNT
SP_CNT 4 4 10 4 8 Relay 8 SP_CNT
Triac
T2_CNT 3 3 11 3 9 9 T2_CNT
T_REM 2 2 12 2 10 10 T_REM
SGND 1 1 13 1 11 11 SGND
YC2 YC2
LIVE
NEUTRAL
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
LIVE
NEUTRAL IH PWB (1/2)
YC2
PGND 1 1
PGND 2 2
+24V2IL 3 3
+24V2IL 4 4
Fuse
Engine PWB (3/7) YC4
CH_LIVE 1 1 1 1
CH_LIVE 2 2 2 2 Cassette heater
NC 3 3
NC 4 4
CH_NEUTRAL 5 5
1 2
CH_NEUTRAL 6 6
PF drawer
1 3
(for Cassette heater)
Power supply PWB (2/2)
YC5
+24V2 1 1 1
GND 2 2 2 PF drawer (PF power supply㸧
YC33
18 18 NC
17 17 NC YC8
16 16 NC 12 12 5V0
YC1 15 15 NC 11 11 GND
M_K_I_SENS 1 1 14 14 M_K_I_SENS
DISCHARGE 2 2 13 13 DISCHARGE
M_AC_CLK 3 3 12 12 M_AC_CLK
B_SLV_AC_CLK 4 4 11 11 B_SLV_AC_CLK YC42
MK_AC_AC_CNT 5 5 10 10 MK_AC_AC_CNT 5V0 1 1 10 10 5V0
B_MAG_AC_CLK 6 6 9 9 B_MAG_AC_CLK GND 2 2 9 9 GND
M_K_DC_CNT 7 7 8 8 M_K_DC_CNT 5V0 3 3 8 8 5V0
B_K_SLV_DC_CNT 8 8 7 7 B_K_SLV_DC_CNT GND 4 4 7 7 GND
BK_SLV_AC_CNT 9 9 6 6 BK_SLV_AC_CNT 5V0 5 5 6 6 5V0
B_K_MAG_DC_CNT 10 10 5 5 B_K_MAG_DC_CNT GND 6 6 5 5 GND
B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 11 11 4 4 B_K_MAG_AC_CNT 5V0 7 7 4 4 5V0
HV_REM 12 12 3 3 HV_REM GND 8 8 3 3 GND
SGND 13 13 2 2 SGND 5V0 9 9 2 2 5V0
1 1 NC GND 10 10 1 1 GND
Main high Main

࣓࢖ࣥᇶᯈ (1/3)
PWB (1/3)
voltage PWB
9-19
(4-8)Fuser PWB
YC2
3.3V2_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor F
Fuser PWB FSR_ROLL_F 3 3 1 1 Vout
3.3V2_LED 4 4 3 3 3.3V
YC22 YC1
GND 5 5 2 2 GND Fuser sensor
FSR_JAM_SENS 6 6 1 1 Vout
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
FUSER_SDA 2
FUSER_SCL 3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
EEP_SDA
EEP_SCL
FSR_TH_EDGE
GND
7
8
7
8
2
1
1
2 Thermistor 3 (Edge)
+3.3V2 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.3V2
FSR_TH_PRESS 5 5 5 5 5 5 FSR_TH_PRESS 3.3V2_LED 9 9 3 1 3 3 3.3V
FSR_PRESS_SENS 6 6 6 6 6 6 FSR_PRESS_SENS GND 10 10 2 2 2 2 GND Fuser release sensor
FSR_TH_EDGE 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSR_TH_EDGE FSR_PRESS_SENS 11 11 1 3 1 1 Vout
FSR_JAM_SENS 8 8 8 8 8 8 FSR_JAM_SENS
FSR_ROLL_F_SENS 9 9 9 9 9 9 FSR_ROLL_F FSR_TH_PRESS 12 12 2 1
10 10 10 10 NC GND 13 13 1 2 Thermistor 4 (Press roller)
11 11
+3.3V2_TH_CUT 10 10 12 12 3 1
+3.3V2 11 11 13 Relay 13
2
1
Relay 2
3
Thermostat
GND
FSR_TH_MIDDLE
12
13
12
13
14
15
14
15
2
1
Relay
1
2 Thermistor 1 (Middle)
3.3V2_LED 14 14 16 16 3 3 3.3V
GND 15 15 17 17 2 2 GND Belt rotation sensor R
FSR_ROLL_R_SENS 16 16 18 18 1 1 Vout
GND
FSR_TH_CENTRAL
17
18
17
18
19
20
19
20
2
1 Relay
1
2 Thermistor 2 (Center)
Feed image PWB (5/6) Fuser unit
Fuser IH coil
YC2
VS 1 1
YC3
COIL_COM 1 1
FSR1
Discharge brush 1 1 1 CHARGE
Fuser high voltage

IH PWB (2/2) FUSER ZENER PWB (2/2)
YC4 YC29
GND 7 7 1 1 GND
3.3V2_FUSE 6 6 2 2 3.3V2_FUSE
IH_IGBT_CLK_HIGH 5 5 3 3 IH_IGBT_CLK_HI
IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW 4 4 4 4 IH_IGBT_CLK_LOW
IH_ERROR 3 3 5 5 IH_ERROR
IH_TXD
IH_RXD
2
1
2
1
6
7
6
7
IH_TXD
IH_RXD Engine PWB (4/7)
YC5
GND 3 3 8 8 GND
IH_RELAY 2 2 9 9 IH_RELAY
+24V2 1 1 10 10 +24V2
9-20
(4-9)Operation panel main PWB / Main PWB
YC43
YC9 YC63 1 1 24V4
1 1 VGH GND 13 13 2 2 GND
2 2 VDD YC8 YC6 DP_WAKEUP_REQ 12 12 3 3 DP_WAKEUP_REQ
3 3 VGL GND 1 1 1 1 GND HLD_SCN_N(E_M) 11 11 4 4 HLD_SCN_N(E_M)
4 4 VCOM LCD_OFF 2 2 2 2 LCD_OFF ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M) 10 10 5 5 ENG_POWOFF_N(E_M)
5 5 VCOM LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN E2C_SDIR(E_M) 9 9 6 6 E2C_SDIR(E_M)
6 6 AGND GND 4 4 4 4 GND E2C_IR(E_M) 8 8 7 7 E2C_IR(E_M)
7 7 AVDD TX0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N E2C_SBSY(E_M) 7 7 8 8 E2C_SBSY(E_M)
8 8 GND TX0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P C2E_SCLK(M_E) 6 6 9 9 C2E_SCLK(M_E)
9 9 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND C2E_SDAT(E_M) 5 5 10 10 C2E_SDAT(E_M)
10 10 V1 E2C_SDAT(E_M) 4 4 11 11 E2C_SDAT(E_M)
11 11 V2 HLD_ENG_N(M_E) 3 3 12 12 HLD_ENG_N(M_E)
12 12 V3 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E) 2 2 13 13 ENG_WAKEUP_REQ(M_E)
13 13 V4 JS_LED_REM 1 1 14 14 JS_LED_REM
14 14 V5 YC12
15
16
15
16
V6
V7 Power switch 2
1 Relay
2
1
B1
B2
B1 POWER_ON
B2 GND
17 17 HSD YC43 YC35
18 18 GND_LVDS GND 60 60 1 1 GND
19 19 RxIN3+ YC5 OS_SAD4P 59 59 2 2 OS_SAD4P
20 20 RxIN3- NC B15 B15 OS_SAD4N 58 58 3 3 OS_SAD4N
21 21 GND GND B14 B14 GND 57 57 4 4 GND
22 22 RxIN2+ JOB_LED B13 B13 B3 B3 JOB_LED OS_SACKP 56 56 5 5 OS_SACKP
23 23 RxIN2- GND B12 B12 B4 B4 GND OS_SACKN 55 55 6 6 OS_SACKN
24 24 GND GND B11 B11 B5 B5 GND GND 54 54 7 7 GND
25 25 RxIN1+ GND B10 B10 B6 B6 GND OS_SAD3P 53 53 8 8 OS_SAD3P
26 26 RxIN1- BEEP_POWERON B9 B9 B7 B7 BEEP_POWERON OS_SAD3N 52 52 9 9 OS_SAD3N
LCD 27
28
27
28
GND
RxIN0+
LED_MEMORY
LED_ATTENTION
B8
B7
B8
B7
B8
B9
B8
B9
LED_MEMORY
LED_ATTENTION
GND
OS_SAD2P
51
50
51
50
10
11
10
11
GND
OS_SAD2P
29 29 RxIN0- LED_PROCESSING B6 B6 B10 B10 LED_PROCESSING OS_SAD2N 49 49 12 12 OS_SAD2N
30 30 GND AUDIO B5 B5 B11 B11 AUDIO GND 48 48 13 13 GND
31 31 RxINCK+ PNL_WKUP_REQ B4 B4 B12 B12 PNL_WKUP_REQ OS_SAD1P 47 47 14 14 OS_SAD1P
32 32 RxINCK- INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY B3 B3 B13 B13 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY OS_SAD1N 46 46 15 15 OS_SAD1N
33 33 GND NIRQ B2 B2 B14 B14 NIRQ GND 45 45 16 16 GND
34 34 VDD_LVDS I2C_SDA_NFC B1 B1 B15 B15 I2C_SDA_NFC SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P 44 44 17 17 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_P
35 35 V8 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N 43 43 18 18 SAT_2_HSYNC_A_N
36 36 V9 Relay Relay SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P 42 42 19 19 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_P
37 37 V10 I2C_SCL_NFC A15 A15 A1 A1 PNL_WKUP_REQ SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N 41 41 20 20 SAT_2_HSYNC_B_N
38 38 V11 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY A14 A14 A2 A2 INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P 40 40 21 21 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_P
39 39 V12 FPRST A13 A13 A3 A3 FPRST SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N 39 39 22 22 SAT_2_HSYNC_C_N
40 40 V13 P2C_SDAT A12 A12 A4 A4 P2C_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P 38 38 23 23 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_P
41 41 V14 C2P_SDAT A11 A11 A5 A5 C2P_SDAT SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N 37 37 24 24 SAT_2_HSYNC_D_N
42 42 AGND P2C_SDIR A10 A10 A6 A6 P2C_SDIR SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P 36 36 25 25 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_P
43 43 AVDD P2C_SBSY A9 A9 A7 A7 P2C_SBSY SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N 35 35 26 26 SAT_2_VSYNC_A_N
44 44 VDD C2P_SCK A8 A8 A8 A8 C2P_SCK SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P 34 34 27 27 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_P
45 45 MODE DISPLAY_POWERON A7 A7 A9 A9 DISPLAY_POWERON SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N 33 33 28 28 SAT_2_VSYNC_B_N
46 46 GBR INT_ANYKEY A6 A6 A10 A10 INT_ANYKEY SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P 32 32 29 29 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_P
47 47 SHLR GND A5 A5 A11 A11 GND SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N 31 31 30 30 SAT_2_VSYNC_C_N
48 48 UPDN +5.0V6 A4 A4 A12 A12 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P 30 30 31 31 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_P
49 49 COM +5.0V6 A3 A3 A13 A13 +5.0V6 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N 29 29 32 32 SAT_2_VSYNC_D_N
50 50 COM +5.0V6 A2 A2 A14 A14 +5.0V6 GND 28 28 33 33 GND
+5.0V6 A1 A1 A15 A15 +5.0V6 SAR_2_VCLK1_P 27 27 34 34 SAR_2_VCLK1_P
SAR_2_VCLK1_N 26 26 35 35 SAR_2_VCLK1_N
GND 25 25 36 36 GND
YC6 YC4
SAR_2_CH13_P 24 24 37 37 SAR_2_CH13_P
Backlight
1 1 LED_A SPEAKER_N 2 2 1 2 -
2 2 LED_C SPEAKER_P 1 1 2
Relay
1 㸩 Speaker SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
23
22
23
22
38
39
38
39
SAR_2_CH13_N
GND
SAR_2_CH12_P 21 21 40 40 SAR_2_CH12_P
SAR_2_CH12_N 20 20 41 41 SAR_2_CH12_N
GND 19 19 42 42 GND
YC7
SAR_2_CH11_P 18 18 43 43 SAR_2_CH11_P
TOP 1 1 YN_Bottom SAR_2_CH11_N 17 17 44 44 SAR_2_CH11_N
Touch panel LEFT
BOTTOM
2
3
2
3
XN_Left
YP_Top
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
16
15
16
15
45
46
45
46
GND
SAR_2_VCLK2_P
RIGHT 4 4 XP_Right SAR_2_VCLK2_N 14 14 47 47 SAR_2_VCLK2_N
GND 13 13 48 48 GND
SAR_2_CH23_P 12 12 49 49 SAR_2_CH23_P
SAR_2_CH23_N 11 11 50 50 SAR_2_CH23_N
GND 10 10 51 51 GND
Operation panel sub PWB SAR_2_CH22_P

SAR_2_CH22_N
9
8
9
8
52
53
52
53
SAR_2_CH22_P
SAR_2_CH22_N
GND 7 7 54 54 GND
YC1 YC3
SAR_2_CH21_P 6 6 55 55 SAR_2_CH21_P
+5V6 1 1 1 1 +5V6 SAR_2_CH21_N 5 5 56 56 SAR_2_CH21_N
LED0 2 2 2 2 LED0 GND 4 4 57 57 GND
LED1 3 3 3 3 LED1 GND 3 3 58 58 GND
LED2 4 4 4 4 LED2 AC_DETECT 2 2 59 59 AC_DETECT
NC 5 5 5 5 NC GND 1 1 60 60 GND
INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N 6 6 6 6 INT_ENERGYSAVERKEY_N
ENERGYSAVERLED 7 7 7 7 ENERGYSAVERLED
ATTENTION
MEMORY
8
9
8
9
8
9
8
9
ATTENTION
MEMORY Engine PWB (5/7)
PROMISSING
JOB_LED
10
11
10
11
10
11
10
11
PROMISSING
JOB_LED Main PWB (2/3)
SCAN0 12 12 12 12 SCAN0
SCAN1 13 13 13 13 SCAN1
SCAN2 14 14 14 14 SCAN2 YC5 YC60 YC56
SCAN3 15 15 15 15 SCAN3 +5V7 1 6 1 1 +5V7 3.3V0 1
KEY0 16 16 16 16 KEY0 +5V7 2 5 2 2 +5V7 DBTXD 2
KEY1 17 17 17 17 KEY1 +5V7 3 4 3 3 +5V7 DBRXD 3
KEY2 18 18 18 18 KEY2 GND 4 3 4 4 GND DBCLK 4
KEY3 19 19 19 19 KEY3 GND 5 2 5 5 GND GND 5
GND 20 20 20 20 GND GND 6 1 6 6 GND
YC3 YC59
YC1 YC11 VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS
VDDDX 5 5 1 1 VDDDX DATA- 2 2 2 2 DATA-
GND 4 4 2 2 GND DATA+ 3 3 3 3 DATA+ YC23
NFC PWB CLK 3 3 3 3 CLK ID 4 4 4 4 ID SPEED CONTROL 1 3 1 3 ALM
DATA
NIRQ
2
1
2
1
4
5
4
5
DATA
NIRQ
GND 5 5 5 5 GND GND
5V2
2
3
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
GND
5V
Controller fan motor
USB hub PWB

Operation panel main PWB
(1/2)
Controller box
YC1 YC10
KEY0 10 10 1 10 1 1 KEY0
KEY1 9 9 2 9 2 2 KEY1
Numeric Keypad
KEY2 8 8 3 8 3 3 KEY2
KEY3 7 7 4 7 4 4 KEY3
SCAN4 6 6 5 6 5 5 SCAN4
(option) SCAN5
SCAN6
5
4
5
4
6
7
Relay
5
4
6
7
6
7
SCAN5
SCAN6
SCAN7 3 3 8 3 8 8 SCAN7
10key_detect 2 2 9 2 9 9 10key_detect
GND 1 1 10 1 10 10 GND
Operation unit
9-21
(5) Wiring diagram (Options connection)
(5-1)Paper feeder connection
YC38 YC1
TEMP B11
GND B10
B11
B10
1
2
11
10
1
2
4
3
TEMP
GND
Temperature/humidity sensor
HUMID_OUT B9
HUMID_CLK B8
B9
B8
3
4
9
8
3
4
2
1
HUMID_OUT
HUMID_CLK
(outside machine㸧
LVU_PWB_FAN_REM B7 B7 5 7 1 1 24V
GND
LVU_PWB_FAN_ALM
B6
B5
B6
B5
6
7 Relay
6
5
2
3
Relay 2
3
GND
ALM
Power supply fan motor
SUB_CLK B4 B4 8 4
SUB_SDA B3 B3 9 3
GND B2 B2 10 2
3.3V0 B1 B1 11 1
1 1
2 2
Relay 3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
PF_VER_SENS A11 A11 1 11 10 10 1 PF_VER_SENS
3.3V3_FUSE A10 A10 2 10 11 11 2 3.3V3_FUSE
GND A9 A9 3 9 12 12 3 GND
PF_SEL1 A8 A8 4 8 13 13 4 PF_SEL1
PF_SEL2 A7 A7 5 7 14 Relay 14 5 PF_SEL2
PF_CLK A6 A6 6 Relay 6 15 15 6 PF_CLK
PF_RDY A5 A5 16 16 7 PF_RDY
PF_SDI A4 A4 8 4 17 17 8 PF_SDO
PF_SDO A3 A3 9 3 18 18 9 PF_SDI
PF main PWB
PF_PAUSE A2 A2 10 2 19 19 10 PF_PAUSE
PF_CAS_OPEN A1 A1 11 1 20 20 11 PF_CAS_OPEN
1 1 1 +24V2 4 4 1 +24V2
LVU YC5 2 2 2 GND 5 5 2 GND
Engine PWB (6/7)

3 3
2 AC_LIVE 1 1 AC_LIVE
LVU YC4 PF detection switch

6 AC_NEUTRAL 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
PF detection switch
PF interlock switch
9-22
(5-2)Conveying unit / Document finisher connection
YC3
3.3V 3 3 1 1 +3.3V3
BR job separator sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
JS_SENS_AK
BR main PWB
3.3V 3 3 4 4 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
5
6
5
6
GND
BRG_JAM1
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V2
BR conveying sensor 2 GND 2 2 8 8 GND
Vout 1 1 9 9 BRG_JAM2
2 2 10 10 GND YC3 YC30

BR cover open/close switch 1 1 11 11 BRG_OPEN +3.3V3 13 13 1 1 20 20 +3.3V3
JS_SENS_AK 12 12 2 2 19 19 JS_SENS_AK
BRG_MOT_PD 11 11 3 3 18 18 BRG_MOT_PD
BRG_MOT_FAN_REM 10 10 4 4 17 17 BRG_MOT_FAN_REM
BRG_MOT_CLK 9 9 5 5 16 16 BRG_MOT_CLK
YC1 BRG_SET 8 8 6 6 15 15 BRG_SET
A/ 1 4 1 1 BRG_MOT_1B BRG_FEED_SENS1 7 7 7 7 14 14 BRG_FEED_SENS1
BR conveying motor A
B/
2
3
3
2
2
3
2
3
BRG_MOT_1A
BRG_MOT_2B
BRG_FEED_SENS2
BRG_OPEN
6
5
6
5
8
9
8
9
13
12
13 BRG_FEED_SENS2
12 BRG_OPEN
B 4 1 4 4 BRG_MOT_2A GND 4 4 10 10 11 11 GND
GND 3 3 11 11 10 10 GND
+3.3V2 2 2 12 12 9 9 +3.3V2
+24V2 1 1 13 13 8 8 +24V2
2 5 5 FAN_REM
BR fan motor 1 6 6 +24V2
Relay
A1 A1 14 14 7 7 DF_CLK(ENG to DF)
15 15 6 6 DF_DET(DF to ENG)
16 16 5 5 DF_SYNC(DF to ENG)
7 1 7 1 1 17 17 4 4 DF_SDI(DF to ENG)
6 2 6 2 2 A2 A2 18 18 3 3 DF_SDO(ENG to DF)
5 3 5 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 A3 A3 19 19 2 2 DF_SEL(ENG to DF)
Relay A4 A4
3 5 3 5 5 A5 A5 20 20 1 1 DF_RDY(DF to ENG)
2 6 2 6 6 A6 A6
1 7 1 7 7 A7 A7
YC25
DF main PWB 4 4 4
1
2
Relay
1
2
A8
A9
A8
A9
5
4
5
4
1
2
1
2
+24V2
+24V2
3 3 3 A10 A10 3 3
B1 B1 2 2 3 3 GND
1K/4K B2
B3
B2
B3
1 1 4 4 GND
B4 B4
B5 B5
B6 B6
3 3
B7
B8
B7
B8
2 2 2 4 4 B9 B9
1 1 1 B10 B10
Bridge unit (AK)
Document finisher
9-23
(5-3)Other Options connection
YC22
1 GND YC23
2 DC1_SET
+5V0_FUSE A1
3 DC1_COUNT
4 +24V2
+5V0_FUSE A2
+5V0_FUSE A3 USB hub PWB (2/2)
+5V0_FUSE A4
+5V0_FUSE A5
+5V0_FUSE A6 YC1
+5V0_FUSE A7
+5V0_FUSE A8 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
MK2_ENBL A9
+24V2 A10 DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA + IC CARD
MK2_RKEY7 B1 GND 4 4 4 GND
YC21 MK2_RKEY6 B2
1 1 1 1 +24V2 MK2_RKEY5 B3
2 2 2 2 SGND MK2_RKEY4 B4
3 3 3 3 SGND MK2_RKEY3 B5
4 4 4 4 MCV_ENBL MK2_RKEY2 B6
MK2_RKEY1 B7
Coin vendor 5
6
5
6
5
6
5
6
FGND
MCV_FED_COUNT MK2_RKEY0 B8
YC2
7 Reley 7 7 7 MCV_EJ_COUNT GND B9 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS

㸦option㸧 8 8 8 8 MCV_COPY_SIG MK2_COUNT B10 DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
KEY BOARD
DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA +
9 9 9 9 MCV_UART_TXD
GND 4 4 4 GND
10 10 10 10 SGND
11 11 11 11 MCV_UART_RXD
12 12 12 12 SGND
Standard in some markets and some models YC4

VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
DATA- 2 2 2 DATA -
DATA+ 3 3 3 DATA + USB memory
Engine PWB (7/7) GND 4 4 4 GND
YC4 YC4
GND 1 1 41 41 GND
SAR_1_CH23_N 2 2 40 40 SAR_1_CH23_N
SAR_1_CH23_P 3 3 39 39 SAR_1_CH23_P
GND 4 4 38 38 GND
SAR_1_CH22_N 5 5 37 37 SAR_1_CH22_N
SAR_1_CH22_P 6 6 36 36 SAR_1_CH22_P
GND 7 7 35 35 GND
SAR_1_CH21_N 8 8 34 34 SAR_1_CH21_N
SAR_1_CH21_P 9 9 33 33 SAR_1_CH21_P
GND 10 10 32 32 GND
SAR_1_VCLK2_N 11 11 31 31 SAR_1_VCLK2_N YC58 YC2
SAR_1_VCLK2_P 12 12 30 30 SAR_1_VCLK2_P 20 USB_- GND 1 1 1 1 GND
GND 13 13 29 29 GND 19 USB_+ TXP 2 2 2 2 A+
SAR_1_CH13_N 14 14 28 28 SAR_1_CH13_N 18 DETECT TXN 3 3 3 3 A-
SAR_1_CH13_P 15 15 27 27 SAR_1_CH13_P 17 RESET GND 4 4 4 4 GND
GND 16 16 26 26 GND 16 GND RXN 5 5 5 5 B-
SAR_1_CH12_N 17 17 25 25 SAR_1_CH12_N 15 HOSTWAKE RXP 6 6 6 6 B+
SAR_1_CH12_P 18 18 24 24 SAR_1_CH12_P 14 GND GND 7 7 7 7 GND
GND 19 19 23 23 GND 13 PAVDO
SAR_1_CH11_N 20 20 22 22 SAR_1_CH11_N 12 GND
SAR_1_CH11_P
GND
21
22
21
22
21
20
21
20
SAR_1_CH11_P
GND WiFi PWB 11
10
VBAT
VIO
SAR_1_VCLK1_N
SAR_1_VCLK1_P
23
24
23
24
19
18
19
18
SAR_1_VCLK1_N
SAR_1_VCLK1_P
9
8
GND
SD_D0
1
2
1
2
3.3V
3.3V KUIO relay PWB
GND 25 25 17 17 GND 7 SD_D1 3 3 3.3V
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 26 26 16 16 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_P 6 GND 4 4 GND YC2
SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 27 27 15 15 SAT_1_VSYNC_D_N 5 SD_CLK 5 5 GND VBUS1 20 20 VBUS
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 28 28 14 14 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_P 4 GND YC32 6 6 GND USB_DN1 19 19 USB_DN
SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 29 29 13 13 SAT_1_VSYNC_C_N 3 SD_CMD GND 3 3 7 7 5V USB_DP1 18 18 USB_DP
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 30 30 12 12 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_P 2 SD_D2 +5V_HDD 2 2 8 8 5V GND 17 17 GND
SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 31 31 11 11 SAT_1_VSYNC_B_N 1 SD_D3 GND 1 1 9 9 5V NC 16 16 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 32 32 10 10 SAT_1_VSYNC_A_P 10 10 GND NC 15 15 NC
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
33
34
33
34
9
8
9
8
SAT_1_VSYNC_A_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_P
Standard in some 11
12
11
12
ACT
GND
GND
NC
14
13
14
13
GND
NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N 35 35 7 7 SAT_1_HSYNC_D_N markets and some 13 13 12V NC 12 12 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 36 36 6 6 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_P 14 14 12V GND 11 11 GND
SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N 37 37 5 5 SAT_1_HSYNC_C_N models 15 15 12V NC 10 10 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P 38 38 4 4 SAT_1_HSYNC_B_P Main PWB (3/3) NC 9 9 NC
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P
39
40
39
40
3
2
3
2
SAT_1_HSYNC_B_N
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_P HDD NC
AUDIO1
8
7
8
7
NC
AUDIO
SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N 41 41 1 1 SAT_1_HSYNC_A_N
(Optional in some markets WAKEUP
GND
6
5
6
5
WAKEUP
GND
VDD5_CUT1 4 4 VDD5_CUT
YC2 YC33
and some models㸧 RESETN1 3 3 RESETN
GND 2 2 GND
+5V 1 1 10 10 5V VDD5 1 1 VDD5
+5V 2 2 9 9 5V
GND 3 3 8 8 SGND
GND 4 4 7 7 SGND
YC8 YC3
KUIO PWB
SDI 5 5 6 6 SDI
SDICLK 6 6 5 5 SDICLK VBUS1 1 1 1 1 VBUS1
GND 7 7 4 4 SGND USB_DN1 2 2 2 2 USB_DN1
SDO 8 8 3 3 SDO USB_DP1 3 3 3 3 USB_DP1
SDOCLK 9 9 2 2 SDOCLK GND 4 4 4 4 GND YC1
GND 10 10 1 1 SGND AUDIO1 5 5 5 5 AUDIO1 VBUS0 20 20 VBUS
N.C. 11 11 WAKEUP1 6 6 6 6 WAKEUP1 USB_DN0 19 19 USB_DN
RESET1 7 7 7 7 RESET1 USB_DP0 18 18 USB_DP
GND 8 8 8 8 GND GND 17 17 GND
YC5 VBUS0 9 9 9 9 VBUS0 NC 16 16 NC
1 16 LockPin(2) USB_DN0 10 10 10 10 USB_DN0 NC 15 15 NC
FIERY relay PWB 2

3
15
14
LockPin(1)
GRLED_K2
USB_DP0
GND
11
12
11
12
11
12
11
12
USB_DP0
GND
GND
NC
14
13
14
13
GND
NC
4 13 GRLED_A2 AUDIO0 13 13 13 13 AUDIO0 NC 12 12 NC
5 12 GRLED_K1 WAKEUP0 14 14 14 14 WAKEUP0 GND 11 11 GND
6 11 GRLED_A1 RESET 15 15 15 15 RESET0 NC 10 10 NC
YC3 7 10 TD4- NC 9 9 NC
CH1_RX0N 1 1 8 9 TD4+ NC 8 8 NC
CH1_RX0P 2 2 9 8 TD3- AUDIO0 7 7 AUDIO
GND 3 3 10 7 TD3+ YC9 YC4 WAKEUP0 6 6 WAKEUP
N.C. 4 4 11 6 CT2 GND 1 6 1 6 GND GND 5 5 GND
N.C. 5 5 Fiery (KDA/KDE) 12 5 CT1 5V_CUT0 2 5 2 5 5V_CUT0 VDD5_CUT0 4 4 VDD5_CUT
MFP_READYN 6 6 13 4 TD2- GND 3 4 3 4 GND RESETN0 3 3 RESETN
FIERY_READYN 7 7 14 3 TD2+ 5V 4 3 4 3 5V GND 2 2 GND
N.C. 8 8 15 2 TD1- GND 5 2 5 2 GND VDD5 1 1 VDD5
POWER_CONTROLLN 9 9 16 1 TD1+ 5V_CUT1 6 1 6 1 5V_CUT1
N.C. 10 10
GND 11 11
N.C. 12 12
N.C. 13 13
CH1_LOCKN 14 14
GND 15 15
CH1_HTPDN
RESERVE_INN
16
17
16
17
FIERY control PWB
RESERVE_OUTN 18 18
GND 19 19
N.C. 20 20
N.C. 21 21
GND 22 22
UART_TXD_EFI 23 23
UART_RXD_EFI 24 24
9-24
(6) Wiring diagram (Options)
(6-1)Document processor (DP-7100) wiring diagram
YC3 YC6
14 3 1 1 ENG_TMG 3.3V_LED 1 1 3 3 3.3V
12
2
5
15
2
3
2
3
ENG_RDY
ENG_SEL
GND
LNG_SW
2
3
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP original length sensor
16 1 4 4 ENG_CLK
15 2 5 5 ENG_SI 3.3V 4 4 3 3 3.3V
1
13
16
4
6
7
6
7
ENG_SO
DP_OPEN
HSIZE
GND
5
6
5
6
2
1
2
1
Vout
GND
DP original width sensor
Engine PWB
11 6 8 8 EN_FD_SW
10 Relay 7 9 9 EN_SET_SW
9 8 10 10 3.3V3
8 9 11 11 GND
7 10 12 12 GND
6
5
11
12
13
14
13
14
GND
24V
DP main PWB
4 13 15 15 24V
3 14 16 16 24V
YC9
FMOT_CH_A 1 1 1 1 CH_A
FMOT_CH_B 2 2 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 3 3 3.3V
FMOT_DIR 4 4 4 4 DIR
FMOT_PWM 5 5 5 5 PWM DP paper feed motor
FMOT_BRAKE 6 6 6 6 BRAKE
GND 7 7 7 7 GND
R24V 8 8 8 8 24V
YC7
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED CMOT_CH_A 9 9 1 1 CH_A
DP registration sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
RGST_SW
CMOT_CH_B
3.3V
10
11
10
11
2
3
2
3
CH_B
3.3V
CMOT_DIR 12 12 4 4 DIR
GND 3 3 4 4 GND CMOT_PWM 13 13 5 5 PWM DP conveying motor
DP CCD sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
5
6
5
6
CCD_TMG_SW
3.3V
CMOT_BRAKE
GND
14
15
14
15
6
7
6
7
BRAKE
GND
R24V 16 16 8 8 24V
3.3V 3 3 7 7 3.3V_LED
DP open/close sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
8
9
GND
DP_OPEN
3.3V 3 3 10 10 3.3V_LED
DP lift lower limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
11
12
11
12
GND
LF_DNSW
YC11
LIFT_A1 1 1 4 1 A
LIFT_B1 2 2 3 2 B
LIFT_A3 3 3 2 3 A/ DP lift motor
LIFT_B3 4 4 1 4 B/
RMOT_CH_A 5 5 1 1 CH_A
YC17 RMOT_CH_B 6 6 2 2 CH_B
3.3V 3 3 1 1 3.3V_LED 3.3V 7 7 3 3 3.3V
DP eject sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
GND
EXIT_SW
RMOT_DIR
RMOT_PWM
8
9
8
9
4
5
4
5
DIR
PWM DP switchback motor
RMOT_BRAKE 10 10 6 6 BRAKE
GND 11 11 7 7 GND
R24V 12 12 8 8 24V
YC8
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP original detection sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
SET_SW
3.3V YC16
LED_REM 1 1 12 1 1 1 LED_REM
24V 2 2 11 2 2 2 24V DP LED PWB
3.3V_LED 3 3 10 3 3 3 3.3V
GND
SFT_HP_SW
4
5
4
5
9
8
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP feedshift sensor
3.3V_LED 6 6 7 6 3 3 3.3V
Relay
YC4
GND
LF_UP_SW
7
8
7
8
6
5
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
DP lift upper limit sensor
GND 3 3 1 1 GND
DP paper feed sensor Vout
3.3V
2
1
2
1
2
3
2
3
FD_SW
3.3V SFT_A1
YC10
1 1 4 9 4 1 A
4 4 NC SFT_B1 2 2 3 10 3 2 B
SFT_A3 3 3 2 11 2 3 A/ DP feedshift motor
SFT_B3 4 4 1 12 1 4 B/
YC5
1 1 1 1 24V
DP top cover switch 2 2
2
3
2 GND
3 R24V
㸦Interlock switch㸧
9-25
(6-2)Document processor (DP-7110) wiring diagram
Y C 1ࠉ
14 3 1 1 ENG_TMG Y C 10ࠉ YC 1 YC 2
12 5 2 2 ENG_RDY CIS_TMG_SW 1 1 14 14 CIS_TMG_SW GND A1 1 1 A1 GND
2 15 3 3 ENG_SEL SHD_CLK 2 2 13 13 CPU_SCLK CK1 A2 2 2 A2 CK
16 1 4 4 ENG_CLK SHD_SO 3 3 12 12 CPU_SI GND A3 3 3 A3 GND
15 2 5 5 ENG_SI SHD_SEL 4 4 11 11 CPU_SEL ST1 A4 4 4 A4 SP
1 16 6 6 ENG_SO SHD_PAGEST 5 5 10 10 CPU_PAGEST GND A5 5 5 A5 GND
13 4 7 7 DP_OPEN RESETN 6 6 9 9 RESETN MODE A6 6 6 A6 MODE
Relay 6 8 EN_FD_SW SHD_OVMON 7 7 8 CPU_OVM
Engine PWB 11
10 7
8
9 9 EN_SET_SW SHD_SI 8 8
8
7 7 CPU_SO
GND
VREF
A7 7 7 A7 GND
VREF
A8 8 8 A8
9 8 10 10 3.3V3 SHD_RDY 9 9 6 6 CPU_SRDY GND A9 9 9 A9 GND
8 9 11 11 GND NC 10 10 5 5 NC GND A10 10 10 A10 GND
7 10 12 12 GND 24V 11 11 4 4 24V GND A11 11 11 A11 GND
6 11 13 13 GND 24V 12 12 3 3 24V LED4R_C A12 12 12 A12 LED4_R
5 12 14 14 24V GND 13 13 2 2 GND LED4G_C A13 13 13 A13 LED4_G
4 13 15 15 24V GND 14 14 1 1 GND LED4B_C A14 14 14 A14 LED4_B
3 14 16 16 24V LED4_A A15 15 15 A15 VLED4
LED1_A A16 16 16 A16 VLED1
DP main PWB LED1R_C A17 17 17 A17 LED1_R
YC 4 YC 2 YC 3 LED1G_C A18 18 18 A18 LED1_G
Y C 2ࠉ GND 1
ANODE 3 3 A1 A1 ANODE 1 1 1 GND LED1B_C A19 19 19 A19 LED1_B
DP lift upper limit 3.3V 1 1 4 4 3.3V HTPDN 2
GND 2 2 2 HTPDN LED2R_C A20 20 20 A20 LED2_R
2 2 A2 A2 GND GND 2 2 3 3 GND DP original length
sensor LF_UPSW 1 1 A3 A3 LF_UPSW
LOCKN 3 3 3 3 LOCKN LED2G_C A21 21 21 A21 LED2_G
A4 A4 GND
LNG_SW 3
LNG_CLK 4
3
4
2
1
2
1
LNG_SW
LNG_CLK
sensor DP IF PWB GND 4 4 4 4 GND LED2B_C A22 22 22 A22 LED2_B
Rx0N 5 5 5 5 TX0N LED2_A A23 23 23 A23 VLED2
GND 3 3 A5 A5 FD_SW
DP paper feed FD_SW A6 A6 3.3V
Rx0P 6 6 6 6 TX0P LED3_A A24 24 24 A24 VLED3
2 2 GND 7
sensor 7 7 7 GND LED3R_C A25 25 25 A25 LED3_R
3.3V 1 1 A7 A7 GND GND 5 5 3 3 GND
A8 A8 RGST_SW(V) SET_SW 6 6 2 2 SET_SW DP original LED3G_C A26 26 26 A26 LED3_G
LED3B_C A27 27 27 A27 LED3_B
A9 A9 3.3V 3.3V 7 7 1 1 3.3V detection sensor GND GND
ANODE 3 3 1 9 A10 A10 ANODE A28 28 28 A28
GND A29 29 29 A29 GND
DP eject sensor GND 2 2 2 Relay 8 A11 A11 GND
GND GND
EXIT_SW(M) 1 1 3 7 A12 A12 EXIT_SW(M) ANODE 8 8 3 3 ANODE A30 30 30 A30
A13 A13 NC GND 9 9 2 2 GND DP lift lower limit GND A31 31 31 A31 GND
LF_DNSW 10 10 1 1 LF_DNSW sensor GND A32 32 32 A32 GND
GND A33 33 33 A33 GND
YC 4 GND A34 34 34 A34 GND
B1 B1 NC
3.3V 1 1 3 3 3.3V GND A35 35 35 A35 GND
LED_PW 2 2 1 2 B2 B2 LED_PW WIDE3 11 11 4 4 WIDE3
LED PWB Relay DP CIS sensor CIS_TMG_SW 2 2 2 2 CIS_TMG_SW GND A36 36 36 A36 GND
LED_REM 1 1 2 1 B3 B3 LED_REM WIDE2 12 12 3 3 WIDE2 DP original width GND 3 3 1 1 GND 3.3V_CIS A37 37 37 A37 3.3V
B4 B4 GND GND 13 13 2 2 GND
WIDE1 14 14
sensor 3.3V_CIS A38 38 38 A38 3.3V
1 1 WIDE1
3.3V_CIS A39 39 39 A39 3.3V
GND 3 3 4 6 B5 B5 GND
GND A40 40 40 A40 GND
DP CCD sensor CCD_TMG_SW 2 2 5 Relay 5 B6 B6 CCD_TMG_SW
GND B1 41 41 B1 GND
3.3V 1 1 6 4 B7 B7 3.3V
GND B2 42 42 B2 GND
YC 5 2 2 NC OS_1 B3 43 43 B3 OS1
ANODE 3 3 7 3 B8 B8 ANODE
DP open/close FEED3_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ GND B4 44 44 B4 GND
GND 2 2 8 Relay 2 B9 B9 GND FEED1_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B OS2 OS2
sensor DP_OPEN 1 1 9 1 B10 B10 DP_OPEN FEED2_OUT1A 3 A
DP paper feed motor B5 45 45 B5
3 1 1 GND B6 46 46 B6 GND
B11 B11 ANODE FEED4_OUT1B 4 A/
4 3 3 OS3 B7 47 47 B7 OS3
B12 B12 GND NC
5 5 GND B8 48 48 B8 GND
B13 B13 SKEW_SW
OS4 B9 49 49 B9 OS4
Y C 3ࠉ GND B10 50 50 B10 GND
1 GND 2 2 NC OS5 B11 51 51 B11 OS5
RGST3_OUT2B 5 5 6 6 B/
DP eject sensor 2 EXIT_SW(V)
RGST1_OUT2A
GND B12 52 52 B12 GND
3 3.3V 6 6 4 4 B OS6
RGST2_OUT1A 7 7 1 1 A DP registration motor B13 53 53 B13 OS6
RGST4_OUT1B GND B14 54 54 B14 GND
8 8 3 3 A/
Y C 6ࠉ 5 5 NC OS7 B15 55 55 B15 OS7
COM 1 1 1 24V GND B16 56 56 B16 GND
DP top cover switch NO 2 2 2 NC OS8 B17 57 57 B17 OS8
3 3 R24V LIFT3_OUT2B 9 9 4 4 B3 GND B18 58 58 B18 GND
(Interlock switch㸧 LIFT1_OUT2A 10 10 2 2 B1 OS9 B19 59 59 B19 OS9
LIFT2_OUT1A 11 11 1 1 A1 DP lift motor GND B20 60 60 B20 GND
Y C 7ࠉ LIFT4_OUT1B 12 12 3 3 A3 OS10 B21 61 61 B21 OS10
2 1 1 1 R24V GND B22 62 62 B22 GND
DP drive fan motor 1
Relay
2 2 2 FAN_REM1 OS11 B23 63 63 B23 OS11
GND B24 64 64 B24 GND
Y C 14 2 2 NC OS12 B25 65 65 B25 OS12
Y C 8ࠉ
CNVY4_OUT2B 1 1 6 6 B/ GND B26 66 66 B26 GND
2 Relay 1 1 1 R24V
DP CIS fan motor 1 2 2 2 FAN_REM2
CNVY3_OUT2A 2 2 4 4 B
DP conveying motor OS13 B27 67 67 B27 OS13
CNVY2_OUT1B 3 3 3 3 A/ GND B28 68 68 B28 GND
CNVY1_OUT1A 4 4 1 1 A OS14 B29 69 69 B29 OS14
5 5 NC GND B30 70 70 B30 GND
Y C 9ࠉ
OS15 B31 71 71 B31 OS15
1 R24V
GND B32 72 72 B32 GND
2 PRS_SOL_PULL
1 1 NC OS16 B33 73 73 B33 OS16
3 PRS_SOL_RTN
RVRS4_OUT1B 5 5 2 2 A/ GND B34 74 74 B34 GND
4 R24V OS17
RVRS2_OUT1A 6 6 4 4 A DP eject motor B35 75 75 B35 OS17
5 JNC_SOL_PULL GND
RVRS1_OUT2A 7 7 5 5 B B36 76 76 B36 GND
6 JNC_SOL_KEEP
RVRS3_OUT2B 8 8 3 3 B/ OS18 B37 77 77 B37 OS18
6 6 NC GND B38 78 78 B38 GND
GND B39 79 79 B39 GND
GND B40 80 80 B40 GND
Y C 11ࠉ
SCLK 1
SDA 2 S H D PWB CIS PWB
1Piece_SIG 3
2Piece_SIG 4
GND 5 Multi feed detection sensor
3.3V 6
GND 7
24V 8
9-26
(6-3)Paper feeder (PF-7100) wiring diagram
PF main PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 10 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 12 1 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 1 2
1
2
1 2 9 2 2 24V1
GND
CAS1_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
11
10
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper detection sensor 1
3 3 3 8 3 3 FEED_CL1 A 9 4 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 1 2
1
2
1 4 7 4 4 24V1
B 8 5 2 2 GND PF paper detection sensor 2
C 7 6 1 1 Vout
Relay
3 3 5 6 5 5 VER_CL2 D 6 7 3 3 3.3V
PF conveying clutch 2 2
1
2
1 6
Relay
5 6 6 24V1
E 5 8 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 1
F 4 9 1 1 GND
3 3 7 4 7 7 FEED_CL2 G 3 10 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2
1
2
1 8 3 8 8 24V1
H 2 11 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 2
I 1 12 1 1 GND
3 3 9 2 9 9 HDR_CL2
PF speed switching clutch 2
1
2
1 10 1 10 10 24V1
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
YC4
GND
CAS1_QUANT1
5
6
5
6
5
4
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF Paper level sensor 1 upper
3.3V 3 3 1 20 1 1 3.3V4_LED
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 GND 2 2 2 19 2 2 GND
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 3 18 3 3 ULIM_SW_1
GND 8 8 2 7 2 2 GND PF Paper level sensor 1 lower
CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 8 1 1 Vout
3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 17 4 4 3.3V4_LED
GND 10 10 Relay
PF conveying sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
16
15
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
Relay GND 12 12
4
5
3
2
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 2 5 2 2 PF Paper length switch 1
GND 14 14 3 Relay 4 3 3
6 1 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
2 2 7 14 7 7 COVER_OPEN
PF right cover switch 1 1 8 13 8 8 GND
GND
CAS1_SET_SW
16
17
16
17
5
6
2
1
2
1
2
1 PF cassette insertion switch 1
8
7
1
2
2
1
2
1 PF paper width switch 1
Relay
J 2 1
3.3V 3 3 9 12 9 9 3.3V5_LED 1
Relay 2
K
PF lift upper limit sensor 2 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
10
11
11
10
10
11
10
11
GND
ULIM_SW_2
YC5
3.3V5_LED 1 1 A
GND 2 2 B
CAS2_EMPTY 3 3 C
3.3V 3 3 12 9 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF conveying sensor 2 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
13
14
8
7
13
14
13
14
GND
VER_SENS_2
3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 3 3 3 3.3V
GND
CAS2_QUANT1
5
6
5
6
5
4
4
5
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout PF Paper level sensor 2 upper
15 6 15 15 3.3V4
3.3V4_LED 7 7 3 6 3 3 3.3V
16 5 16 16 CAS1_WSIZE
17 4 17 17 GND
GND
CAS2_QUANT2
8
9
8
9
2
1
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF Paper level sensor 2 lower
18 3 18 18 3.3V5
GND 10 10
19 2 19 19 CAS2_WSIZE CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 6 1 1
Relay
20 1 20 20 GND
GND 12 12
J
CAS2_SIZE2_SENS
GND
13
14
13
14
2
3
5
4
2
3
2
3
PF paper length switch 2
Relay
K CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15 4 3 4 4
3.3V 3 3 L
GND 16 16 5 2 2 2 8 1 2 2
PF zero sensor 1 Vout 2 2 M CAS2_SET_SW 17 17 6 1 1 1 PF cassette insertion switch 2 7 2 1 1 PF paper width switch 2
GND 1 1 NC 18 18
3.3V 3 3
PF zero sensor 2 Vout 2 2 L 2
1 Relay
1
2
GND 1 1 M
YC6
2 2 1 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 Relay 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR
PF lift motor 2 2
1
2
1
1
2 Relay
2
1
3
4
3
4
L_MOT2_RET
L_MOT2_DR
1
2
1
2
NC
NC
3 3 NC
4 4 NC
5 5 NC
6 6 NC
YC8 7 7 NC
+24V 1 6 1 6 1 1 +24V 8 8 NC
GND 2 5 2 5 2 2 GND YC12 9 9 NC
START/STOP 3 4 3 4 3 3 START/STOP
PF paper feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 Relay 3 4 4 CLOCK
VER_SENS
3.3V3
1
2
1
2
10
11
10
11
VER_SENS
3.3V3
LD 5 2 5 2 5 5 LD GND 3 3 12 12 GND
CW/CCW 6 1 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 13 13 PF_CAS1_SEL
PF_CAS2_SEL 5 5 14 14 PF_CAS2_SEL
EN_CLK 6 6 15 15 EH_CLK
EN_RDY 7 7 16 Relay 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO
EN_SDI
8
9
8
9
17
18
17
18
EH_SDO
EH_SDI Engine PWB
16 EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
15 PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
14
13 YC11
9 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
8 YC13 GND 2 2 5 5 GND
7 1 1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
PF main PWB 2
4
3
4
3
4
AN_PF_SDI
AN_PF_SDO
2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
(Side paper feeder) 1

3
6
7
6
7
AN_PF_CLK
PF_CAS2_SEL
1G 1G AC_LIVE
11 8 8 GND 3 3 FG
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
1 1
4 YC10 Outlet
3 1 1 GND
2 2
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
AC_LIVE 1 1
PF cassette heater AC_NEUTRAL 2 2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
G 4 4 3.3V4_LED
H 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
I 6 6 GND
9-27
PF main PWB
YC9 YC3
3 3 1 1 VER_CL1 3.3V4_LED 1 1 6 1 A
PF vertical conveying clutch 2
1
2
1 2 2 24V1
GND 2 2 5 2 B
CAS1_EMPTY 3 3 4 3 C
3 3 3 3 FEED_CL1
PF paper feed clutch 1 right 2 2
3.3V4_LED
GND
4
5
4
5
6
5
1
2
3
2
3
2
3.3V
GND
PF paper level sensor 1
1 1 4 4 24V1 CAS1_QUANT1 6 6 4 3 1 1 Vout lower
Relay
3 3 5 5 VER_CL2
PF horizontal conveying clutch 1 2 2
3.3V4_LED
GND
7
8
7
8
3
2
4
5
3
2
3
2
3.3V
GND
PF paper level sensor 2
1 1 6 6 24V1 CAS1_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout upper
3 3 7 7 FEED_CL2
PF paper feed clutch 2 left 2
1
2
1 8 8 24V1 Relay
3 3 9 9 HDR_CL2 GND 10 10 2 2
PF horizontal conveying clutch 2 2 2 CAS1_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 1 1 PF cassette switch 1
1 1 10 10 24V1 GND 12 12
CAS1_SIZE2_SENS 13 13
GND 14 14
YC4 CAS1_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
3.3V 3 3 1 17 1 1 3.3V4_LED GND 16
PF lift upper limit sensor 1 GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
16
15
2
3
2 GND
3 ULIM_SW_1
CAS1_WSIZE 17
YC5
PF vertical conveying 3.3V 3 3 1 6 4 14 4 4 3.3V4_LED 3.3V5_LED 1 1 3 4 9 1 3 3 3.3V
sensor
GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
5
6
13
12
5
6
5
6
GND
VER_SENS_1
GND
CAS2_EMPTY
2
3
2
3
2
1
5
6
8
7
2
3
2
1
2
1
GND
Vout
PF paper detection sensor 2
4 Relay 3
5 2 3.3V4_LED 4 4 6 1 3 3 3.3V
6 1 GND 5 5 5 2 2 2 GND PF paper level sensor 1
CAS2_QUANT1 6 6 4 3 1 1 Vout lowe J 6 4 3 3 3.3V
Relay K 5 5 2 2 GND PF lift upper limit sensor 2
PF right cover switch
2
1
2
1
7
8
11
10
7
8
7
8
COVER_OPEN
GND
3.3V4_LED
GND
7
8
7
8
3
2
4
5
3
2
3
2
3.3V
GND
PF paper level sensor 2 L 4 Relay 6 1 1 Vout
CAS2_QUANT2 9 9 1 6 1 1 Vout upper

3.3V 3 3 9 Relay 9 A GND 10 10
PF empty sensor 1 GND 2 2 10 8 B CAS2_SIZE1_SENS 11 11 M 3 7 7 1 1 1 3 3 3.3V
Vout 1 1 11 7 C N 2 8 6 2 2 2 2 2 Vout PF retard sensor 2
O 1 9 5 3 3 3 1 1 GND
4 4 Relay 4 4
3.3V 3 3 12 6 D GND 12 12 2 2 3 5 5 5
PF retard sensor 1 Vout 2 2 13 5 E CAS2_SIZE2_SENS 13 13 1 1 PF cassette switch 2 2 6 6 6
GND 1 1 14 4 F GND 14 14 1 7 7 7
CAS2_SIZE3_SENS 15 15
GND 16 16
CAS2_WSIZE 17
3.3V 3 3 15 3 G NC 18
PF zero sensor 1 Vout
GND
2
1
2
1
16
17
2
1
H
I
J 9 9 3.3V5_LED
K 10 10 GND
L 11 11 ULIM_SW_2
3.3V 3 3 1 3 12 12 3.3V5_LED
PF horizontal conveying sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
2
3
Relay 2
1
13
14
13
14
GND
VER_SENS_2 1 1 NC
2 2 NC
G 15 15 3.3V4 3 3 NC
H 16 16 P0R_SW 4 4 NC
I 17 17 GND 5 5 NC
6 6 NC
18 18 3.3V5 7 7 NC
19 19 P0L_SW 8 8 NC
20 20 GND YC12 9 9 NC
VER_SENS 1 1 10 10 VER_SENS
3.3V3 2 2 11 11 3.3V3
GND 3 3 12 12 GND
PF_CAS1_SEL 4 4 13 13 PF_CAS1_SEL
PF_CAS2_SEL
EN_CLK
5
6
5
6
14
15
14
15
PF_CAS2_SEL
EH_CLK Engine PWB
EN_RDY 7 7 16 16 EH_RDY
EN_SDO 8 8 17 Relay 17 EH_SDO
YC6 EN_SDI 9 9 18 18 EH_SDI
2 2 1 1 L_MOT1_RET EN_PAU 10 10 19 19 PF_PAU
PF lift motor 1 1 1 2 2 L_MOT1_DR PF_CAS_OPEN 11 11 20 20 PF_CAS_OPEN
YC11
2 2 3 3 L_MOT2_RET 24V1 1 1 4 4 24V2
PF lift motor 2 1 1 4 4 L_MOT2_DR GND 2 2 5 5 GND
YC8
+24V 1 6 1 1 +24V 2 2 AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 5 2 2 GND
START/STOP 3 4 3 3 START/STOP
PF paper feed motor CLOCK 4 3 4 4 CLOCK 1G 1G AC_LIVE
LD 5 2 5 5 LD
CW/CCW 6 1 6 6 CW/CCW 3 3 FG
16
15
14
1 1
Outlet
13 2 2
9
AC_LIVE 1 1
8
7 1
YC13
1 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
6 2 2 AN_PF_PAUSE
PF main PWB 2
4
3
4
3
4
AN_PF_SDI
AN_PF_SDO
Relay 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
(Side paper feeder)

1 6 6 AN_PF_CLK
3 7 7 PF_CAS2_SEL
11 8 8 GND
10 9 9 3.3V3
12 10 10 AN_VER_SENS
4 YC10
3 1 1 GND
2 2 2 GND
1 3 3 24V2
YC14
D 1 1 3.3V4_LED
E 2 2 RETARD_SENS_1
F 3 3 GND
M 4 4 3.3V4_LED
N 5 5 RETARD_SENS_2
O 6 6 GND
9-28
PF main PWB
YC15 YC6
3 3 1 1 FDR_CL LDPSW1_3.3V1 1 1 9 1 3 3 3.3V
PF paper feed clutch 2 2 GND 2 2 8 2 2 2 GND PF paper level sensor 1 upper
1 1 2 2 +24V2_F1 LDPSW1 3 3 7 3 1 1 Vout
3 HOR_CL1
LDPSW2_3.3V1 4 4 6 4 3 3 3.3V
4 +24V2_F1 GND 5 5 5 Relay 5 2 2 GND PF paper level sensor 2 lower
LDPSW2 6 6 4 6 1 1 Vout
5 HOR_CL2
6 +24V2_F1 SZSW2_3.3V1 7 7 3 7 3 3 3.3V

GND 8 8 2 8 2 2 GND PF lift lower limit sensor
7 FDL_CL SZSW2 9 9 1 9 1 1 Vout
8 +24V2_F1
DEK_OPN1_3.3V2 10 10
GND
DEK_OPN1
11
12
11
12
2
1
2
1 PF paper feeder sensor
NC 13 13
YC3
RDPSW1_3.3V1 1
GND 2
YC5 RDPSW1 3
2 2 1 1 GND RDPSW2_3.3V1 4
PF set switch 1 1 2 2 CVROP_SW GND 5
RDPSW2 6
SZSW1_3.3V1 7
3 3 VER_CL GND 8
4 4 +24V2_F1 SZSW1 9
5 5 VCVSW_3.3V1 DEK_OPN2_3.3V2 10
6 6 GND GND 11
7 7 VCVSW DEK_OPN2 12
1 3 1 12 8 8 +24V2_F1
PF paper feed solenoid 2
3
Relay 2
1
2
3
11
10
9
10
9
10
FDR_SOLA
FDR_SOLK EPLSW_3.3V3
YC4
1
GND 2
EPLSW 3
3.3V 3 3 4 9 11 11 EPRSW_3.3V1 LULMSW_3.3V3 4
GND 5
PF paper detection sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
5
6
8
7
12
13
12
13
GND
EPRSW LULMSW 6
3.3V3 7
Relay P0LSW 8
3.3V 3 3 7 6 14 14 RULMSW_3.3V1 GND 9
HCVSW1_3.3V3 10
PF lift upper limit sensor GND
Vout
2
1
2
1
8
9
5
4
15
16
15
16
3.3V4
RULMSW GND 11
HCVSW1 12
3.3V 3 3 10 3 17 17 3.3V1
PF zero sensor Vout 2 2 11 2 18 18 P0RSW
GND 1 1 12 1 19 19 GND
YC13
SDO 1 1 4 4 AN_PF_SDO
SDI 2 2 2 2 AN_PF_SDI
CLK 3 3 1 1 AN_PF_CLK
SEL 4 4 3 3 PF_CAS2_SEL
RDY 5 5 5 5 AN_PF_RDY
YC8 PAUSE 6 6 6 6 AN_PF_PAUSE
1 2 1 1 OUT2 DEK_OPN1 7 7 7 7 AN_PF_CAS_OPEN
PF lift motor 2 1 2 2 OUT1 DEK_OPN2 8 8
+3.3V4 9 9 10 10 3.3V3
GND 10 10 11 11 GND
YC7ࠉ292132-4 SD_FINAL_SENS 11 11 12 Relay 12 AN_VER_SENS
1 OUT1B(L_2) PF_FINAL_SENS 12 12 8 8 NC
2 OUT1A(L_1) 9
13
9
13
NC
NC PF main PWB
14 14 NC
3 OUT2B(R_2) 15 15 NC
4 OUT2A(R_1) 16 16 NC 㸦desk㸧
YC11 4 4 NC
GND 1 1 3 3 GND
YC18 GND 2 2 2 2 GND
CH_A 8 8 1 1 FMOT_CH_A 24V2 3 3 1 1 24V2
CH_B 7 7 2 2 FMOT_CH_B 24V2 4 4
3.3V 6 6 3 3 3.3V
DIR 5 5 4 4 FMOT_DIR
PF conveying motor PWM 4 4 5 5 FMOT_PWM
BRAKE 3 3 6 6 FMOT_BRAKE N N AC_NEUTRAL
GND 2 2 7 7 GND
24V 1 1 8 8 +24V2_F1
L Relay L AC_LIVE
G G FG
YC16
1 +24V
2 GND
3 START/STOP
4 CLOCK
5 LD
6 CW/CCW
AC_LIVE 1 1
YC10
LVU_FAN 1
+24V2_F1 2
YC12
GND 1
GND 2
24V2 3
YC14
HOR_UNIT 1
+3.3V1 2
9-29
(6-6)Finisher (DF-7100) wiring diagram
YC8
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 YC17
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 PADDLE SENS A 1 1 3 3
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF eject motor GND 2 2 2 2 DF paddle sensor
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 PADDLE SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5 1 GND 4 4 3 3
STP MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 2 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 DF paper entry sensor
STP MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 1
STP MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 4 2 2 DF slide motor
STP MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 5 1 1 STRY EJE SENS A 7
GND 8
EJE RELS MOT 2B 9 9 4 4 STRY EJE SENS SIG 9
EJE RELS MOT 1B 10 10 3 3
EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF eject release motor
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 YC15
1 1 1 1 24V1 LED1 1
DF front cover switch 2 2 2 2 FRONT COV SIG MIDDLE MOT 2B 13 13 1 6 LED2 2
MIDDLE MOT 1B 14 14 2 5 LED3 3
3 3 TOP COV SOURCE MIDDLE MOT 2A 15 15 3 4 LED4 4
4 4 TOP COVSIG MIDDLE MOT 1A 16 16 4 3 DF middle motor KEY1 5
5 2 KEY2 6
YC5 ENTRY MOT 2B 17 17 6 1 GND 7
20 20 1 8 1 1 ENG RDY ENTRY MOT 1B 18 18
19 19 2 7 2 2 ENG SEL ENTRY MOT 2A 19 19 1 6 3.3V 8
18 18 3 6 3 3 ENG DI ENTRY MOT 1A 20 20 2 5 MTRY U SENS K 9
17 17 4 5 4 4 ENG DO 3 4
16 16 5 4 5 5 ENG PAU YC21 4 3 DF paper entry motor
Image PWB 15
14
15
14
6
7
3
2
6
7
6
7
DET
ENG CLK
MIDDLE MOT 1B 1 5
6
2
1
YC16
MTRY U SENS K 1 1 1 1
8 1 8 8 GND MIDDLE MOT 1A 2 GND 2 2 3 3
YC3 MIDDLE MOT 2A 3 PAP SENS SIG 3 3 2 2 DF eject paper sensor
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND 3.3V 4 4 4 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND MIDDLE MOT 2B 4
4 4 3 3 3 3 24V1 3.3V 5
5 5 4 4 4 4 24V1 YC9 MTRY U SENS K 6
PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor YC19
PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 SID REG R SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF side registration
SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 SID REG R SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1 sensor 2
1 13 1 13 A SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 3 3
MT
SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 SID REG F SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
2 12 2 12 B YC19 SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 1 1 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2
DF side registration
3 11 3 11 C YC6
SID REG F SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1 sensor 1
1 1 5V
SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 4
4 10 4 10 2 2 3.3V
SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 3 GND 7 7 4 1 A
5 9 5 9 3 3 3.3V
SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF side registration motor 1 PH ENTRY SENS SIG 8 8 3 2 B PUNCH
6 8 6 8 4 4 GND
7 7 7 7 5 5 GND
SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 1 3.3V 9 9 2 3 C
1 4
PH main PWB 8 6 8 6
6
7
6
7
PHPES REM
PHMOT REM
EJECT CL 13 MTRY FULL SENS A 10 10 3 3
9 5 9 5 8 8 PU RDY
GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor
24V2 14 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 12 12 1 1
10 4 10 4 9 9 PU SEL
11 3 11 3 10 10 PU CLK
12 2 12 2 11 11 PU DI
YC10 13 13
13 1 13 1 12 12 PU DO
STPMOT OUT1 1 13 14 14
YC7
STPMOT OUT1 2 12 15 15
1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
STPMOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 24V2 㸩
STPMOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 BUNDLE SENS A 16 16 3 1 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 17 17 2 2 2 2 DF bundle eject sensor
STPMOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4 BUNDLE SENS SIG 18 18 1 3 1 1
STPMOT OUT2 7 7
STPMOT OUT2 8 6 Stapler PAP PRE UP SENS A 19 19 12 1 3 3
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 20 20 11 2 2 2 DF paper pressing sensor 1
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 PAP PRE UP SENS SIG 21 21 10 3 1 1
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 PAP PRE LOW SENS A 22 22 9 4 3 3
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 8 5 2 2 DF paper pressing sensor 2
PAP PRE LOW SENS SIG 24 24 7 6 1 1
YC12 ADJUST SENS A 25 25 6 7 3 3

BRAKE 1 GND 26 26 5 8 2 2 DF adjustment sensor
DIR 2 ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 4 9 1 1
CLK 3
ENABLE 4 STP MOV SENS A 28 28 3 10 3 3
GND 5 GND 29 29 2 11 2 2 DF slide sensor
24V2 6 STP MOV SENS SIG 30 30 1 12 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 1
TRY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor 2
3
YC13
24V2 1 1 3 1
PAP PRE SOL ACT 2 2 2 2 DF paper pressing solenoid YC20
PAP PRE SOL KEEP 3 3 1 3 SET SENS A 1 1 3 3
GND 2 2 2 2 DF device sensor
YC14 SET SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
5V 1 2 1 2
LED 2 1 2 1 Paper LED
DF࣓࢖ࣥᇶᯈ
9-30
(6-7)Punch unit (PH-7100/7110/7120/7130) wiring diagram: DF-7100 only
DF main PWB PH main PWB

YC7 YC2
GND 1 1 1 1 1 1 GND
24V2 2 2 2 2 2 2 24V2 YC5
CCW 1 1
NC 2 2 PH motor
CW 3 3
YC6 YC1
PU_DO 12 12 1 13 1 1 PH_SDI
PU_DI 11 11 2 12 2 2 PH_SDO
PU_CLK 10 10 3 11 3 3 PH_CLK YC6
PU_SEL 9 9 4 10 4 4 PH_SEL 24V2 1 1 3 1
PU_RDY 8 8 5 9 5 5 PH_RDY PHSOL_PUL 2 2 2 2 PH punch-hole switching solenoid *Not applied to
PUMOT_EN 7 7 6 8 6 6 PHMOT_REQ PHSOL_RET 3 3 1 3 100V model
PUPES_EN 6 6
GND 5 5 7 7 7 7 GND
GND 4 4 8 6 8 8 GND 24V2 4 4 3 1
3.3V 3 3 9 5 9 9 3.3V TNKSOL_PUL 5 5 2 2 PH tank solenoid
3.3V 2 2 10 4 10 10 3.3V TNKSOL_HLD 6 6 1 3
5.0V 1 1
YC19 YC7
3.3V 9 9 11 3 11 11 3.3V GND 1 1 3 3
PH_EN_SENS 8 8 12 2 12 12 PH_EN_SENS PH_EN_SENS 2 2 2 2 PH paper entry sensor
GND 7 7 13 1 13 13 GND 3.3V 3 3 1 1
YC9
4 1 4 1 3.3V
PH tank full sensor 3 2 3 2 TNK_FULL YC8 3 1 PH tank full sensor
2 3 2 3 GND 3.3V 1 1 2 2
(photo receptor) 1 4 1 4 TNK_FULL_PLS TNK_FULL_PLS 2 2 1 3 (photo transmitter)
SENS_3.3V 3 3 3 3
GND 4 4 2 2 PH tank set switch
PHTNK_SET 5 5 1 1
SENS_3.3V 6 6 3 3
GND 7 7 2 2 PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 8 8 1 1
SENS_3.3 9 9 3 3
GND 10 10 2 2 PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 11 11 1 1
9-31
YC12 YC19
STP_MOV_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 BRAKE 1 1 7 7
STP_MOV_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 DIR 2 2 6 6
STP_MOV_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF slide motor CLK 3 3 5 5
STP_MOV_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 ENABLE 4 4 4 4 DF tray motor
GND 5 5 3 3
EJECT_MOT 1B 5 5 1 6 24V2 6 6 2 2
2 5 1 1
EJECT_MOT 1A
EJECT_MOT 2A
6
7
6
7
3
4
4
3
DF eject motor DRM_SENS A
YC20
1 1 6 1 3 3
5 2 GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF drum sensor
EJECT_MOT 2B 8 8 6 1 DRM_SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1
MIDDLE_MOT 1B 9 9 1 6 MID_EJE_SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
YC3 2 5 GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF middle sensor
1 1 4 4 1 1 24V1 MIDDLE_MOT 1A 10 10 3 4 MID_EJE_SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
DF eject cover switch 2 2 3 3 2 2 EJECT_COV_SIG MIDDLE_MOT 2A 11 11 4 3 DF middle motor
5 2 YC21
1 1 2 2 3 3 FRONT _COV_SOURCE MIDDLE_MOT 2B 12 12 6 1 STRY_EJE_SENS A 1 1 3 3
DF front cover switch 2 2 1 1 4 4 FRONT_COV_SIG GND 2 2 2 2 DF sub eject sensor
ENTRY_MOT 1B 13 13 1 6 STRY_EJE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 1
2 5
YC4 ENTRY_MOT 1A 14 14 3 4
A5 A7 1 7 1 7 1 1 GND ENTRY_MOT 2A 15 15 4 3 DF paper entry motor 3.3V 4 4 4 1 4 4
A3
A2
A6
A5
2
3
6
5
2
3
6
5
2
3
2
3
GND
ENG RDY ENTRY_MOT 2B 16 16
5
6
2
1
GND
STRY FULL SENS SIG
5
6
5
6
3
2
2
3
3
2
3
2
DF sub tray full sensor
A4 A3 4 4 4 4 4 4 ENG SEL STRY FULL SENS PLS 7 7 1 4 1 1
A6 A1 5 3 5 3 5 5 ENG CLK EJE_RELS_MOT 2B 17 17 4 4
A1 A2 6 2 6 2 6 6 ENG DI EJE_RELS_MOT 1B 18 18 3 3 GND 8 8 3 1 3 3
A7 A4 7 1 7 1 7 7 ENG DO EJE_RELS_MOT 2A 19 19 2 2 DF eject release motor ENTRY_SENS SIG 9 9 2 2 2 2 DF paper entry sensor
Image PWB EJE_RELS_MOT 1A 20 20 1 1 3.3V 10 10 1 3 1 1
LED1 11 11 9 1 7 1 7
LED2 12 12 8 2 6 2 6
YC5
MTRY_U_SENS K
YC13
1 1 4 1 4 1
LED3 13 13 7 3 5 3 5 DF operation
B8 B8 3 3 1 1 1 1 GND LED4 14 14 6 4 4 4 4
B9 B9 4 4 2 2 2 2 GND
GND
MTRY_U_SENS SIG
2
3
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
3 DF tray paper full sensor 2 KEY1 15 15 5 5 3 5 3 PWB
A8 A8 1 1 3 3 3 3 24V1 KEY2 16 16 4 6 2 6 2
3.3V 4 4 1 4 1 4
A9 A9 2 2 4 4 4 4 24V1 GND 17 17 3 7 1 7 1
YC14
3.3V 18 18 2 8 3 1
SFT_RELS_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
1 12 YC6
SFT_RELS_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3
MTRY_U_SENS K 19 19 1 9 2 2 DF tray paper full sensor 1
2
3
11
10
1
2
1
2
GND
GND
SFT_RELS_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF shift release motor 1 3
SFT_RELS_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
4 9 3 3 GND
YC22
5 8 4 4 5V
SFT_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4 STPLE_SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
MT main PWB 6
7
7
6
5
6
5
6
24V1
24V1
SFT_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
DF shift motor 2
GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF slide sensor
SFT_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2 STPLE_SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
8 5 7 7 MT DO
SFT_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1
9 4 8 8 MT DIN
10 3 9 9 MT CLK
SFT_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4 SID_REG_R_SENS A 4 4 12 1 3 3
11 2 10 10 MT SEL
12 1 11 11 MT RDY
SFT_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3
DF shift motor 1
GND 5 5 11 2 2 2 DF side registration sensor 2
SFT_F_MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 SID_REG_R_SENS SIG 6 6 10 3 1 1
SFT_F_MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1
YC7
SID_REG_F_SENS A 7 7 9 4 3 3
12 12 1 1 5V
11 11 2 2 3.3V
GND 8 8 8 5 2 2 DF side registration sensor 1
EJECT_CL 13 13 3 3 SID_REG_F_SENS SIG 9 9 7 6 1 1
10 10 3 3 3.3V
9 9 4 4 GND
2 2 DF eject clutch
24V2 14 14 1 1 GND 10 10 6 7 3 3
8 8 5 5 GND
7 7 6 6 PHPES_REM
PAP_SENS SIG 11 11 5 8 2 2 DF eject paper sensor
YC15 3.3V 12 12 4 9 1 1
PH main PWB 6
5
6
5
7
8
7
8
PHMOT_REM
PU RDY
PADDLE_MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4
PADDLE_MOT 1B 2 2 3 2 3 3 BUNDLE_SENS A 13 13 3 10
4 4 9 9 PU SEL
PADDLE_MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor GND 14 14 2 11 2 2
3 3 10 10 PU CLK
PADDLE_MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 BUNDLE_SENS SIG 15 15 1 12 1 1 DF bundle eject switch
2 2 11 11 PU DI
1 1 12 12 PU DO
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4
YC8 SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3
1 1 1 1 GND
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2
DF side registration motor 2 MTRY HP1 SENS A 16 16 6 1 3 3
2 2 2 2 24V2
SIDE_REG_R_MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1 GND 17 17 5 2 2 2 DF tray sensor 1
MTRY HP1 SENS SIG 18 18 4 3 1 1
YC7 SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4
1 1
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3 MTRY HP2 SENS A 19 19 3 4 3 3
2 2 YC9 DF side registration motor 1
3 3 5 1 5 5 BF RDY
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 2A
SIDE_REG_F_MOT 1A
11
12
11
12
2
1
7
8
2
1
2
1
GND
MTRY HP2 SENS SIG
20
21
20
21
2
1
5
6
2
1
2
1
DF tray sensor 2
4 4 4 2 4 4 BF SEL
5 5 3 3 3 3 BF CLK
4 1
6 6 2 4 2 2 BF DO
YC17 PADDLE SENS A 22 22 3 2 3 3
7 7 1 5 1 1 BF DI
STPMOT OUT2 1 13 GND 23 23 2 3 2 2 DF paddle sensor
STPMOT OUT2 2 12 PADDLE SENS SIG 24 24 1 4 1 1
BF main PWB YC3
4 4 8 8 8
YC10
8 24V2
STPMOT OUT2 3 11 9 9 1 1
㸩
STPMOT OUT2 4 10 8 8 2 2 ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
3 3 7 7 7 7 24V2
2 2 6 6 6 6 GND
STPMOT OUT1 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjustment sensor
STPMOT OUT1 6 8 6 6 4 4 ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
1 1 5 5 5 5 GND
STPMOT OUT1 7 7
YC5 STPMOT OUT1 8 6 Stapler SFT_SET SENS A 28 28 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 29 29 2 2 DF shift set sensor
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 SFT_SET SENS SIG 30 30 1 1
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2 2 GND YC23
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 SFT_F HP SENS A 1 1 6 1 3 3
GND 2 2 5 2 2 2 DF shift sensor 1
YC18 SFT_F HP SENS SIG 3 3 4 3 1 1
DRM_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4
DRM_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 SFT_R HP SENS A 4 4 3 4 3 3
DRM_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 DF relief drum motor GND 5 5 2 5 2 2 DF shift sensor 2
DRM_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 SFT_R HP SENS SIG 6 6 1 6 1 1
24V2 5 5 3 1 MTRY HALF SENS A 7 7 3 3

MID_DRM_SOL ACT 6 6 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 1 GND 8 8 2 2 DF tray sensor 3
YC16 MID_DRM_SOL KEEP 7 7 1 3 MTRY HALF SENS SIG 9 9 1 1
1 2 1 6 1 6 1 1 Eject fan 1
Rear 2 1 2 5 2 5 2 2 24V2 24V2 8 8 3 1 MTRY BF SENS A 10 10 3 3
DRM_BF SOL ACT 9 9 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 2 GND 11 11 2 2 DF tray sensor 5
1 2 3 4 3 4 3 3 Eject fan 2 DRM_BF SOL KEEP 10 10 1 3 MTRY BF SENS SIG 12 12 1 1
Front 2 1 4 3 4 3 4 4 24V2
24V2 11 11 3 1 MTRY FULL SENS A 13 13 3 3
Center
1 2 5 2 5 2 5 5 Eject fan 3 SUB_MID_SOL ACT 12 12 2 2 DF feedshift solenoid 3 GND 14 14 2 2 DF tray sensor 4
2 1 6 1 6 1 6 6 24V2 SUB_MID_SOL KEEP 13 13 1 3 MTRY FULL SENS SIG 15 15 1 1
SFT_RELS SENS A 16 16 3 3
GND 17 17 2 2 DF Shift release sensor
DF main PWB SFT_RELS SENS SIG 18 18 1 1
9-32
(6-9)Mailbox (MT-730(B)) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only
YC3
YC1 1 12 YC7
3 3 1 1 GND GND 2 11 1 1 GND
MB tray sensor 1 2 2 2 2 OFS1 GND 3 10 2 2 GND
1 1 3 3 5V GND 4 9 3 3 GND
5V 5 8 4 4 5V
3 3 4 4 GND 24V 6 7 5 5 24V
MB tray sensor 2 2 2 5 5 OFS2 24V 7 6 6 6 24V
1 1 6 6 5V SDI 8 5 7 7 MT DO
SDO 9 4 8 8 MT DIN
3 3 7 7 GND SCLK 10 3 9 9 MT CLK
MB tray sensor 3 2 2 8 8 OFS3 SEL 11 2 10 10 MT SEL
1 1 9 9 5V READY 12 1 11 11 MT RDY
3 3 10 10 GND DF main PWB

MB tray sensor 4 2 2 11 11 OFS4
1 1 12 12 5V
3 3 13 13 GND
1 1 15 15 5V
MB main PWB
16 16 LED
17 17 GND
18 18 TEJS
19 19 5V
1 4 1 3
YC2
2 3 2 2
1 1 5V YC5
3 2 MOTOR _A 1 4 1 4
MOTOR A 2 3 2 3
4 1 3 1 MB conveying motor
2 2 LED MOTOR B 3 2 3 2
MB eject sensor 2 MB eject sensor 1 MOTOR _B 4 1 4 1
YC4
3 3 3 3 GND R24V 1 1 1 1
MB cover switch
MB home position sensor 2 2 4 4 HP SIG 24V 3 3 2 2
1 1 5 5 5V
3 3 6 6 GND
1 1 8 8 5V
3 3 9 9 GND
1 1 11 11 5V
12 12 GND
13 13 NC
14 14 5V
9-33
(6-10)Booklet folder (BF-730) wiring diagram: DF-7110 only
YC1 YC10 YC15 7 7

1 3.3V EXTMOT_ 2B 1 1 4 4 BLDMOT_BRK 1 1 6 6
2 TXD EXTMOT_1B 2 2 3 3 BLDMOT_DIR 2 2 5 5
BF adjustment motor 2 BLDMOT_CLK 3 3 4 4
3 RXD EXTMOT_2A 3 3 2 2 BF blade motor
4 N.C. EXTMOT_1A 4 4 1 1 BLDMOT_EN 4 4 3 3
5 GND GND 5 5 2 2
MDLMOT_ 2B 5 5 4 4 24V2 6 6 1 1
YC2 MDLMOT_1B 6 6 3 3
1 3.3V MDLMOT_2A 7 7 2 2 BF side registration motor 2 YC16
2 SWCLK MDLMOT_1A 8 8 1 1 FLDMOT_DIR 1 1 6 6
3 SWDIO FLDMOT_ALM 2 2 5 5
4 RESET CINMOT_ 2B 9 9 4 4 FLDMOT_CLK 3 3 4 4
5 GND CINMOT_1B 10 10 3 3 FLDMOT_EN 4 4 3 3 BF main motor
CINMOT_ 2A 11 11 2 2 BF paper entry motor N.C 5 5
CINMOT_1A 12 12 1 1 GND 6 6 2 2
24V2 7 7 1 1
YC4 EXCMOT_2B 13 13 8 1 4 4
YC20
2 2 1 1 1 1 24V1 EXCMOT_1B 14 14 7 2 3 3
BF left cover switch EXCMOT_2A 15 15 6 3 2 2 BF adjustment motor 1 5V 1 6 1 3 1
1 1 2 2 2 2 FRONT COV SIG
EXCMOT_1A 16 16 5 4 1 1
GND 2 5 2 2 2 BF adjustment sensor 1
BDLFT_HP 3 4 3 1 3
YC6 17 17 8 1 4 4
STMMOT_2B
2 2 1 1 24V STMMOT_1B 3 3 5V 4 3 4 3 1
BF set switch 18 18 7 2
1 1 2 2 FRONT COV SIG STMMOT_2A 19 19 6 3 2 2 BF side registration motor 1 GND 5 2 5 2 2 BFside registration sensor 1
WDL_HP 6 1 6 1 3
STMMOT_1A 20 20 5 4 1 1
2 2 1 1 3 3 24V
BF tray open/close switch 1 1 2 2 4 4 EJECT COV SIG 5V 7 6 1 3 1
GND 8 5 2 2 2 BF tray paper full sensor
FULL 9 4 3 1 3
YC7 5V 10 3 1
3 4
1 1 GND
YC9 2 2 GND
GND 11 2 5 2 2 BF eject sensor
OUT 12 1 6 1 3
5 5 1 5 3 3 ENG_RDY
4 4 2 4 4 4 ENG_SEL 5V 13 3 1
3 1
3 3 3 3 5 5 ENG_CLK 14 2 2
GND 2 2 BF conveying sensor
2 2 4 2 6 6 ENG_DI 15 1 3 1 3
TRANS PORT
1 1 5 1 7 7 ENG_DO
YC10 YC3 5V 16 3 1 3 1
8 8 8 8 4 4 24V GND 17 2 2 2 2 BF paper detection sensor
DF main PWB 7 7 7 7 3 3 24V PAPER 18 1 3 1 3
6 6 6 6 2 2 GND
5 5 5 5 1 1 YC13 5V 19 3 1 3 1
GND
5V 1 1 10 10 20
YC5
2 2
GND 2 2 2 2 BFside registration sensor 2
4 4 4 4 4 4 5V STLS2 9 9 WDU_HP 21 1 3 1 3
3 3 3 3 3 3 GND 3 3 8 8
GND
2 2 2 2 2 2 STLS1 4 4 7 7 5V 22 22 3 1 3 1
GND
STHP 5 5 6 6
1 1 1 1 1 1 3.3V BF stapler motor GND 23 23 2 2 2 2 BF brade sensor
STMOT_OUT1 6 6 5 5 BLD_HP 24 24 1 3 1 3
STMOT_OUT1 7 7 4 4
FGND 8 8 3 3 GND 25 3 1 3 1
STMOT_OUT2 9 9 2 2 BULOW_HP 26 2 2 2 2
STMOT_OUT2 10 10
BF adjustment sensor 2
1 1 3.3V 27 1 3 1 3
YC17 GND 28 3 1 3 1
24V2 1 1 3 1 3 1 CARRY_IN 29 2 2 2 2 BF paper entry sensor
3FSOL_ATT 2 2 2 2 2 2 BF feedshift solenoid 3.3V 30 1 3 1 3
3FSOL_HLD 3 3 1 3 1 3
BF main PWB
9-34
(6-11)Punch unit (PH-7) wiring diagram: DF-7110/7120 only
YC8 YC2 YC4

PGND 1 1 1 1 GND PHMOT_N 1 1 2 2 PHMOT_N
24V2 2 2 2 2 24V2 NC 2 2 PH motor
PHMOT_P 3 3 1 1 PHMOT_P
YC7 YC1 YC3

PU_DO 12 12 1 1 PH_SDI PHADJ_MOT 1A 4 4 1 1 PHADJ_MOT_A
PU_DI 11 11 2 2 PH_SDO PHADJ_MOT 2A 3 3 2 2 PHADJ_MOT_B
PU_CLK 10 10 3 3 PH_CLK PHADJ_MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 PHADJ_MOT_An PH slide motor
PU_SEL 9 9 4 4 PH_SEL PHADJ_MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 PHADJ_MOT_Bn
PU_RDY 8 8 5 5 PH_RDY
PUMOT_EN 7 7 6 6 PHMOT_REQ
PUPES_EN 6 6 7 7 PHPES_REQ YC6
SGND 5 5 8 8 GND SENS3.3V 1 1 3 3 SENS3.3V
SGND 4 4 9 9 GND GND 2 2 2 2 GND PH slide sensor
3.3V 3 3 10 10 3.3V PHADJ_HP 3 3 1 1 PHADJ_HP
3.3V 2 2 11 11 3.3V
5.0V 1 1 12 12 5.0V
YC5
24V2 1 1 3 1 24V2
PHSOL_PUL 2 2 2 Relay 2 PHSOL_PUL PH solenoid
PHSOL_RET 3 3 1 3 PHSOL_RET
DF main PWB
PHLED_A 4 4 5 5 PHLED_A
PHLED_B 5 5 4 4 PHLED_B
PHLED_C 6 6 3 3 PHLED_C PH paper edge sensor 1
PHLED_D 7 7 2 2 PHLED_D
YC10 PHLED_3.3V 8 8 1 1 PHLED_3.3V
1 3.3V
2 GND
3 RESET 5.0V 9 9 3 3 5.0V
4 MODE PHTNK_FUL 10 10 2 2 PHTNK_FUL PH tank full sensor
GND 11 11 1 1 GND
YC11
1
1 3.3V YC7
2 DBG_TX PHPES_DET 1 1 2 2 PHPES_DET
3 DBG_RX GND 2 2 1 1 GND PH paper edge sensor 2
4 NC
5 GND
YC8
SENS3.3V 1 1 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND PH pulse sensor
PHMOT_PLS 3 3 1 1 PHMOT_PLS
SENS3.3V 4 4 3 3 SENS3.3V
GND 5 5 2 2 GND PH home position sensor
PHMOT_HP 6 6 1 1 PHMOT_HP
PH main PWB
YC9
PHTNK_SET 1 2 1 1 PHTNK_SET
GND 2 1 2 2 GND PH tank set switch
9-35
YC8 YC17
EJECT MOT 2B 1 1 4 4 MID EJE SENS A 1 1
EJECT MOT 1B 2 2 3 3 GND 2 2
EJECT MOT 2A 3 3 2 2
DF eject motor MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3
EJECT MOT 1A 4 4 1 1
GND 4 4 3 1 3 3
ST MOV MOT 2B 5 5 4 4 ENTRY SENS SIG 5 5 2 2 2 2 DF paper entry sensor
ST MOV MOT 1B 6 6 3 3 3.3V 6 6 1 3 1 1
ST MOV MOT 2A 7 7 2 2 DF slide motor
ST MOV MOT 1A 8 8 1 1

EJE RELS MOT 2A 11 11 2 2 DF eject release motor
YC4 EJE RELS MOT 1A 12 12 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 24V1
DF front cover switch 2 2 2 2 2 2 FRNT COV SIG ENTRY MOT 2B 13 13
ENTRY MOT 1B 14 14 1 6
1 1 3 3 TOP COV SOURCE ENTRY MOT 2A 15 15 2 5
DF top cover switch 2 2 4 4 TOP COV SIG ENTRY MOT 1A 16 16 3 4
4 3 DF paper entry motor
YC5 MIDDLE MOT 2B 17 17 5 2
A5 A5 3 5 3 5 1 1 ENG RDY MIDDLE MOT 1B 18 18 6 1
A3 A3 4 4 4 4 2 2 ENG SEL MIDDLE MOT 2A 19 19
A2 A2 6 2 6 2 3 3 ENG DI MIDDLE MOT 1A 20 20 1 6
A4 A4 7 1 7 1 4 4 ENG DO 2 5
A6 A6 2 6 2 6 5 5 ENG PAU 3 4
A1 A1 5 3 5 3 6 6 DET 4 3 DF middle motor YC16
Image PWB A7 A7 1 7 1 7 7 7 ENG CLK 5 2 MTRY U SENS K 1 1 4 3 4 1
8 8 GND 6 1 GND 2 2 3 4 3 2 DF tray paper full
MTRY U SENS SIG 3 3 2 5 2 3
B8 B8 3 3 1 1 1
YC3
1 GND 3.3V 4 4 1 6 1 4
sensor 2
B9 B9 4 4 2 2 2 2 GND
A8
A9
A8
A9
1
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
24V1
24V1 YC9
3.3V
MTRY U SENS K
5
6
5
6
6
5
1
2
3
2
1
2
DF tray paper full
PADDLE MOT 2B 1 1 4 1 4 4 1 3 sensor 1
YC6 PADDLE MOT 2A 3 3 2 3 2 2 DF paddle motor YC19
12 12 1 1 5V PADDLE MOT 1A 4 4 1 4 1 1 SID REG R SENS A 1 1 12 1 3 3
11 11 2 2 3.3V GND 2 2 11 2 2 2
DF side registration
10 10 3 3 3.3V SIDE REG R MOT 2B 5 5 8 1 4 4 SID REG R SENS SIG 3 3 10 3 1 1 sensor 2
9 9 4 4 GND SIDE REG R MOT 1B 6 6 7 2 3 3 DF side registration
8 8 5 5 GND SIDE REG R MOT 2A 7 7 6 3 2 2 motor 2 SID REG F SENS A 4 4 9 4 3 3 DF side registration
7 7 6 6 PH PES REM SIDE REG R MOT 1A 8 8 5 4 1 1 GND 5 5 8 5 2 2
6 6 7 7 PH MOT REM SID REG F SENS SIG 6 6 7 6 1 1 sensor 1
PH main PWB 5 5 8 8 PU RDY SIDE REG F MOT 2B 9 9 4 5 4 4
4 4 9 9 PU SEL SIDE REG F MOT 1B 10 10 3 6 3 3 DF side registration GND 7 7 6 7 3 3
3 3 10 10 PU CLK SIDE REG F MOT 2A 11 11 2 7 2 2 motor 1 PAP SENS SIG 8 8 5 8 2 2 DF eject paper sensor
2 2 11 11 PU DI SIDE REG F MOT 1A 12 12 1 8 1 1 3.3V 9 9 4 9 1 1
1 1 12 12 PU DO
YC7 BUNDLE SENS A 10 10 3 10
1 1 1 1 GND GND 11 11 2 11 2 2
2 2 2 2 24V2 BUNDLE SENS SIG 12 12 1 12 1 1 DF bundle eject switch
4 1
YC10 PADDLE SENS A 13 13 3 2 3 3
STPMOT OUT1 1 13 GND 14 14 2 3 2 2 DF paddle sensor
STPMOT OUT1 2 12 PADDLE SENS SIG 15 15 1 4 1 1
STPMOT OUT1 3 11 9 9 1 1
㸩
STPMOT OUT1 4 10 8 8 2 2 MTRY HP SENS A 16 16 9 1 3 3
STPMOT OUT2 5 9 7 7 3 3
㸫
GND 17 17 8 2 2 2 DF tray sensor 1
STPMOT OUT2 6 8 6 6 4 4 MTRY HP SENS SIG 18 18 7 3 1 1
STPMOT OUT2 7 7
STPMOT OUT2 8 6 Stapler MTRY HALF SENS A 19 19 6 4 3 3
GND 9 5 5 5 1 1 GND 20 20 5 5 2 2 DF tray sensor 2
LS 10 4 4 4 2 2 MTRY HALF SENS SIG 21 21 4 6 1 1
READY 11 3 3 3 3 3
5V 12 2 1 1 5 5 MTRY FULL SENS A 22 22 3 7 3 3
HP 13 1 2 2 4 4 GND 23 23 2 8 2 2 DF tray sensor 3
MTRY FULL SENS SIG 24 24 1 9 1 1
ADJUST SENS A 25 25 3 3
GND 26 26 2 2 DF adjustment sensor
ADJUST SENS SIG 27 27 1 1
STP MOV SENS A 28 28 3 1 3 3

GND 29 29 2 2 2 2 DF slide sensor
STP MOV SENS SIG 30 30 1 3 1 1
YC11 YC18
TRAY MOT OUT1 2 2 1 2 MID EJE SENS A 1 1 3 1 3 3
TRAY MOT OUT2 1 1 2 1 DF tray motor GND 2 2 2 2 2 2 DF middle sensor
MID EJE SENS SIG 3 3 1 3 1 1
Main PWB
9-36
10 Installation Guide
PF-7100
(500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
GUIDE D’INSTALLATION
GUÍA DE INSTALACION
INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
GUIDA ALL’INSTALLAZIONE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-7100
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
G*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.
G*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
G*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
G*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
G*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
G*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ⿽㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼Ǆ
G*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
G*; ௙ྥᆅ࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning materials from the parts supplied.
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhésive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des pièces fournies.
Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o material amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten Teilen entfernt wurden.
Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di protezione dalle parti fornite.
ྲ᷌䱴኎૱кᑖᴹപᇊ㜦ᑖˈ㕃ߢᶀᯉᰦ࣑ᗵ᨝лǄ
┍⸽䖼㜄GḔ㥉G䊀㢨䘸GSG㝸㻝㣠ᴴG⻍㛨G㢼⏈Gᷱ㟤㜄⏈Gⵌ☐㐐G㥐ᶤ䚌㐡㐐㝘U
ྠᲕရ࡟ᅛᐃࢸ࣮ࣉࠊ⦆⾪ᮦࡀࡘ࠸࡚࠸ࡿሙྜࡣࠊᚲࡎྲྀࡾእࡍࡇ࡜ࠋ
ձ
A
ղ ճ
1
մ
մ
յ
յ ն
ն
շ շ
ո
չ
ո պչ
2
ջ
պ ռ
ջ
ս
ռ վս
ߑ
AA
տ
վ տ
C(M3x8)
ߒ
ߑ
AA
ր
ր
C(M3x8)
3
ց
4
ւ
RR FL RR FL
1 1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1 1
D E(M4x20)
Select holes (1) and install each stopper (D,F) with 3 S Tite screws M4 × 20 (E) so that the stoppers will be grounded
on the floor.
Sélectionner les trous (1) et installer chaque butée (D,F) avec 3 vis S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de sorte que les butées reposent
sur le sol.
Seleccione los orificios (1) e instale cada tope (D,F) con los 3 tornillos S Tite M4 × 20 (E) de manera que los topes se
conecten a tierra en el suelo.
Wählen Sie die Öffnungen (1) und befestigen Sie jeden Anschlag (D,F) mit den 3 S-Tite-Schrauben M4 × 20 (E) so an,
dass die Anschläge am Boden aufsitzen.
Selezionare i fori (1) ed installare ogni fermo (D,F) con le 3 viti S Tite M4 × 20 (E) in modo che i fermi siano posti a terra
sul pavimento.
൘ᆄ˄˅༴਴⭘仇0h㍗പර6㷪э˄(˅ᆹ㻵䲀սಘ˄')˅ˈ֯ѻ઼ൠᶯ᧕䀖Ǆ
㤸⓸ⵝ㫴㌔GOkSmPGᴴGⵈ␙⮨㜄G㥅㫴╔G㍌G㢼⓸⦑GẠ⮁ஂXஃ㡸G㉔䈑䚨G⇌㇠Gt[ÝYWGzG䇴㢨䏬GOlPGᴵGZGᵐ⦐G㉘㾌䚝⏼␘GU
㌿ಽ㜵Ṇ㔠ල ') ࡀᗋ㠃࡟᥋ᆅࡍࡿࡼ࠺࡟ࠊ✰ ࢆ㑅ᢥࡋ࡚ࣅࢫ06ࢱ࢖ࢺ ( ྛᮏ࡛ྲྀࡾ௜ࡅࡿࠋ
5
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
1 RR
FL
D
E
D 1 1 1
D
F E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
6
փ
ք
ON
7
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1.Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1.Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1.Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
简体中文
前端对位调节
1.确认纸张的前端（1）和测试样张（a）的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Top］ > ［Cassette(L)］。
한국어
선단 타이밍 조정
1.용지 선단 (1) 과 테스트 패턴 (a) 의 라인 (2) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
先端タイミング調整
1.紙の先端 (1) とテストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] を選択する。
8
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
3.Adjust the values. 6.Repeat the steps 2 to 5 above until the gap
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Print the test pattern.
3.Régler les valeurs. 6.Répéter les étapes 2 à 5 ci-dessus jusqu'à

Mire d' essai (b) : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (2) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (c) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
5.Imprimez le motif de test.
3.Ajuste los valores. 6.Repita los pasos del 2 al 5 anteriores hasta

Patrón de prueba (b) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (2) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm erencia.
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De 20mm±1.5mm
5.Imprima el patrón de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 6.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 2 bis 5 solange,

Testmuster (b) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (2) auf der Test-
Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm det.
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> 20mm±1.5mm
5.Drucken Sie die Testseite aus.
3. Regolare i valori. 6.Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (b) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (2) nello schema
Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
4.Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
5.Stampare lo schema di prova.
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张（a）的线

测试图案 (b) ：调高设定值。（2）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (c) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.1mm
4.按 [ 开始 ] 键，以确定设定值。
5.打印测试图案。
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (a) 에서 라인 (2) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (b) ：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (c) ：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량：0.1mm ＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
4.[ 복사 / 시작 ] 키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
5.시험 패턴을 인쇄합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれが基準

テストパターン (b) : 設定値を上げる。値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (c) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >20mm±1.5mm
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.1mm
4.[ スタート ] キーを押し、設定値を確定する。
5.テストパターンを出力する。
9
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f
Adjusting the center line

1.Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (d). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> within ±0.5mm.
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].
Ajuste de la línea central

1.Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4) del patrón de prueba (d). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±0,5mm.
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
Einstellen der Mittenlinie

1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (d). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].
Regolazione della linea centrale

1.Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (d). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±0,5mm.
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
中心线调节
1.确认纸张的中心（3）和测试样张（d）的线（4）之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > ±0.5mm 以内
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Left］ > ［Cassette3］或［Cassette4］。
센터라인 조정
1.용지 중앙 (3) 과 테스트 패턴 (d) 의 라인 (4) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ ±0.5mm 이내
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 을 선택합니다 .
センターライン調整
1.紙のセンター(3) とテストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ ±0.5mm 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
10
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±0.5mm.

Mire d' essai (e) : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (d) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (d) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±0,5mm.

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (d) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
3.Regolare i valori. 6.Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (d) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±0,5mm
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张（d）的线

测试图案 (e) ：调高设定值。（4）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (f) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 >±0.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (d) 에서 라인 (4) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (e)：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (f)：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량：0.1mm ＜기준치＞ ±0.5mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれが基準

テストパターン (e) : 設定値を上げる。値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (f) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >±0.5mm 以内
11
MEMO
2016. 6
303RB56710-02
PF-7110
(1500 sheets × 2 Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-7110
A G* D
E(M4x20) F AA
B C(M3x8)
MFP
G*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.

G*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
G*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
G*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
G*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
G*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ⿽㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼Ǆ
G*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
G*; ௙ྥᆅ࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
1
ճճ
մ մ
յ
մյ յ
ն
ն
նշ շ
շո
ոչ
ո չչ
պ
2
ճ
պ ջ
ջ ռ
ߑ
AA
ս
ռմ յ
ս
ߒ
C(M3x8)
ߑ
AA
վն
վ շ
C(M3x8)
տո չ
3
ր
RR FL RR FL
1
1 1
RR
FL
D
E(M4x20)
RR FL RR FL
1 1
1 RR
FL
1 1
1
D E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
놹鵹ꗞ덵ꮕ ') 閵ꗉ鲚ꐩ꾅뇆덵鷕ꯍ넽鵹ꈒ霡ꐂ᧤᧥냹꫕몒뼩驍ꩡ06멵넩뱭 ( 閶闑ꈑ꫙렍뼞鱽鲙
4
RR FL RR FL
F D
1 1
RR
1
FL
D
E
D 1 1
1
D
E E(M4x20)
on the floor.
sur le sol.
sul pavimento.
5
ց
ߑ
ւ
ON
6
Changing paper size
A4 B5
Modification du format du papier
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel ձ

Ändern des Papierformats
Cambio del formato della carta
㓨ᕐቪረᴤ᭩ ߑ
㟝㫴䆠ὤGⷴᷱ
⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬኚ᭦
ߒ
ղ ճ
մ յ
1 պ
ն շ
7
ո
2 ս
2ࠉս
8
ռ ս
տ ր
ց Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.

Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen Sie das Papierformat ein.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare il formato carta.
ᢗ㹼㔤‫⁑؞‬ᔿ8ˈ䘋㹼㓨ᕐቪረⲴ䇮ᇊǄ
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
9
A4 Letter
10
մ
յ ն
㹼 PP
11
ո Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
12
Letter A4
ձ
ճ
* Service Parts
Parts No.
* 303RC1008_
*
*
*
13
մ
յ ն
㹼 PP
ߑ ߒ
ߔ ߓ
14
ո Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
15
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
English
Adjusting the leading edge timing
1.Check the gap between the paper leading edge (1) and the line (2) of test pattern (a). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according
to the following procedure.
<Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Français
Réglage de la synchronisation du bord de tête
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le bord de tête du papier (1) et la ligne (2) du motif de (a). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure
suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Español
Ajuste de la sincronización del borde superior
1.Compruebe el espacio entre el borde superior del papel (1) y la línea (2) del patrón de prueba (a). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajús-
tela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Deutsch
Einstellen des Vorderkanten-Timing
1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papier-Vorderkante (1) und der Linie (2) auf der Testseite (a). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezug-
swert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert>20mm±1.5mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
Italiano
Regolazione della sincronizzazione del bordo superiore
1.Controllare lo spazio tra il bordo superiore del foglio (1) e la linea (2) dello schema di prova (a). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, rego-
lare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)].
简体中文
前端对位调节
1.确认纸张的前端（1）和测试样张（a）的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Top］ > ［Cassette(L)］。
한국어
선단 타이밍 조정
1.용지 선단 (1) 과 테스트 패턴 (a) 의 라인 (2) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
先端タイミング調整
1.紙の先端 (1) とテストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ 20mm±1.5mm
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Top] > [Cassette(L)] を選択する。
16
㸫
1
2
㸩
a b c
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern (a) is within the ref-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> 20mm±1.5mm

Mire d' essai (c) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (a) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> 20mm±1.5mm

Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (a) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> De 20mm±1.5mm

Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (a) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> 20mm±1.5mm

Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (a) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> 20mm±1.5mm
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张（a）的线

测试图案 (b) ：调高设定值。（2）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (c) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 > 20mm±1.5mm
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (a) 에서 라인 (2) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (b) ：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (c) ：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
1 스텝당 변화량：0.1mm ＜기준치＞ 20mm±1.5mm
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (a) の線 (2) のずれが基準

テストパターン (b) : 設定値を上げる。値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (c) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >20mm±1.5mm
17
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f

1.Check the gap between the paper center (3) and the line (4) of test pattern (d). If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap according to the
following procedure.
<Reference value> within ±0.5mm.
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] or [Cassette4].
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier l'espace entre le centre du papier (3) et la ligne (4) du motif de (d). Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procédure suiv-
ante.
<Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] ou [Cassette4].

1.Compruebe el espacio entre el centro del papel (3) y la línea (4) del patrón de prueba (d). Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ajústela
siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±0,5mm.
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].

1.Überprüfen Sie den Abstand zwischen der Papiermitte (3) und der Linie (4) auf der Testseite (d). Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist,
den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] oder [Cassette4].

1.Controllare lo spazio tra il centro del foglio (3) e la linea (4) dello schema di prova (d). Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo
scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ±0,5mm.
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] o [Cassette4].
中心线调节
1.确认纸张的中心（3）和测试样张（d）的线（4）之间的偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Left］ > ［Cassette3］或［Cassette4］。
센터라인 조정
1.용지 중앙 (3) 과 테스트 패턴 (d) 의 라인 (4) 사이의 격차를 확인하십시오 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] 또는 [Cassette4] 을 선택합니다 .
1.紙のセンター(3) とテストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ ±0.5mm 以内
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、[LSU Out Left] > [Cassette3] または [Cassette4] を選択する。
18
3 4
$ $ $
㸫㸩
d e f
Test pattern (e) : Increase the setting value. of line (4) in test pattern (d) is within the ref-
Test pattern (f) : Decrease the setting value. erence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> within ±0.5mm.

Mire d' essai (e) : Augmentez la valeur de réglage. ce que l'espace de la ligne (4) dans le motif
Mire d' essai (f) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test (d) soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±0,5mm max.

Patrón de prueba (e) : Aumente el valor de configuración. que el espacio de línea (4) del patrón de
Patrón de prueba (f) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba (d) esté dentro de los valores de ref-
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> dentro de ±0,5mm.

Testmuster (e) : Den Einstellwert erhöhen. bis der Abstand der Linie (4) auf der Test-
Testmuster (f) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite (d) sich innerhalb der Referenz befin-
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±0,5mm.
3.Regolare i valori. 6.Ripetere i punti da 2 a 5 sopra indicati fino a

Modello di prova (e) : Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. portare lo spazio della linea (4) nello schema
Modello di prova (f) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova (d) all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> entro ±0,5mm
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张（d）的线

测试图案 (e) ：调高设定值。（4）的偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (f) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 >±0.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴 (d) 에서 라인 (4) 의 격차가 기준

테트스 패턴 (e)：설정치를 높입니다 . 이내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수
테트스 패턴 (f)：설정치를 내립니다 . 행합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターン (d) の線 (4) のずれが基準

テストパターン (e) : 設定値を上げる。値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (f) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 >±0.5mm 以内
19
MEMO
2016. 6
303RC56710-02
PF-7120
(3000 sheets Side Paper Feeder)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PF-7120
A D J B
C
L
K* F
M N
H
G(M4x8) E(M4x8P)
I AA
MFP
K*; Number and type of the parts supplied vary by destination.
K*; Le nombre et le type des pièces fournies varient selon la destination.
K*; El número y el tipo de piezas proporcionadas varían según el destino.
K*; Die Anzahl und Ausführung der enthaltenen Teile variiert je nach Auslieferungsort.
K*; Il numero e il tipo di parti fornite variano in base alla destinazione.
K*; ṩᦞൠ४ˈ䱴ᑖ䴦ԦⲴ⿽㊫઼ᮠ䟿Պᴹн਼Ǆ
K*; ạᴴ㜄G♤⢰G┍⸽G㍌⣽ḰG㦹⪌ᴴG␘⪹⏼␘U
K*; ௙ྥᆅ࡟ࡼࡗ࡚ࠊྠᲕ≀ࡢ✀㢮࠾ࡼࡧᩘ㔞ࡀ␗࡞ࡾࡲࡍࠋ
ձ ղ
1
մ
ն շ
2
չ
ջ ռ
3
ս վ
տ ր
ւ փ
4
ք
ध B
B 18 mm
5
न
6
प फ
ब भ
7
र
D
D
E(M4x8P)
E(M4x8P)
ळ ऴ
8
०
C
१ २
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
३
H
G(M4x8)
G(M4x8)
9
५ ६
ߑ
J
E(M4x8P)
ߒ
AA
७
a=b
MFP
G(M4x8)
PF
G(M4x8) a b
९ ॰
ON
10
A4 B5
Changing paper size
Modification du format du papier

ձ
Cómo cambiar el tamaño de papel
Ändern des Papierformats
Cambio del formato della carta
㓨ᕐቪረᴤ᭩
㟝㫴䆠ὤGⷴᷱ
⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬኚ᭦
11
ճ
մ յ
Run maintenance mode U208 and set the paper size.
Exécuter le mode maintenance U208 et définir le
format du papier.
Active el modo de mantenimiento U208 y ajuste el

tamaño de papel.
Führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U208 aus und stellen

Sie das Papierformat ein.
Eseguire la modalita manutenzione U208 e impostare i

formato carta.
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YW_㡸G㐘䚽䚨G㟝㫴䆠ὤG㉘㥉㡸G
䚝⏼␘U
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ
⏝⣬ࢧ࢖ࢬࡢタᐃࢆ࠾ࡇ࡞࠺ࠋ
12
Adjusting the cursor width
* A cursor width that is too small can hinder paper feeding,
while a cursor width that is too large can lead to problems such as skewed paper feed.
Réglage de la largeur du curseur

* Une largeur trop faible du curseur risque d'empêcher l'entraînement du papier et une largeur trop grande
risque d'entraîner des problèmes du type entraînement du papier de biais.
Cómo ajustar la anchura del cursor

* Una anchura del cursor demasiado pequeña puede impedir la alimentación de papel;
una anchura del cursor demasiado grande puede provocar problemas con la alimentación torcida de papel.
Einstellen der Cursor-Breite

* Eine zu kleine Cursor-Breite kann den Papiereinzug behindern,
wogegen eine zu große Cursor-Breite verkanteten Papiereinzug und ähnliche Probleme verursachen kann.
Regolazione della larghezza del cursore

* Una larghezza dei cursori troppo piccola può ostacolare l'alimentazione della carta,
mentre unalarghezza dei cursori troppo grande può essere causa di problemi,
come ad esempio l'alimentazione obbliqua della carta.
⑮ḽᇳᓜⲺ䈹㢸
Ćྲ᷌⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷ሿˈਟ㜭䙐ᡀн‫׋‬㓨ˈ⑨ḷᇭᓖ䗷བྷˈࡉਟ㜭ਁ⭏↚ᯌ䘋㓨ㅹᛵߥǄ
䀘㉐G䔡G㦤㥉
୔䀘㉐G䔡㢨G㣅㡰⮨GⱨἽ㫴SG䀘㉐G䔡㢨G䆠⮨Gᷱ㇠Ἵ㫴G☥㢨Gⵐ㈑䚔Gᴴ⏙㉥㢨G㢼㏩⏼␘U
࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡢㄪᩚ
࣮ͤ࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀᑠࡉ࠸࡜↓⤥⣬ࠊ࣮࢝ࢯࣝᖜࡀ኱ࡁ࠸࡜ᩳࡵ⤥⣬࡞࡝ࡀⓎ⏕ࡍࡿྍ⬟ᛶࡀ࠶ࡿࠋ
0.5~1.0 mm
13
2
1
2
a b c
English
1.Check the deviation between the center (1) of a correct image (a) and the center (2) of a test pattern. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust
the gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm
2.Set the maintenance mode U034 and select [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Français
Réglage de l'axe
1.Vérifier la déviation entre l'axe (1) d'une image correcte (a) et l'axe (2) d'une forme d'essai. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la
procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max
2.Passez en mode maintenance U034 et sélectionnez [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Español
1.Compruebe la desviación entre el centro (1) de una imagen correcta (a) y el centro (2) de un patrón de prueba. Si la separación supera el valor de ref-
erencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm
2.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U034 y seleccione [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Deutsch
1.Überprüfen Sie die Abweichung zwischen der Mitte (1) eines korrekten Bilds (a) und der Mitte (2) eines Prüfmusters. Wenn der Abstand größer als der
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm
2.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U034 und wählen Sie [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
Italiano
1.Controllare la deviazione tra il centro (1) di un'immagine corretta (a) e il centro (2) di un modello di prova. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferi-
mento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U034 e selezionare [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5].
简体中文
中心线调节
1.确认标准图像 (a) 的中心位置 (1) 与测试图案的中心位置 (2) 的偏移。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
2.进入维修保养模式 U034，把［LSU Out Left］ > ［Cassette5］。
한국어
센터라인 조정
1.적정화상 (a) 의 센터 (1) 와 테스트패턴의 센터 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U034 를 설정하고 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5] 를 선택합니다 .
日本語
1.適正画像 (a) のセンター(1) とテストパターンのセンター(2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞ ±2.0mm 以内。
2.メンテナンスモード U034 をセットし、 [LSU Out Left] > [Cassette5] を選択する。
14
2
1
2
a b c
Test pattern (b) : Increase the setting value. of line (2) in test pattern is within the refer-
Test pattern (c) : Decrease the setting value. ence.
Amount of change per step: 0.1mm <Reference value> Wthin ± 2.0 mm

Mire d' essai (c) : Diminuez la valeur de réglage. de test soit dans la référence.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,1mm <Valeur de référence> ±2,0 mm max.

Patrón de prueba (c) : Reduzca el valor de configuración. prueba esté dentro de los valores de refer-
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,1mm encia.
4.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ± 2,0 mm

Testmuster (c) : Den Einstellwert verringern. seite sich innerhalb der Referenz befindet.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,1mm <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ± 2,0 mm
4.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.

Modello di prova (c) : Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. di prova all'interno del riferimento.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,1mm <Valore di riferimento> Entro ± 2,0 mm
3.调整设定值。 6.重复步骤 2 ～ 5，直至测试样张的线（2）的

测试图案 (b) ：调高设定值。偏移值达到标准值以内。
测试图案 (c) ：调低设定值。 < 标准值 > ±2.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 6.테스트 패턴에서 라인 (2) 의 격차가 기준 이

테트스 패턴 (b) ：설정치를 높입니다 . 내가 될 때까지 2 단계 ~ 5 단계를 반복 수행
테트스 패턴 (c) ：설정치를 내립니다 . 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 6.テストパターンの線 (2) のずれが基準値内

テストパターン (b) : 設定値を上げる。になるまで手順 2 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
テストパターン (c) : 設定値を下げる。 < 基準値 > ±2.0mm 以内。
15
MEMO
2016. 2
303RL56710-01
DP-7100
(Document processor: RADF)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7100
A B C D E F
G(M4x10) H I(M3x8)
120V (North America / Latin America)

K J
ձ
230V (Europe)
K J
ղ ճ
մ յ
1
ն շ
0mm
B
1mm
ո չ
2
ռ
վ տ
ր ց ւ
3
փ
G(M4x10)
ք द
K
J
H I(M3x8)
4
ध
ON
5
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作，准备一张 A3 原稿（a），距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线（b）并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线（c）。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿（a）并进行测试复印，确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
6
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿（a），如果偏移值在标准值以上时，对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整。
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
（주의） 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。

MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
（注意）画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。
7
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 10. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 13. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page17. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 10. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 13. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 17 <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 10. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 13. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 17. <Valor de referencia>Dentro de ±1,5 %
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 10. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 13. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 17. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 10. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 13. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 17. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
必须按照以下步骤进行调整，否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度第 10 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度第 13 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认等倍值第 17 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .

・선단경사확인 10 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 13 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・등배도 확인 17 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±1.5% 이내
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 10 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
両面：±4.0mm 以内
・後端斜め確認 13 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
・等倍度確認 17 ページ＜基準値＞ ±1.5% 以内
8
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 19. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 21. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 23.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 19. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 21. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Copie recto verso: ±3,0 mm max.
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 23.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 19. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 21. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 23.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 19. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 21. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 23.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 19. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 21. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 23.
・确认前端定时调整第 19 页
±2.5mm 以内 < 标准值 >
・确认中心线第 21 页 < 标准值 >
单面：±2.0mm 以内，
双面：±3.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时，可以同时自动进行等倍值，前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整第 23 页
・선단 타이밍 확인 19 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±2.5mm 이내

・센터 라인확인 21 페이지 ＜기준치＞ 단면：±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면：±3.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하면 등배도 조정 , 선단타이밍 조정 , 센터 라인조정의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고에 의한 자동조정 23 페이지
・先端タイミング確認 19 ページ＜基準値＞ ±2.5mm 以内

・センターライン確認 21 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±2.0mm 以内、
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 23 ページ
9
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
according to the following procedure.
<Reference value> For single copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±3.0 mm.
For duplex copying: The horizontal gap of line (2) should be within ±4.0 mm.
[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]

1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
<Valeur de référence> Pour la copie recto : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±3,0 mm.
Pour la copie recto-verso : l’écart horizontal de la ligne (2) doit être de ±4,0 mm.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]

1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
<Valor de referencia> Para el copiado por una cara: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±3,0 mm.
Para el copiado dúplex: la separación horizontal de la línea (2) debe estar dentro de ±4,0 mm.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
<Bezugswert> Einzelkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±3,0 mm liegen.
Duplexkopie: Der horizontale Abstand der Linie (2) sollte innerhalb von ±4,0 mm liegen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]

1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>Per la copia singola: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ± 3,0 mm.
Per la copia duplex: lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (2) deve limitarsi a ±4,0 mm.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内。
双面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준체＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±4.0mm 이내
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞片面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合、線 (2) の左右ずれ：±4.0mm 以内
10
ղ
2.
2. ճ
3. 3.
4
մ
4.
4.
Adjust the position of the DP unit (A). Regolare la posizione dell'unità DP (A).
Loosen the adjusting screw (5). Allentare la vite di regolazione (5).
For
5. copy example (d): Slide the DP unit (A) to the machine rear (). Per un esempio di copia (d):
For copy example (e): Slide the DP unit (A) to the machine front (). Far scivolare l'unità DP (A) verso il retro della macchina ( ).
Tighten the adjusting screw (5). Per un esempio di copia (e):
Perform a test copy. Far scivolare l'unità DP (A) verso la parte anteriore della macchina ( ).
Stringere la vite di regolazione (9).
Eseguire una copia di prova.
Régler la position de l'unité CD (A). 䈳㢲'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅Ⲵս㖞Ǆ

Desserrez la vis de réglage (5). ᤗᶮ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (d): ༽ঠṧᕐ˄G˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘਾ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
Faire glisser l'unité CD (A) à l'arrière de la machine ( ). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄H˅ᰦ˖'3অ‫˄ݳ‬$˅ੁᵪಘࡽ‫〫ࣘ˅˄ח‬Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (e): ㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Faire glisser l'unité CD (A) à l'avant de la machine ( ). 䘋㹼⍻䈅༽ঠǄ
Serrez la vis de réglage (5).
Effectuer une copie de test.
Ajuste la posición de la unidad DP (A). kw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG㢌G㠸㾌⪰G㦤㥉䚌㉬㟈U

6. el tornillo de ajuste (5).
Afloje 7.
㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para la copia de muestra (d): ㈌䙀G㾨䙰OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ
Deslice la unidad DP (A) hacia la parte posterior de la máquina ( ). GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G◘㯱OGGGGPG㡰⦐Gⴴ㛨㨰㉬㟈U
Para la copia de muestra (e): ㈌䙀G㾨䙰OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ
Deslice la unidad DP (A) hacia el frente de la máquina ( ). GGkw㡔⏼䏬GOhPG⪰Gὤὤ㢌G㚒㯱GOGGGGPG㡰⦐G␭ᷜ㨰㉬㟈U
Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (5). 㦤㥉⇌㇠O\P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Haga una copia de prueba. 䊀㏘䏬G㾨䙰⪰G䚝⏼␘U
Stellen Sie die Position der DP-Einheit (A) ein. '3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ $ ࡢ఩⨨ㄪᩚࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (5). ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (d): ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ G ࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ $ ࢆᶵᲔᚋഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Schieben Sie die DP-Einheit (A) zur Geräterückseite ( ). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ H ࡢሙྜ㸸'3ࣘࢽࢵࢺ $ ࢆᶵᲔ๓ഃ㸦㸧࡟ࡎࡽࡍࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (e): ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Schieben Sie die DP-Einheit (A) zur Gerätevorderseite ( ). ࢸࢫࢺࢥࣆ࣮ࢆ⾜࠺ࠋ
Die Einstellschraube (5) festziehen.
Eine Testkopie erstellen.
11
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
6.After the adjustment, install the inner cover (4) which is removed in step 3.Close the DP cover (3).
7.Remove the original mat (C) and refit it (see steps 9 on page 2).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
6.Après l'ajustement, installez le capot interne (4) qui a été retiré à l'étape 3.Refermez le capot du DP (3).
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (C) et remettez-le en place. (Reportez-vous aux étapes 9 à la page 2.)
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
6.Después del ajuste, instale la cubierta interna (4) que se quitó en el paso 3.Cierre la cubierta del DP (3).
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (C) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 9 en la página 2).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
6.Nach der Einstellung installieren Sie die innere Abdeckung (4), die in Schritt 3 entfernt wurde.Schließen Sie die Abdeckung des DP (3).
7.Die Originalmatte (C) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 9 auf Seite 2).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
6.Al termine della regolazione, installare il coperchio interno (4), rimosso al punto 3.Chiudere il coperchio del DP (3).
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (C) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 9 a pagina 2).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
6.调整结束后，重新安装在步骤 3 中取下的内部盖板 (4)。关闭 DP 盖板（3）。
7.拆下原稿垫（C），参照第 2 页的步骤 9 再次装上。
5.벨크로 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

＜기준치＞단면의 경우 선 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
6.조정 후에 순서 3 에서 분리한 내부 커버 (4) 를 설치합니다 .DP 커버 (3) 를 닫습니다 .
7.원고매트 (C) 를 제거하고 2 페이지 순서 9 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。

6.調整終了後、手順 3 で外したインナーカバー(4) を取り付ける。DP カバー(3) を閉める。
7.原稿マット (C) を取り外し、
2 ページの手順 9 を参考に再度取り付ける。
12
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
<Reference value> For simplex copying: Within ±3.0 mm
For duplex copying: Within ±4.0 mm
[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]

1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
<Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]

1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
<Valor de referencia> Para copia simple: Dentro de ±3,0 mm
Para copia duplex: Dentro de ±4,0 mm
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
<Bezugswert> Für Simplexkopie: Innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Für Duplexkopie: Innerhalb ±4,0 mm
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]

1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
<Valore di riferimento> Per copia simplex: Entro ±3,0 mm
Per copia duplex: Entro ±4,0 mm
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值。如果超过标准值时，必须进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面时：±3.0mm 以内
双面时：±4.0mm 以内
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0mm 이내
양면의 경우：±4.0mm 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
＜基準値＞片面の場合：±3.0mm 以内
両面の場合：±4.0mm 以内
13
8.2. ղ ճ
3.
4
3
4.
մ 5.
յ
Adjust the height of DP. Regolazione dell’altezza del DP
Loosen the nut (3). Allentare il dado (3).
For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite di regolazione (4).
For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting screw (4). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite di regolazione (4).
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5 mm (5) Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (5)
Retighten the nut (3). Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
4
4
3
3
Réglez la hauteur du DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
Desserrez l’écrou (3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5 mm (5) ⇿ṬⲴ〫ࣘ䟿˖㓖PP˄˅
Resserrez l’écrou (3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
Adjust
Adjust the
the height
height of
of DP.
DP. Regolazione
Regolazione dell’altezza
dell’altezza del
del DP
DP
Loosen
Loosen the
the nut
nut (3).
(3). Allentare
Allentare ilil dado
dado (3).
(3).
Ajuste
For la
copyaltura del
example DP.(f): kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
For la
Afloje copy example
tuerca (f): Loosen
(3). (g): Loosen the the adjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4).
(4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di
∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U di copia
copia (f):
(f): Allentare
Allentare la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
(4).
For
Forlacopy
copy example
example (g): Tighten
Tighten the
theeladjusting
adjusting screw
screw (4). Per
Per un
un esempio
esempio di di copia
copia (g):
(g): Stringere
Stringere la
la vite
vite di
di regolazione
regolazione (4).
Para copia
Retighten de
the muestra
nut (3). (f): Afloje tornillo de ajuste(4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
(4).
Retighten the nut (3).
Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el tornillo de ajuste (4). Stringere di nuovo il dado (3).
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (5) XᵐGⷴ䞈⣽ஔ㚱WU\O\P
Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Réglez
Réglez la
la hauteur
hauteur du
du DP.
DP. 䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
䈳ᮤ'3Ⲵ儈ᓖǄ
Desserrez
Desserrez l’écrou
l’écrou (3).
(3). ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
ᶮ傠㷪⇽˄˅Ǆ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (f):
l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez
Desserrez la
la vis
vis de
de réglage
réglage (4).
(4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄I˅ᰦ˖ᶮᕋ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Pour
Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de réglage (4).
Die l’exemple
Höhe des DP de copie (g):
einstellen. Serrez la vis de réglage (4). ༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
'3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
༽ঠṧᕐ˄J˅ᰦ˖㍗പ䈳ᮤ㷪э˄˅Ǆ
Resserrez
Lösen Sie diel’écrou
Resserrez Mutter(3).
l’écrou (3).
(3). ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ሶ㷪⇽˄˅᤹৏ṧ㍗പྭǄ
Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Einstellschraube (4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ I ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube (4) festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ J ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm (5) ┠┒ࡾᙜࡓࡾࡢኚ໬㔞㸸⣙PP
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (3) wieder fest. ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ajuste
Ajuste la
la altura
altura del
del DP.
DP. kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
kw㢌G⋆㢨⪰G㦤㥉䚝⏼␘U
Afloje
Afloje la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (f):
(f): Afloje
Afloje el
el tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G⏄㏜䚌᷀G䚝⏼␘U
Para
Para la
la copia
copia de
de muestra
muestra (g):
(g): Apriete
Apriete elel tornillo
tornillo de
de ajuste
ajuste (4).
(4). ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
ⷜ䆠⦐OP㢌Gᷱ㟤ஔ㦤㥉⇌㇠O[P⪰G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Vuelva
Vuelva a a apretar
apretar la
la tuerca
tuerca (3).
(3). ∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
∼䏬OZP⪰G㠄⣌␴⦐G㦤㢹⏼␘U
Die
Die Höhe
Höhe des
des DP
DP einstellen.
einstellen. '3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
'3ࡢ㧗ࡉࢆㄪᩚࡍࡿࠋ
Lösen
Lösen Sie die Mutter
Sie die Mutter (3).
(3). ࢼࢵࢺ
ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster
Kopienmuster (f)
(f) :: Lösen
Lösen Sie
Sie die
die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4).
(4). ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ II ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ
ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆࡺࡿࡵࡿࠋ
Für
Für Kopienmuster (g): Die
Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
Einstellschraube (4)
(4) festziehen.
festziehen. ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ
ࢥࣆ࣮ࢧࣥࣉࣝ JJ ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ
ࡢሙྜ㸸ㄪᩚࣅࢫ ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
Ziehen
Ziehen Sie
Sie die
die Mutter
Mutter (3)
(3) wieder
wieder fest.
fest. ࢼࢵࢺ
ࢼࢵࢺ ࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
ࢆඖ㏻ࡾ⥾ࡵࡿࠋ
14
ն
6.
շ
7.
ո
8.
չ
9.
պ
10.
ջ
11.
15
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
12.Make a proof copy again.

13.Repeat steps 1 to 12 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
12.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.

13.Répétez les étapes 1 à 12 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
12.Haga otra copia de prueba.

13.Repita los pasos 1 a 12 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
12.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

13.Die Schritte 1 bis 12 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
12.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

13.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 12 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
12.再次进行测试复印。
13.反复操作步骤 1~12，直至复印样张的线（2）为标准值内。
12.다시 벨크로를 합니다 .

13.벨크로 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 12 을 반복합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
12.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
13.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 12 を繰り返す。
16
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Sub Scan(B): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (rear side)
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est
1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- de ±1,5%
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.
procédure suivante. Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
<Valeur de référence> ner(surface)
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est Sub Scan(B): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scan-
de ±1,5% ner (arrière)
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2.Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, ación secundaria del escáner(anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan(B): ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de explor-
<Valor de referencia> ación secundaria del escáner(reverso).
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2.Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) verwenden.
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan(B): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale

1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
<Valore di riferimento> ner (superficie)
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della Sub Scan(B): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scan-
linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5% ner(lato posteriore)
[ 确认等倍值 ] 2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值。 Sub Scan(F) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（正面）
如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Sub Scan(B) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（反面）
< 标准值 >
对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
[ 등배도확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Sub Scan(B)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（뒷면）
＜기준치＞
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
[ 等倍度確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面）
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Sub Scan(B)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 裏面）
＜基準値＞
副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
17
X X'
X' X
3 3
X' X
X 2 X' 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3. Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
3.Ajuste los valores. 5.Repita los pasos 2 a 4 anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,02 % Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值达

在长度偏短时复印样本（h）（j）：调高设定值到标准值范围内。
在长度偏长时复印样本（i）（k）：调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.02% 对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
4.进行测试复印。对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

길이가 짧은 경우 벨크로 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . .
길이가 긴 경우 벨크로 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.02% 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4

長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j)：設定値を上げるを繰り返す。
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k)：設定値を下げる＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.02% 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
18
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. Back Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (rear side)
<Reference value> Back Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing(rear side)
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. Back Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (arrière)
<Valeur de référence> Back Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (arrière)
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Back Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (reverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (reverso).
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Back Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert> Back Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Rückseite)
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Back Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (lato posteri-
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm ore)
Back Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (lato posteri-
ore).
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端对位 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > Back Head ：调整前端对位 ( 反面 )
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail ：调整后端对位 ( 反面 )
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ Back Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 Back Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 뒷면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
[ 先端タイミング確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ Front Head ：先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
が基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Front Tail ：後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
＜基準値＞ Back Head：先端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 Back Tail：後端タイミング ( 裏面 ) を調整する
19
2.5mm
2.5mm
1 2
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
Amount of change per step: 0.21 mm
4. Perform a test copy.
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,21 mm
4.Effectuer une copie de test.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,21 mm
4.Haga una copia de prueba.
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,21 mm
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
Entità modifica per passo: 0,21 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范

在前端定时偏快时复印样本（l）：调低设定值围内。
在前端定时偏慢时复印样本（m）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.21mm 线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 벨크로 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 벨크로 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내
1 스텝당 변화량：0.21mm
4.벨크로를 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰

先端タイミングが短い場合コピーサンプル (l)：設定値を下げる。り返す。
先端タイミングが長い場合コピーサンプル (m)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.21mm 線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。
20
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the Back: Adjusts the center line (rear side)
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- Back: Permet de régler l'axe (arrière)
dure suivante.
<Valeur de référence>
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> Back: ajusta la línea central (reverso).
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Back: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Rückseite)
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di Back: Regola la linea centrale (lato posteriore)
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
<Valore di riferimento>
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
[ 确认中心线 ] 2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。

1.确认原稿（a）中心线（1）和复印样本中心线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front ：中心位置（正面）的调整
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Back ：中心位置（反面）的调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
[ 센터 라인 확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 벨크로 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . Back：센터 위치（뒷면）의 조정
＜기준치＞단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±2.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
[ センターライン確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、

調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）
の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Back：センター位置（裏面）の調整
＜基準値＞片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
21
2
2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): riduce il valore. scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): aumenta il riferimento.
valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm

当中心向前偏移时复印样本（n）：调低设定值围内。
当中心向内偏移时复印样本（o）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.085mm 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.벨크로 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 내립니다 . 합니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.085mm 단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이：±2.0mm 이내
4.벨크로를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を

センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n)：設定値を下げ繰り返す。
る。＜基準値＞
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を上げる。片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.085mm 両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
22
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out
If there is no DP auto adjustment origina surface adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 4.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 3 until "OK" appears.
For details, see the service manual.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la tou-
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'origi- che Start pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
nal du DP 4.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
l'original de réglage. fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 3 jusqu'à
2.Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
appuyer sur la touche Start. Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 3.Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP realizar un ajuste de anverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 4.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2.Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 3 hasta que aparezca "OK"
de Start. en la pantalla.
Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 3.Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhan- betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
den ist 4.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
2.Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start- wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 3, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste betätigen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 3.Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP Start per eseguire la regolazione della superficie.
1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 4.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
2.Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 3
tasto di Start. fino a quando appare "OK".
Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。

没有 DP 调整用原稿时 4.如果屏幕上出现 "OK"（完成），则表示调整完成。
1.进入维修保养模式 U411，选择［DP Auto Adj］，输出测试原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上，按 Start 键。重复步骤 2 和 3，直到 "OK"（完成）出现。
详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 본체로 세트하고 시작 키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 다.
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 설정하고 [DP Auto Adj] 를 눌러 조정된 원고를 4.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
출력합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작 키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 3 를 반복합니다 .
상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、Start キーを押し、表面の調整を行

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合う。
1.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、
[DP Auto Adj] を押し原稿を出 4.ディスプレイに「OK」が表示されれば調整完了となる。
力する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、Start キーを押す。認し、「OK」が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 3 を繰り返す。
詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
23
5mm
F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until "OK" appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message "OK" apparaisse.
2.Passer au mode maintenance U411. Appuyer sur les touches [DP Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca "OK"
2.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U411. Pulse las teclas [DP en la pantalla.
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare "OK".
FU(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superfi- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
cie.
使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 3.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上，并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
定原稿。重复步骤 1 和 2，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
2.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FU(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行正面的详细内容请参照维修手册。
调整。
DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 3.디스플레이에 “OK” 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .

1.DP 자동조정원고 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
DP 본체로 세트합니다 . 인하고 “OK” 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FU(ChartB)], 시작키의 순서로 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .
DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 3.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
セットする。認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP FU(ChartB)]、Start キーの詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
24
2016. 2
303R756710-01
DP-7110
(Document processor: CIS)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DP-7110
A B(L) B(R) C(M4x14) D E F G
I P
L M
K(M3x8)
H(M3x8 BLACK) J
120V (North America / Latin America)

O N
ձ
230V (Europe)
O N
C(M4x14)
ղ ճ
B(L) C(M4x14)
A
B(R)
մ C(M4x14) յ
D
C(M4x14)
1
ն շ
E C(M4x14)
շ շ-2
ո շ-2
ߑ
շ-2
ߑ ߒ
ߓ ߔ
2
ߕ ߖ
ߗ ߘ
ո չ
F
G
H(M3x8 BLACK)
պ ջ
3
ռ ս
վ ࠉտ
ր ց
4
փ
द ध
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
K(M3x8)
5
न ऩ
प फ
ब भ
N
O
6
य
ON
7
20mm 20mm
c
20mm
20mm
[Operation check]
1.To check the machine operation, prepare original (a) where 4 lines (b) are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line (c) is drawn at its
center.
2.Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power switch on.
3.Set the original (a) on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example.
[Vérification du fonctionnement]
1.Pour vérifier le bon fonctionnement de l’appareil, préparer un original (a) sur lequel sont tracées 4 lignes (b) à 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1
ligne (c) en son axe.
2.Brancher la fiche d’alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l’appareil sous tension.
3.Placer l’original (a) sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour vérifier le fonctionnement et l’exemple de copie.
[Verifique el funcionamiento]
1.Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato, prepare un original (a) que contenga 4 líneas (b) dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1
línea (c) dibujada en el centro.
2.Conecte el enchufe eléctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal.
3.Coloque el original (a) en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia.
[Funktionsprüfung]
1.Zum Prüfen der Gerätefunktion das Original (a) vorbereiten, auf das 4 Linien (b) 20 mm von den Kanten des A3-Blattes und 1 Linie (c) in der Mitte
gezeichnet sind.
2.Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten.
3.Das Original (a) auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen, um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu prüfen.
[Verifica del funzionamento]

1.Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina, preparare l’originale (a) tirando 4 linee (b) a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea (c) al centro.
2.Inserire la spina dell’alimentazione dell’MFP nella presa a muro, quindi posizionare l’interruttore principale su On.
3.Posizionare l’originale(a) sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l’esempio di copia.
[ 动作确认 ]
1.若要检查机器动作，准备一张 A3 原稿（a），距纸张边缘 20mm 画出 4 条线（b）并且在原稿中心画出 1 条线（c）。
2.将 MFP 的电源插头插入墙壁插座并打开主电源。
3.在 DP 上设定原稿（a）并进行测试复印，确认机器动作和复印样本。
[ 동작확인 ]
1.기계 작동 확인을 위해서 , A3 용지 선단에서 20mm 떨어진 곳에 4 개의 선 (b) 과 센터에 1 개의 선 (c) 이 그려진 원고 (a) 를 준비 .
2.콘센트에 MFP 전원플러그를 꽂고 메인 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
3.DP 상에 원고 (a) 를 준비하고 테스트 카피를 확인하여 작동 상태와 카피 샘플를 확인합니다 .
[ 動作確認 ]
1.A3 サイズ用紙の端から 20mm の位置に線 (b)4 本と、
用紙の中心に線 (c)1 本を引いた、動作確認用の原稿 (a) を用意する。
2.MFP の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
3.原稿 (a) を DP にセットし、テストコピーを行い、動作およびコピーサンプルを確認する。
8
20mm 20mm
20mm
c
A
b B
20mm
4.Compare original (a) with the copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustments according to the type of the
gap.
Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP. For details, see the service manual.
NOTICE: If there is any image fogging, adjust the U068 DP scanning position. If you change the scanning position with U068, adjust the U071 DP
leading edge timing.
4.Comparer l’original (a) avec l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, effectuer les réglages suivants en fonction du type d’écart.
Vérifier les images du DP après avoir contrôlé et réglé les images du MFP. Pour plus de détails, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
REMARQUE:Si l’image est floue, régler la position de balayage de U068 du DP. Si la position de balayage de U068 est modifiée, régler la synchroni-
sation du bord d’attaque de U071.
4.Compare el original (a) con el ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, realice los siguientes ajustes según el tipo de separa-
ción.
Compruebe las imágenes del DP después de comprobar y ajustar las imágenes del MFP. Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
AVISO: Si la imagen estuviera borrosa, ajuste la posición de escaneo U068 del DP. Si cambia la posición de escaneo con U068, ajuste la sincroni-
zación de borde superior U071 del DP
4.Das Original (a) mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Bezugswert ist, die folgenden Einstellungen gemäß dem
Abstandstyp durchführen.
Die Bilder des DP nach dem Prüfen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP prüfen. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
ANMERKUNG:Falls das Bild verschwommen wirkt, ist die U068 DP Scan-Position zu verstellen. Wenn Sie die Scan-Position mit U068 verstellen,
müssen Sie das U071 DP-Vorderkanten-Timing entsprechend verstellen.
4.Confrontare l’originale (a) con l’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento.
Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull’MFP. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il man-
uale d’istruzioni.
AVVISO: Se è presente una qualsiasi sfocatura dell’immagine, regolare la posizione di scansione DP U068. Se si cambia la posizione di scansione
con U068, regolare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale DP U071.
4.对比复印样本和原稿（a），如果偏移值在标准值以上时，对偏移原稿进行调整。
对 MFP 的图像确认和调整后再对 DP 的图像进行确认。详细内容请参见维修手册。
（注意）如果图像出现底灰，用 U068 来调整 DP 的扫描位置。如果用 U068 更改了扫描位置，则再用 U071 对 DP 的前端定时进行调整
4.원고 (a) 와 카피 샘플을 비교하여 차이가 기준치를 벗어나는 경우 , 차이 ( 틈 ) 의 형태에 따라 다음을 조정합니다 .
MFP 의 화상확인 및 조정을 하고나서 DP 의 화상확인을 할 것 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조할 것 .
（주의） 화상 카브리가 발생하는 경우 , U068DP 스캔위치 조정을 합니다 . U068 에서 스캔위치를 변경한 경우 U071DP 선단 타이밍 조정을 합니다 .
4.原稿 (a) とコピーサンプルを比較し、基準値以上のずれがある場合、ずれ方に応じて調整を行う。

MFP の画像確認及び調整を行ってから DP の画像確認を行うこと。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
（注意）画像カブリが発生する場合、U068 DP 読み取り位置の調整を行う。U068 で読み取り位置を変更した場合、U071 DP 先端タイミング調整を行う。
9
Be sure to adjust in the following order. If not, the adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
For checking the angle of leading edge, see page 12. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the angle of trailing edge, see page 15. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±3.0 mm; Duplex copying: within ±4.0 mm
For checking the magnification, see page 18. <Reference value> Within ±1.5%
Veillez à effectuer le réglage en procédant dans l’ordre suivant. Sinon, il sera impossible d’obtenir un réglage correct.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 12. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’angle du bord arrière, reportez-vous à la page 15. <Valeur de référence>Copie recto seul: ±3,0 mm max.; copie recto verso: ±4,0 mm max.
Pour vérifier l’agrandissement, reportez-vous à la page 18. <Valeur de référence>±1,5% max.
Asegúrese de ajustar en el siguiente orden. De lo contrario, el ajuste no puede hacerse correctamente.

Para verificar el ángulo del borde superior, vea la página 12. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el ángulo del borde inferior, vea la página 15. <Valor de referencia>Copia simple: dentro de ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: dentro de ±4,0 mm
Para verificar el cambio de tamaño, vea la página 18. <Valor de referencia>Dentro de ±1,5 %
Die Einstellung in der folgenden Reihenfolge durchführen. Anderenfalls kann die Einstellung nicht korrekt durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Vorderkante auf Seite 12. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung des Winkels der Hinterkante auf Seite 15. <Bezugswert>Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm; Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±4,0 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Vergrößerung auf Seite 18. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±1,5 %
Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza: in caso contrario, la regolazione non può essere effettuata correttamente.
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo principale, vedere pagina 12. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’angolo del bordo di uscita, vedere pagina 15. <Valore di riferimento>Copia simplex: entro ±3,0 mm; Copia duplex: entro ±4,0 mm
Per controllare l’ingrandimento, vedere pagina 18. <Valore di riferimento>Entro ±1,5%
必须按照以下步骤进行调整，否则不能达到准确调整的要求。
・确认前端倾斜度第 12 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认后端倾斜度第 15 页 < 标准值 > 单面：±3.0mm 以内，双面：±4.0mm 以内
・确认等倍值第 18 页 < 标准值 > ±1.5% 以内
반드시 하기의 순서로 조정을 할 것 . 순서대로 조정을 하지 않는 경우 바른 조정을 할 수 없습니다 .

・선단경사확인 12 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・후단경사확인 15 페이지 ＜기준치＞단면：±3.0mm 이내 , 양면：±4.0mm 이내
・등배도 확인 18 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±1.5% 이내
必ず下記の順序で調整を行うこと。順序通りに調整を行わない場合、正しい調整ができない。
・先端斜め確認 12 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
・後端斜め確認 15 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±3.0mm 以内、
・等倍度確認 18 ページ＜基準値＞ ±1.5% 以内
10
A
For checking the leading edge timing, see page 20. <Reference value> Within ±2.5 mm
For checking the center line, see page 22. <Reference value> Simplex copying: within ±2.0 mm;
Duplex copying: within ±3.0 mm
When using the original for adjustment, automatic adjustment of magnification, leading edge timing and center line can be performed at a
time.
For the automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment, see page 24.
Pour vérifier la synchronisation du bord avant, reportez-vous à la page 20. <Valeur de référence> ±2,5 mm max.
Pour vérifier la ligne médiane, reportez-vous à la page 22. <Valeur de référence> Copie recto seul: ±2,0 mm max.;
Lorsque vous utilisez l’original pour effectuer le réglage, vous pouvez effectuer automatiquement le réglage de l’agrandissement, de la syn-
chronisation du bord avant et de la ligne médiane en une seule fois.
Pour le réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage, reportez-vous à la page 24.
Para verificar la sincronización del borde inferior, vea la página 20. <Valor de referencia> Dentro de ±2,5 mm
Para verificar la línea central, vea la página 22. <Valor de referencia> Copia simple: dentro de ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: dentro de ±3,0 mm
Cuando utilice el original para el ajuste, puede hacerse un ajuste automático del cambio de tamaño, sincronización del borde superior y línea
central al mismo tiempo.
Para el ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste, vea la página 24.
Angaben zur Prüfung des Vorderkanten-Timings auf Seite 20. <Bezugswert> Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
Angaben zur Prüfung der Mittellinie auf Seite 22. <Bezugswert> Simplexkopie: innerhalb ±2,0 mm;
Duplexkopie: innerhalb ±3,0 mm
Bei Verwendung des Originals für die Einstellung können die automatischen Einstellungen für Vergrößerung, Vorderkanten-Timing und Mittel-
linie gleichzeitig durchgeführt werden.
Angaben zur automatischen Einstellung mithilfe des Originals auf Seite 24.
Per controllare la sincronizzazione del bordo principale, vedere pagina 20. <Valore di riferimento> Entro ±2,5 mm
Per controllare la linea centrale, vedere pagina 22. <Valore di riferimento> Copia simplex: entro ±2,0 mm;
Copia duplex: entro ±3,0 mm
Quando si utilizza l’originale per la regolazione, la regolazione automatica dell’ingrandimento, della sincronizzazione del bordo principale e
della linea centrale possono essere eseguiti contemporaneamente.
Per la regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale, vedere pagina 24.
・确认前端定时调整第 20 页
±2.5mm 以内 < 标准值 >
・确认中心线第 22 页 < 标准值 >
单面：±2.0mm 以内，
双面：±3.0mm 以内
使用调整用的原稿时，可以同时自动进行等倍值，前端定时以及中心线的调整。
・通过调整用原稿进行自动调整第 24 页
・선단 타이밍 확인 20 페이지 ＜기준치＞ ±2.5mm 이내

・센터 라인확인 22 페이지 ＜기준치＞ 단면：±2.0mm 이내 ,
양면：±3.0mm 이내
조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 , 등배도 , 선단타이밍 , 센터 라인의 자동조정이 한번에 수행됩니다 .
・조정용원고를 사용한 자동조정은 24 페이지 참조
・先端タイミング確認 20 ページ＜基準値＞ ±2.5mm 以内

・センターライン確認 22 ページ＜基準値＞片面：±2.0mm 以内、
調整用原稿を使用すると、等倍度調整、先端タイミング調整、センターライン調整の自動調整が一度におこなえる。
・調整用原稿による自動調整 24 ページ
11
[Checking the angle of leading edge]
1.Check the horizontal gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example positions. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap
[Vérification de l’angle du bord avant]

1.Vérifier l’écart horizontal entre la position de la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et celle de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de
référence, le régler selon la procédure suivante.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde superior]

1.Compruebe la separación horizontal entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Vorderkante]

1.Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) der Kopierbeispielspositionen prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer
als der Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo principale]

1.Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) delle posizioni dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il
valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
[ 确认前端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的左右偏移值。如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内。
双面复印时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内。
[ 선단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2) 의 좌우 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음의 순서대로 조정을 합니다 .
[ 先端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) の左右のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
12
B (L) / B (R)
A
C
C
B
B (L)
B (R)
2. Remove the left hinge cover (F) and the angle control fitting (E). Loosen the 2 M4 × 14 screws (C) on the left and right fixing fittings (B(L))(B(R)).
3.Turn adjusting screw (3) at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position.
For copy example (d): Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side.
For copy example (e): Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side.
Amount of change per scale: Approx. 1.0 mm
4.Perform a test copy.
2. Déposer le couvercle de la charnière gauche (F) et la fixation d'angle (assurant le contrôle de l'ouverture) (E). Desserrer les 2 vis M4 × 14 (C) sur les fixations gauche et
droite (B(L))(B(R)).
3. Tourner la vis de réglage (3) à l’arrière de la charnière droite pour régler la position du DP.
Pour l’exemple de copie (d) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’intérieur.
Pour l’exemple de copie (e) : tourner la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre et déplacer le DP vers l’avant.
Changement par graduation d’échelle : environ 1,0 mm
4. Effectuer une copie de test.
2. Quite la cubierta de la bisagra izquierda (F) y el herraje de control de ángulo (E). Afloje los 2 tornillos M4 × 14 (C) de los herrajes de fijación izquierdo y derecho
(B(L))(B(R)).
3. Gire el tornillo de ajuste (3) en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posición del DP.
Para el ejemplo de copia (d): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno.
Para el ejemplo de copia (e): gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal.
Magnitud del cambio por escala: aprox. 1,0 mm
4. Haga una copia de prueba.
2. Die linke Scharnierabdeckung (F) und die Winkeleinstellbefestigung (E) entfernen. Die 2 M4 × 14 Schrauben (C) an den linken und rechten Befestigungshalterungen
(B(L))(B(R)) lösen.
3. Die Einstellschraube (3) an der Rückseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen, um die DP-Position einzustellen.
Kopierbeispiel (d): Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben.
Kopierbeispiel (e): Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben.
Änderung pro Maßstab: Ungefähr 1,0 mm
4. Eine Testkopie erstellen.
2. Rimuovere il coperchio cerniera sinistra (F) e l'accessorio di regolazione angolare (E). Allentare le 2 viti M4 × 14 (C) sui lati destro e sinistro degli accessori di fissaggio
(B(L))(B(R)) destro e sinistro.
3. Ruotare la vite di regolazione (3) sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP.
Per l’esempio di copia (d): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l’interno.
Per l’esempio di copia (e): ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti.
Entità modifica per scala: circa 1,0 mm
4. Eseguire una copia di prova.
2.拆下左部铰链盖板 (F) 以及角度限制工具 (E)。拧松左右固定工具 (B(L))(B(R)) 的 2 颗 M4x14(C) 螺丝。

3.旋转右部铰链的后部的调整螺钉（3）以调整 DP 位置。
对于复印样本 (d) ：逆时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到内侧。
对于复印样本 (e) ：顺时针旋转调整螺钉并将 DP 移动到正面。
按比例尺的更改量：约 1.0mm
2.좌 힌지커버 (F) 및 각도 고정쇠 (E) 를 제거합니다 . 좌우의 고정쇠 (B(L))(B(R)) 의 나사 M4x14(C) 2 개를 느슨하게 합니다 .
3.우 힌지 뒷측 조정나사 (3) 를 돌려 DP 의 위치를 조정합니다 .
샘플 카피 (d) 의 경우：조정나사를 좌로 돌려 DP 를 안으로 넣습니다 .
샘플 카피 (e) 의 경우 ： 조정나사를 오른쪽으로 돌려 DP 를 앞으로 뺍니다 .
1 개 변화량：약 1.0mm
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
2.左ヒンジカバー(F) および角度規制金具 (E) を取り外す。左右の固定金具 (B(L))(B(R)) のビス M4x14(C)2 本を緩める。

3.右ヒンジ後側の調整ビス (3) を回し、DP の位置を調整する。
コピーサンプル (d) の場合：調整ビスを左に回し、 DP を奥へ動かす。
コピーサンプル (e) の場合：調整ビスを右に回し、 DP を手前へ動かす。
1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 1.0mm
13
5.Repeat the steps above until the gap of line (2) of copy example shows the following reference values.
6.After adjustment is completed, retighten two M4 × 14 screws (C) that have been loosened in step 2.
7.Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see steps 5 on page 1).
5.Répéter les étapes ci-dessus jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie indique les valeurs de référence suivantes.
6.Une fois le réglage effectué, resserrer les deux vis M4 × 14 (C) desserrées à l’étape 2.
7.Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 1) .
5.Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separación de la línea (2) del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia.
6.Una vez hecho el ajuste, vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos M4 × 14 (C) que ha aflojado en el paso 2.
7.Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
5.Die obigen Schritte wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
6.Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 × 14 Schrauben (C), die in Schritt 2 gelöst wurden, wieder festziehen.
7.Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbringen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 1).
5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento seguenti.
6.Una volta conclusa la regolazione, serrare nuovamente le viti M4 × 14 (C) che erano state allentate al Punto 2.
7.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).
5.重复上述步骤直至复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值达到标准值范围内。
< 标准值 > 单面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
双面时，线（2）的左右偏移值：±4.0mm 以内
6.调整完成后，重新拧紧在步骤 2 中松开的两颗 M4×14 螺丝（C）。
7.拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 1 页的步骤 5 再次装上。
5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 조정을 반복합니다 .

6.조정종료 후 순서 2 에서 느슨하게 한 나사 M4×14(C) 2 개를 조입니다 .
7.원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 1 페이지 순서 5 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで、調整を繰り返す。

6.調整終了後、手順 2 で緩めたビス M4×14(C)2 本を締め付ける。
7.原稿マット (M) を取り外し、1 ページの手順 5 を参考に再度取り付ける。
14
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
[Checking the angle of trailing edge]

1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, perform the following adjustment.
[Vérification de l’angle du bord arrière]

1.Vérifiez l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie. Si l’écart est supérieur à la valeur de référence, effectuez le
réglage suivant.
[Verificación del ángulo del borde inferior]

1.Verifique la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) de la copia de muestra. Si la superación supera el valor de referencia, haga el
siguiente ajuste.
[Überprüfen des Winkels der Hinterkante]

1.Die Abweichung der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) des Kopienmusters prüfen. Überschreitet die Abweichung den Bezugswert, ist die fol-
gende Einstellung durchzuführen.
[Controllo dell’angolo del bordo di uscita]

1.Controllare la differenza tra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) della copia di esempio. Se la differenza supera il valore di riferimento, effettuare
la seguente regolazione.
[ 确认后端倾斜度 ]
1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）的偏移值。如果超过标准值时，必须进行调整。
[ 후단 경사확인 ]
1.원고 (a) 의 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준치 외의 경우에는 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0m 이내
[ 後端斜め確認 ]
1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれが基準値外の場合は調整をおこなう。
15
3
5
A
B
6
9
8
7
4 10
2.Open the upper cover (3) of the DP (A). 4.Adjust the height of DP. Amount of change per scale: Approx. 0.5
3.Remove the 3 TP screws (4) and the screw Loosen the nut (8). mm (10)
(5), and remove the strap (6) from the rear For copy example (f): Loosen the adjusting Retighten the nut (8).
cover (7). Then remove the DP (A) rear screw (9). 5.Refit the rear cover (7) removed in step 3.
cover (7). For copy example (g): Tighten the adjusting 6.Remove the original mat (M) and refit it (see
screw (9). steps 5 on page 1).
Quantité de changement par pas: Environ 0,5

2.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur (3) du DP (A) 4.Réglez la hauteur du DP.
mm (10)
3.Déposer les 3 vis TP (4) et la vis (5) puis Desserrez l’écrou (8).
Resserrez l’écrou (8).
déposer la courroie (6) du couvercle arrière Pour l’exemple de copie (f): Desserrez la vis
5. Reposer le couvercle arrière (7) déposé à l'étape 3.
(7). Déposer ensuite le couvercle arrière (7) de réglage (9).
6. Retirez le tapis d’original (M) et remettez-le en
du DP (A). Pour l’exemple de copie (g): Serrez la vis de
place (Reportez-vous aux étapes 5 à la page 1).
réglage (9).
2.Abra la cubierta superior (3) del DP (A). 4.Ajuste la altura del DP. Cantidad de cambio de escala: Aprox. 0,5 mm (10)
3.Quite los 3 tornillos TP (4) y el tornillo (5) y Afloje la tuerca (8). Vuelva a apretar la tuerca (8).
quite la correa (6) de la cubierta trasera (7). Para la copia de muestra (f): Afloje el tornillo 5. Vuelva a colocar la cubierta (7) desmontada en
Después, quite la cubierta trasera (7) del DP de ajuste (9). el paso 3.
(A). Para la copia de muestra (g): Apriete el 6. Desmonte la plancha de original (M) y vuelva a
tornillo de ajuste (9). colocar (vea los pasos 5 en la página 1).
Änderungsbetrag pro Skalenstrich: Ca. 0,5 mm

2.Die obere Abdeckung (3) des DP (A) öffnen. 4.Die Höhe des DP einstellen.
(10)
3.Die 3 TP-Schrauben (4) und die Schraube Lösen Sie die Mutter (8).
Ziehen Sie die Mutter (8) wieder fest.
(5) entfernen und den Riemen (6) von der Für Kopienmuster (f): Lösen Sie die Ein-
5. Die in Schritt 3 entfernte hintere Abdeckung (7)
hinteren Abdeckung (7) abnehmen. Dann stellschraube (9).
wieder anbringen.
die hintere Abdeckung (7) des DP (A) Für Kopienmuster (g): Die Einstellschraube
6. Die Originalmatte (M) abnehmen und wieder anbrin-
abnehmen. (9) festziehen.
gen (siehe Schritte 5 auf Seite 1) .
2.Aprire il pannello superiore (3) del DP (A). 4.Regolazione dell’altezza del DP Variazione graduale: Circa 0,5 mm (10)
3.Rimuovere le 3 viti TP (4) e la vite (5), e Allentare il dado (8). Stringere di nuovo il dado (8).
quindi rimuovere la cinghietta (6) dal coper- Per un esempio di copia (f): Allentare la vite 5.Reinserire il coperchio posteriore (7)
chio posteriore (7). Quindi rimuovere il di regolazione (9). rimosso nel passo 3.
coperchio posteriore (7) del DP (A). Per un esempio di copia (g): Stringere la vite 6.Rimuovere il coprioriginale (M) e reinserirlo
di regolazione (9). (vedere i passi 5 a pagina 1).
2.打开 DP（A）的上盖板（3）。 4.调整 DP 的高度。每 1 格的移动量：约 0.5mm（10）

3.拆除 3 颗 TP 螺丝 (4) 和 1 颗螺丝 (5)，将塑松驰螺母（8）。将螺母（8）按原样紧固好。
料片 (6) 从后盖板 (7) 上拆除，拆下 DP 主机复印样张（f）时：松弛调整螺丝（9）。 5.重新安装在步骤 3 中拆下的后盖板（7）。
(A) 的后盖板 (7)。复印样张（g）时：紧固调整螺丝（9）。 6.拆下原稿垫（M），参照第 1 页的步骤 5 再次
装上。
2.DP(A) 의 DP 윗 커버 (3) 를 엽니다 . 4.DP 의 높이를 조정합니다 . 1 개 변화량：약 0.5mm(10)

3.TP 나사 (4) 3 개와 나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 너트 (8) 를 느슨하게 합니다 . 너트 (8) 를 원래대로 조입니다 .
스트랩 (6) 을 뒷면 커버 (7) 에서 제거해 샘플 카피 (f) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 느슨 5.순서 3 에서 제거한 뒷 커버 (7) 를 원래대로
DP(A) 의후면 커버 (7) 를 제거합니다 . 하게 합니다 . 장착합니다 .
샘플 카피 (g) 의 경우：조정나사 (9) 를 조입 6.원고매트 (M) 를 제거하고 1 페이지 순서 5
니다 . 을 참고로 다시 부착합니다 .
2.DP(A) の DP 上カバー(3) を開く。 4.DP の高さを調整する。 1 目盛り当たりの変化量：約 0.5mm(10)

3.TP ビス (4)3 本とビス (5)1 本を外し、ストナット (8) をゆるめる。ナット (8) を元通り締める。
ラップ (6) を後カバー(7) から外して、コピーサンプル (f) の場合：調整ビス (9) を 5.手順 3 で取り外した後カバー(7) を元通り
DP(A) の後カバー(7) を取り外す。ゆるめる。取り付ける。
コピーサンプル (g) の場合：調整ビス (9) を 6.原稿マット (M) を取り外し、1 ページの手順
締める。 5 を参考に再度取り付ける。
16
A
B
2
1
3mm/4mm
3mm/4mm
a f 2 g
7.Make a proof copy again.

8.Repeat steps 1 to 6 until line (2) of copy example shows the following the reference values.
7.Effectuez à nouveau une copie de test.

8.Répétez les étapes 1 à 6 jusqu’à ce que la ligne (2) de l’exemple de copie corresponde aux valeurs de référence suivantes.
7.Haga otra copia de prueba.

8.Repita los pasos 1 a 6 hasta que la línea (2) de la copia de muestra tenga los siguientes valores de referencia.
7.Eine erneute Probekopie anfertigen.

8.Die Schritte 1 bis 6 wiederholen, bis die Linie (2) des Kopienmusters die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist.
7.Eseguire di nuovo una prova di copia.

8.Ripetere i passi da 1 a 6 fino a che la linea (2) dell’esempio di copia non mostra i seguenti valori di riferimento.
7.再次进行测试复印。
8.反复操作步骤 1~6，直至复印样张的线（2）为标准值内。
7.다시 테스트 카피를 합니다 .

8.샘플 카피 선 (2) 이 기준치내로 될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 6 을 반복합니다 .
＜기준치＞단면의 경우：±3.0mm 이내
7.再度テストコピーをおこなう。
8.コピーサンプルの線 (2) が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 6 を繰り返す。
17
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
B X
X'
2 X'
X
2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
[Checking the magnification] 2. Use the maintenance mode U070 to adjust the magnification.
1.Check the gap between line (1) of original (a) and line (2) (3) of copy Sub Scan(F): Adjusts the scanner sub-scan magnification (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Main Scan(CIS):Adjusts the scanner CIS main-scan magnification
according to the following procedure. Sub Scan (CIS): Adjusts the scanner CIS sub-scan magnification
<Reference value>
For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
[Vérification de l’agrandissement] 2. Pour régler l'agrandissement, utilisez le mode entretien U070.

1. Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) (3) de l’exem- Sub Scan(F): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du scanner(surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Main Scan(CIS):Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage principal du CIS du scanner
procédure suivante. Sub Scan (CIS): Permet de régler l'agrandissement du balayage secondaire du CIS du scanner
Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2) est de ±1,5%
Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3) est de ±1,5%
[Verificación del cambio de tamaño] 2. Para ajustar la ampliación utilice el modo de mantenimiento U070.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Sub Scan(F): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria del
escáner.(anverso)
(3) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia,
Main Scan(CIS):Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración principal CIS del escáner
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Sub Scan (CIS): Ajusta el cambio de tamaño de la dirección de exploración secundaria CIS del
<Valor de referencia> escáner
Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
[Überprüfen der Vergrößerung] 2. Zum Einstellen der Vergrößerung den Wartungsmodus U070 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Sub Scan(F): Zur Einstellung der Subscan-Vergrößerung(Oberfläche)
(3) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Main Scan(CIS):Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Mainscan-Vergrößerung
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. Sub Scan (CIS): Zur Einstellung der Scanner-CIS-Subscan-Vergrößerung
<Bezugswert>
Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb ±1,5%
[Controllo dell’ingrandimento] Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzontale della linea (3) deve essere
1. Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) dell’originale (a) e la linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo compreso fra ±1,5%
scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa proce- 2. Usare la modalità di manutenzione U070 per regolare l'ingrandimento.
dura. Sub Scan(F): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare dello scanner(superficie)
<Valore di riferimento> Main Scan(CIS):Regola l'ingrandimento di CIS main-scan dello scanner.
Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale della linea (2) deve essere com- Sub Scan (CIS): Regola l'ingrandimento della scansione ausiliare CIS dello scanner
preso fra ±1,5%
[ 确认等倍值 ] 2.使用维修模式 U070 调整等倍值。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值。 Sub Scan(F) ：读取副扫描等倍度的调整（正面）
如果偏移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Main Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取主扫描等倍度的调整
< 标准值 > Sub Scan(CIS) ：CIS 的读取副扫描等倍度的调整
对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
[ 등배도확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U070 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피의 선 (2)(3) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . Sub Scan(F)：스캔 부주사등배도의 조정（표면）
차이가 기준이외의 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Main Scan(CIS):CIS 의 스캔 주주사 등배도의 조정
＜기준치＞ Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS 의 스캔 부주사 등배도의 조정
부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
[ 等倍度確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U070 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれを確認する。 Sub Scan(F)：読み取り副走査等倍度の調整 ( 表面 )
ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Main Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り主走査等倍度の調整
＜基準値＞ Sub Scan(CIS)：CIS の読み取り副走査等倍度の調整
副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
18
X X'
X' X
A
3 3
X
X'
X'
X B
2 2
1
a h i j k
X X'
-1.5% 100 +1.5%
X
3.Adjust the values. 5. Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) (3) of copy
For the shorter length copy example (h)(j): Increases the value. example shows the reference value.
For the longer length copy example (i)(k): Decreases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.02 % For the sub-scan direction, vertical gap of line (2): within ±1.5%
4.Perform a test copy. For the main-scan direction, horizontal gap of line (3): within ±1.5%
3.Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 2 à 4 jusqu’à ce que l’écart de la ligne (2) (3) de
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte (h)(j) : l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
augmenter la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue (i)(k) : Pour la direction du balayage secondaire, l’écart vertical de la ligne (2)
diminuer la valeur. est de ±1,5%
Changement par graduation d’échelle : 0,02 % Pour la direction du balayage principal, l’écart horizontal de la ligne (3)
4.Effectuer une copie de test. est de ±1,5%
Para el ejemplo de copia más corto (h)(j): aumenta el valor. (2) (3) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
Para el ejemplo de copia más largo (i)(k): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,02 % Para la dirección de exploración secundaria, separación vertical de la
4.Haga una copia de prueba. línea (2): dentro de ±1,5%
Para la dirección de exploración principal, separación horizontal de la
línea (3): dentro de ±1,5%
3.Die Werte einstellen. 5.Die Schritte 2 bis 4 wiederholen, bis der Abstand der Linie (2) (3) des
Für die kürzere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (h)(j): Den Wert erhöhen. Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
Für die längere Länge des Kopierbeispiels (i)(k): Den Wert verringern. <Bezugswert>
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,02 % Subscanrichtung: Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±1,5%
4.Eine Testkopie erstellen. Hauptscanrichtung: Horizontaler Abstand der Linie (3): Innerhalb
±1,5%
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scostamento

Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore (h)(j): aumenta il valore. della linea (2) (3) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferimento.
Per l’esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore (i)(k): riduce il valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,02 % Per l’orientamento della scansione ausiliare, lo scostamento verticale
4.Eseguire una copia di prova della linea (2) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
Per l’orientamento della scansione principale, lo scostamento orizzon-
tale della linea (3) deve essere compreso fra ±1,5%
3.调整设定值。 5.重复上述步骤 2 到 4，直至复印样本上的线（2）、（3）之间的偏移值达

在长度偏短时复印样本（h）（j）：调高设定值到标准值范围内。
在长度偏长时复印样本（i）（k）：调低设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.02% 对于副扫描方向，线（2）的上下偏移值：±1.5% 以内
4.进行测试复印。对于主扫描方向，线（3）的左右偏移值：±1.5% 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2)(3) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합

길이가 짧은 경우 샘플 카피 (h)(j)：설정치를 높입니다 . 니다 .
길이가 긴 경우 샘플 카피 (i)(k)：설정치를 내립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.02% 부주사 방향의 경우 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±1.5% 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 주주사 방향의 경우 선 (3) 의 좌우차이：±1.5% 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2)(3) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4

長さが短い場合コピーサンプル (h)(j)：設定値を上げるを繰り返す。
長さが長い場合コピーサンプル (i)(k)：設定値を下げる＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.02% 副走査方向の場合、線 (2) の上下ずれ：±1.5% 以内
4.テストコピーを行う。主走査方向の場合、線 (3) の左右ずれ：±1.5% 以内
19
2.5mm
A 2.5mm
2
B 2
1
a l m
[Checking the leading edge timing] 2. Use the maintenance mode U071 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between line (1) on original (a) and line (2) of copy Front Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing (surface)
example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the gap Front Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing (surface)
according to the following procedure. CIS Head: Adjusts the leading edge timing for CIS scanning.
<Reference value> CIS Tail: Adjusts the trailing edge timing for CIS scanning.
Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
[Vérification de la synchronisation du bord avant] 2. Pour régler la synchronisation, utilisez le mode entretien U071.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre la ligne (1) de l’original (a) et la ligne (2) de l’exem- Front Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête (surface)
ple de copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la Front Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière (surface)
procédure suivante. CIS Head: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord de tête pour le balayage par le CIS.
<Valeur de référence> CIS Tail: Permet de régler la synchronisation du bord arrière pour le balayage par le CIS.
Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
[Cambio de la sincronización de borde superior] 2.Para ajustar la sincronización utilice el modo de mantenimiento U071.
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea (1) del original (a) y la línea (2) Front Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior (anverso).
del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el valor de referencia, Front Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior (anverso).
ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. CIS Head: Ajusta la sincronización del borde superior para exploración CIS.
<Valor de referencia> CIS Tail: Ajusta la sincronización del borde inferior para exploración CIS.
Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
[Überprüfen des Vorderkanten-Timings] 2.Zum Einstellen des Timing den Wartungsmodus U071 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Linie (1) des Originals (a) und der Linie (2) Front Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der Front Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing (Oberfläche)
Bezugswert ist, den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen. CIS Head: Zur Einstellung des Vorderkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
<Bezugswert> CIS Tail: Zur Einstellung des Hinterkanten-Timing für CIS-Scannen.
Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
[Controllo della sincronizzazione del bordo principale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U071 per regolare la
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea (2) sincronizzazione.
dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento, Front Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale (superficie)
regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura. Front Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita (superficie)
CIS Head: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo principale per scansione CIS.
CIS Tail: Regola la sincronizzazione del bordo di uscita per scansione CIS.
Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
[ 确认前端定时调整 ] 2.使用维修模式 U071 调整定时。

1.确认原稿（a）上的线（1）和复印样本上的线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front Head ：调整前端定时 ( 正面 )
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 Front Tail ：调整后端定时 ( 正面 )
< 标准值 > CIS Head ：调整 CIS 读取时的前段对位
线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail ：调整 CIS 读取时的后端定时
[ 선단 타이밍확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U071 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 선 (1) 과 샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 . 차이가 기준 Front Head ：선단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . Front Tail ：후단 타이밍 ( 표면 ) 을 조정합니다 .
＜기준치＞ CIS Head： CIS 스캔 시의 선단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .
선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내 CIS Tail： CIS 스캔 시의 후단 타이밍을 조정합니다 .
[ 先端タイミング確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U071 をセットし、調整を行う。

1.原稿 (a) の線 (1) とコピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれを確認する。ずれ Front Head ：先端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
が基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 Front Tail ：後端タイミング ( 表面 ) を調整する
＜基準値＞ CIS Head： CIS 読み込み時の先端タイミングを調整する
線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内 CIS Tail： CIS 読み込み時の後端タイミングを調整する
20
2.5mm
2.5mm A
2
2 B
1
a l m
3.Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
For the shorter leading edge timing, copy examples (l): Decreases the shows the reference value.
value. <Reference value>
For the longer leading edge timing, copy examples (m): Increases the Vertical gap of line (2): within ±2.5 mm
value.
4.Perform a test copy.
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
plus rapide (l) : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est Écart vertical de la ligne (2) : ±2,5 mm
plus lente (m) : augmenter la valeur.
Para una sincronización más rápida de extremo guía, ejemplos de (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
copia (l): disminuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Para una sincronización más lenta de extremo guía, ejemplos de copia Separación vertical de la línea (2): dentro de ±2,5 mm
(m): aumenta el valor.
Für den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (l): Den Wert ver- Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
ringern. <Bezugswert>
Für den langsameren Vorderkantentakt, Kopierbeispiel (m): Den Wert Vertikaler Abstand der Linie (2): Innerhalb ±2,5 mm
erhöhen.
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo scosta-

Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (l): mento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di riferi-
riduce il valore. mento.
Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata, esempi di copia (m): <Valore di riferimento>
aumenta il valore. Scostamento verticale della linea (2) compreso fra ±2,5 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova

在前端定时偏快时复印样本（l）：调低设定值围内。
在前端定时偏慢时复印样本（m）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.3mm 线（2）的上下偏移值：±2.5mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 선 (2) 의 차이가 기준치내가 될 때까지 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다

선단 타이밍이 빠른 경우 샘플 카피 (l)：설정치를 내립니다 . .
선단 타이밍이 늦은 경우 샘플 카피 (m)：설정치를 올립니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.3mm 선 (2) 의 상하차이：±2.5mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの線 (2) のずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰

先端タイミングが短い場合コピーサンプル (l)：設定値を下げる。り返す。
先端タイミングが長い場合コピーサンプル (m)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞
1 ステップ当たりの変化量：0.3mm 線 (2) の上下ずれ：±2.5mm 以内
21
A
2
B 2mm/
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
[Checking the center line] 2.Use the maintenance mode U072 to adjust the timing.
1.Check the gap between center line (1) on original (a) and center line Front: Adjusts the center line (surface)
(2) of copy example. If the gap exceeds the reference value, adjust the CIS: Adjusts the CIS center line
gap according to the following procedure.
<Reference value>
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
[Vérification de la ligne médiane] 2.Pour régler la ligne médiane, utiliser le mode entretien U072.
1.Vérifier l’écart entre l’axe (1) de l’original (a) et l’axe (2) de l’exemple de Front: Permet de régler l'axe (surface)
copie. Si l’écart excède la valeur de référence, le régler selon la procé- CIS: Permet de régler l'axe du CIS
dure suivante.
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
[Verificación de la línea central] Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
1.Compruebe la separación entre la línea de centro (1) del original (a) y ±3,0 mm
la línea de centro (2) del ejemplo de copia. Si la separación supera el 2.Para ajustar la línea central utilice el modo de mantenimiento U072.
valor de referencia, ajústela siguiendo este procedimiento. Front: ajusta la línea central (anverso).
<Valor de referencia> CIS: ajusta la línea central CIS
Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
cara: ±2,0 mm
[Überprüfen der Mittellinie] 2.Zum Einstellen der Mittellinie den Wartungsmodus U072 verwenden.
1.Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie (1) des Originals (a) und der Mit- Front: Zur Einstellung der Mittellinie (Oberfläche)
tellinie (2) des Kopierbeispiels prüfen. Wenn der Abstand größer als der CIS: Zur Einstellung der CIS-Mittellinie
<Bezugswert>
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
[Controllo della linea centrale] 2.Usare la modalità di manutenzione U072 per regolare la linea centrale.
1.Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale (1) sull’originale (a) e la linea Front: Regola la linea centrale (superficie)
centrale (2) dell’esempio di copia. Se lo scostamento supera il valore di CIS: Regola la linea centrale CIS
riferimento, regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura.
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm
[ 确认中心线 ] 2.使用维修模式 U072 调整中心线。

1.确认原稿（a）中心线（1）和复印样本中心线（2）之间的偏移值。如果偏 Front ：中心位置（正面）的调整
移值超过标准值，则按照下列步骤进行调整。 CIS ：CIS 的中心位置的调整
< 标准值 > 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
[ 센터 라인 확인 ] 2.메인터넌스 모드 U072 을 세트하고 조정을 합니다 .

1.원고 (a) 센터라인 (1) 과 샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 의 차이를 확인합니다 Front：센터 위치（표면）의 조정
. 차이가 기준치 외의 경우 다음 순서로 조정합니다 . CIS：CIS 의 센터 위치조정
＜기준치＞단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±2.0mm 이내
양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
[ センターライン確認 ] 2.メンテナンスモード U072 をセットし、

調整を行う。
1.原稿 (a) の中心線 (1) とコピーサンプルの中心線 (2) のずれを確認す Front：センター位置（表面）の調整
る。ずれが基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 CIS：CIS のセンター位置の調整
＜基準値＞片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
22
A
2
2mm/ B
2mm/ 3mm
3mm
1
2
a n o
3. Adjust the values. 5.Repeat the steps 2 to 4 above until the gap of line (2) of copy example
If the center moves more front, copy example (n): Decreases the value. shows the reference value.
If the center moves inner, copy sample (o): Increases the value. <Reference value>
Amount of change per step: 0.085 mm Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the single copying: ±2.0 mm
4. Perform a test copy. Horizontal difference of center line (2) for the duplex copying: ±3.0 mm
Pour l’exemple de copie (n) dont l’axe se déplace davantage vers l’exemple de copie indique la valeur de référence.
l’avant : diminuer la valeur. <Valeur de référence>
Pour l’exemple de copie (o) dont l’axe se déplace vers l’intérieur : aug- Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto : ±2,0 mm
menter la valeur. Différence horizontale de l’axe (2) pour la copie recto-verso : ±3,0 mm
Si el centro se desplaza más hacia el frente, ejemplo de copia (n): dis- (2) del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia.
minuye el valor. <Valor de referencia>
Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro, ejemplo de copia (0): aumenta el Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado por una
valor. cara: ±2,0 mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,085 mm Diferencia horizontal de la línea de centro (2) para el copiado dúplex:
4.Haga una copia de prueba. ±3,0 mm
Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (n): Den Wert Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist.
verringern. <Bezugswert>
Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist, Kopierbeispiel (o): Den Wert Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Einzelkopie: ±2,0 mm
erhöhen. Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie (2) für die Duplexkopie: ±3,0 mm
3.Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 2 a 4 fino a quando lo

Se il centro si sposta più avanti, esempio di copia (n): riduce il valore. scostamento della linea (2) dell’esempio di copia riporterà i valori di
Se il centro si sposta verso l’interno, esempio di copia (o): aumenta il riferimento.
valore. <Valore di riferimento>
Entità modifica per passo: 0,085 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia singola: ±2,0 mm
4.Eseguire una copia di prova Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale (2) per la copia duplex: ±3,0 mm

当中心向前偏移时复印样本（n）：调低设定值围内。
当中心向内偏移时复印样本（o）：调高设定值 < 标准值 >
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.085mm 单面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±2.0mm 以内
4.进行测试复印。双面复印时，中心线（2）的左右偏移值：±3.0mm 以内
3.설정치를 조정합니다 . 5.샘플 카피 센터라인 (2) 차이가 기준치 내가 될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를

센터가 바로 앞으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (n)：설정치를 내립니다 . 반복합니다 .
센터가 안으로 틀려 있는 경우 샘플 카피 (o) : 설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞
1 스텝당 변화량：0.085mm 단면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 죄우차이：±2.0mm 이내
4.테스트 카피를 합니다 . 양면의 경우 센터라인 (2) 의 좌우차이：±3.0mm 이내
3.設定値を調整する。 5.コピーサンプルの中心線 (2) ずれが基準値内になるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を

センターが手前にずれている場合コピーサンプル (n)：設定値を下げ繰り返す。
る。＜基準値＞
センターが奥にずれている場合コピーサンプル (o) 設定値を上げる片面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±2.0mm 以内
る。両面の場合、中心線 (2) の左右ずれ：±3.0mm 以内
23
A
[Automatic adjustment using the original for adjustment] 4.Set the original on the DP face down and press the Start key to carry
If there is no DP auto adjustment original. out rear-side adjustment.
1.Set the maintenance mode U411 and press [DP Auto Adj] to output the 5.If "OK" appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original. If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
2.Set the printed original on the contact glass and press the Start key. position and repeat steps 2 and 4 until "OK" appears.
3.Set the original on the DP face up and press the Start key to carry out For details, see the service manual.
surface adjustment.
[Réglage automatique en utilisant l’original pour effectuer le réglage] 4. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en bas et appuyer sur la touche Start pour
Si la machine n'est pas pourvue de la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP procéder au réglage du côté arrière.
1. Passez en mode maintenance U411 et appuyez sur [DP Auto Adj] pour imprimer 5. Si le message "OK" apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le message
l'original de réglage. ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérififer la position de
2. Placer l'original qui vient d'être imprimé sur la vitre d'exposition et appuyer sur la l'original et recommencer les opérations 2 et 4 jusqu'à ce que le message "OK"
touche Start. apparaisse.
3. Placer l'original sur le DP côté imprimé en haut et appuyer sur la touche Start Pour plus de details, se reporter au manuel d’entretien.
pour procéder au réglage de la surface.
[Ajuste automático utilizando el original para el ajuste] 4. Coloque el original en el DP cara abajo y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un
Si no existe el original de ajuste automático del DP ajuste de reverso.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U411 y pulse [DP Auto Adj] para imprimir el 5.Si aparece "OK" en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
original de ajuste. Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
2. Coloque el original impreso sobre el cristal de contacto y pulse la tecla de Start. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 2 y 4 hasta que aparezca "OK"
3. Coloque el original en el DP cara arriba y pulse la tecla de Start para realizar un en la pantalla.
ajuste de anverso. Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
[Automatische Einstellung mithilfe des Originals] 4. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach unten einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti-
Falls keine automatische Einstellung des Originals des DP vorhanden ist gen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U411 und wählen Sie [DP Auto Adj], um das 5. Wenn am Display "OK" angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlossen. Wenn
Original für die Anpassung auszudrucken. ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen.
2. Das ausgedruckte Original auf das Kontaktglas legen und die Start-Taste betäti- Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wiederholen Sie Schritte 2 und 4,
gen. bis "OK" angezeigt wird.
3. Das Original mit der Druckseite nach oben einlegen und die Start-Taste betäti- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
gen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung ausführen zu lassen.
[Regolazione automatica eseguita con l’originale] 4. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso il basso e premere il tasto di Start per
Se non è presente l'autoregolazione originale DP eseguire la regolazione del lato posteriore.
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411, quindi premere [DP Auto Adj] per 5. Se "OK" appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare ERROR XX
stampare l'originale da utilizzare per la regolazione. (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la posizione di impostazi-
2. Posizionare l'originale stampato sul vetro di appoggio e premere il tasto di Start. one dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 2 e 4
3. Posizionare l'originale sul DP rivolto verso l'alto e premere il tasto di Start per fino a quando appare "OK".
eseguire la regolazione della superficie. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
[ 通过调整用原稿进行自动调整 ] 4.将原稿面朝下放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行反面的调整。

没有 DP 调整用原稿时 5.如果屏幕上出现 "OK"（完成），则表示调整完成。
1.进入维修保养模式 U411，选择［DP Auto Adj］，输出测试原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
2.将输出的原稿放在稿台上，按 Start 键。重复步骤 2 和 4，直到 "OK"（完成）出现。
3.将原稿面朝上放在 DP 主机上，按 Start 键以进行正面的调整。详细内容请参照维修手册。
[ 조정용 원고를 이용한 자동조정 ] 4.원고를 FaceDown 으로 DP 에 장착하고 시작키를 눌러 뒷면조정을 합

DP 조정용 원고가 없는 경우 니다 .
1. 메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 설정하고 [DP Auto Adj] 를 눌러 조정된 원고를 5.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
출력합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
2. 출력한 원고를 원고 유리에 장착하고 시작키를 누릅니다 . 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 2 ～ 4 를 반복합니다 .
3. 원고를 FaceUp 으로 DP 로 세트하고 시작키를 눌러 표면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
[ 調整用原稿による自動調整 ] 4.原稿を FaceDown で DP へセットし、スタートキーを押し、裏面の調整を

DP 調整用原稿が無い場合行う。
1. メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP Auto Adj] を押し原稿を出力 5.ディスプレイに「OK」が表示されれば調整完了となる。
する。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
2.出力した原稿をコンタクトガラス上にセットし、スタートキーを押す。認し、「OK」が表示されるまで手順 2 ～ 4 を繰り返す。
3.原稿を FaceUp で DP へセットし、
スタートキーを押し、表面の調整を行詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
う。
24
5mm
A
F 149 1mm B
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
Using a DP auto adjustment original 3.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
1.Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward, and set the If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
original from the place where F and R are marked. position and repeat steps 1 and 2 until “OK” appears.
2.Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FU(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out surface adjustment.
Avec la fonction réglage automatique d'original du DP 3.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.Si le
1.Diriger F (avant) et R (arrière) de la fonction de réglage automatique message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué. Vérifi-
d’original du DP vers le haut, puis placer l’original à partir de l’emplace- fer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 1 et 2 jusqu'à
ment des repères F et R. ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
FU(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage de la sur-
face.
Uso del original de ajuste automático del DP 3.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
1.Dirija F y R del original de ajuste automático del DP hacia arriba, y Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
coloque el original a partir del sitio en que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 1 y 2 hasta que aparezca “OK”
FU(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
anverso.
Gebrauch der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 3.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
1.F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach sen. Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstel-
oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle set- lung fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und
zen. wiederholen Sie Schritte 1 und 2, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
2.Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FU(ChartB)] und die Start- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Oberflächeneinstellung
ausführen zu lassen.
Uso di un'autoregolazione originale DP 3.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata.Se compare
1.Orientare F e R dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso l’alto e dis- ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
porre l’originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 1 e 2
2.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
FU(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione della superfi- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
cie.
使用 DP 自动调整用稿时 3.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

1.将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向上，并把标有 F 和 R 的一侧插入 DP 来设如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
定原稿。重复步骤 1 和 2，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
2.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FU(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行正面的详细内容请参照维修手册。
调整。
DP 자동조정용 원고를 사용하는 경우 3.디스플레이에 “OK” 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .

1.DP 자동 조정 원고를 F, R 을 위로 향하게 하고 F, R 이라고 표시된 곳 ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
에서 부터 원고를 셋팅합니다 . 인하고 “OK” 가 표시될 때까지 순서 1 ～ 2 를 반복합니다 .
2.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FU(ChartB)], 시작키의 순서 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조 .
로 눌러 표면 조정을 합니다 .
DP 自動調整原稿を使用する場合 3.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

1.DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を上に向け、F、
R が書かれている方から DP へ ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
セットする。認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す
2.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、[DP FU(ChartB)]、スタートキー詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
の順に押し、表面の調整を行う。
25
A 5mm
B F 149 1mm
A(149 5mm)
R 74 1mm
4.After completing the surface adjustment, direct F and R of the DP auto 6.If “OK” appears on the display, the adjustment is completed.
adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side If ERROR XX appears, the adjustment failed. Check the original set
where the F and R are marked into the DP first. position and repeat steps 4 and 5 until “OK” appears.
5. Set the maintenance mode U411. Press the [DP FD(ChartB)] and the For details, see the service manual.
Start key in that order to carry out rear-side adjustment.
4.Une fois le réglage de la surface effectué, diriger F (avant) et R (arri- 6.Si le message “OK” apparaît sur l'affichage, le réglage est terminé.
ère) de la fonction de réglage automatique d’original du DP vers le bas Si le message ERROR XX (erreur XX) s'affiche, le réglage a échoué.
et placer l’original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le côté sur Vérififer la position de l'original et recommencer les opérations 4 et 5
lequel F et R sont indiqués. jusqu'à ce que le message “OK” apparaisse.
FD(ChartB)] et Start dans cet ordre pour procéder au réglage du côté
arrière.
4.Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso, dirija F y R del original de ajuste 6.Si aparece “OK” en la pantalla significa que el ajuste ha sido realizado.
automático del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el Si aparece ERROR XX, el ajuste ha fallado. Compruebe la posición
DP, en primer lugar, el lado en el que están marcados F y R. ajustada del original y repita los pasos 4 y 5 hasta que aparezca “OK”
FD(ChartB)] y la tecla de Start, en ese orden, para realizar el ajuste de Para mas detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
reverso.
4.Nach dem Abschluss der Oberflächeneinstellung F und R der automa- 6.Wenn am Display “OK” angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung abgeschlos-
tischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das sen.
Original einstellen, indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den Wenn ERROR XX (FEHLER XX) angezeigt wird, ist die Einstellung
DP eingeführt wird. fehlgeschlagen. Überprüfen Sie die Originalpositionierung und wieder-
5. Den Wartungsmodus U411 einschalten. [DP FD(ChartB)] und die Start- holen Sie Schritte 4 und 5, bis “OK” angezeigt wird.
Taste in dieser Reihenfolge betätigen, um die Rückseiteneinstellung aus- Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
führen zu lassen.
4.Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie, orientare F e R 6.Se “OK” appare sul display, la regolazione è completata. Se compare
dell’autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l’originale ERROR XX (ERRORE XX), la regolazione non è riuscita. Verificare la
inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R. posizione di impostazione dell'originale e ripetere le operazioni 4 e 5
5.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U411. Premere nell'ordine [DP fino a quando appare “OK”.
FD(ChartB)] e il tasto di Start, per eseguire la regolazione del lato pos- Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
teriore.
4.完成正面调整后，将 DP 自动调整原稿的 F 和 R 向下，并首先将标有 F 和 6.如果屏幕上出现 ”OK”（完成），则表示调整完成。

R 的一侧插入 DP 来设定原稿。如果出现 ERROR XX（错误 XX），则表示调整失败。检查原稿设定位置并
5.设置维护模式 U411，按顺序按 [DP FD(ChartB)]、Start 键以进行反面的重复步骤 4 和 5，直到 ”OK”（完成）出现。
调整。详细内容请参照维修手册。
4.표면의 조정완료 후 DP 자동조정원고의 F, R 을 아래로 향하게 해 F, R 6.디스플레이에 "OK" 가 표시되면 조정완료가 됩니다 .
이 쓰여져 있는 쪽에서 DP 로 세트합니다 . ERROR XX 가 표시된 경우에는 조정실패입니다 . 원고 장착위치를 확
5.메인터넌스 모드 U411 을 세트하고 [DP FD(ChartB)], 시작키 순서로 인하고 "OK" 가 표시될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 5 를 반복합니다 .
뒷면조정을 합니다 . 상세는 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조
4.表面の調整完了後、 DP 自動調整原稿の F、R を下に向け、 F、R が書かれて 6.ディスプレイに｢ OK ｣が表示されれば調整完了となる。

いる方から DP へセットする。 ERROR XX が表示された場合は調整失敗である。原稿のセット位置を確
5.メンテナンスモード U411 をセットし、 [DP FD(ChartB)]、スタートキー認し、｢ OK ｣が表示されるまで手順 4 ～ 5 を繰り返す。
の順に押し、裏面の調整を行う。詳細はサービスマニュアルを参照のこと。
26
MEMO
MEMO
2016. 2
303R856710-01
DF-7100
(Inner Finisher)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DF-7100
A C E
B(M4x8) D(M4x10)
ձ
ղ
ղ
ղ
ߑ
ߒ
ߓ
ߔ ߕ
1
ղ
ߑ
2
մ
3
ո
B(M4x8)
B(M4x8)
4
ռ ս D(M4x10)
D(M4x10)
վ տ
5
60.0mm±2.0mm
(120mm)
English
Adjusting the stapling position
1.Connect the machine power plug to the wall outlet and turn the machine main power switch on.
2.Make a test copy using staple mode (double stapled).
3.Check whether the stapling position is off-center.If the staple position is off-center, follow the procedure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value> 60.0 mm ± 2.0 mm from the center of the paper
Français
Ajustement de la position d'agrafage
1.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine dans la prise murale et mettre la machine sous tension.
2.Procéder à une copie d'essai en mode agrafage (double agrafage).
3.Vérifier que la position d'agrafage n'est pas en décalage. Si la position d'agrafage est décalée, la régler en procédant de la manière suivante.
<Valeur de référence> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille de papier
Español
Ajuste de la posición de grapado
1.Conecte el enchufe de la máquina al receptáculo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal de la máquina.
2.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de grapado (grapado doble).
3.Compruebe si la posición de grapado está descentrada. Si la posición de grapado está descentrada, realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la
posición.
<Valor de referencia> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm del centro del papel
Deutsch
Justage der Heftposition
1.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in die Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie das Gerät am Gauptschalter ein.
2.Erstellen Sie eine Probekopie im Heftmodus (doppelt geheftet).
3.Prüfen Sie, ob die Heftposition außermittig ist. Falls die Heftposition außermittig ist, müssen Sie sie wie folgend einstellen.
<Bezugswert> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm von der Blattmitte
Italiano
Regolazione della posizione di pinzatura
1.Collegare la spina alla presa di corrente a muro e accendere l’interruttore di alimentazione della macchina.
2.Eseguire una copia di prova utilizzando la modalità di spillatura con punti metallici (spillatura doppia).
3.Verificare che la posizione di spillatura non sia fuori centro. Se la posizione di spillatura è fuori centro, seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare
la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm dal centro del foglio
简体中文
调节装订位置
1.将机器上的电源插头插入电源插座中，打开主电源开关。
2.在装订模式（2 点固定）下进行测试复印。
3.确认装订位置的中心偏差。装订位置偏离中心时，按以下步骤进行调节。
＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 60.0mm±2.0mm
한국어
스테이플 위치 조정
1.본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 .
2.스테이플 모드（2 곳）에서 시험복사를 합니다 .
3.스테이플 위치의 센터 어긋남을 확인합니다 . 스테이플 위치가 중심에서 벗어난 경우 , 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 .
＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 60.0mm±2.0mm
日本語
ステープル位置の調整
1.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。
2.ステープルモード（2 箇所止め）
でテストコピーを行う。
3.ステープル位置のセンターずれを確認する。ステープル位置が中心からずれていた場合、
次の手順で調整を行う。
＜基準値＞用紙センターより 60.0mm±2.0mm
6
(a) (b)
4.Set the maintenance mode U246 and select [Finisher] > [Staple HP]. 6.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
5.Adjust the values. 7.Perform a test copy.
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): 8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the staple position is within the reference
Decrease the setting value. value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b): Increase <Reference value> 60.0 mm ± 2.0 mm from the center of the paper
the setting value.
4.Passez en mode maintenance U246 et sélectionnez [Finisher] > [Sta- 6.Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
ple HP]. 7.Effectuer une copie de test.
5.Régler les valeurs. 8.Recommencer les étapes 4 à 7 jusqu'à ce que la position d'agrafe soit
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): réduire la conforme à la valeur de référence.
valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): aug-
menter la valeur de réglage. de papier
4.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U246 y seleccione [Finisher] > 6.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración.
[Staple HP]. 7.Haga una copia de prueba.
5.Ajuste los valores.
8.Repita los pasos 4 a 7 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la
dentro del valor de referencia.
máquina (a): disminuya el valor de configuración.
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos- <Valor de referencia> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm del centro del papel
terior de la máquina (b): aumente el valor de configuración.
4.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U246 und wählen Sie [Finisher] > 6.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.
[Staple HP]. 7.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
5.Die Werte einstellen.
8.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 7, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta-
des Bezugswerts liegt.
pelt wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt <Bezugswert> 60,0 mm ± 2,0 mm von der Blattmitte
wird:Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert.
4.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, quindi selezionare [Fin- 6.Premere il tasto di [Avvio] per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
isher] > [Staple HP]. 7.Eseguire una copia di prova.
5.Regolare i valori. 8.Ripetere i passi 4 to 7 finché la posizione di spillatura risulta all'interno
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte anteriore della mac- del valore di riferimento.
china (a): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
Se il foglio viene spillato troppo vicino alla parte posteriore della mac-
china (b): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
4.进入维修保养模式 U246，把 [Finisher]>[Staple HP] 。 6.按 [ 开始 ] 键，以确定设定值。
5.调整设定值。 7.进行测试复印。
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a) ：调低设定值。 8.重复步骤 4 ～ 7，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b) ：调高设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 60.0mm±2.0mm
4.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 설정하고 [Finisher] > [Staple HP] 를 선택 6.[ 복사 / 시작 ] 키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
합니다 . 7.시험복사를 합니다 .
5.설정치를 조정합니다 . 8.스테이플 위치가 기준치내가 될 때까지 순서 4 ～ 7 을 반복합니다 .
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 낮춥니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 60.0mm±2.0mm
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 높입니다 .
4.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、[Finisher] > [Staple HP] を 6.[ スタート ] キーを押し、設定値を確定する。

選択する。 7.テストコピーを行う。
5.設定値を調整する。 8.ステープル位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 4 ～ 7 を繰り返す。
ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を下げる。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 60.0mm±2.0mm
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を上げる。
7
MEMO
2016. 2
303RD56710-01
DF-7110
(4000 sheets Finisher)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DF-7110
A D
E
F(M4x20)
C(M4x8)
G H I J
B
AA
K
AK-7100
ղ A
Ｂ
AA
C(M4x8)
1
մ
b a
20 7 7
a
b a b b
a
2
շ
մ
յ
ո
ն
չ
b a
պ
20 7 7
a
b a b b
a
3
շ
շ
ջ
ո
ո
ռ
չ
չ
ս
պ
պ
վ
4
c
c=d 17
d
c＞d, c＜d 15
5
ւ
6
ध
ON
7
78.5mm±2.5mm
(157mm)
English
Français
Español
posición.
Deutsch
Italiano
la posizione.
简体中文
调节装订位置
한국어
日本語
8
(a) (b)
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase 8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the staple position is within the reference
the setting value. value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b): <Reference value> 78.5 mm ± 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Decrease the setting value.
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- conforme à la valeur de référence.
menter la valeur de réglage. <Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): réduire
de papier
la valeur de réglage.
5.Ajuste los valores. 8.Repita los pasos 4 a 7 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la dentro del valor de referencia.
máquina (a): aumente el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la máquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuración.
5.Die Werte einstellen. 8.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 7, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta- des Bezugswerts liegt.
pelt wird: Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert. <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a) ：调高设定值。 8.重复步骤 4 ～ 7，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b) ：调低设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 낮춥니다 .

ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm±2.5mm
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を下げる。
9
2016. 2
303RW56710-01
DF-7120
(1000 sheets Finisher)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
DF-7120
A B
E
F(M4x20)
D
AA
G
C(M4x8)
AK-7100
ղ Ｂ A
AA
C(M4x8)
1
մ
b a
15 7 7
a
b a b b
a
2
շ
3
ջ
c=d 14
d
c＞d, c＜d 12
4
վ
ON
5
78.5mm±2.5mm
(157mm)
English
Français
Español
posición.
Deutsch
Italiano
la posizione.
简体中文
调节装订位置
한국어
日本語
6
(a) (b)
If the paper is stapled too close to the front of the machine (a): Increase 8.Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the staple position is within the reference
the setting value. value.
If the paper is stapled too close to the rear of the machine (b): <Reference value> 78.5 mm ± 2.5 mm from the center of the paper
Decrease the setting value.
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'avant de la machine (a): aug- conforme à la valeur de référence.
menter la valeur de réglage. <Valeur de référence> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm depuis le milieu de la feuille
Si le papier est agrafé trop près de l'arrière de la machine (b): réduire
de papier
la valeur de réglage.
5.Ajuste los valores. 8.Repita los pasos 4 a 7 hasta que la posición de grapado se encuentre
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la dentro del valor de referencia.
máquina (a): aumente el valor de configuración. <Valor de referencia> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm del centro del papel
Si el grapado del papel se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte pos-
terior de la máquina (b): disminuya el valor de configuración.
5.Die Werte einstellen. 8.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 4 bis 7, bis die Heftposition im Bereich
Falls das Papier zu nahe am vorderen Rand des Geräts (a) abgesta- des Bezugswerts liegt.
pelt wird: Vergrößern Sie den Stellwert. <Bezugswert> 78,5 mm ± 2,5 mm von der Blattmitte
Falls das Papier zu nahe am hinteren Rand des Geräts (b) abgestapelt
wird: Verkleinern Sie den Stellwert.
china (a): Aumentare il valore di impostazione.
china (b): Diminuire il valore di impostazione.
装订位置向机器前部偏移时 (a) ：调高设定值。 8.重复步骤 4 ～ 7，直到装订位置在基准范围内为止。
装订位置向机器后部偏移时 (b) ：调低设定值。＜基准值＞距离纸张中心 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기앞측으로 벗어난 경우 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치＞ 용지 센터에서 78.5mm±2.5mm
스테이플 위치가 기기뒷측으로 벗어난 경우 (b)：설정치를 낮춥니다 .

ステープル位置が機械前側にずれている場合 (a)：設定値を上げる。＜基準値＞用紙センターより 78.5mm±2.5mm
ステープル位置が機械後側にずれている場合 (b)：設定値を下げる。
7
MEMO
2016. 2
303RV56710-01
AK-7100
(Bridge Unit)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
AK-7100
A G D
B C
AA BB(M4x20)
E
F(M4x12)
DF-7110
DF-7120
ձ
ղ
ղ
ղ
ߑ
ߒ
ߓ
ߔ ߕ
1
ղ
ߑ
2
ճ
3
շ
4
պ
պ
պ ջ
ջ
ջ
22
2
11
D
D
D
1
ռ
ռ
ռ
33
3 4
44
22
2
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
11
1 55
5
㸯Ѝ㸰Ѝ㸱Ѝ㸲Ѝ㸳
EE
E
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
F(M4x12)
ս
ս
ս
AA
AA
AA
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
BB(M4x20)
վ
վ
վ
G
G
G
5
2016. 6
303RG56710-02
MT-730(B)
(Mail Box)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
MT-730(B)
English
A different procedure is required depending on the product which is installed with this unit.Each procedure is described in the following pages.
When installing to a document finisher, see Page 1 to Page 6.
When installing to a Printer, see Page 7 to Page 12.
Français
Une procédure différente est requise selon le produit qui est installé avec cette unité.Chaque procédure est décrite dans les pages suivantes.
Lors de l'installation sur un module finition de documents, voir Page 1 à Page 6.
Lors de l'installation sur une imprimante, voir Page 7 à Page 12.
Español
El procedimiento es diferente según el producto que se instale con esta unidad.En las siguientes páginas, se describe cada procedimiento.
Para la instalación con un finalizador de documentos, consulte las páginas de la 1 a la 6.
Para la instalación con una impresora, consulte las páginas de la 7 a la 12.
Deutsch
Je nach verwendetem Modell ist eine andere Vorgehensweise zur Installation dieses Teils erforderlich.Die unterschiedlichen Vorgehensweisen werden
auf den folgenden Seiten erläutert.
Bei Installation an einem Dokumentenfinisher siehe Seiten 1 bis 6.
Bei Installation an einem Drucker siehe Seiten 7 bis 12.
.
Italiano
Si richiede una procedura diversa in funzione del prodotto su cui è installata l'unità.Le singole procedure sono descritte nelle pagine seguenti.
Quando si installa un finisher documenti, vedere le pagine da 1 a 6.
Quando si installa una stampante, vedere le pagine da 7 a 12.
简体中文
根据安装对象，安装步骤略有不同。各个步骤记载在下面的页面。
安装到装订器时，请参见第 1 ～ 6 页。
安装到打印机时，请参见第 7 ～ 12 页。
한국어
이 장치에 설치되는 제품에 따라 절차가 다릅니다 . 다음 페이지에서 각 절차를 설명합니다 .
문서 피니셔에 설치하는 경우 1 페이지 ~6 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
프린터에 설치하는 경우 7 페이지 ~12 페이지를 참조하십시오 .
日本語
装着する対象によって、
取付手順は異なります。それぞれ、
以下のページに記載しています。
ドキュメントフィニッシャーに設置する場合；1 ページ～ 6 ページ
プリンターに設置する場合；7 ページ～ 12 ページ
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ..... 1
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는

F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合

F. トレイ名称シール（ユーザー用）.........1 は必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
1
3
1
Procedure 1.Remove the front top cover (2) and rear top cover (3) at the top of the finisher (1) using a flat-
Before starting installation, be sure to turn the blade screwdriver or the like.
main power switch of the machine off, and
unplug the power plug from the wall outlet.
Procédure 1.Retirer le couvercle supérieur avant (2) et le couvercle supérieur arrière (3) situés en haut du
Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de retoucheur (1) à l’aide d’un tournevis à tête plate ou d’un outil équivalent.
mettre la machine hors tension et de
débrancher la fiche d'alimentation de la prise
murale.
Procedimiento 1.Remueva la cubierta superior delantera (2) y la cubierta superior trasera (3) en la parte superior
Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de del finalizador (1) utilizando un destornillador de punta plana o similar.
apagar el interruptor de encendido de la
máquina y desenchufar el cable de alimentación
de la toma de pared.
Verfahren 1.Entfernen Sie die vordere obere Abdeckung (2) und die hintere obere Abdeckung (3) an der
Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeu- Oberseite des Finishers (1) mit einem Klingenschraubendreher oder dergleichen.
gen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts
ausgeschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der
Steckdose gezogen ist.
Procedura 1.Rimuovere il coperchio superiore anteriore (2) e il coperchio superiore posteriore (3) dalla parte
Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la superiore del finitore (1) utilizzando un cacciavite a punta piatta, o un attrezzo simile.
macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di
corrente.
安装步骤 1.用一字形螺丝刀拆下装订器 (1) 上部的顶罩前盖板 (2) 和顶罩后盖板 (3)。

安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插
座拔下电源插头。
설치순서 1.피니셔 (1) 상부의 윗커버 앞 덮개 (2), 윗커버 뒤 덮개 (3) 를 마이너스 드라이버 등으로 제거합니
설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스 다.
위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리
하십시오 .
取付手順 1.フィニッシャー (1) 上部の天カバー前フタ (2) 、天カバー後フタ (3) をマイナスドライバーな

必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、機どで取り外す。
械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業するこ
と。
2
A
2.Fit the hooks (4) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches (5) located at the front and rear of the top of the finisher
(1) as shown in the illustration and attach the mailbox (A) to the finisher (1).
Note:
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between the mailbox (A) and the machine.
2.Insérer les crochets (4) se trouvant à l'avant et à l'arrière au fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les encoches (5) situées à l'avant et à l'arrière en haut
du retoucheur (1) comme illustré ici, puis fixer la boîte à lettres (A) au retoucheur (1).
Remarque:
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
2.Coloque los ganchos (4) ubicados en la parte inferior frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) en las muescas (5) ubicadas en la parte superior frontal
y trasera del finalizador (1), como se muestra en la ilustración, y coloque el buzón de correo (A) en el finalizador (1).
Nota:
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la
máquina.
2.Setzen Sie die Haken (4) an der Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) in die Öffnungen (5) vorne und hinten an der Oberseite des Finishers (1) ein,
wie in der Abbildung dargestellt, und bringen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Finisher (1) an.
Hinweis:
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
2.Inserire i ganci (4) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della parte di fondo della mailbox (A), negli incavi (5) posizionati sul davanti e sul dietro della
parte superiore del finitore (1) come mostrato nell’illustrazione, e fissare la mailbox (A) al finitore (1).
Nota:
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la
macchina.
2.如图所示，将位于邮箱 (A) 底部前后侧的卡扣 (4) 嵌入位于装订器 (1) 顶部前后侧的凹口 (5)，并将邮箱 (A) 安装至装订器 (1)。
注：
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
2.메일박스 (A) 하부의 앞뒤에 있는 후크 (4) 를 피니셔 (1) 상부의 앞뒤에 있는 파인 홈에 (5) 에 일러스트와 같이 삽입하고 메일박스 (A) 를 피니셔측에
장착합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합니다 .
2.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (4) をフィニッシャー(1) 上部の前後にある切り欠き部 (5) にイラストのように挿入し、メールボック

ス (A) をフィニッシャー(1) に取り付ける。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かないことを確認する。
3
A
A
E(M4x12)
A
6
8
3.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws 4.Remove the rear cover (6) of the mailbox 5.Plug the connector (7) of the mailbox (A) into
M4x12 (E). (A). the connector (8) of the machine body.
6.Reinstall the rear cover (6) of the mailbox
(A).
3.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis 4.Retirer le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte à 5.Brancher le connecteur (7) de la boîte à
M4x12 (E). lettres (A). lettres (A) dans le connecteur (8) du corps
de la machine.
6.Remonter le couvercle arrière (6) de la boîte
à lettres (A).
3.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos 4.Quite la cubierta posterior (6) del buzón de 5.Enchufe el conector (7) del buzón de correo
M4x12 (E). correo (A). (A) al conector (8) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (6) del
buzón de correo (A).
3.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei 4.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (7) der Mailbox (A)
Schrauben M4x12 (E). Mailbox (A). in die Steckbuchse (8) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (6) der
Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Fissare la mailbox (A) utilizzando le due viti 4.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (6) della 5.Collegare il connettore (7) della mailbox (A)
M4x12 (E). mailbox (A). al connettore (8) del corpo macchina.
6.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (6) della
mailbox (A).
3.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。 4.拆下邮箱 (A) 的后部盖板 (6)。 5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（7）插入机器的接插件

（8）。
6.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（6）。
3.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스 4.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 떼어냅니다 . 5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (7) 를 본체의 커넥터
(A) 를 고정합니다 . (8) 에 연결합니다
6.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (6) 를 다시 장착합니
다.
3.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、

メールボックス (A) 4.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を取り 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(7) を機
を固定する。外す。械本体のコネクター (8) に接続する。
6.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(6) を元通
りに取り付ける。
4
B
9 C
7.Insert the 2 hooks (9) on the front mounting 8.Install the rear mounting plate cover (C) on
plate cover (B) for the mailbox into the fin- the finisher in the same way.
isher to install the cover (B).
7.Insérer les 2 crochets (9) du couvercle de la 8.Installer le couvercle de la plaque de mon-

plaque de montage avant (B) de la boîte à tage arrière (C) sur le retoucheur en procé-
lettres dans le retourcheur pour installer ce dant de la même manière.
couvercle (B).
7.Para instalar la cubierta (B), inserte los 2 8.Instale de la misma manera la cubierta de la
ganchos (9) de la cubierta de la placa de placa de montaje trasera (C) en el finaliza-
montaje frontal (B) para el buzón de correo dor.
en el finalizador.
7.Setzen Sie die 2 Haken (9) an der vorderen 8.Bringen Sie auf gleiche Weise die hintere
Abdeckung der Montageplatte (B) für die Abdeckung der Montageplatte (C) am Fin-
Mailbox in den Finisher ein, um die Abdeck- isher an.
ung (B) zu installieren.
7.Inserire nel finitore i 2 ganci (9) posizionati 8.Installare il coperchio della piastra di mon-
sul coperchio della piastra di montaggio taggio posteriore (C) sul finitore nella stessa
anteriore (B) per la mailbox, per installare il maniera.
coperchio (B).
7.将邮箱的安装板前部盖板 (B) 的 2 个卡扣 8.按相同方法将安装板后部盖板 (C) 安装到装

(9) 插入到装订器中，以安装安装板前部盖板订器上。
(B)。
7.메일박스의 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 의 후크 (9) 2 8.같은 방식으로 부착판 커버 뒤 (C) 를 피니셔

곳을 피니셔에 삽입하고 부착판 커버 앞 (B) 에 장착합니다 .
을 장착합니다 .
7.メールボックスの取付板カバー前 (B) の 8.同様に取付板カバー後 (C) をフィニッ

フック (9)2 箇所をフィニッシャーに挿入シャーに取り付ける。
し、取付板カバー前 (B) を取り付ける。
5
10 11
9.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 10.Insert the power plug from the machine into
the highest. the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front and verify the machine operates normally.
and rear pins (10) into the round holes (11) at the front and rear of the mailbox.
9.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 10.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (10) dans les trous ment.
ronds (11) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres.
9.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 10.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (10) en los orificios máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
redondos (11) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
9.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 10.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (10) in die Rundlöcher (11) Betrieb zu prüfen.
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen.
9.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 10.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. accendere la macchina e controllare che
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- funzioni correttamente.
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (10) nei
fori rotondi (11) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
9.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 10.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电

按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (10) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (11) 源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
中来安装接纸盘。
9.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 10.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (10) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (11) 에 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
삽입합니다 . 니다 .
9. 排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 10.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し

排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (10) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (11) 込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
に挿入する。認する。
6
B
E (M4x12)
F
C
A D
E. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 2 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning

English
F. Tray name label (for users)........................ 1 materials from the parts supplied.
Supplied parts
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Front mounting plate cover........................ 1 B and C are not used.
C. Rear mounting plate cover ........................ 1
D. Copy eject bins .......................................... 7
E. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 2 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-

Français
F. Étiquette de nom de plateau sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
Pièces fournies (pour les utilisateurs) ................................. 1 pièces fournies.
A. Boîte à lettres ............................................ 1
B. Couvercle de la plaque de montage avant ..... 1
C. Couvercle de la plaque de montage arrière ... 1 B et C ne sont pas utilisés.
D. Case d’éjection de copies.......................... 7
E. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 2 Asegúrese de quitar todas las cintas y/o mate-

Español
F. Etiqueta de nombre de la bandeja rial amortiguador de las partes suministradas.
Partes suministradas (para usuarios)........................................... 1
A. Buzón de correo ........................................ 1
B. Cubierta de la placa de montaje frontal ..... 1
C. Cubierta de la placa de montaje trasera.... 1 B y C no se utilizan.
D. Bandejas de expulsión de copias .............. 7
E. Schraube M4 × 12 ..................................... 2 Stellen Sie sicher, dass sämtliche Klebebänder

Deutsch
F. Fachnamenaufkleber (für Benutzer) .......... 1 und/oder Polstermaterial von den gelieferten
Enthaltene Teile Teilen entfernt wurden.
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Vordere Abdeckung der Montageplatte..... 1 B und C werden nicht benötigt.
C. Hintere Abdeckung der Montageplatte ...... 1
D. Kopienausgabefächer................................ 7
E. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 2 Rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o i materiali di

Italiano
F. Etichetta di nome del vassoio protezione dalle parti fornite.
Parti fornite (per utenti) ................................................. 1
A. Mailbox ...................................................... 1
B. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio anteriore .. 1
C. Coperchio della piastra di montaggio posteriore . 1 B e C non sono utilizzati.
D. Scomparti di espulsione delle copie .......... 7
简体中文 E. M4×12 螺丝 .......................... 2 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭

F. 托盘名称标贴 ( 用户用 ) ............... 1 下。
附属品
A. 邮箱................................ 1
B. 支撑板前盖板........................ 1 不使用 B 和 C。
C. 支撑板后盖板........................ 1
D. 接纸盘.............................. 7
한국어 E. 나사 M4 × 12..................................... 2 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는

F. 트레이 명칭 씰 ( 사용자용 ) .................. 1 경우에는 반드시 제거하십시오 .
동봉품
A. 메일박스............................................ 1
B. 부착판커버 앞..................................... 1 B 와 C 는 사용되지 않습니다 .
C. 부착판커버 뒤..................................... 1
D. 배출핀............................................... 7
日本語 E. ビス M4×12 ...........................2 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合

F. トレイ名称シール（ユーザー用）.........1 は、
必ず取り外すこと。
同梱品
A. メールボックス....................... 1
B. 取付板カバー前....................... 1 B,C は使用しない。
C. 取付板カバー後....................... 1
D. 排出ビン............................. 7
7
Note Procedure
The Attachment Kit(AK-736) must be installed Before starting installation, be sure to turn the main power switch of the machine off, and unplug the
before the mailbox is installed. power plug from the wall outlet.
Remarque Procédure
L'Attachment Kit (AK-736) doit être installé Avant de commencer l'installation, s'assurer de mettre la machine hors tension et de débrancher la
avant d'installer la boîte à lettres. fiche d'alimentation de la prise murale.
Nota Procedimiento
El Attachment Kit (AK-736) se debe instalar Antes de iniciar la instalación, asegúrese de apagar el interruptor de encendido de la máquina y des-
antes de la instalación del buzón de correo. enchufar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared.
Hinweis Vorgehensweise
Das Attachment Kit (AK-736) muss vor der Bevor Sie mit der Installation beginnen überzeugen Sie sich, dass der Netzschalter des Geräts aus-
Installation der Mailbox installiert werden. geschaltet und das Stromkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist.
Nota Procedura
Installare l'Attachment Kit (AK-736) prima di Prima di iniziare l'installazione, spegnere la macchina e scollegare la spina dalla presa di corrente.
installare il vassoio mailbox.
注安装步骤
在安装邮箱前，请先安装连接组件（AK-736)。安装前务必关闭机器的主电源开关，并从墙壁插座拔下电源插头。
주 설치순서
메일박스를 설치하기 전에 부착 키트 (AK-736) 설치를 시작하기 전에 반드시 본체의 주 전원 스위치를 끄고 벽 콘센트에서 전원 플러그를 분리하십
를 설치해야 합니다 . 시오 .
注意取付手順
メールボックスを取付ける前にアタッチメント必ず機械本体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
機械本体の電源プラグを抜いてから作業すること。
キット (AK-736) の取付けをおこなうこと。
8
A 1 A
E(M4x12)
1
2
E(M4x12)
1.Insert the hooks (1) located at the front and rear of the bottom of the mailbox (A) into the notches 2.Secure the mailbox (A) using the two screws
(2) of the machine and attach the mailbox (A) to the machine. M4x12 (E).
Note
Lift the front and rear of the mailbox (A) lightly upward to make sure that no gap is made between
the mailbox (A) and the machine.
1.Insérer les crochets (1) situés à l'avant et à l'arrière du fond de la boîte à lettres (A) dans les enc- 2.Fixer la boîte à lettres (A) à l'aide de deux vis
oches (2) de la machine et fixer la boîte aux lettres (A) à la machine. M4x12 (E).
Remarque
Lever légèrement l'avant et l'arrière de la boîte à lettres (A) de sorte qu'il n'y ait aucun interstice
entre la boîte à lettres (A) et la machine.
1.Inserte los enganches (1) que se encuentran en la parte frontal y trasera de la parte inferior del 2.Fije el buzón de correo (A) con dos tornillos
buzón de correo (A) en las hendiduras (2) de la máquina y acople el buzón de correo (A) a la M4x12 (E).
máquina.
Nota
Levante ligeramente la parte frontal y trasera del buzón de correo (A) para asegurarse de que no
queda espacio entre el buzón de correo (A) y la máquina.
1.Führen Sie die Haken (1), die sich hinten und vorne an der Unterseite der Mailbox (A) befinden, 2.Sichern Sie die Mailbox (A) mit zwei
in die Aufnahmen (2) des Geräts ein und befestigen Sie die Mailbox (A) am Gerät. Schrauben M4x12 (E).
Hinweis
Heben Sie die Vorder- und Rückseite der Mailbox (A) ein wenig an, damit sich kein Spalt
zwischen der Mailbox (A) und dem Gerät bildet.
1.Inserire i ganci (1) posti sul fronte e sul retro della sezione inferiore della mailbox (A) negli incavi 2.Fissare la mailbox(A) utilizzando le due viti
(2) presenti sulla macchina e fissare la mailbox (A) sulla macchina. M4x12 (E).
Nota
Sollevare leggermente la parte anteriore e posteriore della mailbox (A) verso l’alto per accertarsi
che non vi sia dello spazio tra la mailbox (A) e la macchina.
1.将位于邮箱（A）底部前、后侧的挂钩（1）插入机器的凹槽（2），然后将邮箱（A）安装至机器。 2.使用两个螺丝 M4x12（E）固定邮箱（A）。

注
轻轻向上提升邮箱 (A) 的前后侧，确保邮箱 (A) 未处于悬浮状态。
1.메일박스 (A) 의 전후면 하단에 있는 후크 (1) 를 본체의 노치 (2) 에 삽입하여 메일박스 (A) 를 본 2.M4x12 나사 (E) 두 개를 사용하여 메일박스
체에 부착합니다 . (A) 를 고정합니다 .
주
메일박스 (A) 의 앞뒤를 각각 상방향으로 가볍게 들어 메일박스 (A) 가 떠 있지 않은 것을 확인합
니다 .
1.メールボックス (A) 下部の前後にあるフック (1) を機械本体の切り欠き (2) に挿入し、メール 2.ビス M4×12(E)2 本で、
メールボックス (A)
ボックス (A) を機械本体に取り付ける。を固定する。
注意
メールボックス (A) の前後をそれぞれ上方向に軽く持ち上げ、メールボックス (A) が浮かない
ことを確認する。
9
A
5 4
3.Remove the rear cover (3) of the mailbox 4.Remove the wire saddle (4).
(A). 5.Plug the connector (5) of the mailbox (A) into the connector (6) of the machine body.
6.Install the wire saddle (4) in the position as shown in the figure.
7.Reinstall the rear cover (3) of the mailbox (A).
3.Retirer le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à 4.Retirer le serre-câble (4).

lettres (A). 5.Brancher le connecteur (5) de la boîte à lettres (A) dans le connecteur (6) du corps de la
machine.
6.Installer le serre-câble (4) dans la position illustrée sur la figure.
7.Remonter le couvercle arrière (3) de la boîte à lettres (A).
3.Quite la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de 4.Retire la abrazadera del cable (4).
correo (A). 5.Enchufe el conector (5) del buzón de correo (A) al conector (6) del cuerpo de la máquina.
6.Instale la abrazadera del cable (4) en la posición que se muestra en la imagen.
7.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta posterior (3) del buzón de correo (A).
3.Entfernen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der 4.Entfernen Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4).
Mailbox (A). 5.Stecken Sie den Stecker (5) der Mailbox (A) in die Steckbuchse (6) des Gerätegehäuses.
6.Installieren Sie die Kabelbefestigung (4) an der im Bild gezeigten Position.
7.Bringen Sie die hintere Abdeckung (3) der Mailbox (A) wieder an.
3.Rimuovere il coperchio posteriore (3) della 4.Rimuovere l'unità sella (4).

mailbox (A). 5.Collegare il connettore (5) della mailbox (A) al connettore (6) del corpo macchina.
6.Installare l'unità sella (4) nella posizione indicata in figura.
7.Reinstallare il coperchio posteriore (3) della mailbox (A).
3.拆下邮箱（A）的后部盖板 (3)。 4.取下束线夹（4）。

5.将邮箱（A）的接插件（5）插入机器的接插件 (6)。
6.把束线夹 (4) 安装到图示位置。
7.重新安装邮箱（A）的后盖板（3）。
3.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 떼어냅니다 . 4.와이어 새들 (4) 을 분리합니다 .

5.메일박스 (A) 의 커넥터 (5) 를 본체의 커넥터 (6) 에 연결합니다 .
6.와이어 새들 (4) 을 그림에 표시된 위치에 설치합니다 .
7.메일박스 (A) 의 뒤커버 (3) 를 다시 장착합니다 .
3.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を取り 4.ワイヤーサドル (4) を外す。

外す。 5.メールボックス (A) のコネクター(5) を機械本体のコネクター (6) に接続する。
6.ワイヤーサドル (4) を図の位置に取り付ける。
7.メールボックス (A) の後カバー(3) を元通りに取り付ける。
10
Z
Y
102
102
8.Install the left cover (Y) in place. 9.Using the two screws (102) removed in step 2 in the installation guide
for the AK-736, install the right cover (Z).
*While pressing the right cover(Z) downwards, fix the right cover(J).
8.Monter le couvercle gauche (Y) en position. 9.À l’aide des deux vis (102) retirées à l’étape 2 du guide d’installation
pour l’AK-736, installer le capot droit (Z).
*Fixer le capot droit (Z) en le maintenant enfoncé vers le bas.
8.Instale la cubierta izquierda (Y) en la ubicación prevista. 9.Con los dos tornillos (102) que quitó en el paso 2 de la guía de insta-
lación para AK-736, instale la cubierta derecha (Z).
*A la vez que ejerce presión sobre la cubierta derecha (Z), fije la cubi-
erta derecha (Z).
8.Installieren Sie die linke Abdeckung (Y). 9.Mit den zwei Schrauben (102), die Sie in Schritt 2 der Installationsan-
leitung für das AK-736 entfernt haben, bringen Sie die rechte Abdeck-
ung (Z) wieder an.
*Drücken Sie die rechte Abdeckung (Z) leicht nach unten, während Sie
diese befestigen.
8.Installare il coperchio di sinistra (Y) in posizione. 9.Utilizzando le due viti (102) rimosse al punto 2 della procedura
descritta nella guida di installazione del kit AK-736, installare il coper-
chio destro (Z).
*Premere verso il basso il coperchio destro (Z) per fissarlo in
posizione.
8.将左盖板（Y）安装到位。 9.请用 AK-736 安装手册步骤 2 中取下的 2 颗螺丝（102）来安装右盖板

（Z)。
* 把右盖板（Z) 边向下按，边固定。
8.좌측 커버 (Y) 를 제자리에 장착합니다 . 9.AK-736 설치 설명서의 2 단계에서 분리한 나사 (102) 두 개를 사용하
여 우측 커버 (Z) 를 장착합니다 .
* 우측 커버 (Z) 를 아래쪽으로 누르는 동시에 우측 커버 (Z) 를 고정하
십시오 .
8.左カバー(Y) を取り付ける。 9.AK-736 設置手順書の手順 2 で外したビス (102)2 本で、右カバー(Z) を

取付ける。
* 右カバー(Z) を下方向に押さえながら、固定する。
11
8 7
101
10.Fit the seven copy eject bins (D) to the ejection section of the mailbox (A) from the lowest bin to 11.Close the paper conveying unit(101).
the highest. 12.Insert the power plug from the machine into
Press both ends of each copy eject bin (D) to bend it a little, then fit the bin by inserting the front the outlet, turn the main power switch on,
and rear pins (7) into the round holes (8) at the front and rear of the mailbox. and verify the machine operates normally.
10.Fixer les sept cases d’éjection de copies (D) sur la section d’éjection de la boîte à lettres (A), en 11.Fermer l'unité de transport du papier (101).
procédant de la case située tout en bas à celle située tout en haut. 12.Insérer la fiche d’alimentation de la machine
Appuyer sur les deux extrémités de chaque case d'éjection des copies (D) pour cintrer légère- dans la prise et mettre la machine sous ten-
ment cette pièce, puis monter la case en insérant les broches avant et arrière (7) dans les trous sion, puis vérifier qu'elle fonctionne correcte-
ronds (8) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la boîte à lettres. ment.
10.Presione ambos extremos de cada bandeja de expulsión de copias (D) para doblarlas un poco; 11.Cierre la unidad de transporte de
después, coloque la bandeja insertando los pasadores delantero y trasero (7) en los orificios papel(101).
redondos (8) en la parte frontal y posterior del buzón de correo. 12.Enchufe el cable de alimentación de la
máquina en la toma de corriente y encienda
el interruptor principal para comprobar que
la máquina funciona correctamente.
10.Setzen Sie die sieben Kopienausgabefächer (D) in die Ausgabeöffnungen der Mailbox (A) ein, 11.Schließen Sie die Papierführung (101).
beginnend vom untersten Fach zum höchsten. 12.Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des Geräts in
Drücken Sie beide Enden jedes Kopienausgabefachs (D) zusammen, um es etwas zu biegen. eine Steckdose und schalten Sie den
Setzen Sie das Fach ein, indem Sie die vorderen und hinteren Stifte (7) in die Rundlöcher (8) Hauptschalter des Geräts ein, um den
vorne und hinten an der Mailbox einsetzen. Betrieb zu prüfen.
10.Installare i sette scomparti di espulsione delle copie (D) nella sezione di espulsione della mailbox 11.Chiudere l'unità trasporto carta (101).
(A), iniziando dallo scomparto più in basso fino a quello più in alto. 12.Inserire la spina nella presa di corrente,
Premere le due estremità di ciascuno scomparto di espulsione delle copie (D) in modo da pie- accendere la macchina e controllare che
garlo leggermente, quindi installare lo scomparto inserendo i perni anteriore e posteriore (7) nei funzioni correttamente.
fori rotondi (8) presenti sul fronte e sul retro della mailbox.
10.从邮箱 (A) 的排出部下面起按顺序安装 7 个接纸盘 (D)。 11.关闭纸张传输单元（101）。

按住接纸盘 (D) 的左右两侧并使其稍稍下垂，通过将前后的销钉 (7) 插入邮箱前后的圆孔 (8) 中 12.将机器的电源插头插入插座，然后打开主电
来安装接纸盘。源开关并确认机器能否正常操作。
10.배출핀 (D) 7 개를 메일박스 (A) 의 배출부에 밑에서부터 순서대로 장착합니다 . 11.반송 유니트 (101) 를 닫습니다 .
배출핀 (D) 의 좌우를 밀어 조금 휘게해 앞뒤의 핀 (7) 을 메일박스의 앞뒤의 둥근 구멍 (8) 에 삽 12.기기본체의 전원 플러그를 콘센트에 꼽고 주
입합니다 . 전원 스위치를 ON 으로 해서 동작을 확인 합
니다 .
10.排出ビン (D)7 枚をメールボックス (A) の排出部に下から順番に取り付ける。 11.搬送ユニット (101) を閉じる。

排出ビン (D) の左右を押し少したわませ、前後のピン (7) をメールボックスの前後の丸穴 (8) 12.機械本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し
に挿入する。込み、
主電源スイッチを ON にして動作を確
認する。
12
MEMO
2012. 4
303N056730-01
BF-730
(Center Folding Unit)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
BF-730
G
C I P
B H
E
R
A O
D F K L M N
J Q
E. Front side cover ......................................... 1 L. M4 × 10 screw (black)................................ 2

English
F. Rear side cover.......................................... 1 M. M4 × 12 screw ........................................... 4
Supplied parts G. Output stock tray........................................ 1 N. Lock plate .................................................. 2
A. Center-Folding unit .................................... 1 H. Output tray ................................................. 1 O. Binding band.............................................. 1
B. Front rail .................................................... 1 I. Relay paper conveying unit ....................... 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Rear rail ..................................................... 1 J. Pin.............................................................. 1 Q. D7 label...................................................... 1
D. Output stopper........................................... 1 K. M4 × 8 screw ............................................11 R. Operation label .......................................... 1
E. Capot latéral avant..................................... 1 L. Vis M4 × 10 (noire) .................................... 2

Français
F. Capot latéral arrière ................................... 1 M. Vis M4 × 12................................................ 4
Pièces fournies G. Plateau de sortie du papier........................ 1 N. Plaque de verrouillage ............................... 2
A. Plieuse....................................................... 1 H. Plateau de sortie........................................ 1 O. Collier de fixation ....................................... 1
B. Glissière avant........................................... 1 I. Unité de transport du papier de relais........ 1 P. Guide ......................................................... 1
C. Glissière arrière ......................................... 1 J. Goupille...................................................... 1 Q. Étiquette D7 ............................................... 1
D. Butée de sortie .......................................... 1 K. Vis M4 × 8.................................................11 R. Étiquette de fonctionnement ...................... 1
E. Cubierta lateral frontal ............................... 1 L. Tornillo M4 × 10 (negro)............................. 2

Español
F. Cubierta lateral posterior ........................... 1 M. Tornillo M4 × 12 ......................................... 4
Partes suministradas G. Bandeja de recolección de papel de salida... 1 N. Placa de cierre........................................... 2
A. Unidad de plegado .................................... 1 H. Bandeja de salida ...................................... 1 O. Correa de sujeción..................................... 1
B. Carril frontal ............................................... 1 I. Unidad de transporte de papel por relevador ... 1 P. Guía ........................................................... 1
C. Carril posterior ........................................... 1 J. Pasador ..................................................... 1 Q. Etiqueta D7 ................................................ 1
D. Tope de salida ........................................... 1 K. Tornillo M4 × 8 ..........................................11 R. Etiqueta de funcionamiento ....................... 1
E. Vordere Seitenabdeckung ......................... 1 L. M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz)..................... 2

Deutsch
F. Hintere Seitenabdeckung .......................... 1 M. M4 × 12 Schraube ..................................... 4
Gelieferte Teile G. Ausgabestapelfach .................................... 1 N. Sperrplatte ................................................. 2
A. Mittenfalteinheit ......................................... 1 H. Ausgabefach.............................................. 1 O. Schellenband ............................................. 1
B. Vordere Schiene ........................................ 1 I. Eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit................. 1 P. Führung ..................................................... 1
C. Hintere Schiene ......................................... 1 J. Stift............................................................. 1 Q. D7 Aufkleber .............................................. 1
D. Ausgabeanschlag ...................................... 1 K. M4 × 8 Schraube ......................................11 R. Bedienungsaufkleber ................................. 1
E. Coperchio laterale anteriore ...................... 1 L. Vite M4 × 10 (nera) .................................... 2

Italiano
F. Coperchio laterale posteriore..................... 1 M. Vite M4 × 12............................................... 4
Parti di fornitura G. Vassoio di uscita stoccaggio ...................... 1 N. Piastra di bloccaggio.................................. 2
A. Unità di piegatura centrale......................... 1 H. Vassoio di uscita ........................................ 1 O. Fascetta di legatura ................................... 1
B. Rotaia anteriore ......................................... 1 I. Unità relay di trasporto carta...................... 1 P. Guida ......................................................... 1
C. Rotaia posteriore ....................................... 1 J. Perno ......................................................... 1 Q. Etichetta D7 ............................................... 1
D. Fermo di uscita .......................................... 1 K. Vite M4 × 8................................................11 R. Etichetta di operazione .............................. 1
简体中文 E. 前部侧盖板 ...........................1 L. M4×10 螺丝（黒）......................2

F. 后部侧盖板 ...........................1 M. M4×12 螺丝 ...........................4
附属品 G. 堆纸托盘 .............................1 N. 锁定板 ...............................2
A. 中缝装订－折页单元................... 1 H. 排纸托盘 .............................1 O. 束线带 ...............................1
B. 前部导轨............................. 1 I. 中间搬运单元 .........................1 P. 导板 .................................1
C. 后部导轨............................. 1 J. 销钉 .................................1 Q. D7 标签 ...............................1
D. 排纸挡板............................. 1 K. M4×8 螺丝 ...........................11 R. 操作标签 .............................1
한국어 E. 사이드 커버 앞.................................... 1 L. 나사 M4×10（흑）............................... 2

F. 사이드 커버 뒤.................................... 1 M. 나사 M4×12 ....................................... 4
동봉품 G. 배지 저장트레이.................................. 1 N. 잠금 플레이트..................................... 2
A. 접기 유니트........................................ 1 H. 배지 트레이........................................ 1 O. 결속 밴드........................................... 1
B. 레일 앞.............................................. 1 I. 중계 반송유니트.................................. 1 P. 가이드............................................... 1
C. 레일 뒤.............................................. 1 J. 핀..................................................... 1 Q. D7 라벨 ............................................. 1
D. 배지 스토퍼........................................ 1 K. 나사 M4×8....................................... 11 R. 조작라벨............................................ 1
日本語 E. サイドカバー前 .......................1 L. ビス M4×10（黒）.......................2

F. サイドカバー後 .......................1 M. ビス M4×12 ...........................4
同梱品 G. 排紙ストックトレイ ...................1 N. ロックプレート .......................2
A. 中折りユニット....................... 1 H. 排紙トレイ ...........................1 O. 結束バンド ...........................1
B. レール前............................. 1 I. 中継搬送ユニット .....................1 P. ガイド ...............................1
C. レール後............................. 1 J. ピン .................................1 Q. D7 ラベル .............................1
D. 排紙ストッパー....................... 1 K. ビス M4×8 ...........................11 R. 操作ラベル ...........................1
1
1
Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning Procedure 1.Open the upper front cover (1) of the docu-
material from supplied parts. Before installing the center-folding unit, turn the ment finisher.
MFP’s main power switch off and unplug the 2.Remove the screw (2) and open the lower
power cable from the power supply. front cover (3).
Install the document finisher, and then install the (NOTICE)
center-folding unit. Discard the screw (2) and do not fasten the
lower front cover (3).
Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé- Procédure 1.Ouvrir le couvercle avant supérieur (1) du
sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des Avant d’installer la plieuse mettre l’interrupteur retoucheur de document.
pièces fournies. d’alimentation principal du MFP hors tension et 2.Déposer la vis (2) et ouvrir le couvercle
débrancher le câble d’alimentation de la prise avant inférieur (3).
de courant. (AVIS)
Installer le finisseur de document, puis installer Jeter la vis (2) et ne pas fixer le capot inféri-
la plieuse. eur avant (3).
Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o Procedimiento 1.Abra la cubierta frontal superior (1) del final-
material amortiguador de las partes suministra- Antes de instalar la unidad de plegado, desco- izador de documentos.
das. necte el interruptor de alimentación principal de 2.Quite el tornillo (2) y abra la cubierta frontal
la MFP y desenchufe el cable de alimentación inferior (3).
de la toma de corriente. (AVISO)
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y Descarte el tornillo (2) y no ajuste la cubierta
luego instale la unidad de plegado. frontal inferior (3).
Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs- Verfahren 1.Öffnen Sie die obere vordere Abdeckung (1)
material vollständig von den mitgelieferten Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Mittenfalteinheit des Dokument-Finishers.
Teilen. beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der 2.Entfernen Sie die Schraube (2) und öffnen Sie
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. (HINWEIS)
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und Entsorgen Sie die Schraube (2) und befestigen
dann erst die Mittenfalteinheit an. Sie nicht die untere vordere Abdeckung (3).
Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il Procedura 1.Aprire il coperchio superiore anteriore (1)
materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite. Prima di installare l’unità di piegatura centrale, della finitrice di documenti.
assicurarsi che l’interruttore principale della 2.Rimuovere la vite (2) ed aprire il coperchio
fotocopiatrice sia spento e che il cavo di alimen- inferiore anteriore (3).
tazione non sia inserito nella presa. (NOTIFICA)
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere Eliminare le viti (2) e non fissare il coperchio
all’installazione dell’unità di piegatura centrale. inferiore anteriore (3).
如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭安装步骤 1.打开装订器的前部上盖板（1）。

下。安装中缝装订 — 折页单元前，请关闭 MFP 的主电 2.拆除 1 颗螺丝（2），打开前部下盖板（3）。
源开关并从电源拔下电源线。 ( 注意 )
安装装订器，然后安装中缝装订 — 折页单元。废除螺丝（2），前部下盖板（3）不需固定。
동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경 장착순서 1.문서 피니셔 앞 상커버 (1) 를 엽니다 .

우에는 반드시 제거할 것 . 중철 유니트를 설치할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 2.나사 (2) 1 개를 제거하고 앞 하커버 (3) 를
의 주전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원플러그를 엽니다 .
뺀 후 작업을 할 것 . ( 주의 )
문서 피니셔를 설치 후 , 중철 유니트를 설치 할 나사 (2) 는 폐기하고 전면 아래커버 (3) 는
것. 고정하지 않습니다 .
同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材がついている場合取付手順 1.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの前上カバー

は、
必ず取り外すこと。中折りユニットを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本 (1) を開く。
体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、
電源プラグを 2.ビス (2)1 本を外し、前下カバー(3) を開く。
抜いてから作業すること。（注意）
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを設置後、中折りビス (2) は廃棄とし、前下カバー(3) は固定
ユニットを設置すること。しない。
2
6
5
9
4
6
7 8
6
4 5 4 8
3.Remove the 2 screws (4) and remove the 4.Remove the 3 screws (6) and remove the 5.Remove 2 screws (8) and remove the lower
foot cover (5). lower rear cover (7). middle cover (9).
3.Déposer les 2 vis (4) puis le couvercle du 4.Déposer les 3 vis (6) puis le couvercle arri- 5.Déposer les 2 vis (8) et le couvercle intermé-
pied (5). ère inférieur (7). diaire inférieur (9).
3.Quite los 2 tornillos (4) y quite la cubierta de 4.Quite los 3 tornillos (6) y quite la cubierta 5.Quite los 2 tornillos (8) y quite la cubierta
la pata (5). posterior inferior (7). intermedia inferior (9).
3.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (4) und 4.Entfernen Sie die 3 Schrauben (6) und 5.Entfernen Sie die 2 Schrauben (8) und
nehmen Sie die Fußabdeckung (5) ab. nehmen Sie die untere hintere Abdeckung nehmen Sie die untere mittlere Abdeckung
(7) ab. (9) ab.
3.Rimuovere le 2 viti (4) e quindi rimuovere la 4.Rimuovere le 3 viti (6) e quindi rimuovere il 5.Rimuovere le 2 viti (8) e quindi rimuovere il
copertura del piede (5). coperchio inferiore posteriore (7). pannello centrale inferiore (9).
3.拆除 2 颗螺丝（4），拆下脚座盖板（5）。 4.拆除 3 颗螺丝（6），拆下后部下盖板（7）。 5.拆除 2 颗螺钉 (8)，拆下中部下盖板 (9)。
3.나사 (4) 2 개를 제거하고 , 풋커버 (5) 를 제 4.나사 (6) 3 개를 제거하고 , 뒤 하커버 (7) 를 5.나사 (8) 2 개를 제거하고 중하 커버 (9) 를
거합니다 . 제거합니다 . 떼어 냅니다 .
3.ビス (4)2 本を外し、フットカバー(5) を取 4.ビス (6)3 本を外し、後下カバー(7) を取り 5.ビス (8)2 本を外し、中下カバー(9) を取り
り外す。外す。外す。
3
12
M
10 M
C
13
K
N
B M
11 M
6.Install the lock plates (N) on the front and 7.Place the hook (11) of the front rail (B) on the 9.Install the rear rail (C) at the rear of the doc-
rear supports using an M4 × 8 screw (K) notch (10) at the front of the document fin- ument finisher using 2 M4 × 12 screws (M) in
each. isher, at the same time inserting the projec- the same way.
tion (13) on the front rail (B) in the hole (12)
in the document finisher.
8.Fix the front rail (B) using 2 M4 × 12 screws
(M).
6.Monter les plaques de verrouillage (N) sur 7.Placer le crochet (11) de la glissière avant 9.Monter la glissière arrière (C) au dos du
les supports avant et arrière en procédant à (B) dans l'encoche (10) à l'avant du retou- retoucheur de document en procédant de la
l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (K) dans les deux cheur de document tout en insérant la saillie même façon et à l'aide de 2 vis M4 × 12 (M).
cas. (13) de la glisière avant (B) dans le trou (12)
du retoucheur de document.
8.Fixer la glissière avant (B) à l'aide de 2 vis
M4 × 12 (M).
6.Instale las placas de cierre (N) en los 7.Coloque el gancho (11) del carril frontal (B) 9.Instale el carril posterior (C) en la parte pos-
soportes frontal y posterior usando un tor- en la muesca (10) de la parte frontal del final- terior del finalizador de documentos usando
nillo M4 × 8 (K) en cada uno. izador de documentos al mismo tiempo que 2 tornillos M4 × 12 (M) de la misma forma.
inserta el resalto (13) del carril frontal (B) en
el orificio (12) del finalizador de documentos.
8.Fije el carril frontal (B) usando 2 tornillos M4
× 12 (M).
6.Montieren Sie die Sperrplatten (N) an den 7. Setzen Sie den Haken (11) der vorderen Schiene 9.Montieren Sie die hintere Schiene (C) auf
vorderen und hinteren Stützen mit jeweils (B) in die Aussparung (10) vorne am Dokument- gleiche Weise mit 2 M4 × 12 Schrauben (M)
einer M4 × 8 Schraube (K). Finisher ein, und setzen Sie dabei auch den Vor- an der Rückseite des Dokument-Finishers.
sprung (13) an der vorderen Schiene (B) in die Öff-
nung (12) des Dokument-Finishers ein.
8. Befestigen Sie die vordere Schiene (B) mit den 2
M4 × 12 Schrauben (M).
6.Installare le piastre di bloccaggio (N) sui 7.Posizionare il gancio (11) della rotaia anteriore 9.Installare la rotaia posteriore (C) alla parte
supporti anteriore e posteriore utilizzando (B) sull'incavo (10) alla parte anteriore della fini- posteriore della finitrice di documenti utiliz-
una vite M4 × 8 (K) ciascuna. trice di documenti, contemporaneamente zando 2 viti M4 × 12 (M) alla stessa maniera.
inserire la la sporgenza (13) sulla rotaia ante-
riore (B) nel foro (12) nella finitrice di documenti.
8.Fissare la rotaia anteriore (B) utilizzando 2
viti M4 × 12 (M).
6.使用各 1 颗 M4×8(K) 螺钉将锁定板 (N) 安装 7.将前部导轨 (B) 的挂钩 (11) 嵌入装订器前部 9.按相同方法，使用 2 颗 M4×12(M) 螺钉将后
在前后的支柱上。的缺口 (10)，同时将前部导轨 (B) 的卡销部导轨 (C) 安装在装订器后部。
(13) 插入到装订器的孔 (12) 中。
8.使用 2 颗 M4×12(M) 螺钉来固定前部导轨
(B)。
6.잠금 플레이트 (N) 를 앞뒤 지주에 나사 7.문서 피니셔 앞의 이음부분 (10) 에 레일 앞 9.같은 방식으로 나사 M4×12(M) 2 개로 문서
M4×8(K) 각 1 개로 장착합니다 . (B) 의 후크 (11) 를 걸고 동시에 문서 피니셔 피니셔 뒤에 레일 뒤 (C) 를 장착합니다 .
구멍 (12) 에 레일 앞 (B) 의 보스 (13) 를 넣
습니다 .
8.나사 M4×12(M) 2 개로 레일 앞 (B) 을 고정
합니다 .
6.ロックプレート (N) を前後の支柱にビス 7.ドキュメントフィニッシャー前の切り欠き 9.同様に、ビス M4×12(M)2 本で、ドキュメント

M4×8(K) 各 1 本で取り付ける。 (10) にレール前 (B) のフック (11) を引っフィニッシャー後にレール後 (C) を取り付
かけ、同時にドキュメントフィニッシャーのける。
穴 (12) にレール前 (B) のボス (13) を入れ
る。
8.ビス M4×12(M)2 本でレール前 (B) を固定す
る。
4
17
14
A
18
15
16
10.Place the left rollers (14) at the front and rear of the center-folding unit (A) on the tracks (15) on the inner sides of the rails, and roll in the direction
shown. The middle rollers (16) will roll onto the rails.
11.Insert the center-folding unit (A) into the document finisher along the rails.
(NOTICE)
Insert without removing the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17). (The fixing tape (18) is removed at step 15)
10.Disposer les rouleaux gauche (14) à l'avant et à l'arrière de la plieuse (A) sur les voies (15) de côté interne des glissières et faire rouler dans la direc-
tion indiquée. Les rouleaux intermédiaires (16) vont se placer d'eux-mêmes sur les glissières.
11.Insérer la plieuse (A) dans le retoucheur de document le long des glissières.
(AVIS)
Insérer sans enlever la bande adhésive de fixation (18) pour le guide câble (17). (La bande adhésive de fixation (18) est enlevée à l'étape 15).
10.Coloque los rodillos izquierdos (14) en las partes frontal y posterior de la unidad de plegado (A) en las pistas (15) de los lados internos de los carriles
y hágalos rodar en la dirección de la ilustración. Los rodillos intermedios (16) rodarán sobre los carriles.
11.Inserte la unidad de plegado (A) en el finalizador de documentos a lo largo de los carriles.
(AVISO)
Inserte sin quitar la cinta de fijación (18) de la guía para el cable (17). (La cinta de fijación (18) se quita en el paso 15.)
10.Setzen Sie die linken Rollen (14) an der Vorderseite und Rückseite der Mittenfalteinheit (A) auf die Bahnen (15) an den Innenseiten der Schienen, und
rollen Sie sie in der dargestellten Richtung. Die mittleren Rollen (16) rollen nun auf die Schienen.
11.Schieben Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) entlang den Schienen in den Dokument-Finisher ein.
(HINWEIS)
Schieben Sie sie ein, ohne das Klebeband (18) für die Kabelführung (17) zu entfernen. (Das Klebeband (18) wird bei Schritt 15 entfernt.)
10.Posizionare i rulli di sinistra (14) alla parte anteriore e posteriore dell'unità di piegatura centrale (A) sulle piste (15) sui lati interni delle rotaie, e farli
scorrere nella direzione mostrata. I rulli intermedi (16) scorreranno sulle rotaie.
11.Inserire l'unità di piegatura centrale (A) nella finitrice di documenti lungo le rotaie.
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire senza rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17). (Il nastro di fissaggio (18) viene rimosso al punto 15)
10.将中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 前后的左侧滑轮 (14) 放在导轨内侧的转动部 (15) 上，并按箭头方向转动。将中间滑轮 (16) 插入到导轨上。

11.将中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 沿着导轨插入到装订器中。
( 注意 )
插入时不需剥除电线导板（17）的固定胶带（18）。（在步骤 15 时剥除固定胶带（18））
10.접기 유니트 (A) 의 앞뒤에 있는 좌측 코로 (14) 를 레일 내측에 있는 굴림부 (15) 에 얹고 화살표 방향으로 굴립니다 . 중간코로 (16) 가 레일에 삽입됩
니다 .
11.접기 유니트 (A) 를 레일에 붙여 문서 피니셔에 삽입합니다 .
( 주의 )
전선 가이드 (17) 의 고정 테이프 (18) 를 떼어 내지 않고 삽입할 것 . （고정 테이프 (18) 는 순서 15 에서 떼어 냅니다 .）
10.中折りユニット (A) の前後にある左コロ (14) を、レールより内側にある転がし部 (15) に乗せ、矢印方向に転がす。

中間コロ (16) がレールに挿入さ
れる。
11.中折りユニット (A) をレールに沿ってドキュメントフィニッシャーに挿入する。
（注意）
電線ガイド (17) の固定テープ (18) を剥がさずに挿入すること。
（固定テープ (18) は手順 15 で剥がす）
5
20
20
22
23 K
K
21 21
19 I
A
12.Release the lock lever (19) and pull out the 13.Align the holes (21) in the relay paper conveying unit (I) with the 2 projections (20) on the docu-
center-folding unit (A) to the left of the document finisher. Install so that the lip (22) on the top frame of the relay paper conveying unit rests on
ment finisher. the document finisher’s frame (23).
14.Install the relay paper conveying unit (I) using 4 M4 × 8 screws (K).
12.Libérer le levier de verrouillage (19) et sortir 13.Aligner les trous (21) de l'unité de transport de relais (I) avec les 2 saillies (20) du retoucheur de
la plieuse (A) par la gauche du retoucheur document. Procéder de sorte que la lèvre (22) du châssis supérieur de l'unité de transport de
de document. relais repose sur le châssis du retoucheur de document (23).
14.Installer l'unité de transport de relais (I) à l'aide de 4 vis M4 × 8 (K).
12.Libere la palanca de bloqueo (19) y extraiga 13.Alinee los orificios (21) de la unidad de transporte de papel (I) con los dos resaltos (20) del final-
la unidad de plegado (A) hacia la izquierda izador de documentos. Instale de forma tal que el reborde (22) del marco superior de la unidad
del finalizador de documentos. de transporte de papel apoye en el marco del finalizador de documentos (23).
14.Instale la unidad de transporte de papel por relevador (I) usando 4 tornillos M4 × 8 (K).
12.Lösen Sie den Verriegelungshebel (19) und 13.Richten Sie die Öffnungen (21) der eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit (I) auf die 2 Vorsprünge (20)
ziehen Sie die Mittenfalteinheit (A) zur linken des Dokument-Finishers aus. Montieren Sie so, dass die Lippe (22) am oberen Rahmen der
Seite des Dokument-Finishers heraus. eingesetzten Papierfördereinheit auf dem Rahmen des Dokument-Finishers (23) ruht.
14.Montieren Sie die eingesetzte Papierfördereinheit (I) mit 4 M4 × 8 Schrauben (K).
12.Rilasciare la leva di blocco (19) e quindi 13.Allineare i fori (21) nell'unità relay di trasporto carta (I) con le 2 sporgenze (20) sulla finitrice di
estrarre l'unità di piegatura centrale (A) alla documenti. Installare in modo che il bordo (22) sulla struttura superiore dell'unità relay di tra-
sinistra della finitrice di documenti. sporto carta rimanga sulla struttura (23) della finitrice di documenti.
14.Installare l'unità relay di trasporto carta (I) utilizzando 4 viti M4 × 8 (K).
12.解除锁定杆（19），将中缝装订 - 折页单元 13.将装订器的 2 处突出部 (20) 与中间搬运单元 (I) 的孔 (21) 对齐。将中间搬运单元上部框架的弯

（A）从文档整理器的左侧拉出。曲部 (22) 放在装订器的框架上 (23) 以进行安装。
14.使用 4 颗 M4×8(K) 螺钉来安装后中间搬运单元 (I)。
12.잠금레버 (19) 를 해제하고 중철 유니트 (A) 13.문서 피니셔의 돌기 (20) 2 개로 중계반송 유니트 (I) 의 구멍 (21) 을 맞춥니다 . 중계반송 유니트
를 문서 피니셔 좌측으로 이동시킵니다 . 상부 플레임의 구부러진 부분 (22) 이 문서 피니셔의 플레임 (23) 에 얹히게 장착합니다 .
14.나사 M4×8(K) 4 개로 중계반송 유니트 (I) 를 장착합니다 .
12.ロックレバー(19) を解除し、中折りユニッ 13.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (20)2 個に中継搬送ユニット (I) の穴 (21) を合わせる。中

ト (A) をドキュメントフィニッシャー左側継搬送ユニット上部フレームの折曲がり部 (22) がドキュメントフィニッシャーのフレーム
へ引き出す。 (23) に乗るように取り付ける。
14.ビス M4×8(K)4 本で、
中継搬送ユニット (I) を取り付ける。
6
J
25
17
17
24
15.Remove the fixing tape (18) for the wire guide (17) and insert the pin (J) into the wire guide (17), with the 2 projections (24) on either side of the frame
(25).
(NOTICE)
Insert the pin (J) to keep wires in the wire guide (17).
16.Screw the pin (J) into the document finisher to anchor the wire guide (17).
15.Enlever la bande adhésive de fixation (18) du guide câble (17) et insérer la goupille (J) dans le guide câble (17) avec les 2 saillies (24) de chaque côté
du bâti (25).
(AVIS)
Insérer la goupille (J) pour que les câbles demeurent dans le guide câble (17).
16.Visser la goupille (J) dans le retoucheur de document pour fixer le guide câble (17) en place.
15.Quite la cinta de fijación (18) de la guía para el cable (17) e inserte el pasador (J) en la guía para el cable (17) con los 2 resaltos (24) a cada lado del
marco (25).
(AVISO)
Inserte el pasador (J) para mantener los cables en la guía para el cable (17).
16.Atornille el pasador (J) en el finalizador de documentos para anclar la guía para el cable (17).
15.Entfernen Sie das Klebeband (18) für die Kabelführung (17) und stecken Sie die Rändelschraube (J) in die Kabelführung (17), wobei der Rahmen (25)
zwischen den 2 Vorsprüngen (24) liegen muss.
(HINWEIS)
Stecken Sie die Rändelschraube (J) ein, um die Kabel in der Kabelführung (17) zu halten.
16.Schrauben Sie die Rändelschraube (J) in den Dokument-Finisher, um die Kabelführung (17) zu verankern.
15.Rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio (18) per la guida cavi (17) e quindi inserire il perno (J) nella guida cavi (17), con le 2 sporgenze (24) su ciascun lato
della struttura (25).
(NOTIFICA)
Inserire il perno (J) per mantenere i cavi nella guida cavi (17).
16.Avvitare il perno (J) nella finitrice di documenti per ancorare la guida cavi (17).
15.剥除电线导板（17）的固定胶带（18），使框架（25）处于 2 个卡销（24）之间，将 1 个销子（J）从电线导板（17）上穿过。

( 注意 )
将销钉 (J) 穿过电线导板 (17) 时，注意避免电线露出电线导板 (17) 外。
16.将销钉 (J) 的螺纹部分安装到装订器上，以固定电线导板 (17)。
15.전선 가이드 (17) 의 고정 테이프 (18) 를 떼어 내고 보스 (24) 2 개의 사이에 프레임 (25) 이 들어 있는 상태에서 핀 (J) 1 개를 전선 가이드 (17) 에 통
과시킵니다 .
( 주의 )
핀 (J) 은 전선이 전선 가이드 (17) 에서 나오지 않도록 통하게 합니다 .
16.핀 (J) 의 나사부분을 문서 피니셔에 장착하고 전선 가이드 (17) 를 고정합니다 .
15.電線ガイド (17) の固定テープ (18) を剥がし、

ボス (24)2 本の間にフレーム (25) が入っている状態で、
ピン (J)1 本を電線ガイド (17) に通す。
（注意）
ピン (J) は電線が電線ガイド (17) から出ないように通す。
16.ピン (J) のネジ部分をドキュメントフィニッシャーに取り付け、電線ガイド (17) を固定する。
7
28 31
O 30
27
29
26 32
K
31
P
K
32 K
17.Install the ground wire (26) to the frame 19.Plug the 2 connectors (27) into the connec- 21.Align holes (32) at 2 locations in the guide
using an M4 × 8 screw (K). tors (28) on the document finisher. (P) with projections (31) on the document
18.Install the binding band (O) to the wires and 20.Plug the connector (29) into the connector finisher.
fit the band into the frame. (30) on the relay paper conveying unit (I). 22.Install the guide (P) on the document finisher
using 4 M4 × 8 screws (K).
17.Fixer le câble de terre (26) au châssis en 19.Enficher les 2 connecteurs (27) dans les 21.Aligner les trous (32) en 2 endroits du guide
procédant à l'aide d'une vis M4 × 8 (K). connecteurs (28) du retoucheur de docu- (P) avec les saillies (31) du retoucheur de
18.Monter le collier de fixation (O) sur les ment. document.
câbles et assujettir le collier au châssis. 20.Enficher le connecteur (29) dans le con- 22.Monter le guide (P) sur le retoucheur de doc-
necteur (30) de l'unité de transport de relais ument à l'aide de 4 vis M4 × 8 (K).
(I).
17.Instale el cable de conexión a tierra (26) en 19.Enchufe los 2 conectores (27) en los conec- 21.Alinee los orificios (32) de los 2 lugares de la
el marco usando un tornillo M4 × 8 (K). tores (28) del finalizador de documentos. guía (P) con los resaltos (31) del finalizador
18.Instale la correa de sujeción (O) en los 20.Enchufe el conector (29) en el conector (30) de documentos.
cables y coloque la correa en el marco. de la unidad de transporte de papel por rele- 22.Instale la guía (P) en el finalizador de docu-
vador (I). mentos usando 4 tornillos M4 × 8 (K).
17.Montieren Sie das Massekabel (26) mit einer 19.Verbinden Sie die 2 Steckverbinder (27) mit 21.Richten Sie die Öffnungen (32) an 2 Stellen
M4 × 8 Schraube (K) an den Rahmen. den Steckverbindern (28) des Dokument- in der Führung (P) auf die Vorsprünge (31)
18.Bringen Sie das Schellenband (O) an den Finishers. des Dokument-Finishers aus.
Kabeln an und setzen Sie das Band in den 20.Verbinden Sie den Steckverbinder (29) mit 22.Montieren Sie die Führung (P) mit 4 M4 × 8
Rahmen ein. dem Steckverbinder (30) der eingesetzten Schrauben (K) am Dokument-Finisher.
Papierfördereinheit (I).
17.Installare il cavo di terra (26) alla struttura 19.Inserire i 2 connettori (27) nei connettori (28) 21.Allineare i fori (32) alle 2 posizioni nella
utilizzando una vite M4 × 8 (K). sulla finitrice di documenti. guida (P) con le sporgenze (31) sulla finitrice
18.Installare la fascetta di legatura (O) ai cavi e 20.Inserire il connettore (29) nel connettore (30) di documenti.
quindi fissare la fascetta nella struttura. sull'unità relay di trasporto carta (I). 22.Installare la guida (P) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti utilizzando 4 viti M4 × 8 (K).
17.使用 M4×8(K) 螺钉将装接地线 (26) 安装到 19.将 2 个连接器 (27) 与装订器的连接器 (28) 21.将装订器的 2 处突出部 (31) 与导板 (P) 的孔
框架上。相连接。 (32) 对齐。
18.在电线上安装束线带 (O)，将束线带 (O) 嵌入 20.将连接器 (29) 与中间搬运单元 (H) 的连接器 22.使用 4 颗螺钉 M4×8(K) 将导板 (P) 安装到装
到框架上。 (30) 相连接。订器上。
17.나사 M4×8(K) 로 접지선 (26) 을 플레임에 19.커넥터 (27) 2 개를 문서 피니셔의 커넥터 21.문서 피니셔의 돌기 (31) 2 곳을 가이드 (P)
장착합니다 . (28) 에 접속합니다 . 의 구멍 (32) 에 맞춥니다 .
18.전선에 결속 밴드 (O) 를 장착하고 플레임에 20.커넥터 (29) 를 중계 유니트 (I) 의 커넥터 22.나사 M4×8(K) 4 개로 문서 피니셔에 가이드
결속 밴드 (O) 를 꽂습니다 . (30) 에 접속합니다 . (P) 를 장착합니다 .
17.ビス M4×8(K) でアース線 (26) をフレーム 19.コネクター(27)2 個をドキュメントフィ 21.ドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (31)2

に取り付ける。ニッシャーのコネクター(28) に接続する。箇所にガイド (P) の穴 (32) に合わせる。
18.電線に結束バンド (O) を取り付け、フレーム 20.コネクター(29) を中継搬送ユニット (I) の 22.ビス M4×8(K)4 本でドキュメントフィニッ
に結束バンド (O) をはめ込む。コネクター(30) に接続する。シャーにガイド (P) を取り付ける。
8
33
F
A 37
L
35
L 36
A
34
23.Open the eject cover (33). 25.Engage the projection (36) and hook (37) on the rear side cover (F)
24.Engage the projection (34) and hook (35) on the front side cover (E) with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the rear side
with the center-folding unit (A). Complete installation of the front side cover (F) using an M4 × 10 screw (black) (L).
cover (E) using an M4 × 10 screw (black) (L).
23.Ouvrir le capot d'éjection (33). 25.Engager la saillie (36) et le crochet (37) du capot latéral arrière (F)
24.Engager la saillie (34) et le crochet (35) du capot latéral avant (E) dans dans la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latéral arrière (F) à
la plieuse (A). Finaliser l'installation du capot latéral avant (E) à l'aide l'aide d'une vis M4 × 10 (noire) (L).
d'une vis M4 × 10 (noire) (L).
23.Abra la cubierta de expulsión (33). 25.Enganche el resalto (36) y el gancho (37) de la cubierta lateral poste-
24.Enganche el resalto (34) y el gancho (35) de la cubierta lateral frontal rior (F) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalación de la
(E) con la unidad de plegado (A). Complete la instalación de la cubierta cubierta lateral posterior (F) usando un tornillo M4 × 10 (negro) (L).
lateral frontal (E) usando un tornillo M4 × 10 (negro) (L).
23.Öffnen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33). 25.Hängen Sie den Vorsprung (36) und den Haken (37) der hinteren
24.Hängen Sie den Vorsprung (34) und den Haken (35) der vorderen Seitenabdeckung (F) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die
Seitenabdeckung (E) in die Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. Befestigen Sie die hintere Seitenabdeckung (F) mit einer M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz)
vordere Seitenabdeckung (E) mit einer M4 × 10 Schraube (schwarz) (L).
(L).
23.Aprire il coperchio di espulsione carta (33). 25.Innestare la sporgenza (36) e il gancio (37) sul coperchio laterale pos-
24.Innestare la sporgenza (34) e il gancio (35) sul coperchio laterale ante- teriore (F) con l'unità di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazi-
riore (E) con l'unità di piegatura centrale (A). Completare l'installazione one del coperchio laterale posteriore (F) utilizzando una vite M4 × 10
del coperchio laterale anteriore (E) utilizzando una vite M4 × 10 (nera) (nera) (L).
(L).
23.打开排纸盖板 (33)。 25.将后部侧盖板 (F) 的突出部 (36) 以及挂钩 (37) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页

24.将前部侧盖板 (E) 的突出部 (34) 以及挂钩 (35) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 中，使用 1 颗 M4×10（黒）(L) 螺钉来安装后部侧盖板 (F)。
单元 (A) 中，使用 1 颗 M4×10（黒）(L) 螺钉来安装前部侧盖板 (E)。
23.배출 커버 (33) 를 엽니다 . 25.사이드 커버 뒤 (F) 의 돌기 (36) 및 후크 (37) 를 접기 유니트 (A) 에 곶

24.사이드 커버 앞 (E) 의 돌기 (34) 및 후크 (35) 를 접기 유니트 (A) 에 꽂 습니다 . 나사 M4×10（흑）(L) 1 개로 사이드 커버 뒤 (F) 를 장착합니
습니다 . 나사 M4×10（흑）(L) 1 개로 사이드 커버 앞 (E) 을 장착합니 다.
다.
23.排出カバー(33) を開く。 25.サイドカバー後 (F) の突起 (36) およびフック (37) を、中折りユニッ

24.サイドカバー前 (E) の突起 (34) およびフック (35) を、
中折りユニット (A) にはめ込む。
ト (A) にはめ込む。ビス M4×10（黒）(L)1 本で、
サイドカバー後 (F) を取り付ける。
ビス M4×10（黒）(L)1 本で、サイドカバー前 (E) を取り付ける。
9
33
38
38
26.Insert the 2 pins (38) on the output tray (H) in the holes in the center-folding unit (A) to install the
tray.
27.Install the output stock tray (G) on the output tray (H).
28.Close the eject cover (33).
26.Insérer les 2 goupilles (38) du plateau de sortie (H) dans les trous de la plieuse (A) pour installer
le plateau.
27.Installer la butée de sortie du papier (G) sur le plateau de sortie (H).
28.Fermer le capot d'éjection (33).
26.Inserte los 2 pasadores (38) de la bandeja de salida (H) en los orificios de la unidad de plegado
(A) para instalar la bandeja.
27.Instale la bandeja de recolección de papel de salida (G) en la bandeja de salida (H).
28.Cierre la cubierta de expulsión (33).
26.Stecken Sie die 2 Rändelschrauben (38) des Ausgabefachs (H) in die Öffnungen der Mittenfal-
teinheit (A) ein, um das Fach zu installieren.
27.Bringen Sie das Ausgabestapelfach (G) am Ausgabefach (H) an.
28.Schließen Sie die Auswurfabdeckung (33).
26.Inserire i 2 perni (38) sul vassoio di uscita (H) nei fori sull'unità di piegatura centrale (A) per instal-
lare il vassoio.
27.Installare il vassoio di uscita stoccaggio (G) sul vassoio di uscita (H).
28.Chiudere il coperchio di esplusione carta (33).
26.将排纸托盘 (H) 的 2 根销钉 (38) 插入中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的孔中，以安装排纸托盘 (H)。

27.将堆纸托盘 (G) 安装到排纸托盘 (H) 上。
28.关闭排纸盖板 (33)。
26.배지트레이 (H) 의 핀 (38) 2 개를 접기 유니트 (A) 의 구멍에 넣고 배지 트레이 (H) 를 장착합니다

.
27.배지 저장 트레이 (G) 를 배지 트레이 (H) 에 장착합니다 .
28.배출커버 (33) 를 닫습니다 .
26.排紙トレイ (H) のピン (38)2 本を中折りユニット (A) の穴に入れ、

排紙トレイ (H) を取り付け
る。
27.排紙ストックトレイ (G) を排紙トレイ (H) に取り付ける。
28.排出カバー(33) を閉じる。
10
40 41
A
40
39
39 D
Q
29.Insert the 2 projections (39) on the back of the output stopper (D) in the portions circled on the 30.Adhere the D7 label (Q) at the location
center-folding unit (A). shown in the figure.
Fit the 3 hooks (40) on the output stopper (D) in the holes (41) in the center-folding unit (A).
29.Insérer les 2 saillies (39) au dos de la butée de sortie (D) dans les parties encerclées de la 30.Apposer l'étiquette D7 (Q) à l'endroit repéré
plieuse (A). sur la figure.
Assujettir les 3 crochets (40) de la butée de sortie (D) dans les trous (41) de la plieuse (A).
29.Inserte los 2 resaltos (39) de la parte posterior del tope de salida (D) en las porciones marcadas 30.Adhiera la etiqueta D7 (Q) en el lugar que se
con un círculo de la unidad de plegado (A). muestra en la ilustración.
Coloque los 3 ganchos (40) del tope de salida (D) en los orificios (41) de la unidad de plegado
(A).
29.Setzen Sie die 2 Vorsprünge (39) auf der Rückseite des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die mit Kreis 30.Kleben Sie den D7 Aufkleber (Q) an der
bezeichneten Positionen der Mittenfalteinheit (A) ein. abgebildeten Stelle an.
Setzen Sie die 3 Haken (40) des Ausgabeanschlags (D) in die Öffnungen (41) der Mittenfaltein-
heit (A) ein.
29.Inserire le 2 sporgenze (39) sulla parte posteriore del fermo di uscita (D) nelle porzioni cerchiate 30.Far aderire l'etichetta D7 (Q) alla posizione
sull'unità di piegatura centrale (A). mostrata nella figura.
Fissare i 3 ganci (40) sul fermo di uscita (D) nei fori (41) nell'unità di piegatura centrale (A).
29.将排纸挡板 (D) 内侧的 2 处突出部 (39) 插入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的圆框部。 30.在图示位置黏贴 D7 标签 (Q)。
将排纸挡板 (D) 的 3 个挂钩 (40) 嵌入到中缝装订－折页单元 (A) 的孔 (41) 中。
29. 배지 스토퍼 (D) 의 안쪽에 있는 돌기 (39) 2 곳을 접기 유니트 (A) 의에 삽입합니다 . 30.D7 라벨 (Q) 을 그림의 위치에 붙입니다 .
배지 스토퍼 (D) 의 후크 (40) 3 곳을 접기 유니트 (A) 의 구멍 (41) 에 끼웁니다 .
29.排紙ストッパー(D) の裏側にある突起 (39)2 箇所を中折ユニット (A) の丸枠部に挿入する。 30.D7 ラベル (Q) を図の位置に貼り付ける。
排紙ストッパー(D) のフック (40)3 箇所を中折りユニット (A) の穴 (41) にはめ込む。
11
R
31. Adhere the Operation label (R) at the location shown in the figure.
32.Reinstall the foot cover (5) and lower rear cover (7).
33.Close the lower front cover (3) and the upper front cover (1).
31.Apposer l'étiquette de fonctionnement (R) à l'endroit repéré sur la figure.

32.Reposer le couvercle du pied (5) et le couvercle arrière inférieur (7).
33.Fermer le capot inférieur avant (3) et le couvercle avant supérieur (1).
31.Adhiera la etiqueta de funcionamiento (R) en el lugar que se muestra en la ilustración.

32.Vuelva a instalar la cubierta de la pata (5) y la cubierta posterior inferior (7).
33.Cierre la cubierta frontal inferior (3) y la cubierta frontal superior (1).
31.Kleben Sie den Bedienungsaufkleber (R) an der abgebildeten Stelle an.

32.Bringen Sie die Fußabdeckung (5) und die untere hintere Abdeckung (7) wieder an.
33.Schließen Sie die untere vordere Abdeckung (3) und die obere vordere Abdeckung (1).
31.Far aderire l'etichetta di operazione (R) alla posizione mostrata nella figura.
32.Reinstallare la copertura del piede (5) e il coperchio inferiore posteriore (7).
33.Chiudere il coperchio inferiore anteriore (3) e il coperchio superiore anteriore (1).
31.在图示位置黏贴操作标签 (R)。
32.按原样安装脚座盖板 (5) 和后部下盖板 (7)。
33.关闭前部下盖板（3）和前部上盖板（1）。
31.조작 라벨 (R) 을 그림의 위치에 붙입니다 .

32.풋커버 (5) 및 뒤하 커버 (7) 를 원래대로 장착합니다 .
33.전면 아래커버 (3) 및 전면 윗커버 (1) 를 닫습니다 .
31.操作ラベル (R) を図の位置に貼り付ける。

32.フットカバー(5) および後下カバー(7) を元通りに取り付ける。
33.前下カバー(3) および前上カバー(1) を閉じる。
12
a a
Adjustment of centerfold-stapling position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Staple Pos.
Check the distance (a) from the stapling position to the center of the paper. 2.Adjust the values.
If the distance (a) is over the reference value, follow the procedure below 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
to adjust the position.
<Reference value (a)> ±2 mm
Réglage de la position d'agrafage des pages centrales dépliables 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Staple
Vérifier la distance (a) entre la position d'agrafage et le milieu de la feuille Pos.
de papier. Si cette distance (a) est supérieure à la valeur de référence, 2.Régler les valeurs.
régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (a)> ±2 mm
Ajuste de la posición de grapado de la unidad de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Staple
Compruebe la distancia (a) desde la posición de grapado con respecto al Pos.
centro del papel. Si dicha distancia (a) supera el valor de referencia, 2.Ajuste los valores.
realice el siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (a)> ±2 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfalt-Heftposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (a) zwischen der Heftposition und der Papier- Staple Pos.
mitte. Falls der Abstand (a) größer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die Position 2.Die Werte einstellen.
gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (a)> ±2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di cucitura dell’unità di piegatura cen- 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e Sta-
trale ple Pos.
Controllare la distanza (a) dalla posizione di spillatura al centro del foglio. 2.Regolare i valori.
Se la distanza (a) è superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la procedura 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
riportata sotto per regolare la posizione.
<Valore di riferimento (a)> ±2 mm
中缝装订位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Staple Pos。

检查从装订位置到纸张中心的距离 (a)。如果距离 (a) 超出标准值范围，按 2.调整设定值。
照下列步骤调节装订位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准值 (a) ＞ ±2mm
접기 스테이플 위치조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Staple Pos 를 선택합니

스테이플 위치에서 용지 중앙까지의 거리離 (a) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (a) 다.
가 기준치 외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (a) ＞ ±2mm 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
中とじステープル位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、

Booklet、
Staple Pos を選択す
ステープル位置から用紙センターまでの距離 (a) を確認する。距離 (a) がる。
基準値外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (a) ＞ ±2mm 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
13
b
Adjustment of center folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Booklet Pos.
Check the distance (b) from the edge of the paper to the center folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (b) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (b)>
A4, Letter: Length of paper × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Length of paper × 1/2 ±3 mm
Réglage de la position de pliage central 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Booklet
Vérifier la distance (b) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position de Pos.
pliage central. Si cette distance (b) est supérieure à la valeur de référence, 2.Régler les valeurs.
régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (b)>
A4, Letter : Longueur de la feuille × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longueur de la feuille × 1/2 ±3 mm
Ajuste de la posición de plegado 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Book-
Compruebe la distancia (b) desde el borde del papel a la posición de ple- let Pos.
gado. Si dicha distancia (b) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (b)>
A4, Letter: Longitud del papel × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Longitud del papel × 1/2 ±3 mm
Einstellung der Mittenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (b) zwischen der Papierkante und der Mit- Booklet Pos.
tenfaltposition. Falls der Abstand (b) größer als der Bezugswert ist, ist die 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (b)>
A4, Letter: Papierlänge × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Papierlänge × 1/2 ±3 mm
Regolazione della posizione centrale di piegatura 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (b) dal bordo della carta alla posizione centrale di Booklet Pos.
piegatura. Se la distanza (b) è superiore al valore di riferimento, seguire la 2.Regolare i valori.
procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (b)>
A4, Letter: Lunghezza carta × 1/2 ±2 mm
A3, Ledger, B4: Lunghezza carta × 1/2 ±3 mm
中缝折叠位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Booklet Pos。

检查从纸张头部到折叠位置的距离 (b)。如果距离 (b) 超出标准值范围，按 2.调整设定值。
照下列步骤调节折叠位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准值 (b) ＞
A4,Letter: 纸张长度 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 纸张长度 ×1/2 ± 3mm
접기 위치조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Booklet Pos 를 선택합니

용지 끝에서 접기 위치까지의 거리 (b) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (b) 가 기준치 다.
외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (b) ＞ 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
A4,Letter: 용지길이 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 용지길이 ×1/2 ± 3mm
中折り位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、

Booklet、Booklet Pos を選択す
用紙端から中折り位置までの距離 (b) を確認する。距離 (b) が基準値外のる。
場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (b) ＞ 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
A4,Letter: 用紙長 ×1/2 ± 2mm
A3,Ledger,B4: 用紙長 ×1/2 ± 3mm
14
c
Adjustment of tri-folding position 1.Set maintenance mode U246, select Booklet and Three Fold.
Check the distance (c) from the edge of the paper to the second folding 2.Adjust the values.
position. If the distance (c) is over the reference value, follow the proce- 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
dure below to adjust the position.
<Reference value (c)> 7.0 ±2 mm
Réglage de la position de triple pliage 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Booklet et Three
Vérifier la distance (c) entre le bord de la feuille de papier et la position du Fold.
deuxième pliage. Si cette distance (c) est supérieure à la valeur de 2.Régler les valeurs.
référence, régler la position en procédant de la manière suivante. 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
<Valeur de référence (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Ajuste de la posición de plegado tríptico 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Booklet y Three
Compruebe la distancia (c) desde el borde del papel a la segunda posición Fold.
de plegado. Si dicha distancia (c) supera el valor de referencia, realice el 2.Ajuste los valores.
siguiente procedimiento para ajustar la posición. 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
<Valor de referencia (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Einstellung der Dreilagenfaltposition 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Booklet und
Überprüfen Sie den Abstand (c) zwischen der Papierkante und der Three Fold.
zweiten Faltposition. Falls der Abstand (c) größer als der Bezugswert ist, 2.Die Werte einstellen.
ist die Position gemäß der nachstehenden Prozedur nachzustellen. 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
<Bezugswert (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
Regolazione della posizione di piegatura tripla 1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Booklet e
Controllare la distanza (c) dal bordo della carta alla posizione della sec- Three Fold.
onda piegatura. Se la distanza (c) è superiore al valore di riferimento, 2.Regolare i valori.
seguire la procedura riportata sotto per regolare la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
<Valore di riferimento (c)> 7,0 ±2 mm
三折位置调整 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Booklet、Three Fold。

检查从纸张头部到第 2 个折叠位置的距离 (c)。如果距离 (c) 超出标准值范 2.调整设定值。
围，按照下列步骤调节折叠位置。 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
＜标准 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm
두번 접기 위치 조정 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 을 세트하고 Booklet, Three Fold 를 선택합니

용지끝과 두번째 접히는 위치까지의 거리 (c) 를 확인합니다 . 거리 (c) 가 다.
기준치 외의 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정을 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
＜기준치 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
三折り位置調整 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、

Booklet、Three Fold を選択す
用紙端と二つ目の折り位置までの距離 (c) を確認する。距離 (c) が基準値る。
外の場合、次の手順で調整を行う。 2.設定値を調整する。
＜基準値 (c) ＞ 7.0±2mm 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
15
NOTICE
This accessory is for use only with the following Applicant's Listed Machine.
Machine: DF-790,DF-7110
AVIS
Cet accessoire est utilisable uniquement avec le copieur figurant dans la liste du demandeur suivant.
Modèle: DF-790,DF-7110
AVISO
Este accesorio es sólo para usar en las siguientes fotocopiadoras de la lista de solicitantes.
Modelo: DF-790,DF-7110
HINWEIS
Dieses Zubehör ist nur für den Einsatz mit der folgenden Antragstellerlisten-Kopiermaschine vorgesehen.
Modell: DF-790,DF-7110
NOTIFICA
Questo accessorio deve essere usato solo con le seguenti fotocopiatrici nella lista dell’applicante.
Modello: DF-790,DF-7110
注意
本产品适用于以下机型。
机型 : DF-790,DF-7110
주의
본 제품은 이하의 기종에 적용됩니다 .
기종： DF-790,DF-7110
注意
本製品は、以下の機種に適用します。
機種： DF-790,DF-7110
16
MEMO
2016. 3
303ND56710-02
PH-7 A/B/C/D
(Punch Unit)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PH-7A/PH-7B/PH-7C/PH-7D
B
C D E F
A
I K L
J M
H
E. Spring......................................................... 1 L. Large clamp (for DF-790/DF-791) ............. 1

English M. Ferrite core ................................................ 1
F. Punch PWB ............................................... 1
Supplied parts G. Waste hole punch box ............................... 1
A. Punch guide............................................... 1 Be sure to remove any tape and/or cushioning
H. M3 × 8 tap Tight S screw ........................... 3
B. Hole punch unit.......................................... 1 I. Label sheet ................................................ 1 material from supplied parts.
C. Motor unit................................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1
D. Stop ring .................................................... 1 K. Small clamp (for DF-770)........................... 1
E. Ressort ...................................................... 1 L. Grand collier (pour DF-790/DF-791) .......... 1

Français
F. PWB de la perforatrice............................... 1 M. Noyau de ferrite ......................................... 1
Pièces fournies G. Bac de récupération de la perforatrice....... 1
A. Guide de perforatrice................................. 1 H. Vis S taraudée M3 × 8 ............................... 3 Veillez à retirer les morceaux de bande adhé-
B. Perforatrice ................................................ 1 I. Feuillet d’étiquettes.................................... 1 sive et/ou les matériaux de rembourrage des
C. Moteur ....................................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1 pièces fournies.
D. Bague d'arrêt ............................................. 1 K. Petit collier (pour DF-770).......................... 1
E. Resorte ...................................................... 1 L. Sujetador grande (para DF-790/DF-791)... 1

Español
F. PWB de perforación................................... 1 M. Núcleo de ferrita......................................... 1
Partes suministradas G. Caja para desechos de la perforación ....... 1
A. Guía de perforación................................... 1 H. Tornillo de ajuste M3 × 8........................... 3 Asegúrese de despegar todas las cintas y/o
B. Perforadora................................................ 1 I. Hoja con etiqueta ...................................... 1 material amortiguador de las partes suministra-
C. Unidad motriz ............................................ 1 J. Película ...................................................... 1 das.
D. Anillo de tope............................................. 1 K. Sujetador pequeño (para DF-770) ............. 1
E. Feder ......................................................... 1 L. Große Klemme (für DF-790/DF-791) ......... 1

Deutsch
F. Locher-PWB .............................................. 1 M. Ferritkern ................................................... 1
Gelieferte Teile G. Lochungsabfallbehälter.............................. 1
A. Locherführung ........................................... 1 H. M3 × 8 Passstift-Verbundschrauben.......... 3 Entfernen Sie Klebeband und/oder Dämpfungs-
B. Lochereinheit ............................................. 1 I. Aufkleberbogen.......................................... 1 material vollständig von den mitgelieferten
C. Motoreinheit............................................... 1 J. Film ............................................................ 1 Teilen.
D. Anschlagring.............................................. 1 K. Kleine Klemme (für DF-770) ..................... 1
E. Molla .......................................................... 1 L. Morsetto grande (per DF-790/DF-791) ...... 1

Italiano
F. Scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione .... 1 M. Nucleo di ferrite.......................................... 1
Parti di fornitura G. Scarto perforazione ................................... 1
A. Guida perforazione .................................... 1 H. Viti con testa a croce S M3 × 8 .................. 3 Accertarsi di rimuovere tutti i nastri adesivi e/o il
B. Unità di perforazione ................................. 1 I. Foglio di etichette....................................... 1 materiale di imbottitura dalle parti fornite.
C. Unità motore .............................................. 1 J. Pellicola ..................................................... 1
D. Anello di bloccaggio................................... 1 K. Morsetto piccolo (per DF-770) ................... 1
简体中文 E. 弹簧 .................................1 K. 固定夹小（DF-770 用 ) ................1

F. 打孔单元电路板 .......................1 L. 固定夹大（DF-790/DF-791 用） .........1
附属品 G. 打孔纸屑盒 ...........................1 M. 磁环 .................................1
A. 打孔导向板........................... 1 H. M3 X 8 攻丝紧固型 S 螺丝 ..............3
B. 打孔单元............................. 1 I. 标签纸 ...............................1 如果附属品上带有固定胶带，缓冲材料时务必揭
C. 电机单元............................. 1 J. 胶片 .................................1 下。
D. 止动环............................... 1
한국어 E. 스프링............................................... 1 K. 클램프 소（DF-770 용）....................... 1

F. 펀치기판............................................ 1 L. 클램프 대（DF-790/DF-791 용）........... 1
동봉품 G. 펀치폐기박스...................................... 1 M. 페라이트 코어..................................... 1
A. 펀치가이드......................................... 1 H. 나사 M3×8 탭타이트 S......................... 3
B. 펀치유니트......................................... 1 I. 라벨 시트........................................... 1 동봉품에 고정 테이프 , 완충재가 붙어 있는 경
C. 모터유니트......................................... 1 J. 필름.................................................. 1 우에는 반드시 제거할 것 .
D. 스톱링............................................... 1
日本語 E. バネ .................................1 L. クランプ大

（DF-790/DF-791 用）..........1
F. パンチ基板 ...........................1 M. フェライトコア .......................1
同梱品 G. パンチくずボックス ...................1
A. パンチガイド......................... 1 H. ビス M3×8 タップタイト S .............3 同梱品に固定テープ、緩衝材が付いている場合
B. パンチユニット....................... 1 I. ラベルシート .........................1 は必ず取り外すこと。
C. モーターユニット..................... 1 J. フィルム .............................1
D. ストップリング....................... 1 K. クランプ小（DF-770 用）.................1
1
2 4
1
3
Procedure Removing the cover (DF-770) 2.Remove the 2 screws (3) and remove the
Before installing the hole punch unit, make sure If installing on the DF-790/DF-791, proceed to upper rear cover (4).
the MFP's main power switch is turned off and step 1 on page 3.
that its power cord is unplugged from the power 1.Remove the screw (1) and remove the small
outlet. rear cover (2).
Install the document finisher first and then install
the hole punch unit.
Procédure Dépose du couvercle (DF-770) 2.Déposer les 2 vis (3) et déposer le couvercle
Avant d’installer la perforatrice, s’assurer que Pour l'installation sur le modèle DF-790/DF-791, supérieur arrière (4).
l’interrupteur d’alimentation principal du MFP est passer à l'étape 1 de la page 3.
hors tension et que le câble d’alimentation est 1.Déposer la vis (1) et déposer le petit couver-
débranché de la prise secteur. cle arrière (2).
Installer d’abord le finisseur de document, puis
installer la perforatrice.
Procedimiento Extracción de la cubierta (DF-770) 2.Quite los 2 tornillos (3) y, después, quite la
Antes de instalar la perforadora, asegúrese de que Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790/DF-791, cubierta trasera superior (4).
el interruptor principal de la alimentación vaya al paso 1 de la página 3.
del MFP esté desconectado y de que el cable de ali-
1.Quite el tornillo (1) y, después, quite la cubi-
mentación esté desenchufado de la toma de corri-
ente de la pared. erta trasera pequeña (2).
Instale primero el finalizador de documentos y luego
instale la perforadora.
Verfahren Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-770) 2.Die 2 Schrauben (3) entfernen und die obere
Bevor Sie mit dem Einbau der Lochereinheit Zur Installation des DF-790/DF-791 weiterge- hintere Abdeckung (4) abnehmen.
beginnen, stellen Sie sicher, dass der hen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 3.
Hauptschalter des Kopierers ausgeschaltet und 1.Die Schraube (1) entfernen und die kleine
das Netzkabel aus der Steckdose gezogen ist. hintere Abdeckung (2) abnehmen.
Bringen Sie den Dokument-Finisher zuerst und
dann erst die Lochereinheit an.
Procedura Rimozione del coperchio (DF-770) 2.Rimuovere le 2 viti (3) e quindi rimuovere il
Prima di installate l'unità di perforazione, assicu- Se si installa sull'unità DF-790/DF-791, proce- pannello superiore posteriore (4).
rarsi che l'interruttore principale dell'MFP sia dere al passo 1 a pagina 3.
spento e che il cavo di alimentazione sia scolle- 1.Rimuovere la vite (1) e quindi rimuovere il
gato dalla presa di corrente. pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
Installare prima la finitrice e poi procedere
all’installazione dell’unità di perforazione.
安装步骤拆下盖板（DF-770 时） 2.拆除 2 颗螺丝 (3)，拆下后上部盖板 (4)。

安装打孔单元时，必须事先关闭 MFP 主机的主电安装到 DF-790/DF-791 上时，跳至 P3 的步骤 1。
源开关，并拔下电源插头后再进行作业。 1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (1)，拆下后部小盖板 (2)。
首先安装装订器，然后安装打孔单元。
설치순서 커버제거（DF-770 의 경우） 2.나사 (3) 2 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (4) 를

펀치유니트를 부착할 때에는 반드시 MFP 본체 DF-790/DF-791 에 장착하는 경우에는 P3 의 제거합니다 .
의 주 전원 스위치를 OFF 로 하고 전원플러그를 순서 1 로 진행합니다 .
뺀 다음 작업을 할 것 . 1.나사 (1) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (2) 를
문서 피니셔를 설치 후 , 펀치유니트를 설치 할 제거합니다 .
것.
取付手順カバーの取り外し（DF-770 の場合） 2.ビス (3)2 本を外し、後上カバー(4) を取り

パンチユニットを設置するときは、必ず MFP 本 DF-790/DF-791 に装着の場合は、P3 の手順 1 へ外す。
体の主電源スイッチを OFF にし、電源プラグを進む。
抜いてから作業すること。 1.ビス (1)1 本を外し、後小カバー(2) を取り
ドキュメントフィニッシャーを設置後、パンチ外す。
ユニットを設置すること。
2
6
10
7
5 7
7 9
Removing the cover (DF-790/DF-791) 2.Remove the 3 screws (7) and remove the Installing the hole punch unit
1.Remove the screw (5) and remove the small upper rear cover (8). 3.Remove the screw (9) and pull the guide
rear cover (6). (10) outwards.
Dépose du couvercle (DF-790/DF-791) 2.Déposer les 3 vis (7) et déposer le couvercle Installation de la perforatrice
1.Déposer la vis (5) et déposer le petit couver- supérieur arrière (8). 3.Déposer la vis (9) et tirer le guide (10) vers
cle arrière (6). l'extérieur.
Extracción de la cubierta (DF-790/DF-791) 2.Quite los 3 tornillos (7) y, después, quite la Instalación de la perforadora
1.Quite el tornillo (5) y, después, quite la cubi- cubierta trasera superior (8). 3.Quite el tornillo (9) y tire de la guía (10)
erta trasera pequeña (6). hacia fuera.
Entfernen der Abdeckung (DF-790/DF-791) 2.Die 3 Schrauben (7) entfernen und die obere Anbringen der Lochereinheit
1.Die Schraube (5) entfernen und die kleine hintere Abdeckung (8) abnehmen. 3.Die Schraube (9) entfernen und die Führung
hintere Abdeckung (6) abnehmen. (10) nach außen ziehen.
Rimozione del coperchio (DF-790/DF-791) 2.Rimuovere le 3 viti (7) e quindi rimuovere il Installare l’unità di perforazione
1.Rimuovere la vite (5) e quindi rimuovere il pannello superiore posteriore (8). 3.Rimuovere la vite (9) ed estrarre la guida
pannello posteriore piccolo (6). (10) verso l'esterno.
拆下盖板（DF-790/DF-791 时） 2.拆除 3 颗螺丝 (7)，拆下后上部盖板 (8)。安装打孔单元

1.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (5)，拆下后部小盖板 (6)。 3.拆除 1 颗螺丝 (9)，将导向板 (10) 向外拉
出。
커버제거（DF-790/DF-791 의 경우） 2.나사 (7) 3 개를 제거하고 뒷 상커버 (8) 를 펀치유니트 부착

1.나사 (5) 1 개를 제거하고 뒷 소커버 (6) 를 제거합니다 . 3.나사 (9) 1 개를 제거하고 가이드 (10) 을 앞
제거합니다 . 으로 끌어 당깁니다 .
カバーの取り外し（DF-790/DF-791 の場合） 2.ビス (7)3 本を外し、後上カバー(8) を取りパンチユニットの取り付け

1.ビス (5)1 本を外し、後小カバー(6) を取り外す。 3.ビス (9)1 本を外し、ガイド (10) を手前に引
外す。き出す。
3
38
J
4.After using alcohol to clean the shaded portion (38) of the motor shown for adhering the film (J), adhere the film.
4.Après avoir utilisé de l'alcool pour nettoyer la partie du moteur hachurée (38) sur laquelle le film (J) est apposé, coller ce film.
4.Después de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte sombreada (38) del motor mostrada en la ilustración para pegar la película (J), pegue la película.
4.Den in der Abbildung grau dargestellten Teil (38) des Motors zum Anbringen des Films (J) mit Alkohol reinigen und dann den Film anbringen.
4.Dopo aver usato l’alcool per pulire la parte ombreggiata (38) del motore, illustrata per l’adesione della pellicola (J), far aderire la pellicola.
4.用酒精清洁电机斜侧处（38）的粘贴位置后，粘贴胶片（J）。
4.모터 사선부（38）의 부착위치를 알코올 청소 후 , 필름（J）을 부착합니다 .
4.モーター斜線部（38）の貼り付け位置をアルコール清掃後、フィルム（J）
を貼り付ける。
4
12
B
11
5.Install the punch guide (A) so that the leading edge of the guide (11) is below the document fin- 6.Insert the hole punch unit (B) into the docu-
isher frame (12). ment finisher.
5.Monter le guide de la perforatrice (A) de sorte que le bord d'attaque du guide (11) se trouve sous 6.Insérer la perforatrice (B) dans le retoucheur
le bâti du retoucheur de document (12). de document.
5.Instale la guía de perforación (A) de forma tal que el borde delantero de la guía (11) quede 6.Inserte la perforadora (B) en el finalizador de
debajo de la carcasa del finalizador de documentos (12). documentos.
5.Die Locherführung (A) so einsetzen, dass die Vorderkante der Führung (11) unter dem Rahmen 6.Die Lochereinheit (B) in den Dokument-Fin-
(12) des Dokument-Finishers liegt. isher einsetzen.
5.Installare la guida perforazione (A) in modo che il bordo principale della guida (11) sia sotto il 6.Inserire l'unità di perforazione (B) nella fini-
telaio (12) della finitrice di documenti. trice di documenti.
5.将打孔导向板 (A) 的前端 (11) 安装在装订器的框架 (12) 的下部。 6.将打孔单元 (B) 插入到装订器中。
5.펀치가이드 (A) 의 끝 (11) 이 문서 피니셔의 프레임 (12) 밑으로 되도록 장착합니다 . 6.펀치유니트 (B) 를 문서 피니셔에 삽입합니
다.
5.パンチガイド (A) の先端 (11) がドキュメントフィニッシャーのフレーム (12) の下になるよう 6.パンチユニット (B) をドキュメントフィ
に取り付ける。ニッシャーに挿入する。
5
B
C
13 16
B
15
14
C
C
7.Raise the hole punch unit (B) slightly and fit the hook (13) on the motor unit (C) into the groove 8.Secure the motor unit (C) with the 2 screws
(14) in the document finisher. At the same time, insert the rod (15) on the motor unit (C) into the (H).
hole (16) in the hole punch unit (B).
7.Lever légèrement la perforatrice (B) et insérer le crochet (13) du moteur (C) dans la rainure (14) 8.Fixer le moteur (C) à l'aide de 2 vis (H).
du retoucheur de document. Insérer en même temps la tige (15) du moteur (C) dans le trou (16)
de la perforatrice (B).
7.Levante ligeramente la perforadora (B) y encaje el gancho (13) de la unidad motriz (C) en la 8.Asegure la unidad motriz (C) con los 2 tornil-
ranura (14) del finalizador de documentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte la varilla (15) de la unidad los (H).
motriz (C) en el orificio (16) de la perforadora (B).
7.Die Lochereinheit (B) leicht anheben und den Haken (13) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die Nut (14) 8.Die Motoreinheit (C) mit den 2 Schrauben
des Dokument-Finishers einsetzen. Dabei auch die Stange (15) an der Motoreinheit (C) in die (H) sichern.
Öffnung (16) der Lochereinheit (B) einstecken.
7.Sollevare leggermente l'unità di perforazione (B) ed inserire il gancio (13) sull'unità motore (C) 8.Fissare l'unità motore (C) con le 2 viti (H).
nella scanalatura (14) della finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire l'asta (15)
sull'unità motore (C) nel foro (16) dell'unità di perforazione (B).
7.稍稍抬起打孔单元 (B)，将电机单元 (C) 的卡扣 (13) 嵌入装订器的沟槽 (14) 内。与此同时，将电 8.使用 2 颗螺丝 (H) 来固定电机单元 (C)。
机单元 (C) 的轴 (15) 插入打孔单元 (B) 的孔 (16) 中。
7.펀치유니트 (B) 를 조금 들면서 모터유니트 (C) 후크 (13) 를 문서 피니셔의 구 (14) 에 꽂습니다 . 8.나사 (H) 2 개로 모터유니트 (C) 를 고정합니
이것과 동시에 모터유니트 (C) 의 축 (15) 을 펀치유니트 (B) 구멍 (16) 에 삽입합니다 . 다.
7.パンチユニット (B) を少し持ち上げながら、モーターユニット (C) のフック (13) をドキュメン 8.ビス (H)2 本で、
モーターユニット (C) を固
トフィニッシャーの溝 (14) にはめ込む。これと同時に、モーターユニット (C) の軸 (15) をパン定する。
チユニット (B) の穴 (16) に挿入する。
6
17
19
E 15 18
D
9.Fit the stop ring (D) over the motor unit rod 10.Run the hole punch unit wire (17) through
(15) and fit the spring (E) between the hole the motor unit edging (18).
punch unit and motor unit. 11.Plug the wire from the hole punch unit motor
into the connector on the motor unit (19).
9.Monter la bague d'arrêt (D) sur la tige du 10.Faire passer le câble de la perforatrice (17)
moteur (15) et insérer le ressort (E) entre la dans le passage de câbles du moteur (18)
perforatrice et le moteur. 11.Raccorder le câble du moteur de la perfora-
trice au connecteur du moteur (19).
9.Coloque el anillo de tope (D) sobre la varilla 10.Tienda el cable de la perforadora (17) a
de la unidad motriz (15) y coloque el resorte través de la pestaña de la unidad motriz
(E) entre la perforadora y la unidad motriz. (18).
11.Enchufe el cable del motor de la perforadora
al conector de la unidad motriz (19).
9.Den Anschlagring (D) auf die Stange (15) 10.Das Kabel (17) der Lochereinheit durch den
der Motoreinheit setzen und die Feder (E) Kantenschutz (18) der Motoreinheit führen.
zwischen Lochereinheit und Motoreinheit 11.Das Kabel vom Motor der Lochereinheit an
einsetzen. den Steckverbinder der Motoreinheit (19)
anschließen.
9.Inserire l'anello di bloccaggio (D) sull'asta 10.Far passare il cavo dell'unità di perforazione
(15) dell'unità motore ed inserire molla (E) (17) attraverso il bordo (18) dell'unità
tra l'unità di perforazione e l'unità motore. motore.
11.Collegare il cavo dal motore dell'unità di per-
forazione nel connettore sull'unità motore
(19).
9.将止动环 (D) 嵌入到电机单元的轴 (15) 上， 10.将打孔单元的电线 (17) 穿过电机单元的包边

在打孔单元与电机单元之间安装弹簧 (E)。孔 (18)。
11.将来自打孔单元的电机的电线与电机单元的
接插件 (19) 相连接。
9.모터유니트 축 (15) 에 스톱링 (D) 을 꽂고 펀 10.펀치유니트의 전선 (17) 을 모터유니트의 에

치유니트와 모터유니트 사이에 스프링 (E) 징 (18) 에 지나가게 합니다 .
을설치합니다 . 11.펀치유니트 모터에서의 전선을 모터유니트
커넥터 (19) 에 접속합니다 .
9.モーターユニットの軸 (15) にストップリン 10.パンチユニットの電線 (17) をモーターユ

グ (D) をはめ、パンチユニットとモーターユニットのエッジング (18) に通す。
ニットの間にバネ (E) を取り付ける。 11.パンチユニットのモーターからの電線を
モーターユニットのコネクター(19) に接続
する。
7
25
23
21 25
24
F F
20
20
22 H
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-770) 14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
If installing on the DF-790/DF-791, proceed to step 12 on page 12. nectors (25) on the punch PWB (F).
12.Fit the 2 hooks (20) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (21) in the document finisher. At the same
time, insert the projection (23) on the document finisher into the hole (22) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (24) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-770). 14.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
Pour une installation sur le modèle DF-790/DF-791, passer à l'étape 12 en page 12. connecteurs (25) de la PWB de la perfora-
12.Insérer les 2 crochets (20) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (21) du retoucheur trice (F).
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (23) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (22)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (24) à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-770) 14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
Si realiza la instalación en el DF-790/DF-791, vaya al paso 12 de la página 12. conectores (25) del PWB de perforación (F).
12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (20) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (21) del finalizador de docu-
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (23) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (22)
del PWB de perforación (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (24) y el PWB
de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-770) 14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
Zur Installation des DF-790/DF-791 weitergehen zu Schritt 12 auf Seite 12. verbinder (25) der Locher-PWB (F)
12.Die 2 Haken (20) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (21) am Dokument-Finisher einset- anschließen.
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (23) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (22) auf der Locher-
PWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (24) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-770) 14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
Se si installa sull'unità DF-790/DF-791, procedere al passo 12 a pagina 12. nei connettori (25) sulla scheda a circuiti
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (20) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (21) della stampati di perforazione (F).
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (23) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (22) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (24) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-770 时） 14.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的

安装到 DF-790/DF-791 上时，跳至 P12 的步骤 12。接插件 (25) 相连接。
12.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (20) 挂在装订器的缺口 (21) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔
(22) 卡入装订器的突出部 (23)。
13.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (24) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-770 의 경우） 14.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥

DF-790/DF-791 에 장착하는 경우에는 P12 의 순서 12 로 진행합니다 . 터 (25) 에 접속합니다 .
12.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (20) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (21) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍
(22) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (23) 에 넣습니다 .
13.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (24) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け（DF-770 の場合） 14.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板

DF-790/DF-791 に装着の場合は、P12 の手順 12 へ進む。 (F) のコネクター(25) に接続する。
12.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (20)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (21) に引っ掛け
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (22) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (23) に入れる。
13.ビス (H)1 本で、パンチユニットのアース線 (24) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
8
M
27
39
26
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 16.Fasten two wires which were connected in 17.Install the small clamp (K) on the finisher,
nectors (27) on the DF main PWB (26). step 15 with the clamp (39). then pass and fasten the wires from the
motor unit and hole punch unit.
18.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
15.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 16.Attacher les deux fils qui ont été connectés à 17.Monter le petit collier (K) sur le retoucheur
foratrice aux connecteurs (27) de la PWB l'étape 15 avec le collier (39). puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de
principale du DF (26). la perforatrice dans ce collier pour les fixer
en place.
18.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 16.Apriete los dos cables que conectó en el 17.Instale el sujetador pequeño (K) en el final-
foración a los conectores (27) del PWB prin- paso 15 con la abrazadera (39). izador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de
cipal del DF (26). la unidad motriz y la perforadora.
18.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 16.Befestigen Sie die beiden Kabel, die in 17.Die kleine Klemme (K) am Finisher anbrin-
verbinder (27) der DF-Haupt-PWB (26) Schritt 15 verbunden wurden, mit der gen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit
anschließen. Schelle (39). und der Lochereinheit hindurchführen und
befestigen.
18.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 16.Fissare i due cavi collegati al punto 15 con il 17.Installare il morsetto piccolo (K) sul finitore, e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (27) morsetto (39). quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità
sulla scheda principale PWB (26) della DF. motore e dall’unità di perforazione.
18.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
15.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 16.使用固定夹（39）来固定步骤 15 中连接的 2 17.把小固定夹（K）安装在装订器上，从电机单

(26) 的接插件 (27) 连接。根电线。元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固
定。
18.用磁环（M）套住导线。
15.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 16.순서 15 로 접속한 2 개의 전선을 클램프 17.클램프 소（K）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니

(26) 의 커넥터 (27) 에 접속합니다 . (39) 로 고정해 주십시오 . 트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키
고 고정합니다 .
18.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다 .
15.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 16.手順 15 で接続した 2 本の電線をクランプ 17.クランプ小（K）をフィニッシャーに取り付

(26) のコネクター(27) に接続する。 (39) で固定する。け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットから
の電線を通し、固定する。
18.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
9
28
19.Replace the upper rear cover (4) and small 20.Open the upper front cover (28) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (2).
19.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (4) et 20.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (28) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (2).
19.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 20.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (28) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(4) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (2).
19.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (4) und die kle- 20.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (2) wieder einsetzen.
19.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 20.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (28) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(4) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (2).
19.按原样安装后上部盖板 (4) 与后部小盖板 20.打开前上部盖板 (28)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。

(2)。
19.뒷 상커버 (4) 와 후 소커버 (2) 를 원래대로 20.앞 상커버 (28) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
19.後上カバー(4) と後小カバー(2) を元通り取 20.前上カバー(28) を開き、

パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
10
J( B )
B C J( C )
21.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the 22.Close the upper front cover (28).
locations shown in the illustration: B, C.
21.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet 22.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (28).
d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration : B, C.
21.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las 22.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (28).
etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican en la ilustración: B, C.
21.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber 22.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (28)
vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung angegebenen Stellen: B, C. schließen.
21.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) 22.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (28).
sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: B, C.
21.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：B、C。 22.关闭前上部盖板 (28)。
21.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：Ｂ，Ｃ . 22.앞 상커버 (28) 를 닫습니다 .
21.ラベルシート (J) 内の B、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。 22.前上カバー(28) を閉じる。
11
32
33 34
31 34
30
29
F
F
Installing the punch PWB and waste hole punch box (DF-790/DF-791) 14.Plug the 6 hole punch unit wires into the con-
12.Fit the 2 hooks (29) in the punch PWB (F) into the cut (30) in the document finisher. At the same nectors (34) on the punch PWB (F).
time, insert the projection (32) on the document finisher into the hole (31) in the punch PWB (F).
13.Using the screw (H), tighten the hole punch unit ground wire (33) and the punch PWB (F)
together.
Installation de la PWB de la perforatrice et du bac de récupération de la perforatrice (DF-790/ 14.Raccorder les 6 câbles de la perforatrice aux
DF-791). connecteurs (34) de la PWB de la perfora-
12.Insérer les 2 crochets (29) de la PWB de la perforatrice (F) dans la découpe (30) du retoucheur trice (F).
de document. Insérer en même temps la saillie (32) du retoucheur de document dans le trou (31)
de la PWB de la perforatrice (F).
13.Fixer le câble de terre de la perforatrice (33) à la PWB de la perforatrice (F) à l'aide d'une vis (H).
Instalación del PWB de perforación y la caja para desechos de la perforación (DF-790/DF-791) 14.Enchufe los 6 cables de la perforadora a los
12.Coloque los 2 ganchos (29) del PWB de perforación (F) en el corte (30) del finalizador de docu- conectores (34) del PWB de perforación (F).
mentos. Al mismo tiempo, inserte el resalto (32) del finalizador de documentos en el orificio (31)
del PWB de perforación (F).
13.Usando el tornillo (H), apriete juntos el cable de conexión a tierra de la perforadora (33) y el PWB
de perforación (F).
Installation der Locher-PWB und des Lochungsabfallbehälters (DF-790/DF-791) 14.Die 6 Kabel der Lochereinheit an die Steck-
12.Die 2 Haken (29) in der Locher-PWB (F) in die Aussparung (30) am Dokument-Finisher einset- verbinder (34) der Locher-PWB (F)
zen. Dabei auch den Vorsprung (32) am Dokument-Finisher in die Öffnung (31) auf der Locher- anschließen.
PWB (F) einsetzen.
13.Mit der Schraube (H) das Massekabel (33) der Lochereinheit an der Locher-PWB (F) festziehen.
Installazione della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione e dello scarto perforazione (DF-790/ 14.Collegare i 6 cavi dell'unità di perforazione
DF-791) nei connettori (34) sulla scheda a circuiti
12.Inserire i 2 ganci (29) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F) nell'intaglio (30) della stampati di perforazione (F).
finitrice di documenti. Contemporaneamente, inserire la sporgenza (32) sulla finitrice di docu-
menti nel foro (31) della scheda a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
13.Utilizzando la vite (H), stringere insieme il cavo di terra (33) dell'unità di perforazione e la scheda
a circuiti stampati di perforazione (F).
安装电路板与打孔纸屑盒（DF-790/DF-791 时） 14.将打孔单元的 6 根电线与打孔电路板 (F) 的

12.将打孔电路板 (F) 的 2 个卡扣 (29) 挂在装订器的缺口 (30) 上。同时，将打孔电路板 (F) 的孔接插件 (34) 相连接。
(31) 卡入装订器的突出部 (32)。
13.使用 1 颗螺丝 (H) 将打孔单元的接地线 (33) 与打孔电路板 (F) 一起固定。
기판과 펀치폐기박스의 부착（DF-790/DF-791 의 경우） 14.펀치유니트의 전선 6 선을 펀치기판 (F) 커넥

12.펀치기판 (F) 의 후크 (29) 2 곳을 문서 피니셔의 구멍 (30) 에 겁니다 . 동시에 펀치기판 (F) 구멍 터 (34) 에 접속합니다 .
(31) 을 문서 피니셔의 돌기 (32) 에 넣습니다 .
13.나사 (H) 1 개로 펀치유니트의 접지선 (33) 과 펀치기판 (F) 을 함게 조입니다 .
基板とパンチくずボックスの取り付け（DF-790/DF-791 の場合） 14.パンチユニットの電線 6 本を、パンチ基板

12.パンチ基板 (F) のフック (29)2 箇所をドキュメントフィニッシャーの切り欠き (30) に引っ掛け (F) のコネクター(34) に接続する。
る。同時に、パンチ基板 (F) の穴 (31) をドキュメントフィニッシャーの突起 (32) に入れる。
13.ビス (H)1 本で、
パンチユニットのアース線 (33) とパンチ基板 (F) を共締めする。
12
L
36
35
15.Plug the 2 punch PWB wires into the con- 16.Install the small clamp (L) on the finisher, then pass and fasten the wires from the motor unit and
nectors (36) on the DF main PWB (35). hole punch unit.
17.Attach the ferrite core (M) to the wire.
15.Raccorder les 2 câbles de la PWB de la per- 16.Installer le grand collier (L) sur le retoucheur puis faire passer les câbles du moteur et de la perfo-
foratrice aux connecteurs (36) de la PWB ratrice dans ce collier pour les fixer en place.
principale du DF (35). 17.Fixer le noyau en ferrite (M) au câble.
15.Enchufe los 2 cables del PWB de per- 16.Instale el sujetador grande (L) en el finalizador, después tienda y ajuste los cables de la unidad
foración a los conectores (36) del PWB prin- motriz y la perforadora.
cipal del DF (35). 17.Fije el núcleo de ferrita (M) al cable.
15.Die 2 Kabel der Locher-PWB an die Steck- 16.Die große Klemme (L) am Finisher anbringen, dann die Kabel von der Motoreinheit und der
verbinder (36) der DF-Haupt-PWB (35) Lochereinheit hindurchführen und befestigen.
anschließen. 17.Den Ferritkern (M) am Kabel befestigen.
15.Collegare i 2 cavi della scheda a circuiti 16.Installare il morsetto grante (L) sul finitore, e quindi passare e fissare i cavi dall’unità motore e
stampati di perforazione nei connettori (36) dall’unità di perforazione.
sulla scheda principale PWB (35) della DF. 17.Applicare il nucleo in ferrite (M) al cavo.
15.将打孔电路板的 2 根电线与 DF 主电路板 16.把大固定夹（L）安装在装订器上，从电机单元和打孔单元出来的导线穿过固定夹来固定。

(35) 的接插件 (36) 连接。 17.用磁环（M）套住导线。
15.펀치기판의 전선 2 선을 DF 주 회로기판 16.클램프 대（L）를 피니셔에 장착 , 모터 유니트와 펀치 유니트에서부터 전선을 통과시키고 고정합
(35) 의 커넥터 (36) 에 접속합니다 . 니다 .
17.페라이트 코어（M）를 전선으로 장착합니다 .
15.パンチ基板の電線 2 本を DF 主回路基板 16.クランプ大（L）をフィニッシャーに取り付け、モーターユニットとパンチユニットからの電線を

(35) のコネクター(36) に接続する。通し、
固定する。
17.フェライトコア（M）を電線に取り付ける。
13
37
18.Replace the upper rear cover (8) and small 19.Open the upper front cover (37) and insert the waste hole punch box (G).
rear cover (6).
18.Reposer le couvercle supérieur arrière (8) et 19.Ouvrir le couvercle supérieur avant (37) et insérer le bac de récupération de la perforatrice (G).
le petit couvercle arrière (6).
18.Vuelva a colocar la cubierta trasera superior 19.Abra la cubierta delantera superior (37) e inserte la caja para desechos de la perforación (G).
(8) y la cubierta trasera pequeña (6).
18.Die obere hintere Abdeckung (8) und die kle- 19.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) öffnen und den Lochungsabfallbehälter (G) einsetzen.
ine hintere Abdeckung (6) wieder einsetzen.
18.Ricollocare il pannello superiore posteriore 19.Aprire il pannello superiore anteriore (37) ed inserire lo scarto perforazione (G).
(8) e il pannello posteriore piccolo (6).
18.按原样安装后上部盖板 (8) 与后部小盖板 19.打开前上部盖板 (37)，插入打孔纸屑盒 (G)。

(6)。
18.뒷 상커버 (8) 와 후 소커버 (6) 를 원래대로 19.앞 상커버 (37) 를 열고 펀치폐기박스 (G) 를 삽입합니다 .
부착합니다 .
18.後上カバー(8) と後小カバー(6) を元通り取 19.前上カバー(37) を開き、

パンチくずボックス (G) を挿入する。
り付ける。
14
A
C
J( A )
J( C )
20.After cleaning each area with alcohol, adhere the following labels from the label sheet (J) at the locations shown in the illustration: A, C.
21.Close the upper front cover (37).
20.Après avoir nettoyé chaque zone à l’alcool, apposer les étiquettes suivantes du feuillet d’étiquettes (J) aux emplacements indiqués dans l’illustration :
A, C.
21.Fermer le couvercle supérieur avant (37).
20.Después de limpiar todas las zonas con alcohol, despegue de la hoja de etiquetas (J) las etiquetas siguientes, y péguelas en los sitios que se indican
en la ilustración: A, C.
21.Cierre la cubierta delantera superior (37).
20.Nachdem Sie alle Flächen mit Alkohol gereinigt haben, kleben Sie bitte die folgenden Aufkleber vom Aufkleberbogen (J) an die in der Abbildung
angegebenen Stellen: A, C.
21.Die obere vordere Abdeckung (37) schließen.
20.Dopo aver pulito ciascuna zona con alcol, applicare le seguenti etichette del foglio di etichette (J) sui punti mostrati nell’illustrazione: A, C.
21.Chiudere il pannello superiore anteriore (37).
20.用酒精清洁各区域后，请在如图所示位置粘贴从标签纸上（J）撕下的下列标签：A、C。
21.关闭前上部盖板 (37)。
20.라벨 시트 ( Ｊ ) 내의 하기 라벨을 일러스트의 위치에 알코올청소 후 붙입니다：A，Ｃ .

21.앞 상커버 (37) 를 닫습니다 .
20.ラベルシート (J) 内の A、
C をイラストの位置にアルコール清掃後貼り付ける。
21.前上カバー(37) を閉じる。
15
a b
[Adjusting the hole punch position] Adjusting the hole punch entry registration
1.Connect the MFP power plug to the wall out- 1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Regist.
let and turn the MFP main power switch on. 2.Adjust the values.
2.Make a test copy in punch mode. When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
3.If any off-centering is observed, follow the When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
procedure below to adjust the hole position. 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
[Réglage de la position des perforations] Réglage de l'enregistrement de l'entrée des perforations

1. Insérer la fiche d’alimentation du MFP dans la prise 1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Regist.
murale et mettre l’interrupteur principal du MFP 2.Régler les valeurs.
sous tension.
2. Effectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation. Si le papier est alimenté de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
3. Si les perforations sont décentrées, suivre la Si le papier est froissé exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
procédure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
perforation.
[Ajuste de la posición de perforación] Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforación

1. Conecte el enchufe del MFP en el receptáculo de 1.Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Regist.
pared y encienda el interruptor principal del MFP. 2.Ajuste los valores.
2. Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de per- Cuando el papel alimentado está torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuración.
foración. Cuando el papel se dobló copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
3. Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
abajo para ajustar la posición del agujero.
[Einstellen der Lochungsposition] Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung

1. Stecken Sie den Netzstecker des MFP in die 1.Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Regist.
Wandsteckdose und schalten Sie den MFP am 2.Die Werte einstellen.
Hauptschalter ein. Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
2. Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen. Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
3. Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.
[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione] Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione
1. Collegare la spina del cavo di alimentazione 1.Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Regist.
dell’MFP alla presa a muro della rete elettrica e 2.Regolare i valori.
accendere l’interruttore principale di alimentazione.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore
2. Eseguire una copia di prova in modalità di perfora-
zione. dell'impostazione.
3. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione. 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
［打孔位置的调节］打孔装入定位调节
1.将 MFP 主机上的电源插头插入电源插座中， 1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Regist。
打开主电源开关。 2.调整设定值。
2.在打孔模式下进行测试复印。纸张斜向搬运时的复印样本 (a)：调高设定值。
3.打孔位置有偏差时，按以下步骤进行调节。纸张作 Z 字折时的复印样本 (b)：调低设定值。
3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。
［펀치위치의 조정］ 펀치반입 레지스트 조정

1.MFP 본체 전원플러그를 콘센트에 꽂고 주 1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Regist 를 선택합니다 .
전원 스위치를 ON 으로 합니다 . 2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
2.펀치모드에서 시험복사를 합니다 . 용지가 경사로 반송되는 경우의 복사샘플 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
3.펀치위치가 벗어난 경우에는 다음 순서로 조 용지가 Z 꺾임이 있는 경의 복사샘플 (b)：설정치를 내립니다 .
정합니다 . 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .
［パンチ位置の調整］パンチ搬入レジスト調整
1.MFP 本体の電源プラグをコンセントに差し 1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Regist を選択する。
込み、主電源スイッチを ON にする。 2.設定値を調整する。
2.パンチモードでテストコピーを行う。用紙が斜めに搬送される場合コピーサンプル (a)：設定値を上げる。
3.パンチ位置がずれていた場合、次の手順で調用紙が Z 折れする場合コピーサンプル (b)：設定値を下げる。
整を行う。 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。
16
c
Adjusting the hole punch position feed 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Feed. <Reference value (c)>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: 13 mm; Inch specification: 9.5 mm
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
(c): Increase the setting value.
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value.
Réglage de la position du point de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Feed. <Valeur de référence (c)>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: 13 mm; Spécifications en pouces: 9,5 mm
Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
référence (c): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Ajuste de la alimentación de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Feed. <Valor de referencia (c)>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: 13 mm; en pulgadas: 9,5 mm
Si la posición de perforación está más cerca del borde que el valor de referencia
(c): Aumente el valor de configuración.
Si la posición de perforación está más alejada del borde que el valor de referen-
cia (c): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch Feed. <Bezugswert (c)>
2. Die Werte einstellen. Metrischer Abstand: 13 mm; Abstand in Zoll: 9,5 mm
Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern.
Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Feed. <Valore di riferimento (c)>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: 13 mm; Specificazione in pollici: 9,5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di mm
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置搬运调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。

1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Feed。＜基准值 (c) ＞
2.调整设定值。公制规格：13mm、英制规格：9.5mm
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 短时：调高设定值。
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 长时：调低设定值。
펀치위치 반송조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Feed 를 선택합 ＜기준치 (c) ＞
니다 . 센치사양：13mm, 인치사양：9.5mm
2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 짧은 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 긴 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
パンチ位置搬送調整 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。

1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Feed を選択す＜基準値 (c) ＞
る。センチ仕様：13mm、インチ仕様：9.5mm
2.設定値を調整する。
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より短い場合：設定値を上げる。
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より長い場合：設定値を下げる。
17
e f
d
f
Centering the hole punch position 3.Press the Start key to confirm the setting value.
1.Enter the maintenance mode U246, select Finisher and Punch Width. <Reference value>
2.Adjust the values. Metric specification: d = 80 mm ± 0.5, e = 40 mm ± 2
If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Decrease the Inch specification: d = 2.75 inch ± 0.5, e = 1.375 inch ± 2,
setting value. f = 4.25 inch ± 0.5
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine: Increase the
setting value.
Centrage de la position de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de Start pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner Finisher et Punch Width. <Valeur de référence>
2. Régler les valeurs. Spécifications métriques: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Diminuez la valeur de Spécifications en pouces: d = 2,75 pouces ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pouces ± 2,
réglage. f = 4.25 pouces ± 0,5
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrière de la machine: Augmentez la valeur
de réglage.
Centrado de la posición de perforación 3.Pulse la tecla de Start para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Entre en el modo de mantenimiento U246, seleccione Finisher y Punch Width. <Valor de referencia>
2. Ajuste los valores. Sistema métrico: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la máquina: En pulgadas: d = 2,75 pulgada ± 0,5, e = 1,375 pulgada ± 2,
Reduzca el valor de configuración. f = 4.25 ± 0,5 pulgada
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la
máquina: Aumente el valor de configuración.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der Start-Taste bestätigen.
1. Schalten Sie in den Wartungsmodus U246, wählen Sie Finisher und Punch <Bezugswert>
Width. Metrischer Abstand: d = 80 mm ± 0,5; e = 40 mm ± 2
2. Die Werte einstellen. Abstand in Zoll: d = 2,75 Zoll ± 0,5, e = 1,375 Zoll ± 2,
Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert verringern. f = 4.25 Zoll ± 0,5
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt: Den Einstellwert
erhöhen.
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione 3.Premere il tasto di Start per confermare il valore dell'impostazione.
1. Entrare in modalità manutenzione U246, selezionare Finisher e Punch Width. <Valore di riferimento>
2. Regolare i valori. Specificazione in unità metrica: d = 80 mm ± 0,5, e = 40 mm ± 2
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della Specificazione in pollici: d = 2,75 pollici ± 0.5, e = 1,375 pollici ± 2,
macchina: Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione. f = 4.25 pollici ± 0.5
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
macchina: Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
打孔位置中心调节 3.按 Start 键，以确定设定值。

1.设置维护模式 U246，选择 Finisher、Punch Width。＜基准值＞
2.调整设定值。公制规格：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
打孔位置向机器前部偏移时：调低设定值。英制规格：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
打孔位置向机器后部偏移时：调高设定值。
펀치위치 센터조정 3.시작키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 세트하고 Finisher, Punch Width 를 선택합 ＜기준치＞
니다 . 센치 사양：d=80mm±0.5, e=40mm±2
2.설정치를 조정합니다 . 인치사양：d=2.75inch±0.5, e=1.375inch±2, f=4.25inch±0.5
펀치구멍이 기기 앞측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 내립니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 뒷측으로 벗어난 경우：설정치를 높입니다 .
パンチ位置センター調整 3.スタートキーを押し、設定値を確定する。

1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、Finisher、
Punch Width を選択す＜基準値＞
る。センチ仕様：d=80mm±0.5、e=40mm±2
2.設定値を調整する。インチ仕様：d=2.75inch±0.5、e=1.375inch±2、f=4.25inch±0.5
パンチ穴の位置が機械前側にずれている場合：設定値を下げる。
パンチ穴の位置が機械後側にずれている場合：設定値を上げる。
18
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
2014. 8
303NK56711-03
PH-7100/7110/7120/
7130(Punch Unit)
Installation Guide
INSTALLATION GUIDE
安装手册
설치안내서
設置手順書
PH-7100/PH-7110/PH-7120/PH-7130
A D E F H(M4x8)
B(M3x8) C G I(M4x8)
DF-7100
ձ ղ
F
ճ մ
1
ն A
B(M3x8)
չ C
2
պ
ջ
ջ
ջ
ߒ
ߓ
ߔ ߕ
3
ջ
ߑ
4
ս
5
ց
H(M4x8)
H(M4x8)
6
द I(M4x8)
I(M4x8)
G
ध न
प
Proceed to step 1 on page 9.
Passer à l'étape 1 de la page 9.
Vaya al paso 1 de la página 9.
ON
Weitergehen zu Schritt 1 auf Seite 9.
Procedere al passo 1 a pagina 9.
䐣㠣 3Ⲵ↕僔 Ǆ
w`G㢌G㍐㉐GXG⦐G㫸䚽GU
3ࡢᡭ㡰࡬㐍ࡴࠋ
7
फ
B(M3x8)
C(M3x8)
8
English
[Adjusting the hole punch position]
1.Make a test copy in punch mode.
2.If any off-centering is observed, follow the procedure below to adjust the hole position.
(For the referrence value, refer to each adjustment content.)
Français
[Réglage de la position des perforations]
1.IEffectuer une copie d'essai en mode perforation.
2.Si les perforations sont décentrées, suivre la procédure ci-dessous pour ajuster la position de perforation.
(Pour la valeur de référence, se reporter à chaque contenu d'ajustement.)
Español
[Ajuste de la posición de perforación]
1.Haga una copia de prueba en el modo de perforación.
2.Si observa descentrado, siga el procedimiento de abajo para ajustar la posición del agujero.
(Para información sobre el valor de referencia, consulte el contenido de cada ajuste.)
Deutsch
[Einstellen der Lochungsposition]
1.Eine Testkopie im Lochungsmodus erstellen.
2.Falls eine außermittige Lochung erfolgte, ist die Lochungsposition wie folgend nachzustellen.
(Den Referenzwert finden Sie im jeweiligen Einstellungsabschnitt.)
Italiano
[Regolazione di posizione dei fori di perforazione]
1.Eseguire una copia di prova in modalità di perforazione.
2. Nel caso in cui non lo siano, eseguire la procedura indicata qui di seguito per regolarne la posizione.
(Per informazioni sul valore di riferimento vedere il contenuto di ogni regolazione.)
简体中文
［打孔位置的调节］
1.在打孔模式下进行测试复印。
2.打孔位置有偏差时，按以下步骤进行调节。
( 标准值请参照各调整内容。)
한국어
［펀치위치의 조정］
1.펀치모드에서 시험복사를 합니다 .
2.펀치위치가 벗어난 경우에는 다음 순서로 조정합니다 .
( 기준 값에 대해서는 각 조정 내용을 참조하십시오 .)
日本語
［パンチ位置の調整］
1.パンチモードでテストコピーを行う。
2.パンチ位置がずれていた場合、次の手順で調整を行う。
（基準値は、各調整内容を参照のこと。）
9
a b
Adjusting the hole punch entry registration

1.Set the maintenance mode U246 and select [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Adjust the values.
When the paper fed in skewed copy example (a): Increase the setting value.
When the paper crimped copy example (b): Decrease the setting value.
Amount of change per step: 0.25mm
Réglage de l'enregistrement de l'entrée des perforations

1.Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Régler les valeurs.
Si le papier est alimenté de travers exemple de copie (a): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si le papier est froissé exemple de copie (b): Diminuez la valeur de réglage.
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,25mm
Ajuste del registro de entrada de perforación

1.Configure el modo de mantenimiento U246 y seleccione [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Ajuste los valores.
Cuando el papel alimentado está torcido copia de muestra (a): Aumente el valor de configuración.
Cuando el papel se dobló copia de muestra (b): Reduzca el valor de configuración.
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,25mm
3.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración.
Einstellen der Lochungsregistrierung

1.Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U246 und wählen Sie [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2.Die Werte einstellen.
Wenn Papier verkantet eingezogen wird Kopiebeispiel (a): Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Wenn Papier verknittert wird Kopiebeispiel (b): Den Einstellwert verringern.
Änderung pro Schritt: 0,25mm
3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.
Regolazione del registro del foro di perforazione

1.Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246 e selezionare [Finisher] > [Punch Regist].
2. Regolare i valori.
Quando l'alimentazione della carta risulta obliqua esempio di copia (a): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione.
Quando la carta risulta increspata esempio di copia (b): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
Entità modifica per passo: 0,25mm
打孔装入定位调节
1.进入维修保养模式 U246，把 [Finisher] > [Punch Regist]。
2.调整设定值。
纸张斜向搬运时的复印样本 (a)：调高设定值。
纸张作 Z 字折时的复印样本 (b)：调低设定值。
펀치반입 레지스트 조정
1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 설정하고 [Finisher] > [Punch Regist] 를 선택합니다 .
2.설정치를 조정합니다 .
용지가 기울어져서 반송되는 경우의 복사샘플 (a)：설정치를 높입니다 .
용지가 Z 꺾임이 있는 경우 복사샘플 (b)：설정치를 내립니다 .
パンチ搬入レジスト調整
1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、[Finisher] > [Punch Regist] を選択する。
2.設定値を調整する。
用紙が斜めに搬送される場合コピーサンプル (a)：設定値を上げる。
用紙が Z 折れする場合コピーサンプル (b)：設定値を下げる。
10
c
Adjusting the hole punch position feed 3.Press the [Start] key to confirm the setting value.
1.Set the maintenance mode U246 and select [Finisher] > [Punch Feed]. 4.Perform a test copy.
2.Adjust the values.
5.Repeat the steps 1 to 4 until the hole punch position is within the refer-
If the punch hole position is closer to the edge than the reference value
ence.
(c): Increase the setting value.
<Reference value (c)>
If the punch hole position is further from the edge than the reference
value (c): Decrease the setting value. Metric specification: 13.0mm ±2mm
Amount of change per step: 0.5mm Inch specification: 9.5mm ±2mm (0.37” ± 0.08”)
Réglage de la position du point de perforation 3.Appuyer sur la touche de [Départ] pour confirmer la valeur de réglage.
1. Passer en mode maintenance U246, sélectionner [Finisher] > [Punch Feed]. 4.Effectuer une copie de test.
2. Régler les valeurs. 5.Répéter les étapes 1 à 4 jusqu'à ce que la position de perforation soit
Si la perforation est plus proche du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
dans la référence.
référence (c): Augmentez la valeur de réglage.
Si la perforation est plus loin du bord de la feuille que défini par la valeur de
<Valeur de référence (c)>
référence (c): Diminuez la valeur de réglage. Spécifications métriques: 13,0mm ±2mm
Changement par graduation d’échelle: 0,5mm Spécifications en pouces: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
Ajuste de la alimentación de la posición de perforación
3.Pulse la tecla de [Inicio] para confirmar el valor de configuración.
1. Configure el modo de mantenimiento U246 y seleccione [Finisher] > [Punch Feed].
2. Ajuste los valores.
5.Repita los pasos del 1 al 4 hasta que la posición de perforación de los
Si la posición de perforación está más cerca del borde que el valor de referencia
(c): Aumente el valor de configuración.
agujeros esté dentro de los valores de referencia.
Si la posición de perforación está más alejada del borde que el valor de referencia <Valor de referencia (c)>
(c): Reduzca el valor de configuración. Sistema métrico: 13,0mm ±2mm
Magnitud del cambio por incremento: 0,5mm En pulgadas: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
Einstellen des Transports der Lochungsposition 3.Den Einstellwert durch Drücken der [Start]-Taste bestätigen.
1. Aktivieren Sie den Wartungsmodus U246 und wählen Sie [Finisher] > [Punch 4.Eine Testkopie erstellen.
Feed]. 5.Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 4 solange, bis die Lochposition sich
2. Die Werte einstellen. innerhalb der Referenz befindet.
Falls die Lochungsposition näher an der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
<Bezugswert (c)>
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert erhöhen.
Falls die Lochungsposition ferner von der Kante liegt als der Bezugswert (c)
Metrischer Abstand: 13,0mm ±2mm
erlaubt: Den Einstellwert verringern. Änderung pro Schritt: 0,5 mm Abstand in Zoll: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
Regolazione spostamento di posizione dei fori di perforazione
1. Impostare la modalità manutenzione U246 e selezionare [Finisher] > [Punch
Feed]. 4.Eseguire una copia di prova.
2. Regolare i valori. 5.Ripetere i punti da 1 a 4 fino a portare la posizione di foratura
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più vicina al bordo rispetto al valore di all'interno del riferimento.
riferimento (c): Aumentare il valore dell'impostazione. <Valore di riferimento (c)>
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è più lontana dal bordo rispetto al valore di Specificazione in unità metrica: 13,0mm ±2mm
riferimento (c): Diminuire il valore dell'impostazione.
Specificazione in pollici: 9,5mm ±2mm (0,37” ± 0,08”)
打孔位置搬运调节 3.按 [ 开始 ] 键，以确定设定值。
1.进入维修保养模式 U246，把 [Finisher] > [Punch Feed]。 4.进行测试复印。
2.调整设定值。 5.重复步骤 1 ～ 4，直至打孔的孔的位置达到标准值。
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 短时：调高设定值。＜基准值 (c) ＞
打孔位置比基准值 (c) 长时：调低设定值。公制规格：13.0mm±2mm
设定值的一个调整单位变化量：0.5mm 英制规格：9.5mm±2mm(0.37”±0.08”)
펀치위치 반송조정 3.[ 복사 / 시작 ] 키를 누르고 설정치를 확인합니다 .

1.메인터넌스 모드 U246 를 설정하고 [Finisher] > [Punch Feed] 를 선 4.테스트 카피를 합니다 .
택합니다 . 5.펀치 구멍 위치가 기준 이내가 될 때까지 1 단계 ~ 4 단계를 반복 수행
2.설정치를 조정합니다 . 합니다 .
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 짧은 경우：설정치를 높입니다 . ＜기준치 (c) ＞
펀치구멍의 위치가 기준치 (c) 보다 긴 경우：설정치를 내립니다 . 센티사양：13.0mm ±2mm
1 스텝당 변화량：0.5mm 인치사양：9.5mm ±2mm (0.37”±0.08”)
パンチ位置搬送調整 3.[ スタート ] キーを押し、設定値を確定する。
1.メンテナンスモード U246 をセットし、
[Finisher] > [Punch Feed] を 4.テストコピーを行う。
選択する。 5.パンチ穴の位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 4 を繰り返す。
2.設定値を調整する。＜基準値 (c) ＞
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より短い場合：設定値を上げる。センチ仕様：13.0mm±2mm
パンチ穴の位置が基準値 (c) より長い場合：設定値を下げる。インチ仕様：9.5mm±2mm (0.37”±0.08”)
11
1
d
e
Centering the hole punch position 3. Repeat the steps 1 to 3 until the hole punch position is within the reference.
Adjust the position of the punch unit A. <Reference value (d) >
1.If the punch hole is too close to the front of the machine: Metric specification: d = 40.0mm ± 2mm,e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e:Unadjust-
Slide the punch unit A to the machine rear ( ). able)
Inch specification: d = 34.93mm ± 2mm (1.38” ± 0.08”),
If the punch hole is too close to the rear of the machine:
e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:Unadjustable)
Slide the punch unit A to the machine front ( ). 4. Retighten the screws (1).
2.Perform a test copy. * Proceed to step 26 on page 8.
Centrage de la position de perforation 3. Répéter les étapes 1 à 2 jusqu'à ce que la position de perforation soit dans
Régler la position de l’unité de perforation A. la référence.
<Valeur de référence (d) >
1.Si la perforation est trop proche de l'avant de la machine: Spécifications métriques: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm ,e=80.0mm±0.5mm(e:Ajuste-
Faire glisser l’unité de perforation A à l’arrière de la machine ( ). ment impossible)
Si la perforation est trop proche de l'arrière de la machine: Spécifications en pouces: d = 34,93 mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:Ajustement impossible)
Faire glisser l’unité de perforation A à l’avant de la machine ( ). 4. Resserrez les vis (1).
2.Effectuer une copie de test. * Passer à l'étape 26 de la page 8.
Centrado de la posición de perforación 3. Repita los pasos del 1 al 2 hasta que la posición de perforación de los aguje-
Ajuste la posición de la perforadora A. ros esté dentro de los valores de referencia.
1. Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca del frente de la máquina: <Valor de referencia (d) >
Sistema métrico: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm,e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e:No ajustable)
Deslice la perforadora A hacia la parte posterior de la máquina ( ). En pulgadas: d = 34,93mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
Si la perforación se encuentra demasiado cerca de la parte trasera de la máquina: e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:No ajustable)
Deslice la perforadora A hacia el frente de la máquina ( ). 4. Apriete de nuevo los tornillos (1).
2.Haga una copia de prueba. * Vaya al paso 26 de la página 8.
Zentrieren der Stanzlochposition 3. Wiederholen Sie die Schritte 1 bis 2 solange, bis die Lochposition sich inner-
halb der Referenz befindet.
Stellen Sie die Position der Lochereinheit A ein. <Bezugswert (d) >
1. Falls die Lochung zu nah an der Gerätefront liegt: Metrischer Abstand: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm, e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e:Nicht ein-
Schieben Sie die Lochereinheit A zur Geräterückseite ( ). stellbar)
Falls die Lochung zu weit weg von der Gerätefront liegt: Abstand in Zoll: d = 34,93 mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
Schieben Sie die Lochereinheit A zur Gerätevorderseite ( ). e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e:Nicht einstellbar)
2.Eine Testkopie erstellen. 4.Ziehen Sie die Schrauben (1) wieder fest.
* Weitergehen zu Schritt 26 auf Seite 8.
Centratura della posizione dei fori di perforazione 2.Eseguire una copia di prova.
Regolare la posizione dell'unità di perforazione A.
3. Ripetere i punti da 1 a 4 fino a portare la posizione di foratura all'interno del
1. Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte anteriore della riferimento.
macchina: Far scivolare l’unità di perforazione A verso il retro della <Valore di riferimento (d) >
Specificazione in unità metrica: d = 40,0mm ± 2mm, e=80.0mm±0.5mm
macchina ( ). (e:Non regolabile)
Se la posizione dei fori di perforazione è troppo vicina alla parte posteriore della
Specificazione in pollici: d =34,93 mm ± 2mm (1,38” ± 0,08”),
e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”)(e:Non regolabile)
macchina: Far scivolare l’unità di perforazione A verso la parte anteriore 4. Stringere di nuovo le viti (1).
* Procedere al passo 26 a pagina 8.
della macchina ( ).
打孔位置中心调节 3.重复步骤 1 ～ 2，直至打孔的孔的位置达到标准值。
调整打孔组件（A) 的位置。＜基准值 (d) ＞
1.打孔位置向机器前部偏移时：把打孔组件（A) 向机器后侧移动。( ) 公制规格：d=40.0mm±2mm , e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e: 不可调整 )
打孔位置向机器后部偏移时：把打孔组件（A) 向机器前侧移动。( ) 英制规格：d=34.93mm±2mm(1.38”±0.08”) ,
2.进行测试复印。 e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e: 不可调整 )
4.拧紧螺丝 (1)。
※ 跳至 P8 的步骤 26。
펀치위치 센터조정 3.펀치 구멍 위치가 기준 이내가 될 때까지 1 단계 ~ 2 단계를 반복 수행
펀치유니트 A 의 위치를 조정하세요 . 합니다 .
＜기준치 (d) ＞
1.펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 앞측으로 벗어난 경우：펀치유니트 A 를 기기
센티사양：d=40.0mm±2mm , e=80.0mm±0.5mm (e: 조정 불가 )
의 뒤쪽으로 밀어주세요 (. ) 인치사양：d=34.93mm±2mm(1.38”±0.08”) ,
펀치구멍의 위치가 기기 뒷측으로 벗어난 경우：펀치유니트 A 를 기기 e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”) (e: 조정 불가 )
의 앞쪽으로 당겨주세요 .( ) 4.나사 (1) 를 다시 조입니다 .
2.테스트 카피를 합니다 . ※ P8 의 순서 26 로 진행 .
パンチ位置センター調整 3.パンチ穴の位置が基準値内になるまで、手順 1 ～ 2 を繰り返す。

パンチユニット (A) の位置調整を行う。＜基準値 (d) ＞
1.パンチ穴が機械前側にずれている場合センチ仕様：d=40.0mm±2mm,e=80mm±0.5mm（e: 調整不可）
パンチユニット (A) を機械後側（）にずらす。インチ仕様：d=34.93mm±2mm(1.38”±0.08”),
パンチ穴が機械後側にずれている場合 e=69.85mm±0.5mm(2.75”±0.02”)（e: 調整不可）
パンチユニット (A) を機械前側（）にずらす。 4.ビス (1) を締め付ける。
2.テストコピーを行う。 ※P8 の手順 26 へ進む。
12
2016. 2
303RF56710-01
JS-7100
(Job separator)
Installation Guide
2016. 2
JS-7100 303RN56710-01
յ
ձ
ߑ ߓ
ߒ A
ߔ
մ
ն
A
շ
շ EN
EN Set
Setthe
themaintenance
maintenancemode
modeU211,
U211,and
andset
set[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
FR Passez
FR
Passezen
enmode
modemaintenance
maintenanceU211
U211etetparamétrer
paramétrer[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
ES Configure
ES
Configureelelmodo
modode
demantenimiento
mantenimientoU211
U211yyconfigure
configure[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On]
[On]. .
DE
DE Aktivieren
AktivierenSie
Sieden
denU-Parameter
U-ParameterU211
U211und
und[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
ITIT Accedere
Accederealalmodo
modomanutenzione
manutenzioneU211,
U211,eeselezionare
selezionare[Inner
[InnerJob
JobSeparator]
Separator]>>[On].
[On].
CN
CN 䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ
䘋‫ޕ‬㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ8ˈᢺ
8ˈᢺ>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@Ǆ
>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@Ǆ
KR
KR ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YXXG㡸G㉘㥉䚌ḔGpGqGzGeGv⪰G㉘㥉䚝⏼␘U
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|YXXG㡸G㉘㥉䚌ḔGpGqGzGeGv⪰G㉘㥉䚝⏼␘U
JP
JP ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ
࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ8
8ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@
ࢆࢭࢵࢺࡋࠊ>,QQHU-RE6HSDUDWRU@!>2Q@ࢆタᐃࡍࡿࠋ
ࢆタᐃࡍࡿࠋ
FAX System 12
(FAX Kit)
Installation Guide
2016. 2 1 2
303RK56710-01
FAX System 12
A C F J OFF
D G
1
2
3 GH
4 PR I
PQ S AB
5 RS C
JK
L
TU
V DE
TU F
OP V MN
O
ER
WX
WX
YZ
Y
H
OPT1
B E
I
100V 120V 230V 240V 110V 220V 220-240V

Japan North Europe Australia/ Taiwan China Asia/
America/ New Zea- Korea
Latin land
America A
A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
B 1 1 - 1 - 1 -
C 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
4 (For New Zealand model)
D - 1 1 1 1 1 1 B
(Modèle pour la Nouvelle-Zélande)
E - - - 1 - - - (Para el modelo Nuevo Zelandés)
F - - - - - 1 - (Für Neuseeland-Modell)
G - - - - - 1 - (Per il modello Nuova Zelanda)
ӵ䘲⭘Ҿᯠ㾯‫ޠ‬රਧ
H - - - - - 1 -
OG⎨㫼⣐☐G㇠㛅⬀GP
I - - - - 1 - - ࢽ࣮ࣗࢪ࣮ࣛࣥࢻ௙ᵝࡢࡳ
J - - - - - 1 - B
C
C
C
5 8
D
ABC DEF
1 ABC DEF
2 GHI JKL MNO

GHI JKL MNO
3 PRS TUV WXY
4 PQRS TUV WXYZ

PRS TUV WXY
5 OPER
ON
OPER
(Only when NK-7110/NK-7100 is installed) (Excluding 100 V models)

(Uniquement lors de l'installation de NK-7110/NK-7100) (Sauf sur les modèles 100 V)
(Solo si está instalada la unidad NK-7110/NK-7100) (A excepción de los modelos de 100 V)
(Nur wenn NK-7110/NK-7100 installiert ist) (Ausgenommen 100-V-Modelle)
9
(Solo quando è installato NK-7110/NK-7100) (Esclusi i modelli da 100 V)
ᖃ䇮㖞 1.1. ᰦ 9 㿴Ṭԕཆ Initialize the FAX circuit board. Inizializzare la scheda a circuiti FAX.
1.If the FAX PWBs were installed simultaneously to OPT1 and OPT2 (all Fax 1.Se sono state installate simultaneamente le schede FAX PWB su OPT1 e
OGurT^XXWVurT^XWWG㢨G㉘㾌═Gᷱ㟤⬀GPGOXWW}㇠㛅G㢨㞬P PWBs are initialized), perform the maintenance mode U600 to ini-tialize the OPT2 (tutte le schede FAX PWB sono inizializzate), eseguire il modo
FAX PWBs. manutenzione U600 per inizializzare le schede FAX PWB.
2.If the FAX circuit board has been added to OPT2 (to initialize the FAX ircuit 2.Se la scheda a circuiti è stata aggiunta all’OPT2 (per inzializzare la scheda a
board in OPT2) circuiti FAX nell’OPT2)
Initialize OPT2 by pressing [PORT2], and the [Start] key in this order in the Inizializzare OPT2 premendo [PORT2] e il tasto [Avvio] in questo ordine nel
6 maintenance mode U698 and executing the maintenance mode U600. If modo di manutenzione U698 ed eseguendo il modo di manutenzione U600.
[ALL] is selected in U698, both OPT1 and OPT2 are initialized. Se viene selezionato [ALL] nel modo U698, entrambi OPT1 e OPT2 sono
For details, see the service manual. inizializzati. Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d’istruzioni.
F I E
G Initialiser la carte à circuits FAX. Ֆⵕ⭫䐥ᶵⲺࡓခौ
1.Si les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax ont été installées en même temps que 1.ᖃᢺՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯ਼ᰦᆹ㻵ࡠ 237 ઼ 237 ᰦ˄‫ޘ‬䜘ⲴՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯࡍ࿻ॆ˅ˈᢗ
OPT1 et OPT2 (toutes les cartes de circuit imprimé du fax sont initialisées), 㹼㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8ˈࡍ࿻ॆՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯǄ
exécuter le mode maintenance U600 pour initialiser les cartes de circuit 2.൘ 237 к໎䇮ᰦ
imprimé du fax. 237 ⲴՐⵏ⭥䐟ᶯࡍ࿻ॆ
2.Si la carte à circuits FAX a été ajoutée à l’OPT2 (pour initialiser la carte à ਚ䘋㹼 237 ࡍ࿻ॆᰦˈ൘㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8 ⣦ᘱлˈ᤹亪ᒿ᤹л>3257@ǃ
circuits FAX dans l’OPT2) >ᔰ࿻@䭞ˈᢗ㹼㔤‫⁑ޫ؍؞‬ᔿ 8Ǆ൘ 8 ⣦ᘱл䇮ᇊ > $//@ᰦˈՊ֯ 237
Initialiser l’OPT2 en appuyant sur [PORT2] et la touche [Départ] dans cet ઼ 237 ൷ࡍ࿻ॆǄᴹ‫ޣ‬䈖㓶ؑ᚟ˈ䈧৲㿱㔤‫؞‬᡻޼Ǆ
H ordre en mode de maintenance U698, et exécuter le mode de maintenance
U600. Si [ALL] est sélectionné dans U698, l’OPT1 et l’OPT2de détails, se
reporter au manuel d’entretien.
For Taiwan model For New Zealand model
For China model
Inicialice la tarjeta de circuitos FAX. mhG 䟀⦐ὤ䑄㢌G 㸼ὤ䞈
1.Si se instalaron FAX PWB simultáneamente a OPT1 y OPT2 (se ini-cializan 1.vw{X ḰGvw{Y 㜄GmhG䟀⦐ὤ䑄㡸G┍㐐㜄G㉘㾌䚐Gᷱ㟤 O ⯜☔GmhG
todos los FAX PWB), ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar 䟀⦐ὤ䑄㢨G㸼ὤ䞈╜ PSG⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|]WW 㡸G㍌䚽䚌㜠GmhG䟀⦐ὤ䑄㡸G
los FAX PWB. 㸼ὤ䞈䚝⏼␘ U
2.Si la tarjeta de circuitos de FAX se agregó a OPT2 (para inicializar la tarjeta
7 (When installing the Multiport) de circuitos de FAX en OPT2)
2.vw{Y 㜄G㫑㉘䚐Gᷱ㟤 Ovw{Y 㢌Gmh ὤ䑄㡸G㸼ὤ䞈 P
⮈㢬䉤≀㏘⯜☐G|]`_ 㜄㉐Gwvy{YSG㐐㣅䇘G㍐㡰⦐G⌸⪹⏼␘ UG
Inicialice el OPT2 presionando [PORT2] y la tecla de [Inicio] en ese orden en ⮈㢬䉤≀㏘G⯜☐G|]WW 㡸G㐘䚽䚌ḔGmhG䟀⦐ὤ䑄㡸G㸼ὤ䞈䚝⏼␘ U|]`_
(En cas d'installation de la deuxième ligne de fax) el modo de mantenimiento U698 y ejecutando el modo de mantenimiento 㜄㉐Ghss㡸G㉘㥉䚌⮨Gvw{X ḰGvw{YG㛅㯱㡸G㸼ὤ䞈䚌ὤG⚀ⱬ㜄G㨰㢌䚔Gᶷ U
U600. Si se selecciona [ALL] en U698, se inicializan ambos OPT1 y OPT2. ㇵ㉬⏈G㉐⽸㏘G⬘⎨㛰㡸G㵬㦤䚔Gᶷ U
(Al instalar la segunda línea de fax) Para más detalles, lea el manual de servicio.
(Wenn Sie eine zweite Fax-Karte installieren)

Initialisieren der FAX-Leiterplatte. )$;ᇶᯈࡢึᮇ໬
1.Falls die FAX-Karten gleichzeitig in OPT1 und OPT2 installiert werden (alle 237 ࡜ 237 ࡟ )$; ᇶᯈࢆྠ᫬࡟タ⨨ࡋࡓሙྜ ࡍ࡭࡚ࡢ )$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬
(Quando si installa la seconda linea Fax) FAX-Karten werden initialisiert), führen Sie den Wartungsmodus U600 aus, ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ)$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬ࡍࡿࠋ
um die FAX-Karten zu initialisieren. 237 ࡟ቑタࡋࡓሙྜ 237 ࡢ )$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬
ᆹ㻵Ҷཊ࣏㜭ㄟਓ 2.Wenn die FAX-Leiterplatte zu OPT2 hinzugefügt worden ist (um die ࣓ࣥࢸࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࡛>3257@ࠊ>ࢫࢱ࣮ࢺ@࣮࢟ࡢ㡰࡟ᢲࡍࠋ࣓ࣥࢸ
OPT2 FAX-Leit-erplatte in OPT2 zu in7itialisieren) ࢼࣥࢫ࣮ࣔࢻ 8 ࢆᐇ⾜ࡋࠊ)$; ᇶᯈࢆึᮇ໬ࡍࡿࠋ8 ࡛>$//@ࢆタᐃ
O⭴䐤䔠䏬⪰G㉘㾌䚌⏈Gᷱ㟤P OPT2 initialisieren. Dazu [PORT2] und die [Start]-Taste im Wartungsmodus ࡍࡿ࡜ 237 ࡜ 237 ୧᪉ࢆึᮇ໬ࡍࡿࡢ࡛ὀពࡍࡿࡇ࡜ࠋヲ⣽ࡣࢧ࣮ࣅࢫ࣐
A U698 in dieser Reihenfolge drücken und den Wartungsmodus U600 ࢽࣗ࢔ࣝࢆཧ↷ࡢࡇ࡜ࠋ
࣐ࣝࢳ࣏࣮ࢺࢆタ⨨ࡍࡿሙྜ ausführen. Wenn [ALL] in U698 gewählt wird, werden OPT1 und OPT2
initialisiert. Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung.
D E G I
1
2
G
3
H
I
P
4
A
S
B
P
5
C
Q
R
JK
S
L
T
U
D
V
E
T
F
U
M
V
N
O
O
P
E
W
R
X
Y
W
X
F H J
Y
Z
C
STATO DI AGGIORNAMENTO
UPDATING STATUS
DATA PAGINE AGGIORNATE PAGINE CODICE

DATE UPDATED PAGES PAGES CODE
11/2016 1a EDIZIONE - 1st EDITION 1649 Y118230-9

d-Copia4000MF-5000MF-6000MF - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

d-Copia4000MF-5000MF-6000MF - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

d-Copia4000MF-5000MF-6000MF - Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

0XOWLIXFWLRQ'LJLWDO&RSLHU

Copyright © 2016 Olivetti

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BAT-

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE

Notation of products in the manual

Product name Print speed

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

Y118230-9 1-1 Service Manual

Power source 230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz 7.2 A

*1: Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

Service Manual 1-2 Y118230-9

Y118230-9 1-3 Service Manual

Service Manual 1-4 Y118230-9

Y118230-9 1-5 Service Manual

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.

(5-2) Paper Feeder (500-sheet × 2)

Dimension (W × D × H) 600 × 665 × 323.2 mm / 23.27" × 20.36" × 39.58"

Service Manual 1-6 Y118230-9

(5-4) Side Feeder (3,500-sheet)

Dimension (W × D × H) 351 × 585 × 469 mm / 23.27" × 20.36" × 39.58"

(5-5) Inner finisher

Y118230-9 1-7 Service Manual

(5-7) 1,000-Sheet Finisher

Service Manual 1-8 Y118230-9

Dimensions 607.2 × 668.5 × 1,061.3 mm / 23.27" × 20.36" × 39.58"

(5-9) Punch Unit (For 1,000-Sheet/4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Y118230-9 1-9 Service Manual

(5-11) Folding Unit (For 4,000-Sheet Finisher)

Service Manual 1-10 Y118230-9

(5-13) Banner Tray

Y118230-9 1-11 Service Manual

Network FAX functions

Service Manual 1-12 Y118230-9

Y118230-9 1-13 Service Manual

1. Document Processor 13. Original Width Guides

Service Manual 1-14 Y118230-9

22. Paper Length Guide 26. Multi Purpose Tray

Y118230-9 1-15 Service Manual

1. Option Interface Slot 5. Toner Container (Black)

Service Manual 1-16 Y118230-9

1. Tray 1 to 7 (tray 1 is the top tray) 7. Cassette 4

Y118230-9 1-17 Service Manual

1. LINE Connector (L2)

2. LINE Connector (L1)

3. TEL Connector (T1)

Service Manual 1-18 Y118230-9

1. [Home] key: Displays the Home screen.

Y118230-9 1-19 Service Manual

 %)  3)  3)

Service Manual 1-20 Y118230-9

 1.1.  '7 %  )$;6\VWHP  &DUG

Y118230-9 1-21 Service Manual

(1-2) MT-730(B) "Mailbox"

%) 3) 3)

1.1. '7 % )$;6\VWHP &DUG

: : Not used in this model.